Comcolor x1 Tech Manual

Maintenance
Chapter 1. Maintenance Notes
Contents
[ Handling of Lithium Battery ].............................................................. 1-2

!! WARNING !!......................................................................................... 1-3
1.Precautions.........................................................................1-5
1-1.General precautions.................................................................... 1-5
1-3.Other precautions for inspection and maintenance..................... 1-7
1-4.Sensors....................................................................................... 1-8
2.Tools....................................................................................1-9
2-1.List of general tools..................................................................... 1-9
2-2.List of special tools for servicing ComColor.............................. 1-10
3.Printer setup procedure...................................................1-15
3-1.Confirmations to be performed during printer setup.................. 1-15
3-2.Setup Wizard............................................................................. 1-15
[ 1-1 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

Maintenance
CAUTION
[ Handling of Lithium Battery ]
- Never fail to follow the following instructions when you discard the used lithium battery.
1. Never let the battery short-circuited.

If the (+) and (-) terminals contact each other or metal materials, the battery will be
short-circuited.
If the batteries are collected and stored inorderly or one upon another, the above-
mentioned case will occur.
- DANGER -
If the battery is short-circuited, it will heat up and may in some cases explode into fire.
2. Never heat up the battery.

- DANGER -
If you heat the battery up to more than 100 degrees Celsius or put it into the fire, it may
burn dangerously or explode.
3. Never disassemble the battery or press it into deformation.

- DANGER -
If you disassemble the battery, the gas pouring out of the inside may hurt your throat or
the negative lithium may heat up into fire.
If the battery is pressed into deformation, the liquid inside may leak out of the sealed
part or the battery may be short-circuited inside an explode.
4. Never fail to keep the battery out of reach of children.

If you put the battery within reach of children, they may swallow it down.
Should they swallow the battery, immediately consult the doctor.
[ Replacement of the Lithium Battery ]
1. The lithium battery must be replaced by a trained and authorized service technician.
2. The battery must be replaced only with the same or equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer.
3. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer instructions.
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
This product may contain certain substances which are restricted when disposed.
Therefore, be sure to consult your contracted service dealer.

Maintenance
!! WARNING !!
Important Safety Precautions
(1) Always disconnect electrical supply before placing hands in the machine.
1) To avoid injuries:
Be sure to disconnect the electrical power before disassembling, assembling, or when
making adjustments on the machine.
2) Protection of the machine:
Make sure to turn OFF the power to the machine before plugging or unplugging the main
power cord, electrical connectors, or when connecting a Meter.
(2) Discharge the Capacitors on the Power Supply Unit before servicing the machine.
1) To avoid electrical shock:
The capacitor (condenser) on the Power Supply Unit is still charged with electricity even
after the machine power is turned OFF and the machine power cord disconnected from the
power source.
Before servicing the machine, make sure to press the Sub Power Key, after switching OFF
the machine main power and disconnecting the power cord, to discharge the charged
power from the capacitor on the Power supply unit.
The Main Power Lamp is still lit after

the machine power is turned OFF.
Press the Sub Power Key, after

the machine main power is OFF
and power cord is unplugged, to
discharge the electrical charge
remaining in the Capacitors on the
Power Supply Unit.
(3) Electrical Shock Hazard Symbol.
1) To avoid electrical shock:
As a warning to avoid electrical shock, the Power Supply Unit should never betouched with
the machine powered ON or when the main power cord is plugged to the machine even
though the main power toggle switch is switched OFF. Electric Shock Hazard Symbol is
imprinted on the Power Supply Unit to indicate the above, and this includes the Heat-sink
on the Power Supply Unit. A caution statement, “RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK - DO NOT
TOUCH THIS HEATSINK.” is imprinted on the Power Supply Unit. HEAT-SINK
Caution
Work on the Power Supply Unit only after turning the machine main
power OFF, disconnecting the power cord, and discharging the capacitors.
Power Supply Unit
HEAT-SINK
Electric Shock Hazard Symbol

on the Power Supply Unit

Maintenance
(4) Always connect electrical connectors firmly.

1) To avoid electrical failure:
The connectors must be connected firmly together and onto the PCBs.
2) Protection of the electrical components:

The electrical components may be damaged due to short circuits caused by a loose connector.
(5) Warning on the disposal of LCD Touch Panel.

The back light tube of LCD of the Touch Panel on this Model contains mercury which must be
recycled or disposed of as hazardous waste.

Maintenance
1. Precautions
1-1. General precautions
* Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before performing maintenance.
* Be careful to avoid getting neckties, clothing, or long hair tangled in moving parts.
* If you must perform work while the machine power is on, exercise the utmost caution.
* Never perform maintenance while the machine is operating.
- Be caution about the automatic descent operation of the transfer unit.
- After predetermined time, the descent operation of the transfer unit to the standby position and
the sliding operation of the cleaning unit to ink heads position are automatically performed.
- Be caution not to turn ON the machine and be injured by pinching hands or arms when covers
are removed for maintenance work.
* Work carefully to avoid injuring yourself on the sharp edges of metal sheets or springs.
* When a wrist watch, a ring, etc. become the obstacle of work, work by removing it.
1-2.Special precautions for color inkjet printers

* Maintain the device to keep it free of dust (including paper dust).
- Dust and paper dust adhering to the nozzles of the print heads may result in a misfire.
- Clean internal paper paths with a vacuum cleaner to remove dust (including paper dust) at
eriodic intervals - for example, when replacing waste ink tanks (periodic inspections). Clean more
or less frequently, depending on your specific operating conditions. The amount of paper dust
that accumulates in the machine will depend on the type of paper used.
- Never use an air duster, since doing so will raise paper dust and causes misfires.
* Ink storage
- Store ink cartridges in the specified conditions. Follow the [first in, first out] principle when
removing ink cartridges from storage, and use ink promptly.
- Do not store ink cartridges in environments that may degrade the ink. Degraded ink is more likely
to cause nozzle misfires and other problems.
* Precautions for use of inks
- Do not shake the ink cartridges before using.
Shaking the bottle will generate air bubbles into the ink solution, making nozzle misfires more
likely.
- Do not refill with ink.
- Check ink left unused for extended periods after ink cartridges are opened to make sure it
remains usable.
Ink left in ink cartridges for extended periods after the cartridges are opened will oxidize and
degrade. Try to use up ink as quickly as possible after ink cartridges are unsealed.
Using degraded ink may result in problems that require the replacement of the print heads or
other ink-handling parts (misfiring nozzles).
* Precautions for anticipated periods of extended disuse
- Ink in the internal ink passages may degrade or dry out over the time, resulting in nozzle misfires
and other problems. In the worst cases, misfiring nozzles will require replacing the print heads.
- To avoid these problems, we recommend operating the printer now and then.
* Precautions for use of the printer after long storage
- If print head cleaning is not performed before use, misfiring nozzles or other printing problems
may occur.
Start by checking for any misfiring nozzles.
- If the nozzles are misfiring, perform head cleaning.
In some cases, the head cleaning procedure will need to be repeated several times to clear the
print head nozzles.
- If the nozzle condition does not improve after the nozzles are checked for misfiring and strong

Maintenance
cleaning is repeated several times, the print heads may need to be replaced.
* Differences between display and print colors
- The colors on prints may differ slightly from the colors seen on your display device.
- The difference in the colors may be attributable to various factors, including differences between
RGB and CMYK color systems, the RIP color system, display device settings, etc.
* Never touch the surfaces of the print head nozzles.
- Scratching the print head nozzle surface or dust adhering to the print head nozzle surface may
cause printing problems. Never wipe the print head nozzle surface.
- In the worst cases (misfiring nozzles), such problems may require replacement of the print heads.
To prevent problems, avoid touching print head nozzle surfaces during machine maintenance. Be
careful to avoid scratching print head nozzle surfaces with tools or parts when working near the
print heads.
* Protect the print heads from any physical shock.
- The print heads are extremely fragile. Handle them carefully, and avoid dropping or striking them.
* Selection of paper type
- Use only the specified paper type. Using the wrong paper may result in poor adhesion of ink to
the paper.
- If you choose to use a paper product not specifically recommended by the manufacturer, first
perform a printing test. Papers producing paper dust will cause misfires.
- Ink that fails to adhere to the paper may be left on the transport roller or transfer belt, smudging
subsequent prints.
- Internal parts contaminated by ink may require more frequent maintenance. To avoid these
problems, select your paper carefully.
* Maintenance of proper operating conditions
- Ink viscosity affects the ink ejecting performance of inkjet printers.
- Ink viscosity increases with lower temperatures, making ejection problems like nozzle misfires
more likely. Use the printer only under the specified operating conditions.
* Cleaning wipe
- To wipe off ink from the printer, use the Kimtech or Kimwipe products manufactured by CRECIA
Corp. or similar dust- and fiber-free materials. Never use ordinary tissue paper.
- Fibers and paper dust from cleaning materials may cause nozzle misfires and other problems.
- Never wipe the print head (the head surface). Let the machine clean the head by itself.

Maintenance
1-3.Other precautions for inspection and maintenance

Precautions for inspections
* If a defect or abnormality is found during inspections, correct the problem and replace parts, if
necessary.
Precautions for parts removal
* When ascertaining the location of a problem, also determine the cause of the problem. After
determining whether it is necessary to remove parts or disassemble the machine, perform the
required repairs according to the procedures given in the technical manual.
* Watch for ink leaks when disassembling ink-handling components.
* Don't apply power beyond necessity with the ink tube junction. Moreover, work, being careful for
the ink tube junction not to disconnect accidentally.
* When disassembling a component consisting of many parts, similar parts or symmetrical right
and left parts, organize the removed parts to ensure proper reassembly.
1) Set aside and arrange removed parts.
2) Clearly identify which parts are to be replaced and which parts are to be reused.
3) When replacing screws or other fasteners, use only parts of the specified size.
Precautions for reinstallation and reassembly

* To reassemble or reinstall parts, follow the disassembly or
removal sequence in reverse, unless otherwise specified.
* If parts have protrusions and indentations for positioning
(half pierced), align them carefully to ensure proper installation.
* When you attach the ink tube, attach after wiping off finely,
when the inner side of the ink tube or ink tube junction is dirty
with ink.
Precautions for electrical work

* If bundled wires have come loose, use a cable tie or band to hold them together after finishing
the work.
* When installing parts, be careful to avoid pinching or damaging electrical wires.
* Replace blown or defective fuses with fuses of the specified capacity rating.
In addition to equipment damage, using a fuse with a rating above the specified value may result
in fire.

Maintenance
1-4.Sensors
* Be sure to turn off power before disconnecting or connecting sensors.
Photosensor types
* In general, photo sensors can be divided into four types: the interrupt type (U-shaped), the
actuator type, the reflection type, and the transmission type.
Magnetic sensor types

* Some magnetic sensors use Hall ICs, while others use magnetic reed switches.
Switch types
* Microswitches use either N.O. (Normally Open) contact or N.C. (Normally Closed) contact.
* The N.O. contact closes when the switch actuator is pressed.
* The N.C. contact opens when the switch actuator is pressed.

Maintenance
2.Tools
Using tools other than those specified may result in damage to screws or other parts, or result in personal
injury. Be sure to have all the necessary tools on hand before beginning work.
2-1.List of general tools
Type Tip size Shaft length, etc.

No. 2 (250 mm)
No. 2 (100 mm–150 mm)
Phillips screwdriver
No. 2 (stubby type)
No. 1 (75 mm–100 mm)
6 mm (100 mm–150 mm)
Standard screwdriver 3 mm (100 mm–150 mm)
1.8 mm (precision type)
Nut driver 8 mm (100 mm–150 mm)
(box driver) 7 mm (100 mm–150 mm)
High frequency driver 2.5 mm
5 mm 5.5 mm 7 mm
Spanners 8 mm 10 mm 13 mm
Monkey
5.0 mm 4.0 mm 3.0 mm
Hex wrenches 2.5 mm 2.0 mm 1.5 mm
(For 3.0mm, 2 pieces required )
Steel scale 150 mm
Feeler gauge
Radial cutting pliers
Pliers
Nipper
Small flashlight
Multimeter
Soldering iron 20 W–30 W
File Flat type, round type

Maintenance
2-2.List of special tools for servicing ComColor
ComColor lifting JIG.

The machine lifting jig must be ComColor
dedicted type to prevent an accident.
Lint-free paper towel

This is used to wipe ink off inside the machine.
The paper towel must be lint-free to avoid dust
from getting into the ink flow system.
Powder-free plastic gloves

These are convenient to have in working of the
ink flow system.
Never use powdered gloves, as the powder
will clog the print heads.
Vacuum cleaner
Inside of the machine must be kept free of the
paper dust. The paper dust must be sucked
out. Never blow on the dust, as the dust will
adhire to the print heads.
Plastic sheet
Working on the ink flow systems of the
machine,
it is recommended that pastic sheet is made
available to protect the floor from the ink stain.
Plastic sheet to protect the floor.
Isopropyl alcohol
To wipe off dripped ink from the metal frame
of the machine.

Maintenance
IJ Matte Paper (A3 or Ledger size)

ComColor dedicated matte paper is required
for executing image adjustment.
Lupe
Required to check the print quality.
Air filter
Required when working on the ink flow system
to prevent dust from entering into the ink flow
system.
Safety switch connector jig

Convenient to have when running the machine
with the front covers off the machine.
Using adhesive tape is an alternative to using
this jig.
5.5mm box wrench

This tool is needed to manually elevate the BP
unit up or down.
5.5mm wrench 5.5mm and 7.0mm can be in one

piece or by two separate wrenches.
5.5mm 7.0mm 7.0mm wrench
5.5mm wrench is required to work on the
Internal paper feed unit.
7.0mm wrench is required in removing the
Registration roller.

Maintenance
Long screw driver or Rachet wrench

At least 250mm in shaft length
Either of these tools will become necessary in
mounting the front bottom cover on the
or
machine during the machine installation.
Normal millimeter size screw driver with one-

eighth marking on the grip end.
The one-eighth marking on the grip end is
needed in aligning the Print head angle during
the image adjustment.
15mm or less
Metal ruler (with the width less than 15mm).

Metal ruler with the width less than 15mm is
required to open the front door of the machine
with the machine power OFF.
It can be substituted with similar dimension
object of any material (scale not required).
Feeler gauge in millimeter thickness.

The feeler gauge is required in adjusting the
parallelism of the Registration roller against the
BP unit.
4mm diameter shafts (2 pieces).

2 pieces of 4mm diameter jig shafts are
required in removing and replacing the BP belt
on the BP unit.
Adjustable wrench.
Adjustable wrench is required to adjust
the height of the machine during the machine
installation.

Maintenance
Print head positioning jig

Required in removing and replacing the Print
head on the machine.
One piece comes with the machine.
If extra pieces are needed, order the required
quantity as spare part.
Plastic forceps
Needed in working on the ink flow system.
4 pieces come with the machine.
For extra pieces, order them as spare parts.
Do not use the GREEN colored plastic forceps, which are
designed for HC models, on the ComColor ink tubes.
The green colored ones can only be used on the air tubes on
the ComColor machines.
Plastic tube clamp

These are used for clamping the ink tubes
during machine re-shipping.
Should not used on the ink tubes for only a
short time. Long term use will deform the ink
tubes.
Metal clip
These locally purchased metal clips maybe
applied on the ink tubes for temporary short
period on the site to stop the ink flow while
working on the ink flow system.
Use of dedicated plastic forceps is more recommended
Wrist band (static electricity remover)

Recommended to use these wrist bands when
working on the Print heads and Printed circuit
boards on the machine for static electricity
damage prevention.
Plastic cups
Rectangular plastic cups are convenient to
have in temporary resting of the removed Print
heads and also in catching the draining ink
while working on the ink flow system.

Maintenance
Laptop PC
Required in making the image adjustments on
ComColor machines when there is no HS4000
Scanner is not available.
Canon LiDE scanner is also needed.
Canon LiDE Scanner

Required in making the image adjustments on
ComColor machines when there is no HS4000
Scanner available at the site.
The model numbers are to be announced later.
Laptop PC is also needed.
USB cable
Required for connection between the Canon
LiDE Scanner and the Laptop PC.
Strong large magnet

Required to keep the screw driver tips well
magnetized.
Rubber cushion
For the injury prevention.
These are to cover the corner edges of
the PCB brackets.

Maintenance
3.Printer setup procedure

3-1.Confirmations to be performed during printer setup
* Follow the Installation instruction guide (inculded in the shipment) step-by-step.
* After opening the package, the machine Control card and the ink cartridges must be mounted on the
machine.
* The machine will not function correctly if incorrect (incompatible) Control card or Ink cartridge on the
ComColor main unit, due to a delivery error or other reasons.
If incompatible Control card or Ink cartridges are delievered, return the incorrect component for an
exchange.
The error display for the incompatible Control card:

S98-1811-2 < Machine I.D. error >
* The machine ID as calculated from the Engine control PCB does not match with the
machine code in the Control card mounted on the machine.
The error displays for the incompatible Ink cartridge:

Z04-2108 < Incompatible ink cartridge (K)
Z04-2109 < Incompatible ink cartridge (C)
Z04-2110 < Incompatible ink cartridge (M)
Z04-2111 < Incompatible ink cartridge (Y)
* The ink cartridge was detected as incomatiple type.
Notes regarding temporary registration status.

* After the package is opened and the machine set up, [Temporary Registration Status] becomes
effective when the machine is turned on for the first time.
After accumulation of 336 hours of machine power ON duration, the temporary registration status
changes automatically to [Permanent Registration Status].
* Whether or not the ID between the machine and the Control card matches, error code No. 03-
1814 is displayed on the machine panel during the temporary registration period.
* This error code No. 03-1814 is displayed each time the machine power is turned ON, the
machine wakes, or when the Reset button is pressed.
* The error code can be set to not show by activating test mode No.8400
<Test mode No.8400 instantly changes the Temporaty registration status to Final registration.>
If this test mode is activated with a wrong Control card on the machine, the machine no longer
operates from that instant.
3-2.Setup Wizard
* When the machine power is turned ON for the first time, Setup Wizard starts up.
* Make sure to input correct information on the Setup Wizard, especially the Year, Date and Time.
* Refer to the next page for the details on the Setup Wizard.

Maintenance
Setup Wizard
With full operation items connected to the ComColor, there are total of 12 pages to the items to
be selected.
Less selectable items are displayed when less options are connected.
Pages on the
Items Notes
LCD Display
00 Setup Wizard cover page -
01 Displayed language -
02 Metric/Inch switch -
03 Time zone setting -
04 Clock/Date -
05 Network setting -
06 Function key entry -
Selectable only when
07 Color mode HS4000 Scanner is
connected.
Multi-function Finisher,
08 Output tray in each mode Auto Stacking Tray or
Wide Stacking Tray is
connected.
Selectable only on
09 Feed tray ComColor with Internal
paper feed tray.
10 Login setting -
11 Security level setting -
12 User category HS4000 Scanner is
connected.
Sample display pages
Setup Wizard cover page

This is the starting display page for the
Setup Wizard.
The Setup Wizard can be initialized by Test

Mode No.505 [Setup Wizard Initialize].
Power OFF and then Power ON will display
this cover page to start the Setup Wizard
from the beginning.
Displayed language
Select the desired language for the
ComColor LCD display message.
The display language

can later be changed
by Admin. setting.

Maintenance
Metric/Inch switch
Select Metric for the machines to print on
metric size papers.
Select Inch for the machines to print on
inch size papers.
The Metric/Inch Switch can later

be changed by Admin. setting.
Time zone setting

Select the correct Time zone of the country
in which the machine is installed.
The Time Zone Setting can only be set on

the Setup Wizard.
Clock/Date
Set the year, Month, Day, Hour and Minute.
Also select in which order the Year, Month
and Date should be displayed.
The Clock/Date can later be

changed by Admin. setting.
Network setting
Input the IP address, etc. of the ComColor.
The Network Setting can later

Function key entry

Maximum of three functions are selectable
for the F1, F2 and F3 keys on the
ComColor operation panel.
The Function key Entry can later


Maintenance
Color mode
Selects the default color mode for the
Copy and Scanner modes. The selection
is available only whe HS4000 scanner is
connected.
Since it is only selecting the default setting,

the selection can be changed to another on
each operation.
Output tray in each mode

Select the default output tray for the
Printer and Copy modes. This selection is
available only when Multi-function Finisher,
Auto Stacking Tray or Wide Stacking Tray
is connected. Copy mode selection is
available only when HS4000 Scanner is
connected.
Since it is only selecting the default setting,

the selection can be changed to another on
each operation.
Feed tray
Selectable only on ComColor with Internal
paper feed tray
The setting can later be changed by

the Functions tab of the Printer mode.
Login setting
Selection of whether login is required or
not for each mode.
Copy and Scanner modes available only
when HS4000 Scanner is connected.
Auto logout time can also be set.
The setting can later

be changed by the
Admin. setting

Maintenance
Security level setting

Selection of the Security Level from the
three choices.
Refer to the chart given below for the

details on the three security settings.
Admin. Settings 1 (Low) 2 (Normal) 3 (High)

Folder function Active Active Inactive
Additional copies Permitted Prohibited Prohibited
Finished job setting Saving permitted Saving permitted Saving permitted
Finished job reprinting Permitted Prohibited Prohibited
Waiting job setting Not auto deleted Not auto deleted Auto deleted
All jobs from PC goes
No No Yes
into waiting job list
Mail destination
Permitted Permitted Permitted
direct input
Need to change
the setting to ON.
Need to change the

setting to Permitted.

Maintenance
User category
Selection of the user category.
The difference is in the Selection tab.

< Refer to the photographs below.>
The items in the Selections tab can be

changed.
DIFFERENT
SAME
SAME

Machine Covers
Chapter 2. Machine Covers
Contents
1.Exterior covers.................................................................................... 2-2

2.Removal............................................................................................... 2-3
2-1.Operation panel as a unit............................................................ 2-3
2-2.Front bottom cover...................................................................... 2-3
2-3.Front doors.................................................................................. 2-4
2-4.Rear cover................................................................................... 2-5
2-5.Front door lock mechanism......................................................... 2-6
2-6.Opening the PCBs and Ink supply unit to the service mode....... 2-7
2-7.Component layout (rear of the machine)..................................... 2-9

Machine Covers
1.Exterior covers
Top left cover Top right cover
Operation panel
Rear cover
Face-down receiving tray

Front right cover
Switchback guide
Rear left cover
External paper
feed tray cover
ComColor
Front left cover
Left bottom side cover

Tray cover
Right side cover
Rear right cover
Ejection cover
Com
Colo
r
Waste ink cover

Machine Covers
2.Removal
2-1.Operation panel as a unit
The Operation panel is removed from the machine as a unit, together with its metal bottom plate, when going into
the Print head area.
** Remove the Top right cover and Top left cover. (Bind screws 4x8 (3 pcs each))
** Remove the screws at postions A and B. (IT3C screws 4x8 (3 pcs in total))
** Swing the Operation panel unit away, watching not to twist or damaging the electrical wires
Metal bottom plate
Operation panel
2-2.Front bottom cover

This cover is not assembled on the machine. It needs to be mounted on the machine at the time of the
machine installation.
** Two screws, one in the center and the other on the right hand corner. (Bind screws 4x8 (1 pc each))
- Either a long shafted screw driver or a rachet screw driver is needed for the center screw.
- A shorter or stubby screw driver is needed for the screw on the right hand corner.

Machine Covers
2-3.Front doors
The left and right Front doors are removed as assemblies with the Right inner cover and Left inner
cover.
** Center inner cover must be removed first in order to remove the Left and Right inner covers.
Left inner cover and Left front door as an assembly.
Center inner cover
Right inner cover and Right front door as an assembly.
Left inner cover and Right inner cover and

Left front door as an assembly. Right front door as an assembly.

Machine Covers
2-4.Rear cover
It is best to remove the Rear cover with the Left rear cover and Right rear cover attached for easier
replacement.
** Left and Right top covers should be removed first for smooth removal and replacement of the Rear
cover.
Left top cover Right top cover
Left rear cover
Rear cover
Right rear cover
Rear cover
Left rear cover

Machine Covers
2-5.Front door lock mechanism

It is best to remove the Rear cover with the Left rear cover and Right rear cover attached for easier replacement.
1) Remove the Center inner cover.
2) Remove the Left inner cover.
3) Remove the Front door lock mechanism. (Round tip IT3C screws 4x8 (4 pcs))
Front door lock mechanism
FRONT view REAR view

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

Machine Covers
2-6.Opening the PCBs and Ink supply unit to the service mode.
1) Remove the Left and Right top covers.
2) Remove the Rear cover assembly (Rear cover + Left & Right rear covers in one asssembly).
3) Remove the Grounding plate, which is screwed over the Engine control PCB. (Screws 4x8 (2 pcs))
If the Engine control PCB is lifted up without removing this Grounding plate, the Grounding plate will hit the
Engine control PCB and may damage the Engine control PCB.
Grounding plate.
4) Remove the screws and lift up the Engine control PCB. (Screws 4x8 (2 pcs))
- Screws numbered 1 & 2 on the next page photograph.
- Hook the arm on the right on the machine frame and fix its position using a screw.
5) Remove the screws and swing open the Power supply unit. (Screws 4x8 (2 pcs))
6) Remove the screws and lift up the Controller PCB Box. (Screws 4x8 (2 pcs))
- Support the raised Controller PCB with two screws, one on the right side of the Controller PCB
and the other on the left hand side.
Supporting screw on the left. Controller PCB Box Supporting screw on the right.
7)Remove the screws and swing open the Ink supply unit, very slowly and gently. (Screws 4x8 (3 pcs))
- Screws numbered 6, 7 & 8 on the next page photograph.

** The screw numbered 6 holds the two units, Controller PCB and Ink supply unit, together.
NOTE:
The screw numbers referred to on above explanation points to the photograph with these numbers
on the NEXT page.

Machine Covers
The following photograph indicates the screw numbers used to identify the screws mentioned on the exploration on the
previous page.
Controller PCB Ink supply unit Engine controll PCB Power supply unit
< View of the PCBs in the closed position >
< View of the PCBs in the opened state >

Machine Covers
2-7.Component layout (rear of the machine)
Switchback motor
Paper elevation motor Switchback clutch
Ink release cam motor
Re-feed motor
Head drive IC cooling fan 1
Upper transfer motor
Head drive IC cooling fan 2 Registration motor
External paper feed motor
Ink cooling fan 1 Vertical paper feed clutch 1
Internal paper feed clutch 1

Maintenance unit drive motor
Vertical paper feed clutch 2
Ink cooling fan 2 Internal paper feed clutch 2
Tray 2 elevator motor

Bellows arm drive motor

Machine Covers
Tray 1 elevation motor
Ink circulation pump Internal paper feed motor

Structural Overview
Chapter 3. Structural Overview
Contents
1.ComColor series specifications........................................................ 3-2

2.HS4000 Scanner specifications......................................................... 3-8
3.Multifunction Finisher specifications................................................ 3-9
4.IC Card Authentication Kit specifications....................................... 3-10
5.Structural Overview.......................................................................... 3-11
5-1. Overall Block Structure............................................................ 3-11
5-2. Overview of Paper Transfer..................................................... 3-15
5-3. Overview of Ink Flow Path....................................................... 3-17

Structural Overview
1.ComColor series specifications
ComColor 9050/9050R Specifications

Basic Functions and Print Functions
Model SE-H301
Type Console
Color Support Full color
Print Type Line-type inkjet system
Ink Type Oil-based pigment ink (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)
Standard: 300 dpi (main scanning direction) × 300 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
Resolution
Fine: 300 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
Number of Gray Levels For each CMYK color (8 gray levels)
Standard: 300 dpi × 300 dpi
Data Processing Resolution Fine: 300 dpi × 600 dpi
Line smoothing: 600 dpi × 600 dpi
Warm-up Time 2 min. 45 sec. or less (at room temperature of 20ºC (68ºF))
Monochrome: 8 sec or less*1 (when copying A4-R/Letter-R
orientation using monochrome mode)
First Print Time
Color: 8 sec or less*1 (when copying A4-R/Letter-R orientation using
color mode)
A4-R Simplex: 150 ppm Duplex: 75 ppm
Letter-R Simplex: 146 ppm Duplex: 73 ppm
A4 Simplex: 110 ppm Duplex: 55 ppm
Continuous Print Speed*2 Letter Simplex: 116 ppm Duplex: 58 ppm
B4/Legal Simplex: 90 ppm Duplex: 42 ppm
A3 Simplex: 80 ppm Duplex: 40 ppm
Ledger Simplex: 78 ppm Duplex: 39 ppm
Duplex Printing Standard
Maximum: 340 mm × 550 mm (13 3/8" × 21 5/8")
Standard Tray
Minimum: 90 mm × 148 mm (3 9/16" × 5 13/16")
Paper Size
Maximum: 297 mm × 420 mm (11 11/16" × 17")
Feed Tray
Minimum: 182 mm × 182 mm (7 3/16" × 7 3/16")
Printable Area Maximum: 314 mm × 548 mm (12 3/8" × 21 9/16")
Standard: Margin width of 3 mm (1/8")
Guaranteed Print Area*3 Maximum: Margin width of 1 mm (1/16")
Standard Tray 46 g/m2 (12-lb bond) to 210 g/m2 (56-lb bond) (plain paper)
Paper Weight
Feed Tray 52 g/m2 (14-lb bond) to 104 g/m2 (28-lb bond) (plain paper)
Paper Feed Method/ Standard Tray 1,000 sheets (Height up to 110 mm (4 5/16"))
Paper Tray Capacity*4 Feed Tray 500 sheets × 3 trays (Height up to 50 mm (1 15/16"))
Continuous Printing Capacity 9,999 sheets
Standard 500 sheets (Height up to 60 mm (2 3/8"))
*4
Output Tray Capacity 1,000 sheets (when using the optional auto-control stacking tray or
Option
wide stacking tray)

Structural Overview
Page Description Language Original PDL

TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPs (SSL), DHCP, ftp, lpr, IPP, SNMP,
Supported Protocols
Port 9100 (RAW port)
Microsoft Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP (32-bit version)
Supported Operating Systems Microsoft Windows Server 2003 (32-bit version)
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows Vista (32-bit version)
Installed Fonts None
Emulation None
Network Interface Ethernet 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T (2ch)
CPU Intel Celeron -M440 (1.86 GHz)
Memory Capacity 1 GB
Capacity 160 GB
Hard Disk*6
Available Space 140 GB
Operating System Linux
Power Source AC 100-240 V, 10-5 A, 50-60 Hz
Max. 1,000 W
Ready*5: 250 W
Power Consumption
Sleep: Max. 45 W
Stand-by: Max. 1 W
Operating Noise Max. 68 dB (when printing)
Temperature: 15ºC to 30ºC (59ºF to 86ºF)
Operating Environment
Humidity: 40% to 70% RH (non-condensing)
In use: 1,150 mm × 695 mm × 1,020 mm
Dimensions (W × D × H)
(45 1/4" × 27 3/8" × 40 3/16")
Weight 180 kg (397 lb)
With front cover and feed tray extended:
1,210 mm × 1,230 mm × 1,020 mm (47 5/8" × 48 7/16" × 40 3/16")
Required Space (W × D × H)
With face down tray and standard tray stored:
1,150 mm × 695 mm × 990 mm (45 1/4" × 27 3/8" × 39")
*1 Within 10 minutes after the last print job

2
*2 When using plain paper and recycled paper (85 g/m (23-lb bond)), and density setting 3 (Standard)
Chart used: Print measurement pattern [Color measurement sample 2 (JEITA standard pattern J6)]
*3 The margin when printing envelopes is 10 mm (3/8").
The guaranteed area when printing images is the area enclosed within 3 mm (1/8") of the edges of the paper.
2
*4 When using plain paper and recycled paper (85 g/m (23-lb bond))
*5 When not printing
*6 One gigabyte (GB) is calculated as 1 billion bytes.
NOTE:
This Machine Specification Sheet is for reference only.
Check with your Marketing Department for the precise specification of the ComColor to your country.
The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

Structural Overview
ComColor 7050/7050R/3050/3050R Specifications

ComColor 7050/7050R:SE-M301
Model
ComColor 3050/3050R:SE-M401
Type Console
Resolution
First Print Time
color mode)
A4-R/Letter-R Simplex: 120 ppm Duplex: 60 ppm
A4/Letter Simplex: 90 ppm Duplex: 45 ppm
Continuous Print Speed*2
A3/Ledger Simplex: 66 ppm Duplex: 33 ppm
Maximum: 340 mm × 550 mm (13 3/8" × 21 5/8")
Standard Tray
Minimum: 90 mm × 148 mm (3 9/16" × 5 13/16")
Paper Size
Maximum: 297 mm × 420 mm (11 11/16" × 17")
Feed Tray
Minimum: 182 mm × 182 mm (7 3/16" × 7 3/16")
ComColor 7050/7050R:
Maximum: 314 mm × 548 mm (12 3/8" × 21 9/16")
Printable Area
Maximum: 210 mm × 544 mm (8 1/4" × 21 7/16")
Maximum: Margin width of 1 mm (1/16")
Guaranteed Print Area*3 ComColor 3050/3050R:
Maximum: Margin width of 3 mm (1/8")
Standard Tray 46 g/m2 (12-lb bond) to 210 g/m2 (56-lb bond) (plain paper)
Paper Weight
Feed Tray 52 g/m2 (14-lb bond) to 104 g/m2 (28-lb bond) (plain paper)
Paper Feed Method/ Standard Tray 1,000 sheets (Height up to 110 mm (4 5/16"))
Paper Tray Capacity*4 Feed Tray 500 sheets × 3 trays (Height up to 50 mm (1 15/16"))
Output Tray Capacity*4 1,000 sheets (when using the optional auto-control stacking tray or
Option
wide stacking tray)
Supported Protocols

Structural Overview

Emulation None
Memory Capacity 512 MB
Capacity 160 GB
Hard Disk*6
Max. 1,000 W
Ready*5: 250 W
Power Consumption
Sleep: Max. 45 W
Stand-by: Max. 1 W
In use: 1,150 mm × 695 mm × 1,020 mm
(45 1/4" × 27 3/8" × 40 3/16")
With front cover and feed tray extended:
1,210 mm × 1,230 mm × 1,020 mm (47 5/8" × 48 7/16" × 40 3/16")
1,150 mm × 695 mm × 990 mm (45 1/4" × 27 3/8" × 39")

2
For ComColor 7050/7050R, the guaranteed area when printing images is the area enclosed within 3 mm (1/8") of the edges of the
paper.
For ComColor 3050/3050R, the guaranteed area when printing images is the area enclosed within 5 mm (3/16") of the edges of the
paper.
2
NOTE:

Structural Overview
ComColor 7010/7010R/3010/3010R Specifications

ComColor 7010/7010R:SE-L301
Model
ComColor 3010/3010R:SE-L401
Type Console
Resolution
First Print Time
color mode)
A4-R/Letter-R Simplex: 120 ppm Duplex: 60 ppm
A4/Letter Simplex: 90 ppm Duplex: 45 ppm
Continuous Print Speed*2
A3/Ledger Simplex: 66 ppm Duplex: 33 ppm
Maximum: 340 mm × 550 mm (13 3/8" × 21 5/8")
Paper Size
Minimum: 90 mm × 148 mm (3 9/16" × 5 13/16")
ComColor 7010/7010R
Maximum: 310 mm × 544 mm (12 3/16" × 21 7/16")
Printable Area
ComColor 3010/3010R
Maximum: 210 mm × 544 mm (8 1/4" × 21 7/16")
Guaranteed Print Area*3 Maximum: Margin width of 3 mm (1/8")
Paper Weight 46 g/m2 (12-lb bond) to 210 g/m2 (56-lb bond) (plain paper)
Paper Feed Method/Paper Tray Capacity*4 1,000 sheets (Height up to 110 mm (4 5/16"))
*4
Output Tray Capacity 1,000 sheets (when using the optional auto-control stacking tray or
Option
wide stacking tray)
Supported Protocols
Emulation None

Structural Overview

Memory Capacity 512 MB
Capacity 160 GB
Hard Disk*6
Max. 1,000 W
Ready*5: 250 W
Power Consumption
Sleep: Max. 45 W
Stand-by: Max. 1 W
In use: 1,150 mm × 695 mm × 1,020 mm
(45 1/4" × 27 3/8" × 40 3/16")
With front cover extended:
1,210 mm × 1,230 mm × 1,020 mm (47 5/8" × 48 7/16" × 40 3/16")
1,150 mm × 695 mm × 990 mm (45 1/4" × 27 3/8" × 39")

2
The guaranteed area when printing images is the area enclosed within 5 mm (3/16") of the edges of the paper.
2
NOTE:

Structural Overview
MEMO

Structural Overview
2.HS4000 Scanner specifications
Scanner HS4000 (Optional)

Copy/Scan Functions
Type Flat Bed Scanner with Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Scanning modes Color, Monochrome, Auto
Scanning resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, or 200 dpi
303 mm × 432 mm (11 15/16" × 17") (when using platen glass)
Maximum scanning area
297 mm × 432 mm (11 11/16" × 17") (when using ADF)
Writing resolution
Fine: 300 dpi × 600 dpi
Copy paper size Maximum: 303 mm × 432 mm (11 15/16" × 17") (equivalent to A3)
Monochrome/Color: 11.5 sec or less (when copying A4-R/Letter-R
Initial copy time
orientation using Color Priority Mode)
Copy functions
Simplex copying (A4-R/Letter-R, using ADF): 40 ppm or higher
Scanning speed
Duplex copying (A4-R/Letter-R, using ADF): 9 ppm or higher
50% to 200% (Copy mode)
Reproduction size 50% to 200% (Scanner mode, resolution: 200/300 dpi), only 100%
(Scanner mode, resolution: 400/600 dpi)
Type Original source displacement (capable of duplex scanning by switch-back)
Maximum: 297 mm × 432 mm (11 11/16" × 17") (equivalent to A3)
Original source size
Minimum: 100 mm × 148 mm (3 15/16" × 5 13/16")
Paper quality 52 g/m2 (14-lb bond) to 128 g/m2 (34-lb bond)
ADF Original source capacity 80 g/m2 (21-lb bond): Max. 100 sheets
Smaller than B4 size 81 g/m2 (22-lb bond): Height up to 15 mm (5/8")
Original source capacity 80 g/m2 (21-lb bond): Max. 60 sheets
B4 size or larger 81 g/m2 (22-lb bond): Height up to 9 mm (3/8")
Original source Simplex printing: 40 ppm or higher (A4-R/Letter-R)
exchange speed Duplex printing: 9 ppm or higher (A4-R/Letter-R)
Scanning gray levels 10-bit input and 8-bit output for each RGB color
Monochrome/Color: 40 ppm
Original source scanning
RISO KAGAKU standard original (A4-R/Letter-R), 200 dpi, when
speed
stored to main unit hard drive
Scan functions
Network Interface* Ethernet 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Data-saving method* Save to main unit hard drive, server, or USB flash drive, or send by e-mail
Monochrome: TIFF, PDF
Data-saving format*
Grayscale/Full Color: TIFF, JPEG, PDF
Power source AC 100-127/200-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption Max. 120 W
Dimensions 642 mm × 551 mm × 248 mm (25 1/4" × 21 11/16" × 9 3/4")
Weight Approx. 28 kg (62 lb)
In use: 1,220 mm × 800 mm × 1,220 mm (48" × 31 1/2" × 48")
Dimensions (when connected to main unit)
With cover and tray extended:
(W × D × H)
1,220 mm × 1,335 mm × 1,610 mm (48" × 52 9/16" × 63 3/8")
* Via the internal host controller
NOTE:
Check with your Marketing Department for the precise specification.

Structural Overview
MEMO

Structural Overview
3.Multifunction Finisher specifications

Multifunction Finisher (Optional)
Top Tray Collating, stacking

Tray Type Stacking Tray Collating, stacking (offset)
Booklet Tray Booklet, Paper folding
Maximum: 330 mm × 488 mm (13" × 19 3/16")
Top Tray*1 Minimum: 100 mm × 148 mm (3 15/16" × 5 13/16")
Maximum: 330 mm × 488 mm (13" × 19 3/16")
Stacking Tray*1 Minimum: 182 mm × 182 mm (7 3/16" × 7 3/16")
Paper Size
Stapling
Minimum: 203 mm × 182 mm (8" × 7 3/16")
Maximum: 330 mm × 457 mm (13" × 18")
Booklet Tray*1 Minimum: 210 mm × 280 mm (8 1/4" × 11")
Top Tray 52 g/m2 (14-lb bond) to 210 g/m2 (56-lb bond)
Paper Weight Stacking Tray 52 g/m2 (14-lb bond) to 210 g/m2 (56-lb bond)
Booklet Tray 60 g/m2 (16-lb bond) to 90 g/m2 (24-lb bond) (cover: 210 g/m2 (56-lb bond))
Top Tray 500 sheets
Tray Capacity Stacking Tray*3 2,000 sheets (200 copies)
Booklet Tray 20 copies
Maximum Number of
100 sheets
Staples*2*4
Stapling Staple Paper Size
Minimum: 203 mm × 182 mm (8" × 7 3/16") (equivalent to B5-R)
1 at front side (angle stapling),
Staple Position
1 at rear side (angle stapling*5, parallel stapling), 2 at center (parallel stapling)
2 holes, 3 holes
Number of Punches
2 holes, 4 holes
2 holes: A3, B4, A4-R, A4, B5-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R
Punching
Applicable Sizes 3 holes: A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R
4 holes: A3, A4-R, Ledger, Letter-R
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 (14-lb bond) to 200 g/m2 (53-lb bond)
Creating a Booklet Maximum Number of Center margin: 15 sheets (60 pages)
(Center margin/2-fold) Sheets*2*6 2-fold: 5 sheets (20 pages)
Dimensions (W × D × H) 1,120 mm × 765 mm × 1,130 mm (44 3/32" × 30 1/8" × 44 1/2" )
Weight 131 kg (289 lbs)
Power Source AC 100-120/200-240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.0/1.0 A or more
Power Consumption Max. 175 W
Operating Noise (when using finisher) Max. 68 dB
In use: 2,315 mm × 765 mm × 1,130 mm (91 5/32" × 30 1/8" × 44 1/2" )
Dimensions (when Connected to main unit)
(W × D × H) With cover, and tray extended:
2,315 mm × 1,280 mm × 1,130 mm (91 5/32" × 50 13/32" × 44 1/2" )
*1 When color printing on paper that is longer than 4322mm (17"), the image printed beyond 432 mm (17") may be distorted .
*2 When using plain paper and recycled paper (85 g/m2 (23-lb bond))
*3 When using plain paper and recycled paper (85 g/m (23-lb bound)) with A4 or B5-R orientation
When using paper sizes other than A4 or B5-R, the capacity is 1,500 sheets (100 copies)
*4 65 sheets for a paper size exceeding A4/Letter
*5 Rear-side angle stapling is only available for A4-R and A3.
*6 Includes an added cover.
NOTE:
This Machine Specification Sheet is for reference only. Check with your Marketing Department for the precise specification.
Structural Overview
MEMO

Structural Overview
4.IC Card Authentication Kit specifications
IC Card Authentication Kit (Optional)
Applicable Card ISO 14443 TypeA/TypeC (FeliCa /Mifare )

Radio Law Category Guided read-write communication equipment
Power Source Power received from USB port
Dimensions (W × D × H) 92 mm × 64 mm × 16 mm (3 5/8" × 2 1/2" × 5/8") (excluding protruding parts)
Weight 90 g (3 oz)
NOTE:
Check with your Marketing Department for the precise specification.

Structural Overview
MEMO

Structural Overview
5.Structural Overview
5-1. Overall Block Structure

The unit consists of the following blocks.
1) External Paper Feed Section

This section feeds a single sheet of paper from paper stacked in the paper feed tray, sending it to the
registration section.
2) Internal Paper Feed Section

This section feeds a single sheet of paper from paper stacked in the three paper feed trays, sending it to the
registration section.
3) Registration Section
This section sends sheets (while adjusting the speed and timing) from the external or internal paper feed
section toward the face up paper receiving tray for printing at the BP section.
4) BP Section
This section prints via print heads as the Belt Platen feeds the paper.
5) Paper Transfer Section

This section sends printed sheets to the face up paper ejection section or paper elevation section.
In duplex printing, sheets are sent to the switchback section for printing on the other side.
When face down paper ejection is specified, sheets are ejected in the face down paper ejection section.
6) Paper Ejection Section

• Face Up Paper Ejection Section
This section transfers printed sheets onto the face up paper receiving tray. Otherwise, sheets are
ejected to an optional multi-finisher via an paper ejection connection kit.
• Face Down Paper Ejection Section

This section transfers printed sheets onto the face down paper receiving tray.
7) Switchback Section
In duplex printing, sheets are sent to the switchback section for printing on the other side.
8) Ink Flow Section

This section supplies ink from ink cartridges to the print heads for printing.
9) Waste Ink Section

Waste ink from cleanings is collected in the waste ink tank.
10) Controller Section

Two controllers are available, a built-in GDI controller and an optional external PS controller. These
components control print jobs and scanning of originals from the touch panel or scanner.

Structural Overview
Overall Block Structure
Ink flow section
Paper ejection section (face down) BP section
Paper transfer section
Switchback
section
External paper feed

section
Registration section
Paper ejection section

Internal paper feed section (face up)
Waste ink section

Structural Overview
Overall Unit Structure
Ink cartridge unit

Upper transfer unit
Paper receiving
Face down paper fence unit
tray unit Head holder unit
Face down paper ejection unit
BP unit
Switchback unit B Paper elevation unit
Switchback unit A
Paper feed tray unit
Registration roller unit
External paper feed unit
Vertical paper feed unit A
Vertical paper feed unit B
Internal paper feed unit
Paper feed tray Waste ink

tank
Face up paper ejection unit
(Paper ejection optional connection kit)
Maintenance unit

Structural Overview
Structure of Ink Supply Unit (Rear of the Machine)
Ink supply unit
Pressurized ink tank

Pressurized ink tank air
valve
Negative pressure ink tank
Circulation pump
Negative pressure ink
tank air valve
Bellows unit
Overflow pan

Structural Overview
Face down paper ejection Ink cartridges
Switchback Upper transfer
Paper elevation
Print heads
Face up paper ejection
External paper feed

Belt platen
Maintenance unit
Internal paper feed
Waste ink tank
5-2. Overview of Paper Transfer

1) Paper Transfer
• The scraper and pickup rollers rotate and supply
External paper feed Internal paper feed
paper from the paper feed tray to the registration
rollers.
• Similarly, from paper feed tray 1, paper is sent by
the scraper and pickup rollers to the registration
Printing
rollers via transfer rollers 4 and 5.
rollers via transfer rollers 2, 3, and 5. Paper elevation
Face up paper
ejection/finisher
rollers via transfer rollers 1, 3, and 5.
Upper transfer
• The registration rollers transport the paper under
the print heads for printing while the suction fans
keep the paper firmly on the transfer belt.
• After simplex print jobs are printed, the sheets are Face down Switchback
paper ejection
sorted by the gate of the paper elevation unit, and
jobs for face up ejection are sent to the face up
paper receiving tray.
In contrast, duplex print jobs are sent to the
switchback unit via the paper elevation unit and upper transfer unit.
• Paper is then reversed by the switchback unit, and the guiding gate sends the paper to the registration
rollers again before it passes under the print heads and the second side is printed.

Structural Overview
Face down paper ejection

Paper ejection sensor
Ink cartridge
Paper ejection roller 1ࠉ
Switchback sensor Upper transfer roller 5 Upper transfer roller 4 Upper transfer roller 3
Flipper
Switchback
Upper transfer roller 2
Switchback roller Upper transfer
Flipper sensor
Upper transfer OUT sensor
Transfer path changeover gate
Upper transfer roller 6 Paper elevation
Re-feed roller
Top edge sensor 2 Print head
Re-feed sensor
Registration sensor
Pickup roller Top edge sensor 1 Face up paper ejection
Paper elevation IN sensor
Scraper roller
External paper feed

Transfer belt roller 1
Transfer belt roller 2
Registration roller
Vertical paper feed sensor 5

Vertical paper feed roller 5 Belt platen
Maintenance unit

Vertical paper feed roller 4
Vertical paper feed roller 3 Paper feed roller 1 Internal paper feed
Paper feed tray 1

Waste ink tank
Vertical paper feed sensor 1 Paper feed roller 2 Paper feed tray 2
Paper feed roller 3

Paper feed tray 3
2) Paper Transfer Sensors

• The status of paper transferred from the paper feed tray is checked by vertical paper feed sensors 1–5.
If the timing of paper is detected to be off as it passes vertical paper feed sensor 5, the transfer speed is
adjusted by vertical paper feed roller 5.
• The status of paper transferred to the registration rollers is detected by the registration sensor.
• After paper is transferred from the registration rollers, top edge sensors 1 and 2 detect multiple sheets
accidentally fed at once. Leading and trailing edges are also monitored by these sensors. Ejection timing is
determined by leading and trailing edge data.
• CIS detectors detect both sides of paper being transferred from registration rollers and controls the printing
side position.
• If paper is transferred with the leading edge raised, it may strike the print heads and damage the nozzle
surfaces. To prevent this, the paper lift detection sensor detects if the leading edge is raised.
• The paper elevation IN sensor detects the status of paper being transferred.
• The flipper operates on a particular timing based on signals received from the flipper sensor to switch the
paper path to the switchback unit.
• The paper ejection sensor (reflection sensor) detects the timing of paper transfer.
• The upper transfer OUT sensor is the point of reference for the paper transfer distance in the direction of the
switchback section.
• The switchback sensor detects paper jams in the switchback section. The weight of paper itself serves to
switch the paper path during switchback, as the transfer path changeover gate is pressed by sheets.
• The re-feed sensor determines speed control of re-feed rollers to adjust the timing of paper arriving at the
registration rollers.

Structural Overview
5-3. Overview of Ink Flow Path

• Ink flow paths can be broadly divided into two types of paths: paths to supply the ink required in printing and a
waste ink path for ink from print head cleaning and other maintenance.
• Ink from ink cartridges is temporarily stored in the negative pressure ink tanks, from which it is supplied to the
print heads via pressurized ink tanks.
• Ink supply is regulated by the opening and closing of solenoid valves in the ink paths and by the air valve
leading to the ink chamber of each unit. Here, an air filter prevents paper dust and other foreign substances
from entering the ink paths.
• During cleaning, a bellows pump forces ink out of the print heads. Discharged waste ink drains into the waste
ink tank because of the difference in fluid levels.
• Any ink that overflows from ink cartridges, positive or negative pressure ink tanks, or print heads is sent to the
overflow pan or elsewhere, and then to the waste ink tank.
1) Ink Supply Path
• Ink is supplied from ink cartridges to the negative pressure ink tanks and pressurized ink tanks and then to
the print heads.
• An RFID tag is embedded in tip of each ink cartridge. When ink cartridges are loaded, the tag communicates
with the unit to determine the suitability of the ink. Supported ink triggers connection of the ink path to the
negative pressure ink tank, enabling ink supply.
• Pressurized and negative pressure ink tanks must contain particular amount of ink at all times. For this
reason, ink levels are detected by ink level detection sensors.
• If the ink level in both the pressurized and negative pressure ink tanks fall, the ink supply valve is opened
and ink is supplied to the specific color negative pressure ink tank from ink cartridge(s).
• Ink is supplied from negative pressure to pressurized ink tanks by cylinder pumps and automatically from
pressurized ink tanks to the print heads because of the difference in fluid levels. A cooler/heater unit
regulates the ink temperature between pressurized and negative pressure ink tanks, and a nylon filter in the
pressurized ink tanks removes debris.
• Although pressurized and negative pressure ink tanks are open to the air via the overflow pan and a filter
(for pressurized ink tanks only), these tanks must be opened and closed under some conditions. Solenoid
valves (air valves) are used for this purpose.
• Pressurized ink tanks are not normally open to the air.
• Negative pressure ink tanks are normally open to the air, but they are closed during cleaning operations.
• During cleaning operations, ink is supplied to pressurized ink tanks and air pressure inside the tanks is
increased to force ink through the print heads.
2) Waste Ink Path
• During cleaning operations, ink forced out of the print heads is collected in the waste ink tank after passing
through the maintenance unit.
• Waste ink tank sensors detect the level of waste ink in the waste ink tank. There are two of these sensors.
One sensor detects the level when the tank it is nearly full of waste ink, and the other sensor detects the
level when the tank is full. The sensors work on the following principle. A coil supporting the waste ink tank
holder bends under the weight of waste ink, changing the level of a shade built into the holder, and the
principle of light being blocked or passing through (as detected by two transmission sensors built into the
unit) determines whether the tank is present, nearly full, or full.
• Any ink that overflows from the positive or negative pressure ink tanks flows to the waste ink tank via the air
valve.
• If the waste ink level in the overflow pan exceeds a particular level, it is detected by the overflow sensor, and
unit operation is stopped. At this time, any ink higher than the overflow sensor overflows into a waste ink
tank through a waste ink collection tube.
• Additionally, waste ink collected after dripping from ink cartridges or print heads is ultimately sent to the
waste ink tank.

Structural Overview
3) Schematic Diagram of Ink Path
Ink Supply Unit
TAG Direction of cartridge

RFID board attachment/removal
Joint
The path of one color ink is shown as an example.
: Ink path Ink Cartridge
: Air valve/waste ink path
S M
Ink supply valve Joint connection/
(solenoid) disconnection motor
From other colors Ink level detection sensor
Pressurized Filter
Ink Tank
Air chamber in
common to all colors
of pressurized ink
tank
Heater
Ink bus
Ink bus
Heat Sink
Head Head Head Head Head Head
Dust filter Ink level detection sensor

From other colors
Maintenance unit ink tank
Pressure Negative Cooling
adjusting ressureInk Tank Fan
bellows Air chamber in
of negative pressure
ink tank
One-way
Negative pressure circulation pump
ink tank air valve valve (each
color separate)
Pressurized ink
tank air valve Ink drain for heat exchanger
S (normally sealed with a blind
Weight Ink drain for Negative plug)
pressure ink tank (normally
Bellows sensor
S sealed with a blind plug)
Upper limit sensor M
Idle position sensor Overflow and leak detection tank
Bellows elevation
Lower limit sensor mechanism
Ink level detection sensor
Normal Cleaning 3-way Drain joint

Strong Cleaning
Near-full detection
Full detection
Waste ink tank
Waste ink tank Tray

Structural Overview
4) Cross Section of Ink Supply Unit

Structural Overview
MEMO

External Paper Feed Section
Chapter 4. External Paper Feed Section

Contents
1. Mechanisms........................................................................................ 4-2
1-1. Basic Structure........................................................................... 4-2
1-2. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism..................................... 4-5
1-3. Paper Feed Mechanism............................................................. 4-7
1-4. Paper Size Detection Mechanism.............................................. 4-9
1-5. Paper Volume Detection Mechanism....................................... 4-10
1-6. Multiple Paper Feed Detection Mechanism............................. 4-11
1-7. Noise Reduction Paper Feed Assisting Action......................... 4-12
2. Disassembly..................................................................................... 4-13
2-1. Elevator Motor.......................................................................... 4-13
2-2. Paper Feed Tray Unit............................................................... 4-14
2-3. Paper Feed Tray Paper Detection Sensor............................... 4-15
2-4. Paper Feed Tray Paper Width Potentiometer.......................... 4-15
2-5. Paper Feed Tray Paper Length Detection Sensor................... 4-16
2-6. Paper Feed Tray Paper Volume Detection Sensors 1 and 2 .. 4-16
2-7. Paper Feed Tray Lower Limit Sensor...................................... 4-16
2-8. External Paper Feed Motor Assembly..................................... 4-17
2-9. External Paper Feed Unit......................................................... 4-17
2-10. Stripper Interlock Switch........................................................ 4-20
2-11. Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Sensors A and B..................... 4-21
2-12. Paper Feed Tray Upper Safety Switch................................... 4-21
2-13. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Switch......................................... 4-22
2-14. Paper Feed Tray Lower Safety Switch................................... 4-22
2-15. Pickup Roller.......................................................................... 4-23
2-16. Scraper Roller........................................................................ 4-23
2-17. Stripper Plate......................................................................... 4-23
3. Adjustment....................................................................................... 4-24
3-1. Upper Limit Position Adjustment.............................................. 4-24
3-2. Adjusting the Paper Width Potentiometer................................ 4-25
3-3. Adjusting the External Paper Feed Amount............................. 4-25

1. Mechanisms
1-1. Basic Structure
The external paper feed section is comprised of the external paper feed unit and paper feed tray unit (including the
elevation mechanism). Paper loaded in the external paper feed tray is fed to sections inside the printer one sheet at
a time.
Elevator motor
Paper guides
Elevation mechanism
Paper guide lever
1. Paper Feed Tray Unit

• The paper guides can be moved into position to match the width of paper used and then locked with the paper
guide lever.
• The size of paper is detected by output from the paper width potentiometer and paper length detection sensor on
the paper feed tray.
• From the point when paper is loaded in the paper feed tray, a print signal triggers the elevator motor to raise the
paper feed tray so that the top sheet reaches the upper limit position (the feeding position).
Paper feed tray paper

length detection sensor Paper feed tray paper
width potentiometer

• The upper limit position is detected by the upper limit sensor, attached to the frame, by means of a shield plate
on the external paper feed unit, which is raised by the paper feed tray. (This is based on the upper limit sensor
and shield plate selected by paper setting.)
• The lower limit position is detected by the lower limit sensor by means of a shield plate built into the elevation
mechanism.
• The paper feed tray detects activation and deactivation of the upper limit sensor as paper is transferred and
maintains paper feed pressure as it rises to the specified position.
• If the paper feed tray detects that there is no more paper, it lowers to the lower limit position.
• The paper feed tray can be raised or lowered by means of the paper feed tray elevation switch. However, it can
only be raised when at the lower limit position and when there is paper.
• The paper feed tray stops moving immediately and completely if the lower limit frame on the bottom of the tray is
pressed and the unit detects that the safety switch was activated.
Paper feed tray

lower limit sensor
Paper feed tray

elevation switch
Paper feed tray upper Paper feed tray

limit sensor B upper limit sensor A
Lower limit frame
Upper limit adjustment assembly Paper feed pressure assembly
Paper feed stay assembly

Pickup roller
Scraper roller
Paper feed roller assembly
Stripper unit assembly

2. External Paper Feed Unit

This unit feeds paper in the paper feed tray to the paper transfer section, one sheet at a time.
Feeding starts when paper reaches the feeding position by means of the elevator. After each sheet is separated by
the paper feed rollers, paper is passed to the next stage in transfer, the registration rollers.
• The paper feed roller assembly, comprising the scraper rollers and pickup rollers, can rotate around the pickup
roller drive shaft, which serves as a fulcrum.
• The scraper rollers, under the influence of the paper feed pressure lever, come into contact with paper under
their own weight when the unit is set up for thin paper. When the unit is set up for card stock, the rollers come
into contact with paper both under their own weight and with force from a spring.
• When the paper feed roller assembly comes into contact with paper lifted by the elevator, it rotates and raises. It
stops at the position where the shield plate built into the the top of the assembly obstructs the sensor affixed to
the unit.
The shield plate incorporates two sensors for different detection positions.
• The pickup rollers and scraper rollers are linked by gears, and they turn in sync in the direction paper is fed.
Paper loaded on the paper feed tray is transferred toward the registration rollers by the rotation of the pickup and
scraper rollers.
• If paper other than from the highest position of the paper feed tray is fed, resistance from the stripper plate
prevents this paper from being transferred to the registration rollers.
• The pickup and scraper rollers stop after transferring a particular amount of paper.
• The pickup and scraper rollers turn while empty after paper is transferred by the registration rollers.
• The stripper section floats freely, and stripper pressure keeps it moving level to the pickup rollers.
• Although a spring keeps the stripper section in contact with the pickup rollers, if multiple sheets are fed
accidentally, it is pressed down by the sheets and can move to a position below the guide board.
• The force of the stripper section against the pickup rollers is adjusted according to the angle of the stripper
pressure adjust dial.
• The angle of the stripper section against paper loaded in the paper feed tray is adjusted according to the angle
of the stripper angle adjust dial.
• The registration sensor determines that no paper is being fed if paper cannot be detected within a specified
period.
Pickup roller
Paper feed pressure lever

Stripper plate
Stripper angle adjuster

Stripper spring
Stripper pressure adjuster

1-2. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism

Raising and lowering of the paper feed tray is controlled by the elevator motor, upper limit sensors A and B, the
lower limit sensor, the paper feed pressure lever sensor, and the elevator switch.
1. Elevation of the Paper Feed Tray
Paper feed tray upper limit sensor A

Detection
Paper feed tray upper limit sensor B
Paper feed tray
Elevator motor
Paper feed tray lower limit sensor
Raising Raising stopped
Paper Feed Tray Raising Mechanism
When the paper feed tray is raised, the elevator motor lifts the tray and stops at the upper limit position (when
the upper limit sensor is activated). The criteria determining the upper limit position vary depending on upper limit
sensors A and B and software settings. (These depend on paper settings on the control panel.) Additionally, upper
limit sensors A and B are related as follows.
HIGH
Card stock: The timing when the Upper limit sensor A detection status changes from ON to OFF.
Tray Height
Standard: The timing when the Upper limit sensor B detection status changes from OFF to ON.
Thin Paper: The timing when the Upper limit sensor A detection status changes from OFF to ON.
LOW
Upper Limit Position

Towards the lower limit position
ON < Sensor light path blocked >
Light blocked
Upper limit sensor A
Light received
OFF < Sensor light path open > OFF
ON
Light blocked
Upper limit sensor B
OFF
Light received
Thin paper Standard Card stock
Paper Feed Upper Limit Position for Each Type of Paper
During printing after the paper feed tray is raised, paper is fed one sheet at a time by the paper feed rollers, and the
paper feed tray is repeatedly raised to maintain the same upper limit position. This operation to maintain the upper
limit position is performed during printing. When there is no more paper in the paper feed tray, the external paper
feed tray automatically lowers to the lower limit position.

2. Lowering of the Paper Feed Tray

When the paper feed tray is lowered, the elevator motor lowers the tray and stops at the lower limit position (when
the lower limit sensor is activated).
Paper feed tray upper limit sensor A

Paper feed tray upper limit sensor B
Paper feed tray
Elevator motor
Paper feed tray lower limit sensor Detection
Lowering Lowering stopped
Paper Feed Tray Lowering Mechanism
3. Elevator Switch
• Used to raise or lower the paper feed tray manually.
→ When in the lower limit position
Pressing the switch once raises the elevator to the upper limit position and positions it. Pressing the switch again as
the elevator is rising stops the elevator.
→ When the tray is in positions other than the lower limit position
Holding the switch lowers the elevator. The elevator stops when the lower limit position is reached or when the
switch is released.
4. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Safety Mechanisms

When the paper feed tray is raised or lowered, safety is ensured by the upper and lower safety switches. If the
paper feed cover is raised, the upper safety switch is released, and if the lower limit frame is pressed, the lower
safety switch is released. Release of just one of the safety switches (upper or lower) is interpreted as problem with
the paper feed tray section, and the elevator motor is stopped. The Elevator motor stops when the Stripper unit
is removed and the Stripper interlock switch goes OFF. This is to prevent the hand of the machine operator to be
pinched by the elevated Paper feed tray with the Stripper unit removed from the machine.

1-3. Paper Feed Mechanism

Paper in the paper feed tray is fed to the paper transfer section one sheet at a time.
Feeding starts when paper reaches the feeding position by means of the elevator. After each sheet is separated by
the paper feed rollers, paper is passed to the next stage in transfer, the registration rollers.
1. Paper Feed Mechanism

The mechanism of paper transfer activates the registration rollers, and paper transfer by the external paper feed is
timed to be ready when the registration rollers are activated.
The timing between startup of the paper feed rollers and activation of the registration rollers is determined by the
print mode. (The same principle applies in simplex and duplex printing.)
External paper feed roller Registration roller

(pickup roller) Registration sensor
Paper feed tray
(1) Idle (2) Paper feeding started Being transferred
Paper
(3) Registration sensor

activated (feeding slowed)
(5) Paper buckles (4) Reaches registration rollers
Summary of Paper Feeding by the External Paper Feed Unit
Registration sensor activated
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Paper Feed Timing

2. Paper Stripping Mechanism

Paper in the paper feed tray is sent between the pickup roller and stripper plate by rotation of the scraper.
Additionally, paper is carefully handled by the pickup roller and stripper plate so that only the top sheet is sent
inside the unit.
The stripper plate is pressed against the pickup roller by the force of the stripper spring, which creates resistance
against incoming paper and enables sheets to be handled correctly.
The angle and pressure of the stripper plate can be adjusted with the stripper angle and stripper pressure adjusters.
Pickup roller
Stripper plate
Stripper angle adjuster

Stripper spring
Stripper pressure adjuster
Adjusting the angle of stripping Adjusting the pressure of stripping

3. Paper Feed Pressure Change-Over Mechanism

The paper feed pressure lever can be moved left and right to switch between two levels of scraper paper feed
pressure (scraper pressure): Normal (weak) and Card (strong). Moving the paper feed pressure lever to the right
(card) increases the paper feed pressure (scraper pressure).
1-4. Paper Size Detection Mechanism

Paper size is detected by the following two methods.
1. Paper Transfer System: Paper length is detected by the timing of activation and deactivation of top edge
sensor 1.
2. System: Paper size is detected by the paper feed tray paper width potentiometer and paper length detection
sensor.
Paper feed tray

Paper guides
Paper length detection sensor
Top edge sensor 1
External paper
feed unit
Vertical
paper Top edge sensor 1
feed unit Paper length calculated from the timing
between activation and deactivation
System side Paper transfer side
Although the paper size is detected when paper is loaded in the paper feed tray or the other tray, if the paper length
detection sensor is triggered by incorrectly set feed tray paper guides or objects other than paper placed in the
paper feed tray, the system misinterprets this, treating it as if the paper is larger than the paper actually loaded.
Because printing at that wrong paper size occurs if paper is transferred after incorrect detection, the belt may
become soiled.
For this reason, the paper length is also detected in the paper transfer system. In the paper transfer system, paper
length is detected by the timing of activation and deactivation of top edge sensor 1. If different sizes are detected
in the system and the paper transfer section and the difference exceeds a particular range, the speed is controlled
based on the paper size detected in the paper transfer section.

1-5. Paper Volume Detection Mechanism

The amount of paper left in the paper feed tray is determined by the status of paper volume detection
sensors A and B when the paper feed tray is at the upper limit position.
Detection is only possible when the paper feed tray is at the upper limit position, and detection is based on status
as described in the following table.
Shield plate
(adjustable)
Paper volume
detection sensor
Concave (not adjustable)
A
Paper feed tray
B
Paper detection sensor
Reflective (not adjustable)
Paper Volume Detection Mechanism
Relationship of Remaining Sensor status

Level and Sensors Paper volume Paper volume
Paper detection sensor detection sensor A detection sensor B
100% to 50% Present OFF OFF
50% to 31% Present OFF ON

Amount of
paper left 30% to 11% Present ON ON
10% or less Present ON OFF

No paper left Not present --- ---
Paper Volume Detection Conditions

1-6. Multiple Paper Feed Detection Mechanism

A multiple paper feed occurs when multiple loaded sheets are accidentally transferred on top of each other. This
condition is detected to prevent problems from the sheets striking and damaging the print heads.
Multiple paper feeds are detected by the transmitting and receiving sides of top edge sensor 1. Differences in the
intensity of light received by the receiving side enable detection of multiple paper feeds.
The amount of light transmitted by incoming paper is detected and compared with a reference value. If value is less
than the reference value, it is interpreted as a multiple paper feed, and transfer of the paper is stopped.
Note: Multiple paper feed detection is not performed for paper transferred from the direction of the switchback unit.
Top edge sensor 1 (transmitting side)

Registration sensor
Transfer belt rollers
Top edge sensor 1

Registration rollers (receiving side)
Preparation and start of

(1) paper transfer
(transmitting sensor ON)
(2) Paper buckles
Leading edge detected

(3) Multiple paper feed
detection started
(4) Sampling started
(5) Transmitting sensor OFF

Sampling finished
(6) Multiple paper feed

detection started
As paper is transferred, first the registration sensor is activated and then top edge sensor 1 is activated.
Multiple paper feed detection is not performed until the leading edge travels 5 mm after top edge sensor 1 is
activated. After the paper moves 5 mm, sampling begins in top edge sensor 1.
Note:Because top edge sensor 1 works on a principle of light transmission, sampling is not performed until the
paper moves 5 mm so that the optical axis of the sensor is completely covered.

1-7. Noise Reduction Paper Feed Assisting Action

Noise reduction paper feed assisting action refers to operation to reduce noise created by flattening paper that has
buckled as it is fed in the registration section.
As feeding in the registration section begins, the registration motor is activated and the external paper feed motor
is activated at the same time, which reduces the speed at which paper is flattened for quieter operation. This noise
reduction is performed for external paper feeding, internal paper feeding, and re-feeding (duplex printing).
External Paper Feeding: Performed by the external paper feed motor (normal rotation). 50 ms after operations to
assist in noise reduction begin, the motor is deactivated.
Note: By default, noise reduction is performed in external paper feeding, internal paper feeding, and re-feeding
(duplex printing).
Noise reduction paper Registration sensor Top edge sensor 1

feed assistance
(external paper feed)
External paper feed rollers Registration unit Transfer belt rollers

Registration rollers
Before registration section paper feeding Registration motor and external paper feed motor ON
(1) (Paper is buckled)
(2) (Noise reduction assistance started)
Noise reduction paper feed assistance finished

(4) (External paper feeding finished after 50 ms)
(3) Noise reduction paper feed assistance in progress
Summary of Noise Reduction Paper Feed Assistance
Timing Chart for Noise Reduction in External Paper Feeding

Name [Timing]
1. Registration sensor ON
OFF
2.
IN
ON
1. Registration motor
OFF
OUT
2. External paper ON
feed motor Noise reduction assistance in progress
OFF
50 ms
Motor deactivated 50 ms after assistance starts
Notes
Start Finish
Operation started Operation finished

2. Disassembly
2-1. Elevator Motor
1. Turn OFF the machine power and disconnect the power cable from the power source.
2. Lower the paper feed tray to the lower limit and turn the unit OFF.
3. Remove the center inner cover. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
4. Remove the left inner cover. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
5. Remove the ground wire. (IT 3x6 (1 pc))
6. Remove the reuse band.
7. Remove the connector. (1 pc)
8. Remove the elevator springs (front and rear).
9. Remove the elevator motor assembly. (IT 4x8 (1 pc) and 6 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc))
10. Remove the elevator motor cover. (W sems screw 3x6 (1 pc))
11. Remove the motor cover. (W sems screw 3x5 (4 pcs))
12. Remove the elevator motor collar.
13. Remove the spur gear m1x24.
14. Remove the spur gears m0.8x29+m1x14.
15. Remove the spur gears m0.8x23+m0.8x14.
16. Remove the spur gears m0.8x30+m0.8x14.
17. Remove the elevator motor collar.
18. Remove the elevator motor. (W sems screw 3x5 (2 pcs))
Note: After replacement, check operation in test modes 1423 (move to paper feed tray upper limit
position) and 1424 (move to paper feed tray lower limit position).
Elevator spring
Ground wire
Connector
Reuse band
Elevator motor

2-2. Paper Feed Tray Unit

Removing the Unit
3. Remove the wire harness cover guide and wire harness cover. (Binding screw 3x6 (1 pc for each))
4. Disconnect the wire harness from the connector and remove the wire harness holder from the paper feed tray
frame.
5. Remove the hinge cover. (IT 3x6 (1 pc))
6. Remove the E-ring on front and back (6 mm dia., 1 pc each) and paper feed tray retaining plate (on
front), and then remove the paper feed tray unit.
Paper feed tray wire harness

Wire harness cover guide
Wire harness cover Wire harness Holder (Mylar sheet)
Hinge cover
Paper feed tray

retaining plate

2-3. Paper Feed Tray Paper Detection Sensor

2. Remove the paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the paper guides. (2 pcs)(W sems screw 3x8 (4 pcs))
4. Remove paper feed tray table S.(P-tight screw 3x6 (4 pcs) and binding screw 3x8 (4 pcs))
5. Disconnect the connector and remove the paper detection sensor. (P-tight screw 3x8 (3 pcs))
Note: After replacement, check operation in test mode 1006 (paper feed tray paper detection sensor).
Paper guides
Paper feed tray table S
2-4. Paper Feed Tray Paper Width Potentiometer

3. Remove the paper guides. (2 pcs)(W sems screw 3x8 (4 pcs))
4. Remove the paper feed tray table L. (Binding screw 3x6 (7 pcs))
5. Remove the spur gear m1x72x6.
6. Remove the PF-TRAY-PCB. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
7. Remove the paper feed tray paper width potentiometer. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
Note: After replacement, complete paper size settings in test modes 1421 (paper feed tray paper width
potentiometer setting: Wide, 297 mm) and 1422 (paper feed tray paper width potentiometer setting:
Narrow, 105 mm).
Paper feed tray paper length detection sensor Paper feed tray paper width potentiometer
Paper feed tray paper detection sensor

2-5. Paper Feed Tray Paper Length Detection Sensor

3. Remove the paper guides. (2 pcs) (W sems screw 3x8 (4 pcs))
4. Remove the paper feed tray table L.(Binding screw 3x6 (7 pcs))
5. Disconnect the connector and remove the paper length detection sensor.
Note: After replacement, check operation in test mode 1010 (paper feed tray paper length detection sensor).
2-6. Paper Feed Tray Paper Volume Detection Sensors 1 and 2

2. Remove the rear cover center assembly. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
3. Remove the left top cover. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
4. Put the engine control PCB in maintenance position. (W sems screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
5. Disconnect the connector and remove paper feed tray paper volume detection sensors 1 and 2.
Note: After replacement, check operation in test modes 1036 (paper feed tray paper volumedetection sensor 1)
and 1037 (paper feed tray paper volume detection sensor 2).

volume detection sensor 1
Paper feed tray paper volume

detection sensor 2
2-7. Paper Feed Tray Lower Limit Sensor

3. Put the power supply unit in maintenance position. (W sems screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
4. Disconnect the connector and remove the lower limit sensor bracket. (IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc))
5. Remove the paper feed tray lower limit sensor.
Note: After replacement, check operation in test mode 1002 (paper feed tray lower limit sensor).
Paper feed tray lower limit sensor

2-8. External Paper Feed Motor Assembly

5. Disconnect the connectors (2 pcs) and remove the external paper feed motor assembly. (Round tip IT3C screw
4x8 (3 pcs))
Note: After replacement, check operation in test mode 1225 (starting and stopping the external paper feed
motor).
* Installation Precautions
• Check the fit with the pickup shaft.
• Tighten the belt tension by adjusting the tensioner.
(The tension is determined by spring force. Remember to tighten the tensioner mounting screw.)
Tensioner
Tension spring
Tensioner mounting screw
< Belt tension loosened > < Belt tension tightened >
2-9. External Paper Feed Unit

9. Remove the elevator springs R & L.

Take caution in removing the elevator springs.
Elevator spring (F) Elevator spring (R)
10. Remove the elevator motor assembly. (See section 2)

Hold the external paper feed tray to prevent it from dropping when removing the motor.
Elevator motor assembly
11. Remove the external paper feeding tray. (See section 2)

12. Remove the elevator support plate. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pc))
13. Remove the lower safety switch springs (front and rear).
Lower safety switch spring

Lower safety switch spring
(Rear)
(Front)
14. Remove the lower limit frame holder. (IT 3x6 (1 pc))
15. Remove the lower limit frame.
16. Remove the elevator guides (front and rear). (Binding screw 4x8 (2 pcs for each))
17. Remove the wire harness from the wire saddle.
Elevator guide (front)
Elevator support plate
Lower limit frame holder
Lower limit frame

18. Remove the connector. (1 pc)

19. Remove the external paper feed motor assembly. (See Section 2-8.)
20. Remove the external paper feed unit. (IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
MACHINE REAR VIEW
Wire saddle
Connectors
External paper feed motor assembly

2-10. Stripper Interlock Switch

2. Remove the External paper feed unit.
3. Remove the Stripper interlock switch assembly. (Round tip IT3C screw 3x6 (1 pc))
4. Remove the Switch cover bracket. (Round tip IT3C screw 3x6 (1 pc))
5. Disconnect the wire harness connector.
6. Remove the Stripper interlock switch.
Switch cover bracket
Stripper interlock switch assembly
Stripper interlock switch assembly
Switch cover bracket

2-11. Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Sensors A and B

Paper feed cover
2. Remove the paper feed cover. (Binding screw 3x8 (2 pcs))

3. Remove the three connectors.
4. Remove the upper safety switch spring.
5. Remove the upper limit unit assembly. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
6. Remove paper feed tray upper limit sensors A and B.
Note: After replacement, check operation in Test Mode No.1000 [paper feed tray upper limit sensor A] and
No.1001 [paper feed tray upper limit sensor B].
Paper feed tray Paper feed tray

elevation switch upper safety switch
Upper limit unit assembly
Paper feed tray upper Paper feed tray upper limit

limit sensor B sensor A
2-12. Paper Feed Tray Upper Safety Switch

4. Remove the upper safety switch spring.
6. Remove the paper feed tray upper safety switch. (Sems screw 3x14 (2 pcs))

2-13. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Switch

4. Remove the upper safety switch.
6. Remove the connector.
7. Remove the paper feed tray elevation switch
Note: After replacement, check operation in test mode 1035 (paper feed tray elevation switch).
2-14. Paper Feed Tray Lower Safety Switch

4. Remove the lower safety switch spring.
5. Remove the paper feed tray lower safety switch (the entire mounting bracket). (IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc))
Lower safety switch spring Paper feed tray lower safety switch

2-15. Pickup Roller

2. Remove the plastic clip of the pickup shaft.
3. Remove the pickup roller assembly by sliding it towards the front of the machine.
4. Remove the bushing and plastic paper feed support roller.
5. Remove the Pickup roller plastic clip.
6. Remove the Pickup roller.
Note:In mounting the Pickup roller back on the machine, make sure the side with the one-way clutch faces the
front of the machine.
2-16. Scraper Roller
2. Remove the scraper roller clip.
3. Remove the scraper roller along with the shaft and metal piece.
Note: In mounting the Scraper roller back on the machine, make sure the side with the one-way clutch faces the
front of the machine.
Pickup shaft Clip Scraper roller Clip Pickup roller
2-17. Stripper Plate

2. Lower the sliding lock on the left side of the stripper unit and slide the locking knob down.
3. Push the removal lever on the right side.
4. Remove the stripper sub unit from the guide plate.
5. Remove the stripper base, and then slide the stripper cover off.
6. Detach the stripper plate. (It is attached with double-sided tape.)
Stripper plate
Stripper cover Stripper base

MEMO

3. Adjustment
3-1. Upper Limit Position Adjustment
(1) Standard Adjustment (Perform mainly if the upper limit position has changed due to wear of the scraper roller)
Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the adjustment hole on the paper feed cover to adjust the position.
Turn clockwise to lower the upper limit position.
Turn counter-clockwise to raise the upper limit position.
In either case, one rotation adjusts the position by approximately 0.5 mm. (Not accounting for backlash from
turning back in the opposite direction.)
Phillips screwdriver
(2) Custom Adjustment (Perform mainly to support special user paper, by adjusting the sensor shield plate (sensor
actuator plate) for the Card and Custom paper.
Remove the scraper sub unit. On top, loosen the screw of the shield plate for the Card and Custom paper upper
limit to adjust the sensor shield position (the right hand side shield plate, which works in pairs with the Upper
limit sensor A).
Since the upper limit position adjustment is done based on the Standard paper (Sensor B) position, this
adjustment changes the Card and Custom paper upper limit position in relation to the Standard paper upper limit
position.
Move the shield plate toward the pickup roller to lower the upper limit position.
Move the shield plate toward the scraper roller to raise the upper limit position.
(Moving the shield plate 1.0 mm changes the upper limit position by approximately 0.4 mm.)
Shield plate

3-2. Adjusting the Paper Width Potentiometer

(1) Adjusting the Paper Width Potentiometer
• Test Mode No.1421 : Set the paper guides at a width of 297 mm and activate.
• Test Mode No.1422: Set the paper guides at a width of 105 mm and activate.
3-3. Adjusting the External Paper Feed Amount (paper buckle amount before Registration Roller)
By changing the External paper feed motor OFF timing, the paper buckle amount in front of the Registration roller
can be adjusted. The motor turning OFF too early will cause paper not to feed into the 2nd paper feed area. The
motor turning too late will make too much large of a buckle and cause the paper to bend or fold.
The motor OFF timing can be adjusted by the test mode setting.
The test mode number differs according the paper type.
• Test Mode No. 7701 (Normal paper)
• Test Mode No. 7747 (Card stock)
• Test Mode No. 7793 (Thin paper)
• Test Mode No. 7839 (Post card)
• Test Mode No. 7885 (Envelope)

Last Update : 2012/09/07 15:38
Registration Section
Chapter 5. Internal Paper Feed
Contents
1. Mechanisms........................................................................................ 5-2
1-1. Basic Structure .......................................................................... 5-2
1-2. Internal Paper Feed Action........................................................ 5-3
1-3. Paper Feed Tray Unit................................................................. 5-3
1-4. Internal Paper Feed Unit............................................................ 5-4
1-5. Paper Volume Detection Mechanism......................................... 5-4
1-6. Paper Size Detection Mechanism.............................................. 5-5
1-7. Assist Action............................................................................... 5-6
1-8. Paper Transfer Action................................................................ 5-8
2. Disassembly..................................................................................... 5-14
2-1. Internal Paper Feed Unit (Tray 1)............................................ 5-14
2-4. Internal Paper Feed Motor....................................................... 5-17
2-5. Internal Paper Feed Clutches 1, 2 and 3................................. 5-18
2-6. Upper Limit Sensors of Trays 1, 2 and/or 3............................. 5-19
2-7. Paper Detection Sensors of Trays 1 to 3 (3 Sets).................... 5-19
2-8. Stripper Plates 1, 2 or 3........................................................... 5-20
2-9. Internal Paper Feed Rollers 1, 2 and/or 3.
(Scraper and Pickup Rollers)....... 5-20
2-10. Elevator Motors for Trays 1, 2 and 3...................................... 5-21
2-11. Set Interlock Switch for Trays 1, 2 and 3............................... 5-22
2-12. Paper Volume Detection Sensor for Trays 1, 2 and 3............ 5-23
3. Adjustment....................................................................................... 5-25
3-1. Stripper Plate Angle Adjustment.............................................. 5-25
3-2. Internal Paper Feed Upper Limit Position Adjustment............. 5-25
3-3. Internal Paper Feed Tray - End Fence & Slider (Sensor Actuator)
Position Adjustment........ 5-25

1. Mechanisms
The internal paper feed section is a unit that transfers paper from the internal paper feed tray unit to vertical paper
feed unit B. It is comprised of the internal paper feed unit and internal paper feed tray unit, and in back, components
including the tray elevator motors (1–3), internal paper feed clutches (1–3), and internal paper feed motor.
The tray structure is (from the top down) tray 1, tray 2, and tray 3. Tray set interlock switches, paper volume
detection sensors, paper size detection sensors (4 each), and a tray elevator in the back of the unit are provided for
each tray. Additionally, the internal paper feed unit incorporates a paper detection sensor and upper limit sensor.
Role of Each Sensor
1. Safety Switch for Trays 1–3
Activation of the safety switch for trays 1–3 determines the presence of trays.
2. Upper Limit Sensor
Activation of the upper limit sensor determines whether the top of the paper is at the upper limit position.
3. Tray Paper Detection Sensor
Activation of the tray paper detection sensor determines whether there is paper in the tray.
4. Paper Volume Detection Sensor
Data from trays in the upper limit position determines how much paper is left. Because trays are equipped with a
single level sensor, determination of the remaining level occurs when they are more or less than 50% full of
paper.
5. Paper Size Detection Sensor (4)
The pattern formed by four Interrupt type sensors enables detection of the paper size. These sensors work on a
principle of the shield plate sliding from the end paper guide on a structure incorporating links and gears.
Tray elevator motor 1 Internal paper feed clutch 1
Tray elevator motor 2

Internal paper feed motor
Tray elevator motor 3
Rear
Internal paper feed tray unit
Front
< Tray elevator assembly >

Coupling Tray catch Tray elevator motor
< Front View > < Rear View >

Paper volume detection sensor Tray set interlock switch

< Internal Paper Feed Unit >

< TOP View >
< Tray Rail >
Upper limit sensor
< BOTTOM View >
Paper size detection sensors
1-2. Internal Paper Feed Action

(1) Pull the internal paper feed tray unit toward the front to supply paper.
(2) After paper is supplied, once a tray is loaded in the main unit, the tray elevator motor is activated and the
bottom plate is raised. When the upper limit sensor issues notification, the tray elevator motor stops.
(3) Trays are lifted whether or not paper is loaded, because the upper limit sensor and paper detection sensor
are installed in the main unit. The presence of paper is determined when the upper limit position is reached,
and if there is no paper, a “No Paper Left” error occurs.
(4) Once trays are pulled from the unit, the coupling is disengaged and the tray drops under its own weight.
(5) Pressing the start button on the operation panel activates the internal paper feed motor.
(6) The paper feed start signal activates the internal paper feed clutch. This starts rotation of the pickup and
scraper rollers, which transfers paper.
(7) Paper sent by the scraper rollers is separated into individual sheets by the pickup rollers and stripper plate.
Sheets pass through vertical paper feed units B and A to the registration rollers.
(8) Detection by sensors later in the paper path deactivates the internal paper feed clutch of each tray.
• Internal Paper Feed Tray 1 → Vertical Paper Feed Sensor 4
(9) When there is no more paper, a signal indicating this is emitted and the unit stops. At this time, the bottom
plate is not automatically lowered. Pulling out a tray from the unit disengages the joint and lowers the tray
under its own weight.
(10) When jams occur, paper feeding stops immediately. The bottom plate is not lowered automatically.
(11) Paper is easy to remove when a tray is pulled out because the stripper plate and pickup roller are separated.
1-3. Paper Feed Tray Unit

The paper feed tray unit is held in place inside the unit. Paper up to A3/Ledger size can be loaded in the trays. The
paper feed tray unit itself does not include electronic parts.
The paper feed tray unit is loaded by inserting the rails in the two rails on the main unit and inserting the positioning
pins (two in back, one in front) in the positioning holes on plates on the main unit. The paper feed tray unit is also
secured at this time by a rotary catch built into the back.
Action
• Pull the internal paper feed tray unit toward the front to supply paper.
• After paper is supplied, once a tray is loaded in the main unit, the bottom plate is raised and the top of the paper
moves to the upper limit position.
• Paper is fed one sheet at a time by rotation of the pickup and scraper rollers while the bottom plate is raised to
keep the top of the paper at the upper limit position.
• When there is no more paper, a signal indicating this is emitted and the unit stops. At this time, the bottom plate
is not automatically lowered. Pulling out a tray from the unit disengages the coupling and lowers the tray under
its own weight.
• When jams occur, paper feeding stops immediately. The bottom plate is not lowered automatically.
• The side paper guides incorporate a rack-and-pinion structure so that both sides move together in a range to
match a paper width of 180–298 mm (with 1 mm pitch on either side, for 2 mm combined). Paper is loaded
relative to the center.

• Paper is easy to remove when a tray is pulled out because the stripper plate and pickup roller are separated.
• The end paper guide can be smoothly adjusted to match the length of paper.
• Action of Elevator Motor
The following actions are performed by the elevator motor, which moves the tray bottom plate.
An ON tray set signal (indicating that a tray has been loaded) activates rising by the elevator motor
After this, activation of the upper limit sensor causes the elevator to be lowered once for positioning,
and when the upper limit sensor goes OFF, the elevator rises again and stops. If the upper limit sensor
goes OFF during printing, the elevator is raised.
Size detection slider
Size detection
sector gear
Size detection
intermediate gear
Size detection rack
Tray rail
1-4. Internal Paper Feed Unit

The internal paper feed unit is comprised of the pickup roller sub unit, stripper sub unit, drive sections, and the upper
limit detection section.
Scraper roller Paper detection sensor

Stripper cover
Paper detection sensor shield actuator
Stripper angle adjust dial Stripper pressure release lever

Stripper plate
Stripper holder action
Stripper holder
Pickup roller clip
1-5. Paper Volume Detection Mechanism

This The amount of paper left is detected from the position of the tray bottom plate (by the paper volume detection
sensor) and whether there is paper left (indicated by the paper detection sensor). The amount of paper left is based
on sensor output as follows.
Loading paper in a tray and loading (inserting) the tray in the unit causes the bottom plate to rise. During feeding,
the top of paper remains at the highest position. The amount of paper left is determined by the tray paper detection
sensor and paper volume detection sensor. For this determination, detection is valid when the tray is at the upper
limit position, and data from trays in the upper limit position determines how much paper is left. Note that because
trays are equipped with a single level sensor, this determination occurs when they are more or less than 50% full of
paper.
Paper
Upper limit
sensor
Tray
Level sensor
Shield
plate
OFF OFF ON
Relationship of Remaining Amount of paper left

Level and Sensors
100% 50% 0%
Amount of Paper detection sensor ON ON OFF

paper left Paper volume detection sensor OFF ON ON
Shield plate
Joint

1-6. Paper Size Detection Mechanism

Paper size is detected by the following two methods.
1. Paper Transfer System: .Paper length is detected by the timing of activation and deactivation of top edge sensor 1.
2. System: The pattern formed by four interrupt type sensors (the pattern of ON and OFF sensors)
enables detection of the paper size. These sensors work on a principle of the shield
plate sliding from the end paper guide on a structure incorporating links and gears.
Trays 1–3
Paper size detection
sensors (4)
Sensor 4
Top edge sensor 1
Sensor 3
Sensor 2
External paper
Sensor 1 feed unit
Paper
Vertical
paper Top edge sensor 1
Paper length calculated from the timing
feed unit between activation and deactivation
Tray
Direction of tray removal
System Paper transfer system
Although the paper size is detected when paper is loaded in the internal paper feed tray, if the paper length
detection sensor is triggered by incorrectly set feed tray paper guides or objects other than paper placed in the
paper feed tray, the system misinterprets this, treating it as if the paper is larger than the paper actually loaded.
Because printing at that wrong paper size occurs if paper is transferred after incorrect detection, the belt may
become soiled.
For this reason, the paper length is also detected in the paper transfer system. In the paper transfer system, paper
length is detected by the timing of activation and deactivation of top edge sensor 1. If different sizes are detected
in the system and the paper transfer section and the difference exceeds a particular range, the speed is controlled
based on the paper size detected in the paper transfer section.
FF
Millimeters Inches 4 3 2 1
Type of paper Length Type of paper Length
B5R 182
A4R 210 Letter R 216 (215.9)
B5 257
Letter 280 (279.4)

A4 297
Foolscape 340
B4 364 Legal (14) 365 (355.6)
A3 420 Ledger (17) 432 (431.8)
etection pattern
ensor layo t
Rear 4 3 2 1 Front
Paper size detection

1-7. Assist Action

For information about the assist action of the internal paper feed tray, see Section 1-4, "Assist Action," in Chapter 6,
"Registration Section."

1-8. Paper Transfer Action

Paper Transfer(Tray 1)

Paper feed rollers

Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
(1) Paper feeding (2) Vertical paper feed clutch 1 ON
(Internal paper feed clutch 1 ON) (30 ms after internal paper feed clutch 1 ON)
Paper
Tray 1 Tray 1
Tray 2 Tray 2
Tray 3 Tray 3
eing transferred
(4)
Internal paper feed clutch 1 OFF
(3) Internal paper feed clutch 1 OFF
(Vertical paper feed sensor 5 ON) (Simultaneously vertical paper feed sensor 4
ON, then after 50 ms vertical paper feed roller 5
activated)
Tray 1 Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 2
Tray 3 Tray 3

Paper Transfer (Tray 1) Timing Chart
Paper Transfer: Paper transfer action
Name Timing
ON
1. Vertical paper feed sensor 4
OFF
2. "Not arrived" "Still present" error
error
3.
4.
IN
5.
6.
7.
8.
ON
1. Internal paper feed motor
OFF
ON
2. Internal paper feed clutch 1
OFF
30 ms
3. Vertical paper feed clutch 1 ON
OFF
OUT
ON
4. External paper feed motor 50 ms
OFF Further details omitted
5. Assistance
6.
Start Finish
Transfer started Transfer ended
1. Error : External paper feed motor lock error (Error: 1034)

Notes
: Internal paper feed motor lock error (Error: 1035)

: Vertical paper feed sensor 4 "Not arrived" error (Error: 1056)
: Vertical paper feed sensor 4 "Still present" error (Error: 1076)

Paper Transfer Action (Tray 2)

Vertical paper feed
roller 3
Vertical paper feed
roller 2
Vertical paper feed

ra 1
sensor 2 Internal paper feed clutch 2
Paper feed roller 2
ra 2
ra 3

(Internal paper feed clutch 2 ON) (30 ms after internal paper feed clutch 1 ON)
ra 1 ra 1
Paper
ra 2 ra 2
ra 3 ra 3
eing transferred
(4) Vertical paper feed clutch 1 ON (3) Internal paper feed clutch 2 OFF
(21 ms after vertical paper feed sensor 2 ON) (Vertical paper feed sensor 2 ON)
ra 1 ra 1
ra 2 ra 2
ra 3 ra 3
(5) Vertical paper feed clutch 2 OFF ( ) Vertical paper feed clutch 1 OFF
( imultaneousl vertical paper feed sensor 3 ON (Vertical paper feed sensor 5 ON)
then after 1 ms vertical paper feed roller 5 activated)
ra 1 ra 1
ra 2 ra 2
ra 3 ra 3

Paper Transfer: Paper transfer action
Name Timing
1. Vertical paper feed ON "Not arrived" error
sensor 2 "Still present" error
OFF
2. Vertical paper feed ON
sensor 3 OFF
"Not arrived" error "Still present" error
3.
4.
IN
5.
6.
7.
8.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
3. Vertical paper feed clutch 2
OFF
ON 30 ms 21 ms
OUT

OFF
ON 61 ms
5. External paper feed motor Further details omitted
OFF
6. Assistance
Start Finish

Notes


Paper Transfer Action (Tray 3)

Vertical paper feed sensor 3 Vertical paper feed roller 5
ra 1
ra 2
Paper feed roller 3
Vertical paper feed roller 1 ra 3

(Internal paper feed clutch 3 ON) (50 ms after vertical paper feed clutch 3 ON)
ra 1 ra 1
ra 2 ra 2
Paper
ra 3 ra 3
eing transferred
(4) Vertical paper feed clutch 1 ON (3) Internal paper feed clutch 3 OFF
(124 ms after vertical paper feed sensor 1 ON) (Vertical paper feed sensor 1 ON)
ra 1 ra 1
ra 2 ra 2
ra 3 ra 3
(5) Vertical paper feed clutch 2 OFF ( ) Vertical paper feed clutch 1 OFF
( imultaneousl vertical paper feed sensor 3 ON (Vertical paper feed sensor 5 ON)
then after 1 ms vertical paper feed roller 5 activated)
ra 1 ra 1
ra 2 ra 2
ra 3 ra 3

Paper Transfer: Paper Transfer Action
Name Timing
ON "Not arrived" error
1. Vertical paper feed sensor 1 "Still present" error
OFF
ON "Not arrived" error
2. Vertical paper feed sensor 3
OFF
3. "Still present" error
4.
IN
5.
6.
7.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OUT
ON 50 ms 124 ms
OFF
ON 61 ms
5. External paper feed motor OFF Further details omitted
Assistance
Start Finish

Notes
2. Vertical paper feed clutch 2 control:

If deactivation of vertical paper feed clutch 2 for a previous sheet occurs after
activation of vertical paper feed clutch 2 for the next sheet, the clutch remains
activated without going OFF. This control occurs only when feeding from tray 3.
Explanation: Clutch deactivation alone may be executed if processing for the second sheet is executed after
completion of processing for the first, but clutch activation may not be executed, and if activation
does not occur, it may cause jams.

MEMO

2. Disassembly
2-1. Internal Paper Feed Unit (Tray 1)

4. Remove the bottom inner cover. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
7. Remove the front door lock mechanism. (IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
8. Move the maintenance unit (ink pan) to the retracted position.
9. To keep the BP unit transfer belt clean and free of ink, put a sheet of paper on it.
10. Move the BP unit to the upper limit position.
11. Pull out tray 1.
12. Disconnect the wire connector and remove internal paper feed clutch 1. (5 mm dia. E-ring)
13. Slide the gear and gear-pulley out of the way (1 pc each). (6 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc each))
14. Remove the metal bushing. (6 mm dia. E-ring)
Slide the Gear and Gear-Pulley maximum out to allow the metal bushing to come off.

15. Remove the mounting screw of the internal paper feed unit (tray 1) in back. (IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc))
Mounting screw of
the Internal paper
feed unit (Tray 1).
Mounting screw of
the Internal paper
feed unit (Tray 2).
Mounting screw of
the Internal paper
feed unit (Tray 3).
< Internal paper feed unit >
Where the mounting

screw goes in.
16. Remove the mounting bracket of the internal paper feed unit (tray 1) in front. (IT3C screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
Mounting screws of the Bracket.
17. Disconnect the wire connector from the machine frame on the back of the unit . (1 pc)
<Do not forget to re-plug the wire connector in assembly.>
18. Remove the scraper spring.
Wire connector to be unplugged.
Scraper spring to be removed.
19. Remove the internal paper feed unit (tray 1) from above, in front.
Note: After this procedure, remove the paper from the transfer belt.


7. Pull out trays 1, 2 and 3.
8. Remove the Tray rail guide from the left Tray rail of the Tray 1. (Shouldered screw x 1 pc).
Tray Rail left (TRAY 1)
Tray Rail Guide (Left) removed and the Rail mounting screw visible.
Tray Rail Guide (Left)
9. Remove the Tray rail of tray 1 (left side). (IT3C screw 3x8;1 pc front and IT3C screw 4x8;1 pc rear)
Note: Use a 5.5 mm wrench.
Mounting screws of the Bracket.
16. Remove the internal paper feed unit (tray 2) from the top, in front.


7. Pull out trays 1, 2 and 3.
8. Remove the Tray rail guide from the left Tray rail of the Tray 2. (Shouldered screw x 1 pc).
9. Remove the Tray rail of tray 2 (left side). (IT3C screw 3x8;1 pc front and IT3C screw 4x8;1 pc rear)
Note: Use a 5.5 mm wrench.
16. Remove the internal paper feed unit (tray 3) from the top, in front.
Tray Rail Guide (Left) removed and the Rail mounting screw visible.
Tray Rail Guide (Left)
5.5 mm wrench Mounting screws of the Bracket.

2-4. Internal Paper Feed Motor

6. Put the ink supply unit in maintenance position. (W sems screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
7. Remove the connector. (2 pcs)
8. Remove the tension spring.
9. Remove the internal paper feed motor assembly. (IT3C screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
10. Remove the gear. (Set screw 4x5)

11. Remove the internal paper transfer motor mounting bracket assembly. (Round tip IT3C 4x12 (4 pcs)
Note: After replacement, check operation in test mode 1227 (internal paper feed motor).
Note: Refer to the following figure for the timing belt path.
Internal paper feed timing

belt
Internal paper feed assembly output shaft

2-5. Internal Paper Feed Clutches 1, 2 and 3.

4. Remove the connector and take out internal paper feed clutches 1–3. (5 mm dia. E-ring)
Note: After replacement, check operation in test modes 1229, 1230, 1231 (internal paper feed clutches 1 to 3).
2-6. Upper Limit Sensors of Trays 1, 2 and/or 3.

2. Follow the instruction given on the previous pages of this chapter and remove the Internal Paper Feed Unit out
of the machine of the tray of which the Upper limit sensor needs to be replaced.
3. Remove the Upper limit sensor from the detached Internal paper feed unit
Note: After replacement, check operation in test modes 1003, 1004 or 1005 (upper limit sensor) depending on
which Upper limit sensor was replaced.
< TOP View >
Upper limit sensor
< BOTTOM View >

2-7. Paper Detection Sensors of Trays 1 to 3 (3 Sets)

2. Follow the instruction given on the previous pages of this chapter and remove the Internal Paper Feed Unit out
of the machine of the tray of which the Upper limit sensor needs to be replaced.
3. Remove the Upper limit sensor from the detached Internal paper feed unit
Note: After replacement, check operation in test modes 1007, 1008 or 1009 (paper detection sensor) depending
on which Paper detection sensor was replaced.
< TOP View >
< BOTTOM View >
2-8. Stripper Plates 1, 2 or 3.

2. Pull out and remove all three Internal Paper Feed Trays from the machine.
3. Remove the pickup roller (Pickup roller clip (1 pc)) for which the Stripper plate is to be replaced.
4. Remove the stripper holder.
5. Remove the stripper plate. (It is attached with double-sided tape.)
Stripper Plate
Release the Stripper holder with

fingers while pushing up the
Stripper pressure release lever
with other finger.

2-9. Internal Paper Feed Rollers 1, 2 and/or 3. (Scraper and Pickup Rollers)
2. Pull out and remove all three Internal Paper Feed Trays from the machine.
3. Remove the Scraper and Pickup rollers from the appropriate Internal paper feed unit. (1 plastic clip per roller.)
Note: Both rollers contain one-way bearing. Make sure to mount the rollers facing in the correct direction.
< Scraper & Pickup Roller >

- same part -
The side with the one-way The side with only the plastic
bearing faces towards the core faces the rear of the
front of the machine (faces machine. (This side goes into
towards the Plastic clip). the shaft first.)
Plastic clip
Scraper roller
Pickup roller
Stripper plate
Stripper holder
Stripper angle adjustment dial
Stripper pressure release lever

2-10. Elevator Motors for Trays 1, 2 and 3.

2. Remove the Rear cover center assembly. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
3. Put the Power supply unit in maintenance position. (W sems screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
4. Put the Engine control PCB in maintenance position. (W sems screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
5. Put the Ink circulation unit in maintenance position. (W sems screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
6. Pull out and remove the Internal Paper Feed Tray from the machine (for the tray to which the elevator motor is
going to be removed).
7. Unplug the sensor wire connector and motor wire connector from the Tray elevator motor assembly.
8. Remove the Tray elevator motor assembly. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
9. Remove the Elevator motor from the assembly. (W sems screw 3x30 (2 pcs))
Note: After the motor replacement, check the motor operation by test mode 1425, 1426, or 1427 (moving tray
to the upper limit position) depending on which Elevator motor for which tray was replaced.
Tray elevator motor assembly 1
< Tray Elevator Motor Assembly >

- cover removed -
Elevator motor
FRONT View
REAR View

2-11. Set Interlock Switch for Trays 1, 2 and 3.

6. Remove the Tray elevator motor assembly for the appropriate tray. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
7. Remove the Tray set interlock switch from the assembly. (W sems screw 3x14 (2 pcs))
Note: After replacement, check the switch operation by the test mode 1185, 1186 or 1187 (set safety switch for
trays) depending on for which tray the switch was replaced.

- cover removed -
FRONT View
Tray set interlock switch
REAR View
2-12. Paper Volume Detection Sensor for Trays 1, 2 and 3

6. Remove the Tray elevator motor assembly for the appropriate tray. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
7. Remove the Sensor cover. (IT3C screw 3x8 (1 pc))
8. Remove the Paper volume detection sensor from the assembly.
Note: After replacement, check the sensor operation by test mode 1038, 1039 or 1040 (paper volume detection
sensor) depending on for which tray the sensor was replaced.

- cover removed -
FRONT View
Paper volume
detection sensor
REAR View

2-13. Paper Size Detection Sensors (1 to 4) for Trays 1, 2 and 3.

2. Pull out and remove all three Internal Paper Feed Trays from the machine
4. Remove the Tray rail guide (right) for the appropriate tray. (Shouldered screw x 1 pc)
5. Unplug one wire harness connector on the rear of the machine for the Paper size detection sensor assembly for
the appropriate tray.
6. Remove the Tray rail (right) for the appropriate tray. (IT3C screw 3x8;1 pc front and IT3C screw 4x8;1 pc rear)
7. Remove the Sensor cover. (IT3C screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
8. Remove the Paper size detection sensors and unplug the wire connectors from thensors.
Note: After the sensor replacement, check the sensor operation using test modes 1011, 1012 or 1013 (paper
size detection sensor) depending on which Paper size detection sensors for which tray were replaced.
Tray rail (right)
Paper size detection sensors 1, 2, 3 and 4.

MEMO

3. Adjustment
3-1. Stripper Plate Angle Adjustment

Adjust the stripper angle by pulling out the tray and turning the stripper angle adjust dial in the stripper section of the
internal paper feed unit. Adjustment is possible in a range of 1 to 6, with the standard value being 3.
The following adjustment is possible, based on a reference value of 3.
• Turning the dial clockwise:
As the marker progresses from 4 to 5 to 6, the stripper plate angle increases.The angle becomes steeper.(This
may correct the multiple feeds.)
• Turning the dial counter-clockwise:
As the marker progresses from 2 to 1, the stripper plate angle reduces.(This may correct no-paper-feed-paper-
jam.)
Stripper angle adjust dial
3-2. Internal Paper Feed Upper Limit Position Adjustment

The upper limit position of the Internal paper feed tray can be adjusted. Pull out the all three Internal paper feed
trays and remove the triangle-shaped bottom inner cover on the front-left-bottom of the machine to access a plate
on each paper feed unit, labeled with the letters U and D. (See photo.)
Adjustment toward U (for "up”; to the left) raises the upper limit position, and adjustment toward D (for "down"; to the
right) lowers the upper limit position.
Raises the upper limit position (UP)
Lowers the upper limit position (DOWN)

3-3. Internal Paper Feed Tray - End Fence & Slider (Sensor Actuator) Position Adjustment
The paper size in the internal paper feed trays are detected by the position of the end fence in the tray.
If the position between the end fence and the slider is incorrect, the machine cannot detect the correct paper size in
the tray.
When in need, follow the steps below to make the adjustment.
1) Remove the internal paper feed tray from the machine.
2) Set A4 size paper (Length = 297 mm paper) in the paper feed tray and slide the end fence against the paper.
If A4 size paper is not available, use a scale and set the end fence at 297 mm position.
End fence
( 297 mm )
A4 size paper
3) Turn over the internal feed tray up-side-down, and remove the size detection device cover plate.
Size detection
SCREW device cover plate
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

4) Remove the Flat Gear; m1x36x4.
Flat Gear; m1x36x4
5) Slide the Slider to match the 3 mm diameter positioning hole on the Slider against the 3 mm diameter hole on
the Tray.
Slider
3 mm diameter positioning hole
6) While the two 3 mm hole are aligned, put back the previously removed Flat Gear; m1x36x4.
7) Put back the size detection device cover plate to complete the adjustment.

MEMO

Chapter 6. Registration Section
Contents
1. Mechanisms........................................................................................ 6-2
1-1. Basic Structure ................................................................................................ 6-2

1-2. Vertical Paper Feed Unit B Mechanism............................................................ 6-3
1-3. Vertical Paper Feed Unit A Mechanism............................................................ 6-4
1-4. Assist Action..................................................................................................... 6-4
1-5. Registration Roller Mechanism......................................................................... 6-7
1-6. Paper Position Detection Unit Mechanism....................................................... 6-7
1-7. Detection Mechanism for Leading and Trailing Edges..................................... 6-8
2. Disassembly..................................................................................... 6-11
2-1. Vertical Paper Feed Unit A............................................................................. 6-11

2-2. Vertical Paper Feed Sensor 5 (Vertical Paper Feed Unit A)........................... 6-11
2-3. Vertical Paper Feed Roller 5 (Vertical Paper Feed Unit A)............................. 6-12
2-4. Vertical Paper Feed Unit B............................................................................. 6-12
2-5. Vertical Paper Feed Sensor 1 (Vertical Paper Feed Unit B)........................... 6-13
2-9. Vertical Paper Feed Roller 1 (Vertical Paper Feed Unit B)............................. 6-14
2-10. Vertical Paper Feed Roller 2 (Vertical Paper Feed Unit B)........................... 6-15
2-13. Internal Feed Paper Jam Door Interlock Switch
(Vertical Paper Feed Unit B).......................... 6-15
2-14. Vertical Paper Feed Clutch 1........................................................................ 6-15
2-15. Vertical Paper Feed Clutch 2........................................................................ 6-16
2-16. Registration Motor Assembly........................................................................ 6-16
2-17. Registration Sensor (Send).......................................................................... 6-16
2-18. Registration Sensor (Receive)...................................................................... 6-17
2-19. Top Edge Sensor 1 (Send)........................................................................... 6-18
2-20. Top Edge Sensor 1 (Receive)...................................................................... 6-18
2-21. Registration Roller........................................................................................ 6-18
2-22. Guide Roller.................................................................................................. 6-20
2-23. Paper Position Detection Unit....................................................................... 6-20
2-24. Paper Lift Detection Sensor.......................................................................... 6-21
2-25. Paper Width Detection Sensor (FRONT & REAR)....................................... 6-22
3. Adjustment....................................................................................... 6-24
3-1. Adjustment to Make the Registration Roller and BP Unit Parallel.................. 6-24
3-2. CIS Adjustment............................................................................................... 6-24
3-3. Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment........................................................................ 6-28

1. Mechanisms
The registration section transfers paper into the printing area from the internal or external paper feed unit or
switchback unit. This section is comprised of vertical paper feed units B and A, the registration roller unit, and the
paper position detection unit.
Registration roller unit
Paper position detection unit
Vertical paper feed unit B
Normal printing action

1) Registration rollers stop before paper from the feed or switchback sections are transferred further.
2) The leading edge of paper from the feed or switchback sections comes into contact with the registration rollers,
which are stopped, making the front edge parallel to the registration roller shaft.
3) The leading edge of paper from the paper feed tray or internal paper feed section is detected by the registration
sensor. If no paper is fed, the registration rollers do not rotate.
4) As rollers rotate at a specific speed, the straightened paper is held and then transferred with a specific force.
5) Multiple paper feeds are detected by top edge sensor 1. If a multiple paper feed occurs, the registration rollers
stop rotating before the leading edge of paper reaches the print heads.
6) The registration rollers continue rotating at a specific speed until the trailing edge is clear of the registration
rollers.
7) After a specific period once paper has cleared the registration rollers, the registration rollers stop rotating.
8) If paper jams other than non-feeds are detected, the registration rollers stop rotating.
Top edge sensor 1 (receive)
Registration sensor
(receive) Registration roller

1-2. Vertical Paper Feed Unit B Mechanism

Paper feeding from tray 1
1) Vertical paper feed clutch 1 is activated about 30 ms after the paper feed start signal is received, and vertical
paper feed roller 4 starts rotating.
2) The internal paper feed unit transfers paper loaded in the paper feed tray unit.
3) The internal paper feed unit stops after paper passes vertical paper feed roller 4, activating vertical paper feed sensor 4.
4) After a specific period once paper has passed vertical paper feed roller 4 and vertical paper feed sensor 4 is
activated, the external paper feed motor is started and vertical paper feed roller 5 starts rotating.
5) Vertical paper feed clutch 1 stops after paper passes vertical paper feed roller 5, activating vertical paper feed
sensor 5, and vertical paper feed roller 4 stops rotating.

4) Vertical paper feed clutch 1 starts after a specific period once vertical paper feed sensor 2 is activated, and
vertical paper feed roller 3 starts rotating.

4) Vertical paper feed clutch 1 starts after a specific period once vertical paper feed sensor 1 is activated, and
vertical paper feed roller 3 starts rotating.
Registration sensor Registration Section: Roller and Sensor Layout


Stripper section

Tray 1
Tray 2
Stripper section
Tray 3
Stripper section


Vertical paper feed sensor 2 Internal paper feed tray 1

Internal paper
feed tray 2
Vertical paper feed sensor 1 Progression of paper
Internal paper feed tray 3

< REAR View >
Positioning pins
Points of attachment
1-3. Vertical Paper Feed Unit A Mechanism

1) Paper from the trays (1–3), passing through the internal paper feed and vertical paper feed unit B, is detected
by upstream sensors (vertical paper feed sensors 4 and 3). After a specific period, vertical paper feed clutch 2
is activated and vertical paper feed roller 5 receives paper. Vertical paper feed roller 5 is driven by the external
paper feed motor.
2) Vertical paper feed clutch 1 is deactivated once paper passes vertical paper feed roller 5 and is detected by
vertical paper feed sensor 5.
3) If detection by vertical paper feed sensor 5 occurs after detection of paper jams, the internal and external paper
feed motors and electromagnetic clutch are deactivated. (*1)
4) The actual timing of detection as paper passes vertical paper feed sensor 5 is compared to the ideal timing to
adjust the transfer speed by vertical paper feed roller 5. This occurs as paper passes the registration sensor and
is transferred to the registration roller unit.
• If the timing is later than the ideal timing, vertical paper feed roller 5 will increase the rotation speed for faster
transfer.
• If the timing is sooner than the ideal timing, vertical paper feed roller 5 will decrease the rotation speed for
slower transfer.
5) If detection by the registration sensor occurs after detection of paper jams, the internal paper feed motor and
electromagnetic clutch will be deactivated. (*1)
6) Once paper reaches the registration rollers, which are stopped, it is transferred until the leading edge is parallel
to the registration roller shaft, and the external paper feed motor stops.
7) When paper is transferred by the registration rollers, the vertical paper feed roller 5 rotates 1.03 times faster than
the registration rollers to transfer the paper, and when the trailing edge deactivates vertical paper feed sensor 5,
the external paper feed motor is stopped.
Note 1: Items 3 and 5 describe processing for jam detection.

Positioning pins
(Inserted in unit rear plate)
Points of attachment
(Affixed to unit front plate with screws)
Drive side guide plate
Driven side guide plate
Jam release lever
Fulcrum
(Appearance when closed) (Appearance when open)
Progression of paper

1-4. Assist Action

Assist control by the vertical paper feed unit is as follows.
Assist control by the vertical paper feed section (paper feeding from the internal paper feed tray) serves the
following two purposes.
1. To control slippage during paper transfer by the registration roller section, caused by back tension created by
stripper pressure from the stripper section and resistance in the paper path.
2. To reduce noise created by flattening paper that has buckled as it is fed in the registration section.
Unlike paper feeding from the external paper feed section, paper feeding from the internal paper feed tray may
generate significant back tension from stripper pressure in the stripper section and resistance in the paper path.
This is due to differences in the layout of the paper path and feed rollers. The back tension may cause slippage
when paper is transferred by the registration rollers.
Controlling back tension is one purpose of assist control by the vertical paper feed section, in which back tension
from the vertical paper feed section is counteracted by running the external paper feed motor in reverse to drive
vertical paper feed roller 5.
In conjunction with action by the registration rollers, vertical paper feed roller 5 is also operated for assist control.
Assist control, which occurs until the trailing edge of sheets leave the vertical paper feed sensor 5, can counteract
the effect of back tension occurring in the stripper section or other areas.
Assist control is activated in sync with the activation of the registration motor, and the external paper feed motor
stops when vertical paper feed sensor 5 is deactivated.
Note: By the default setting, the noise reduction is performed in external paper feeding, internal paper feeding, and
re-feeding (duplex printing).
Top edge sensor 1

External paper feed rollers Registration sensor
Vertical paper feed sensor 3 Vertical paper feed sensor 5

Vertical paper feed Vertical paper feed clutch 1

roller 2
Vertical paper feed Tray 1

sensor 2
Vertical paper feed
Paper feed roller 2
clutch 2
Tray 2
Force to transfer paper by registration rollers
Force to push against Slippage occurs in registration section paper

paper by vertical paper feeding due to back tention from vertical paper
feed roller 5
(back tention) feed section
Tray 1
Tray 2

External paper feed motor ON External paper feed motor OFF

(1) (Registration motor ON) (2) (Vertical paper feed sensor 5 OFF)
Being transferred
Tray 1 Tray 1
Tray 2 Tray 2
T ere is also a pattern

en t e next s eet is
ON transferred it o t
Registration motor deactivation of sensor
OFF
External paper feed ON

motor (reversed) OFF
ON
Vertical paper feed
sensor 5 OFF
(1) (2) Vertical paper feed sensor 5

OFF
1-5. Registration Roller Mechanism

The registration roller section is comprised of the registration rollers (made of rubber), the guide rollers (plastic), the
registration sensor, and top edge sensor 1. The registration and guide rollers are constantly subjected to pressure
from the guide roller pressure spring.
The registration rollers are driven by the registration motor.
Registration motor assembly
Registration
roller assembly
SS roller assembly
Registration sensor
Top edge sensor 1
Guide roller assembly Part applying pressure
Guide roller pressure spring

1-6. Paper Position Detection Unit Mechanism

This unit is between the registration rollers and the head that is closest to the registration area. The unit is
comprised of a section for paper lift/crease detection (including paper retainer), a section for paper width detection,
and supporting sections.
1. Detection of Paper Lift
• If paper lift exceeds a specific amount, the lift is detected, transfer stops, and operation to clear jamming is
executed (by moving the belt platen to the lower limit).
• Detection of paper lift
Paper lifted higher than a specific amount comes into contact with the detection gate and vibrates. This
movement is detected by a sensor and interpreted as lift exceeding the prescribed amount. All types of lift
can be detected, including lift at the corners or rippling.
2. Paper Width Detection
• Image centering
The width of the entire sheet of paper is detected, and images are centered relative to the sheet position.
• Masking
The paper is constantly detected, and portions of images that exceed the width are masked.

Paper lift detection sensor
(detection gate)
Top edge sensor 2
Suction fan (6 pcs)
Transfer belt rollers
Transfer belt
Schematic Diagram of Paper Lift Detection
Gate gap
Adjustment arm Top edge sensor 2
(reflective)
CIS
Detection gate
Paper Position Detection Unit (Side View)

Reference for attachment (rear)
Plate spring for correcting torsion
Reference for attachment (front)
Paper Position Detection Unit (Overall View)
Paper Lift Detection Mechanism
Top edge sensor 1 Paper lift detection Top edge sensor 2

sensor
Transfer belt rollers Transfer belt
Suction fan
(1) Paper transfer
Paper with a curled leading edge
Paper lift detection sensor ON

(2) (Lift detected) Paper lift detection
Transfer stopped
(3) (Belt platen stopped)

1-7. Detection Mechanism for Leading and Trailing Edges

(1) Paper Detection
Leading and trailing edges are constantly detected by top edge sensors 1 and 2 (incorporated in the head
holder).
(2) Ink Drop Timing

Leading-edge detection data from top edge sensor 2 (reflective), installed just before the head that is most
upstream, determines the ink drop timing. If the leading edge cannot be detected by top edge sensor 2(*1),
leading-edge data from top edge sensor 1 (transmissive) determines ejection timing. Thus, leading and trailing
edges are also constantly detected by top edge sensor 1.
*1: Because a reflective sensor is used in top edge sensor 2, the following conditions may cause detection
problems.
1. Using preprinted paper that has a printed border.
2. Using colored paper.
3. Using paper with low reflectivity.
4. Duplex printing, in combination with conditions from 1 to 3 of above.
Top edge sensor 1 (send) Top edge sensor 2

(reflecting type sensor)
CIS

2. Disassembly
2-1. Vertical Paper Feed Unit A
5. Put the power supply unit in maintenance position. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
6. Remove the belt.
7. Take the wire harness out of the wire saddle.
Timing belt
Reuse band
8. Remove the reuse band.

10. Remove Vertical paper feed unit A from the front. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
< Vertical Paper Feed Unit A >

2-2. Vertical Paper Feed Sensor 5 (Vertical Paper Feed Unit A)

2. Remove vertical paper feed unit A. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the sensor cover plate. (W sems screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
4. Remove vertical paper feed sensor 5. (Sems screw 3x14 (1 pc))
Note: After replacement, check operation by Test Mode No.1031 (vertical paper feed sensor 5).
Sensor cover plate
2-3. Vertical Paper Feed Roller 5 (Vertical Paper Feed Unit A)

2. Remove vertical paper feed unit A. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the sensor cover plate. (W sems screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
4. Remove the gear. (W sems screw 3x8 (1 pc))
5. Remove the bearings in front and back. (8 mm dia. E-ring (2 pcs))
6. Remove vertical paper feed roller 5.

2-4. Vertical Paper Feed Unit B

2. Remove the bottom left-side cover. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
6. Remove the external paper feed unit. (Refer to Chapter 4.)
8. Remove vertical paper feed unit B from the external paper feed section. (IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
Note: Move the elevator shaft out of the way towards the above while this work.
Vertical Paper Feed unit B
Disconnect wire connectors (4 pcs).

< Vertical Paper Feed unit B >
2-5. Vertical Paper Feed Sensor 1 (Vertical Paper Feed Unit B)

2. Remove vertical paper feed unit B. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the sensor bracket for sensor 1. (W sems screw 3x6 (1 pc))
Note: After replacement, check operation by test mode 1027 (vertical paper feed sensor 1).

3. Remove the sensor bracket for sensor 2. (W sems screw 3x6 (1 pc))

3. Remove vertical paper feed sensor 3 from the plastic tabs.

3. Remove vertical paper feed sensor 4 with the cover. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs))

Pulley
Vertical paper feed roller 4 Pulley
Pulley

Pulley
2-9. Vertical Paper Feed Roller 1 (Vertical Paper Feed Unit B)

3. Remove pulley assembly S2M30. (6 mm dia. E-ring (2 pcs))
4. Remove the metal bushing (2 pcs). (6 mm dia. E-ring (2 pcs))
5. Remove vertical transfer drive roller 1.

3. Remove pulley assembly 22S3M+30S2M. (6 mm dia. E-ring (2 pcs))
4. Remove the metal pieces (2 pcs). (6 mm dia. E-ring (2 pcs))

3. Remove pulley assembly S2M30. (6 mm dia. E-ring (2 pcs))

3. Remove pulley assembly 22S3M+30S2M. (6 mm dia. E-ring (2 pcs))

2-13. Internal Feed Paper Jam Door Interlock Switch (Vertical Paper Feed Unit B)
2. Remove the external paper feed unit. (Refer to Chapter 4.)
4. Remove the safety switch spring.
5. Remove the entire switch mounting plate. (3 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc))
6. Remove the internal feed paper jam door interlock switch. (Sems screw 3x14 (2 pc))
Internal feed paper jam door interlock switch
2-14. Vertical Paper Feed Clutch 1

3. Put the power supply unit in maintenance position. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs)).
4. Remove the vertical paper feed clutch holder. (W sems screw 4x8 (1 pc) and IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc)).
5. Unplug the wire connector and remove the vertical paper feed clutch 1.
Note: After replacement, check operation by test mode 1232 (vertical paper feed clutch 1).
2-15. Vertical Paper Feed Clutch 2

4. Remove the vertical paper feed clutch holder. (W sems screw 4x8 (1 pc) and IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc)).
5. Unplug the wire connector and remove the vertical paper feed clutch 2.
Note: After replacement, check operation by test mode 1233 (vertical paper feed clutch 2).
< Vertical paper feed clutch holder >
Wire connector
Vertical paper feed clutch holder
Vertical paper feed clutch holder

< Vertical paper feed clutch >

2-16. Registration Motor Assembly

3. Put the engine control PCB in maintenance position. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
5. Loosen the tensioner. (IT screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
6. Remove the registration motor assembly. (IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
7. Remove the mounting bracket. (W sems screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
Note: Remember to reattach the belt.
Note: After replacement, check the operation by test mode 1226 (registration motor).
Registration motor
Engine control PCB
Registration motor
Tensioner

2-17. Registration Sensor (Send)

2. Open vertical paper feed unit A.
3. Unhook the plastic hook of the sensor cover from the sensor bracket, and then unhook the relay connector.
4. Remove the registration sensor (send).
Note: After replacement, check the sensor operation by test mode 1025 (registration sensor).
2-18. Registration Sensor (Receive)

2. Unhook the plastic hook of the sensor cover from the guide plate, and then unhook the relay connector.
3. Remove the registration sensor (receive).
Note: After replacement, check the sensor operation by test mode 1025 (registration sensor).
Registration roller
Registration sensor (receive)
Guide roller
Registration sensor (send)

2-19. Top Edge Sensor 1 (Send)

2. Unhook the plastic hook of the sensor cover from the mounting bracket, and then unhook the relay connector.
3. Remove top edge sensor 1 (send).
Note: After replacement, check the sensor operation by test mode 1102 (top edge sensor 1).
2-20. Top Edge Sensor 1 (Receive)

2. Unhook the plastic hook of the sensor cover from the guide plate, and then unhook the relay connector.
3. Remove top edge sensor 1 (receive).
Note: After replacement, check the sensor operation by test mode 1102 (top edge sensor 1).
Registration roller
Guide roller
Top edge sensor 1 (send)

2-21. Registration Roller

6. Put the engine control PCB in maintenance position. (Pan-heads screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
8. Manually slide the Ink pan away from the BP Unit and remove the Guide roller pressure spring.
9. Set a 7.0mm wrench on the front end of the Registration roller shaft to prevent the shaft from rotating.
(Hook the wrench in the double-D cut section on the registration roller shaft in the front as shown on the photo.)
10. Remove the screw with a large washer from the center of the Registration shaft on the rear of the machine. (3x6
screw with built-in large washer.)
11. Remove the bearing from the front of the Registration roller shaft after removing a bearing stopper screw (Pan-
head screw 3x6 (1 pc) and a white plastic collar (1 pc)). < Pay caution not to drop the plastic collar. >
There is no need to remove the bearing from the rear end of the Registration roller shaft.
12. Slide the Registration roller forward to disengage the the drive gear in back, and then remove it from the front.
< View from the FRONT >

- the Ink Pan is manually moved
away from the BP Unit, which is at
the lower limit position -
Guide roller pressure spring
< FRONT of the machine >
< REAR of the machine >
Registration motor
7 mm Wrench
REMOVE
Watch for
DO NOT REMOVE the Collar.
Remove the Screw
BEARING to be removed
Screw with a large washer
Registration roller shaft

2-22. Guide Roller

Note: Be careful not to touch print heads during this work.
5. Put the Engine control PCB in maintenance position. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
6. Manually slide the Ink pan away from the BP Unit and remove the Guide roller pressure spring.
7. Remove the guide roller unit. (8 mm dia. E-ring in front and back (1 pc each))
Note: Slide the Guide roller unit forward to take out the fulcrum shaft from the metal bushing in the back, and
then remove it from the front.
8. Remove the plastic clip from the Guide roller shaft and remove the Guide roller from the unit.
Guide roller assembly
E-Ring
E-Ring
< REAR View >
< FRONT View >
Guide roller assembly

2-23. Paper Position Detection Unit

5. Put the engine control PCB in maintenance position. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
6. Remove the front door lock mechanism. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
7. Unplug the wire harness connector. (3 pin connector in front and 14 pin connector in the back.)
8. Remove the paper position detection unit from the front. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (1 pc))
Note: Adjustment of the gate height may lead to damaging of the Print Heads. Do not adjust the gate.
Note: Use of the alcohol to clean the CIS glass is not recommended.
Connector
Front door lock mechanism SCREW

2-24. Paper Lift Detection Sensor

2. Remove the paper position detection unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the paper lift detection sensor assembly. (W sems screw 3x6 (1 pc))
4. Remove the sensor cover. (Bind screw 3x6 (1 pc))
5. Remove the paper lift detection sensor.
Note: After the sensor replacement, check the sensor operation by test mode 1104 (paper lift detection sensor).
Paper lift detection sensor assembly
2-25. Paper Width Detection Sensor (FRONT & REAR)

2. Remove the Paper position detection unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the CIS mounting assembly. (W sems screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
4. Unplug the connectors.
5. Remove the CIS retaining plates (4 pcs). (P-tight screw 3x8 (1 pc each))
6. Remove the front and rear paper width detection sensors.
Note: Do not use alcohol in cleaning the CIS glass..
CIS mounting assembly
Paper Width Detection Sensor (FRONT) Paper Width Detection Sensor (REAR)
CIS retaining plates

MEMO

3. Adjustment
3-1. Adjustment to Make the Registration Roller and BP Unit Parallel
<Adjustment Overview>
Adjust the alignment of the registration roller after replacing the registration roller or registration roller unit.
<Adjustment Instructions>
Refer to Chapter 11, Section 3, "Adjustment: Adjusting the Registration Roller."
3-2. CIS Adjustment

Instructions for adjusting the CIS and checking the adjustment are as follows. This adjustment is to correct uneven
lighting from the CIS light source (shading compensation). Here, a sheet of clean white paper exceeding the
maximum paper feed supported width of 340 mm (A3 or Ledger size paper cut to the length of 360 mm and laid
sideways on the BP unit is good) is scanned and stored as the reference white value.
Do this after replacing the CIS or paper position detection unit. Although the front and rear units are generally
adjusted at the same time, they can also be adjusted individually.
ComColor models 9110, 7110 and 3110 contain only one CIS unit on the rear of the machine, which is the left
hand-side of the printed papers.
On these three models, only the rear CIS is adjusted --- the right-hand-side edge of the paper on these machine
models are calculated from the data scanned by the CIS on the rear of the machine and the paper size information
received from the paper feed tray.
1. Adjustment Procedure
1) Execute test mode 2407 (move the BP elevation motor to the lower limit position).
2) Open the right front cover.
3) Place a piece of paper on top of the BP Unit in the machine with the corner of the paper set at the position
shown on the photograph.
<< When adjusting the two CIS at one time.>>
Loading Position 1: < When adjusting both CIS units at the same time.>
Place a piece of paper cut to the length shown below (approx. 360 mm) on top of the BP Unit in the machine
with the corner of the paper set at the position shown on the photograph below.
A3 or Ledger size paper
cut to the length of 360
mm and laid sideways
Approx. 360 mm
Paper corner reference position.

on the BP Unit.

<< When adjusting one CIS at a time.>>

Loading Position 2: < When adjusting only the rear (left-side) CIS.>
Place an A4 size sheet (297 mm) sideways in the position shown on the photograph below left. Confirm
that the outside edge of the black plastic plate on the BP Unit in the front is approximately 70 mm from
the edge of the A4 size paper placed on the BP Unit.
REAR
297 mm
A4 size paper
70 mm
Paper corner reference position.
FRONT
Loading Position 3: < When adjusting the front (right-side) CIS.>

Place an A4 sheet, as shown, on the following photograph with the paper corner aligned at Loading
Position 1,shown on the previous page.
REAR
A4 size paper
FRONT
CAUTION:
Confirm that the BP registration pin
hole is not covered by the paper.
FRONT

4) Close the right front cover.
5) Execute the following CIS shading compensation test modes, depending on the paper loading position.
Loading Position 1: Test Mode 2461 (shading compensation for the left and right CIS at same time)
Loading Position 2: Test Mode 2462 (shading compensation for the left CIS only)
Loading Position 3: Test Mode 2463 (shading compensation for the right CIS only)
Note: Execute only the Test Mode 2462 <Loading Position 2 > for machines with only the left CIS,
such as ComColor models 9110, 7110 and 3110.
< Error Displays >
1. This process ends with an error if the CIS reference voltage was not read correctly. (See Note 1 on
next page.)
• W58-0225-1: Incorrect reference voltage for the left CIS
• W58-0225-2: Incorrect reference voltage for the right CIS
• W58-0225-3: Incorrect reference voltage for the left and right CIS
2. This process ends with an error if the unit determines that paper was not loaded in the specified position.
(See Note 1 on next page.)
• W58-0226-1: Reference paper loading error for shading compensation of the left CIS
• W58-0226-2: Reference paper loading error for shading compensation of the right CIS
• W58-0226-3: Reference paper loading error for shading compensation of the left and right CIS
• W58-0226-4: No reference paper loaded for CIS shading compensation
3. This process ends with an error if shading compensation not executed correctly. (See Note 1 on next
page.)
• W58-0227-1: Shading compensation error for the left CIS
• W58-0227-2: Shading compensation error for the right CIS
• W58-0227-3: Shading compensation error for the left and right CIS
7) Remove the paper.
8) If you have executed shading compensation for the left and right CIS, go to step 2, "Confirmation
Procedure."
If you have only adjusted one side, return to step 1 and adjust the other CIS.
2. Confirmation Procedure
1) Load a sheet of lightweight Riso paper on the transfer belt. (Load an A4 sheet in portrait orientation, where
it can be detected by the CIS.)
Note:
• Load the sheet centered relative to the width of the transfer belt.
• Load the sheet parallel relative to the transfer direction of the transfer belt.
(Use the suction holes of the transfer belt for reference.)
3) Execute test mode 2464 (checking CIS action).

1. This process ends with an error if the CIS reference voltage was not read correctly. (See Note 2 on next
page.)
• W58-0225-1: Incorrect reference voltage for the left CIS
• W58-0225-2: Incorrect reference voltage for the right CIS
• W58-0225-3: Incorrect reference voltage for the left and right CIS

2. An error occurs if paper is not detected. (See Note 2 on this page.)

• W59-0228-1: Edge detection error when confirming action of the left CIS
• W59-0228-2: Edge detection error when confirming action of the right CIS
• W59-0228-3: Edge detection error when confirming action of the left and right CIS
5) Remove the paper.
7) Execute the following test modes and check the value of each.
1. Execute test mode 1609 (left CIS paper level detection results).
2. Execute test mode 1610 (right CIS paper level detection results).
Note: No need to execute Test Mode No.1610 for machines without the right CIS.
Description: Indicates the paper level (as a percentage, with the reference paper level as 100%) when
test mode 2464 (checking CIS action) was executed.
Criteria: Acceptable if in the range 95–105%.
3. Execute test mode 1611 (left CIS belt level detection results).
4. Execute test mode 1612 (right CIS belt level detection results).
Note: No need to execute Test Mode 1612 for machines without the right CIS.
Description: Indicates the belt level (as a percentage, with the reference belt level as 100%) when
test mode 2464 (checking CIS action) was executed.
Criteria: Acceptable if 25% or less.
8) Execute test mode 1608 (CIS paper width detection results).

Description: Indicates the paper width (in 0.1 mm increments) when test mode 2464 (checking CIS
action) was executed.
Criteria: Acceptable if in the range 2090 to 2110 when A4 paper in portrait orientation was loaded.
Note:No need to execute Test Mode No.1608 for machines with only the left CIS, such as ComColor
models 9110, 7110 and 3110.
9) If any item is unacceptable, repeat the adjustment procedure.
10) When all items are acceptable, execute test mode 1497 (save adjustment values).
This backs up the settings values, which can be accessed by executing test mode 0503 (factory defaults).
Note 1: Adjustment ends with an error in the case of errors W58-0225 to 0227 and default settings are restored
(reference paper level: 0, threshold: 0, offset value: 128 (0 mV), black and white adjustment data: All 0).
In this case, CIS-based masking (edge detection) is not performed.
Note 2: Confirmation ends with an error in the case of errors W58-0225 and W59-0228, but the default settings
as described in note 1 are not restored.
< Determination of Errors >

1. Incorrect CIS reference voltage (W58-0225)
Criteria: If the reference voltage was not read correctly during the adjustment when the CIS was activated, it
is interpreted as a reference voltage error. Under the worst-case conditions, this error may occur
when the reference voltage is 400 mV or less or 1,280 mV or more.
Countermeasure:
1. Confirm the CIS is correctly connected. (Check the connection of connectors, for example.)
2. Replace the CIS.
3. Replace the Image Processing PCB.

2. No reference paper during shading compensation (W58-0226-4)

Criteria: If the average maximum value of five measurements outside the CIS masking area (the area 400
pixels from the left and right edges) after black adjustment is 6,600 or less, it is interpreted as a lack of
reference paper.
Countermeasure: Load proper reference paper.
3. Reference paper loading error during shading compensation (W58-0226-1, 2, 3)

Criteria: If the average minimum value of five measurements outside the CIS masking area (the area 400
pixelsfrom the left and right edges) after black adjustment is 50% of the maximum value or less, it is
interpreted as loading reference paper outside the specified position.
Countermeasure:
1. Making sure that the reference paper is clean, place it in the correct position.
2. Confirm that the CIS surface is clean.
4. Shading compensation error (W58-0227)

Criteria: Regarding the average value of five measurements after shading compensation, if the maximum
value minus the minimum value divided by the reference paper level is 0.05 or more, it is interpreted
as a compensation error. This enables you to confirm that shading compensation within 5% was
executed.
Countermeasure: Repeat the adjustment procedure.
5. Edge detection error when checking CIS action (W59-0228)

Criteria: The paper edge cannot be detected.
Countermeasure: Try replacing the paper.
3-3. Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

The sensor sensitivity needs to be adjusted when the Registration sensor, Top edge sensor 1 or Top edge sensor 2
is replaced.
1. Registration sensor & Top edge sensor 1

Make following adjustment when either of these two sensors are replaced.
1) Place either A3 (Ledger) or A4 (Letter) size clean white paper of which the customer normally uses, on the
external paper feed tray.
2) Press the tray elevation button or execute test mode No.1423 to raise the external paper feed tray to the
upper limit position.
3) Execute test mode No.1498 to automatically feed the paper to the two sensors.
4) Execute test mode No.1494 to automatically adjust the sensitivity of the two sensors.
Note: The two sensors, Registration sensor and Top edge sensor 1, are both adjusted at the same time.
5) Remove the paper from the machine.
The above sequence are described on the next page by an illustration.

[Registration sensor] & [Top edge sensor 1] sensitivity adjustment sequence:
Registration sensor (receive) Top edge sensor 1 (receive)
Transfer belt
Registration sensor (send) Registration roller Top edge sensor 1 (send)
1) Place a white sheet paper, which the

customer uses the most, on the external
paper feed tray. and raise the tray.
Paper
2) Execute test mode No.1498 to

automatically feed the paper.
Paper starts to feed.
Make sure that the paper

is not curled or lifted.
3) Test mode No.1498 completed.

The paper stops after going
past the Top edge sensor 1.
4) Execute test mode No.1494 to

automatically adjust the sensitivity
of the Registration sensor and Top
edge sensor 1.
5) Remove the paper from the machine

to complete the adjustment.

2. Top edge sensor 2 (reflecting type sensor)

Make following adjustment when the Tope edge sensor 2 is replaced.
1) Confirm that the BP unit is all the up to the printing position.

If not, activate test mode No.2405 to raise the BP unit to the upper limit position (printing position).
2) Activate test mode No.1495 to automatically adjust the sensor sensitivity.
When the test mode is activated, the PB motor and PB Fan goes ON and the Top edge sensor 2 activates
to make sensitivity self adjustment.
The sensitivity adjustment is made against the black color of the BP Transfer belt, so no paper is need for this
adjustment.
Top edge sensor 2 (reflective type sensor)
Drive roller
Driven roller
1) If the BP unit is not all the way up

in the printing position, use test
mode No.2405 to raise the BP
unit.
Make sure that there is no paper BP suction fan
on the external paper feed tray.
Transfer belt
2) With the execution of test mode

No.1495, the BP belt rotates and
the BP Suction fan activates.
3) The Top edge sensor 2 auto-

matically does the sensitivity
adjustment.
4) The BP belt stops, BP suction

fan deactivates and ends the
adjustment.

MEMO

BP Section
Chapter 7. BP Section
Contents
1. Mechanisms........................................................................................ 7-2
1-1. Basic StructureCDR4................................................................. 7-2

1-2. Raising and Lowering of the Belt Platen.................................... 7-3
1-3. Paper Transfer Mechanism........................................................ 7-4
1-4. Head Gap Adjustment Action..................................................... 7-4
1-5. Paper Suction Action.................................................................. 7-5
1-6. Ink Drop Position Adjustment..................................................... 7-6
1-7. BP Contact Detection Mechanism............................................. 7-7
1-8. Gap Adjuster Mechanism........................................................... 7-8
1-9. BP Wire Loose Detection Mechanism...................................... 7-10
2. Disassembly..................................................................................... 7-11
2-1. Removing the BP Unit.............................................................. 7-11

2-2. Transfer Belt Motor Assembly.................................................. 7-13
2-3. Belt HP Sensor......................................................................... 7-13
2-4. BP Upper Limit Sensor............................................................. 7-14
2-5. BP Lower Limit Sensor............................................................. 7-14
2-6. Belt Shaft FG Sensor Assembly (Encoder).............................. 7-15
2-7. Transfer Belt............................................................................. 7-15
2-8. Transfer Belt Suction Fans (6)................................................. 7-18
2-9. BP Lift Wires............................................................................ 7-19
3. Adjustment....................................................................................... 7-20
3-1. Ink Drop Position Enhancement Adjustment............................ 7-20

3-2. Transfer Belt Alignment............................................................ 7-23
3-3. Adjustment to Make the BP Unit
and Registration Roller Parallel...... 7-26

BP Section
1. Mechanisms

The BP unit is comprised of the transfer belt, transfer belt motor, belt platen, transfer belt fan (6), and the belt HP
sensor.
1. Paper received from the registration rollers is transferred and conveyed to the paper elevation unit or optional
face up paper ejection unit.
2. The BP section supports transfer of maintenance unit and is raised and lowered along with the maintenance
unit.
3. Coming into contact with the head holder contact pins maintains adequate distance and parallelism between
the heads and the paper transfer surface and parallelism between the drive and driven roller shafts.
4. If paper jams occur, the BP unit will be lowered.
5. While the transfer belt is being driven, the belt HP sensor detects the belt position once per revolution to adjust
ink ejection timing.
Wires (4 pieces)
Belt HP sensor
Encoder Part touching head holder
Driven roller Elevation guide
Transfer belt suction fan

Belt HP sensor
Drive roller
Registration hole for
position adjustment
Suction fan (6 pieces)
Positioning pin
registration hole
Transfer belt motor
Top edge sensor 1 Top edge sensor 2 Paper elevation IN sensor
Maintenance unit
Face up paper
ejection flipper
Registration roller Transfer belt Face up paper

BP unit Transfer belt suction fan ejection roller
Gap adjuster
BP Elevation motor

BP Section
1-2. Raising and Lowering of the Belt Platen

The BP unit is raised or lowered to move into the printing or idle position.
1. The BP unit is raised or lowered by means of four wires suspended from the head holder. (See Figure 5.)
2. The wires are held by wire hooks incorporated in the BP unit, which hold the wires with anchors (balls). (See
Figure 6.)
3. There are five stopping positions: a position for standard paper, for heavyweight paper, for envelopes 1 and 2,
and for clearing paper jams (when the maintenance unit is moved). Two sensors detect the stopping position of
the belt platen, one each at the upper limit and one at the lower limit. (See Figure 7.)
4. For the paper position, stopping after raising or lowering is controlled by a pulse when the upper limit sensor is
activated. For the position to clear paper jams, movement stops when the lower limit sensor is activated. Note
that the BP unit moves along the elevation guide in back. (See Figure 8.)
5. Regarding the lower limit position, because the maintenance unit moves on top of the BP unit, this position is
kept constant. However, regarding the maintenance position, because the head holder is positioned relative
to the maintenance unit, the BP unit can be moved forward or back. Additionally, regarding the upper limit
position, because the BP unit can be positioned by means of registration with pins protruding from the head
holder (which provide reference points), it can be moved forward or back as well as the direction of paper
supply and ejection.
6. During printing, a specific clearance (head gap) is maintained between the top surface of the belt and the
surface of the head nozzles. In the event of paper transfer problems, the belt platen is lowered, enabling the
paper to be removed.
7. For head maintenance as well, the BP unit can be raised.
8. During paper jams, the maintenance unit does not go under the head.
Wires (4 pieces)
Wire Wire hook
Wire anchor (ball)

Wire hooks
(4 positions)
Figure 5 Figure 6
BP upper limit sensor
BP lower limit sensor
BP unit
Elevation guide
Figure 7 Figure 8

BP Section
1-3. Paper Transfer Mechanism

1. The BP unit keeps paper against the belt during transfer by means of suction fans (6).
2. The belt forms the shape of a trapezoid around the drive roller, driven roller, guide roller, and two tension rollers.
It is driven by rotation of the drive roller. (See Figure 1.)
3. Belt alignment is adjusted by changing the force applied by the front tension roller. Specifically, an adjustment
screw is turned to change the set position of the tension spring. (See Figure 2.)
4. The same tension mechanism is used on both ends of the tension roller. (See Figure 3.)
5. Tension adjustment is also possible from inside the unit.
6. The transfer belt motor maintains a specific drive roller speed via the timing belt. (See Figure 4.)
Tension spring
Drive roller
Paper
Suction fan
Adjusting screw
Driven Tension roller

roller Bearing
Belt Figure 2
Tension Roller Guide roller
Figure 1
Transfer belt motor

Motor pulley
Paper feed side
Drive roller pulley
Driven roller
Drive roller
Parts to
adjust Transfer belt
Front motor Figure 4
Figure 3
1-4. Head Gap Adjustment Action

This action changes the distance between the surfaces of the belt and the head nozzles.
Several types of settings are available for the head gap. Adjust the head gap before using thicker stock such as
cards or envelopes to prevent contact between the paper and head.
1. To keep the head and the surface of the belt platen for paper transfer in the same position and parallel to each
other, the BP plate assembly touches the contact pins protruding from the head holder side. (See Figure 9.)
This action also keeps the driven and drive rollers parallel.
2. At this time, because the contact pins are arranged so that the wires pass through the center, the BP plate
assembly is sandwiched between the contact pins and wire hooks. (See Figure 10.)
3. Positioning in the direction of paper transfer is determined by the positioning pins protruding from the head
holder being inserted in the reference pin registration hole and the registration hole for position adjustment on
the belt platen side. (See Figure 11.)
4. Adjustment in the direction of paper transfer with the registration roller is done using the head holder pins,
which are inserted in the registration hole for position adjustment. Additionally, the adjustment piece in the
registration hole for position adjustment can be adjusted to move forward or back, and image adjustment (rough
adjustment) in the direction of paper transfer is possible.

BP Section
BP plate
Wire
Driven roller
Contact pin
(head holder) Wire
Contact pin
(head holder) BP plate
Wire hook Wire hook

Drive roller
Figure 9 Figure 10
Registration hole for

position adjustment
Positioning pin
registration hole
Figure 11
1-5. Paper Suction Action

This action applies suction to paper in the printing section.
Because there is only a head gap of about 1.5 mm, paper that lifts up as it is transferred may damage the head.
Suction is required when paper is transferred under the head. Additionally, because suction is difficult to apply if the
edges of a sheet are bent, there is a detector built into the paper path to the printing section to determine if the
paper is not flat. If paper lift is detected, paper transfer is stopped before the sheet reaches the printing section.
(For more information about paper lift detection, refer to Chapter 6, on the registration section.)

BP Section
1-6. Ink Drop Position Adjustment

Ink drop position adjustment in the BP unit refers to compensating for inconsistency in ink impact. Two types of
adjustment are performed in ink drop position adjustment: belt profile and roller profile compensation.
Direction of Belt rotation Belt
us
di
Ra
Core
Core material
Drive roller
As depicted above, one reason for inconsistency in ink drops is unevenness of the core material inside the belt.
This unevenness causes discrepancy in the distance between the center of the roller and the core material over
a length of belt, and as a result, uneven transfer and inconsistent impact. To reduce this effect, an adjustment value
must be prepared to adjust the timing of ink ejection.
For this reason, the BP unit creates roller profiles and belt profiles, which represent adjustment values for the ink
drop position. These profiles are transmitted to the unit that creates data for storage. Each profile requires
execution of a separate test mode.
Belt Profile Compensation

The particular unevenness of the belt is detected and compensated for to improve droplet precision. Execute
this after belt replacement.
Test modes: 1910 – 1921 (enter numbers 1–12 for belt profile data)
Roller Profile Compensation

Compensates for vibration and eccentricity of the drive and driven rollers. Also corrects eccentricity in the point
of connection between the driven roller and encoder, to improve droplet precision. Execute this if you have
replaced the drive or driven roller or encoder.
Note: For instructions, refer to Section 3, "Adjustment."

Convenient Test Modes to Know for the BP Contact Detection Mechanism
BP Section
1-7. BP Contact Detection Mechanism

< BP Contact Detection Mechanism >
1) When the BP rises to the printing position, if it comes into contact with all BP contact detection mechanisms at
four positions, it is ready for paper transfer.
2) The BP unit then is ready to transfer the standard paper. In printing on heavyweight paper or envelopes, the BP
is us lowered from the normal paper position to further down, the envelope position being the furthest down to
give more gap between the print heads and the BP Belt surface.
3) An error occurs if any one of the four contacts do not match the contact status with the other three.
4) In that case, the BP is lowered a little and then raised again and the contact is checked. If the contact status
does not correct, the BP elevation error is displayed on the operation panel and the machine is stopped.
RL (Rear Left) RR (Rear Right)
Top View of the Head Carriage

BP Contact Detection Mechanism
All 4 contacts ON :
Standard Paper
Card (Thick Paper)
BP Contact Detection Mechanism (4 locations)

All 4 contacts OFF :
Envelope 1
FL (Front Left) FR (Front Right) Envelope 2
Contact status mixed (ON & OFF) :
Mechanical adjustment needed.
BP Contact Detection Mechanism
Envelope 1
Standard Paper
Envelope 2
Card Paper
NO CONDUCTIVITY CONDUCTIVITY
Space Pushed up Contact
Insulating plate Hanging down
(mounted on the BP Unit)
Test Mode
Process Name Description
Number
2170 BP Hit Detection (RL) ON: Contact detected / OFF: Contact not detected
2171 BP Hit Detection (RR) ON: Contact detected / OFF: Contact not detected
2172 BP Hit Detection (FL) ON: Contact detected / OFF: Contact not detected
2173 BP Hit Detection (FR) ON: Contact detected / OFF: Contact not detected
2440 Head Gap STD Paper Position Elevates the BP Unit to the STD paper head gap position.
2441 Head Gap Card Paper Position Elevates the BP Unit to the Card paper head gap position.
2442 Head Gap Envelope-1 Position Elevates the BP Unit to the Envelope-1 head gap position.
2443 Head Gap Envelope-2 Position Elevates the BP Unit to the Envelope-2 head gap position.
NOTE:
Above test modes 2440, 2441, 2442 and 2443 operates only when both the left and right Front Door interlock switches
are activated (Front Doors closed), and the Maintenance Unit (Ink Pan) is in the maintenance position.

BP Section
1-8. Gap Adjuster Mechanism

Mechanism for Switching the Gap Between the Print Head and Paper
A mechanism for adjusting the distance between the head nozzle surface and paper on the belt platen, by
means of the protrusion below the head unit.
Four head gap settings are available: standard, card, envelope-1 and envelope-2. The clearance between the
paper and head is increased when feeding heavyweight paper to prevent contact.
The flatness (parallel) of the BP surface is secured by the firm hit against the four Gap adjuster guides.
BP tension spring
Envelopes
Rotary guide
Card
Gap adjuster
Standard paper
Spring guide
Gap adjuster
Expanded View of Rotary Guide

1) Lowering the belt platen from the upper limit position by a specific amount moves the gap adjuster pin
along the guide groove, switching the position. The gap adjuster rotates at this time.
2) A tiered probe is incorporated in the leading edge of the rotary guide, and rotation of the gap adjuster
switches this connection from standard paper to card stock (or from standard or card to envelope).
3) Switching the gap is finished when the belt platen is raised from the state in 2).
4) When the belt platen is lowered to a position away from the gap adjuster and then raised to the upper limit
position again, it is always at the standard paper gap position.
Switching position
Standard paper
Card paper Contact tip on
Envelope-1 the Rotary guide
Envelope-2
Contact tip on the Gap adjuster

BP Section
A tip in putting back the Gap Adjuster
Gap adjuster
Rotary guide
BP tension spring
Spring guide
Gap adjuster
Spring guide
Make a marking on where the hook is.
Rotary guide Place the BP tension spring over the Rotary guide
Rotary guide by matching the marking on the green colored
< Mounted on the machine >
line shown on the sketch on the left. The green
colored line indicates how the Spring guide hook
should be pushed up.
Push the BP tension spring and Spring guide all
the way up against the top of the Rotary guide.
Then fit the Gap adjuster over the Rotary guide.
Gently rotate the Gap adjuster so that it hangs on
the Rotary guide.
Release fingers from the Gap adjuster and let it
hang freely on the Rotary guide.
Then release the fingers from the Spring guide,
which was kept held all the way up on the Rotary
guide. The BP tension spring and Spring guide
will drop inside the Gap adjuster.
Gently push the Gap adjuster all the way up
on the Rotary guide. The Gap adjuster should
rotate as it goes up. If the Gap adjuster does not
rotate as it goes up, the parts are not assembled
There is no Green colored line on correctly.
the actual Rotary guide. Repeat the procedure until correctly assembled.
By making the similar marking
on the Rotary guide will make the
work easier.

BP Section
1-9. BP Wire Loose Detection Mechanism
Detects loose wires (caused by winding the wires in the reverse, for example).
< REAR >
< FRONT >
Micro-Switch to detect loose wire.

BP Section
2. Disassembly
Caution : Do not remove the Front Frame of the BP unit. (The Front Frame is positioned with a Factory jig.)
2-1. Removing the BP Unit

Note: Be careful not to touch the print head during this work.
3. Remove the front left inner cover. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
5. Turn the maintenance unit drive gear in the counter-clockwise direction and slide the maintenance unit to the
retracted position away from the BP unit.
Maintenance unit (ink pan)
Maintenance unit drive gear
6. Remove the ground wire. (IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc))

7. Lower the BP unit manually until the wires become slack.

BP Section
8. Loosen the mounting screws of the elevation guide (IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs)), slide the guide upward, and affix
it temporarily by tightening one of the four screws.
Elevation guide
9. Unhook the wires from the wire hooks on the BP Unit (in 4 positions).
10. Unhook the electrical connectors from the BP Unit. (3 pcs)
Electrical connectors
Belt Platen (BP) Unit
11. Remove the BP unit from the front of the machine.

Caution: Avoid contact with the BP lower limit sensor.
Precautions in Assembly
1) BP Lower Limit Sensor:

Be careful not to knock off the BP Lower Limit Sensor when installing the BP Unit back in the
machine.
The error S03-2011 [BP elevation wires are loose -- the BP wire loose detection switch is activated]
will display if the BP Lower Limit Sensor is knocked off from its position and the machine power is
turned ON.
2) Ground Wire:
Mount the ground wire onto the BP Unit from the RIGHT.

BP Section
2-2. Transfer Belt Motor Assembly

2. Remove the BP front cover. (Binding screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
3. Remove the belt HP sensor. (W sems screw 3x12 (1 pc))
4. Remove the reuse band. (3 pcs)
5. Remove the transfer belt motor connector. (2 pcs)
6. Unplug the BP wire harness connector plate. (Round tip IT3C screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
7. Loosen the tensioner mounting screw to loosen the belt tension. (W sems screw 4x8 (1 pc))
8. Remove the BP motor assembly. (IT3C screw 4x10 (3 pcs))
9. Remove the motor bracket reuse band. (2 pcs)
Note: After installation, affix the belt tensioner. (Auto tension mechanism: W sems screw 4x10 (1 pc)) After
replacement, check operation by test mode 1256 (transfer belt motor)
Belt HP Sensor Reuse band Connectors Tensioner mounting screw
BP wire harness connector plate
2-3. Belt HP Sensor

2. Take off the BP front cover. (Binding screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
3. Remove the belt HP sensor. (W sems screw 3x8 (1 pc))
Note: After replacement, check operation by test mode 1110 (belt HP sensor).
Belt HP Sensor

BP Section
2-4. BP Upper Limit Sensor

2. Move the maintenance unit manually to the retracted position.
3. Remove the sensor cover plate. (IT3C screw 3x6 (1 pc))
4. Disconnect the connector and remove the BP upper limit sensor.
Note: After replacement, check operation by test mode 2124 (BP upper limit sensor).
Sensor cover plate
Belt Platen (BP) Unit BP upper limit sensor

REFERENCE PHOTOGRAPH
2-5. BP Lower Limit Sensor

2. Move the maintenance unit to the retracted position.
3. Move the BP unit to the upper limit position.
4. Disconnect the connector and remove the BP lower limit sensor.
Note: After replacement, check operation by test mode 2123 (BP lower limit sensor).
Belt Platen (BP) Unit
BP lower limit sensor

BP Section
2-6. Belt Shaft FG Sensor Assembly (Encoder)

Note: Do not remove unless the sensor is actually damaged.
2. Remove the BP unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Disconnect the FG Sensor wire connector. (1 pc)
4. Remove the reuse band. (1 pc)
5. Remove the belt shaft FG sensor assembly.
(W sems screw 3x30 (1 pc) and round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc))
Note: After replacement, check operation by test mode 1100 (belt shaft FG sensor).
Encoder assembly
Connector
Reuse band
2-7. Transfer Belt

Caution: (1) Do not remove the front frame of the BP Unit.
(2) Do not separate the encoder from the Driven roller.
2. Remove the BP unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the BP front cover. (Binding screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
4. Remove the Transfer belt motor assembly. (See Section 2-1.)
5. Affix 4 mm diameter JIG shaft through the front and rear Tension roller assemblies. (2 pcs) <This is to release
the tension of the transfer belt.>
<< FRONT >> << REAR >>
4 mm dia. JIG shaft 4 mm dia. JIG shaft
Rear tension roller assembly
4 mm dia. JIG Shaft
Front tension roller assembly

BP Section
6. Remove the Belt tension shaft from the rear of the BP Unit. (6 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc))
7. Remove the Belt guide shaft from the rear of the BP Unit. (6 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc))
8. Remove the Drive roller bearing from the rear of the BP Unit. (8 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc))
Note: During the assembly, note the shaft length.
• Longer shaft: Belt tension shaft
• Shorter shaft: Belt guide shaft
BP Unit <REAR VIEW>
Drive roller bearing Belt guide shaft Belt tension shaft
9. Remove the encoder mounting screw. (IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc))

10. Remove the encoder wire harness reuse band (1 pc) and unplug wire connector (1 pc).
Encoder assembly
Connector
Reuse band Encoder mounting screw
11. Remove the driven roller bearing mounting screw. (IT screw 3x8 (1 pc)) <Note: Be careful not to drop the
plastic spacer.>
Driven roller bearing

mounting screw (front)

BP Section
12. Remove the Driven roller, with the Encoder attached, from over the top of the BP Unit. (Unhook the bearing
from the frame.)
13. Pull out the Driven roller from the rear of the BP unit.
Encoder assembly
BP Unit <REAR VIEW>
Direction of removal
14. Remove the Guide pulley mounting bracket. (IT3C screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
15. Remove the Ground wire. (IT3C screw 3x6 (1 pc))
Guide pulley mounting bracket
Ground wire
16. Remove the reuse band. (1 pc)
Reuse band

BP Section
17. Turn the BP Unit up-side-down on the table, and then remove the Rear frame of the Belt platen unit. (W sems
screw 4x10 (4 pcs), P-tight screw 3x8 (1 pc), and binding P-tight screw 4x10 (6 pcs)).
NOTE: Keeping the unit facing down prevents four mounting nuts from falling out of the unit. Be careful not to
drop and lose the nuts.
BP Unit rear frame
18. Slide the Transfer belt out of the BP Unit.

Note: In replacing the Transfer belt back on the BP Unit, make sure the elongated hole on the Transfer belt
faces on the front of the BP Unit.
Transfer belt
Elongated hole
t
ou
i de
Sl
2-8. Transfer Belt Suction Fans (6)

2. Remove the BP Unit from the machine. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the transfer belt. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
4. Remove the BP plate assembly. (Tiered screw (8 pcs) and W sems screw 4x8 (1 pc))
5. Remove the transfer belt suction fans. (W sems screw 3x6 (3 pcs per each fan))
Note: After replacement, check the machine operations by test modes 1250 (transfer belt fan 1, 2), 1251
transfer belt fan 3, 4), 1252 (transfer belt fan 5, 6), and 1253 (transfer belt fan (all)).
Transfer belt suction fan

BP Section
2-9. BP Lift Wires

Removing the BP Lift wires involve working inside the Print head carriage, such as working on the Print head PCBs
and the Print head flat cables are involved.
The instructions for the BP Lift wire replacement procedure is therefore given on Chapter-11A of this book, which
the chapter explains about the Ink flow system of the machine.

BP Section
MEMO

BP Section
3. Adjustment
3-1. Ink Drop Position Enhancement Adjustment

The particular unevenness of the transfer belt along with vibration and eccentricity of transfer rollers causes
inconsistency in ink droplet position. However, the precision of ink droplet positioning can be enhanced by
controlling the timing of ejection to compensate for these factors.
<Belt Profile Compensation>

After transfer belt replacement, enter the particular adjustment values for belts in test mode.
BP Front cover
STICKER
No. 1916 No. 1917 No. 1918
Test Mode No.

No. 1910
No. 1911
No. 1912
No. 1913
No. 1914
No. 1915
No. 1919 No. 1920 No. 1921 No. 1922
1. Enter the particular adjustment values for belts in test modes 1910–1921 (corresponds to the parameter
numbers printed on the sticker affixed on the BP Front cover surface.). The 13th parameter is test mode 1922
[Belt Profile Check Digit Input].
2. As the test mode parameter numbers differ from one BP Belt to the other, a replacement spare part BP Belt
always comes with a new sticker with the parameter numbers of its own. Make sure to input the new parameter
numbers for these test modes after the BP Belt is replaced.
3. Update and save the data by test mode 1442 [save belt profile data].
(After entering the data, turn the machine power OFF and ON. The data is updated and saved automatically.)

BP Section
<Roller Profile Compensation>

In this compensation, the amount of eccentricity existing on the transfer belt rollers is quantified and applied on
the ink drop timing. The roller profile parameters must be re-input by test modes after the encoder is once
removed from the transfer roller or when either one of the part is replaced.
The two roller profile parameter numbers are printed on the sticker attached on the BP Front cover when the
machine is shipped from the factory.
Once these two test modes are adjusted and the parameter input is changed, cross the imprinted number on the
sticker and hand-write the new parameter numbers on the sticker.
No. 1924 No. 1923
• Amplitude Input
1. Load A3 paper in the paper feed tray. (16 sheets or more.)
2. Execute test mode 1479 (printing for roller profile amplitude adjustment).
3. The 16 sheets are printed continuously, producing a black pattern with lines in landscape orientation
4. Check the printed pattern, which shows an amplitude of deviation of 0100, followed by 0200, and so on (in
increments of 100) up to 1600.
5. Check the shading caused by transition from one print head to another. Select the amplitude of the pattern that
is least blurry. <Refer to the sketch on the next page.>
6. Enter the selected amplitude value in test mode 1923 (roller profile amplitude input).
7. Access the data in test mode 1443 (save roller profile data), update the adjustment data with it, and save it. (Turn
the unit OFF and ON to update the data and save it automatically.)
• Phase Input
1. Load A3 paper in the paper feed tray. (18 sheets or more.)
2. Execute test mode 1478 (printing for roller profile phase adjustment).
3. The 18 sheets are printed continuously, producing a black pattern with lines in landscape orientation.
4. Check the printed pattern, which shows a phase of 0, followed by 20, and so on up to a phase of 340.
5. Check the shading caused by transition from one print head to another. Select the phase of the pattern that is
least blurry. <Refer to the sketch on the next page.>
6. Enter the selected phase value in test mode 1924 (roller profile phase input).
7. Access the data in test mode 1443 (save roller profile data), update the adjustment data with it, and save it. (Turn
the unit OFF and ON to update the data and save it automatically.)
Note: Both the belt profile data, explained on the previous page, and the roller profile data explained on this
page are saved on both the Hard Disk (HDD) and Engine Control PCB as settings values. If either
one of these two components are replaced, the setting values are copied automatically from the one to
the other when the machine is powered ON after the replacement.

BP Section
Print out samples of Test Mode numbers 1478 and 1479 <ENLARGED VIEW>
Head binding area
Uneven in color,
density and width.
GOOD BAD
The binding area is smooth in width The binding area is not smooth in the
and in color density. width and color density.

BP Section
3-2. Transfer Belt Alignment

Perform this adjustment when replacing the transfer belt or after the belt was removed for replacement of the fan
motor, rollers, or other parts. Inaccurate positioning of the belt causes deformation of the belt edge surface and
image problems such as misalignment of lines in portrait orientation.
Confirm that the belt is always close to the front side when it is in motion. Also confirm that the belt does not ride up
on the flange.
Adjust the belt alignment on the unit as follows.
1. Execute test mode 2405 (move BP elevation motor to upper limit position) and raise the BP unit, so that it is in
the normal printing position.
2. Execute test mode 1256 (transfer belt motor) and start the transfer belt motor.
3. From the jam release section of the vertical paper feed, check the position of the transfer belt relative to the belt
guide flange on the belt driven roller.
4. If the belt edge surface is touching the flange on the front, tighten the Cap Screw (clock-wise rotation) of the
belt tension block and let the BP Belt slide to the rear for the amount of 0.5 to 1.0 mm. If the front belt edge
already has a space from the flange, or if 0.5 to 1.0 mm space is achieved by following this step, go to the next
step.
5. Rotate the Cap Screw in the counter-clock-wise direction (loosen the Cap Screw) one calibration line at a time
and check the BP Belt movement towards the front.
Calibration lines
Refer to the NEXT 2 PAGE for the instruction on

how to view the Flange and the BP Belt edge.
6. Keep the BP Belt motor running for 3 minutes or more after each Cap Screw rotation.
Do not rotate the Cap Screw more than one calibration at a time, as when the belt starts to side, it slides quickly
and goes over the flange.
Caution: The BP Belt will be damaged if it rides over the flange, even once.
7. End the adjustment when the belt stabilizes in the location against the flange in the front. Tighten the lock nut
against the Cap Screw and rotate the BP Belt motor for another 3 minutes or longer to confirm that the BP Belt
stays stable in one place.
• Cap Screw Adjustment Instructions

To move the belt toward the front, loosen the Cap screw (turn it counter-clockwise)
To move the belt toward the back, tighten the Cap screw (turn it clockwise)
Mounting screw
If the Cap screw cannot be moved enough in either
direction to complete the Transfer belt alignment,
making sure that the machine power is OFF, rotate
Belt the Cap screw to bring the spring to the center of the
to the
REA calibration lines, loosen the Mounting screw (shown on
R the left photograph) and side the whole Front tension
Belt roller assembly in the direction that the Belt needed to
to the move toward.
FRO
NT Tighten the Mounting screw, turn ON back the machine
power and re-start the adjustment from above step-4.
Front tension roller assembly

Cap screw
Lock nut

BP Section
The position of the BP Belt edge against the Flange on the belt driven roller can only be checked at one location,at
the left-front of the BP Unit. At no other location the observation can be made. Use a MIRROR and a flashlight
to confirm the BP Belt edge position against the Flange as the belt rotates -- must be looking at the belt all through
the duration the belt is rotated by the test mode. Since the BP Belt is running, watch out for all the moving
parts to avoid injury.
MIRROR
Flange BP Belt edge

BP Section
BP Belt BP Belt
Belt edge Belt edge
Insulation plate
Drive roller
Driven roller
Flange
LEFT-HAND SIDE RIGHT-HAND SIDE
VIEW from the TOP
Transfer belt Flange

(top surface)
Roller Correct:
Belt edge aligned with the Flange
Incorrect: Deflected Incorrect: Lifted Incorrect: Separation

BP Section
3-3. Adjustment to Make the BP Unit and Registration Roller Parallel

If the BP unit and registration roller are not parallel, when the registration roller transfers a sheet aligned on its
leading edge to the BP unit, it will be transferred crooked, causing misalignment of lines in portrait orientation as
CYMK inks are applied in a sequence with the ink drop position off. This adjustment is designed to correct this kind
of problem. It is a required adjustment after replacement of the BP unit, transfer belt, or suction fan.
For adjustment instructions, refer to Chapter 11A on the subject of “Transfer Unit Position Adjustment” and
“Registration Roller Position Adjustment*.
Incorrect: Not Parallel Correct: Parallel Incorrect: Not Parallel
Belt platen unit
Registration roller Positioning pin registration hole
Registration hole for position

adjustment of BP Unit.
Relative Position of BP Unit and Registration Roller

(View from the TOP)

BP Section
MEMO

Paper Transfer Section
Chapter 8. Paper Transfer Section
Contents
1. Mechanisms........................................................................................ 8-2
1-1. Basic Structure........................................................................... 8-2
1-2. Paper Elevation Unit Mechanism............................................... 8-2
1-3. Upper Transfer Unit Mechanism................................................ 8-3
1-4. Face Up Paper Ejection (Optional)............................................ 8-4
2. Disassembly....................................................................................... 8-5
2-1. Paper Elevation Motor................................................................ 8-5
2-2. Paper Elevation Unit.................................................................. 8-5
2-3. Paper Elevation IN Sensor (Paper Elevation Unit)..................... 8-6
2-4. Upper Transfer Roller 1 (Paper Elevation Unit)......................... 8-6
2-5. Upper Transfer Roller 2 (Paper Elevation Unit)......................... 8-6
2-6. Driven Roller (Paper Elevation Unit).......................................... 8-7
2-7. Upper Transfer Motor................................................................. 8-7
2-8. Flipper Sensor ........................................................................... 8-8
2-9. Upper Transfer Unit.................................................................... 8-8
2-10. Upper Transfer Roller 3 (Upper Transfer Unit)......................... 8-9

1. Mechanisms

The paper transfer section, which handles paper feeding, is comprised of the paper elevation unit and upper
transfer unit.
Upper transfer unit
Paper elevation unit
1-2. Paper Elevation Unit Mechanism

The paper elevation unit is comprised of the paper elevation motor, upper transfer rollers 1 and 2, and the paper
elevation IN sensor. This unit transfers paper supplied from the BP unit to the upper transfer unit.
Description
1) When printing starts, the upper transfer rollers start rotating.
(Except during simplex printing when face up paper ejection is specified.)
2) Upper transfer rollers 1 and 2 are set up to rotate at the same circumferential speed as the belt platen (to
prevent the elevation path from pulling the paper from the belt platen or vice-versa).
3) Paper from the BP unit is detected by the paper elevation IN sensor, and if a paper jam is detected, the upper
transfer rollers will stop rotating.
4) The specified speed is maintained as long as there are no problems during transfer, and when the job is
finished, the rollers stop.
Clearing Paper Jams

Use lever C1 to unlock the jam release door. Open the door and remove the jammed paper.

Machine rear view


Face up paper
ejection flipper
Paper elevation motor
Schematic Diagram of Paper Elevation Unit
Paper elevation unit Upper transfer roller 2

Jam release lever (C1)
● Upper transfer roller 2
● Paper transfer knob
When ejecting paper

straight, attach the
plastic guide to the face
up paper ejection unit
Normally, attach the plastic guide Paper elevation IN sensor Upper transfer roller 1
(Prevents the maintenance unit from falling over)
1-3. Upper Transfer Unit Mechanism

The upper transfer unit is comprised of the upper transfer motor and upper transfer rollers 3–5. This unit transfers
paper from the paper elevation unit to switchback unit B or the face down paper ejection unit.
Upper transfer roller 4 Upper transfer roller 3
To install the unit, rest it on the rail-holding

parts and insert it in the main unit

<< Upper Transfer Unit >>

Upper Transfer Motor
Description
1) When printing starts, the upper transfer rollers start rotating.
(Except during simplex printing when face up paper ejection is specified.)
During simplex printing, rollers of the upper transfer unit rotate at the same circumferential speed as the belt
platen. During duplex printing, the speed varies depending on the length of the paper.
2) Paper is detected by the flipper sensor, and if a paper jam is detected, the upper transfer rollers will stop
rotating.
3) The specified speed is maintained as long as there are no problems during transfer, and when the job is
finished, the rollers stop.
Clearing Paper Jams

Turn dial D2 to clear paper jams. Only if jams cannot be cleared with the dial, pull out the unit toward the front,
open the top part, and remove the paper.
CAUTION:
Pulling out the Upper transfer unit is the last resort, as the unit may guillotine the jammed paper, causing small
pieces of paper to stay stuck in the machine, requiring serviceman to disassemble the paper transfer area to
remove the left over paper pieces.
1-4. Face Up Paper Ejection (Optional)

Switching the Paper Ejection Path
This action involves switching between the upper transfer path and the face up paper ejection path.
Switching gates is done by means of a solenoid.
• Solenoid OFF = the paper is directed to the Face-up ejection.
• Solenoid ON = the paper is directed to the Upper transfer unit.
The path is only switched when the face up paper receiving tray is selected as the destination for ejection.
Refer to the reffer
Note: Optional Face-Up ejection unit is required to eject the paper on the optional Face-Up paper receiving tray.

2. Disassembly
2-1. Paper Elevation Motor

3. Put the controller PCB box in maintenance position. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
4. Remove the paper elevation motor. (IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
5. Remove the paper elevation motor mounting bracket assembly. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x6 (4 pcs))
Note: After replacement, check operation by test mode 1257 (paper elevation motor).
2-2. Paper Elevation Unit

Removing the Unit
2. Confirm that the BP unit and maintenance unit are in the retracted position.
3. Remove the right side cover. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
4. Remove the right top cover. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
5. Put the controller PCB box in maintenance position. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
7. Remove the paper elevation motor assembly. (Connector (2 pcs) and IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
8. Remove the stay plate. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
9. Remove the paper elevation unit. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
Note: Be careful of the Waste ink tube.
<< Paper elevation unit >>
Waste ink tube
Stay plate

2-3. Paper Elevation IN Sensor (Paper Elevation Unit)

2. Remove the paper elevation unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the paper elevation IN sensor, together with the mounting bracket. (Round tip IT3C screw 3x8 (1 pc))
4. Remove the paper elevation IN sensor.
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1105 (paper elevation IN sensor).
<< Paper elevation unit >>
2-4. Upper Transfer Roller 1 (Paper Elevation Unit)

3. Remove the pulley. (6 mm dia. E-ring)
4. Remove the belt.
5. Remove both shaft holders from the middle of the paper elevation guide drive. (P-tight screw 3x8 (4 pcs))
6. Remove the shaft holder and metal piece from upper transfer roller 1. (6 mm dia. E-ring (3 pcs))
2-5. Upper Transfer Roller 2 (Paper Elevation Unit)

3. Remove the pulley. (6 mm dia. E-ring)
4. Remove the belt.
5. Remove the metal piece from upper transfer roller 2. (6 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc))
6. Remove upper transfer roller 2.

2-6. Driven Roller (Paper Elevation Unit)

3. Remove the mounting base of the driven roller. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
4. Remove the shaft holder for driven rollers. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
5. Remove the driven roller.
Driven roller
2-7. Upper Transfer Motor

3. Put the engine control PCB in the maintenance position. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
4. Put the power supply unit in the maintenance position. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
5. Put the controller box in the maintenance position. (Pan-head screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
6. Open the ink circulation tower in the maintenance position.
7. Remove the upper transfer motor, together with the mounting bracket. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
8. Remove the upper transfer motor from the mounting bracket assembly. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x12 (3 pcs))
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1258 (upper transfer motor).
Ink circulation tower Upper transfer roller

2-8. Flipper Sensor

3. Remove the two stoppers and pull out the upper transfer unit. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc each)).
4. Remove the left and right top covers. (Binding screw 4x8 (3 pcs each))
5 Remove the control panel together with the mounting bracket. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs), Pan-head
screw 4x8 (1 pcs)).
6. Put the ink holder unit in maintenance position.
7. Remove the flipper sensor together with the mounting bracket. (Pan-head screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
8. Remove the flipper sensor from the bracket. (Binding screw 3x6 (1 pc))
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1106 (flipper sensor).
Flipper sensor
2-9. Upper Transfer Unit

3. Remove the two stoppers. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc each))
4. Pull the upper transfer unit fowrard, out of the machine.
Upper transfer unit

Upper transfer roller 5 Upper transfer roller 4 Upper transfer roller 3
<< Refer to the above photograph.>>

2-10. Upper Transfer Roller 3 (Upper Transfer Unit)
2. Remove the upper transfer unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the clip.
4. Remove two shaft holders. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs each))
5. Remove the pulley, washer and timing belt. (6 mm dia. E-ring)
6. Remove the clip.
7. Remove upper transfer roller 3 and two shaft holders.

3. Remove E-ring on the rear. (4 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc))
4. Remove the washer, pulley and timing belt.
5. Remove the clip.
6. Remove the bearing. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
7. Remove E-ring in the front. (4 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc)).
8. Remove the pulley, washer and timing belt.
9. Remove the clip.
10.Remove the bearing. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
11.Remove upper transfer roller 4.

3. Remove E-ring on the rear. (4 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc))
4. Remove the coupling.
5. Remove the washer.
6. Remove the timing belt and pulley.
7. Remove E-ring. (4 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc)).
8. Remove the clip.
9. Remove the bearing. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs)).
10 Remove the paper jam release dial “D2”. (W sems screw 3x8 (1 pc)).
11.Remove the one-way-clutch boss.
12.Remove the clip.
13.Remove the bearing. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
14.Remove upper transfer roller 5.
MEMO

Paper Ejection Section
Chapter 9. Paper Ejection Section
Contents
1. Mechanisms........................................................................................ 9-2
1-1. Basic Structure..................................................................................... 9-2
1-2. FD Paper Ejection Unit......................................................................... 9-4
1-3. Switching the Paper Ejection Path........................................................ 9-4
1-4. Paper Receiving FULL Detection Mechanism ..................................... 9-7
1-5. FD Fence Unit....................................................................................... 9-8
1-6. Paper Receiving Tray Unit (Optional)................................................... 9-9
2. Disassembly..................................................................................... 9-11
2-1. Removing the Unit.............................................................................. 9-11
2-2. FD Paper Ejection Fence Motor (FD Fence Unit)............................... 9-13
2-3. FD Paper Ejection Fence HP Sensor (FD Fence Unit)....................... 9-13
2-4. FD Paper Ejection Full Detection Sensor
(FD Paper Ejection Unit)...... 9-14
2-5. FD Paper Ejection Motor (FD Paper Ejection Unit)............................ 9-14
2-6. FD Paper Ejection Motor FG Sensor (FD Paper Ejection Unit).......... 9-14
2-7. FD Paper Ejection Flipper Solenoid (FD Paper Ejection Unit)............ 9-15
2-8. FD Paper Ejection Sensor (FD Paper Ejection Unit).......................... 9-15
2-9. FD Ejection Roller (FD Paper Ejection Unit) ...................................... 9-15
2-10. FD Ejection Driven Roller (FD Paper Ejection Unit) ........................ 9-16
2-11. FD Paper Ejection Paper Detection Sensor
(FD Paper Ejection Unit)...... 9-16
3. Adjustment....................................................................................... 9-17
3-1. FD Paper Ejection Flipper Solenoid (FD Paper Ejection Unit)............ 9-17
3-2. Phase adjustment of the Fence Rack (FD Fence Unit)...................... 9-18

1. Mechanisms

The face down paper ejection section is comprised of the FD paper ejection unit, FD fence unit, and (optionally) the
paper receiving tray unit.
Face down paper ejection section
FD fence unit
FD paper ejection unit
Paper receiving tray unit
Unit Structure

Jam release lever
Paper ejection roller (drive)
De-electricity brush
Full detection sensor
End wall
Flipper
solenoid
Face down paper

ejection motor
Encoder
When a jam is cleared
Paper ejection
roller (driven)
Paper ejection sensor

1-2. FD Paper Ejection Unit

The basic structure of the FD paper ejection unit is shown below.
Normal Action of the Face Down Paper Ejection Unit
Normal action of the face down paper ejection unit is not affected by the action of other units, and paper is
constantly transferred at the specified speed. When transfer begins, the face down paper ejection motor starts
up. The motor speed is determined by the paper settings specified on the operation panel, based on the
combination of paper weight (thin, thick, or standard) and size. When transfer is finished, the face down paper
ejection motor is stopped.
FD paper ejection motor
1-3. Switching the Paper Ejection Path

Switching of the paper path by the FD paper ejection flipper is described below.
The FD paper ejection flipper unit switches the paper path to the face down paper ejection unit or switchback
section by means of the FD paper ejection flipper solenoid.
This action involves switching between the face down paper receiving tray and upper transfer path.
Switching the gate is done by means of a solenoid. Normally (in the OFF position), paper is transferred to the face
down paper receiving tray.
• When the face down paper receiving tray is selected as the destination for ejection in simplex printing, the
flipper transfers paper in the normal, OFF state.
• When the face down paper receiving tray is selected as the destination for ejection in duplex printing, the flipper
operates on a timing determined by the flipper sensor as paper passes through.
• The timing of flipper operation varies depending on paper size and the speed of the upper transfer motor.
Note: Installation and removal of the flipper sensor is described in Chapter 8.

<< Overview of Paper Path Switching by the FD Paper Ejection Flipper.>>
(1) Flipper sensor ON

(2) ON timing reached
(Calculation/measurement started)
Flipper sensor Previous sheet

Previous sheet
Flipper
Target sheet Target sheet
Being transferred
(4) OFF timing reached (3) Flipper sensor OFF
Next sheet Next sheet
Target sheet Target sheet
FD paper ejection flipper
Flipper solenoid

<< FD Paper Ejection Flipper Timing Chart >>
Paper Path Switching: Paper Transfer Action

Name Timing
FD paper ejection flipper ON "Not arrived"
1. error "Still present" error
sensor OFF
FD paper ejection flipper ON
2. (1) ON
(2) OFF
solenoid OFF
3.
Value calculated based Value calculated based on
4. on timing of detection of the timing of detection of the
leading edge of sheets trailing edge of sheets
IN
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.
2.
3.
OUT
4.
5.
6.
Start Finish
1. Error : Flipper sensor "Not arrived" error

Notes
: Flipper sensor "Still present" error

2. FD paper ejection flipper solenoid ON/OFF:
(1) ON: Value calculated based on timing of FD paper ejection flipper sensor ON
(2) OFF: Value calculated based on timing of FD paper ejection flipper sensor OFF
Note: ON/OFF timing varies depending on paper size.

1-4. Paper Receiving FULL Detection Mechanism

FD paper receiving FULL detection is described below.
Paper receiving FULL detection relies on the FD paper ejection full sensor. After detection by the FD paper ejection
full sensor, the FD paper ejection motor remains on for a period equivalent to 30 consecutive sheets, and then the
motor stops.
A schematic diagram of FD paper receiving full detection is shown below.
FD paper ejection
fence motor
FD paper ejection fence
FD paper ejection roller
FD paper FD paper
receiving tray Paper ejection motor
FD paper ejection
FD paper ejection
full sensor
paper detection sensor
FD paper ejection full sensor OFF FD paper ejection full sensor ON

(1) (Start of paper ejection) (2) (Paper full position detection)
Sensor detection range

1 mm of width, vertically
State when FD paper ejection full sensor is ON Stopped with paper full
(3) (After sensor detection, transfer continues for
( ) (Full determined with 3 sheets
the e uivalent of 3 sheets) fed when ON)
Note: The number of sheets for which the FD paper ejection motor keeps running after detection by the paper
receiving FULL sensor can be set in test mode 1837 (paper receiving FULL detection sheet quantity setting).
By default, the test mode setting value is 35 sheets. The setting range is 1–100.
1. If the FD paper ejection full sensor incorrectly detects an ejected sheet as it is dropped and goes ON, the
count is reset the next time it goes OFF.
2. Although a command to stop transfer is issued once the FD paper ejection full sensor has been ON for
the specified number of sheets, inside the unit at this time, sheets that were transferred after the specified
number of sheets will be mixed in. (The quantity of sheets varies depending on the size of paper.) In order
to eject all sheets that were mixed in, a quantity equivalent to the specified quantity + α (which includes the
ejected portion) is ejected, and then transfer stops.
α: Sheets transferred after the quantity of sheets for which the full detection sensor remains ON.
Note: If the FD paper ejection full sensor is ON when paper transfer is requested, "Error: 1150" is displayed,
indicating a tray detection error (FD paper ejection full).

1-5. FD Fence Unit

The paper ejection fence is moved to match the paper size so that paper can be uniformly ejected without
transferred paper becoming disorderly.
Unit Structure
The face down paper fence unit is summarized below.
Fence HP sensor Rack Fence drive motor
Paper ejection fence
Fence Movement
1. Determination of Fence Movement
After a job begins, fence movement is determined by the following information.
• Target position for fence movement
• Current fence position
• Presence of paper in the paper receiving tray
Change in Position Information Paper in Tray Action of Paper Ejection Fence
Target position = current position Does not move
Target position > current position Moves to target position
Yes Does not move

Target position < current position
No Moves to target position
Yes Moves to home position

Current position unknown
No Moves to target position via home position

2. Home Positioning
The FD paper ejection fence moves to the home position in the following situations.
• When the unit is turned ON
• During recovery after an emergency stop when the fence was moving
• When the unit is reset
1-6. Paper Receiving Tray Unit (Optional)

This unit is used to stack ejected paper. Additionally, during duplex printing, it serves as a paper guide when paper
is switched back.
Paper receiving tray mounting plate
FD paper ejection paper detection sensor
Switchback guide on inside of paper receiving tray

MEMO

2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Unit

< FD (Face-Down) Paper Receiving Tray Unit >
3. Remove the screws affixing the paper receiving tray unit, and gently slide out the receiving tray from the
machine while unplugging one wire connector while sliding the tray out. (Binding screw 4x6 (2 pcs))
4. Remove the paper receiving tray completely out of the machine.
Wire connector
< Enlarged View >
REAR REAR FRONT
FD Paper Receiving Tray
< FD (Face-Down) Fence Unit >

3. Remove the FD paper receiving tray unit.
4. Unplug the wire connector for the FD fence unit. (7 pins connector on the machine frame.)
5. Remove the ground wire. (Pan-head screw 3x6 (1 pc))
6. Remove the fence unit. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
< FD (Face-Down) Fence Unit >
Wire connector for FD fence unit Ground wire

< FD (Face-Down) Paper Ejection Unit >

3. Remove the FD paper receiving tray unit.
4. Remove the FD Fence unit.
5. Unplug the wire connector for the FD paper ejection unit. (connector on the machine frame.) - Ref: photo above.
6. Remove the end wall. (Binding screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
7. Remove the access lever D1. (Pan-head screw 3x6 (1 pc))
8. Remove the paper ejection unit. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
Wire connector for FD paper ejection unit
End wall
Access lever D1
FD Paper Ejection Unit

2-2. FD Paper Ejection Fence Motor (FD Fence Unit)

2. Remove the FD fence unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Unplug the motor wire connector
4. Remove the fence motor mounting bracket assembly. (P-tight screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
5. Remove the FD paper ejection fence motor from the bracket. (W sems screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Note: In assembly, watch out for the direction of the motor wire connector when mounting the motor back.
Note: The phase of the fence rack gears must be adjusted in assembly. <Refer to the adjustment section in
this chapter.
FD Paper Ejection Fence Motor
Motor mounting bracket Wire connector
2-3. FD Paper Ejection Fence HP Sensor (FD Fence Unit)

3. Remove the FD fence unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
4. Unplug the sensor wire connector.
5. Remove the FD paper ejection fence HP sensor assembly. (P-tight screw 3x8 (1 pc))
6. Unhook the sensor from the metal sensor bracket.
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1153 (FD paper ejection fence HP sensor).
FD Paper ejection fence HP sensor bracket

2-4. FD Paper Ejection Full Detection Sensor (FD Paper Ejection Unit)
2. Remove the FD paper ejection unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
4. Remove the sensor together with the mounting bracket. (Round tip IT3C screw 3x6 (1 pc))
5. Detach the sensor from the bracket.
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1151 (paper receiving FULL sensor).
FD paper ejection full detection sensor
SCREW
2-5. FD Paper Ejection Motor (FD Paper Ejection Unit)

2. Remove the FD paper ejection unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the FD paper ejection motor. (Pan head screw 3x5 (2 pcs))
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1300 (paper ejection motor).
Paper ejection motor
FD Paper ejection motor FG sensor
2-6. FD Paper Ejection Motor FG Sensor (FD Paper Ejection Unit)

2. Remove the paper ejection motor by the procedure given above.
3. Unhook the FD paper ejection motor FG sensor from its bracket.
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1150 (FD paper ejection motor FG sensor).

2-7. FD Paper Ejection Flipper Solenoid (FD Paper Ejection Unit)

2. Remove the paper ejection unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Remove the solenoid cover plate. (W sems screw 3x6 (1 pc))
4. Remove the FD paper ejection flipper solenoid. (W sems screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
5. After the replacement, perform the Ejection flipper position adjustment, which the adjustment procedure is given
at the end of this Chapter.
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1260 (FD paper ejection flipper solenoid).
FD Paper ejection flipper
FD Paper ejection flipper solenoid
2-8. FD Paper Ejection Sensor (FD Paper Ejection Unit)

3. Remove the FD Paper ejection bottom guide assembly.
4. Remove the paper ejection unit bottom assembly from the paper ejection unit. (W sems screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
5. Remove the FD paper ejection sensor from the paper ejection guide bottom assembly.
Note: After replacement, check operation by test mode 1154 (FD paper ejection sensor).
FD Paper ejection sensor FD Paper ejection bottom guide
FD Ejection roller Gear
2-9. FD Ejection Roller (FD Paper Ejection Unit)

3. Remove the Gear. (6 mm dia. E-ring)
5. Remove the metal bushing from the other side of the roller shaft. (6 mm dia. E-ring)
6. Detach the shaft brackets and remove the FD Ejection roller.
ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

2-10. FD Ejection Driven Roller (FD Paper Ejection Unit)

3. Remove the socket stopper (front & rear). (Pan-head P-tight screw 3x10 (2 pcs each))
4. Remove the FD Ejection driven roller and the wing roller.
FD Ejection driven roller
Socket stopper
FD Ejection wing roller
2-11. FD Paper Ejection Paper Detection Sensor (FD Paper Ejection Unit)
2. Remove the paper receiving tray unit. (Refer to the instructions for removal.)
3. Unplug the paper detection sensor wire connector.
4. Remove the paper detection sensor from the paper receiving tray.
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1152 (FD paper ejection paper detection
sensor).
FD Paper Ejection Paper Detection Sensor

3. Adjustment
3-1. FD Paper Ejection Flipper Solenoid (FD Paper Ejection Unit)

The Flipper and its adjustment position must be checked each time the Flipper solenoid is replaced.
1. With the Solenoid in activated condition (the plunger is pulled into the Solenoid), confirm that the clearance
between the Flipper and the Upper guide plate is 4.2 mm ± 1 mm.
The adjustment, when required, is made by loosening the set screws of the Flipper solenoid link plate and re-
tightening the set screws with correct clearance of 4.2 mm ± 1 mm.
Upper guide plate
Flipper
4.2 mm ± 1 mm
Flipper solenoid link plate
2. Next, with the Solenoid in deactivated condition (the solenoid spring is pulling the Flipper down), confirm that
the clearance between the Flipper and the Lower guide plate is 5 mm ± 1 mm.
Refer to the next step for the adjustment.
5 mm ± 1 mm
3. If the clearance is out of the range, loosening the mounting screw of the Solenoid cover plate and slide the plate
to the left or right until the clearance of 5 mm ± 1 mm is obtained, and tighten the screw.
FD Paper ejection unit
ADJUSTMENT
Solenoid cover plate

3-2. Phase adjustment of the Fence Rack (FD Fence Unit)

When replacing the FD paper ejection fence motor of the fence unit, adjust the phase of the fence rack gears in
assembly.
1. Open wide the both Fence rack gears, all the way maximum.
2. Mount the FD paper ejection fence motor assembly over the fence rack gears.
Open the rack gear maximum to the end wall. Rack gear
Open the rack gear maximum to the end wall. Rack gear
FD paper ejection fence motor assembly
Gear shaft goes into the hole with the

rack gears opened maximum wide.

Switchback Section
Chapter 10. Switchback Section
Contents
1. Mechanisms...................................................................................... 10-2
1-1. Basic Structure......................................................................... 10-2
1-2. Mechanisms of Switchback Units A and B............................... 10-2
1-3. Noise Reduction Paper Feed Assisting Action......................... 10-6
2. Disassembly..................................................................................... 10-7
2-1. Switchback Motor..................................................................... 10-7
2-2. Re-Feed Motor......................................................................... 10-7
2-3. Switchback Unit A.................................................................... 10-8
2-4. Switchback Unit B.................................................................. 10-10
2-5. Switchback Door Interlock Switch (Switchback Unit A).......... 10-11
2-6. Switchback Sensor (Switchback Unit A)................................ 10-11
2-7. Re-Feed Sensor (Switchback Unit A).................................... 10-12
2-8. Re-Feed Roller (Switchback Unit A)...................................... 10-12
2-9. Switchback Roller (Switchback Unit A).................................. 10-12
2-10. Upper Transfer OUT Sensor (Switchback Unit B)................ 10-13
2-11. Upper Transfer Roller 6 (Switchback Unit B)....................... 10-13

Switchback Section
1. Mechanisms

The switchback section, which handles paper feeding in duplex printing, is comprised of
Switchback Unit B
Switchback Unit A
switchback units A and B.
1-2. Mechanisms of Switchback Units A and B

The switchback unit incorporates the switchback motor, re-feed motor, upper transfer OUT sensor, upper transfer
roller 6, re-feed roller, switchback sensor, and re-feed sensor.
In duplex printing, the transfer direction of paper received face down is switched, and paper is transferred to the
Switchback sensor Upper transfer OUT sensor
registration roller unit.
Switchback roller
Switchback section
Upper transfer
Re-feed roller roller 6
Re-feed sensor Top edge sensor 1
External paper feed roller
Registration sensor
Registration roller
Overall Unit Structure

Paper path
Switchback
(red arrow)
roller
Re-feed roller

Switchback Section
Switchback Unit A
Switchback sensor
Switchback roller
Switchback motor
Re-feed motor
Transfer path changeover gate
Re-feed roller
Switchback clutch
Magnet catch
(holds the paper feed tray)
Switchback cover
(outer cover)
Jam release lever
Re-feed sensor
Jam release dial
Switchback Unit B
Unit positioning pins
Upper transfer motor
Upper transfer roller 6 Attachment section
Upper transfer OUT

sensor

Switchback Section
Summary of Switchback Section Action
Switchback sensor Upper transfer OUT sensor
Switchback roller
Upper transfer roller
Re-feed roller
Re-feed sensor
Top edge sensor 1
Registration sensor Registration roller Paper being transferred
Switchback roller starts slowing down

(1) Switchback roller starts (normal rotation)
(30 ms after upper transfer OUT sensor
(2) (After a specific period, following deactivation (3) Switchback motor stopped
(Stops at last 30 mm of the trailing edge,
activated) of upper transfer OUT sensor) emerging from the switchback roller)
( ) Switchback roller starts slowing down ( ) Switchback roller starts reverse motion
Simultaneousl rollers to reverse paper
(Starts slowing down after a specific pulse,
following activation of switchback sensor) feed also start
( ms after stopping)
Switchback roller stopped Re-feed roller stopped

( ) ( ms after deactivation of
switchback clutch)
( ) (Stops after a specific pulse, following
activation of registration sensor)

Switchback Section
Switchback Section Timing Chart
Paper Transfer: Paper Transfer Action

Name Timing
ON
1. Switchback sensor "Not arrived" error "Still present" error
OFF
ON
2. Re-feed sensor "Not arrived" error "Still present" error
OFF
3. Upper transfer OUT sensor ON "Still present" error
OFF
37.7 ms
4.
IN
5.
6.
7.
8.
ON 176.2 ms
1. Switchback clutch 187.5 ms
OFF
Normal old
2. Switchback motor OFF
Normal
Reversed
Reversed 4 ms
30 ms
ON
OUT
3. Re-feed motor 78.5 ms

OFF
4.
5.
Start Finish
Paper transfer started Paper transfer ended
1. Error : Switchback sensor "Paper not arrived" error (Error:1062)

: Switchback sensor "Paper still present" error (Error:1082)
: Re-feed sensor "Paper not arrived" error (Error:1063)
Notes
: Re-feed sensor "Paper still present" error (Error:1083)

: Upper transfer sensor "Paper not arrived" error (Error:1061)
: Upper transfer sensor "Paper still present" error (Error:1081)
: Switchback motor lock error (Error:1041)
: Re-feed motor lock error (Error:1042)
Note: A4 size paper is used as a reference on this timing chart.

Switchback Section
1-3. Noise Reduction Paper Feed Assisting Action

Noise reduction paper feed assisting action refers to operation to reduce noise created by flattening paper that has
buckled as it is fed in the registration section.
As feeding in the registration section begins, the registration motor is activated and the re-feed motor is activated at
the same time, which reduces the speed at which paper is flattened for quieter operation.
Timing Chart for Re-Feed/Noise Reduction Paper Feed Assistance

Name Timing
ON
1. Registration sensor
OFF
ON
IN
2. Re-feed sensor
OFF
ON
1. Registration motor
OFF
OUT
ON
2. Re-feed motor
OFF Noise reduction assistance in progress
Re-feed motor activated at same time as registration motor

Notes
Start (assistance started) Finish

Operation Re-feed motor deactivated when re-feed sensor deactivated Operation
started (assistance finished) ended

Switchback Section
2. Disassembly
2-1. Switchback Motor

4. Put the engine control PCB in maintenance position. (IT screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
5. Remove the switchback motor together with the motor mounting bracket. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
6. Remove the switchback motor from the mounting bracket. (W sems screw 3x6 (4 pcs))
Note:After the replacement, check the operation by test modes 1261 and 1262 (switchback motor in normal
and reversed mode).
Switchback motor
2-2. Re-Feed Motor

4. Remove the re-feed motor together with the motor bracket. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
5. Remove the re-feed motor from the mounting bracket. (W sems screw 3x6 (4 pcs))
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1263 (re-feed motor).
Re-feed motor

Switchback Section
2-3. Switchback Unit A

2. Remove the External paper feed unit. (Refer to Chapter 4 of this book)
< Switchback Unit A >
3. Remove the FD paper receiving tray. (Refer to Chapter 4 of this book)
4. Remove the Switchback motor.

5. Remove the Gear. (W sems screw 3x8 (1 pc)) (Refer to the photograph below.)
6. Remove the metal bushing.
Switchback motor Gear

Switchback Section
7. Remove the re-feed motor. (Roud tip IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
8. Remove two wire connectors. (4 and 6 pins in back.)

9. Open the jam release door.
10. Remove the safety cover plate. (Round tip IT3C screw 3x6 (1 pc))
Safety cover plate
Jam release door
11. Remove the external paper feed unit mounting bracket in front. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc))
External paper feed unit mounting bracket (FRONT)

Switchback Section
13. Remove Switchback unit A. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
< REAR > < FRONT >
Switchback unit A
2-4. Switchback Unit B

2. Remove the center inner cover. (Refer to Chapter 2 of this book)
3. Remove the left inner cover. (Refer to Chapter 2 of this book)
4. Remove the rear cover center assembly. (Refer to Chapter 2 of this book)
6. Remove the timing belt.
7. Unplug the wire connector. (3 pin connector in the back.)
8. Release the lever hook of the paper jam release E1.
9. Remove the Switchback unit B from the front. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
Timing belt Switchback unit B E1 Lever hook

Switchback Section
2-5. Switchback Door Interlock Switch (Switchback Unit A)

2. Remove Switchback unit A. (Refer to the instructions in this Chapter.)
3. Remove the Switchback door interlock switch assembly. (Pan-head screw 3x14 (2 pcs))
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1190 (switchback door interlock switch).
Interlock switch
2-6. Switchback Sensor (Switchback Unit A)

3. Remove the switchback sensor mounting plate. (Round tip IT3C screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
4. Remove the switchback sensor. (Pan-head screw 3x14 (1 pc))
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1108 (switchback sensor).
Switchback sensor

Switchback Section
2-7. Re-Feed Sensor (Switchback Unit A)

< Refer to the photograph below.>
3. Unplug the wire connector of the Re-feed sensor and remove the sensor.
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1109 (re-feed sensor).
2-8. Re-Feed Roller (Switchback Unit A)

3. Remove the gear. (6 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc))
5. Remove the re-feed roller.

2-9. Switchback Roller (Switchback Unit A)

4. Remove the switchback roller.
Re-feed roller Re-feed sensor Switchback roller
Interlock switch Switchback sensor

Switchback Section
2-10. Upper Transfer OUT Sensor (Switchback Unit B)

2. Remove the switchback unit B. (Refer to the instructions in this Chapter.)
3. Remove the OUT sensor assembly. (W sems screw 3x6 (1 pc))
4. Remove the upper transfer OUT sensor. (Pan-head screw 3x14 (1 pc))
Note: After the replacement, check the operation by test mode 1107 (upper transfer OUT sensor).
2-11. Upper Transfer Roller 6 (Switchback Unit B)

2. Remove switchback unit B. (Refer to the instructions in this Chapter.)
3. Remove the pulley. (6 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc))
5. Remove upper transfer roller 6.
< FRONT > < REAR >
Upper transfer roller 6 Upper transfer OUT sensor

Switchback Section
MEMO

Ink Flow Section
Chapter 11A. Ink Flow Section
Contents
1. Mechanisms....................................................................................11A-2
1-1. Ink Supply Mechanisms.........................................................11A-2
1-2. Ink Path Diagram...................................................................11A-3
1-3. Ink Circulation Unit Structure.................................................11A-4
1-4. Standard Action of Ink Supply Mechanisms......................... 11A-11
2. Disassembly.................................................................................11A-15
2-1. Cutting the Ink Tubes...........................................................11A-15
2-2. Ink Spill Prevention from the Ink Cartridge Holder Unit........ 11A-17
2-3. Removing the Scissor Clamps.............................................11A-20
2-4. Bellows Unit.........................................................................11A-21
2-5. Draining the Ink from the Ink Supply Unit into
the Waste Ink Tank.... 11A-23
2-6. Initial Ink Filling.....................................................................11A-29
2-7. Removing the Head Holder Cover.......................................11A-31
2-8. Ink Cartridge.........................................................................11A-34
2-9. Ink Cartridge Holder Unit......................................................11A-34
2-10. Cartridge Holder Joint Drive Motor.....................................11A-38
2-11. Ink Cartridge RFID PCB.....................................................11A-39
2-12. Ink Supply Valve................................................................11A-40
2-13. Negative Pressure Ink Tank...............................................11A-43
[ 11A-1 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

Ink Flow Section
1. Mechanisms
1-1. Ink Supply Mechanisms

The Ink supply mechanism is comprised of mechanisms to supply ink to the printer and heads, a mechanism for ink
circulation, and a mechanism for generating purging pressure to recover from head nozzle clogging.
Ink paths in the printer are designed for circulation.

Specifically, ink paths involved in circulation can be described as follows.
• Circulation prevents the head from becoming too hot (from high temperature generated inside the head) by
supplying ink of a constant temperature at a constant flow rate.
• Ink flow clears tiny air bubbles and debris that may accumulate around the piezoelectric element and nozzles in
the head and affect ink ejection. Circulation is useful in recovering from ink ejection problems such as this.
• Ink flows in the head because of the difference in fluid levels, and ink flows from the negative pressure ink tank
to the positively pressurized ink tank by means of pumping pressure.
• Head nozzle pressure is maintained at a constant level during circulation because of the difference in fluid
levels between the pressurized ink tank (open to the air above the head) and the negative pressure ink tank
below the head, in which constant negative pressure is maintained.

Ink Flow Section
1-2. Ink Path Diagram

Ink Supply Unit with PISTON pump Negative Pressure Ink tank.
TAG Direction of cartridge

RFID board attachment/removal
Joint
The path of one color ink is shown as an example.
: Ink path Ink Cartridge
: Air valve/waste ink path
Ink supply valve

(solenoid) Joint connection/
disconnection motor
From other colors Ink level detection sensor
Pressurized
Ink Tank Filter
Air chamber in
of pressurized ink
tank
Heater
Ink bus
Ink bus
Heat Sink
Ink level
detection
sensor
Head Head Head Head Head Head
Dust filter From other colors

Maintenance unit ink tank
Negative Pressure Cooling
Pressure Ink Tank
adjusting Fan
bellows Air chamber in common
to all colors of negative
pressure ink tank
One-way Diaphragm
Negative pressure pump (each color
ink tank air valve separate)
Pressurized ink
tank air valve
Ink drain for Negative Ink drain for heat exchanger
Weight pressure ink tank (normally (normally sealed with a blind
sealed with a blind plug) plug)
Bellows sensor
Upper limit sensor
Idle position sensor Overflow and leak detection tank
Bellows elevation
Lower limit sensor mechanism
Drain joint
Normal Cleaning
Strong Cleaning Near-full detection
Waste ink tank
Full detection
Waste ink tank Tray

Ink Flow Section
1-3. Ink Circulation Unit Structure

Ink Cartridge Holder Unit
This unit holds the four ink cartridge units and controls ink supply based on "no ink" signals from the printer.
The unit has an antenna for receiving data from ink cartridge tags. Data received through the antenna is the
basis for establishing a connection between the cartridge and the ink supply path on the printer. The ink path
is closed when cartridges are removed. The ink cartridge holder pivots on the back end and can be secured
by lifting the front end up about 80°.
Ink Cartridge
These cartridges hold the ink supplied to the printer.
Electronic ink tags embedded in cartridges contain information about the ink.
Ink cartridge Cartridge holder joint drive motor Stay
(K)
(C)
(M)
< Ink Cartridge Holder Unit > (Y)
Ink Supply Valve

This valve is positioned between ink cartridges and the negative pressure ink tank.
Opening and closing of the valve regulates the amount of ink flowing from cartridges to the negative pressure
ink tank.
Ink cartridge
Ink supply valve

Ink Flow Section
Heat Exchanger Tower
Heat exchanger tower

Cooling fan
common air chamber
Pressurized ink tank air filter
Heater
Pressurized ink tank air valve Negative pressure ink tank
Ink circulation pump

Negative pressure
ink tank air valve Negative pressure ink
tank common air chamber
Bellows unit Ink overflow pan
< Heat Exchanger Tower>

Ink Flow Section
Pressurized Ink Tank

This tank, positioned higher than the head, stores ink separately for all four colors.
An ink level detection sensor is incorporated in the tank, for detecting the level of ink in the tank. (The sensor
determines whether ink is at the correct level or at a low level.)
Ink supply is controlled based on ink levels in the tank.
Air inlet Ink level detection sensor
< Pressurized Ink Tank >
Negative Pressure Ink Tank

This tank, positioned lower than the head nozzles, also stores ink separately for all four colors.
An ink level detection sensor is incorporated in the tank, for detecting the level of ink in the tank. (The sensor
determines whether ink is at the correct level or at a low level.) Ink supply is controlled based on ink levels in
the tank.
Circulation Pump
Comprised of a pump for circulation of ink from the negative pressure ink tank to the pressurized ink tank and
an overflow pan.
The circulation pump incorporates piston pumps that can drive the supply of ink independently for each color.
Circulation pump
< Negative Pressure Ink Tank >

Ink Flow Section
Structure of Circulation Pump
< Piston Pump >
One-way Valve
Ink flows only in the
direction indicated.
Flow in the opposite From the negative pressure ink tank
direction is stopped.
Made of soft rubber. to the heat sink
(Heat exchanger tower)
The one-way valve

(rubber) is made of
very soft material Coil OFF
that when the ink Piston
Coil ON
from the Pressurized
ink tank is drained
through the Heat
Sink drain tube, the
ink in the Print head
area, also by its
own weight drains
out from the one-
way valve of this Spring Ink chamber
Piston pump via the
Negative pressure
pump.
Electromagnetic Coil
The piston is moved by magnetic force of the coil.
Same as a solenoid.
When the coil is activated, the piston slides back and the ink chamber expands,
taking in the ink from the Negative pressure ink tank.
After this, deactivating the coil causes the piston to push out under the force
of the spring. The ink chamber contracts, pushing the ink up towards the
Pressurized ink tank, creating a pressure in the ink flow system. Note that when
the piston movement stops, no pressure in the ink-flow system is generated.
View with the cover removed

Ink Flow Section
Bellows Unit
Comprised of the bellows and motor connected to the common air chamber, in turn connected to the negative
pressure ink tank for each color. Raising and lowering the bellows adjusts the pressure in the negative
pressure ink tank.
Bellows cover
Bellows motor Bellows arm
Bellows
Weight

Ink Flow Section
Bellows Unit Sensors

Sensors are incorporated at four positions on the bottom of the bellows unit to detect the position of the
bellows, which rises and lowers.
Bellows sensor
Upper limit sensor
HP sensor
Lower limit sensor
Bellows Sensor
The unit is stopped when the bellows sensor detects that the bellows spindle has reached the bottom.
Upper Limit Sensor, HP Sensor, and Lower Limit Sensor

These sensors detect different positions (levels at which the bellows is raised or lowered) based on the
following functions.
• Normal cleaning
The bellows is raised from the home position to the upper limit position to build pressure.
• Strong cleaning
The bellows is raised from the lower limit position to the upper limit position to build pressure.
• Negative pressurization
The bellows is lowered from the home position to the lower limit position to build negative pressure.
Heat Exchanger
This device regulates the temperature (based on the head thermistor temperature) so that ink used in printing
is within a specific temperature range. It incorporates a radiator in contact with the ink path, a fan to cool the
radiator, and an ink heater. The radiator and fan are used to cool ink, and the heater is used to heat it.
Filter
A filter is incorporated in the pressurized ink tank to filter the ink in circulation.
Pressurized Ink Tank Air Valve

This valve opens or closes the link between air in the pressurized ink tank and outside air.
Ink Bus
This unit distributes ink from the ink supply unit uniformly to all head IN ports, and circulates the ink from the
head OUT ports back to the ink supply unit. There are two IN and OUT paths per color between the head and
ink supply unit.

Ink Flow Section
Head Unit Ink Bus

The print head unit is arranged in the order C, K, M, and Y relative to the paper feed direction, and all the
heads face the same direction. The ink bus is positioned over the second row of the heads of another color.
(For example, the black ink bus is over the second row of the cyan heads.) When the head under the ink bus
is replaced, the ink bus over the head to replace must be moved away during the head replacement.
Ink bus
Print head
Overflow Detection
Detects the amount of ink that has come into the overflow pan.
Ink detection sensor on the Ink Overflow Tank.

Ink Flow Section
1-4. Standard Action of Ink Supply Mechanisms

The status of principal units during various printer operations is as follows.
Negative
Pressurized Negative
Pressure Pressurized Ink
Ink Ink Supply Pressure Bellows Pump
Printer Status Ink Ink Tank Circulation Notes
Tank Valve Ink Tank Air Sensor Position
Tank Air Valve Pump
Sensor Valve
Sensor
Power OFF - - Closed Closed Open Lower limit Stopped
Negative
Tank Air Valve Pump
Sensor Valve
Sensor
Transition to ink circulation Home position →
Printer turned ON
lower limit
- - Closed Opens Closes Stopped
(state when spindle
dangles)
During circulation: OFF OFF Opens Stopped
Ink level checked
OFF ON Closed Started
Open Closed Lower limit
ON OFF Closed Stopped
ON ON Closed Stopped
Transition to idle (standby) Lower limit →
- - Closed Closes Opens Stopped
state home position
Negative
Tank Air Valve Pump
Sensor Valve
Sensor
Printing in progress
Home position →
Transition to ink circulation - - Closed Opens Closes Stopped
lower limit
Transition from idle to circulating

Actions in the ink path that prepare the printer in a state of circulation for printing on the media
1) Print signal received.
2) Maintenance unit stored on the paper ejection side of the printer, belt platen raised to the position for printing.
3) When the home position is detected by the bellows pump sensors, the pressurized ink tank air valve opens and the negative pressure ink tank air
valve closes.
4) The circulation pump is activated while the bellows elevation lever is lowered to the lower limit sensor position and the negative pressure ink tank
is negatively pressurized to a specific level by means of the spindle.
5) Ink is now in circulation.
During circulation: ON OFF
When ink is present in the Closed Open Closed Lower limit Stopped
pressurized ink tank ON ON
During circulation: OFF OFF Open Stopped
When no ink is present in Open Closed Lower limit
the pressurized ink tank OFF ON Closed Started
state home position
Action after printing is finished (transition to standby mode)
This action occurs after printing. The sequence is the same when the printer is turned OFF.
1) Printing action is completed, and if no print signal is received in a specific period (by default, 0 sec.), the circulation pump stops, the pressurized
ink tank air valve closes, and the negative pressure ink tank air valve opens.
2) The elevation lever of the pressure adjusting bellows raised to the home position.
3) The printer is now in standby mode.
Negative
Tank Air Valve Pump
Sensor Valve
Sensor
Idle
Standby - - Closed Closed Open Home position Stopped
Sleep - - Closed Closed Open Lower limit Stopped
Transition to sleep
There is no change along the ink path.
1) After a specific period in standby, the maintenance unit emerges under the heads.
2) The elevation lever of the pressure adjusting bellows is lowered to the lower limit sensor position.
3) The printer is now in sleep mode.

Ink Flow Section
Negative
Tank Air Valve Pump
Sensor Valve
Sensor
During circulation:
Cartridge replacement
OFF OFF Open Stopped

When no cartridges are
loaded OFF ON Closes Started
ON OFF Closes Stopped
ON ON Closes Stopped
Detection of no ink in ink cartridges

1) When ink level detection sensors of both the pressurized and negative pressure ink tanks are both deactivated, ink of that color is supplied.
(At this time, if overflow is detected, the ink supply valve closes and the operation panel indicates an error.)
2) If ink level detection sensors of the pressurized and negative pressure ink tanks are not activated after a specific period once ink is supplied, the
ink supply valve closes and printing is stopped.
3) After ink circulates, the printer enters idle (standby) mode.
4) The operation panel indicates to replace the ink cartridge.
Actions during ink cartridge replacement

These actions occur when users replace the ink cartridge.
1) The front cover is opened. The interlock is activated, and power to areas other than sensors is cut.
2) The ink cartridge for replacement is removed. The ink cartridge is separated from the joint portion connected to the ink path.
3) The new ink cartridge is loaded and the front cover closed.
4) The ink cartridge holder unit detects tags, and cartridge information is read. If this is not a correct cartridge, the operation panel indicates to insert
the correct cartridge in the correct position.
5) After the correct cartridge is loaded, it is connected to the ink supply path.
(The cam motor starts, and the registration cam stops in the idle position.)
6) Ink cartridge replacement is now finished.
Negative
Tank Air Valve Pump
Sensor Valve
Sensor
Normal cleaning
Preliminary actions - - Closed Closed Open Home position Stopped
Home position →
Pressurization - - Closed Closed Closed upper limit → home Stopped
position
Home position →
lower limit
During circulation:
OFF OFF Opens Stopped
Ink level checked

mode home position
Negative
Tank Air Valve Pump
Sensor Valve
Sensor
Strong cleaning
Preliminary actions - - Closed Closed Open Lower limit Stopped
Lower limit →
Pressurization - - Closed Closed Closed upper limit → home Stopped
position
Home position →
lower limit
During circulation:
OFF OFF Opens Stopped
Ink level checked
mode home position

Ink Flow Section
Negative
Tank Air Valve Pump
Sensor Valve
Sensor
Preliminary actions *The maintenance unit
Filling the system with ink initially
OFF OFF Closed Closed Closed Home position Stopped

emerges under the head.
Ink supply to negative
pressure ink tank, first OFF OFF Opens Open Open Home position Stopped
actions
Ink supply to negative
pressure ink tank, second OFF ON Closed Open Open Home position Stopped
actions
Ink supply and circulation OFF OFF Opens Stopped
Repeated until the
OFF ON Closed Started sensors in pressurized
Open Open Home position
ON OFF Closed Stopped and negative pressure ink
tanks are activated.
*The circulation pump
Started →
Pressurization ON ON Closed Closed Open Home position runs for the specified time
stopped
(1.5–2.0 sec.).
Repeated actions Actions from "Ink supply and circulation" to "Pressurization" are repeated six times.
Wiping - - In the state of "Preliminary actions," the wiper cleans the head nozzle plate (runs back and forth over the plate).
Home position →
lower limit
During circulation:
Ink level checked OFF OFF Opens Stopped
Lower limit *Ink circulates for 30 sec.
Open Closed (With the spindle (this setting is subject to
ON OFF Closed dangling) Stopped change in the future).
mode home position

Ink Flow Section
MEMO

Ink Flow Section
2. Disassembly
2-1. Cutting the Ink Tubes

Follow this Ink tube cutting procedure when instructed in replacing certain ink circulation parts.
1. Cut the ink tubes at the Cut-mark line.

< Cut from where the black line is imprinted on the existing ink tube.>
Use a nipper to cut the ink tube.
The nipper should cut the tube right angle to the tube along the imprinted black line.
Tube (sample)
Right Angle
Nipper
2. Allowance in the cutting area.
Cut the tube within plus or minus 5 mm from the imprinted black line.
Cut-mark line
5 mm 5 mm

Ink Flow Section
3. The cutting angle should be within 1.5 mm (approx. 10 degrees) from the imprinted marking.
1.5 mm
4. Check with the eye for any left over tube on the cut area.
If any leftover piece(s) are left on the tube, cut the leftover piece off.
Check for any leftover piece on the tube.
5. Insert the joint on the tube. If the joint is too tight to fit, put some ink on the tip of the tube to act as a lubrication.
< Too much ink to act as lubrication will cause the joint to slip off. Make sure not to put too much ink, and
confirm that the joint does not slip off.>

Ink Flow Section
2-2. Ink Spill Prevention from the Ink Cartridge Holder Unit
Follow this procedure before swing opening the Ink cartridge holder unit in the vertical open position to
prevent ink spillage from the Ink cartridge holder.
Ignoring this procedure may cause the spilled ink to stain the machine interior with the ink.
2. Pull out the four Ink cartridges from the Ink cartridge holder unit.
3. Using lint-free paper or cloth, wipe clean the pooled ink from the Ink cartridge holder unit.
Pooled dripped ink Absorb and wipe clean the ink
4. Do the same in the area beyond the Ink cartridge joint nozzle on the machine.
Pooled dripped ink

Absorb and wipe clean the ink
5. Insert the four Ink cartridges firmly back in the machine.
6. Turn ON the machine power and confirm that the Ink cartridge joint drive motor operates and mechanically joins
the Ink tubes to the Ink cartridge holder unit.
< If not required to supply ink into the machine, skip this step-6.>
Joined and hooked.

Ink Flow Section
7. Make four cuts of ink absorbent papers in the shape of about 150 mm x 200 mm rectangular shape, and then
fold each piece into approx. 20 mm x 100 mm piece.
< The size of the ink absorbent papers will differ according to the paper thickness. The size is not so critical.>
200 mm
20 mm
150 mm
100 mm
8. Hook these four folded papers between the ink cartridge holder and ink tubes of the each four color, and confirm
that the papers do not slide out or fall off.
Before going to the instruction in the next page, confirm that the Flat cable has a good fold, or the Ink cartridge joint
drive motor may hit on the Flat cable, when the Ink cartridge holder unit is raised up, and damage the cable.
Ink cartridge joint drive motor
Make sure that the Flat cable has a good

bend long the black line on the cable.

Ink Flow Section
10. Remove one thumb screw and one IT screw 4x8 (1 pc) from the Ink cartridge holder unit and the unit to the
vertical position. << Refer to the two photographs below.>>
< Make sure to screw the Lock arm to prevent the Ink cartridge holder from falling down.>
CAUTION:
Make sure to remove the ink absorbent paper the each time the Ink cartridge is pulled out or plugged into the
Ink cartridge unit. Then re-hook the ink absorbent paper in the instructed position, using a new piece of paper if
the previous one has already absorbed the ink.
Thumb screw IT screw 4x8 (1 pc)
Fix the vertical position of the Ink cartridge holder unit

using a screw to prevent the holder from falling down.
The ink absorbing paper should

stay in position to absorb any
ink that may drip when the Ink
cartridge holder is opened to
the vertical position.

Ink Flow Section
2-3. Removing the Scissor Clamps

Scissor clamps, used for clamping tubes, are attached on the top of the head holder cover.
Remove them as follows.
2. Open the front cover and remove the stoppers at two positions (IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc each)) to remove the
Upper transfer unit. (Refer to paper transfer section information in Chapter 8.)
3. pull and slide the Upper transfer unit out of the machine.
Stopper
Upper transfer unit
4. Remove the scissor clamps attached to the top of the head holder cover.
Scissor clamps

Ink Flow Section
2-4. Bellows Unit

2. Remove the left and right top covers, rear cover, and right-side cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter
2.)
3. Open the power supply unit, engine control PCB, and ink supply unit to the service position. (Refer to the
section on covers in Chapter 2.)
4. Remove the bellows unit sensor plate. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))
5. Disconnect the bellows motor wire connector.
Connector
Sensor plate
6. Disconnect the Bellows air tube from the Negative pressure ink tank common air chamber.
Bellows unit
Unplug the Bellows air tube
Bellows air tube

Ink Flow Section
7. Remove the bellows unit mounting screws. (IT screw 4x8 (4 pcs)), and remove the Bellows unit from the
machine
Bellows unit mounting screws
CAUTION:
1. If the Bellows unit contains ink from the past ink overflow, the ink may drip out from the Bellows air tube if the
Bellows unit is held up-side-down with the Bellows air tube disconnected from the Common air chamber of the
Negative pressure ink tank.
2. There is only a narrow space between the Bellows unit and the four Ink pump PCBs.
Pay caution not to damage the Ink pump PCBs by hitting the Bellows unit against the PCBs.
Bellows unit Ink pump PCBs

Narrow space

Ink Flow Section
2-5. Draining the Ink from the Ink Supply Unit into the Waste Ink Tank
Draining all 4 colors from the Pressurized ink tanks, Heat exchanger tower and Negative pressure ink tanks.
The instruction given here is to drain the ink from the system in replace any if the following 4 components on the
machine.
• Pressurized Ink Tank
• Print Head
• Overflow Pan
• Pressurized Ink Tank Air Valve
• Negative Pressure Ink Tank
NOTE: Test Mode 2711 (Head Replacement Mode) will be done later in the procedure.
2. Remove the 4 scissor clamps from the head holder cover. (Refer to the "Removing the Scissor Clamps.")
3. Open the rear cover and the ink supply unit. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
4. Following the instructions in "Bellows Unit" given in this chapter, remove the bellows unit.
5. Use the 4 scissor clamps to clamp the drainage tubes under the Heat exchanger Tower.
Ink drainage tubes

Ink Flow Section
6. Disconnect the four drainage tubes on the overflow pan side. Insert the ends in the port in the overflow pan.
<Prior to the insertion of the drainage tubes into the Ink drain port of the Overflow pan, remove the sponge if the
sponge exists.>
Note: Be careful, because ink may drip when you remove the tubes.
< Refer to the photographs, sketch, and instructions on this page.>
Unhook the Ink drainage tube from the tube

holder and straighten the tube to allow smooth
drainage of the ink.
Do the same to the Ink

drainage tubes of
all the colors.
Disconnect the Ink drainage tube at the bottom.

Do not disconnect the Ink drainage tube from the top -- the ink will flow down on the floor.
Note: Insert drainage tubes so that they go into the groove (ink drain port) on the overflow pan.
Overflow pan
If sponges exist in these two places,

remove these sponges and throw them away.
This is to allow smooth drainage of the ink.
< Refer to the photographs on the next page for further details.>

Ink Flow Section
Following photographs show how the Ink drainage tubes should be inserted into the Ink drain port of the Overflow
pan.
Ink drain port of the

overflow pan in which the
end of the ink drainage
tube should be inserted.
< The ends of the disconnected Ink drainage tubes are inserted in the
Ink drain port of the overflow pan.>
Do not remove the Scissor clips from the Ink drainage tubes yet.
The instruction for that is on Step-(9).

Ink Flow Section
7. Unplug the Air tube between the Negative pressure ink tank common air chamber and Negative pressure ink
tank air valve, on the air valve side.
Negative pressure ink tank air valve
These are the two sponges to remove and throw away before inserting
the 4 Ink drainage tubes into the Ink drain port of the Overflow pan.
The air tube to disconnect from the Negative pressure ink tank air valve.
8. Drop the unplugged end of the air tube into the Overflow pan in order that any overflown ink coming to the tube
is drained out onto the Overflow pan and not drip on the floor.
The disconnected end of the air tube is dropped

into the Overflow pan for the Overflow pan to
catch any overflown ink from this air tube.
9. Remove the scissor clamps from the ink drainage tubes clamped in step (5).
The ink from the Pressurized ink tank, Ink bus, Negative pressure ink tank, and Heat exchanger tower starts to
drip down from the Ink drainage tubes once the scissor clamps are removed.
The ink will not drain freely if the Ink drainage tube is bent or flattened. Use fingers to straighten the Ink
drainage tube(s) to allow smooth ink drainage.
Wait few minutes and confirm that the ink is draining smoothly before going to the next step.;
- the instruction continues onto the next page -

Ink Flow Section
In replacing the Ink supply valve(s), Negative pressure ink tank(s) or entire Ink
circulation system, do all the following Steps including [10] to [15].
In replacing only the Ink bus, skip the Steps [10] , [12] , [13] and [14] , as the
ink supply tube(s) need not be emptied of ink when replacing only the Ink
bus.
10. Unplug the Ink cartridge(s), from the Ink cartridge holder of the machine when replacing the Ink supply
valve or Negative pressure ink tank of that color. Unplug all 4 ink cartridges when replacing the entire Ink
circulation system.
11. With the Front door of the ComColor opened, turn ON the machine power. < IMPORTANT !! >
< The Front door is opened to prevent the machine from making the initial movement, including the
ink supplying action, when the machine power is turned ON.>
Error message Z05-1212 [Front Cover Open] error message displays, but ignore the message and go into
Test Mode.
When the Test Mode is accessed, error message Z05-1212 [Front cover open] displays.
• Press the Close button on the error message display.
Then error message W51-1301 [Request to start recovery operations] displays.
Lastly, error message Z02-2126 [Ink cartridge not loaded] displays.
12. Activate Test Mode No. 2745 [Ink Supplying Method], and change the setting to [1: Manual].
13. Activate one or more of the following 4 Test Modes to empty the Ink supply tube between the Ink supply valve
and Negative pressure ink tank.
Which test mode to activate depends on which ink color to empty.
< Make sure that the Ink cartridge for those colors to activate the test modes are pulled out.>
Test Mode No. 2482 [K-Ink Supply Valve Open] -------- < Black Ink >
Test Mode No. 2483 [C-Ink Supply Valve Open] -------- < Cyan Ink >
Test Mode No. 2484 [M-Ink Supply Valve Open] -------- < Magenta Ink >
Test Mode No. 2485 [Y-Ink Supply Valve Open] --------- < Yellow Ink >
Activate the necessary test mode(s) from above 4, one at a time.
For each test mode, press the START Key approximately 10 times at 1 second interval between each press.
The ink in the Ink supply tube should become free of ink after about 10 press of the START Key.
Activate next Test Mode, if more than 1 color need to be drained.
14. After above step is done, activate Test Mode No. 2745 [Ink Supplying Method], and return the setting back to
[0: Automatic].
15. Activate Test Mode No. 2711 [Head Replacement Mode], and change the setting to [1: ON]. < IMPORTANT !!>
< This test mode setting is to prevent the Print Head to drip ink on the BP Belt when the power is turned ON
the next time to supply the ink in the ink circulation system.>
Turn OFF the machine power.
16. Wait until all the ink is drained out of the Negative pressure ink tank of which the ink is drained.
< Once again, the ink will not drain freely if the Ink drainage tube is bent or flattened. Use fingers to straighten
the Ink drainage tube(s) to allow smooth ink drainage.>

Ink Flow Section
17. Connect back the Air tube between the air chamber (in common to the negative pressure ink tanks) and
negative pressure ink tank air valve, unplugged in Step-7, on the Negative pressure ink tank air valve.
Connect the Air tube back on the Negative pressure ink tank air valve.
18. Return the Ink drainage tubes back in their original position.
Make sure to make good Z-shape bend on the tube to prevent ink leakage.
Also make sure to hook the tube in the tube clamp.
This completes the ink draining procedure.
Hook the Ink drainage tubes in the tube clamps.
Make good Z-shape bend on all four Ink drainage tubes to prevent ink leakage.
19. Proceed to the replacement of the components in the Ink circulation system.

Ink Flow Section
2-6. Initial Ink Filling

CAUTION:
The machine must have Test Mode No. 2711 set to [1] and power turned OFF in order to make the initial ink filling
action without dripping ink on the BP Belt from the Print Heads on the next machine power ON.
Test Mode No. 2711 set to [1] prevents the Ink pan from moving out from top of the BP Belt until the ink filling is
completed and Head cleaning is automatically made at the end. The Ink pan moves away from the BP Belt after
the Head cleaning is finished and all the Print heads have the meniscus made.
In the case if forgotten to set Test Mode No. 2711 to [1] before turning the machine OFF and working on the Ink
circulation system, there is one way to get into Test Mode No. 2711 without having the machine make the initial
movement.
Steps to take if forgotten to set Test Mode No. 2711 to [1] before working on the Ink circulation system:
1. After working on the Ink circulation system is finished and the machine is in workable condition, open the Front
door of the machine, and then turn ON the machine power.
Go into Test Mode No. 2711 and change the setting to [1].
< Opening the Front door will trip the Safety switch and with the Safety switch tripped, the machine will not
make any mechanical initial movement nor supply the ink, when the machine power is turned ON.>
2. After changing the Test Mode No. 2711 setting to [1], turn OFF the machine power.
3. Close the Front door of the machine.
4. Refer to the next page to start filling the machine with the Ink.

Ink Flow Section
Before going to step-1, bellow, confirm that the Flat cable has a good fold, or the Ink cartridge joint drive motor may
hit on the Flat cable, when the Ink cartridge holder unit is raised up, and damage the cable.
Ink cartridge joint drive motor
Make sure that the Flat cable has a good

bend long the black line on the cable.
1. Follow the instructions given earlier in this chapter on the, “Ink spill prevention from the Ink cartridge holder
unit”, take the steps needed to prevent the ink spillage when opening up the Ink cartridge holder.
2. Open the Ink cartridge holder unit to the vertical position following the instruction given in the, “Ink spill
prevention from the Ink cartridge holder unit” procedure described earlier in this section.
< The vertical tilting of the Ink cartridge holder will allow quick filling of the ink, especially when the ink volume in
the ink cartridge is low.>
Make sure to lock the Ink cartridge holder unit position by a screw to prevent the Ink cartridge holder
from folding down.
Fix the position of the Ink cartridge

holder unit with a screw to prevent
the holder from falling down.
3. Turning ON the machine power will start the Initial ink filling action.
4. The Test Mode No. 2711 [Head Replacement Mode] initial ink filling action ends after automatic Head cleaning
action. Do not operate nor go into any other test mode until the Initial ink filling action is completely finished.
5. Test Mode No. 2711 will automatically go back to setting [0] after the ink is filled.
6. Gently close the Ink cartridge holder back to its original flat position.
7. Put all the covers back.

Ink Flow Section
2-7. Removing the Head Holder Cover

The procedure for removing the head holder cover is as follows. This procedure applies during disassembly and
assembly of all sections in the head unit.
2. Open the front cover and confirm that the maintenance unit is under the head holder (under the print heads). If it
is not, move it to the position under the head holder.
3. Remove the left and right top covers. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
4. Remove the operation panel (the entire bracket; round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (3 pcs)) and rest it on the left side of
the ink cartridge unit.
5. Remove the center inner cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
Center inner cover

Ink Flow Section
6. Remove the stoppers at two positions (IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc) and remove the upper transfer unit.
Stopper
Upper transfer unit
from folding down.
Fix the position of the Ink cartridge

holder unit with a screw to prevent
the holder from falling down.

Ink Flow Section
8. Disconnect the connector and remove the sensor bracket. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
9. Remove the Head holder cover. (IT screw 3x6 (6 pcs))
Engraved arrow
marks on the
Head holder
cover indicates
the position of the
mounting screws in
Head holder cover
all 6 positions.

Ink Flow Section
2-8. Ink Cartridge

1. Open the right front cover.
2. Pull and remove the ink cartridges for replacement. The ink cartridge is now separated from the joint portion
connected to the ink path.
3. Load new ink cartridges and close the front cover.
2-9. Ink Cartridge Holder Unit

2. Remove the left and right top covers, rear cover, and right-side cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter
2.)
3. Put the controller PCB box in maintenance position. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
4. Open the front cover and remove the four scissor clamps. (Follow the instructions in "Removing the Scissor
Clamps.")
5. Remove the operation panel (the entire bracket; round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (3 pcs)) and rest it on the left side of
the ink cartridge unit.
Operation panel (moved aside)
6. Remove the ink cartridges. (4 cartridges)

7. Unplug the three wire harness connectors of the Cartridge holder joint drive motor, Ink cartridge loading
detector, and Relay connector linking the ink cartridge RFID board to the printer harness.
<Confirm of the
following in assembly.>
Where circled, the

Connector Cyan (C) ink tube is at
the bottom, then the
three wire connectors,
and the Black (K) ink
tube comes on the
very top.
Connector
Connector

Ink Flow Section
8. Using scissor clamps, clamp the tubes between the ink cartridges and ink supply valves, near the ink supply
valve port on all four colors. (4 scissor clamps)
Ink supply valves
9. Disconnect the tubes between the ink cartridges and ink supply valves from the ink supply valve port.
Note: Be careful of the ink which may drip from the ink supply valves.
10. Remove the scissor clamps and allow the ink in the tubes to drain into the pan of the Ink cartridge holder unit.
Cap the four ink drained ink tube openings with the rubber caps provided in the replacement Ink cartridge holder
unit kit.
Since the ink in the four tubes were drained into the ink pan of the Ink cartridge holder unit, the ink may very
likely to drip out unless this procedure is followed with care.
from folding down.
Fix the position of the Ink

cartridge holder unit with a
screw to prevent the holder
from falling down.

Ink Flow Section
12. Wait few minutes for the ink from the Ink cartridge holder unit to drain down into the Waste ink tank. Then at the
three-way joint of the ink drain tubes, use scissor clamps to clamp the tubes from the overflow pan of the Ink
cartridge holder unit and to the waste ink tank. (2 tubes.)
13. Disconnect the Ink drain tube from the ink cartridge holder unit at the three-way joint. Plug a rubber cap on the
tip of the unplugged ink drain tube to prevent ink from dripping out.
14. Likewise, plug the port of the three-way stopper from which above ink drain tube was unplugged, to prevent ink
drip.
Unplug this ink drain tube from the 3-way joint.
Ink drain tube of the Ink

cartridge holder unit.
15. Use a nipper or a similar tool to cut the fastener (band) holding the ink drain tube where it emerges out from the
inside of the machine frame out towards the back.
16. Pull up the waste ink tube into the frame.
17. Restore the ink cartridge holder unit, which was standing, to its original flat position. Remove all four ink
absorbing papers from the Ink cartridge holder unit.
18. Remove the E-rings linking the arm plate of the ink cartridge holder unit to the bracket on the printer side. (6 mm
dia. E-ring (2 pcs))
E-rings
19. Remove the Ink cartridge holder unit from the printer.

Ink Flow Section
Assembly Precautions
1. Thread the Ink drain tube of the Ink cartridge holder unit from inside to the outside of the machine frame.
Push the Ink drain tube through and down until the plastic band hits the machine frame and stops.
2. On the rear of the machine, wrap a plastic band on the Ink drain tube and tighten it and cut off the excess
length of the band.
< This will fix the position of the Ink drain tube and keep it from going in or coming out.>
3. The grips on the Tube Clips on the Ink supply tubes against the Ink supply valves should face in the direction
shown on the photograph, below, on four colors.
Grip of the tube clip
Ink tube clip
4. As mentioned earlier, when assembled, the Cyan ink tube should be at the bottom. The three wire connectors
are in the middle and the Black ink tube should come on the very top.
Black ink tube

<Confirm of the following
Cyan ink tube in assembly.>
Connector
Where circled, the
Cyan (C) ink tube is at
the bottom, then the
three wire connectors,
and the Black (K) ink
Connector tube comes on the very
top.
Connector

Ink Flow Section
2-10. Cartridge Holder Joint Drive Motor

3. Remove the ink cartridges. (4 cartridges)
4. Remove the left and right top covers. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
5. Open the Ink cartridge holder unit to the vertical position following the instruction given in the, “Ink spill revention
from the Ink cartridge holder unit” procedure described earlier in this section.
6. Disconnect the harness and connector.
7. Remove the motor mounting screws. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Cartridge holder
joint drive motor
Screw driver
8. Remove the motor.

Ink Flow Section
2-11. Ink Cartridge RFID PCB

2. When removing the RFID PCB for the black color ink, remove the left top cover. When removing the RFID
PCB for other color inks, remove the right top cover. (Binding screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
3. Release the wire cables from the wire band, and then unplug the wire connector from the RFID PCB.
Connector Connector
4. Unhook the RFID PCB from the two plastic hooks, and then pull out the RFID PCB.
Hooks

Ink Flow Section
2-12. Ink Supply Valve

< Refer to the “Cutting the Ink Tubes” section in this Chapter for the cutting instruction of the Ink tubes.>
2. Remove the left and right top covers, rear cover, and right side cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
3. Remove the scissor clamps from machine. (Follow the instructions in “Removing the Scissor Clamps.”)
4. Open the power supply unit, engine control PCB, and ink supply unit. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
5. Follow the procedure in “Draining Ink into the Waste Ink Tank.”
6. Remove the ink cartridges from the machine. (Disconnect its joint from the machine.)
Note:Be careful at this step. If you disconnect ink tubes from the Ink supply valves while the ink cartridges are
still not removed, the ink in the ink cartridges will flow and drain out from the ends of the tubes onto the
floor.
7. Unplug the wire connector attached to the ink supply valve to replace, as well as the mounting screw to the
machine frame. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc)) <Do only for that of the color to replace.>
Removed in above step 7)
8. Use nippers to cut the ink supply tube at the downstream port of the the ink supply valve for replacement.
<Do only for that of the color to replace.>
Ink supply valve downstream port areas
Note:Hold the tube end with a clean lint-free cloth or paper while cutting it. Continue holding it until the ink in the
tube drains into the negative pressure ink tank.
9. Cap the cut ends of the ink tube with rubber caps, which are supplied in the replacement Ink supply valve kit.

Ink Flow Section
10. Cut the Ink supply tube at the Cut-Marking located above the Negative pressure ink tank, and cap the cut end of
the ink tube, and cap the cut end of the ink tube with the rubber cap included in the replacement kit.
Cut the Ink supply

tube at the Cut-mark
line.
Which color tube to

cut depends on which
Ink Supply Valve to
replace.
The cut marking on the ink tube.

(Magenta as an example)
11. Also cap the cut tube on the negative pressure ink tank.
12. Free the cut ink tube from the machine by cutting away the tube band banding it to the other color ink tubes and
unlock the ink tube harness bands to free it from the machine frame. Then throw away the removed ink tube.
13. Disconnect the ink tube running between the ink cartridge holder and ink supply valve, at the ink cartridge
holder port shown on the photograph below.
Then drain the ink from the tube into the ink pan on the Ink cartridge holder unit by lifting up the Ink supply
valve.

Ink Flow Section
14. Use the rubber cap included in the Ink supply valve replacement kit to cap the unplugged end of the ink tube on
the previous step and dispose of the tube together with the Ink supply valve.
(1) Replace the drainage tubes on the bottom of the Heat exchanger tower with four new ones and make good
Z-shape bends on all four drainage tubes.
(2) Replace the air tube running between the Air valve of the Negative pressure ink tank and Common air
chamber of the Negative pressure ink tank.
(3) Replace the Bellows unit air tube.
(4) Cut the tube for the <Ink supply valve to Negative pressure ink tank> (included with the Ink supply valve) at
the Cut-mark line.
(5) Add the Joint on the tube cut in step (4).
(6) Form the new tube (ref: step (5)) and put it in through the tube harness bands. Bind the 4 tubes with a band.
<refer to the photograph below.>
Ink tube harness bands
30 mm
Binding band
Bind the 4 tubes at a distance approx. 30 mm from
the Tube harness band.
The Binding band should not be tightened too much
as to interefere with the smooth flow of the ink.
(7) Confirm that the tubes do not buckle when the Ink supply unit (Heat exchanger tower) is closed.
(8) The tube clip on the Ink supply valve should face in the following directions, as shown on the photogaraph
below. The grip of the clip should face to the front of the machine for the colors Y, M and C. The grip of the clip
for color K should face to the rear of the machine.
M K
Y
(9) Referring to the section on the Initial ink filling, fill the machine with ink.

Ink Flow Section
2-13. Negative Pressure Ink Tank

2. Remove the left and right top covers, rear cover, and right side cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
3. Remove the scissor clamps. (Follow the instructions in "Removing the Scissor Clamps.")
4. Open the power supply unit, engine control PCB, and ink supply unit. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
5. Replace the Ink pump PCB for the Negative pressure ink tank to be replaced.
Ink pump PCBs
6. Follow the procedure in “Draining Ink into the Waste Ink Tank.”
< Make sure to follow the instructions and do not forget to do the Test Mode No. 2711.>
7. Cut the Ink supply tube coming down from the Ink supply valve to the Negative pressure ink tank to be replaced
at the Cut-mark line. < Cut only the tube for the tank to be replaced.>
< To prevent the ink from dripping, confirm that the ink tube is empty of the ink before cutting.>
The cutting position on the ink tube is marked with black marker line.
K = 45 mm C = 45 mm M = 45 mm Y = 40 mm <Distance from the tube end on the tank.>
8. Cap the cut end of the ink supply tube with the rubber cap included in the replacement parts kit.
9. Cap the cut end of the ink supply tube remaining on the Negative pressure ink tank with the rubber cap included
in the replacement parts kit.
10. Cut the Ink tube coming from the Ink bus to the Negative pressure ink tank at the Cut-mark line for the Negative
pressure ink tank to be replaced. < Cut only the tube for the tank to be replaced.>
K = 30 mm C = 25 mm M = 30 mm Y = 43 mm <Distance from the tube end on the tank.>
Ink tubes coming down from

the Ink supply valves.
Ink tubes coming down from

the Ink bus.
Negative pressure ink tanks.
11. Cap the cut end of the Ink tube, cut by above step-10, with the rubber cap which comes in the replacement
parts kit.
12. Cap the cut end of the Ink tube remaining on the Negative pressure ink tank with the rubber cap which comes in
the replacement parts kit.

Ink Flow Section
13. Unplug the wire connector to the Ink detection sensor on the Negative pressure ink tank from the tank to
remove.
14. Unplug the wire connector from the extension wire from the Ink pump PCB for the Negative pressure ink tank to
remove.
Ink detection sensor connectors
Extension wire connectors from

the Ink pump PCB.
15. Disconnect from the Common air chamber of the air tube of the Negative pressure ink tank to replace.
16. Cap the port on the Common air chamber from which the air tube was unplugged with the rubber cap included
in the replacement parts kit. This is to prevent dust from entering into the ink circulation system.
Unplug the air tube of the

Negative pressure ink tank to
replace. <Only for that tank.>
Common air chamber of the

Negative pressure ink tank.
17. Remove 4 mounting screws from the Negative pressure ink tank, which is to be removed.
( IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs), Pan-head screw 3x8 (2 pcs))
Another set of two mounting

screws exist on the left-side of
the Negative pressure ink tank.

Ink Flow Section
18. Release the Air tube from the tube guide on the ink circulation tower of the Negative pressure ink tank to
replace.
Unhook the Air tube of the Negative

pressure ink tank to replace, from the air
tube guide on the Ink circulation tower.
19. Pull and unplug the Negative pressure ink tank straight out, gently from the Ink circulation tower.
< Pay caution to the ink, which may drip from the removed Negative pressure ink tank or from the Ink
circulation tower from where the tank was removed.>
20. Confirm that the black-colored rubber O-Ring does not stay on the Ink circulation tower. If the O-Ring is on
the Ink circulation tower from where the Negative pressure ink tower was unplugged, remove it and throw it
away.
< The new replacement Negative pressure ink tank replacement kit comes with a new O-Ring. Make sure to
use the new O-Ring and throw away >
20. Confirm that the black-colored rubber O-Ring does not stay on the Ink circulation tower. If the O-Ring is

Ink Flow Section
18) Pull the Negative pressure ink tank gently forward to disengage from the Ink supply unit.
<Watch out for the small amount of ink which may drip, when the tank is pulled out.>
19) A rubber O-Ring may stay inside the Heat exchanger tower. If so, take out the O-Ring from the tower.
Caution:
<Make sure to remove the existing O-Ring out from the Heat exchanger tower, or it will cause ink
leakage when the new O-Ring on the new replaced Negative pressure ink tank pushes over the
existing O-Ring which should have been removed.>
Precaution in Assembly:
1) Confirm that there is an O-Ring attached on the port on the Negative pressure ink tank.
2) Coat the port, on which the O-Ring is attached, lightly with the ink of its color to act as lubrication and then
firmly insert the Negative pressure ink tank into the Ink supply unit tower.
3) The 4 Ink drainage tubes under the Heat exchanger should be replaced with new drainage tubes, which are
included in the Negative pressure ink tank spare part kit.
<Make sure to make good Z-shaped bend on the each drainage tube to prevent ink leakage.>
4) Add the Joints on the cut tubes.
<Straight joints are for the tubes to the ink supply.>
<Right-angled joints are for the tubes to the Ink bus.>
5) The right-angled joints should face in the direction as shown on the photograph below.
The photograph shows the following:

- How the right-angled joints should face.
- How the tube joint Clips should face.
The photograph shows all Joints replaced, but in

actual, it would be only for the replaced tank.
6) The tube Clips on the straight joints and bottom Clips on the right-angled joints should all face forward.
The top Clips on the right-angled joints should face up.
7) For the first time Negative pressure ink tank replacement, the Common air chamber should be replaced with
the New Type, so that the Common air chamber can accept both the Small and Large diameter Air tubes,
depending on which diameter tube the replaced Negative pressure ink tank has.
Mount the Common air chamber on the Overflow pan.
8) Connect the Air tube on the Common air chamber to the Negative pressure ink tank air valve.
9) Connect the 4 Air tubes between the Common air chamber and Negative pressure ink tanks.
<Make sure to keep the Caps on the Common air chamber ports plugged for those ports not used on the
chamber. Otherwise the air will go into the Common air chamber and the ink will overflow.>
10) The Clips for the 4 Air tubes attached by step-(9) should all face to the left on the Common air chamber ports.
11) Mount the Bellows unit back on the machine and connect the Air tube between the Bellows unit and Common
air chamber.
12) Confirm that all the parts are mounted back on the machine.
Confirm that all the Ink tubes and Air tubes are mounted correctly.
Confirm that both the Air valves for the Pressurized ink tank and Negative pressure ink tank have the black
rubber cap on the top.
Confirm that all the electrical connectors are connected.
13) Follow the instruction on the Initial Ink Filling and fill the machine with the ink.

Ink Flow Section
< for the New Type Ink Circulation Unit > ( Type-3 & Type-4 )
Note that Type-4 has Ink Pump PCB from which
wire connectors need to be unplugged.
NOTE : The Negative pressure ink tank on the Old type and New type Ink Circulation Unit are different.
1) Turn OFF the machine power.

2) Remove the left and right top covers, rear cover, and right side cover. (Refer to the section on covers in
Chapter 2.)
3) Remove the scissor clamps. (Follow the instructions in "Removing the Scissor Clamps.")
4) Open the power supply unit, engine control PCB, and ink supply unit. (Refer to the section on covers in
Chapter 2.)
5) Follow the procedure in “Draining Ink into the Waste Ink Tank”.
<Make sure to follow the instructions and never forget to do the Test Mode No. 2711.>
6) Cut the Ink supply ink tube coming down from the Ink supply valve to the Negative pressure ink tank to be
replaced (the drained empty tube) at the Cut-mark line. <Refer to the Tube cutting instructions given on the
very end of this Chapter.>
7) Plug the cut ends of the Ink tube, cut by above step-(13), with the Caps which come in the spare parts kit.
Note: Be careful of the ink, which may drip from the cut Ink tube.
8) Cut the Ink tube coming from the Ink bus to the Negative pressure ink tank at the Cut-mark line.
9) Plug the cut ends of the Ink tube, cut by above step-(15), with the Caps which come in the spare parts kit.
Note: Be careful of the ink, which may drip from the cut Ink tube.
10) Disconnect the Ink sensor connector on the Negative pressure ink tank to be removed.
Magenta as an example
The ink tube to be cut by step-(6)

Pointing to the Magenta ink tube
as an example.
The ink tube to be cut by step-(8)

Pointing to the Magenta ink tube
as an example.
The Connector to disconnect in step-(10)

Pointing to the Ink sensor connector of
Magenta as an example.

Ink Flow Section
11) Disconnect the Ink pump junction connector for the Negative pressure ink tank to be replaced.
12) Disconnect the all 4 Air tubes of the Negative pressure ink tank from the Common air chamber.
13) Cap the 4 open ports on the Common air chamber.
14) Remove the Common air chamber from the Overflow pan by gently unlocking the plastic hook on the
chamber. <This is to give extra room in removing the Negative pressure ink pump.>
Junction connector of the Ink pump.

<That of Cyan ink pump as an example>
Air tubes of the Negative pressure tanks
Common air chamber
Overflow pan
15) Remove 4 mounting screws of the Negative pressure ink tank to remove. < 2 screws on each side of the tank.>
Mounting screws of the Negative

pressure ink tank.
<Two screws on each side>

Ink Flow Section
17) Pull the Negative pressure ink tank gently forward to disengage from the Ink supply unit.
<Watch out for the small amount of ink which may drip, when the tank is pulled out.>
18) A rubber O-Ring may stay inside the Heat exchanger tower. If so, take out the O-Ring from the tower.
Caution:
<Make sure to remove the existing O-Ring out from the Heat exchanger tower, or it will cause ink
leakage when the new O-Ring on the new replaced Negative pressure ink tank pushes over the
existing O-Ring which should have been removed.>
1) Confirm that there is an O-Ring attached on the port on the Negative pressure ink tank.
2) Coat the port, on which the O-Ring is attached, lightly with the ink of its color to act as lubrication and then
firmly insert the Negative pressure ink tank into the Ink supply unit tower.
3) The Ink drainage tube under the Heat exchanger should be replaced with new drainage tube, which is
included in the Negative pressure ink tank spare part kit.
<Make sure to make good Z-shaped bend on the each drainage tube to prevent ink leakage.>
4) Add the Joints on the cut tubes.
5) The right-angled joints should face in the direction as shown on the photograph below.

The photograph shows all Joints replaced, but in

actual, it would be only for the replaced tank.
6) The tube Clips on the straight joints and bottom Clips on the right-angled joints should all face forward.
The top Clips on the right-angled joints should face up.
7) Mount the Common air chamber on the Overflow pan.
8) Connect the Air tube on the Common air chamber to the Negative pressure ink tank air valve.
9) Connect the 4 Air tubes between the Common air chamber and Negative pressure ink tanks.
<Make sure to keep the Caps on the Common air chamber ports plugged for those ports not used on the
chamber. Otherwise the air will go into the Common air chamber and the ink will overflow.>
10) Hook the Air tube of the replaced Negative pressure ink tank in the tube guide on the Ink tower.
11) The Clips for the 4 Air tubes attached by step-(9) should all face to the left on the Common air chamber ports.
12) Mount the Bellows unit back on the machine and connect the Air tube between the Bellows unit and Common
air chamber.
13) Confirm that all the parts are mounted back on the machine.
Confirm that all the Ink tubes and Air tubes are mounted correctly.
Confirm that both the Air valves for the Pressurized ink tank and Negative pressure ink tank have the black
rubber cap on the top.
Confirm that all the electrical connectors are connected.
14) Follow the instruction on the Initial Ink Filling and fill the machine with the ink.

Ink Flow Section
Pressurized Ink Tank <Old type / New type>

NOTE : The Pressurized ink tank on the Old type and New type Ink Circulation Unit are different.
1) Remove the left and right top covers, rear cover, and right side cover. (Refer to the section on covers in
Chapter 2.)
3) Free the flexible cable running over the pressurized ink tank from the Reaar cover retaining plate, and then
remove the rear cover retaining plate. (Round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
Note: This step is not necessary when removing the Cyan or Black ink pressurized ink tanks.
Flexible cable
Rear cover retaining plate
Chapter 2.)
5) Follow the procedure in "Draining Ink into the Waste Ink Tank".
6) Unplug the connector of the Ink detection sensor on the Pressurized ink tank which is to be replaced.
< Pressurized ink tank on the Old type <short air tube> Ink circulation unit >
Unplug the Connector on the

Pressurized ink tank of only
which is to be replaced.
< Pressurized ink tank on the New type <long air tube> Ink circulation unit >

Ink Flow Section
7) Unplug the Air valve tube of the Pressurized ink tank from the Common air chamber.
Then plug the port on the Common air chamber with a Cap included in the Pressurized ink tank parts kit.
< Pressurized ink tank on the Old type Ink circulation unit >
Air tube of the Pressurized ink tank

to be unplugged by step-(9).
< Unplug only that of the tank to be
replaced.>
Air tube, from the Air valve, to be

unplugged by above step-(7).
Then plug the port on the Common
air chamber with a Cap.
< Pressurized ink tank on the New type Ink circulation unit >
Air tube of the Pressurized ink tank

to be unplugged by step-(9).
< Unplug only that of the tank to be
replaced.>
Air tube, from the Air valve, to be

unplugged by above step-(7).
Then plug the port on the Common
air chamber with a Cap.
The 4 Clips on the Common air chamber ports

should all face to the right.
8) Cap the air valve port of the pressurized ink tank.

9) Unplug the Air tube between the Pressurized ink tank and Common air chamber at the port on the Common
air chamber for the Pressurized air tank to replace. <Refer to the above photographs>
10) Cap the pressurized ink tank Common air chamber port from which the Air tube was unplugged by above
step-(9).
11) Remove the pressurized ink tank mounting screws (two screws on each side) and pull the pressurized ink
tank straight up to disengage from the Ink supply unit. (Pan head screw 3x8 (4 pcs))
Note: Be careful of the ink, which may drip from the bottom of the Pressurized ink tank.
(1) Confirm that the round rubber sheets, on which the Pressurized ink tank is to sit, are free of dust.
(2) Replace the 4 drainage tubes, at the bottom of the Heat exchanger, with new ones which are included in
the Pressurized ink tank spare part kit.
Make sure to make good Z-shaped bend on these 4 drainage tubes to prevent ink leakage.
(3) Replace the Bellows unit tube with the new tube included in the spare parts kit.
(4) The 4 tube Clips on the Common air chamber air ports for the Air hose to the Pressurized ink tank
should all face to the right. <Refer to above photograph.>
(5) The tube Clip on the Air tube at the Common air chamber connecting to the Air valve should face down.
(6) Follow the instruction on the Initial Ink Filling and fill the machine with the ink.

Ink Flow Section

Ink Flow Section

Ink Flow Section

Ink Flow Section
Ink Bus
1) Remove the head holder cover. (Follow the instructions in "Removing the Head Holder Cover.")
To keep the unit clean and free of ink, put a sheet of paper between the belt platen and maintenance unit.
2) Remove the rear cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
3) Open the power supply unit, engine control PCB, controller PCB box, and ink supply unit. (Refer to the section
on covers in Chapter 2.)
4) Follow the procedure in "Draining Ink into the Waste Ink Tank."
5) Disconnect the flexible cables from the stopper, located at far end area of the Head drive PCB.
When removing the cyan and black ink bus, disconnect the flexible cables on the left, and when removing the
magenta and yellow ink bus, disconnect the flexible cables on the right.
Cable stoppers
Flexible cables
CYAN and BLACK MAGENTA and YELLOW
6) When removing the cyan or black ink bus, loosen the screws (IT screw 3x6 (4 pcs)) on the left head drive
PCB, lift entire PCB bracket, and hook it on the two screws on left wall.

Ink Flow Section
7) When removing the magenta or yellow ink bus, loosen the screws (IT screw 3x6 (3 pcs)) on the right hand
side Head drive PCB, remove the entire PCB bracket, and hook it over the left Head drive PCB.)
REAR
FRONT
FRONT view
REAR view
(1) Slide the tip of the PCB bracket into the hook.
(2) Insert the PCB bracket on the pin..
Right-hand side Head drive PCB bracket.

< Placed over the left-hand side PCB bracket..>
Left-hand side Head drive PCB bracket.

< Held in position by 4 screws.>

Ink Flow Section
8) Disconnect the Print head ink tube of the Ink bus to replace at the Print head side. (Be careful of the ink that
may drip.)
Showing the Cyan ink bus as an example.
Remove ink tubes from 6 heads.
9) Unplug the Ink circulation tube of the color of the Ink bus to replace, at the heater OUT port under the
Pressurized ink tank. <Refer to the photograph, below> Put a Cap at the pulled out end of the tube.
< Watch out for the ink, which may drip from the tube.>
10) Cap the heater OUT port under the Pressurized ink tank.
11) Cut the Ink circulation tube of the color of the Ink bus to replace, at the cut-mark line located above the ink
inlet port of the Negative pressure ink tank. <Refer to the photograph below.> Put a Cap on the Ink tube on
the Negative pressure ink tank where it is cut.
< Watch out for the ink, which may drip from the tube.>
Old type Ink circulation unit >

Showing the Cyan ink as an example.
Unplugged in step-(9)
Cut in step-(11)
New type Ink circulation unit >
Unplugged in step-(9)
Cut in step-(11)
The Air tube on the New Type Negative pressure ink

tank gets in the way, so unhook the top loop from the
tube guide and let the Air tube hang down.

Ink Flow Section
12) Remove Ink circulation tubes out from the tube harness bands for easy tube removal from the machine.
13) Remove the Ink bus mounting screws. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Screw in the FRONT
Showing the Yellow Ink bus as an example.
Screw in the REAR
14) Remove the Ink bus together with the Ink circulation tubes.
(1) Make sure that all the Print head tubes are firmly connected to the Print heads.
(2) Replace the 4 Drainage tubes, from the Heat exchanger, ti new tubes and make good Z-shaped bend to
prevent ink leakage.
(3) Cut the Ink circulation tube from the new Ink bus to the Negative pressure ink tank (attached on the new
Ink bus) at the Cut-mark line.
(4) Attach tube Joint (included in the Ink bus spare part kit) between the new Ink circulation tube on the Ink
bus (which was cut on above step-(3)) and the remaining existing tube on the Negative pressure ink
tank and Clip the tubes on the Joint.
<The Clips should face in the direction as shown on the photograph below.>
(5) Making sure that the Ink tubes are not tangled, run the tubes through the Tube harness bands.
<Refer to the photographs on the bottom>
On the New Ink circulation unit, hook the Air tube of the Negative pressure ink tank through the Tube
guide on the Ink supply unit tower. <Refer to the photograph on the bottom right.>
Old type Ink circulation unit > New type Ink circulation unit >
Tube Harness Bands
Direction of the tube Clips

Ink Flow Section
(6) To prevent the Ink tubes from being unplugged accidentally when the Ink circulation tower is Opened or
Closed, check again the Ink tubing layout, as shown on the photograph below.
The YELLOW Ink tube from the Ink bus to the Negative pressure
ink tank should be in the front of all other 7 Ink tubes in this Tube
saddle band.
The same YELLOW Ink tube from the Ink bus to the Negative
pressure ink tank should have some slack (not tightly pulled)
when the Ink circulation tower is opened all the way wide.
Confirm that none of the Ink tubes twists when the Ink circulation
tower is closed.
(7) Follow the instruction on the Initial Ink Filling and fill the machine with the ink.
(8) Confirm that no ink leaks from the replaced Ink bus and the Ink tubes touched in this procedure.
Other Precautions
1) Make sure not to damage the Head drive PCBs during this work.
Scraping the back surface of the PCB against metal object will damage the PCB.
2) Do not damage the flexible wires of the Print heads when moving the Head drive PCB.

Ink Flow Section
Entire Ink Circulation System

1) Remove the left and right top covers, rear cover, and right-side cover. (Refer to the section on covers in
Chapter 2.)
Chapter 2.)
4) Follow the procedure in "Draining Ink into the Waste Ink Tank."
< Since the ink drainage instruction differs between the NEW Ink Circulation Unit and OLD Ink Circulation
Unit, refer to the correct pages in this chapter in draining the ink.
Ink supply tubes from the Ink cartridge must be drained of ink for all 4 colors.
Therefore, all 4 Ink cartridges must be disconnected from the Ink cartridge holder unit and all 4 colors must
be drained from the Ink supply tubes. (refer to the Test Mode numbers 2482, 2483, 2484 and 2485 in the ink
draining procedure section on this chapter) >
6) Unplug the Ink tubes between the heater (under the Pressurized ink tank) and Ink bus, on the Ink bus side for
all four colors (total of four top tubes of the sets of two on each Ink bus). Insert Caps on the ends of the four
unplugged Ink tubes and in the Ink bus ports.
The top Ink tubes of the set of two

for the Cyan, Black, Magenta and
Yellow.
Ink bus
NOTE:
The photograph shows all the Ink tubes full of ink, but in actuality the ink tubes are all empty of ink, as ink drainage
procedure is done prior to this step.
This applies to all the photographs shown here after in this section.

Ink Flow Section
7) Cut the 4 Ink tubes, which connects the Ink bus and Negative pressure ink tank, at the Cut-mark line above
the Negative ink tank. Cap the cut Ink tubes with the Caps included in the Ink circulation system spare part
kit.
Old type Ink circulation system > ( Type-1 & Type-2 )

Cut at the Cut-mark line.
<The Ink tubes, which connects
the Ink bus and Negative
pressure ink tank.>
New type Ink circulation system > ( Type-3 & Type-4 )

the Ink bus and Negative
pressure ink tank.>
On the New type ink supply unit, the Air tubes of the Negative
pressure ink tanks get in the way, so unhook the Air tubes from the
tube guide on the Ink circulation unit tower and hang the Air tubes
down.

Ink Flow Section
8) Cut the 4 Ink supply tubes, running from the Ink supply valve to the Negative pressure ink tank at the Cut-
mark line above the Negative pressure ink tank. Cap the cut tubes with the Caps supplied in the spare parts
kit of the Ink supply unit.
< Be careful of the ink, which may drip from the cut ink tubes.>
Old type Ink circulation system > ( Type-1 & Type-2 )

the Ink supply valve and
Negative pressure ink tank.>
New type Ink circulation system > ( Type-3 & Type-4 )

the Ink supply valve and
Negative pressure ink tank.>
9) Disconnect the wire harnesses connectors in the ink tower (the Pressurized ink tank and Negative pressure
ink tank Ink sensor connectors, Ink pump connectors, Overflow tank sensor connector, and Bellows sensor
connector).

Ink Flow Section
10) Referring to the disassembly instructions for the overflow pan, remove the Overflow pan and allow all the ink
in the Overflow pan and waste ink tube to flow into the waste ink tank.
Reinstall the Overflow pan.
11) Use Scissor clamps to clamp the waste ink tube from the Cartridge holder pan (on the upstream of the 3-way
joint) and from the waste ink tank (on the downstream of the three-way joint). (2 tubes.)
Upstream of 3-way joint

(from the Overflow pan)
Upstream of 3-way joint Three-way joint Downstream of 3-way joint

(from the Cartridge holder pan) (to the Waste ink tank)
12) Disconnect the waste ink tube from the overflow pan on the upstream side of the three-way joint.
Insert stoppers in the end of the disconnected tube and in the joint port.
13) Remove the 2 scissor clamps from the remaining waste ink tubes on the three-way joint.
14) Remove the entire Ink circulation system.
1) Use four new Ink drainage tubes under the Heat exchanger (included in the kit) and fit the bottom ends over
the nipples on the Overflow pan. Make good Z-fold bend to prevent ink leakage.
2) Use four new Air tubes between the Negative pressure ink tanks and Common air chamber (included in the
kit).
3) Use new Air tube for the Bellows unit (included in the kit).
4) Connect Tube joints on the cut tubes (included in the kit).
The right-angled joints should face in the direction as shown on the photograph below.


Ink Flow Section
5) Making sure that the Ink tubes are not tangled, run the tubes through the Tube harness bands.
<Refer to the following photographs>
On the New Ink circulation unit, hook the Air tube of the Negative pressure ink tank through the Tube guide on
the Ink supply unit tower. <Refer to the following photograph on the right.>
Old type Ink circulation unit ( Type-1 & Type-2 ) New type Ink circulation unit ( Type-3 & Type-4 )
Tube Harness Bands

Direction of the tube Clips
6) To prevent the Ink tubes from being unplugged accidentally when the Ink circulation tower is Opened or
Closed, check again the Ink tubing layout, as shown on the photograph below.
The YELLOW Ink tube from the Ink bus to the Negative pressure
ink tank should be in the front of all other 7 Ink tubes in this Tube
saddle band.
The same YELLOW Ink tube from the Ink bus to the Negative
pressure ink tank should have some slack (not tightly pulled)
when the Ink circulation tower is opened all the way wide.
Confirm that none of the Ink tubes twists when the Ink circulation
tower is closed.

Ink Flow Section
7) Insert the 4 ink cartridge in the Ink cartridge holder unit.

Raise the Ink cartridge holder unit in the vertical position and fix in that position using the arm.
This will allow faster ink filling action from the Ink cartridge into the Ink circulation system of the machine.
8) Referring to the Initial ink filling instruction on this Chapter, fill the machine with the ink.
Additional information in replacing the OLD type Ink circulation unit to the NEW type:
In replacing the Ink circulation unit from the OLD type to the NEW type, following steps must be taken
before filling the ink into the machine.
1) Replace the Rear cover retaining plate to the new type.

< This replacement is required to clear the plate away from the bulging Air tubes from the NEW type
Pressurized ink tank.>
OLD type Rear cover retaining plate NEW type Rear cover retaining plate
2) Machine firmware program update.

If the machine firmware is under SNALL Ver. 7.16.3, raise the machine firmware to SNALL Ver. 7.16.3 or
higher. <Using the newest available machine firmware is recommended.>
If the machine firmware is already updated to the newest version before

Special instruction in updating the machine firmware
working on the machine, omit Steps (1), (4) and (5) given below.
Then go into Test Mode ignoring the error Z05-1212, and go to Step-(6).
The machine must not make the initial mechanical movement until the machine Test Mode setting is changed
to the NEW Type Ink circulation unit, otherwise mechanical trouble or ink overflow may occur.
To prevent the machine from making the initial mechanical movement, the machine firmware must be installed
in the machine with the Front door kept opened, as well as until the two Test Modes explained are activated.
1) With the machine power kept OFF after the replacement of the OLD type Ink circulation unit to the NEW
type, insert the USB memory stick with the new machine firmware.
2) Open the Front door of the machine to trip the Safety switch.
3) Power ON the machine.
4) Download the machine firmware.
<Remove the USB memory stick when [Safe to remove USB memory] message displays.
5) The machine automatically reboots after the machine firmware is installed.
Error message [Z05-1212 Close the front doors] displays --- ignore the message and go into Test Mode.
6) Error message [Z05-1212 Close the front doors] displays again --- press the (Close) button.
Error message [W51-1301 Recovery operation] may display -- press the (Close) button.
7) With the Front door of the machine kept opened, go into Test Mode No. 1942 [Ink circulation unit setting.
Select [1] and activate. <This is to let the machine know that NEW type Ink circulation unit is attached.>
8) Go into Test Mode No. 1497 [Adjustment parameter save] to overwrite the Factory default test mode
setting in the Engine control PCB, so setting [1] for the previously activated Test Mode No. 1942 becomes
the factory default setting on the machine.

Ink Flow Section
8) Reboot the machine manually to make the newly set Test Mode settings effective.
9) Error message [Z05-1212 Close the front doors] displays. --- Close the Front door.
10) Error message [W51-1301 Recovery operation] may display -- Press the (Confirm) button
11) The ink starts to fill into the machine
< The machine will display [Processing: Please wait a moment] message while filling the ink. It will take a
while for the machine to be filled with ink. Do not touch the machine until the ink filling is completed and
the machine comes to operational <Idle> condition.
The procedure to change the machine status to [NEW type Ink circulation system] is completed.

Ink Flow Section
Print Head
Removal
2) Remove the rear cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
3) Open the power supply unit, engine control PCB, controller PCB box, and ink supply unit. (Refer to the section
on covers in Chapter 2.)
4) Follow the procedure in "Draining Ink into the Waste Ink Tank" for the OLD type Ink circulation unit for both the
OLD type and NEW type Ink circulation unit machine Print head removal.
5) Number the Flexible cable on each Print head for easy identification in re-plugging the cables in assembly.
< Use a felt-tip non-erasable marker pen. Do not use any thing with hard-tip, such as ballpoint pen, etc.
which damages the flat cable.>
The print head numbers are counted [1], [2], [3] .... from the rear to the front of the machine for the C, K, M
and Y color heads.
C6
K6
C1
K1
C2
K2
K,Y & C,M C3
Position reference
K3
6) Disconnect the flexible cable from the stopper on the back of the head drive PCB.
When removing the Cyan and Black heads, disconnect the flexible cable on the left, and when removing the
Magenta and Yellow heads, disconnect the flexible cable on the right.
Cyan & Black Magenta & Yellow
C1
K1
C2
K2
C3
K3
7) When removing the Cyan and Black heads, loosen the screw on the left head drive PCB, remove the entire
bracket, and hook it vertically against the head holder.
Hook vertically on the two shouldered screws.

Ink Flow Section
8) When removing the Magenta and Yellow heads, loosen the screw on the right Head drive PCB, remove the
entire bracket, and lay it over the left Head drive PCB. (IT screw 3x6 (3 pcs))
< Make sure to number each of the M and Y Flat cables use a felt-tip non-erasable marker pen. Do not use
any thing with hard-tip, such as ballpoint pen, etc. which damages the flat cable.>
M1
Y1
M2
Y2
M3
Y3
M6 M4
Y4
Y6 M5
Y5
M6
Y6
K,Y & C,M

Position reference
(1) Slide the tip of the PCB bracket into the hook.
(2) Insert the PCB bracket on the pin..
Right-hand side Head drive PCB bracket.

< Placed over the left-hand side PCB bracket..>
Left-hand side Head drive PCB bracket.

< Held in position by 4 screws.>
9) Remove the Head adjust jig from the Head holder cover. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
10) Bring the two adjustment screws on the Head adjust jig to their neutral position.
Head adjust jig

0.6 mm
1.4 mm
The neutral position for this adjustment screw is The neutral position for this adjustment screw is
where the screw extrudes approx. 0.6 mm down where the screw is turned two rotations up after the
from the bottom edge of the Head adjust jig collar of the screw touches the Head adjust jig.

Ink Flow Section
11) Attach the Head adjust jig to the head. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Note: Before removing the head, always attach the head adjust jig.
The actual instruction on how to use the head adjust jig is explained from the next page.
(Rear)
< Sample photograph >
Head adjust jig In contact

mounting screw
Print head
Head adjust jig
Plate spring
(Pushes head)
In contact
Print head Head adjust ji
Head adjust jig Plate spring retainer

mounting screw (Front)
1 Mount the Head adjust jig against the Print head to be replaced.
Make sure that the Plate spring lock

is released before mounting the Jig
against the Print head.

Ink Flow Section
2 Tighten the two screws of the Head adjust jig loosely. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
By pulling the Head ink tube lightly towards the direction of the arrow
mark makes it easier for the Head adjust jig to be set.
Mounting screws of the Head adjust jig.

(IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Print head Head adjust jig
CAUTION:
The shoulder of the Adjusting screw should not ride on the Head adjust jig.
GOOD BAD
The shoulder of the Adjusting screw

riding on the Head adjust jig.

Ink Flow Section
3 Lock the Plate spring firmly against the Print head.
1
To hook the Plate spring:
1 Hook the Plate spring at the top

of the Head adjust jig.
2 Push the Plate spring down firmly

to lock.
Confirm before locking the Plate spring that the Plate

spring is applying tension on the Print head and it
does not clatter against the Print head.
The sketch does not show the Print head, but in actuality
there is a Print head against the Head adjust jig. (Rear)
4 Tighten the two mounting screws of the Head adjust jig.
Print head
The two screws to tighten

Head adjust jig

Ink Flow Section
12) Unplug the Flat cable of the Print head from the Head drive PCB.
Flat cable of the Print head
Head drive PCB
13) Using two Scissor clamps, clamp the two Ink tubes going to the Print head from the Ink bus, for the Print head
to remove.
Clamp the Ink tubes in the area between the Print head and the Rib on the Ink hose assembly.
< Refer to the photograph below >
, Forgetting to clamp the Print head Ink tubes will cause cause the ink to drain down into the Negative pressure
ink tank and cause the Negative pressure ink tank to overflow.
Clamp the Ink tubes in the area between

the Print head and the Rib on the Ink tube,
around this area.
Rib
Ink tubes to clamp Print head
Scissor clamps

Ink Flow Section
When Removing Heads Under the Ink Bus

When removing heads under the ink bus, move the ink bus on top of the Print head out of the way by the
procedure given below.
Ink bus
Print head
Remove the two mounting screws of the Ink bus, which is interfering with the removal of the Print head.
Using the two black colored plastic Bands mounted on the machine frame, hook the hole of the Band on the
pin located on the under-surface of the Ink bus.
This procedure will pull the Ink bus away from the Print head and make the room to work.
plastic Band
Pin
Pin

Ink Flow Section
14) Gently unplug the two Ink tubes from the Print head.
< The ink will start dripping from the Print head when the Ink tubes are unplugged. Watch out for the dripping
Ink from the Print head surface when removing the Print head.>
15) Unhook the Spring plate of the Head adjust jig from the Print head.
< The Spring plate can be unhooked easily from the Print head by sliding the Spring plate side-ways towards
the Lock release groove on the Head adjust jig.
Swing side-ways to unlock
Lock release groove
Locked position Unlocked position
16) Remove the Print head from the machine. (3x10 screws; 2 pcs)

1 Then gently slide the Print head towards the front of the machine to unlatch the Print head from the
rear adjusting screw of the Head adjust jig.
REAR FRONT
2 Lift the Print head horizontally up until the bracket on the Print head at the rear almost clears the
adjusting screw.
< The instruction continues to the next page >
REAR FRONT

Ink Flow Section
3 Tilt the Print head towards the front and lift the rear to fully clear the rear adjusting screw.
FRONT
REAR
4 When the front portion of the Print head clears away from the Head adjust jig, gently lift the Print head
out of the machine.
FRONT
REAR
17) Attach the new Print head in the machine.

< The attachment procedure of the Print head is done in the reverse order of the removal.>
Make sure to memo down on a piece of paper the Voltage and AL number of the new Print head for the
parameter input procedure later in the Image adjustment procedure. (These parameter numbers are on the
sticker on the Flat cable of the Print head.)
Refer to the next page for the important notes and instructions.
During the attachment of the Print head, if

the Print head hesitates to fit into the Head
adjust jig, pushing the Spring plate of the
jig in the direction of the arrow, lightly, will
let the Print head fit inside the jig.
Push the Spring in this direction, gently.

Ink Flow Section
Head Mounting Procedure and Precautions
1) Mount the new Print head, and keep the Head adjust jig on the Print head.
2) Connect head ink tubes and remove the Scissor clamps.
3) Connect the Print head Flat cables onto the Head drive PCB and finish all the wire connection onto the Head
drive PCB.
4) Without putting on the Head holder cover, slide in the Upper transfer unit slowly, being careful not to catch the
Print head Flat cables.
5) Connect the Sensor bracket amount the bracket with the two screws.
6) Follow the Initial ink filling instruction given in this Chapter and fill the machine with the ink.
7) After the ink circulation is finished, lower the BP unit by test mode and confirm that no ink is leaking from the
replaced Print head by looking at the replaced Print head from underneath.
8) Start performing the automatic image adjustment using the HS4000 Scanner or Canon LiDE scanner in the
order given on the next Chapter in this technical manual.
9) After the Head angle adjustment and head position adjustment is finished, turn OFF the machine power and
remove the Head adjust jig from the Print head after removing necessary parts off the machine to access to
the Head adjust jig.
10) Mount back on the machine all the parts removed from the machine for the Head replacement.
11) Turn ON the machine and continue with the Image adjustment.
12) Make sure to change the Print head Voltage and AL number setting of the replaced Print head (Test Mode No.
442) in the 7th item to adjust in the Image adjustment procedure after replacing the Print head.

Ink Flow Section
Head Drive PCB

Remove the head holder cover. (Follow the instructions in “Removing the Head Holder Cover.”)
If removing both the left (Cyan/Black) and right (Magenta/Yellow) Head drive PCBs, it is best to remove the right
(Magenta/Yellow) Head drive PCB first.
Removing Magenta/Yellow Head Drive PCB
1) Disconnect the Power cable connector and two white Flat cables from the Head drive PCB.
Power cable
connector
Flat cables
CAUTION:
Make sure to gently
unlock the Connector
lock before unplugging
each of the white Flat
cable.
2) Remove the mounting screws of the Head drive PCB bracket (the entire bracket; IT screw 3x6 (3 pcs)).
3) Slide the PCB over to the left and lay the PCB on top of the left Head drive PCB as shown on page 11A-73 of
this Chapter.
4) Make sure that all the Flat cables of the Print heads are numbered. If not, number all the Print head cables to
match with the head color and head location, referring to page 11A-73 of this Chapter.
Otherwise it will be difficult to find the correct location to pug in the Flat cables in assembly.
5) Remove all 12 Flat cables of the Print heads from the Magenta/Yellow Head drive PCB.
Press and release the gray-colored plastic center

lock and then pull the Print head Flat cable
straight up, gently, grabbing firmly on both the
black plastic bracket of the Flat cable and the
cable itself.
CAUTION:
Do not pull on the Flat cable only.
Do not bend nor push on the Flat cable or the
Flat cable will crack and be damaged.
6) Remove the Magenta/Yellow Head drive PCB from the machine with the PCB bracket attached.
7) Remove the head drive PCB from the bracket. (IT screw 3x6 (6 pcs))
Precautions
1. Do not scrape the bottom surface of the Head drive PCB as the circuit is printed on the bottom.
2. Connect Flat cable of each Print head to the correct connectors on the Head drive PCB.
3. Unlock the Connector lock on the Head drive PCB when unplugging and pugging in the white Flat cables.
4. Make sure to lock the Connector lock on the Head drive PCB after the white Flat cables are inserted.

Ink Flow Section
Removing Cyan/Black Head Drive PCB
1) Make sure that all the Flat cables of the Print heads are numbered. If not, number all the Print head cables to
match with the head color and head location, referring to page 11A-72 of this Chapter.
Otherwise it will be difficult to find the correct location to pug in the Flat cables in assembly.
2) Disconnect the Power cable connector, two Flat cables and all 12 Print head Flat cables from the Cyan/Black
Head drive PCB.
Refer to the CAUTION stated on the previous page in unplugging both the two white Flat cables and Print
head Flat cables.
3) Loosen the screws and remove the head drive PCB (the entire bracket). (IT screw 3x6 (4 pcs))
4) Remove the head drive PCB from the bracket. (IT screw 3x6 (6 pcs))
Precautions
1. Do not scrape the bottom surface of the Head drive PCB as the circuit is printed on the bottom.
2. Connect Flat cable of each Print head to the correct connectors on the Head drive PCB.
3. Unlock the Connector lock on the Head drive PCB when unplugging and pugging in the white Flat cables.
4. Make sure to lock the Connector lock on the Head drive PCB after the white Flat cables are inserted.

Ink Flow Section

Ink Flow Section

Ink Flow Section
Overflow Pan
1) Remove the left and right top covers, rear cover, and right-side cover.
2) Remove the Scissor clamps from the machine.
3) Open the Power supply unit, Engine control PCB, and Ink circulation unit.
4) Follow the procedure in “Draining Ink into the Waste Ink Tank from OLD type Ink circulation unit” when
removing the Overflow pan from either the NEW type or OLD type Ink circulation system.
5) Disconnect the Air tube between the Pressurized ink tank air valve and Overflow pan, on the pan side and
insert a rubber cap on the Tube port on the Overflow pan.
6) Disconnect the Pressurized ink tank air valve filter tube from the overflow pan, and insert a rubber cap in the
overflow pan port.
7) Disconnect the overflow sensor connector.
OLD type Ink circulation system

< Type-1 & Type-2 >
Disconnect by above Step-(5).
NEW type Ink circulation system

< Type-3 & Type-4 >
Disconnect by above Step-(6). Disconnect by above Step-(7).

Ink Flow Section
8) Remove the Overflow tank mounting screws. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
9) Disengage the hook(s) where the Negative pressure ink tank common air chamber is mounted.

< Type-1 & Type-2 >
Hooks to disengage by Step-(9)
Screws removed by Step-(8)

< Type-3 & Type-4 >
Hook to disengage by Step-(9)
Screws removed by Step-(8)
10) Remove the Overflow pan. Tilt it to drain remaining ink into the Waste ink tank.
Note: Remember to drain the remaining ink. If the ink is not drained, it may spill out.
Note: Alternatively, you can use the drainage tube (3 mm dia.) on the bottom of the overflow pan to drain the
ink into an empty plastic bottle or other container.
11) Use two Scissor clamps to clamp the ends of the three-way joint of the waste ink tube. (Clamp the tube on the
side that flows to the Waste ink tank and the tube that comes down from the Ink cartridge holder.)
Then from the three-way joint, unplug the tube coming down from the Overflow pan and cap the port on the
three-way port and unplugged tube with rubber cap. (Rubber caps are supplied with the new Overflow pan.)
Clamp with Scissor clamps
Three-way joint Cap the port and tube after unplugging the Tube.

Ink Flow Section
1) At the markings on the Ink drainage tube, 75mm and 290mm from where the tube connects to the Overflow
pan, fix the Ink drainage tube on metal brackets on the machine with plastic bands as shown on the sketch
below.
Waste ink tube running from the Overflow pan
The tube goes over the metal bracket and held by plastic band.
The tube goes under the metal bracket and held by plastic band.
2) Using the new tubes supplied with the new Overflow pan, replace the tubes on the machine.
• Ink drainage tubes under the Heat exchanger tower. (4 pcs)
• Air tube between the Common air chamber and Air valve of the Negative pressure ink tank. (1 pc)
• Air tube of the Bellows unit. (1 pc)
3) With all the removed parts and components assembled back on the machine, fill the machine with the ink
following the instruction give on the “Initial Ink filling” in this Chapter.

Ink Flow Section
Cooling Fan
The number of Fan differ between the OLD and NEW Ink circulation system, but the Fan itself is a same part.
1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Disconnect the Fan connector(s), and free the wire harnesses attached around the Fan assembly.
3) Remove the cooling fan cover. (Binding screw 3x8 (4 pcs))

< TWO Fans >
Fan cover
Connector
Screws to remove
Connector

< ONE Fan >

Ink Flow Section
4) Remove the Cooling fan.
Cooling fan

Ink Flow Section
Pressurized Ink Tank Air Valve

1) Remove the Left and Right Top covers, Rear cover, and Right-side cover.
2) Remove the scissor clamps from the machine.
3) Open the Power supply unit, Engine control PCB, and Ink supply unit.
4) Follow the procedure in “Draining Ink into the Waste Ink Tank from OLD type Ink circulation unit” when
removing the Pressurized ink tank air valve from either the NEW type or OLD type Ink circulation system.
5) Remove the Pressurized ink tank air valve filter assembly (attached to the Pressurized ink tank air valve). (IT
screw 3x4 (2 pcs))
Air valve Filter assembly

Screws to remove
6) Disconnect the Pressurized ink tank air valve tube (between the valve and pressurized ink tank), on the
Pressurized ink tank side.
7) Disconnect the Pressurized ink tank air valve tube (between the Air valve and Overflow pan), on the Overflow
pan side.
Air valve for the Pressurized ink tank
Air tube to disconnect in Step-(6)
Air tube to disconnect in Step-(7)

Ink Flow Section
8) Disconnect the Connector of the Air valve.

9) Remove two mounting screws of the Air valve and remove the valve. (IT screw 3x4 (2 pcs)).
Two mounting screws to remove
Connector
Caution in Assembly
1) Do not forget to mount the Air filter on the Pressurized ink tank air valve.
2) The connector of the Pressurized ink tank air valve should be connected to the socket labelled “K”.
3) Using the new tubes supplied with the new Pressurized ink tank air valve, replace the tubes on the machine.
• Ink drainage tubes under the Heat exchanger tower. (4 pcs)
• Air tube between the Common air chamber and Air valve of the Negative pressure ink tank. (1 pc)
• Air tube of the Bellows unit. (1 pc)
4) The metal Clip on the Air tube, between the Pressurized ink tank air valve and Common air chamber, should
face down at the tube connection on the Common air chamber.
5) With all the removed parts and components assembled back on the machine, fill
the machine with the ink following the instruction give on the “Initial Ink filling” in this
Chapter.

Ink Flow Section
Negative Pressure Ink Tank Air Valve
Draining the ink from the Ink circulation unit is not required when replacing the Negative pressure ink tank
air valve.
< This is because the Negative pressure ink tank air valve is already OPENED when the machine power is OFF.>
1) Remove the Left and Right Top covers, Rear cover, and Right-side cover.
2) Open the Power supply unit, Engine control PCB, and Ink supply unit.
3) Disconnect the Air tube, between the Negative pressure ink tank air valve and the Negative pressure ink tank
common air chamber, from the Common air chamber port.
4) Remove the connector.
5) Remove the mounting screws of the Negative pressure ink tank air valve and remove the Valve. (IT screw 3x4
(2 pcs))
Remove in Step-(3) Remove in Step-(4)
Remove in Step-(5)
Air valve for the Negative
pressure ink tank
Caution in Assembly
1) The Wire harness for the Connector of the Negative pressure ink tank air valve should go from under the Wire
saddle to the connector port.
2) The connector of the Negative pressure ink tank air valve should be connected to the socket labelled “F”.
Connector goes into F socket.
The metal clip should face up.
Wire saddle

Ink Flow Section
Left and Right Wire Units, and Black and White Torque Limiters
1) Open the right and left front covers.
2) Remove the center and right inner covers, the right side cover, the ejection cover, the left and right top covers,
and the rear cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
3) Remove the operation panel (the entire bracket; round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (3 pcs)) and rest it on the left side
of the ink cartridge unit.
4) Confirm that the maintenance unit is under the head holder. If it is not, bring the maintenance unit under the
head holder.
5) Manually lower the BP unit to the lower limit position. Make the wires slack until they can be removed from the
BP unit.
Note: If the BP unit is not lowered, it will drop when the elevating unit is removed.
6) Remove the wires from the BP unit wire hooks (in 4 positions).
7) Remove the head holder cover. (Follow steps 5)–8) in "Removing the Head Holder Cover.")

Ink Flow Section
8) Unlock the two flexible cable connectors of the head drive PCB, and then remove the FFC connectors (4 pcs).
9) Remove the two connectors from the head drive PCB.
8)
9)
10) Remove the 12 print head FPCs on the magenta-yellow side of the head drive PCB.
Note: When pulling out PFCs, avoid pulling only the left or right side at one time, which may damage the slot on
the board. Pull PFCs straight out.
11) Loosen the mounting screws on the magenta-yellow head drive PCB. Place this board above the cyan-black
head drive PCB.
12) Remove the magenta-yellow side of the head drive PCB (the entire bracket).
13) Remove the 12 print head FPCs on the cyan-black side of the head drive PCB.
14) Loosen the mounting screws on the cyan-black side of the head drive PCB. Remove the board (the entire
bracket).

Ink Flow Section
15) Put the controller PCB box in maintenance position. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
16) Remove the paper elevation motor. (Refer to paper transfer section information in Chapter 8.)
17) Remove the stay plate next to the paper elevation unit. (IT screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
Stay plate
18) Remove the paper elevation unit. (Refer to paper transfer section information in Chapter 8.)
19) Remove the right head holder cover. (IT screw 3x6 (6 pcs))
Right head holder cover

Ink Flow Section
20) Remove the screw on the front of the cyan ink bus, loosen the screw on the back, and move the ink bus out of
the way (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs)). Remove the wire cover on the left and right.
Wire cover
Note: The paper elevation

unit is removed.
Wire cover
21) Remove the wires hung on the wire guide. (4 pcs)

Note: One on the left side of the wire unit, one on the right side

Ink Flow Section
Removing wire from the wire guide
22) Remove the spring attached to the loose wire detection plate of the head holder.
Loose wire
detection
plate
23) Remove the clip on the support shaft of the loose wire detection plate, and then remove the detection plate.

Ink Flow Section
24) Lay a sheet of paper by the harness hole under the pulley for winding the wire on the paper feed side. (This is
a precaution against dropping the parallel pin of the wire shaft.)
Note: After removing the wire unit, also remove the paper.
Wire-winding
pulley
25) Following the disassembly instructions for the BP elevation motor, remove the BP unit elevating unit.
26) Remove the clip on the paper feed side of the elevation wire shaft. (1 pc)
Note: Rotate the shaft so that the C-shaped plate securing the elevation wire shaft and black torque limiter
faces the screw side.
27) Remove the C-shaped plates (in 2 positions on the left and right).
Note: This task is easier if you remove the ink bus mounting screw and move the ink bus out of the way a little.

Ink Flow Section
28) Remove the E-ring (one 6 mm dia. E-ring) on the paper feed side of the elevation wire shaft. Remove the
elevation wire shaft from the head holder.
29) Remove the wire-winding pulley for the black and white torque limiters.
Note: Be careful not to drop the three parallel pins that are engaged in the elevation wire shaft.
Further Instructions When Removing the Wire Unit

30) Remove the wire hole guide. (IT screw 3x3, at two positions on the left side of the wire unit and two positions
on the right side)
Note: Be careful about screw length when attaching the wire holder guide. Screws longer than the specified
length will interfere with the paper position detection unit.
31) Pull out the wire from the gap adjuster (in 4 positions).
32) Remove the wire unit.
Left Wire Unit Right Wire Unit

Ink Flow Section
Installation Precautions
Note: Install the wire unit with wire completely pulled out from the wire-winding pulley.
Note: Install the torque limiter after rotating it so that the rectangular peg and parallel pin groove are
perpendicular, as shown. As a way to make them perpendicular, insert the torque limiter in the elevation
wire shaft (in which the parallel pin is inserted), and, as shown, rotate the shaft so that the torque limiter
peg lies on the same plane as the screw hole.
Approx. 90º
Peg
Parallel pin groove
Torque Limiter
Screw hole
On the same plane
Elevation Wire Shaft

Ink Flow Section
Structural Diagram of Elevation Wire Shaft
Front
Rear
Be careful about winding of the

Be careful about ball and wire
wire emerging
Be careful about winding of the Be careful about

ball and wire wire emerging

Ink Flow Section
BP Elevation Motor
1) Remove the left and right top covers. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
2) Remove the operation panel (the entire bracket; round tip IT3C screw 4x8 (3 pcs)) and rest it on the left side
of the ink cartridge unit.
3) Open the ink cartridge holder unit.
4) Remove the right front cover and the center and right inner covers. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
5) Remove the right rear cover and side cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
6) Manually lower the BP unit to the lower limit position.
7) Put the controller PCB box in maintenance position.
8) Remove the paper elevation motor. (Refer to paper transfer section information in Chapter 8.)
9) Remove the stay plate next to the paper elevation unit. (IT screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
Stay plate
11) Remove the elevating unit cover. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pcs))
Elevating unit cover

Ink Flow Section
12) Remove the connector to the BP elevation motor.
Shaft for manually raising and lowering

BP elevation
motor
12)
Belt platen
Elevating unit
13) Remove the BP unit elevating unit screw, pull out the shaft for manually raising and lowering from the shaft
holder, and remove the BP unit elevating unit from the head holder. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
14) Remove the BP elevation motor from the BP unit elevating unit. (IT screw 3x6 (4 pcs))
BP Unit Elevating Unit Assembly Precautions

Note: Set the BP elevating unit on the head holder unit and push it toward the back when affixing it with the
screws.
Push in this direction

Ink Flow Section
Gap Adjuster
1) Open the front cover and remove the inner cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
2) Lower the BP unit to the lower limit position.
3) Remove the wires from the BP unit wire hooks (in 4 positions).
4) Pull out the gap adjuster to remove it.

Ink Flow Section
Star Wheel
1) Turn OFF the machine power and open the right side cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
3) Remove the star wheel from the shaft holder attached to the head holder.

Ink Flow Section
KG Roller
1) Turn OFF the machine power and open the right and left front covers.
2) Remove the center inner cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
4) Pull out the bearing stopper attached to the front of the KG roller.
Bearing stopper
KG roller
5) Remove the KG roller from the front bearing, and then from the back bearing.
KG roller
Insert the thicker tip of the KG roller into the KG bearing hole in back. Fit the thinner tip in the front KG bearing from
under and up.
REAR

Ink Flow Section
KG Base Assembly
1) Turn OFF the machine power and open the right and left front covers.
2) Remove the center inner cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
4) Remove all the KG roller off from the KG Base assembly, referring to the previous page.
5) Push the KG base assembly back and free the front hook from the machine.
<Pushing the front projection will slide the assembly back.>
6) Slide the KG base assembly out from the front of the machine.
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
KG Base Assembly
REAR
Front Projection
7) Instruction in installing the assembly back in the machine.

1. The rear projection of the assembly should fit in the slit on the ceiling of the machine.
2. The 4 hooks on the rear of the KG base assembly should hook on the ceiling.
3. Confirm that the rear of the assembly is firmly hooked onto the machine by reaching into the machine,
pinch the 4 projections on the rear of the assembly and by pulling the 4 projections down to confirm firm fit.
If the 4 projections, when pulled down moves, the assembly is not correctly hooked in the rear.
5. Confirming that the rear of the assembly is firmly hooked, push up the front of the assembly and pull the
assembly forward to hook the 3 hooks on the front onto the ceiling, and confirm that all 3 are hooked.
6. Attach all the KG Roller back on the KG Base assembly.
Projection on the assembly (rear)
Slit in the ceiling

Pull down the 4 projections Three (3) hooks in the front
Four (4) hooks in the rear in the rear
Additional information for ComColor 3050 and 3010.
ComColor 3050 and 3010 have on the No.1 Print Head positions (on the rear side of the machine) plugged by Plastic
cover over the missing Print head holes. These Plastic blind covers make it very tight for the KG Base assembly to
come off the machine and to go on the machine. A gentle force is required to remove and put back the assembly.
< View from underneath >

The KG Base assembly will need to be forced
to bend about this much in order for it to unlatch
from the plastic blind covers mounted on the No.1
Plastic Blind covers
print head positions of the 4 colors.
The force should be applied gently and slowly in
order not to crack the KG Base assembly.
<Refer to the next page for the sketches.>
< This is only for ComColor 3050 and 3010.>

Ink Flow Section
Sketches showing the steps to remove and to put back the KG Base Assembly on ComColor 3050 and 3010.
The basic instruction is the same as to that for ComColor 9050, 7050 and 7010.
SIDE VIEW
1 REAR Head Holder Unit FRONT
2 Push 1 Pull down

KG Base Assemby
Slide while pulling
SIDE VIEW
Head Holder Unit FRONT

REAR
2 Hooks (4 places)
1 Hold the circled portion

2 Slide out while pulling down
REMOVAL
3 Pull down
on the left and right of
the assembly with both KG Base Assemby
hands and bow down
the assembly lightly.
SIDE VIEW
3
REAR Head Holder Unit FRONT
2 1
Free fall Lift up

KG Base Assemby
SIDE VIEW
REAR Head Holder Unit FRONT
4 1 Insert the
positioning
pin.
3 Insert the 4 hooks in the lock holes.
2 Make the red highlighted portion
flat against the Head holder.
4 hooks
KG Base positioning pin
KG Base Assemby
Hold the red-circled tip area

with one hand.
Slide back the KG SIDE VIEW

Base with 4 hooks
in the Lock hole.
or Co Head Holder Unit

REAR FRONT
5 PLACEMENT
4 hooks KG Base Assemby
Pin Hold the red-circled tip area

with one hand.
SIDE VIEW
Head Holder Unit 2 Slide to the Front.
6 REAR 1 Insert the front Hooks in

the Head holder assembly FRONT
front Hooks
KG Base Assemby Pin

Ink Flow Section

Ink Flow Section

Ink Flow Section
3. Adjustment
Image Adjustment
Refer to Chapter 11B for the details on the ComColor image adjustment.
Adjusting Belt Platen Orientation

Adjusting the Registration Roller


Waste Ink Section
Chapter 12. Waste Ink Section
Contents
1. Mechanisms...................................................................................... 12-2
1-1. Head Maintenance Mechanism............................................... 12-2
1-2. Waste Ink Detection Mechanism............................................. 12-4
2. Disassembly..................................................................................... 12-7
2-1. Maintenance Unit.................................................................... 12-7
2-2. Maintenance Unit Slide Motor............................................... 12-12
2-3. Maintenance Unit Wiper and Wiper Motor............................ 12-13
2-4. Wiper HP Sensor.................................................................. 12-14
2-5. Operation Position Sensor.................................................... 12-14
2-6. Storage Position Sensor....................................................... 12-15
2-7. Waste Ink Tank Sensor......................................................... 12-15
2-8. Waste Ink Tank & Waste Ink Tank Holder............................ 12-16

Waste Ink Section
1. Mechanisms
1-1. Head Maintenance Mechanism

The maintenance unit (also called as Ink Pan) is equipped with a wiper to clean the print head nozzle surface.
The wiper comes into contact with the head holder by means of raising and lowering the belt platen. To keep the
maintenance unit out of the way of the belt platen during printing, the maintenance unit is stored on the right-hand
side of the machine.
During maintenance (head cleaning), it operates directly under the print heads.
Actions from printing to maintenance
Head holder
Printing (head carriage)
Maintenance unit
BP Unit
Operation position sensor
Stopper
Maintenance unit arm
1) The belt platen moves from the printing position to the lower limit position.
BP Unit to
lower limit
BP unit elevates down
position
2) The Maintenance unit moves toward the operation position.

3) The Maintenance unit arm activates the operation position sensor.
Maintenance
unit on the Maintenance unit rides
over the PB Unit.
BP Unit
Storage position sensor

Waste Ink Section
The Operation position sensor and Storage position sensors are cut by the sensor actuator on the Maintenance unit
arm.
Sensor actuator
Operation position sensor
Storage position sensor
4) The Maintenance unit arm comes into contact with the stopper on the main unit, and the maintenance unit
stops.
5) After a specified time has elapsed from activation of the operation position sensor in step 3), the Maintenance
unit slide motor stops.
6) The BP Unit elevates to the maintenance position (head cleaning position).
Maintenance
(head cleaning)
position
BP Unit elevates up
7) The maintenance unit positioning pin goes into the hole on the Head carriage.
The BP unit stops when the Maintenance unit and the Head carriage hits.
The height of the Maintenance unit in Print head wiping action is controlled by the Maintenance unit hitting
against the Head carriage.
Actions from the maintenance position to the printing position

1) The BP Unit elevates down from the maintenance position to the lower limit position.
2) The Maintenance unit swings back to the storage position.
3) The Maintenance unit arm cuts the Storage position sensor.
4) Maintenance unit slide motor stops. The Maintenance unit stops in its storage position.

Waste Ink Section
1-2. Waste Ink Detection Mechanism
Waste Ink Tank Holder Unit

This unit has sensors and a tray holding the waste ink tank. Changes in the level of the tray (caused by changes in
the weight of the waste ink tank) are detected by two sensors, which issues notification regarding the amount of
waste ink and whether the waste ink tank is loaded.
Schematic Diagram of Waste Ink Tank Unit

This unit is comprised of the components in the following table.
Letter Name
A Waste ink tank sensor 1
B Waste ink tank sensor 2
C Waste ink tank
D Waste ink tank holder
E Compression spring
F Waste ink tank cap
F
C

Waste Ink Section
Detection of When the Waste Ink Tank is Full

The relative positions of the shield plate and sensors as the waste ink tank fills up are as follows.
Waste ink tank holder shield plate
Sensors
No tank loaded Tank loaded Nearly full Full
Activation/Deactivation of Sensors and Notification to the printer on the status.
No Waste Ink Waste Ink Tank

Nearly Full Full
Tank Loaded Loaded
Waste ink tank
OFF ON ON OFF
sensor 1
Waste ink tank
OFF OFF ON ON
sensor 2
"No tank"
Unit operation "Nearly full" "Full" displayed
Main unit displayed.
possible displayed Unit stops
Unit stops

Waste Ink Section
MEMO

Waste Ink Section
2. Disassembly
2-1. Maintenance Unit

2. Remove the ejection cover and waste ink tank cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
3. Remove the right rear cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
4. Unplug the maintenance unit wire connector and re-use band.
Re-use band
Connector

With the maintenance unit under the head holder, pull out the clip and sleeve on the end of the hinge pin
connecting the maintenance unit and arm, from the front. Similarly, pull out the clip and sleeve in back from the
position where the ejection side cover opens.
Clip and sleeve (front)

Waste Ink Section
Clip and sleeve (front) Clip and sleeve (rear)
FRONT REAR
Clips and sleeves
Note: Be careful not to drop the clip and sleeve during removal or installation.
6. Pull out left and right hinge pins, from the inner side.
FRONT Hinge pin REAR
7. Push-in the pins on the waste ink tube mount with your fingers and remove the plastic mount from the machine.

Waste Ink Section
8. Manually rotate the gear (the second gear of the four, looking from the rear of the machine) in counter-
clockwise direction. Rotate the gear until the Maintenance unit arm moves to the position shown on the second
photograph, below, so that the maintenance unit can be pulled out.
9. With only the waste ink tube connected, pull out the maintenance unit out of the machine and place it on the
floor. Make sure to put something on top of the floor, before putting the Maintenance unit down, to protect the
floor from getting dirty with ink.
Maintenance unit
(Ink pan)

Waste Ink Section
10. Unplug the waste ink tube off the maintenance unit.
Caution in assembly:
In putting the Maintenance unit back in the machine, make sure that the waste ink tube is not twisted.
Waste ink tube.
The maximum twist on the waste ink tube on the Maintenance unit is maximum 90 degrees.
If the tube is twisted more than 90 degrees, untwist the tube before finishing the assembly.
Moulded rib on the waste ink tube. Moulded rib on the waste ink tube.
No twist on the waste ink tube is the best. Maximum of 90 degrees twist on the tube is allowed.
Refer to the next page for further detailed information on the CAUTION in assembly.

Waste Ink Section
Following photographs show the GOOD and BAD examples of how the waste ink tube should be when the Cap is
placed on the Waste ink tank or when the Maintenance unit (ink pan) is put back in the machine.
If the Waste ink tube is twisted or bent, it may rip, crack or unplugged and leak ink.
Also a large twist may cause the Waste ink tube to be pulled inside the machine, causing the Open/Close
movement of the Tray 1 to hit on the Waste ink tube and crack open the tube.
GOOD Example BAD Example
Moulded lines of the Tube

< Twisted >
The Tube comes outside the

machine when the Ink Pan The Tube goes inside the
moves into the machine over machine when the Ink Pan moves
the BP Unit. into the machine over the BP Unit.
The Waste ink tube stay clear of the Tray 1 and

stays in good condition. When Tray 1 is opened or closed with the Tube
twisted inside the machine, the Tray 1 hits on the
Tube and eventually break the Tube and leak ink.
Large possibility of Waste ink tube being

damaged and the Tube eventually leaks ink.

Waste Ink Section
2-2. Maintenance Unit Slide Motor

2. Remove the right rear cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
3. Disconnect the spring from the overload prevention mechanism.
4. Disconnect the motor relay connector.
Spring
Maintenance unit slide motor
Connector
5. Remove the protective metal plate.

6. Remove the E-ring and Metal bushing from the arm shaft. (6 mm dia. E-ring (1 pc)).
E-ring & Metal bushing
Protective metal plate
7. Remove the motor unit while undoing the wire from the 3 wire saddles.
8. Remove the maintenance unit slide motor from the motor unit. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Motor unit

Waste Ink Section
2-3. Maintenance Unit Wiper and Wiper Motor

2. Remove the maintenance unit from the machine. (Refer to the instruction on this Chapter.)
3. Manually rotate by hands the two screw shafts on the maintenance unit at same time to slide the wiper to the
center of the maintenance unit.
Maintenance unit wiper
4. Detach the KG Roller evacuating plate (rear). <Use small flat-head driver to remove, but be careful not to
deform the part.>
5. Unplug the wire connector. (Cut the wire band to free the wire.)Remove the gears from the arm shaft.
6. Unhook the two wiper motor hooks and remove the motor from the maintenance unit with the screw shaft
attached to the motor.
KG Roller evacuating plate (rear)
<< Motor unhooked >>
MOTOR HOOK
MOTOR HOOK
Wiper motor
7. Manually rotate the two screw shafts by and to remove the wiper from the screw shafts from the ends opposite
from the motors.

Waste Ink Section
2-4. Wiper HP Sensor

2. Remove the maintenance unit from the machine. (Refer to the instruction on this Chapter.)
4. Unhook the wiper HP sensor from the maintenance unit.
Wiper HP sensor
Connector
2-5. Operation Position Sensor

2. Open the waste ink cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
3. Unplug the wire connector of the operation position sensor and detach the sensor from the machine.
Maintenance unit arm (rear) Operation position sensor

Waste Ink Section
2-6. Storage Position Sensor

2. Open the waste ink cover. (Refer to the section on covers in Chapter 2.)
3. Unplug the wire connector of the storage position sensor and detach the sensor from the machine.
Maintenance unit arm (rear) Storage position sensor
2-7. Waste Ink Tank Sensor

2. Remove the Rear cover. (Refer to Chapter 2)
3. Disconnect the two Connectors of the Waste ink tank sensors.
4. Remove the Sensor bracket with the two sensors attached. (IT 3 x 6 screw; 1 pc)
5. Detach the two sensors from the sensor bracket.
Do not remove this screw.
Screw to remove
Waste ink tank sensors

< connectors >

Waste Ink Section
2-8. Waste Ink Tank & Waste Ink Tank Holder

2. Remove the Waste ink cover. (Refer to Chapter 2)
3. Unhook the ink tube mount from the machine. <Refer to (1) on the photograph below.>
4. Unscrew and remove the cap on the Waste ink tank and hook the removed cap upsidedown on the cap holder.
<Refer to (2) on the photograph below.>
5. Mount the new cap, which comes with the new replacement Waste ink tank, on the existing waste ink tank.
6. Remove the existing Waste ink tank.
7. Disengage the pivot shaft of the Waste ink tank in the order of Front and then the Rear, and remove the Waste
ink tank holder from the machine.
Waste ink tube mount Cap
Caution in assembly:
In putting the cap on the Waste ink tank, make sure that the waste ink tube is not twisted nor bent (folded).
< Refer to the next page for the photographs of GOOD example and BAD example.>
The photographs show the GOOD and BAD examples of how the waste ink tube should be when the Cap is placed
on the Waste ink tank or when the Maintenance unit (ink pan) is put back in the machine.
If the Waste ink tube is twisted or bent, the tube may rip, crack or unplugged and leak ink.

Waste Ink Section
Following photographs show the GOOD and BAD examples of how the waste ink tube should be when the Cap is
placed on the Waste ink tank or when the Maintenance unit (ink pan) is put back in the machine.
If the Waste ink tube is twisted or bent, it may rip, crack or unplugged and leak ink.
GOOD Example BAD Example

< Twisted >
The Tube comes outside the

machine when the Ink Pan The Tube goes inside the machine
moves into the machine over when the Ink Pan moves into the
the BP Unit. machine over the BP Unit.
The Waste ink tube stay clear of the Tray 1 and

stays in good condition. When Tray 1 is opened or closed with the Tube
twisted inside the machine, the Tray 1 hits on the
Tube and eventually break the Tube and leak ink.
Large possibility of Waste ink tube being

damaged and the Tube eventually leaks ink.

Waste Ink Section
MEMO

GDI Controller
Chapter 13. GDI Controller

Contents
1. GDI Controller Specifications ...................................................................................... 13-2
1-1. Main Specifications ................................................................................................................. 13-2
1-2. Main Functions........................................................................................................................ 13-3
2. Built-in Controller (GDI) ............................................................................................... 13-4
2-1. Connecting a Computer .......................................................................................................... 13-4
2-2. Printer Network Settings ......................................................................................................... 13-5
2-3. Compatible Computers (Operating Systems) ......................................................................... 13-7
2-4. Supported Protocols ............................................................................................................... 13-7
2-5. Sequence in Data Transfer from Computers to the Printer ..................................................... 13-8
3. Printer Driver Installation ............................................................................................. 13-9
3-1. Installing the Printer Driver (Windows 7 - RAW Port) ............................................................. 13-9
3-2. Installing the Printer Driver (Windows 7 - LPR/IPP Port) ...................................................... 13-13
[ 13-1 ] Rev.1.00
GDI Controller
1. GDI Controller Specifications
1-1. Main Specifications
Main Specifications Printer GDI Controller

Type Built-in
Compatible Printers Integrated in printer
Processor Intel® Atom™ Processor D510
Chipset Intel® ICH8
Hardware Memory Type DDR2 800MHz (Small Outline-DIMM Socket)
Configuration Standard Memory Capacity 1GB
Maximum Memory Capacity 2GB
HDD 2.5inch 320GB SATA (Available Space: 280GB)
Opearating System Linux
LAN 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000Base-T
Interfaces USB USB2.0
Other D-sub 15pin Analog RGB
Microsoft® Windows® XP (32-bit),
Microsoft® Windows® Vista® (32-bit/64-bit),
Microsoft® Windows® 7 (32-bit/64-bit),
Compatible Windows Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 (32-bit/64-bit),

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 (32-bit/64-bit),
Operating Systems
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 (32-bit/64-bit),
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 (64-bit)
Macitosh Not Supported
Others Not Supported
TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPsec, HTTP, HTTPs (SSL), DHCP,
Supported Protocols
ftp, IPP, SNMP, Port 9100 (RAW port)
Page Description Language (PDL) RISORINC/CIII
Rev.1.00 [ 13-2 ]
GDI Controller
1-2. Main Functions
Main Functions Printer GDI Controller

Color Management Using standard ComColor color profiles
Resolution Standard (300x300 dpi) and fine (300x600 dpi)
Image Processing
Screening Error diffusion (default) and dot screen (70 and 100 lines)
Lightness, chroma, and contrast (each in a range of -25 to +25)
Gamma Control
Red, green, and blue (each in a range of -25 to +25)
Line Processing Line smoothing
Print Density 0 (standard) and adjustable in a range of -1 to +2
Original Mode Photo-based and line-based
Color (using all four colors of CYMK), black and white (using K only),
Color Mode Options
mono-cyan (using C only), and mono-magenta (using M only)
Duplex Printing Short edge and long edge
N-up multiple (2, 4, or 8 pages), N-up single (2, 4, or 8 pages), and
Imposition (N-up)
booklet
[A3W], [A3], [A4], [A5], [A6], [B4], [B5], [B6], [Foolscap], [Tabloid],
[Ledger], [Legal], [Letter], [Statement], [C4], [C5], [C6], [DL-R], [Envelope
Original Size Options 1], [Envelope 2], [No.10 envelope], [custom]
Portrait and Landscape
Mixed original sizes (when N-up is OFF)
Output Paper Size
Same as original
Options
[Auto], [Feed tray1] - [Feed tray3], [Standard tray] or the optional [High
Input Tray Options
capacity feeder]
Unspecified-[Any] (Default paper type of "Any" setting on the
Printing Functions
[Environment] tab.
Specified:
Types of Paper
[Plain], [IJ paper], [Matt coated]-Select one of these when using IJ paper
or similar paper.
[High-quality], [Card-IJ]
[Print], [Print & Save to folder], [Save to folder], [Save to USB flash drive],
Output Options
[Save as a file]
Rotation Auto, 0º, 90º, 180º, and 270º　
Front and back independent (horizontally and vertically in a range of -20
Image Position
to +20 mm)
Collate (group or sort), slip sheet (OFF, between sets, or between jobs),
Finishing add cover (front cover or back cover), and binding side (bind left, bind
right, bind top)
Finishing (with
Offset output, booklet, stapling, hole punching, folding, and selection of
Ejection Options
output tray
Connected)
Program, printing on blank paper, continuous output (with ejection options
Programmed Printing connected), watermark, page or date printing, and confidential printing
(set PIN code)
Registration of print settings
Management Functions
Acquisition of printer data
Mode Options Printer mode, copy mode, and scan mode
RISO Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1 or later) and Windows® Internet
Supported Browsers
Console Explorer 7.0 and Windows® Internet Explorer 8.0
Functions Monitoring, meter display, and other printer and scanner functions
[ 13-3 ] Rev.1.00
GDI Controller
2. Built-in Controller (GDI)

Cntroller
2-1. Connecting a Computer
Computers can only be connected to the unit over a network.
PC
The unit has two network ports as an interface. Connect computer
cables to the port labeled "PC."
Connection examples for connecting multiple computers and a single

computer are shown below.
2-1-1. Creating a printing environment with multiple computers

LAN (UTP) cable required for the connection. (User manuals recommend using category 6 or later)
For 10BASE-T Category 3 or later cable
For 100BASE-TX Category 5 or later cable
For 1000BASE-T Category 5e or later cable
Cntroller
PC
2-1-2. Creating a printing environment with single computer
Cntroller
PC
When a HUB not used, a crossover cable is required
The unit supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T Ethernet connections. Note that the transfer rate
may vary depending on the computer, hub, and UTP cable connected. Check the equipment carefully.
In some cases, the unit may be connected to a computer directly, without a hub, but if so, use a crossover cable.
However, when the unit is connected to a computer conforming to 1000BASE-T specifications, a full
crossovercable is required.
Rev.1.00 [ 13-4 ]
GDI Controller
2-2. Printer Network Settings

Configure the printer network setting as follows.
Logout Admin. Idle K C M Y On the mode selection screen,

select Admin mode and log in.
Printer Copy Scanner
? Front door release

Status Admin mode Settings
Logout Admin. Idle K C M Y When you are logged in, the

Settings option can be selected.
Select Settings.
Printer Copy Scanner
? Front door release

Status Admin mode Settings
Admin K C M Y
In the Admin. Settings menu, locate
Logout
Network setting.
Admin. Settings
To finish, press the MODE key.
Login setting
Login method IC card & User name
Authentication servers OFF

1/9
User setting
Print/Copy limitation Limit each mode
Clear user count
All User ctrl System Printer Scanner
[ 13-5 ] Rev.1.00
GDI Controller
Logout Admin K C M Y Select Network setting in the menu.

There are two IP address system
Admin. Settings
To finish, press the MODE key. supported by the printer.
Print Admin settings

[Network setting (IPv4)]
Initialize
[Network setting (IPv6)]
Non RISO ink setting
5/9
Stock Management
Network setting (IPv4) 0. 0. 0. 0
Network setting (IPv6) 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000
All User ctrl System Printer Scanner
One is IPv4 system, it has been

Network setting (IPv4) Cancel OK
supported since before.
Printer name
Basically, sets 3 kind of information
RISO PRINTER
(IP address, Subnet mask and
DHCP server Not Use Use Default gateway).
Select whether to use a DHCP
IP address 0 0 0 0 server for automatic data acquisition
When DHCP is not used, enter the
Subnet mask 0 0 0 0
IP address and Subnet mask, and
if a router is installed on-site, enter
Gateway address 0 0 0 0
the router IP address in Gateway
address.
Also, in the [Network setting (Details)]
Network setting (Details) Cancel OK
setting menu, Proxy, WINS, or DNS
Proxy DNS(IPv4) DNS(IPv6) WINS Others
server information can be set.
Not Use Use
Address 0. 0. 0. 0
Port 8080
User name
Password
If the customer place utilized with
IPv6 IP address system, need to set
IPv6 network setting instructed by
the administrator.
Network setting (IPv6) Cancel OK
Manual: Enter IP address and
Printer name
Gateway address manually.
RISO PRINTER
Stateless address: One of auto-
Manual Stateless address Stateful address configuration (Automatically
configure by communicating between
IP address Prefix length
the host and the router (IPv6) in the
0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 / 64
network.)
Gateway address Stateful address: One of auto-
0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000
configuration (Automatically
configure by the DHCP server (IPv6)
in the network.)
Rev.1.00 [ 13-6 ]
GDI Controller
2-3. Compatible Computers (Operating Systems)

The operating system of computers used for printing must be one of the following.
Microsoft® Windows® XP (SP2), 32-bit edition only
Microsoft® Windows® Vista (32-bit/64-bit)
Microsoft® Windows® 7 (32-bit/64-bit)
Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 (32-bit/64-bit)
Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 R2 (32-bit/64-bit)
Microsoft® Windows® Server 2008 (32-bit/64-bit)
Microsoft® Windows® Server 2008 R2 (64-bit)
Although Windows XP is offered in both 32- and 64-bit editions, note that only the 32-bit edition supported.
How to Check the Edition (Windows 7)

Control Panel - System and Security - System
2-4. Supported Protocols

The following combinations of protocols are supported for printing.
TCP/IP + LPR (LPD)
TCP/IP + RAW (Port 9100)
TCP/IP + IPP
The IP address and related information can be configured manually or automatically by DHCP.
IP protocol is available with IPv4 and IPv6, depending on the installed network.
For console operation, security, and other applications, the unit also supports HTTP, HTTPS (SSL), FTP, SNMP,
IPsec, and similar protocols.
[ 13-7 ] Rev.1.00
GDI Controller
2-5. Sequence in Data Transfer from Computers to the Printer

The printer is equipped with a built-in controller.
This is a GDI-based controller, and no optional external GDI controller is needed.
However, because it is GDI-based, the time required to process print jobs varies depending on the performance
of the computer used.
Source application
Text Illustrations
Photos
Redering data
Spooler
Data in RINC/C III format
GDI
at
rm
Text and illustrations are converted to

fo
300x300 or 300x600 dpi bitmap data

III
to match the printer driver setting.

/C
NC
RI
Photos and similar graphics are

in
converted to bitmap data applying the

ta
Bitmap data is compressed and

Da
converted to RINC/C III format error diffusion or dot screen setting.

by the printer driver.
Included Printer Driver
Windows OS
Computer running Windows
Print jobs are processed as follows and then transferred to the printer.
1. Print job data created by programs installed on the Windows computer are passed to the operating system's
Graphical Device Interface (GDI) as rendering data and converted to bitmap data based on information in the
installed printer driver.
Text (outlined fonts) and graphics are converted to bitmaps matching the printer driver resolution, and the
rendering data comprised of this bitmap data is converted according to the selected screening type (error
diffusion or 70- or 100-line dot screen).
2. The printer driver compresses the bitmap data to make it smaller for transfer.
For this unit, the compressed bitmap data is in a format called RISO RINC/C III, and a controller that
understands the RISORINC/C III format must be in the printer or this data cannot be printed.
3. Data in RISO RINC/C III format is spooled temporarily in the operating system and transferred when the
printer is ready to receive it.
4. When the printer receives print jobs in RISO RINC/C III format, the data is either expanded by the controller
PCB unit to the original bitmap data and sent to the unit that creates data for storage, or it is temporarily saved
on the hard disk in RISO RINC/C III format.
Rev.1.00 [ 13-8 ]
GDI Controller
3. Printer Driver Installation

3-1. Installing the Printer Driver (Windows 7 - RAW Port)
The unit is provided with a printer driver CD used for installation of the printer driver.
Installation instructions are as follows.
Before installing the printer driver, follow the instructions in sections 2-1 and 2-2 to connect the computer to the
printer and configure the required network settings on the printer.
Insert the printer driver CD in the computer CD-ROM drive.
Click [Run Install. exe].
Click [Yes] on User Account Control.
Choose the desired language on the language selection screen and

click OK.
Example: English
You must be logged in as a member with

administrator rights to install the printer driver,
and no other software must be running. After
confirming that these requirements are met,
click Next.
If the preliminary preparations in sections

2-1 and 2-2 have been completed correctly,
connected printers are listed in Search result
list.
192.168.1.200 00:60:0A:02:FA:01 RISO PRINTER
If the unit is not shown in the Search result list,

enter the required information in the printer
name or IP address fields, and then click
192.168.1.200
Search.
[ 13-9 ] Rev.1.00
GDI Controller
If only one unit is involved, simply

click Next.
If multiple units are listed, select
the desired printer and then click
Next.
192.168.1.200 00:60:0A:02:FA:01 RISO PRINTER
192.168.1.200
Select the correct printer driver for

the desired printer, and then click
Next.
RISO ComColor 9150
If necessary, enter the printer

name, and then click Next.
RISO ComColor 9150
Rev.1.00 [ 13-10 ]
GDI Controller
Confirm the printer name (the

name you entered for the printer),
the port number (in particular,
confirm that the IP address is
Printer name: RISO ComColor 9150
correct), and the printer driver
Port: RISO_192.168.1.200 name (model).
Model: RISO ComColor 9150
Click Install.
If printing a test page is necessary, click Yes.

Otherwise, click No.
This message is only displayed

if you have selected to print the
test page.
Click OK, whether or not the

test page is printed.
If the test page was not printed, check the physical connection and network settings.
Also check the information entered manually during printer selection, and ensure the correct printer was selected
if multiple printers were listed.
Continue the process of installation until a test page is successfully printed.
[ 13-11 ] Rev.1.00
GDI Controller
In the properties of the installed printer, open the port and confirm that it is correct.
Click Configure Port and confirm that the port protocol is Raw and the port number is 9100.
RISO ComColor 9150
RISO ComColor 9150
COM1: Serial Port

COM2: Serial Port
COM3: Serial Port
COM4: Serial Port
FILE: Print to File
RISO_192.168.1.200 Standard TCP/IP Port RISO ComColor 9150
RISO_192.168.1.200
RISO ComColor EX9050
192.168.1.200
Rev.1.00 [ 13-12 ]
GDI Controller
3-2. Installing the Printer Driver (LPR or IPP Port)
Click on the [Custom installation] button

on top of the page 13-10.
192.168.1.200 00:60:0A:02:FA:01 RISO PRINTER
192.168.1.200
Exisitin port:
If the port has already been created on the computer, select
COM2:
proper port on the list.
COM3:
COM4:
FILE:
RISO_192.168.1.200
Local Port
Standard TCP/IP port
https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/ipp/lp
Create a new port:

To create a new LPR port, select [Standard TCP/IP port ] in
LPT1:
the list, then click on [Create] button.
LPT2:
LPT3: After this, perform remaining steps, to complete the port
COM1:
COM2:
installation.
Local Port
IPP port:
To create an IPP port, describe proper IPP port information in
LPT1:
the column.
LPT2:
LPT3:
COM1:
For example, enter http://192.168.1.200/ipp/lp as an IPP port
COM2:
name.
After this, perform remaining steps, to complete the port
Local Port
installation.
[ 13-13 ] Rev.1.00
GDI Controller
MEMO
Rev.1.00 [ 13-14 ]
Electronic Components
Chapter 14. Electronic Components

Contents
1. Overall Structure of Boards ......................................................................................... 14-2

1-1. Board Wiring...................................................................................................................... 14-2
1-2. Board Configuration .......................................................................................................... 14-3
2. Board Components ...................................................................................................... 14-4
2-1. Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................................ 14-4
2-2. Engine Control PCB .......................................................................................................... 14-6
2-3. Controller PCB (Including Recording data generating PCB) ............................................14-11
2-4. Option PCB ..................................................................................................................... 14-16
2-5. Other Boards ................................................................................................................... 14-17
3. Interlock Circuit .......................................................................................................... 14-20
4. Electronic Parts Search Table ................................................................................... 14-21
5. Electronic Parts Structural Figure ............................................................................ 14-25
5-1. Unit Front View ................................................................................................................ 14-25
5-2. Unit Rear Viewt ............................................................................................................... 14-26
5-3. External Paper Feed & Registration ................................................................................ 14-27
5-4. Internal Paper Feed (with Trays) ..................................................................................... 14-28
5-5. Vertical Paper Feed (A & B) ............................................................................................ 14-29
5-6. BP Unit ............................................................................................................................ 14-30
5-7. BP Elevation .................................................................................................................... 14-31
5-8. Paper Transfer................................................................................................................. 14-32
5-9. FD Paper Ejection ........................................................................................................... 14-33
5-10. Switchback .................................................................................................................... 14-34
5-11. Ink Supply ...................................................................................................................... 14-35
5-12. Ink Cartridge Holder ...................................................................................................... 14-37
5-13. Print Heads.................................................................................................................... 14-38
5-14. Head Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 14-39
5-15. Waste Ink Tank .............................................................................................................. 14-40
6. Block Diagrams & Wiring Diagrams ......................................................................... 14-41
6-1. Overall Block Diagram 1.................................................................................................. 14-41
6-2. Overall Block Diagram 2.................................................................................................. 14-42
6-3. Power Supply Unit ........................................................................................................... 14-43
6-4. Recording Data Generating PCB (X3-IP-PCB) ............................................................... 14-44
6-5. Controller PCB to Panel PCB .......................................................................................... 14-45
6-6. Engine Control PCB to Other PCB .................................................................................. 14-46
6-7. Engine Control PCB to Parts (CN9_10_52_53_54_55_56_63_64) ................................ 14-47
6-8. Engine Control PCB to Parts (CN51_62_72_73_75) ...................................................... 14-48
6-9. Engine Control PCB to Parts (CN61_65_66_71) ............................................................ 14-49
6-10. Engine Control PCB to Parts (CN59_60_69_70_74) .................................................... 14-50
6-11. I-PF-PCB to Parts (CN7_8_9_10_11) ........................................................................... 14-51
6-12. I-PF-PCB to Parts (CN4_5_6_12) ................................................................................. 14-52
6-13. PF-RELAY-PCB to Parts (CN4_5_6_7) ......................................................................... 14-53
6-14. Option PCB to Boards ................................................................................................... 14-54
6-15. Finisher IF Unit .............................................................................................................. 14-55
6-16. Option PCB to Options .................................................................................................. 14-56
6-17. Scanner Unit 1............................................................................................................... 14-57
6-18. Scanner Unit 2............................................................................................................... 14-58
7. Downloading Firmware Data ..................................................................................... 14-59
8. PCB Replacements ..................................................................................................... 14-62
[ 14-1 ] Rev.1.00
Electronic Compnents
1. Overall Structure of Boards
1-1. Board Wiring

The principal boards are as follows: power supply unit (PS25-HWW), engine control PCB (X3-ENGINE-PCB),
controller PCB (CONTROLLER-PCB) & decouple PCB in the controller PCB unit, recording data generating
PCB (X3-IP-PCB), option PCB (X3-OPTION-PCB), internal paper feed drive PCB (X3-I-PF-PCB), and others.
These principal boards are arranged as follows, as viewed from the back of the unit.
X3-OPTION-PCB
Controller
Decouple
PCB PCB
X3-ENGINE-PCB
X3-IP-PCB
X3-I-PF
-PCB
Power suuply Unit
PS25-NWW
Arrangement of Principal Boards, Viewed from the Back of the Unit
Other board components include the panel control PCB (PNL-1126A-PCB) in the operation panel unit, mode
button PCB (MODEKEY-PCB), numeric keypad PCB (TENKEY-PCB), and LED backlight for the LCD panel.
Additionally, there are head control PCBs 1 and 2 (OR2 HDR_PCB1-2), paper feed relay PCB (PF-RELAY-PCB),
paper feed tray PCB, (PF-TRAY-PCB), ink cartridge RFID PCB for ink detection, machine code RFID PCB for
model detection, and ink circulation PCB for ink circulation.
Rev.1.00 [ 14-2 ]
1-2. Board Configuration
Operation Panel Unit

LED backlight
SD
78KO LCD
Scanner
Decouple PCB
LVDS
USB RFID-PCB
UART Controller PCB
USB
UART CPU
SIO Memory
USB
LAN Chipset
USB CIS
S-ATA
Power Supply Unit
Actuator
HDD CPU
PCI
Sensor
F2MC
Supply voltages to each PCB
CIS RMGA2
A/D FRAM Paper feed
SDRAM relay PCB Sensor
FPGA
SDRAM SDRAM Inter
Driver
Sensor Inter lock

FLASH I/F lock
Recording data generating PCB FLASH
Driver
Paper feed
MCU Sensor
tray PCB
Head control PCB1 DSP
Sensor Internal paper feed
Head control PCB2
I/F drive PCB
Actuator
Driver
Sensor
I/F
Sensor
Finisher Option PCB
FU Paper Ejection Unit Engine control PCB
Card/Coin Vendor Unit
Warning Light
Power Switch
Driver
Driver
Driver
Driver
Driver
Inter Inter Inter
lock lock lock
AC Outlet for
scanner unit Sensor Sensor Sensor
Sensor
I/F Memory I/F Memory I/F Memory RMGA2
I/F
AC Inlet CPU MCU CPU CPU

Inter
lock MCU
High Capacity Feeder Offset Stapler Tray High Capacity Stacker Mail Maker Perfect Binder
Boards are configured in the arrangement above.

The engine control PCB coordinates communication among the operation panel unit, recoding data generating
PCB, power supply unit, RFID PCB unit, and other components.
The internal paper feed drive PCB incorporates the internal paper feed unit, actuators used in vertical paper feed
unit B, sensor drivers, I/O circuits, and the interface circuit.
The option PCB is only needed when optional units are connected.
It is not used on standard units.
The controller PCB mainly conducts processing for large amounts of data, as in print job processing, network
processing, and interface processing.
[ 14-3 ] Rev.1.00
2. Board Components
2-1. Power Supply Unit (PS25-NWW)

2-1-1. Role of Board
Supplies the required voltage to all devices (including optional devices).
Five levels of voltage are supplied: 5V, 12V, 24V, 30V, and 41V.
These are subdivided by system of use.
For reference, voltage systems and the corresponding boards, units, and principal components are shown in the
following two-page table, as well as the initial voltage supply timing and control (interlock) and relevant fuses.
+24VE/+24VOP1-2 +24VA/B/C/D (To Engine ctl PCB)

POWER SUPPLY UNIT / PS25-NWW
PRIMARY SECONDARY
T3.15AH
F003
/ 500V
(To OPTION PCB) & +24V Ink Heater

F014
1
CN10
T6.3AL/250V
7
T3.15AL/250V
1
F008
CN11
5
T3.15AH
T3.15AL/250V
/ 500V
F002
+30VA/+30VB/+30VOP1
F007
5 CN12 1
(To various PCBs)

+41V (To Head Control PCB J16)
T8AL/DC42V
F10
F11
T3.15AH
1
CN13
F001
/ 500V
F12
F13
4
+24V/30V/41V
(To Engine Control PCB

(To Engine
Control PCB CN6)
1
CN1
7 1
+5VSP
CN3
CN49)
- PCB CN3)
2 1 4
(To X3-I-PF
CN4
+5VSP
Control PCB
6 CN6 1
(To X3-IP-
PCB CN3
& Engine
T3.15AH
CN49)
F005
+5V
/ 500V
(To Decouple
T3.15AH
1
F004
PCB CN1)
/ 250V
CN2 7 CN5
(To Panel control
6 1 +12V
15A/ 250V
(intermediate
-12V/+5VSB
connector)
PCB CN1)
F006
CNAC2 CNAC1
3 1 3 1 For PSU cooling fan
CN008 For PSU cooling fan CN007
Green Red Green Red Black Red Black Red

Power Supply PCB: Layout of Connectors and Fuses, Dial for Fine-tuning Voltage
Rev.1.00 [ 14-4 ]
2-1-2. Information on Changeable Fuses
PSU
Changeable Rated Corresponding
Voltage System Connector Control Actuator Parts
Fuse Name Value Board or Unit
Pin No.
F006 15A AC Input
30V for needs related to optional
F007 3.15A 30VOP CN12_1 Option PCB_CN1
equipment
24V voltage for needs related to optional
F008 3.15A 24VOP CN11_4&5 Option PCB_CN1
equipment
Head control
F010 8A 41VA CN13_5 For C and K head control
PCB1(CK)_J16_1
Head control
F011 8A 41VB CN13_6 For C and K head control
PCB1(CK)_J16_3
Head control
F012 8A 41VC CN13_7 For M and Y head control
PCB2(MY)_J16_1
Head control
F013 8A 41VD CN13_8 For M and Y head control
PCB2(MY)_J16_3
Circulation pump motors, Ink supply
Engine control valves, Pressurized ink tank air valve,
F014 3.15A 24VA CN10_8
PCB_CN14_1 Negatively pressurized ink tank air valve
and Ink cooling fan
2-1-3. Information on Connectors
No. of DIAG
Name Voltage Connected To
Pins page
CNAC1 3 Primary AC Power Switch & AC Pwer Inlet 43
CNAC2 3 Primary AC Power Socket 43
CN1 7 Voltage Control Engine control PCB CN6 43
CN2 6 5VSB, Voltage Control Panel Control PCB CN2 43
CN3 4 5VSP Engine control PCB CN49 43
CN4 2 5VSP Internal paper feed Drive PCB CN3 43
CN5 7 12V DECOUPLE-PCB CN1 43
Recording data Generating PCB CN3, Engine control PCB
CN6 6 5V 43
CN49
CN007 2 Power Supply Cooling Fan 43
CN008 2 Power Supply Cooling Fan 43
CN10 7 24VA, VB, VC, VD Engine control PCB CN5 &14, 24V Ink Heater 43
CN11 5 24VE, OP1, OP2 Internal paper feed Drive PCB CN3, Option PCB CN1 43
Engine control PCB CN18, Option PCB CN1, Internal paper
CN12 5 30VA, VB, OP1 43
feed Drive PCB CN3
CN13 4 41VA, VB, VC, VD Head control PCB J16 43
[ 14-5 ] Rev.1.00
2-2. Engine Control PCB (X3-ENGINE-PCB)

Main roles of the engine control PCB are as follows.
• Controlling the power supply (transition to sleep, recovering, and so on)
• System management (managing machine code and internal data, processing error, executing test
modes)
• Controlling ink supply (processing to identify ink, fill the printer with ink, circulate ink, supply ink, and
dispose of ink)
• Controlling head maintenance (head cleaning and other processes)
• Controlling paper transfer
• Controlling printing (generating images, performing adjustment, and other processes)
• Controlling optional equipment
• Controlling actuators and sensors used in the operations mentioned above
2-2-2. Primary Components

1) CPU for system control (SH2A)
The CPU (SH2A) is connected to the controller PCB via the image processing PCB. It conducts required
data transmission based on printing conditions and expansion status of recorded data.
2) Peripheral parts related to the CPU
RMGA2 (actuator and sensor control and so on, through extended functions)
NOR flash memory (stores CPU programs and data)
SD-RAM memory (provides the CPU work area)
FRAM memory (for the CPU data buffer)
3) Paper transfer control DSP (controller)
Controls the paper transfer system (actuators, sensors, and other parts)
4) Voltage required by onboard devices is generated on the board (Refer to the following table)
Generated Voltage Original Voltage Use
+3.3V +5VSP CPU (SH2A), auxiliary CPU (F2MC), memory, and other uses
+1.25V +3.3VSP CPU (SH2A)

+3.3V +5V (Main) DSP, RMGA2, and other uses
+1.9V +3.3V DSP
Rev.1.00 [ 14-6 ]
4 1 1 10
1 13 1 CN37 19 CN68 CN63 CN4 24 13
26
CN57 14 CN49
To X3-I-PF-PCB CN2 +5V/+5VSP 1 6 1 7 1 CN62 12
20
To X3-I-PF-PCB CN1 +5V/+5VSP (PSU CN3/6) To PF-relay Unused To RFID
4
(PSU CN3/6) -PCB CN2 PCBs
LED5
Unused
CN2
LED8
FU8 LED7
To various motors
LED4
CN64
FU7 AC250V/2.5A
1 CN44 11
AC250V/2.5A
Unused
LED1
1
LED2
LED3
14 CN45
DSP
1
5
To X3-OPTION PCB CN11
LED6
CPU
LED9
(SH2A)
CN18
Reset
switch
1
+30V (PSU-CN12)
X3-ENGINE-PCB
80
2
CN51
1
[ 14-7 ]
motor power
CN9
Transfer belt
ENGINE CONTROL PCB
2 1
To +30V heater
14
13
Reset switch
CN43
CN1
Flash
To X3-IP PCB CN4
CN3
Memory
1
26
1
PCB version No.
sensors
RMGA2
To PF-relay-PCB CN10
1
11 CN53 1 10 CN66 1
To BP unit parts
4
1 16
To motors & clutch To FD unit parts

2-2-3. Layout of Primary Onboard Components, Connectors, fuses and LEDs
To BP hit detection
CN72 To Bellows arm
18
19
32 17 1 CN73 17
CN7
drive motor
1
To various sensors
18
To Panel PCB CN5
1 CN74 10 1 CN70 16
17
B9 B1 To Negatively
A1
CN52 A9
pressurized
CN69
To BP elevation & ink tank sensors
CN75
(Be careful not to press during data transfer)
Paper elevation motors +24V lines

To Ink path sensors
CN60
(PSU-CN1)
1
36
To Front door To Safety ( PSU CN10)

24V/30V/41V
To Elevator motor
2
1
To Ink path motor
To Transfer belt fans

switches switches & counter To FD unit parts To Ink path valves &
& fans
7 CN6 1 CN5
7 CN14 1 ink coolng fan

1
1 CN56 8 1 CN55 12 1 CN54 6 1 12

CN71
To Circulation pump motors
1 CN65 15 1 CN61 16 1 CN59 20 24 13

detection
Ink heater
To Ink path sensors
Rev.1.00

No. of Silk-Screened on DIAG
Name Connected To
Pins PCB page
CN1 4 DEBUG Not equipped N/A
CN2 4 FA-CHK Not used N/A
Paper feed relay PCB CN1 (control signal for various sensors, +5V
CN3 26 PF-SIDE-SNR 46
signal)
CN4 7 F2MC-BGM Not used N/A
CN5 2 PS I/F2 Power supply unit CN10 (24V system voltage) 43
CN6 7 PS I/F1 Power supply unit CN1 (power supply control) 43
CN7 4 PNL I/F Panel control PCB CN3 45
CN8 9 JTAG2 Not equipped N/A
CN9 2 HEATER +30V Heater 47
CN10 5 WIRE-SNR BP hit detection sensors 47
CN14 7 PWR-IN2 Power supply unit CN10 (24V system voltage) 43
CN18 5 PWR-IN3 Power supply unit CN12 (+30VA) 43
Internal paper feed drive PCB CN2 (control signal for various
CN37 19 IPF-I/F2 46
sensors)
46
CN43 80 RDC I/F Recording data Generating PCB CN4 or Option PCB CN12
54
CN44 11 JTAG1 Not used N/A
CN45 14 OPT-I/F Option PCB CN11 54
CN49 4 PWR-IN1 Power supply unit CN3-6 (+5V, +5VSP) 43
CN51 2 BLM-PWR Transfer belt motor power supply (+30V-IL) 48
CN52 18 PF-ACT2 BP elevation motor, paper elevation motor 47
CN53 11 PF-ACT1 Upper transfer motor, Authorization cam motor 47
CN54 6 FRONT-ACT Elevator motor, Counter 47
CN55 12 RIL-SW 4 Interlock switches 47
CN56 8 FIL-SW Left and right front door interlock switches 47
Internal paper feed drive PCB CN1 (control signal for various motors
CN57 26 IPF-I/F1 46
and clutches)
Ink supply valves (CMYK), Pressurized and negative pressure ink
CN59 20 CRCLTE-ACT3 50
tank air valves, Ink cooling fan
CN60 17 CRCLTE-ACT1 Ink circulation pump (CMYK), via pump drive PCB 50
Head drive IC cooling fans 1 and 2, Maintenance unit slide motor,
CN61 16 MAINTE-ACT 49
Wiper motors 1 and 2
CN62 24 RFID-I/F1 RFID PCB (CMYK ink) 48
CN63 6 RFID-I/F2 Machine code RFID PCB 47
External paper feed motor, Registration motor, Re-feed motor,
CN64 20 PF-ACT4 47
Switchback motor, +30V-IL for Paper elevation/BP elevation motor
FD paper ejection motor, FD paper ejection flipper solenoid, FD
CN65 15 FD-UNIT1 paper ejection motor FG sensor, FD paper ejection full sensor, FD 49
paper ejection sensor
FD paper ejection fence motor, FD paper ejection fence HP sensor,
CN66 10 FD-UNIT2 49
FD paper ejection paper detection sensor
CN68 10 ANLG-SNR Paper feed relay PCB CN2 (control signal for various sensors) 46
Pressurized ink tank sensor (CMYK), Overflow tank ink sensor,
CN69 36 CRCLTE-SNR1 Bellows sensor, Bellows arm HP sensor, Bellows arm upper and 50
lower position sensors
Rev.1.00 [ 14-8 ]
No. of DIAG
Name Silk-Screened on PCB Connected To
Pins page
CN70 16 CRCLTE-SNR2 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor (CMYK) 50
Wiper motor HP sensor, Ink pan storage sensor, Ink pan
CN71 24 MAINTE-SNR 49
operating position sensor, Waste ink tank sensors 1 and 2
BP upper and lower limit sensors, Flipper sensor, Paper
CN72 32 CRCLTE-SNR3 elevation IN sensor, Authorization cam HP sensor, Ink cartridge 48
detection sensor (CMYK)
Transfer belt motor, Belt HP sensor, Belt shaft FG sensor (driven
CN73 17 FRNT-SNR 48
roller)
CN74 10 CRCLTE-ACT2 Bellows arm drive motor 50
CN75 18 BP-FAN Transfer belt fans 1-6 48
2-2-5. Changeable Fuse
Changeable
Rated Value Voltage System Control Actuator Parts
Fuse Name
FU7 2.5A/250V 30V-IL For External paper feed motor
FU8 2.5A/250V 30V-IL For Registration motor
2-2-6. LED Information
Number Color LED Name Normal Ready State Use
LED1 Red MPU-HB Flashing Indicates the CPU (SH2A) status (heartbeat)
LED2 Red ERROR OFF Indicates the CPU (SH2A) status (error)
LED3 Green STATUS OFF Indicates the CPU (SH2A) status
LED4 Red VCC5SP ON For +5VSP voltage
LED5 Red VCC5 ON For +5V voltage
LED6 Red DSP-HB Flashing Indicates the DSP status (heartbeat)
LED7 Red F2-HB Flashing Indicates the auxiliary CPU status (heartbeat)
LED8 Green F2-ST OFF Indicates the auxiliary CPU status

LED9 No information OFF No information
[ 14-9 ] Rev.1.00
2-2-7. PCB Version Control

The presence of resistors mounted on particular PCBs enables version control of engine control PCBs.
Engine Control PCB Version Control, Based on Resistance
If there is resistance in the 0 position: 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 If there is resistance in the 4 position: 16
Example of Implementation of Resistance
ǡ ǡ ǡ ǡ
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
In this example of implementation, there is resistance

at the 0, 1, 3, and 5 positions. Thus, the version is 43
because 1+2+8+32=43.
Example photo of PCB (version 128)
2-2-8. Precautions During Engine Control PCB Replacement

When replacing the engine control PCB, be careful to ensure that the values entered in data etiting test modes
are not erased.
Values etited by using the “Data Editing” test modes listed in Chapter 17, Section 6, are stored in the memory
of the engine control PCB. For this reason, execute test mode 00415 (store test mode setting values) when
replacing the engine control PCB to send the settings data to the hard disk. After replacement, you must execute
test mode 00416 (restore test mode setting values) to apply the setting values.
Rev.1.00 [ 14-10 ]
2-3. Controller PCB (including Recording data Generating PCB)

Main roles of the controller PCB are as follows.
• Functions to generate image data.
• Converts data supplied from a computer, scanner, or USB memory to image data and transfers it to the
recording data generating PCB.
• Job management functions.
• Manages jobs (print jobs from a computer or image data from a scanner).
• Functions for transfer of image data.
• Transfers expanded image data to the image processing PCB, based on job information.
• Functions for controlling the operation panel unit.
• Controls the operation panel unit.
• Download functions.
• In this system, all downloads to units that require them are done as follows: An update program stored
on a USB memory device is read after the device is inserted in the USB port managed by the controller
PCB, and a downloading application stored in memory on the controller PCB is executed to download
the data to the controller PCB, engine control PCB, scanner, or finisher.
• System control functions.
• For overall control of the system as a whole.
• Scanner control functions.
• Controls scanners connected as optional equipment.
• User authentication functions.
• Controls user authentication (optional).
• Image adjustment (for details, refer to the chapter on image adjustment).
• Functions to back up setting values of the engine control PCB.
• The controller PCB unit backs up information to the hard disk, including mechanical settings values and
counter values saved by the engine control PCB.
[ 14-11 ] Rev.1.00
2-3-2. Layout of Primary Onboard Components, Connectors
Fan
J4
4
8
40 2 8 1
J3
J2
39 1
To Decouple PCB CN4
1 To Decouple PCB CN8
HDD power
To Decouple PCB CN2
J22
Memory
CPU
LAN2
(CN9)
Controller PCB
CONTROLLER-PCB
LAN1 To Decouple PCB CN4
2 14 9 1
1 J1 13 10 J17 2
USB To Decouple PCB CN4
Chip set
USB
Connect with X3-IP-PCB
Controller PCB
Connect with Controller PCB

detection sensor (rear)
To Engine control PCB CN43
To CIS paper width

80
7 CN9 1
Recording data generating PCB

CN4
detection sensor (front)
1 CN2 50 X3- IP-PCB

To CIS paper width
To Head control PCB 1 (CK) J2

8 CN10 1
40 CN6 1
To Head control PCB 2 (MY) J1
1 CN1 40
1
To Head control PCB 1 (CK) J1

50 CN7 1
2 CN3 1
To Head control PCB 2 (MY) J2
+5V (To Power supply unit CN6)
Recording data Generating PCB
Rev.1.00 [ 14-12 ]
Controller PCB
No. of DIAG
Name Connected To
Pins page
J1 14 Decouple PCB CN4 (For Panel Control) 45
CN4-7 4 USB (Scanner Unit, IC Card Authentication Kit, etc.) 45
CN9 8 External Controller 45
Recording data Generating PCB
No. of DIAG
Name Connected To
Pins page
CN1 40 Head control PCB 1 (CK) J1 44
CN2 50 Head control PCB 1 (CK) J2 44
CN3 2 Power Supply Unit CN6 (+5V) 44
CN4 80 Engine control PCB CN43 44
CN6 40 Head control PCB 2 (MY) J1 44
CN7 50 Head control PCB 2 (MY) J2 44
CN9 7 CIS paper width detection sensor (rear) 44
CN10 8 CIS paper width detection sensor (front) 44
2-3-4. Purpose of Primary Components
CPU
The central processing unit, for data processing.
This CPU is directly mounted on the control PCB.
It is an Intel® AtomD510 processor (1.66 GHz) or equivalent.
Memory
1GB memory (Max 2GB).
Called main memory, this is RAM or ROM storage media that is directly accessed by the CPU to read or
write data.
Chipset
ICH8-M Chipset
Groups of circuits that control exchanges between the CPU and memory or peripheral components.
HDD Drive
2.5 inch 350 GB or equivalent.
[ 14-13 ] Rev.1.00
LVDS (low-voltage differential signaling)

A communication specification enabling high-speed transmission at several hundred Mbps.
Controlled by the northbridge (described above).
Used in high-speed digital communication with the LCD panel.
Expansion board interface:

PCI (peripheral component interconnect) bus, for high-speed data transfer with expansion boards
The Recording data Generating PCB is inserted vertically in this expansion slot.
LAN controller
Controls network communication.
Dual 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T Ethernet channels are provided for communication with
connected equipment.
External interfaces
Controls the interface with peripheral equipment (connection and communication control).
LAN1
For connection to a computer
LAN2
For connection to an external controller (PS)
USB (four USB 2.0 ports)
For connection to a scanner, USB memory devices, and similar equipment
RGB output (analog)
Normally not used
For connection of an external

Cntroller
PS controller
PC For connection to a PC
For connection of USB

memory devices, scanner
units and other devices
Rev.1.00 [ 14-14 ]
2-3-5. Functions to Generate Image Data

1. When using the printer driver provided with the unit to send print jobs from a computer
Data in RINC/C III format (proprietary, bitmap-based compressed data) is generated by the printer driver
installed on the computer using the GDI. These print jobs are transferred to the unit over a network
connection. Once print jobs are received, the unit's controller PCB converts them to image data, which is
transferred to the recording data generating PCB.
In this way, print jobs received by the unit from a computer are originally sent in RINC/C III format.
2. When sending print jobs from a scanner

Data produced by scanning images is transferred to the unit as CMYK image data via a USB connection.
Once print jobs are received, the unit's controller PCB converts them to image data, which is transferred to
the recording data generating PCB.
Additionally, image data from scanners can be rotated 90º to match the paper size, arranged for printing
n-up, or prepared in other ways by an application on the controller PCB, as needed.
(2)
Scanner
CMYK based image data

Ethernet
Controller PCB USB
(1)
RISORINC/CIII format data
Recording data
generating PCB
[ 14-15 ] Rev.1.00
2-4. Option PCB (X3-OPTION-PCB)

Controls communication with optional paper supply and ejection units and other installed optional equipment.
This PCB is mounted on top of the engine control PCB.
2-4-1. Layout of Connectors

13
CN2
24 1 CN11 14
12 1
To Finisher
To Finisher I/F unit To Engine control PCB CN43
CN3 1
I/F unit 80 CN12 1

14
ejection motor
To FU paper
1
CN16
(voltage)
To X3-IP-PCB CN4
2
80 CN13 1
22
CN512 14
11 13
To FU paper ejection To FU paper
ejection unit
To Card/Coin
CN4
(sensors &
Vendor unit
motors)
1 3
2 4
12
11
1
14
15
CN14
stacking tray unit motor (signal)
Option PCB
To one of option
CN21
X3-OPTION-PCB
7
26
28
To Auto control
1
CN7
(To Power supply unit

To one of option power +24VOP / +30VOP
(Use for CN19 connected option)
14
13
CN11/12)
5
1 CN18 4
CN1
To one of option To Offset Stapler Unit For debug
To Warning Light
1
1 14 1 14 B1 B5
1 CN6 8
28
CN19 15 28
CN23 15 A1
CN17
A5
No. of DIAG
Name Silk-Screened on PCB Connected To
Pins page
CN1 5 POWER Power supply unit CN11/12 (24VOP, 30VOP voltage supply) 54
Finisher IF PCB P8002, Decurler motor CN2 (signal) & IF unit
CN2 24 FINISHER 55
door interlock switch 2
CN3 14 FIN POWER Finisher IF PCB P8001 & Decurler motor CN1 (voltage) 55
CN4 22 FU UNIT FU Paper Ejection Unit parts 56

CN5 14 COIN-VENDOR Card/ Coin Vendor 56
CN6 8 PATLITE Warning light 56
CN7 26 AUTO FENCE Auto control stacking tray unit 56
CN11 14 ENGINE-IF1 Engine control PCB CN45 54
CN12 80 ENGINE-IF2 Engine control PCB CN43 54
CN13 80 RDC-IF Recording data Generating PCB (X3-IP-PCB) CN4 54
CN14 7 FU MOT FU Paper Ejection motor (signal) 56
CN16 2 FU MOT POWER FU Paper Ejection motor (voltage supply) 56
CN17 10 DEBUG-IF Not used N/A
CN18 4 PD-SIDE-PWR Option Interface (voltage supply) N/A
CN19 28 PD-SIDE-IF Option Interface (signal) N/A
CN20 4 PF-SIDE-PWR1 Not equipped N/A
CN21 28 PF-SIDE-IF1 Option Interface (voltage supply) N/A
CN23 28 PF-SIDE-IF2 Offset Stapler unit 56
Rev.1.00 [ 14-16 ]
2-5. Other Boards (Layout of connectors & information of connectors available on some
PCB)
2-5-1. Internal Paper Feed Drive PCB
Controls operation of sensors, switches, motors, and clutches involved with the internal paper feed system.
Operation of components in the internal paper feed system is controlled by this PCB, as they are driven by a
signal from the engine control PCB (CN37 and 57) and the required voltage is supplied from the power supply
unit.
26

1
Power Supply Unit (CN4/6/11/12)

+5V, +5VSP, +24V-E, +30V from
8
CN1
1
CN3
CN2
14
13
Internal Paper Feed Drive PCB

19
1
X3-I-PF-PCB
For Internal paper

feed motor power
CN7
2
To Vertical paper feed sensors
(+30V)
1
1
1
To Tray paper detection sensors
& Tray upper limit sensors
16
CN4
To Tray interlock switches

To Internal feed paper jam door
CN5
CN11
15
4
CN12
interlock switch
18
1
1
To Tray paper size detection sensors
36
sensors & Internal paper feed motor
To Internal & Vertical
10
paper feed clutches
1
To Tray paper volume detection

CN10
CN6
CN9
To tray elevator motors

19
18
17
1 CN8 6
No. of DIAG
Name Connected To
Pins page
CN1 23 Engine control PCB CN57 (Control signals for various motors and clutches) 46
CN2 19 Engine control PCB CN37 (Control signals for various sensors) 46
CN3 8 Power supply unit CN4/6/11/12 (5V, 5VSP, 24VE & 30V) 43
CN4 15 Vertical paper feed sensors 52
CN5 18 Tray (1-3) paper detection sensors & Tray (1-3) upper limit sensors 52
CN6 10 Internal paper feed clutches & Vertical paper feed clutches 52
CN7 2 Internal paper feed motor power supply (+30V) 51
CN8 6 Tray (1-3) elevator motors 51
CN9 17 Internal paper feed motor & Tray (1-3) paper volume detection sensors 51
CN10 36 Tray (1-3) paper size detection sensors (1-4) 51
CN11 16 Tray (1-3) interlock switches 51
CN12 4 Internal feed paper jam door interlock switch 52
[ 14-17 ] Rev.1.00
2-5-2. Paper Feed Relay PCB

Controls operation of sensors and switches involved mainly with external paper feeding, registration, paper
position detection, and switchback.
Operation of components in these paper transfer systems is controlled by this PCB, as they are driven by a
signal from the engine control PCB (CN3 and 68) and the required voltage is supplied.
13 1
14
CN1 26

To Engie control PCB CN3
10
CN2
Paper feed relay PCB
PF-RELAY-PCB
20
1
19
17
To various sensors & switch
To various sensors & switch
To Paper feed tray PCB CN1

CN6
CN7
CN4
5 CN5 1
To various sensors
1
No. of DIAG
Name Connected To
Pins page
CN1 26 Engine control PCB CN3 (Control signals for various sensors & 5V) 46
CN2 10 Engine control PCB CN68 (Control signals for various sensors) 46
CN3 N/A Unused N/A
CN4 17 BP wire loose detection switch & various sensors 53
CN5 5 Paper feed tray PCB CN1 53
CN6 20 Paper feed tray elevation switch & various sensors 53
CN7 19 Various sensors 53
2-5-3. Paper Feed Tray PCB

Controls signals between the paper feed relay PCB and paper feed tray unit. Only the paper feed tray paper
length detection sensor, paper feed tray paper detection sensor, and paper feed tray paper width potentiometer
are controlled by this PCB.
2-5-4. Head Control PCBs 1 and 2

Controls ink ejection from the heads and related operation. PCB 1 controls cyan and black, and PCB 2 controls
magenta and yellow.
Rev.1.00 [ 14-18 ]
2-5-5. Decouple PCB

Converts signals from the controller PCB unit to data for the Panel Control PCB.
CN7
1 (LDVS) 19
To Panel control
PCB CN6
DECOUPLE-PCB
+12V (To Power supply unit CN5)

To Controller PCB J3
1 19
CN8
2 20
5
To Controller PCB J2
CN1
CN24
To Panel control
1
PCB CN5
1
16 CN3 1
To Controller PCB J1,4,17

1 CN4 14
No. of DIAG
Name Connected To
Pins page
CN1 5 Power supply unit CN5 (12V voltage supply) 45
CN2 4 Controller PCB J2 45
CN3 16 Panel control PCB CN5 45
CN4 14 Controller PCB J1/4/17 45
CN7 19 Panel control PCB CN6 45
CN8 20 Controller PCB J3 45
2-5-6. Panel Control PCB

General panel control is performed by this PCB, incorporated in the operation panel unit. The single-chip
microcontroller (78KO/KE2) mounted on the PCB controls hardware buttons, LEDs, the touch panel, buzzers,
and other components. A voltage buzzer is also mounted on the PCB. Communication with the controller PCB
unit is conducted via a serial connection (RS-232C).
The panel control PCB starts up immediately after receiving +5VSB from the power supply unit. Control by this
PCB ensures that the engine control PCB and optional components receive the required voltage.
2-5-7. Mode Button PCB, Numeric Keypad PCB, and LED backlight
The mode button PCB is a board with wired input devices. It manages input from mode, counter, and shortcut
buttons 1-3.
The numeric keypad PCB controls key input from the interrupt, power, and wake-up buttons, among others. It
also controls display for the main power, regular power, wake-up, start, error, data reception, and interrupt LEDs,
among others.
LED backlight, controlled by the panel control PCB, illuminates backlighting required for display by the LCD.
[ 14-19 ] Rev.1.00
3. Interlock Circuit
The interlock circuit prevents user injury from touching moving parts (gears and the like) when users reach
inside the unit to remove paper jams or in other situations.
Interlock switches are arranged on the front door and elsewhere. When users open a door, the power supply to
areas that pose a risk of injury is cut.
This circuit controls four systems for particular purposes. Refer to each section for a description: 3-1. Printer
Interlock Circuit, 3-2. Internal Paper Feed Interlock Circuit, 3-3. External Paper Feed Interlock Circuit, and 3-4.
Switchback Section Interlock Circuit.
3-1. Printer Interlock Circuit

Cuts the power driving actuators in the paper path in the printer, the belt platen, and used for head maintenance.
The right front door interlock switch (1) and the front door interlock switch (2) are arranged in this main unit
system. Switches for interlock also reset the printer after interlock. The switches detect opening of printer doors
in parallel.
3-2. Internal Paper Feed Interlock Circuit

A drive circuit is mounted on the internal paper feed drive PCB. This circuit cuts the power supplied to the
transfer motor of vertical paper feed unit B. Tray 1 set interlock switch (3), tray 2 set interlock switch (4), tray 3
set interlock switch (5) and an interlock switch on the door for clearing jams in vertical paper feed unit B (6) are
arranged in the internal paper feed interlock circuit. Switches for interlock also reset the printer after interlock.
The switches detect opening of doors and trays in parallel. Additionally, the transfer motor is also used in
operations for transferring paper from trays 1-3. If any of these trays is pulled out, paper from the external paper
feed unit can be fed, but paper cannot be fed from trays 1-3.
3-3. External Paper Feed Interlock Circuit

Cuts the power to the elevation mechanism (elevator motor) for the external paper feed tray. The external paper
feed interlock circuit includes the paper feed tray lower safety switch (7) paper feed tray upper safety switch (8),
and stripper unit interlock switch (9),which detect the user's hand when it is inserted here and cut the power to
the elevator motor.
3-4. Switchback Section Interlock Circuit

The switchback door interlock switch (10) cuts the power to the switchback motor when the switchback door in
the paper switchback section is opened.
3-1
FDឃ⚕࡙࠾࠶࠻
10 ਄㕙៝ㅍ࡙࠾࠶࠻
3-4 ⚕
2
3-3
ࡋ࠶࠼ࡎ࡞࠳࡙࠾࠶࠻
↪⚕෻ォ࡙࠾࠶࠻B
1 ਄᣹៝ㅍ
਄
䊒䊥䊮䊃䊓䉾䊄
ࠟࠗ࠼᧼ASSY(਄) ↪⚕૏⟎ᬌ಴
9 ࡙࠾࠶࠻
8
ࠟࠗ࠼᧼ASSY(ਅ)
ࡌ࡞࠻ࡊ࡜࠹ࡦ࡙࠾࠶࠻
࡙࠾࠶࠻A
❑៝ㅍ
ㅍ
3 ࠻࡟ࠗ1ࠛ࡟ࡌ࡯࠲ASSY
❑៝ㅍ 䊃䊧䉟1
࡙࠾࠶࠻B
3-2
6 4 ࠻࡟ࠗ2ࠛ࡟ࡌ࡯࠲ASSY
䊃䊧䉟2
5 ࠻࡟ࠗ3ࠛ࡟ࡌ࡯࠲ASSY
䊃䊧䉟3
Rev.1.00 [ 14-20 ]
4. Electronic parts search table
4-1. Sensors
Sensor name Connected pin Referred page
Section PCB name
(alphabetical order) no. Fig. DIAG
Authorization cam HP sensor Ink Path Engine CN72-10_12 37A 48
Bellows arm HP sensor Ink Path Engine CN69-16_18 35L 50
Bellows arm lower position sensor Ink Path Engine CN69-13_15 35M 50
Bellows arm upper position sensor Ink Path Engine CN69-25_27 35K 50
Bellows sensor Ink Path Engine CN69-19_21 35J 50
Belt HP sensor BP Unit Engine CN73-1_3 30E 48
Belt shaft FG sensor BP Unit Engine CN73-4_7 30D 48
BP hit detection sensor (RR, RL, FR, FL) BP Unit Engine CN10-1_4 31A 47
BP lower limit sensor BP Unit Engine CN72-7_9 30G 48
BP upper limit sensor BP Unit Engine CN72-4_6 30F 48
CIS paper width detection sensor (front) Registration IP-PCB CN10-1_7 30A 44
CIS paper width detection sensor (rear) Registration IP-PCB CN9-1_7 30B 44
External paper feed motor FG sensor External P/F PF-Relay CN4-7_9 26A 53
FD paper ejection fence HP sensor FD Paper Eject Engine CN66-5_7 33E 49
FD paper ejection full sensor FD Paper Eject Engine CN65-10_12 33D 49
FD paper ejection motor FG sensor FD Paper Eject Engine CN65-7_9 33B 49
FD paper ejection paper detection sensor FD Paper Eject Engine CN66-8_10 33A 49
FD paper ejection sensor FD Paper Eject Engine CN65-13_15 33C 49
Flipper sensor Upper Transfer Engine CN72-1_3 32B 48
Ink cartridge detection sensor C Ink Path Engine CN72-20_22 37C 48
Ink cartridge detection sensor K Ink Path Engine CN72-23_25 37B 48
Ink cartridge detection sensor M Ink Path Engine CN72-26_28 37D 48
Ink cartridge detection sensor Y Ink Path Engine CN72-29_31 37E 48
Ink pan operating position sensor Ink Path Engine CN71-7_9 39B 49
Ink pan storage sensor Ink Path Engine CN71-4_6 39C 49
Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor C Ink Path Engine CN70-1_4 35E 50
Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor K Ink Path Engine CN70-5_8 35F 50
Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor M Ink Path Engine CN70-9_12 35G 50
Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y Ink Path Engine CN70-13_16 35H 50
Overflow tank ink sensor Ink Path Engine CN69-9_12 35I 50

Paper elevation IN sensor Upper Transfer Engine CN72-17_19 32A 48
Paper feed pressure lever sensor External P/F PF-Relay CN6-1_3 27F 53
Paper feed tray lower limit sensor External P/F PF-Relay CN4-15_17 27D 53
Paper feed tray paper detection sensor External P/F PF-Tray CN2-4_6 27I 53
Paper feed tray paper length detection sensor External P/F PF-Tray CN2-1_3 27E 53
Paper feed tray paper volume detection sensor 1 External P/F PF-Relay CN4-1_3 27B 53
Paper feed tray paper volume detection sensor 2 External P/F PF-Relay CN4-4_6 27C 53
Paper feed tray upper limit sensor A External P/F PF-Relay CN6-4_6 27G 53
Paper feed tray upper limit sensor B External P/F PF-Relay CN6-7_9 27H 53
Paper lift detection sensor Registration PF-Relay CN4-10_12 30C 53
[ 14-21 ] Rev.1.00
Sensor name Connected pin Referred page

Section PCB name
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor C Ink Path Engine CN69-1_4 35A 50
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor K Ink Path Engine CN69-33_36 35B 50
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor M Ink Path Engine CN69-5_8 35C 50
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y Ink Path Engine CN69-29_32 35D 50
Re-feed sensor Switchback PF-Relay CN6-12_14 34C 53
Registration motor FG sensor Registration PF-Relay CN7-5_7 27A 53
Registration sensor (receive) Registration PF-Relay CN7-8_9 27L 53
Registration sensor (send) Registration PF-Relay CN7-1_2 27M 53
Switchback sensor Switchback PF-Relay CN6-15_17 34A 53
Top edge sensor 1 (receive; also for multiple paper
Registration PF-Relay CN7-10_11 27J 53
feed detection)
Top edge sensor 1 (send; also for multiple paper
Registration PF-Relay CN7-3_4 27K 53
feed detection)
Top edge sensor 2 Registration PF-Relay CN7-12_15 31B 53
Tray 1 paper detection sensor Internal P/F I-PF CN5-1_3 28A 52
Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 1 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-1_3 28J 51
Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 2 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-4_6 28K 51
Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 3 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-7_9 28L 51
Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 4 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-10_12 28M 51
Tray 1 paper volume detection sensor Internal P/F I-PF CN9-1_3 28G 51
Tray 1 upper limit sensor Internal P/F I-PF CN5-4_6 28D 52
Tray 2 paper detection sensor Internal P/F I-PF CN5-7_9 28B 52
Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 1 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-13_15 28N 51
Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 2 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-16_18 28O 51
Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 3 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-19_21 28P 51
Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 4 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-22_24 28Q 51
Tray 2 paper volume detection sensor Internal P/F I-PF CN9-4_6 28H 51
Tray 2 upper limit sensor Internal P/F I-PF CN5-10_12 28E 52
Tray 3 paper detection sensor Internal P/F I-PF CN5-13_15 28C 52
Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 1 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-25_27 28R 51
Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 2 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-28_30 28S 51
Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 3 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-31_33 28T 51
Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 4 Internal P/F I-PF CN10-34_36 28U 51
Tray 3 paper volume detection sensor Internal P/F I-PF CN9-7_9 28I 51
Tray 3 upper limit sensor Internal P/F I-PF CN5-16_18 28F 52
Upper transfer OUT sensor Switchback PF-Relay CN6-18_20 34B 53
Vertical paper feed sensor 1 Registration I-PF CN4-1_3 29A 52
Vertical paper feed sensor 2 Registration I-PF CN4-4_6 29B 52
Vertical paper feed sensor 3 Registration I-PF CN4-7_9 29C 52
Vertical paper feed sensor 4 Registration I-PF CN4-10_12 29D 52
Vertical paper feed sensor 5 Registration I-PF CN4-13_15 29E 52
Waste ink tank sensor 1 (nearly full) Ink Path Engine CN71-22_24 40A 49
Waste ink tank sensor 2 (full) Ink Path Engine CN71-1_3 40B 49
Wiper motor HP sensor Ink Path Engine CN71-13_15 39A 49
Rev.1.00 [ 14-22 ]
4-2. Switches
Switch name Connected pin Referred page
Section PCB name
BP wire loose detection switch BP Unit PF-Relay CN4-13_14 31C 53
Internal feed paper jam door interlock switch Registration I-PF CN12-1_4 29F 52
Left front door interlock switch Main Unit Engine CN56-1_4 25B 47
Paper feed tray elevation switch External P/F PF-Relay CN6-10_11 27N 53
Paper feed tray lower safety switch External P/F Engine CN55-7_10 27P 47
Paper feed tray paper width potentiometer External P/F PF-Tray CN2-7_9 27Q 53
Paper feed tray upper safety switch External P/F Engine CN55-7_10 27O 47
Right front door interlock switch Main Unit Engine CN56-5_8 25A 47
Stripper Unit Interlock Switch Main Unit Engine CN55-7_10 27R 47
Switchback door interlock switch Switchback Engine CN55-1_4 34D 47
Tray 1 interlock switch Internal P/F I-PF CN11-1_4 28V 50
Tray 2 interlock switch Internal P/F I-PF CN11-7_10 28W 50
Tray 3 interlock switch Internal P/F I-PF CN11-13_16 28X 50
4-3. Motors
Motor name Connected pin Referred page

Section PCB name
Authorization cam motor Ink Path Engine CN53-8_9 37F 47
Bellows arm drive motor Ink Path Engine CN74-1_9 35Y 50
BP elevation motor BP Unit Engine CN52-10_18 31D 47
Circulation pump C motor (via pump drive PCB) Ink Path Engine CN60-1_4 35U 50
Circulation pump K motor (via pump drive PCB) Ink Path Engine CN60-5_8 35V 50
Circulation pump M motor (via pump drive PCB) Ink Path Engine CN60-9_12 35W 50
Circulation pump Y motor (via pump drive PCB) Ink Path Engine CN60-13_16 35X 50
Elevator motor External P/F Engine CN54-1_2 27T 47

External paper feed motor External P/F Engine CN64-5_6 26B 47
FD paper ejection fence motor FD Paper Eject Engine CN66-1_4 33G 49
FD paper ejection motor FD Paper Eject Engine CN65-1_2 33F 49
Internal paper feed motor Internal P/F I-PF CN9-10_16 26C 51
Maintenance unit slide motor Ink Path Engine CN61-15_16 39F 49
Paper elevation motor Upper Transfer Engine CN52-1_7 26D 47
Re-feed motor Switchback Engine CN64-9_14 26G 47
Registration motor Registration Engine CN64-7_8 27S 47
Switchback motor Switchback Engine CN64-15_20 26F 47
Transfer belt motor BP Unit Engine CN73-11_17 30H 48
Tray 1 elevator motor Internal P/F I-PF CN8-1_2 28Y 50
Tray 2 elevator motor Internal P/F I-PF CN8-3_4 28Z 50
Tray 3 elevator motor Internal P/F I-PF CN8-5_6 28AA 50
Upper transfer motor Upper Transfer Engine CN53-1_7 26E 47
Wiper motor 1 Ink Path Engine CN61-11_14 39D 49
Wiper motor 2 Ink Path Engine CN61-5_8 39E 49
[ 14-23 ] Rev.1.00
4-4. Actuators
Actuator name Connected pin Referred page
Section PCB name
Counter Main Unit Engine CN54-5_6 25C 47
FD paper ejection flipper solenoid FD Paper Eject Engine CN65-5_6 33H 49
Head drive IC cooling fan 1 Ink Path Engine CN61-1_2 38A 49
Head drive IC cooling fan 2 Ink Path Engine CN61-3_4 38B 49
Heater (+30V) Ink Path Engine CN09-1_2 N/A 47
Ink cooling fan Ink Path Engine CN59-19_20 35T 50
Ink supply valve C Ink Path Engine CN59-1_2 35Q 50
Ink supply valve K Ink Path Engine CN59-3_4 35P 50
Ink supply valve M Ink Path Engine CN59-5_6 35O 50
Ink supply valve Y Ink Path Engine CN59-7_8 35N 50
Internal paper feed clutch 1 Internal P/F I-PF CN6-1_2 26J 52
Internal paper feed clutch 2 Internal P/F I-PF CN6-3_4 26K 52
Internal paper feed clutch 3 Internal P/F I-PF CN6-5_6 26L 52
Negatively pressurized ink tank air valve Ink Path Engine CN59-11_12 35S 50
Pressurized ink tank air valve Ink Path Engine CN59-9_10 35R 50
Transfer belt fan 1 BP Unit Engine CN75-1_3 30I 48
Transfer belt fan 2 BP Unit Engine CN75-4_6 30J 48
Transfer belt fan 3 BP Unit Engine CN75-7_9 30K 48
Transfer belt fan 4 BP Unit Engine CN75-10_12 30L 48
Transfer belt fan 5 BP Unit Engine CN75-13_15 30M 48
Transfer belt fan 6 BP Unit Engine CN75-16_18 30N 48
Vertical paper feed clutch 1 Registration I-PF CN6-7_8 26H 52
Vertical paper feed clutch 2 Registration I-PF CN6-9_10 26I 52
4-5. Sub PCBs
Actuator name Connected pin Referred page

Section PCB name
Ink RFID PCB C Ink Path Engine CN62-1_6 37H 48
Ink RFID PCB K Ink Path Engine CN62-7_12 37G 48
Ink RFID PCB M Ink Path Engine CN62-13_18 37I 48
Ink RFID PCB Y Ink Path Engine CN62-19_24 37J 48
Machine code RFID PCB Main Unit Engine CN63-1_6 25D 47
PF-TRAY-PCB External P/F PF-Relay CN5-1_5 27U 53
Rev.1.00 [ 14-24 ]
5. Electronic parts structural figure
5-1. Unit Front View
C B
A
D
PCB Connected Relevant DIAG

Name Type
name pin no. Test mode page
A Right front door interlock switch Engine CN56-5_8 Micro switch 1181 47
B Left front door interlock switch Engine CN56-1_4 Micro switch 1180 47
C Counter Engine CN54-5_6 Electromagnetic counter 1690 47
D Machine code RFID PCB Engine CN63-1_6 PCB 8004 47
[ 14-25 ] Rev.1.00
5-2. Unit Rear View
D E
H
I
C J K L

Name Type
External paper feed motor FG
A PF-Relay CN4-7_9 Interrup type 1023 53
sensor
B External paper feed motor Engine CN64-5_6 DC (Direct Current) motor 1225, 1228 47
C Internal paper feed motor I-PF CN9-10_16 Brushless DC motor 1227 51
D Paper elevation motor Engine CN52-1_7 Brushless DC motor 1257 47

E Upper transfer motor Engine CN53-1_7 Brushless DC motor 1258 47
F Switchback motor Engine CN64-15_20 Stepping motor 1261, 1262 47
G Re-feed motor Engine CN64-9_14 Stepping motor 1263 47

Micro electromagnetic
H Vertical paper feed clutch 1 I-PF CN6-7_8 1232 52
clutch
I Vertical paper feed clutch 2 I-PF CN6-9_10 1233 52
clutch
J Internal paper feed clutch 1 I-PF CN6-1_2 1229 52
clutch
K Internal paper feed clutch 2 I-PF CN6-3_4 1230 52
clutch
L Internal paper feed clutch 3 I-PF CN6-5_6 1231 52
clutch
Rev.1.00 [ 14-26 ]
5-3. External Paper Feed & Registration
A S
F N
O
H J
B
C
U K
Q
E
T
P
D G
I
R
M
Name Type
A Registration motor FG sensor PF-Relay CN7-5_7 Interrup type 1024 53
P-F tray paper volume detection
B PF-Relay CN4-1_3 Interrup type 1036 53
sensor 1
P-F tray paper volume detection
C PF-Relay CN4-4_6 Interrup type 1037 53
sensor 2
D P-F tray lower limit sensor PF-Relay CN4-15_17 Interrup type 1002 53
E P-F tray paper length detection sensor PF-Tray CN2-1_3 Reflection type 1010 53
F Paper feed pressure lever sensor PF-Relay CN6-1_3 Interrup type 53
G P-F tray upper limit sensor A PF-Relay CN6-4_6 Interrup type 1000 53
H P-F tray upper limit sensor B PF-Relay CN6-7_9 Interrup type 1001 53
I P-F tray paper detection sensor PF-Tray CN2-4_6 Reflection type 1006 53
J Top edge sensor 1 (receive) PF-Relay CN7-10_11 Transmission type 1102 53
K Top edge sensor 1 (send) PF-Relay CN7-3_4 Transmission type 1102 53
L Registration sensor (receive) PF-Relay CN7-8_9 Transmission type 1025 53
M Registration sensor (send) PF-Relay CN7-1_2 Transmission type 1025 53
N P-F tray elevation switch PF-Relay CN6-10_11 Push switch 1035 53
O P-F tray upper safety switch Engine CN55-7_10 Micro switch N/A 47
P P-F tray lower safety switch Engine CN55-7_10 Micro switch N/A 47
Q P-F tray paper width potentiometer PF-Tray CN2-7_9 Potentiometer 1620 53
R Stripper Unit Interlock Switch Engine CN55-7_10 Micro switch N/A 47

S Registration motor Engine CN64-7_8 DC motor 1226 47
T Elevator motor Engine CN54-1_2 DC motor 1423, 1424 47
U PF-TRAY-PCB PF-Relay CN5-1_5 PCB N/A 53
[ 14-27 ] Rev.1.00
5-4. Internal Paper Feed (with trays)
A I H G
D
B
E
C
F
M
L
JK
Q
OP
N
U
T
RS
X AA W Z V Y

Name Type
A Tray 1 paper detection sensor I-PF CN5-1_3 Interrup type 1007 52
B Tray 2 paper detection sensor I-PF CN5-7_9 Interrup type 1008 52
C Tray 3 paper detection sensor I-PF CN5-13_15 Interrup type 1009 52
D Tray 1 upper limit sensor I-PF CN5-4_6 Interrup type 1003 52
E Tray 2 upper limit sensor I-PF CN5-10_12 Interrup type 1004 52
F Tray 3 upper limit sensor I-PF CN5-16_18 Interrup type 1005 52
G Tray 1 paper volume detection sensor I-PF CN9-1_3 Interrup type 1038 51
H Tray 2 paper volume detection sensor I-PF CN9-4_6 Interrup type 1039 51
I Tray 3 paper volume detection sensor I-PF CN9-7_9 Interrup type 1040 51
J Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 1 I-PF CN10-1_3 Interrup type 1011 51
K Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 2 I-PF CN10-4_6 Interrup type 1012 51
L Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 3 I-PF CN10-7_9 Interrup type 1013 51
M Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 4 I-PF CN10-10_12 Interrup type 1014 51
N Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 1 I-PF CN10-13_15 Interrup type 1015 51
O Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 2 I-PF CN10-16_18 Interrup type 1016 51
p Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 3 I-PF CN10-19_21 Interrup type 1017 51
Q Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 4 I-PF CN10-22_24 Interrup type 1018 51
R Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 1 I-PF CN10-25_27 Interrup type 1019 51
S Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 2 I-PF CN10-28_30 Interrup type 1020 51
T Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 3 I-PF CN10-31_33 Interrup type 1021 51
U Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 4 I-PF CN10-34_36 Interrup type 1022 51
V Tray 1 interlock switch I-PF CN11-1_4 Micro switch 1185 51
W Tray 2 interlock switch I-PF CN11-7_10 Micro switch 1186 51
X Tray 3 interlock switch I-PF CN11-13_16 Micro switch 1187 51
Y Tray 1 elevator motor I-PF CN8-1_2 DC motor 1425 51
Z Tray 2 elevator motor I-PF CN8-3_4 DC motor 1426 51
AA Tray 3 elevator motor I-PF CN8-5_6 DC motor 1427 51
Rev.1.00 [ 14-28 ]
5-5. Vertical papaer feed (A & B)

Name Type
A Vertical paper feed sensor 1 I-PF CN4-1_3 Reflection type 1027 52
B Vertical paper feed sensor 2 I-PF CN4-4_6 Reflection type 1028 52
C Vertical paper feed sensor 3 I-PF CN4-7_9 Reflection type 1029 52
D Vertical paper feed sensor 4 I-PF CN4-10_12 Reflection type 1030 52
E Vertical paper feed sensor 5 I-PF CN4-13_15 Reflection type 1031 52
Internal feed paper jam door interlock
F I-PF CN12-1_4 Micro switch 1191 52
switch
[ 14-29 ] Rev.1.00
5-6. BP unit
B
K D
I M
A F
C
E G
N
L
J
H

Name Type
CIS paper width detection 2461, 2462,
A IP-PCB CN10-1_7 Contact image sensor 44
sensor (front) 2464
CIS paper width detection 2461, 2463,
B IP-PCB CN9-1_7 Contact image sensor 44
sensor (rear) 2464
C Paper lift detection sensor PF-Relay CN4-10_12 Interrup type 1104 53
D Belt shaft FG sensor Engine CN73-4_7 Interrup type 1100 48

E Belt HP sensor Engine CN73-1_3 Interrup type 1110 48
F BP upper limit sensor Engine CN72-4_6 Interrup type 2124 48
G BP lower limit sensor Engine CN72-7_9 Interrup type 2123 48
H Transfer belt motor Engine CN73-11_17 Brushless DC motor 1256 48
I Transfer belt fan 1 Engine CN75-1_3 Super Silent Blower 1250, 1253 48
J Transfer belt fan 2 Engine CN75-4_6 Super Silent Blower 1250, 1253 48
K Transfer belt fan 3 Engine CN75-7_9 Super Silent Blower 1251, 1253 48
L Transfer belt fan 4 Engine CN75-10_12 Super Silent Blower 1251, 1253 48
M Transfer belt fan 5 Engine CN75-13_15 Super Silent Blower 1252, 1253 48
N Transfer belt fan 6 Engine CN75-16_18 Super Silent Blower 1252, 1253 48
Rev.1.00 [ 14-30 ]
5-7. BP elevation

Name Type
BP hit detection sensor (RR, RL, 2170, 2171,
A Engine CN10-1_4 Metal contact plate 47
FR, FL) 2172, 2173
B Top edge sensor 2 PF-Relay CN7-12_15 Reflection type 1495 53
C BP wire loose detection switch PF-Relay CN4-13_14 Micro switch 1182 53

2405, 2406,
D BP elevation motor Engine CN52-10_18 Brushless DC motor 47
2407
[ 14-31 ] Rev.1.00
5-8. Paper transfer

Name Type
A Paper elevation IN sensor Engine CN72-17_19 Reflection type 1105 48
B Flipper sensor Engine CN72-1_3 Reflection type 1106 48
Rev.1.00 [ 14-32 ]
5-9. FD paper ejection
A G
H
C F E

Name Type
FD paper ejection paper
A Engine CN66-8_10 Reflection type 1152 49
detection sensor
FD paper ejection motor FG
B Engine CN65-7_9 Interrup type 1150 49
sensor
C FD paper ejection sensor Engine CN65-13_15 Reflection type 1154 49
D FD paper ejection full sensor Engine CN65-10_12 Reflection type 1151 49

FD paper ejection fence HP
E Engine CN66-5_7 Interrup type 1153 49
sensor
F FD paper ejection motor Engine CN65-1_2 DC motor 1300 49
1460, 1461,
G FD paper ejection fence motor Engine CN66-1_4 DC servo motor 49
1464
FD paper ejection flipper
H Engine CN65-5_6 Solenoid 1260 49
solenoid
[ 14-33 ] Rev.1.00
5-10. Switchback
D
A

Name Type
A Switchback sensor PF-Relay CN6-15_17 Reflection type 1108 53
B Upper transfer OUT sensor PF-Relay CN6-18_20 Reflection type 1107 53
C Re-feed sensor PF-Relay CN6-12_14 Reflection type 1109 53
D Switchback door interlock switchEngine CN55-1_4 Micro switch 1190 47
Rev.1.00 [ 14-34 ]
5-11. Ink supply
P
O
Q
N
C
D
B
A
R
H
V G
U F
E
S X
Z
I AA
AB
AC
Y W
J
K
L
M
See next page for parts details
[ 14-35 ] Rev.1.00

Name Type
A Pressurized ink tank ink sensor C Engine CN69-1_4 Reed switch 2108, 2161 50
B Pressurized ink tank ink sensor K Engine CN69-33_36 Reed switch 2107, 2160 50
C Pressurized ink tank ink sensor M Engine CN69-5_8 Reed switch 2109, 2162 50
D Pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y Engine CN69-29_32 Reed switch 2110, 2163 50
Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor
E Engine CN70-1_4 Reed switch 2112, 2153 50
C
F Engine CN70-5_8 Reed switch 2111, 2152 50
K
G Engine CN70-9_12 Reed switch 2113, 2154 50
M
H Engine CN70-13_16 Reed switch 2114, 2155 50
Y
I Overflow tank ink sensor Engine CN69-9_12 Reed switch 2115, 2151 50
J Bellows sensor Engine CN69-19_21 Reflection type 2101 50
K Bellows arm upper position sensor Engine CN69-25_27 Interrup type 2104 50
L Bellows arm HP sensor Engine CN69-16_18 Interrup type 2103 50

M Bellows arm lower position sensor Engine CN69-13_15 Interrup type 2106 50
Two way
N Ink supply valve Y Engine CN59-7_8 2141 50
solenoid valve
Two way
O Ink supply valve M Engine CN59-5_6 2140 50
solenoid valve
Two way
p Ink supply valve K Engine CN59-3_4 2138 50
solenoid valve
Two way
Q Ink supply valve C Engine CN59-1_2 2139 50
solenoid valve
Three way
R Pressurized ink tank air valve Engine CN59-9_10 2142 50
solenoid valve
Three way
S Negatively pressurized ink tank air valve Engine CN59-11_12 2143 50
solenoid valve
T Ink cooling fan Engine CN59-19_20 DC axial fan 2305 50
Brushless DC
U Circulation pump C motor Engine CN60-1_4 2175 50
motor
Brushless DC
V Circulation pump K motor Engine CN60-5_8 2174 50
motor
Brushless DC
W Circulation pump M motor Engine CN60-9_12 2176 50
motor
Brushless DC
X Circulation pump Y motor Engine CN60-13_16 2177 50
motor
Brushless DC 2400, 2401,
Y Bellows arm drive motor Engine CN74-1_9 50
motor 2404
Z C pump drive PCB Engine CN60-1_4 PCB 50
AA K pump drive PCB Engine CN60-5_8 PCB 50
AB M pump drive PCB Engine CN60-9_12 PCB 50
AC Y pump drive PCB Engine CN60-13_16 PCB 50
Rev.1.00 [ 14-36 ]
5-12. Ink cartridge holder
E B G A
H F
J I C
D

Name Type
A Authorization cam HP sensor Engine CN72-10_12 Interrup type 2169 48
B Ink cartridge detection sensor K Engine CN72-23_25 Interrup type 2165 48
C Ink cartridge detection sensor C Engine CN72-20_22 Interrup type 2166 48
D Ink cartridge detection sensor M Engine CN72-26_28 Interrup type 2167 48
E Ink cartridge detection sensor Y Engine CN72-29_31 Interrup type 2168 48
F Authorization cam motor Engine CN53-8_9 DC motor 2451 47

G Ink RFID PCB K Engine CN62-7_12 PCB 8001 48
H Ink RFID PCB C Engine CN62-1_6 PCB 8000 48
I Ink RFID PCB M Engine CN62-13_18 PCB 8002 48
J Ink RFID PCB Y Engine CN62-19_24 PCB 8003 48
[ 14-37 ] Rev.1.00
5-13. Print Heads
C B

Name Type
A Head drive IC cooling fan 1 Engine CN61-1_2 Silent brower 2327 49
B Head drive IC cooling fan 2 Engine CN61-3_4 Silent brower 2328 49
C Print Heads (Total 24) N/A
Rev.1.00 [ 14-38 ]
5-14. Print Heads
A
E
D
F
C

Name Type
A Wiper motor HP sensor Engine CN71-13_15 Interrup type 2126 49
Ink pan operating position
B Engine CN71-7_9 Interrup type 2119 49
sensor
C Ink pan storage sensor Engine CN71-4_6 Interrup type 2118 49
D Wiper motor 1 Engine CN61-11_14 DC servo motor 2411, 2412 49
E Wiper motor 2 Engine CN61-5_8 DC servo motor 2411, 2412 49
2437, 2438,
F Maintenance unit slide motor Engine CN61-15_16 DC motor 49
2439
[ 14-39 ] Rev.1.00
5-15. Waste ink tank

Name Type
Waste ink tank sensor 1 (nearly
A Engine CN71-22_24 Interrup type 2116, 2117 49
full)
B Waste ink tank sensor 2 (full) Engine CN71-1_3 Interrup type 2116, 2117 49
Rev.1.00 [ 14-40 ]
Ink RFID PCB C CN10 BP hit detection sensor (RR, RL, FR, FL)
Ink RFID PCB K CN51 Transfer belt motor power supply (+30V-IL)
CN62 Engine control PCB
Ink RFID PCB M BP elevation motor : PCBs
Ink RFID PCB Y X3-ENGINE-PCB CN52
: Switches and dials
Machine code RFID PCB CN63
Head drive IC cooling fan 1 Upper transfer motor : Sensors and encoders
CN53 Authorization cam motor
Head drive IC cooling fan 2
Maintenance unit slide motor CN61
Wiper motor 1 Elevator motor
CN54 : Motors, fans, solenoids, clutches,
Wiper motor 2 Counter
counters, and pumps
Wiper motor HP sensor Left front door interlock switch
CN56
Ink pan storage sensor Right front door interlock switch
Ink pan operating position sensor CN71 External paper feed motor
Waste ink tank sensor 2 (full) Note: This overall block diagram 1 represents
Registration motor
Waste ink tank sensor 1 (nearly full) a schematic diagram of the relationship of
Re-feed motor
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor C CN64 parts and PCB connectors.
Switchback motor
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor K Paper elevation/BP elevation motor
power supply (+30V-IL)
For wiring details, refer to block diagrams
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor M FD paper ejection motor for each part.
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y FD paper ejection flipper solenoid
Overflow tank ink sensor CN69 CN65 FD paper ejection motor FG sensor
Bellows sensor FD paper ejection full sensor
6-1. Overall Block diagram 1
Bellows arm HP sensor FD paper ejection sensor

Paper feed pressure lever sensor
Bellows arm upper position sensor
FD paper ejection fence motor Paper feed tray upper limit sensor A
Bellows arm lower position sensor
CN66 FD paper ejection fence HP sensor Paper feed tray upper limit sensor B
Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor C
FD paper ejection paper detection sensor Paper feed tray elevation switch
Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor K
Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor M
CN70 Belt HP sensor Re-feed sensor
Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y CN73 Belt shaft FG sensor Switchback sensor
Transfer belt motor Upper transfer OUT sensor
Ink supply valve C
CN9 To Heater (+30V)
Ink supply valve K
Switchback door interlock switch Paper feed tray paper length detection sensor
Ink supply valve M
Paper feed tray paper detection sensor
Ink supply valve Y CN59 CN55 Paper feed tray lower safety switch
6. Block diagrams & Wiring diagrams
Paper feed tray paper width potentiometer

Pressurized ink tank air valve Stripper Unit interlock switch
Negatively pressurized ink tank air valve Paper feed tray upper safety switch Paper feed tray paper volume detection sensor 1
Ink cooling fan Paper feed tray paper volume detection sensor 2
Bellows arm drive motor Paper feed relay PCB Paper feed tray lower limit sensor
CN74
[ 14-41 ]
Circulation pump C motor (via pump drive PCB) CN3 CN1 CN6 External paper feed motor FG sensor
Control signals
Circulation pump K motor (via pump drive PCB) PF-RELAY-PCB Paper feed tray PCB Paper lift detection sensor
CN60 for various
Circulation pump M motor (via pump drive PCB) CN5 CN1 PF-TRAY-PCB CN2
sensors, BP wire loose detection switch
Circulation pump Y motor (via pump drive PCB) +5V signal
BP upper limit sensor CN4 Registration motor FG sensor
BP lower limit sensor Registration sensor (send)
CN68 CN2 CN7
Flipper sensor Control signals Top edge sensor 2 Top edge sensor 1 (send; also for multiple paper feed detection)
Paper elevation IN sensor for various CN3 Registration sensor (receive)
Unused
CN72 sensors Top edge sensor 1 (receive; also for multiple paper feed detection)
Authorization cam HP sensor
Ink cartridge detection sensor C Vertical paper feed sensor 1
Ink cartridge detection sensor K
Internal paper feed Vertical paper feed sensor 2
Ink cartridge detection sensor M drive PCB CN4 Vertical paper feed sensor 3
Tray 1 paper detection sensor
Ink cartridge detection sensor Y Vertical paper feed sensor 4
X3-I-PF-PCB Tray 1 upper limit sensor
Transfer belt fan 1 Tray 2 paper detection sensor
CN57 CN1 CN5 Tray 2 upper limit sensor
Transfer belt fan 2 Control signals Internal paper feed clutch 1
Transfer belt fan 3 for various Tray 3 paper detection sensor
Transfer belt fan 4 CN75 motors and Tray 3 upper limit sensor
CN6 Internal paper feed clutch 3
Transfer belt fan 5 clutches
Transfer belt fan 6 Vertical paper feed clutch 2 Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 1
Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 2
CN10
Power supply unit CN10 To ink heater (+24V) Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 3
Tray 1 paper size detection sensor 4
CN5 CN8 Tray 2 elevator motor
+24V(A,B,C,D,B-IL) CN10 CN37 CN2
CN10 CN14 Control signals Tray 3 elevator motor
for various Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 1
Power supply control CN1 CN6 sensors Tray 1 paper volume detection sensor Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 2
+5VSP CN3 CN49 Tray 2 paper volume detection sensor Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 3
PS25-NWW CN9
+5V CN6 Tray 3 paper volume detection sensor Tray 2 paper size detection sensor 4
CN7/CN43/CN45 Internal paper feed motor
+30V CN12 CN18 See Overall Block Diagram 2
CN2/CN5/CN13/ CN7 Internal paper feed motor power supply (+30V) Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 1
+30V CN12
CN14/CN16 CN3 Tray 1 interlock switch Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 2
+5VSP CN4
See +5V CN6 CN11 Tray 2 interlock switch Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 3
Internal feed paper jam door interlock switch CN12
Overall Block Diagram 2 +24V-E CN11 Tray 3 interlock switch Tray 3 paper size detection sensor 4
Rev.1.00
Power supply unit
PS25-NWW
CN1 : PCBs
Rev.1.00
CN5
+12V : Switches and dials
Controller PCB Decouple PCB
CONTROLLER-PCB DECOUPLE-PCB : Sensors and encoders
Scanner unit
See Scanner unit wiring diagram
J2 CN2
USB : Motors, fans, solenoids, clutches,
IC Card J1,J4,J17 CN4 counters, and pumps
Authentication Kit
J3 CN8 CN3
External Controller CN9 (Ethernet) CN7
Note: This overall block diagram represents
a schematic diagram of the relationship of
Head control PCB 1 CIS paper width detection sensor (front) parts and PCB connectors.
J1 CN1 CN10
(C,K) CN9 CIS paper width detection sensor (rear) For wiring details, refer to block diagrams
J16
OR2 HDR_PCB (CK) J2 CN2 Note: If an optional PCB is not installed, CN43 of engine control for each part.
6-2. Overall Block diagram 2
PCB is connected to CN4 of recording data-generating PCB.

J3 J4-J9 J10-J15
However, if an optional PCB is installed, CN43 of engine control
Thermistor C Heads K Heads Recording data PCB is connected to CN12 of the optional PCB and CN13 of the
CN13 optional PCB is connected to CN4 of the recording data-generating PCB.
Operation panel unit
generating PCB Panel control PCB
+41V (A, B, C, D)
Engine control PCB PNL-1126A-PCB
Head control PCB 2 X3-IP-PCB
(M,Y) J1 CN6 X3-ENGINE-PCB CN5
J16
OR2 HDR_PCB(MY) CN6
J2 CN7
J3 J4-J9 J10-J15 CN7 CN3
Thermistor M Heads Y Heads CN43 CN45
CN4
CN6 CN3
CN7
[ 14-42 ]
+5V CN13 CN12
TFT LCD
CN11
Option PCB
See Finisher I/F unit wiring diagram
X3-OPTION-PCB
CN2
Finisher I/F unit
CN3 CN4 LED Back Light
FU paper ejection wing motor
FU paper
FU paper ejection flipper
ejection unit FU paper ejection jump motor
FU paper ejection motor FG sensor
CN4 CN19
FU paper ejection wing HP sensor For Options Mode button PCB
See Otion PCB wiring FU paper ejection sensor CN21 CN2 CN1 MODEKEY-PCB
diagram
CN14
FU paper ejection motor
CN16
CN5
Numeric keypad PCB
Card/Coin Vendor unit CN9
CN007 CN1 TENKEY-PCB
CN008 Warning light CN6
CN23 Offset Stapler unit
Cooling Fan
Auto control stacking tray unit CN7
+24VOP CN11 CN8 Touch panel

Intermediate connector CN1
+30VOP CN12 TOUCH PANEL
Power supply for panel CN2 Intermediate connector CN1

5VSB, SP, power supply control
Relay connector
+24VOP1 1 1 GND (+24VE) Power Supply Unit Head control PCB1(CK)
See OPTION PCB +24VOP2 2 2 GND (+24VOP1) OR2 HDR_PCB(CK)
wiring diagram +30VOP1 3 3 +24VE CN11 GND(+41VA) 1 1 +41VA
(To OPTION PCB CN1) GND (+24VOP1) 4 4 +24VOP1 PS25-NWW GND(+41VB) 2 2 GND(+41VA)
GND (+30VOP1) 5 5 +24VOP2 GND(+41VC) 3 3 +41VB J16
GND(+41VD) 4 4 GND(+41VB)
CN13 +41VA 5
+41VB 6
+41VC 7
+41VD 8
1 GND (+5VSP)
Internal paper feed 2 +5VSP
CN4
Head control PCB2(MY)
Drive PCB OR2 HDR_PCB(MY)
+30VB 1 1 +41VC
GND (+30VB) 2 2 GND(+41VC)
+24VE 3 3 +41VD J16
1 NC
CN3 GND (+24VE) 4 GND (+5VSP) 4 GND(+41VD)
2
+5VSP 5 3 NC CN3
GND (+5VSP) 6 4 +5VSP
+5V 7
GND (+5V) 8
I-PF-DRIVE-PCB NC 1
DECOUPLE-PCB
1 GND (+5V) +12V 2 1 +12V
2 GND (+5V) +12V 3 2 +12V
3 GND (+5V) GND 4 3 GND
Recording data 4 +5V CN6 CN5 CN1
GND 5 4 GND
5 +5V GND 6 5 GND
Generating PCB 6 +5V NC 7
CN3 GND (+5V) 1

+5V 2
1 +30VOP1
X3-IP-PCB 2 +30VB
Relay connector
6-3. Power Supply Unit wiring diagram
3 GND (+30VOP1)
4 GND (+30VB) Option AC control signal 1 6 1
5 +30VA PMS-12V control signal 2 5 2
6 GND CN12 Standby signal (5VSP control) 3 4 3
7 GND GND (+5VSB) 4 3 4 See Controller PCB to Panel PCB
Engine control PCB 8 GND CN2 GND (+5VSP) 5 2 5 wiring diagram
X3-ENGINE-PCB 9 NC +5VSB 6 1 6 (To Panel Control PCB CN2)
+5VSP 1 10 +30VA
GND(+5VSP) 2
CN49 +5V 3
[ 14-43 ]
GND(+5V) 4
+30VA 1 Relay connector

+30VA 2 1 1 1
CN18 GND 3 CNAC1 2 2 2
GND 4 3 3 3
GND 5
1
41V_Overheat_Detection 1 7 41V_Overheat_Detection 2
24V-30V_ON 2 6 24V-30V_ON 3
CN6 24VD_ON 3 5
AC Power Socket
24VD_ON CN1 4
41V_ON 4 4 41V_ON
Power_Cooling_Fan_ON 5 3 Power_Cooling_Fan_ON 1 L
NC 6 2 NC 2 N
1
2
3
CNAC2 E
GND 7 1 GND 3
AC Power Switch
1
2
3
Relay connector
Ink_Heater_Connection_Detection 1
NC 2
CN5
+24VA 1
+24VB 2 Grounded to main unit frame
+24VC 3 1 +24V(B)-IL E
CN14 4 2 N
GND(+24VA) GND(+24VA)
L
GND(+24VB) 5 3 GND(+24VB)
GND(+24VC) 6 4 GND(+24VC)
+24V(B)-IL 7 5 NC Grounded to main unit frame
6 NC
CN10 CN007
AC Power Inlet
7 Ink_Heater_Connection_Detection
8 +24VA
9 +24VB
10 +24VC
+24VD 1 11 +24VD
+24VD 3 12 +24VD
CN008
2 13 GND(+24VD)
+24V Ink Heater GND(+24VD)
GND(+24VD) 4 14 GND(+24VD)
(Interwired)
Rev.1.00
C6 M6
C5 Head Control M5
C4 Recording data Wire_Harness Head Control M4
C3 J4-9 Wire_Harness CN1 CN6 J1 M3
C2 PCB1(CK) J1 Generating PCB PCB2(MY) J4-9 M2
C1 C<1-6>_H(1)TH M1
1 HD-DET-2 40 1 HD-DET-2 HD-DET-2 1 40 HD-DET-2 M<1-6>_H(1)TH 1
2 A_GND NC 39 X3-IP-PCB NC 2 39 NC A_GND 2
2 NC
3 N.C GND 38 GND 3 38 GND N.C 3
3 GND
Rev.1.00
4 D_GND GND 37 GND 4 37 GND D_GND 4
4 GND
5 D_GND HD-MOSI-N 36 HD-MOSI-N 5 36 HD-MOSI-N D_GND 5
5 HD-MOSI-N
6 C<1-6>_H(1)VAA HD-MOSI-P 35 HD-MOSI-P 6 35 HD-MOSI-P M<1-6>_H(1)VAA 6
6 HD-MOSI-P
7 C<1-6>_H(1)VAA HD-LOAD-N 34 HD-LOAD-N 7 34 HD-LOAD-N M<1-6>_H(1)VAA 7
7 HD-LOAD-N
8 C<1-6>_H(1)VAA HD-LOAD-P 33 HD-LOAD-P 8 33 HD-LOAD-P M<1-6>_H(1)VAA 8
8 HD-LOAD-P
9 C<1-6>_H(1)VCC GND 32 GND 9 32 GND M<1-6>_H(1)VCC 9
9 GND
10 C<1-6>_H(1)VCC HD-SCK-N 31 HD-SCK-N 10 31 HD-SCK-N M<1-6>_H(1)VCC 10
10 HD-SCK-N
11 D_GND HD-SCK-P 30 HD-SCK-P 11 30 HD-SCK-P D_GND 11
11 HD-SCK-P
12 HDDVDD GND 29 GND 12 29 GND HDDVDD 12
12 GND
13 D_GND HD-DEN-N 28 HD-DEN-N 13 28 HD-DEN-N D_GND 13
13 HD-DEN-N
14 C<1-6>_H_H(1)SDO HD-DEN-P 27 HD-DEN-P 14 27 HD-DEN-P M<1-6>_H_H(1)SDO 14
14 HD-DEN-P
15 GND
16 C<1-6>_H_H(1)SCK HD-INTX-N 25 HD-INTX-N 16 25 HD-INTX-N M<1-6>_H_H(1)SCK 16
16 HD-INTX-N
17 D_GND HD-INTX-P 24 HD-INTX-P 17 24 HD-INTX-P D_GND 17
17 HD-INTX-P
18 C<1-6>_H_H(1)INITX HD-REQ-N 23 HD-REQ-N 18 23 HD-REQ-N M<1-6>_H_H(1)INITX 18
18 HD-REQ-N
19 C<1-6>_H_H(1)RSTX HD-REQ-P 19 HD-REQ-P M<1-6>_H_H(1)RSTX 19
22 19 HD-REQ-P HD-REQ-P 22
20 C<1-6>_H_H(1)CFDNO HD-ACT-N 21 HD-ACT-N 20 21 HD-ACT-N M<1-6>_H_H(1)CFDNO 20
20 HD-ACT-N
21 C<1-6>_H(2)TH HD-ACT-P 20 HD-ACT-P 21 20 HD-ACT-P M<1-6>_H(2)TH 21
21 HD-ACT-P
22 A_GND HD-MISO-N 19 HD-MISO-N 22 19 HD-MISO-N A_GND 22
22 HD-MISO-N
23 N.C HD-MISO-P 18 HD-MISO-P 23 18 HD-MISO-P N.C 23
23 HD-MISO-P
24 GND
25 D_GND HD-D6-N 16 HD-D6-N 25 16 HD-D6-N D_GND 25
25 HD-D6-N
26 C<1-6>_H(2)VAA HD-D6-P 15 HD-D6-P 26 15 HD-D6-P M<1-6>_H(2)VAA 26
26 HD-D6-P
27 C<1-6>_H(2)VAA HD-D5-N 14 HD-D5-N 27 14 HD-D5-N M<1-6>_H(2)VAA 27
27 HD-D5-N
28 C<1-6>_H(2)VAA HD-D5-P 13 HD-D5-P 28 13 HD-D5-P M<1-6>_H(2)VAA 28
28 HD-D5-P
29 C<1-6>_H(2)VCC HD-D4-N 12 HD-D4-N 29 12 HD-D4-N M<1-6>_H(2)VCC 29
29 HD-D4-N
30 C<1-6>_H(2)VCC HD-D4-P 11 HD-D4-P 30 11 HD-D4-P M<1-6>_H(2)VCC 30
30 HD-D4-P
31 GND
32 HDDVDD HD-D3-N 9 HD-D3-N 32 9 HD-D3-N HDDVDD 32
32 HD-D3-N
33 D_GND HD-D3-P 8 HD-D3-P 33 8 HD-D3-P D_GND 33
33 HD-D3-P
34 C<1-6>_H_H(2)SDO HD-D2-N 7 HD-D2-N 34 7 HD-D2-N M<1-6>_H_H(2)SDO 34
34 HD-D2-N
35 HD-D2-P
36 C<1-6>_H_H(2)SCK HD-D1-N 5 HD-D1-N 36 5 HD-D1-N M<1-6>_H_H(2)SCK 36
36 HD-D1-N
37 HD-D1-P
38 C<1-6>_H_H(2)INITX GND 3 GND 38 3 GND M<1-6>_H_H(2)INITX 38
38 GND
39 C<1-6>_H_H(2)RSTX NC 2 NC 39 2 NC M<1-6>_H_H(2)RSTX 39
39 NC
40 C<1-6>_H_H(2)CFDNO HD-DET-1 1 HD-DET-1 40 1 HD-DET-1 M<1-6>_H_H(2)CFDNO 40
40 HD-DET-1
OR2HDR_PCB (CK) J2 CN2 CN7 Wire_Harness J2 OR2HDR_PCB (MY)

Wire_Harness
Y6
K6 HD-DET-4 1 50 HD-DET-4 Y5
K5 HD-DET-4 50 1 HD-DET-4
NC 49 2 NC NC 2 49 NC Y4
K4 J10-15
J10-15 GND 48 3 GND GND 3 48 GND Y3
K3
K2 HD-PCB-ID1 47 4 HD-PCB-ID1 HD-PCB-ID1 4 47 HD-PCB-ID1 Y2
HD-PCB-ID0 46 5 HD-PCB-ID0 HD-PCB-ID0 5 46 HD-PCB-ID0 Y1
K1 K<1-6>_H(1)TH GND Y<1-6>_H(1)TH 1
1 GND 45 6 GND GND 6 45
2 A_GND HD-PER_ERROR 7 44 HD-PER_ERROR A_GND 2
HD-PER_ERROR 44 7 HD-PER_ERROR
3 N.C HD-VDD_ON 8 43 HD-VDD_ON N.C 3
HD-VDD_ON 43 8 HD-VDD_ON
4 D_GND HD-VCC_ON 9 42 HD-VCC_ON D_GND 4
HD-VCC_ON 42 9 HD-VCC_ON
5 D_GND GND 41 10 GND GND 10 41 GND D_GND 5
K<1-6>_H(1)VAA SCPU_CONFIG 40 11 SCPU_CONFIG SCPU_CONFIG 11 40 SCPU_CONFIG Y<1-6>_H(1)VAA 6
6
K<1-6>_H(1)VAA HD-CONFIG 39 12 HD-CONFIG HD-CONFIG 12 39 HD-CONFIG Y<1-6>_H(1)VAA 7
7
K<1-6>_H(1)VAA HD-CONF_DONE 38 13 HD-CONF_DONE HD-CONF_DONE 13 38 HD-CONF_DONE Y<1-6>_H(1)VAA 8
8 HD-STATUS
K<1-6>_H(1)VCC HD-STATUS 37 14 HD-STATUS HD-STATUS 14 37 Y<1-6>_H(1)VCC 9
9 GND GND
K<1-6>_H(1)VCC GND 36 15 GND 15 36 Y<1-6>_H(1)VCC 10
10 HD-WRCLK-N 16 35 HD-WRCLK-N
D_GND HD-WRCLK-N 35 16 HD-WRCLK-N D_GND 11
11 HD-WRCLK-P 17 34 HD-WRCLK-P
HDDVDD HD-WRCLK-P 34 17 HD-WRCLK-P HDDVDD 12
12 GND 18 33 GND
GND 33 18 GND
[ 14-44 ]
13 D_GND HD-ENC-N HD-ENC-N D_GND 13
HD-ENC-N 32 19 HD-ENC-N 19 32
14 K<1-6>_H_H(1)SDO HD-ENC-P 20 31 HD-ENC-P Y<1-6>_H_H(1)SDO 14
HD-ENC-P 31 20 HD-ENC-P
15 D_GND HD-PSTRG-N 21 30 HD-PSTRG-N D_GND 15
HD-PSTRG-N 30 21 HD-PSTRG-N
16 K<1-6>_H_H(1)SCK HD-PSTRG-P 22 29 HD-PSTRG-P Y<1-6>_H_H(1)SCK 16
HD-PSTRG-P 29 22 HD-PSTRG-P
17 D_GND HD-EN-N 28 23 HD-EN-N HD-EN-N 23 28 HD-EN-N D_GND 17
18 K<1-6>_H_H(1)INITX HD-EN-P 27 24 HD-EN-P HD-EN-P 24 27 HD-EN-P Y<1-6>_H_H(1)INITX 18
K<1-6>_H_H(1)RSTX GND 26 25 GND GND 25 26 GND Y<1-6>_H_H(1)RSTX 19
19
K<1-6>_H_H(1)CFDNO HD-INT-N 25 26 HD-INT-N HD-INT-N 26 25 HD-INT-N Y<1-6>_H_H(1)CFDNO 20
20
HD-INT-P 24 27 HD-INT-P HD-INT-P 27 24 HD-INT-P Y<1-6>_H(2)TH 21
21 K<1-6>_H(2)TH
HD-REQ-N 23 28 HD-REQ-N HD-REQ-N 28 23 HD-REQ-N
22 A_GND A_GND 22
HD-REQ-P 22 29 HD-REQ-P HD-REQ-P 29 22 HD-REQ-P
23 N.C N.C 23
HD-ACT-N 21 30 HD-ACT-N HD-ACT-N 30 21 HD-ACT-N
24 D_GND HD-ACT-P D_GND 24
HD-ACT-P 20 31 HD-ACT-P HD-ACT-P 31 20
25 D_GND HD-SCPURST HD-SCPURST D_GND 25
HD-SCPURST 19 32 HD-SCPURST 32 19
26 K<1-6>_H(2)VAA HD-RST 33 18 HD-RST Y<1-6>_H(2)VAA 26
HD-RST 18 33 HD-RST
27 K<1-6>_H(2)VAA GND 34 17 GND Y<1-6>_H(2)VAA 27
GND 17 34 GND
28 K<1-6>_H(2)VAA HD-D6-N 35 16 HD-D6-N Y<1-6>_H(2)VAA 28
HD-D6-N 16 35 HD-D6-N
29 K<1-6>_H(2)VCC HD-D6-P 15 36 HD-D6-P HD-D6-P 36 15 HD-D6-P Y<1-6>_H(2)VCC 29
30 K<1-6>_H(2)VCC HD-D5-N 14 37 HD-D5-N HD-D5-N 37 14 HD-D5-N Y<1-6>_H(2)VCC 30
31 D_GND HD-D5-P 13 38 HD-D5-P HD-D5-P 38 13 HD-D5-P D_GND 31
HDDVDD HD-D4-N 12 39 HD-D4-N HD-D4-N 39 12 HD-D4-N HDDVDD 32
32
HD-D4-P 11 40 HD-D4-P HD-D4-P 40 11 HD-D4-P D_GND 33
33 D_GND
GND 10 41 GND GND 41 10 GND
34 K<1-6>_H_H(2)SDO Y<1-6>_H_H(2)SDO 34
HD-D3-N 9 42 HD-D3-N HD-D3-N 42 9 HD-D3-N
35 D_GND D_GND 35
HD-D3-P 8 43 HD-D3-P HD-D3-P 43 8 HD-D3-P
36 K<1-6>_H_H(2)SCK HD-D2-N Y<1-6>_H_H(2)SCK 36
HD-D2-N 7 44 HD-D2-N HD-D2-N 44 7
37 D_GND HD-D2-P D_GND 37
6-4. Recording data generating PCB (X3-IP-PCB) wiring diagram
HD-D2-P 6 45 HD-D2-P HD-D2-P 45 6

38 K<1-6>_H_H(2)INITX HD-D1-N 46 5 HD-D1-N Y<1-6>_H_H(2)INITX 38
HD-D1-N 5 46 HD-D1-N
39 K<1-6>_H_H(2)RSTX HD-D1-P 47 4 HD-D1-P Y<1-6>_H_H(2)RSTX 39
HD-D1-P 4 47 HD-D1-P
40 K<1-6>_H_H(2)CFDNO GND 48 3 GND Y<1-6>_H_H(2)CFDNO 40
GND 3 48 GND
NC 2 49 NC NC 49 2 NC
HD-DET-3 1 50 HD-DET-3 HD-DET-3 50 1 HD-DET-3
Wire_Harness J3 J3 Wire_Harness
1 1 C1_HCIRTH C1_HCIRTH 1 1
2 2 GND CN9 GND 2 2
3 NC NC 3
4 NC 1 R_CIS_IN NC 4
2 R_CIS_GND
Wire_Harness Relay connector Wire_Harness 3 R_CIS_VCC
1 R_CIS_IN 1 1 14 4 R_CISSI
2 R_CIS_GND 2 2 13 5 R_CISCLK
CIS paper width detection 3 R_CIS_VCC 3 3 12 6 R_LED_ON To Power Supply Unit CN6 pin1, 4
4 R_CISSI 4 4 11 1
7 R_LED_POWER CN3 +5V line
sensor (rear) 5 R_CISCLK 5 5 10 2
6 R_LED_ON 6 6 9 See Power Supply Unit wiring diagram
7 R_LED_POWER 7 7 8 1 F_CIS_IN
2 F_CIS_GND
1 F_CIS_IN 1 8 7 3 F_CIS_VCC To Engine control PCB CN43 or Option PCB CN13
2 F_CIS_GND 2 9 6 4 F_CISSI CN10 1-80 +5V line
3 F_CIS_VCC 3 10 5 5 F_CISCLK
CN4
CIS paper width detection 4 See OPTION PCB to boards wiring diagram
4 F_CISSI 4 11 6 F_LED_ON
sensor (front) 5 F_CISCLK 5 12 3 7 F_LED_POWER
6 F_LED_ON 6 13 2 8 NC
7 F_LED_POWER 7 14 1
Wire_Harness Wire_Harness
Panel Control PCB
Controller PCB NC 1
Decouple PCB CLK+ 1 1 CLK+ Test1 1
CONTROLLER-PCB NC GND 2 2 GND PNL-1126A-PCB GND 2
TFT LCD Panel
2 Decouple-PCB
NC 3 CLK- 3 3 CLK- CK 3 Thin Film Transistor
NC 4 DATA2+ 4 4 DATA2+ GND 4 Liquid Crystal Display
NC 5 GND 5 5 GND Test2 5
NC 6 DATA2- 6 6 DATA2- Test3 6
GND 7 DATA1+ 7 7 DATA1+ R0 7
GND 8 GND 8 8 GND R1 8
DATA2+ 9 Wire_Harness DATA1- 9 9 DATA1- R2 9
NC 10 DAT0+ 10 10 CN6 GND 10
CN7 DAT0+
DATA2- 11 1 DATA2+ 11 R3 11
GND 11 GND
NC 12 2 GND R4 12
DATA0- 12 12 DATA0-
GND 13 3 DATA2- R5 13
GND 13 13 GND
GND 14 4 GND GND 14
GND 14 14 GND G0 15
DATA1+ 15 5 DATA1+ GND 15 15 GND G1 16
NC 16 6 GND
DATA1- GND 16 16 GND G2 17
17 7 DATA1-
NC 18 L VCC 17 17 L VCC GND 18
8 GND
GND 19 L VCC 18 18 L VCC G3 19
9 DAT0+
GND 20 10 GND L_VCC 19 19 L_VCC G4 20
J3
DAT0+ 21 11 DATA0-
CN8 CN7 G5 21
NC 22 12 GND GND 22
DATA0- 23 RXD<- 16 1 RXD<- B0 23
13 CLK-
NC 24 TXD-> 15 2 TXD-> B1 24
14 GND
GND 25 15 CLK+ GND 14 3 GND B2 25
GND 26 16 GND CTS-> 13 4 CTS-> GND 26
1 VBUS CLK+ 27 17 DDC_CLK RTS<- 12 5 RTS<- B3 27
IC Card USB Cable
2 D- NC 28 18 L VCC DC_SW 11 6 DC_SW B4 28
Authentication 3 D+ CN4-CN7 CLK- 29 19 DDC_DATA NC 10 7 NC B5 29
Kit 4 GND NC 30 20 L_VCC CN3 GND 9 8 GND GND 30
NC 31 GND 8 9 GND CN5 HSYNC 31
USB NC 32 GND 7 10 GND GND 32
DDC_CLK 33 PS_ON 6 11 PS_ON VSYNC 33
NC 34 GND 5 12 GND UD/LR 34
DDC_DATA 35 +12V 4 +12V ENABLE 35
13
NC 36 GND 3 GND Test4 36
Scanner unit 14
NC 37 3.3V 37
USB Cable GND 2 15 GND
L VCC 38 3.3V 38
ENABLE 1 16 ENABLE
NC 39 Test5 39
To Scanner Unit L_VCC 40 Wire_Harness Wire_Harness 3.3V 40
CN2 pin1-4
Wire_Harness
See Scanner 1 +12V +12V 1 To Power Supply Unit
NC 1 2 +12V 2 5V 1
CN2 +12V Numeric keypad
Unit wiring diagram GND 2 3 GND CN1 CN5 pin2-6 WAKEUPLED 2
GND 3
GND 3 4 GND +12V line STARTLED 3
GND 4 PCB
NC 4 DATALED 4
GND 5 See Power Supply ERRORLED
J2 NC 5 5
POWERLED 6
TENKEY-PCB
+12v 6 Unit wiring diagram
+12v 7 POWER2LED 7
[ 14-45 ]
NC 8 INTLED 8
KIN1 9
6-5. Controller PCB to Panel PCB wiring diagram
KIN2 10
KIN3 11
NC 1 1 RXD1 CN9 KIN4 12
TXD1 2 2 TXD1 KOUT1 13
GND 3 3 GND KOUT2 14
RTS 4 4 RTS KOUT3 15
NC 5 5 CTS KOUT4
J17 16
RXD1 6 6 NC KOUT5 17
NC 7 7 NC
CN4 WAKEUPINT 18
NC 8 8 Power_ON POWERINT 19
CTS 9 9 GND
1 LAN-MDI0+ Reset SW- (GND) 20
Polarizing Key 10 NC
2 LAN-MDI0- 10 Power SW+ 21
LAN-MDI1+ 11 Power SW- (GND) TIMERLED 22
LAN Cable 3
External 4 LAN-MDI1- 1 12 GND
CN9 Wire_Harness
5 LAN-MDI2+ PS_ON 2 13 Back Light ON
Controller 14
6 LAN-MDI2- NC 3 +12V KIN5 1 Mode button PCB
7 LAN-MDI3+ Reset SW- (GND) 4 KOUT1 2
8 LAN-MDI3- 5 KOUT2 3 MODEKEY-PCB
CN2 KOUT3 4
6
Ethernet 7 KOUT4 5
Connect LAN cable J1 KOUT5 6
8
to the port marked 9 Wire_Harness
[Controller] NC 10
Engine control PCB Wire_Harness
Power SW+ XR_RIGHT 1
11 ENGINE_READY 1 1 ENGINE_READY TOUCH PANEL
4 ENGINE_READY 1 YD_BOTTOM 2
Power SW- (GND) 12 2
Spare Output 3 Spare Output 2 2 Spare Output XL_LEFT 3
Polarizing Key 13 CN7 3
Starting mode signal 2 Starting mode signal 3 3 Starting mode signal CN8 YU_TOP 4
NC 14 4 1 4
GND GND 4 GND
CN3 Wire_Harness
VLED1+ 1
GND 1
X3-ENGINE-PCB VLED2+ 2
NC 2 LED Backlight
Wire_Harness VLED3+ 3
NC 3
CN4 VLED4+ 4
NC 4 Option AC Control Option AC Control
J4 1 6 NC 5
NC 5 Standby (+5VSP control)
Standby (+5VSP control) 2 5 VLED1- 6
Back Light ON 6
PMS-12V control 3 4 PMS-12V control VLED2- 7
NC 7
GND 4 3 GND VLED3- 8
+12V 8
GND 5 2 GND CN2 VLED4- 9
+5VSB 6 1 +5VSB
Rev.1.00
Paper feed relay PCB Wire_Harness
Engine control PCB
PF-RELAY-PCB GND
13 1
12
X3-ENGINE-PCB
2
Rev.1.00
11 3
Recording Data
10 Loose wire limit switch 4
9 Paper feed tray upper limit sensor A 5 Wire_Harness
generating PCB
8 Paper feed tray elevation switch 6 X3-IP-PCB
7 Paper feed tray paper volume detection sensor A 7 CONCT2
6 Paper feed tray paper length detection sensor 8 1 Spare output 1 80
5 Paper lift detection sensor 9 2 GND 79
4 Registration motor FG sensor 10 3 Transfer belt reference sensor 78
3 Switchback sensor 11 4 GND 77
2 +5V 12 5 Roller reference sensor 76
1 +5V 13 6 GND 75
CN1 26 Upper transfer OUT sensor 14 CN3 7 Driven roller shaft encoder phase B 74
25 Re-feed sensor 15 8 GND 73

24 External paper feed motor FG sensor 16 9 Top edge sensor 2 (reflective) 72
23 Paper feed tray paper detection sensor 17 10 GND 71
22 Paper feed tray paper volume detection sensor B 18 11 Top edge sensor 1 (transmissive) 70
21 Paper feed tray lower limit sensor 19 12 GND 69
20 Paper feed tray upper limit sensor B 20 13 NC 68
19 Paper feed pressure lever sensor 21 14 GND 67
18 22 15 HD-PWR-ON 66
17 23 16 GND 65
16 24 17 D15 64
15 GND 25 18 D14 63
14 26 19 D13 62
20 D12 61
21 GND 60
22 D11 59
10 1 23 D10 58
9 2 24 D9 57
Unused
8 3 25 D8 56
Unused
7 4 26 GND 55
CN2 6 5 27 D7 54
Top edge sensor 2 (receive) CN68
5 6 28 D6 53
Registration sensor (send)
4 7 29 D5 52
Registration sensor (receive)
3 8 30 D4 51
Paper feed tray paper width potentiometer
2 9 31 GND 50
GND
1 10 32 D3 49
33 D2 48
34 D1 47
35 D0 46
Internal paper feed PCB 36 GND 45
Wire_Harness 37 44
X3-I-PF-PCB WAIT
GND 38 Interrupt signal 43
13 1
Tray 1 elevator motor control 1 39 GND 42
12 2
GND 40 RESET 41
11 3 CN4
Tray 2 elevator motor control 1 41 40
[ 14-46 ]
10 4
CN43 GND
GND 42 WR 39
9 5
Tray 3 elevator motor control 1 43 RD 38
8 6
GND 44 GND 37
7 7
Vertical paper feed clutch 2 45 RD/WR 36
6 8
Internal paper feed clutch 3 46 CS 35
5 9
Internal paper feed clutch 1 47 GND 34
4 10
Internal paper feed motor_CLK 48 A24 33
3 11
6-6. Engine Control PCB to Other PCB wiring diagram
Internal paper feed motor_DIR 49 A23 32

2 12 CN57
Internal paper feed motor_ON 50 A22 31
1 13
CN1 GND 51 A21 30
26 14
Internal paper feed motor_LOCK 52 GND 29
25 15
Internal paper feed motor_GAIN 53 A20 28
24 16
GND 54 A19 27
23 17
Internal paper feed clutch 2 55 A18 26
22 18
Vertical paper feed clutch 1 56 A17 25
21 19
GND 57 GND 24
20 20
Tray 3 elevator motor PWM 58 A16 23
19 21
Tray 3 elevator motor control 2 59 A15 22
18 22
Tray 2 elevator motor PWM 60 A14 21
17 23
16 24
Tray 1 elevator motor PWM 62 GND 19
15 25
14 26
64 A11 17
65 A10 16
GND 66 A9 15
19 1
Internal paper feed PCB (I-PF-DRIVE-PCB) connection detection 67 GND 14
18 2
Internal feed paper jam door interlock CLOSE 68 A8 13
17 3
Tray 3 paper detection sensor 69 A7 12
16 4
15 5
14 6
Tray 3 upper limit sensor 72 GND 9
13 7
Tray 2 upper limit sensor 73 A4 8
12 8
Tray 1 upper limit sensor 74 A3 7
11 9
CN2 Vertical paper feed sensor 5 75 A2 6
10 10
Vertical paper feed sensor 4 CN37 76 A1 5
9 11
Vertical paper feed sensor 3 77 GND 4
8 12
Vertical paper feed sensor 2 78 Spare output 2 3
7 13
Vertical paper feed sensor 1 79 CONCT1 2
6 14
SENCLK 80 1
5 15
4 SENLAT
16
3 SENDATA2
17
2 SENDATA1
18
1 GND
19
Wire_Harness
Relay connector
Engine control PCB Terminal Wire_Harness Terminal
BP hit detection sensor RR 1 2
2 1 X3-ENGINE-PCB CN54
Wire_Harness
CN10 Wire_Harness
Wire_Harness Relay connector Relay connector
Relay connector Relay connector
BP hit detection sensor RL 1 2 1 5 1 BP hit detection sensor RR Elevator motor 1 (+24VC-ELV) 1 3 3 1 2
2 BP hit detection sensor RL Elevator motor 2 (+24VC-ELV) 2 2 2 2 1 +24VC Elevator motor
2 1 2 4
3 3 3 BP hit detection sensor FR GND 3 1 1
Wire_Harness
Relay connector 4 2 4 BP hit detection sensor FL GND 4
BP hit detection sensor FR 1 2 5 1 5 GND +24VB 5 2
2 1 Counter signal 6 1
Wire_Harness
Relay connector
BP hit detection sensor FL 1 2 Counter
2 1 CN55
Wire_Harness CN52 +5VSP 1 4 1 4 1 1 Switchback door interlock
CN2 NC 8 GND 2 3 2 3 2 䇭㩷3
FG 7 1 Paper elevation motor_FG GND 3 2 3 2 3 switch
LOCK 6 2 Paper elevation motor_LOCK Switchback door interlock switch 4 1 4 1 4
CLK 5 3 Paper elevation motor_CLK NC 5
Relay connector Wire_Harness Relay connector
DIR 4 4 Paper elevation motor_DIR NC 6
Paper elevation motor ON 3 5 Paper elevation motor_ON +24VC 7 4 1 4 1 Paper feed tray lower safety
1
GND 2 6 GND GND 8 3 2 3 2
䇭㩷3 switch
+5V 1 7 +5V GND 9 2 3 2 3
8 NC Interlock switch 10 1 4 1 4
CN1 Relay connector Relay connector
+30V-IL 1 9 NC NC 11
GND 2 9 1 10 BP elevation motor_FG NC 12 4 1
8 2 11 BP elevation motor_LOCK 3 2
7 3 12 BP elevation motor_CLK 2 3
Wire_Harness
6 4 13 BP elevation motor_DIR 1 4
14 BP elevation motor_ON Relay connector Relay connector
5 5
CN1 4 6 15 GND 4 1 4 1
1
FG 9 3 2 3 2 Stripper unit interlock switch
3 7 16 +5V 䇭㩷3
LOCK 8 2 3 2 3
2 8 17 GND
CLK 7 1 4 1 4
1 9 18 +24VB-IL
DIR 6
BP elevation motor ON 5
GND 4 Relay connector Relay connector
+5V 3 17 1 4 1 Paper feed tray upper safety
1
GND 2 16 2 3 2
䇭㩷3 switch
+24VB-IL 1 15 3 2 3
14 4 1 4
13 5
12 6
11 7
Wire_Harness CN53
CN2 NC 8 10 8
CLK 7 1 9 9
Upper transfer motor_CLK
GAIN 6 8 10
2 Upper transfer motor_GAIN
7 11
NC 5 3 NC Refer PF-Relay-PCB CN6 6 12
[ 14-47 ]
LD 4 4 Upper transfer motor_LD
Upper transfer motor 5 13
ON 3 5 Upper transfer motor_ON 4 14
+5V 2 6 +5V 3 15
GND 1 7 GND 2 16
CN1 8 Authorization cam motor OUT1 1 17
+30V-IL 1 9 Authorization cam motor OUT2
GND 2 10 NC (+24VC) CN56 Wire_Harness
11 NC (Switchback clutch signal) Relay connector
Left front door interlock switch 1 4 1
1
GND 2 3 2 Left front door interlock switch
1 2 䇭㩷3
Authorization cam motor +24VC GND 3 2 3
2 1 +5VSP 4 1 4
+5VSP 5
GND 6 Relay connector
GND 7 4 1
Right front door interlock switch 8 1
3 2 Right front door interlock switch
CN64 䇭㩷3
Wire_Harness 2 3
1 4
1 +30V-IL
2 GND
3 +30V-IL
CN63
4 GND
1 1 5 External paper feed motor (+) Machine code RFID_+5V 1 6
External paper feed motor +30V-IL Machine code RFID_GND 2 5
2 2 6 External paper feed motor (-)
7 Registration motor ON Machine code RFID_TxD 3 4
4 3
Machine code RFID PCB
8 +30V-IL Machine code RFID_RxD
9 Re-feed motor_A Machine code RFID_RESET 5 2
2 2 10 +30V-IL Machine code RFID_RUN 6 1
Registration motor +30V-IL
1 1 11 Re-feed motor_/A
12 Re-feed motor_B
13 +30V-IL
1 14 Re-feed motor_/B
+30V-IL 15 Switchback motor_A
3
5 16 +30V-IL CN9 Wire_Harness
Re-feed motor 17 Switchback motor_/A
7
9 18 Switchback motor_B 1 +30V
+30V 1
11 19 +30V-IL 2
GND 2 Heater
20 Switchback motor_/B
1
+30V-IL
3
5
Switchback motor 7
6-7. Engine Control PCB to Parts (CN9_10_52_53_54_55_56_63_64) wiring diagram
9
11
Rev.1.00
Engine control PCB Belt Platen Unit
X3-ENGINE-PCB
Wire_Harness
Rev.1.00
Relay connector 1
CN72 2 Belt HP sensor
1 1 3 Wire_Harness
Flipper sensor 2 2 2 Wire_Harness Wire_Harness Wire_Harness 3
3 3 1 1 GND CN73 Relay connector Relay connector
2 Flipper sensor signal
Relay connector +5V 1 17 1 17 1
3 +5V Wire_Harness
Wire_Harness GND 2 16 2 16 2
1 6 4 GND
Belt HP sensor signal 3 15 3 15 3 Relay connector 5
1 2 5 5 BP upper limit sensor signal
3 4 GND 4 14 4 14 4 4 1 4
BP upper limit sensor 2 6 +5V
4 3 Belt Shaft FG sensor signal 5 13 5 13 5 3 2 3
3 7 GND
5 2 Encoder signal A 6 12 6 12 6 2 3 2 Belt Shaft FG sensor
8 BP lower limit sensor signal
6 1 +5V 7 11 7 11 7 1 4 1
9 +5V
NC 8 10 8 10 8
10 GND
1 NC 9 9 9 9 9
11 Authorization cam HP sensor signal
2 NC 10 8 10 8 10 8 NC CN2
BP lower limit sensor 12 +5V
3 Transfer Belt motor_CLK 11 7 11 7 11 7 CLK
13 NC
Transfer Belt motor_GAIN 12 6 12 6 12 6 GAIN
14 NC
Transfer Belt motor_DIR 13 5 13 5 13 5 DIR
15 NC
Wire_Harness Relay connector Transfer Belt motor_LOCK 14 4 14 4 14 4 LOCK
16 NC
Transfer Belt motor_ON 15 3 15 3 15 3 ON Transfer belt motor
1 1 3 17 GND
+5V 16 2 16 2 16 2 +5V
Authorization cam HP sensor 2 2 2 18 Paper elevation IN sensor signal
3 1 GND 17 1 17 1 17 1 GND
3 19 +5V CN1
20 GND
21 Ink cartridge detection sensor C signal 1 +30V-IL
Wire_Harness 2
Relay connector 22 +5V GND
1 1 3 23 GND CN51
Paper elevation IN sensor 2 2 2 24 Ink cartridge detection sensor K signal
3 3 1 25 +5V +30V-IL 1
26 GND GND 2
27 Ink cartridge detection sensor M signal
Relay connector 28 +5V
1 1 12 29 GND
Ink cartridge detection sensor C 2 2 11 30 Ink cartridge detection sensor Y signal
3 3 10 31 +5V
4 9 32 NC
Relay connector
5 8
6 7 Red +24VC
1 4 1
Ink cartridge detection sensor K 2 7 6 3 2 Blue
8 5 2 3 Transfer belt fan 1
3
9 4 1 4 White
10 3
11 2
1 12 1
Ink cartridge detection sensor M 2 Relay connector
3 Red +24VC
CN75 4 1
Relay connector 3 2 Blue
[ 14-48 ]
Relay connector Transfer belt fan 2
2 3
1 Transfer belt fan 1 (+24VC) 1 18 1 18 1 1 4 White
Ink cartridge detection sensor Y 2 GND 2 17 2 17 2
3 Transfer belt fan 1 PWM control signal 3 16 3 16 3
Transfer belt fan 2 (+24VC) 4 15 4 15 4
Relay connector
GND 5 14 5 14 5
Red +24VC
Transfer belt fan 2 PWM control signal 6 13 6 13 6 4 1
CN62 Transfer belt fan 3 (+24VC) 7 12 7 12 7 3 2
Blue
Wire_Harness Wire_Harness 2 3 Transfer belt fan 3
Relay connector GND 8 11 8 11 8
1 4
White
6 A01 A12 1 C-RFID_+5V Transfer belt fan 3 PWM control signal 9 10 9 10 9
5 A02 A11 2 C-RFID_GND Transfer belt fan 4 (+24VC) 10 9 10 9 10
4 A03 A10 3 C-RFID_TxD GND 11 8 11 8 11
Ink RFID PCB C 3 A04 A09 4 C-RFID_RxD Transfer belt fan 4 PWM control signal 12 7 12 7 12
Transfer belt fan 5 (+24VC) 13 13 Relay connector
2 A05 A08 5 C-RFID_RESET 6 6 13
GND 14 5 14 5 14 Red +24VC
1 A06 A07 6 C-RFID_RUN 4 1
Transfer belt fan 5 PWM control signal 15 4 15 4 15 3 2
Blue
A07 A06 7 K-RFID_+5V
A08 A05 8 K-RFID_GND Transfer belt fan 6 (+24VC) 16 3 16 3 16 2 3 Transfer belt fan 4
GND 17 2 17 2 17 1 4
White
6 A09 A04 9 K-RFID_TxD
A10 A03 10 K-RFID_RxD Transfer belt fan 6 PWM control signal 18 1 18 1 18
5
4 A11 A02 11 K-RFID_RESET
Ink RFID PCB K 3 A12 A01 12 K-RFID_RUN Relay connector
2 B01 B12 13 M-RFID_+5V
Red +24VC
1 B02 B11 14 M-RFID_GND 4 1
B03 B10 15 M-RFID_TxD 3 2
Blue
B04 B09 16 M-RFID_RxD 2 3 Transfer belt fan 5
1 4
White
6 B05 B08 17 M-RFID_RESET
6-8. Engine Control PCB to Parts (CN51_62_72_73_75) wiring diagram
5 B06 B07 18 M-RFID_RUN

4 B07 B06 19 Y-RFID_+5V
Ink RFID PCB M 3 B08 B05 20 Y-RFID_GND
2 B09 B04 21 Y-RFID_TxD Relay connector
1 B10 B03 22 Y-RFID_RxD Red +24VC
4 1
B11 B02 23 Y-RFID_RESET 3 2 Blue
B12 B01 24 Y-RFID_RUN 2 3 Transfer belt fan 6
6 1 4
White
5
4
Ink RFID PCB Y 3
2
1
Engine control PCB
X3-ENGINE-PCB
FD paper ejection Unit

Wire_Harness Wire_Harness CN65 Relay connector
Red +24VB
1 2 1 15 1 FD paper ejection motor ON 4 1
FD paper ejection motor +24VB-IL 3 2
Blue
2 1 2 14 2 +24VB-IL
3 13 3 GND 2 3 Head drive IC cooling fan 1
1 4
White
4 12 4 GND
5 11 5 +24VC
Relay connector 6 10 6 FD paper ejection flipper signal
FD paper ejection flipper 1 2 7 9 7 GND Relay connector
solenoid +24VC 2 1 8 8 8 FD paper ejection motor FG sensor signal Red +24VB
4 1
9 7 9 +5V 3 2 Blue
10 6 10 GND 2 3 Head drive IC cooling fan 2
11 5 11 FD paper ejection full sensor signal 1 4
White
12 4 12 +5V
13 3 13 GND Wire_Harness
3 2 FD paper ejection sensor signal CN61
FD paper ejection motor FG 14 14
2 1 +5V Relay connector
sensor 15 15
1 Head drive IC cooling fan 1(+24V A) 1 1 2
GND 2 +24VB-IL Maintenance unit slide motor
2 1
Head drive IC cooling fan 2 (+24V A) 3
GND 4
3 Wiper motor 2 phase A 5
FD paper ejection full sensor 2 Wiper motor 2 phase B 6
1 Wiper motor 2 phase /A 7
Wiper motor 2 phase /B 8
Wire_Harness +24VB 9 Wire_Harness Wire_Harness
Relay connector Motor to increase pressure Relay connector Relay connector Relay connector +24VB-IL
10
3 1 3 Wiper motor 1 phase A 11 4 1 11 1 4 1 4
FD paper ejection sensor 2 2 2 Wiper motor 1 phase B 12 3 2 10 2 3 2 3
3 1 Wiper motor 1 phase /A 2 3 9 3 2 3
Wiper motor 1
1 13 2
Wiper motor 1 phase /B 14 1 4 8 4 1 4 1
Maintenance unit slide motor 1 (+24V B-IL) 15 7 5
4 1
Maintenance unit slide motor 2 (+24V B-IL) 16 3 2 6 6
2 3 5 7 +24VB-IL
Wire_Harness CN66 Relay connector
+24VB-IL Relay connector 1 4 4 8
4 1 4
3 9
6 1 7 1 FD paper ejection fence motor_phase A Relay connector 3 2 3 Wiper motor 2
2 10
5 2 6 2 FD paper ejection fence motor_phase B 2 3 2
1 11
4 3 5 3 FD paper ejection fence motor_phase /A 1 4 1
FD paper ejection fence motor 3 4 4 4 FD paper ejection fence motor_phase /B Relay connector
2 5 3 5 GND 3 1
1 6 2 6 FD paper ejection fence HP sensor signal 2 2
7 1 7 +5V 1 3
[ 14-49 ]
8 GND
3
9 FD paper ejection paper detection sensor signal
2 Wiper motor HP sensor
10 +5V
1
3 CN71
FD paper ejection fence HP 2
sensor 1 GND 1
Waste ink tank sensor 2 signal 2 Wire_Harness
+5V 3 Relay connector
FD paper ejection fence Unit GND 4 6 1 3
Ink pan storage sensor signal 5 5 2 2 Ink pan storage sensor
+5V 6 4 3 1
Wire_Harness GND 7 3 4
Relay connector Ink pan operating position sensor signal 8 2 5
3 1 3 +5V 9 1 6
FD paper ejection paper NC 10
2 2 2
detection sensor 1 3 1 NC 11 3 Ink pan operation position
NC 12 2
GND 13 sensor
1
Wiper motor HP sensor signal 14
+5V 15
NC 16
NC 17
6-9. Engine Control PCB to Parts (CN61_65_66_71) wiring diagram
NC 18
NC 19
NC 20
NC 21
GND 22 3
Waste ink tank sensor 1 signal 23 2 Waste ink tank sensor 2 (full)
+5V 24 1
3 Waste ink tank sensor 1

2 Belt HP sensor
(nearly full)
1
Rev.1.00
Engine control PCB
X3-ENGINE-PCB
Relay connector
2 1 +24VA
Rev.1.00
Wire_Harness Wire_Harness Ink supply valve C
Wire_Harness CN69 CN59 1 2
Relay connector
4 A01 A18 1 GND +24VB 1
3 A02 A17 2 GND Ink supply valve C 2 Relay connector
Pressurized ink tank ink
2 A03 A16 3 Pressurized ink tank ink sensor C +24VB 3 2 1 +24VA
sensor C Ink supply valve K
1 A04 A15 4 Detection of missing pressurized Ink supply valve K 4 1 2
ink tank ink sensor C +24VB 5
4 A05 A14 5 GND Ink supply valve M 6
3 A06 A13 6 GND +24VB 7 Relay connector
Pressurized ink tank ink
2 A07 A12 7 Pressurized ink tank ink sensor M Ink supply valve Y 8 2 1
sensor M A08 A11
+24VA Ink supply valve M
1 8 Detection of missing pressurized +24VB 9 1 2
ink tank ink sensor M Pressurized ink tank air valve 10
4 A09 A10 9 GND +24VB 11

3 A10 A09 10 GND Negatively pressurized ink tank air valve 12 Relay connector
Overflow tank inksensor A11 A08 Overflow tank ink sensor 13
2 11 NC 2 1 +24VA
A12 A07 14
Ink supply valve Y
1 12 Detection of missing overflow NC 1 2
tank ink sensor NC 15
NC 16 Wire_Harness
Spare (+24VA) 17 Relay connector Relay connector
3 A13 A06 13 GND GND 18 8 1
Bellows arm lower position 2 1 +24VA
2 A14 A05 14 Bellows arm lower position sensor Ink cooling fan (+24VA) 19 7 2
Pressurized ink tank air valve
sensor 1 2
1 A15 A04 15 +5V GND 20 6 3
5 4
4 5 Relay connector
3 6 2 1 +24VA Negatively pressurized ink tank
3 A16 A03 16 GND 2 7 1 2 air valve
Bellows arm HP sensor 2 A17 A02 17 Bellows arm HP sensor 1 8
1 A18 A01 18 +5V
B18 Relay connector

3 B01 19 GND
Bellows sensor B17 2 1 +24VA
2 B02 20 Bellows sensor
1 B03 B16 21 +5V 1 2
B04 B15
Ink cooling fan
22 NC
B05 B14 23 NC
B06 B13 24 NC
3 B07 B12 25 GND
Bellows arm upper position B08 B11 CN74
2 26 Bellows arm upper position sensor Relay connector Wire_Harness
sensor 1 B09 B10 27 +5V
Bellows arm drive motor_FG 1 10 1 9 FG
B10 B09 Bellows arm drive motor_LOCK 2 9 2 8 LOCK
28 GND
4 B11 B08 Bellows arm drive motor_CLK 3 8 3 7 CLK
29 GND
Pressurized ink tank ink 3 B12 B07 Bellows arm drive motor_DIR 4 7 4 6 DIR
30 GND
2 B13 B06 Bellows arm drive motor_ON 5 6 5 5 ON Bellows arm drive motor
sensor Y 31 Pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y
GND 6 5 6 4 GND
[ 14-50 ]
1 B14 B05 32 Detection of missing pressurized
+5V 7 4 7 3 +5V
ink tank ink sensor Y
GND 8 3 8 2 GND
4 B15 B04 +24VB 9 2 9 1 +24VB
33 GND
Pressurized ink tank ink 3 B16 B03 NC 10 1 10 +24V
34 GND
sensor K 2 B17 B02 35 Pressurized ink tank ink sensor K
1 B18 B01 36 Detection of missing pressurized
ink tank ink sensor K CN60 Wire_Harness Wire_Harness
+24VA 1 17 1 4 1 4 +24VA
GND 2 16 2 3 2 3 GND Circulation pump C motor
+24VA
Circulation pump C motor_LP 3 15 3 2 3 2 Pump_LP signal (Pump drive PCB C)
Circulation pump C motor_ON 4 14 4 1 4 1 Pump_ON signal
+24VA 5 13 5
GND 6 12 6
Circulation pump K motor_LP 7 11 7 Relay connector
Circulation pump K motor_ON 8 10 8 4 1 4 +24VA
+24VA 9 9 9 3 2 3 GND Circulation pump K motor
GND 8 10 2 3
+24VA (Pump drive PCB K)
10 2 Pump_LP signal
Circulation pump M motor_LP 11 7 11 1 4 1 Pump_ON signal
Circulation pump M motor_ON 12 6 12
+24VA 13 5 13
CN70 GND 14 4 14 Relay connector
Relay connector Circulation pump Y motor_LP 15 3 15
4 1 4 +24VA
4 1 16 1 GND Circulation pump Y motor_ON 16 2 16 Circulation pump M motor
3 2 3 GND +24VA
Negatively pressurized ink tank 3 2 15 2 GND GND 17 1 17 2 3 (Pump drive PCB M)
2 Pump_LP signal
ink sensor C 2 3 14 3 Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor C 1 4 1 Pump_ON signal
6-10. Engine Control PCB to Parts (CN59_60_69_70_74) wiring diagram
1 4 13 4 Detection of missing negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor C

5 12 5 GND
4 6 11 6 GND Relay connector
3 7 10 7 Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor K
Negatively pressurized ink tank 4 1 4 +24VA
2 8 9 8 Detection of missing negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor K
ink sensor K 3 2 3 GND Circulation pump Y motor
1 9 8 9 GND 2 3 +24VA
2 Pump_LP signal (Pump drive PCB Y)
10 7 10 GND 1 4 1 Pump_ON signal
11 6 11 Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor M
4 12 5 12 Detection of missing negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor M
Negatively pressurized ink tank 3 13 4 13 GND
ink sensor M 2 14 3 14 GND
1 15 2 15 Negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y
16 1 16 Detection of missing negatively pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y
4
Negatively pressurized ink tank 3
ink sensor Y 2
1
X3-I-PF-PCB Tray 1 elevator assembly
Wire_Harness
CN8 Relay connector
Tray 1 elevator motor - 1 1 2
Tray 1 elevator motor + 2 2 1
Wire_Harness CN10 Tray 2 elevator motor - 3
Wire_Harness Relay connector Tray 2 elevator motor + 4 Relay connector
3 1 12 1 GND Tray 3 elevator motor - 5
Tray 1 paper size detection 4 1
2 2 11 2 Tray1 paper size detection sensor 1 signal Tray 3 elevator motor + 6 1
sensor 1 1 3 10 3 +5V 3 2 Tray 1 interlock switch
䇭㩷3
4 9 4 2 3
GND
5 1 4
8 5 Tray1 paper size detection sensor 2 signal
6 7 6 +5V CN11
Tray 1 paper size detection 3 7 6 7 GND
2 8 5 8 Tray1 paper size detection sensor 3 signal Tray 1 interlock switch 1 3
sensor 2
1 9 4 9 +5V GND 2 2 Tray 1 paper volume detection
10 3 10 GND GND 3 1 sensor
11 2 11 Tray1 paper size detection sensor 4 signal Tray 1 interlock switch 4
12 1 12 +5V NC 5
Tray 1 paper size detection 3 NC 6
2 Tray 2 interlock switch 7
sensor 3 Tray 2 elevator assembly
1 GND 8
GND 9 Relay connector
Tray 2 interlock switch 10
NC 11 1 2
2 1
Tray 1 paper size detection 3 NC 12
2 Tray 3 interlock switch 13
sensor 4
1 GND 14 Relay connector
GND 15 4 1
1
Tray 3 interlock switch 16 3 2 Tray 2 interlock switch
Wire_Harness 䇭㩷3
Relay connector 2 3
3 1 12 13 GND 1 4
Tray 2 paper size detection
2 2 11 14 Tray2 paper size detection sensor 1 signal
sensor 1 15 +5V
1 3 10
4 9 16 GND
17 Tray2 paper size detection sensor 2 signal 3
5 8 Tray 2 paper volume detection
18 +5V 2
6 7
19 GND 1 sensor
Tray 2 paper size detection 3 7 6
sensor 2 2 8 5 20 Tray2 paper size detection sensor 3 signal
1 9 4 21 +5V
10 3 22 GND
11 2 23 Tray2 paper size detection sensor 4 signal Tray 3 elevator assembly
12 1 24 +5V
3 Relay connector
Tray 2 paper size detection
sensor 3 2 1 2
1 2 1
[ 14-51 ]
Relay connector
3 4 1
Tray 2 paper size detection 1
2 3 2 Tray 3 interlock switch
sensor 4 䇭㩷3
2 3
1
1 4
Wire_Harness Relay connector

Tray 3 paper size detection 3 1 12 25 GND 3
2 2 11 26 Tray3 paper size detection sensor 1 signal 2 Tray 3 paper volume detection
sensor 1 27
1 3 10 +5V 1 sensor
4 28 GND
6-11. I-PF-PCB to Parts (CN7_8_9_10_11) wiring diagram
9
5 8 29 Tray3 paper size detection sensor 2 signal
6 7 30 +5V
Tray 3 paper size detection 3 7 6 31 GND
sensor 2 2 8 5 32 Tray3 paper size detection sensor 3 signal
1 9 4 33 +5V
10 3 34 GND CN9
11 2 35 Tray3 paper size detection sensor 4 signal
12 1 36 +5V GND 1
Tray 3 paper size detection 3 Tray 1 paper volume detection sensor 2
sensor 3 2 +5V 3
1 GND 4
Tray 2 paper volume detection sensor 5
+5V 6
GND 7
Tray 3 paper size detection 3
Tray 3 paper volume detection sensor 8
sensor 4 2 8
+5V 9
1 7
Internal paper feed motor_CLK 10
Internal paper feed motor_GAIN 11 6
Internal paper feed motor_DIR 12 5
Internal paper feed motor_LOCK 13 4 CN2
Internal paper feed motor_ON 14 3 Internal paper feed motor
+5V 15 2
GND 16 1
NC 17
1
2 CN1
CN7
+30V-IL 1
GND 2
Rev.1.00
X3-I-PF-PCB
Wire_Harness CN5
Rev.1.00
3 1 6 1 GND
Tray 1 paper detection sensor 2 2 5 2 Tray1 paper detection sensor signal
1 3 4 3 +5V
4 3 4 GND
5 2 5 Tray1 upper limit sensor signal
6 1 6 +5V
3 7 GND
Tray 1 upper limit sensor 2 8 Tray2 paper detection sensor signal
1 9 +5V
10 GND
11 Tray2 upper limit sensor signal
Wire_Harness Relay connector 12 +5V

3 1 6 13 GND
Tray 2 paper detection sensor 2 2 5 14 Tray3 paper detection sensor signal
1 3 4 15 +5V
4 3 16 GND
5 2 17 Tray3 upper limit sensor signal
6 1 18 +5V
3
CN6 Wire_Harness
Tray 2 upper limit sensor 2
1
+24V 1 4
Internal paper feed clutch 1 signal 2 3
+24V 3 2
Wire_Harness Relay connector Internal paper feed clutch 2 signal 1 +24V
4
3 1 6 +24V 5
Tray 3 paper detection sensor 2 2 5 Internal paper feed clutch 3 signal 6
1 3 4 +24V 7
4 3 Vertical paper feed clutch 1 signal 8
5 2 +24V 9 4
6 1 Vertical paper feed clutch 2 signal 10 3
3 2
Tray 3 upper limit sensor 2 1 +24V
1
4
Vertical paper feed unitB CN4 3
Wire_Harness Relay connector 2
3 1 3 1 +24V
1 GND
Vertical paper feed sensor 1 2 2 2 2 Vertical paper feed sensor 1 signal
1 3 1 3 +5V
1 4 1 4
[ 14-52 ]
Internal feed paper jam door 1
2 3 2 3
interlock switch 3
3 2 3 2
4 1 4
4 1
3
Wire_Harness Relay connector 2 Vertical paper feed clutch 1
3 1 3 4 GND 1 +24V
1 3 1 6 +5V
6-12. I-PF-PCB to Parts (CN4_5_6_12) wiring diagram

4
3 1 6 7 GND
3
Vertical paper feed sensor 3 2 2 5 8 Vertical paper feed sensor 3 signal Vertical paper feed clutch 2
2
1 3 4 9 +5V +24V
1
4 3 10 GND
Wire_Harness 5 2 11 Vertical paper feed sensor 4 signal
Relay connector 6 1 12 +5V
3 1 3 13 GND
1 3 1 15 +5V
CN12
1 Internal feed paper jam door interlock switch
Vertical paper feed unit A 2 GND
3 GND
Wire_Harness Relay connector 4 Internal feed paper jam door interlock switch
3 1 3
Vertical paper feed sensor 5 2 2 2
1 3 1
PF- RELAY-PCB
Part of External Paper feed unit
Wire_Harness CN4
Wire_Harness
3 1 GND
Paper feed tray paper volume 2 2 Paper feed tray paper volume detection sensor 1 signal
detection sensor 1 1 3 +5V 3
4 GND 2
5 Paper feed tray paper volume detection sensor 2 signal 1 sensor
6 +5V Relay connector
Paper feed tray paper volume 3 7 GND
2 8 External paper feed motor FG sensor signal 17 1
detection sensor 2 16 2
1 9 +5V To Engine control PCB
10 CN55 15 3 3
GND Paper feed tray upper limit
11 14 4 2
Paper lift detection sensor signal sensor A
CN6 Wire_Harness 13 5 Relay connector 1
12 +5V Relay connector 12
Relay connector 13 GND 6 6 1
1 4 GND 1 11 1 11 7 5 2
14 BP wire loose detection switch
2 3 sensor signal 2 10 2 10 8 4 3
15 GND
External paper feed motor 3 2 +5V 3 9 3 9 9 3 4 3
16 Paper feed tray lower limit sensor signal
FG sensor 4 1 GND 4 8 4 8 10 2 5 2 Paper feed tray upper limit
17 +5V
Paper feed tray upper limit sensor A signal 5 7 5 7 11 1 6 1 sensor B
Wire_Harness +5V 6 6 6 6 12
Part of Paper position Wire_Harness
Relay connector Relay connector GND 7 5 7 5 13
detection unit Paper feed tray upper limit sensor B signal 8 4 8 4 14
3 1 3 1 3
+5V 9 3 9 3 15 Relay connector
Paper lift detection sensor 2 2 2 2 2 Paper feed tray elevation
GND 10 2 10 2 16 1 2
1 3 1 3 1
Paper feed tray elevation switch 11 1 11 1 17 2 1 switch
1 1 2 1 2 Relay connector
Part of Switchback unit A
BP wire loose detection switch 2 2 1 2 1
GND 12 6 1 3
Re-feed sensor signal 13 5 2 2 Re-feed sensor
+5V 14 4 3 1
GND 15 3 4
Switchback sensor signal 16 2 5 Relay connector
3 +5V 17 1 6 3 1 3
Paper feed tray lower limit 2 2 2 2
GND 18 Switcback sensor
sensor 1 Upper transfer OUT sensor signal 19 1 3 1
+5V 20
Relay connector Wire_Harness Switcback unit B

3 1 3
2 2 2 Upper transfer OUT sensor
1 3 1
[ 14-53 ]
CN7 Wire_Harness Wire_Harness
Relay connector Relay connector 3
+5V 1 2 1 2 1 2 Registration sensor (send)
Registration sensor (send) 2 1 2 1 2 1
+5V 3
Top edge sensor 1 (send) 4
GND 5
Registration motor FG sensor 6 Wire_Harness Wire_Harness
Relay connector 3 Top edge sensor 1 (send)
+5V 7 2
2 1 2 2 (Also used for multiple paper
Registration sensor (receive) 8 1 1 1
1 2 feed detection
+5V 9
Top edge sensor 1 (receive) 10
6-13. PF-RELAY-PCB to Parts (CN4_5_6_7) wiring diagram
Paper feed tray unit +5V 11

PF-TRAY-PCB +5V 12
Top edge sensor 2 (receive) 13
Top edge sensor 2 (send) 14 Relay connector
CN2 CN1 CN5 +5V 15 4 1
NC 16 3 2
3 1 GND 1 NC 17 2 3 Registration motor FG sensor
Paper feed tray paper length 1 GND
2 2 Paper feed tray paper length detection sensor 2 NC 18 1 4
2 Paper feed tray paper length detection sensor
detection sensor 1 3 +5V 3 NC 19
3 Paper feed tray paper detection sensor
4 GND 4 4 Paper feed tray paper width potentiometer
5 Paper feed tray paper detection sensor 5 5 +5V
6 +5V
7 GND Wire_Harness Wire_Harness
3 8 Paper feed tray paper width potentiometer Relay connector Relay connector 3
2 9 +5V 2 1 2 1 2 Registration sensor (receive)
detection sensor 1 1 2 1 2 1
Relay connector Relay connector 3 Top edge sensor 1 (receive)
3 1 2 1 2 (Also used for multiple paper
3 2 2 1 2 1
Paper feed tray paper width 2 feed detection
1 3
potentiometer 1
Relay connector Wire_Harness

4 1 4
3 2 3 Top edge sensor 2
2 3 2
1 4 1
Rev.1.00
Option PCB Engine Control PCB
Recording data X3-OPTION-PCB X3-ENGINE-PCB
Wire_Harness
generating PCB Wire_Harness
Rev.1.00
80 CONCT-2 CONCT-2 1
1 1
X3-IP-PCB 79 Spare Output1 Spare Output1 2
2 2
78 GND GND 3
3 3
77 Roller reference sensor Roller reference sensor 4
4 4
76 GND GND 5
5 5
75 Driven roller side_phase B Driven roller side_phase B 6
6 6
74 GND GND 7
7 7
73 Driven roller side_phase A Driven roller side_phase A 8
8 8
72 GND GND 9
9 9
71 Top edge sensor 2 Top edge sensor 2 10
10 10
70 GND GND 11
11 11
69 Top edge sensor 1 Top edge sensor 1 12
12 12
68 GND GND 13
13 13
67 Spare Input Spare Input 14
14 14
GND GND
66 15 15 15
65 HD-PWR-ON HD-PWR-ON 16
16 16
64 GND GND 17
17 17
63 D15 D15 18
18 18
62 D14 D14 19
19 19
61 D13 D13 20
20 20
60 D12 D12 21
21 21
59 GND GND 22
22 22
58 D11 D11 23
23 23
57 D10 D10 24
24 24
56 D9 D9 25
25 25
55 D8 D8 26
26 26
54 GND GND 27
27 27
53 D7 D7 28
28 28
52 D6 D6 29
29 29
51 D5 D5 30
30 30
50 D4 D4 31
31 31
49 GND GND 32
32 32
48 D3 D3 33
33 33
47 D2 D2 34
34 34
46 D1 D1 35
35 35
45 D0 D0 36
36 36
44 GND GND 37
37 37
43 WAIT WAIT 38
38 38
42 Interrupt signal Interrupt signal 39
39 39 CN43
41 GND CN12 GND 40
40 CN13 40
CN4 40 RESET RESET 41
41 41
39 GND GND 42
42 42
38 WR WR 43
43 43
37 RD RD 44
44 44
36 GND GND 45
45 45
35 RD/WR RD/WR 46
46 46
34 CS CS 47
47 47
33 GND GND 48
48 48
32 A24 A24 49
49 49
6-14. Option PCB to boards wiring diagram
31 A23 A23 50
50 50
30 A22 A22 51
51 51
29 A21 A21 52
52 52
28 GND GND 53
53 53
27 A20 A20 54
54 54
26 A19 A19 55
55 55
[ 14-54 ]
25 A18 A18 56
56 56
24 A17 A17 57
57 57
23 GND GND 58
58 58
22 A16 A16 59
59 59
21 A15 A15 60
60 60
20 A14 A14 61
61 61
19 A13 A13 62
62 62
18 GND GND 63
63 63
17 A12 A12 64
64 64
16 A11 A11 65
65 65
15 A10 A10 66
66 66
14 A9 A9 67
67 67
13 GND GND 68
68 68
12 A8 A8 69
69 69
11 A7 A7 70
70 70
10 A6 A6 71
71 71
9 A5 A5 72
72 72
8 GND GND 73
73 73
7 A4 A4 74
74 74
6 A3 A3 75
75 75
5 A2 A2 76
76 76
4 A1 A1 77
77 77
3 GND GND 78
78 78
2 Spare output 2 Spare output 2 79
79 79
1 CONCT1 CONCT1 80
80 80
Wire_Harness
Option PCB connection detection

14 1
+5VSP
13 2
+5VSP
12 3
GND
11 4
GND
10 5
CS-OPTION
9 6
Relay connector A[0]
8 7
1 CN11 LWR CN45
1 +24VOP1 7 8
2 OPTION-INT
2 +24VOP2 6 9
3 RESET
To Power Supply Unit CN11/12 3 +30VOP1 CN1 5 10
4 Paper Feed criteria signal
4 GND (+24VOP1) 4 11
5 FU paper ejection flipper ON signal
5 GND (+30VOP1) 3 12
FU paper ejection sensor
2 13
Spare sensor
1 14
IF unit Wire_Harness
P8004
3 1 GND Printer side
Decurler (DEC) IN sensor 2 2 DEC_IN sensor
1 3 +5VSP
4 GND PWBA IF
5 DEC_OUT sensor
3 6 +5VSP
Decurler (DEC) OUT sensor 2 7 NC
1 8 NC
9 NC
Option PCB
10 NC X3-OPTION-PCB
11 NC Wire_Harness
12 NC Wire_Harness
13 NC P8001
14 NC 1 1 1 +30V-IL
NC 1 2 2 2 GND
P8003 GND 2 3 3 3 GND CN3
GND 6 8 GND NC 3 4 4 4 GND
CN2 GND 5 7 GND GND 4
LOCK 4 6 LOCK
Transport STRAT 3 5 STRAT
+5V 2 4 +5V
motor
GND 1 3 GND
2 NC
1 NC
+24V 1 1 10 1 Interlock switch2 (IN) +30V-IL
CN1 P8167
GND 2 2 9 2 GND
1 +24V 3 8 3 Interlock switch2 (OUT) +30V
2 GND 4 7 4 IF unit decurler motor_CLK
P8006 5 6 5 IF unit decurler motor_GAIN
Wire_Harness
6 5 6 IF unit decurler motor_DIR
1 7 4 7 IF unit decurler motor_LOCK
2 8 3 8 IF unit decurler motor_ON
3 9 2 9 +5VSP
4 10 1 10 GND
5 11 NC
6
12 NC
6-15. Finisher IF Unit wiring Diagram
7
8 CN2
1 12 13 +24VOP
9 P8002
2 11 14 AC relay control signal
10
11 CMD+ 12 3 10 15 CMD+
12 CMD- 11 4 9 16 CMD-
13 STA+ 10 5 8 17 STA+
14 STA- 9 6 7 18 STA-
15 /OUT_DET(GND) 8 7 6 19 /OUT_DET(GND)
16 IOT_EXIT_SNR 7 8 5 20 IOT_EXIT_SNR
17 PS_ENABLE 6 9 4 21 PS_ENABLE
18 NC 5 10 3 22 GND
19 4 11 2 23
[ 14-55 ]
NC Spare sensor
NC 3 12 1 24 +5V
P8005 NC 2
NC 1
1
2
3 5V-IL
Finisher Main PCB (PWBA-MAIN-D)

4 +24VRTN
5 +5VSP
6 +24VOP
NC 8
IF unit door interlock switch 1 IF unit decurler motor_CLK 7
Wire_Harness IF unit decurler motor_GAIN 6
IF unit decurler motor_DIR 5
1A 1A 4 4 IF unit decurler motor_LOCK 4
2A 2A 3 3 IF unit decurler motor_ON 3
1B 1B 2 2 +5VSP 2
2B 2B 1 1 CN2 GND 1
Decurler motor +30V 1

IF unit door interlock switch 2 2
CN1 GND
Wire_Harness
1A 1A
2A 2A 1 2
1B 1B 2 1 Wire_Harness
2B 2B Relay connector
PWB ASSY-AC RELAY 1 8
Wire_Harness 2 7
P8704
3 6
1
2 1 2 4 5
E 2
1 2 1 5 4
N 3
6 3
L 4 P8703
7 2
P8702 1 8 1
2
AC Power Inlet 3
Power Supply Unit Filter-PCB Wire_Harness

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
Rev.1.00
Option PCB
X3-OPTION-PCB
CN7 AF-I/F Cable2
Rev.1.00
FU paper ejection Unit CN4 Wire_Harness Relay connector Soldering
Wire_Harness Relay connector Wire_Harness GND 1 26 1 1
+24VOP CNDAT 2 25 2 2
6 1 22 1 FU paper ejection motor_phase A
5 2 21 2 FU paper ejection motor_phase B CENLAT 3 24 3 3
4 3 20 3 FU paper ejection motor_phase /A SECSCK 4 23 4 4
FU paper ejection wing motor 3 4 19 4 FU paper ejection motor_phase /B NC 5 22 5 5
2 5 18 5 NC NC 6 21 6 6
1 6 17 6 NC NC 7 20 7 7
7 16 7 NC /CNFN 8 19 8 8
8 15 8 +24V GND 9 18 9 9
9 14 9 FU paper ejection flipper solenoid signal +5VSP 10 17 10 10
Relay connector 10 13 10 FU paper ejection jump motor ON/OFF +5VSP 11 16 11 11
1 2 11 12 11 +24V GND 12 15 12 12
FU paper ejection flipper +24VOP 2 1 12 11 12 GND GND 13 14 13 13
13 10 13 FU paper ejection motor FG sensor signal +24VOP 14 13 14 14
14 9 14 +5V +24VOP 15 12 15 15
15 8 15 GND PGND 16 11 16 16
16 7 16 FU paper ejection wing HP sensor signal PGND 17 10 17 17
Relay connector 17 6 17 +5V NC 18 9 18 18
18 5 18 GND SENDAT 19 8 19 19
1 2 7 20
FU paper ejection jump motor +24VOP 19 4 19 FU paper ejection sensor signal SENLAT 20 20
2 1
20 3 20 +5V SENSCK 21 6 21 21
21 2 21 GND GND 22 5 22 22
22 1 22 FU paper ejection unit connect detect signal NC 23 4 23 23
Auto control stacking tray
NC 24 3 24 24
Connection detect 25 2 25 25
3 NC 26 1 26
FU paper ejection motor FG
2
sensor 1
Wire_Harness Relay connector CN6 Patlite (Signal tower) I/F connector

3 1 3
FU paper ejection wing HP +24VOP 1
2 2 2
sensor RED signal 2
1 3 1
YELLOW signal 3
GREEN signal 4
Wire_Harness Relay connector NC 5 Connection Terminals
3 1 3 NC 6
FU paper ejection sensor 2 2 Signal tower connection detection signal 7
6-16. Option PCB to options wiring Diagram
2
1 3 1 GND 8
[ 14-56 ]
CN14
CN2 NC 8
CLK 7 1 FU paper ejection unit transport motor_CLK
GAIN 6 2 FU paper ejection unit transport motor_GAIN
DIR 5 3 FU paper ejection unit transport motor_DIR
FU paper ejection unit LD 4 4 FU paper ejection unit transport motor_LD
transport motor ON 3 5 FU paper ejection unit transport motor_ON
+5V 2 6 +5V
GND 1 7 GND CN23
CN1 Wire_Harness Offset stapler unit
+30V 1 NC 14
+30VOP GND 2 NC 13
NC 12 CN1
CN16 NC 11 Relay connector
Input signal (Interrupt) 10 1 10 1 Input signal (Interrupt)
1 +30V NC 9 2 9 2 NC
2 GND Paper ejection signal 8 3 8 3 Paper ejection signal
Input port 2 7 4 7 4 Input port 2
Input port 1 6 5 6 5 Input port 1
Output port 2 5 6 5 6 Output port 2
Output port 1 4 7 4 7 Output port 1
NC 3 8 3 8 NC
GND 2 9 2 9 GND
Paperfeed siganal 1 10 1
CN5
1 +5V NC 28 CN2
2 NC 27 Relay connector
Paper feed signal
3 Paper ejection signal +5V 26 1 12 1 +5V
4 Copy busy signal CAN (+) 25 2 11 2 CAN (+)
5 Copy enable signal CAN (-) 24 3 10 3 CAN (-)
6 Size detection signal Power ON signal 23 4 9 4 Power ON signal
7 Color detection signal Output signal (Interrupt) 22 5 8 5 Output signal (Interrupt)
8 Duplex signal Connection detection 21 6 7 6 Connection detection
9 Serial TXD signal NC 20 7 6 7 NC
10 GND NC 19 8 5 8 NC
11 Serial RXD signal NC 18 9 4 9 NC
or
NC 17 10 3 10 NC
Coin Vendor Unit

Card Vendor Unit
12 Serial DTR signal
13 Connection detection signal GND 16 11 2 11 GND
14 GND +24VOP 15 12 1
FB Unit CS5-MAIN-PCB Controller PCB
CONTROLLER-PCB
Relay connector
CN12
1 1 4 1 FB_phase A CN2 CN4-7
2 2 3 2 FB_phase /A
ASM Motor 2 VBUS 1 1 VBUS VBUS 1
3 3 2 3 FB_phase B
4 4 1 D- 2 2 D- D- 2
4 FB_phase /B
D+ 3 3 D+ D+ 3
Kit
GND 4 4 GND GND 4

IC Card
CN10 USB USB
Authentication
1 1 Open sensor LED

Open sensor 2 2 SGND
3 3 Open sensor_OUT
4 Angle sensor LED CN9
5 SGND
6 Angle sensor_OUT LAN-MDI0+ 1
7 Scanner Fan LAN-MDI0- 2
1 8 PGND LAN-MDI1+ 3
Angle sensor 2 LAN-MDI1- 4
9 Scanner Fan AM
3 10 NC LAN-MDI2+ 5
11 NC LAN-MDI2- 6
12 NC LAN-MDI3+ 7
External
LAN-MDI3- 8
Controller
Relay connector
1 3 CN8 JP1 Ethernet
Scanner fan 2 2
3 1 1 GND 08 07 Connect to the port marked [Controller]
2 TXD 09 06
For 3 /RTS 10 05
4 RXD
6-17. Scanner Unit 1 wiring Diagram
debugging 5 /CTS 11 04
6 +3.3V 12 03
7 GND 13 02
14 01
CN4 Jumper settings
JP1-01:TCK
1 SGND JP1-02:/TRST
2 SGND JP1-03:TD0
3 +5V
4 +5V
JP1-04:/ASEBREAK
[ 14-57 ]
5 PGND JP1-05:TMS
6 PGND JP1-06:TD1
7 +24V JP1-07:/RESET
8 +24V JP1-08:GND
JP1-09:GND
CN5 JP1-10:GND
JP1-11:+3.3V
1 RXD JP1-12:GND REMOTE 1
2 TXD JP1-13:GND GND 2
3 /CTS JP1-14:GND GND 3
4 /RTS +5V 4
5 RDS +5V 5
Duplex AF Unit
6 NC PGND 6
7 EMPS PGND 7
8 SGND +24V 8
9 NC +24V 9
1
2
3 Power Supply Unit
4
REMOTE 9
GND 8
AC Power Switch 1 GND 7
2 +5V 6
3 +5V 5
PGND 4
AC Power Inlet PGND 3
+24V 2
+24V 1
E
N
L
Rev.1.00
CS5-MAIN-PCB PBA,LINK CN1 CN1 PBA,CCD
CN11 CN5 1 RESERVE 1
2 LED ON/OFF 2
LED ON/OFF 1 1 LED_PWM
3 3
2 2
Rev.1.00
SGND 4 SGND 4
SD-OUT 3 3 LVD-00-P
5 5
SD-CLK 4 4 LVD-00-N
6 6
/RESET 5 5 SGND
7 7
SGND 6 6 LVD-01-P
8 8
TRIG 7 7 LVD-01-N PBA,LED-LAMP
9 9 PBA,LED-DRIVE
SGND 8 8 SGND
10 10
LVD-04-N 9 9 LVD-02-P
11 11
LVD-04-P 10 10 LVD-02-N
12 12
SGND 11 11 SGND CN3
13 13
LVD-03-N 12 12 LVCK-P
14 14
LVD-03-P 13 13 LVCK-N
15 15 LED+24V
SGND 14 14 SGND 1 6
16 16
LVD-03-N 15 15 LVD-03-P LED+24V
17 17 2 5
LVD-03-P 16 16 LVD-03-N
18 18 LED_GND
SGND 17 17 SGND 3 4
19 19 LED_GND
LVCK-N 18 18 LVD-04-P
20 20 4 3
LVCK-P 19 19 LVD-04-N LED_PWM
21 21
SGND 20 20 SGND 5 2
22 22 LED_ON/OFF
LVD-01N 21 21 TRIG 6 1
23 23
LVD-01P 22 22 /RESET
24 24
SGND 23 23 SGND
25 25
LVD-00N 24 24 SDE-NB
26 26
LVD-00P 25 25 SDE-CLK Anode
27 27 1 1
SGND 26 26 SD-IN
28 28 Anode
HOME_POSITION_SENSOR 27 27 SD-OUT 2 2
29 29 Anode
SGND 28 28 SGND
30 30 3 3
LED_R 29 29 Cathode
LED_G 30 30 4 4
SGND 31 31 Cathode
32 32 CN2 CN2 5 5
SD_LATCH Cathode
SD_IN 33 33 L+24V
6 6
34 34 1 1
SGND L+24V
35 35 2 2
+5V L+24V
36 36 3 3
+5V L+24V
37 37 4 4
SGND L+24V
38 38 5 5
+24V L_GND
39 39 6 6
+24V L_GND
40 40 7 7
SGND L_GND
41 41 8 8
SGND L_GND
42 42 9 9
LED_PWM L_GND
43 43 10 10
SGND SGND
44 44 11 11
SD-IN SGND
45 45 12 12
/SDEN8 +5V
46 46 13 13
SGND +5V
6-18. Scanner Unit 2 wiring Diagram
47 47 14 14
SGND +5V
48 48 15 15
SGND +5V
49 49 16 16
SGND SGND
50 50 17 17
SGND SGND
51 51 18 18
SGND SGND
52 52 19 19
SGND +3.3V
53 53 20 20
SGND +3.3V
54 54 21 21
SGND +3.3V
SGND 55 55 22 22
23 +3.3V 23
SGND 56 56 SGND
SGND 57 57 24 24
25 SGND 25
SGND 58 58 SGND
SGND 59 59 26 26
27 +10V 27
SGND 60 60 +10V
SGND 61 61 28 28
29 SGND 29
SGND 62 62 SGND
[ 14-58 ]
SGND 63 63 30 30
SGND 64 64
SGND 65 65
SGND 66 66
SGND 67 67 CN6
SGND 68 68
HOME POSITION SENSOR LED 69 69 +5V 1 3 1
SGND 70 70
71 71 Original size detection sensor 7 signal 2 2 2 Original size detection sensor 7
SGND
SGND 72 72 SGND 3 1 3
SD_CLK 73 73 4
74 74
+5V
SGND
+5V 75 75 Original size detection sensor 6 signal 5
+5V 76 76 SGND 6 3 1
SGND 77 77 2 2 Original size detection sensor 6
+24V 78 78 +5V 7
+24V 79 79 Original size detection sensor 5 signal 8 1 3
SGND 80 80 9
SGND
3 1
2 2 Original size detection sensor 5
1 3
PBA, LED CN3 CN4
SGND 1 1 SGND +5V 1 3 1
LED_G 2 2 LED_G Original size detection sensor 2 signal 2 2 2 Original size detection sensor 2
LED_R 3 3 LED_R SGND 3 1 3
4 Home position sensor LED +5V 4
5 SGND Original size detection sensor 3 signal 5
6 Home position sensor signal SGND 6 3 1
+5V 7 2 2 Original size detection sensor 3
Original size detection sensor 4 signal 8 1 3
SGND 9
NC 10
3 1
3 2 2 Original size detection sensor 4
Scanner home position sensor 2 1 3
1
CN7
SGND 1
Paper sensor signal 2 Paper sensor
+5V 3
7. Downloading Firmware Data
7-1. Types and Structure of Firmware Data

Firmware data is classified into the following types. The data is organized in a "SNALL" firmware data package
and transferred via a USB memory device.
No.in Device SNALL_V123456

Firmware Name Relevant Board
figure Downloaded to
Header section (text data)
(1) PMS PMS Controller PCB Haed disk drive
Image processing External Flash Data downloaded to the controller system
(2) FPGA PMS
PCB memory
External Flash Data downloaded to the engine system
(3) SH2A
memory SH2A FPGA
Internal Flash
(4) ENG DSP DSP TAG
Engine control PCB memory
TAG Data downloaded to the panel system
SNALL
Internal Flash 78KO

(5) micro
memory
controller Data downloaded to the finisher system
SFX(D)
Internal Flash
(6) PNL 78KO Operation panel unit Data downloaded to the scanner system
memory
FB AF
(7) BAF SFX(D) Finisher Flash
External Flash
(8) FB
memory
BSM Scanner
Internal Flash
(9) AF
memory

Numeric keypad PCB
Mode button PCB Scanner Finisher
LED backlight
78KO
SD
(7)
(8) (9)
(6)
Various options
USB
Decouple PCB
USB Option PCB
USB
memory RMGA2 RFID
Controller PCB
Power supply
unit
Memory (3)
CPU
Sensors, switches, motors
CIS FLASH
HDD (CPU)
(1)
& actuators
Engine control PCB

Recording data (4)
Generating PCB
SH2A DSP
FPGA (5)
FLASH
(FPGA)
(2)
Paper feed
relay PCB
Head control PCB CPU Internal paper feed

Drive PCB
Paper Tray
PCB
Sensors, switches, motors
& actuators
Sensors & switches
[ 14-59 ] Rev.1.00
7-2. Sequence of Downloading Firmware Data

1. The SNALL firmware data package in the USB memory device is saved to the hard disk (HDD) in the
controller PCB unit, but scanner-related firmware (8) and (9) is managed by the scanner itself.
2. Downloading of firmware in the firmware data package related to the controller (PMS-(1)) and control panel
(78KO-(6)) is controlled by the controller PCB.
3. Firmware related to the engine and finisher is sent via memory to the FPGA of the image processing PCB,
and from the FPGA to the CPU (SH2A) of the engine control PCB.
4. The following firmware is downloaded under control of the CPU (SH2A), as shown in the above figure.
SH2A firmware (3)
DSP firmware (4)
TAG microcontroller firmware (5)
FPGA firmware (2)
5. Finisher firmware (7) is sent from SH2A to the finisher via the option PCB, and from this point, downloaded
by the finisher.
7-3. Cautions in Downloading Firmware Data

1. The USB memory stick should contain only one version of SNALL firmware package data and nothing else.
1) Never mix other version SNALL firmware package data in the same USB memory stick.
2) Never mix other machine firmware package data in the same USB memory stick, especially the HC
firmware, as the machine cannot distinguish the ComColor firmware from the HC firmware.
2. Never turn OFF the machine power while the machine firmware is being downloaded on the machine.
3. The SNALL firmware is a TGZ file. If the TGZ file is compressed to ZIP or any other different file name, the
firmware will not download on the machine nor will it download if the TGZ file is extracted. The SNALL data
file must have the .tgz extension file name.
Rev.1.00 [ 14-60 ]
7-4. Firmware Data Downloading Instruction

Preparing for Download
1. Check that the machine power is OFF.
2. Insert an USB memory device containing the SNALL (firmware data package) file in any one of the USB
port on the ComColor machine.
3. Turn ON the machine power. (The unit now starts to read data on the USB memory device.)
4. If an error is detected in the package data, processing stops and the error (S94 or S95) is displayed. If no
error is detected, following panel message is displayed and the unit awaits your command.
UConfirm
01423 ⛎⚕บ਄㒢૏⟎⒖േ 㐽ߓࠆ UDownloading the firmware
01423 ⛎⚕บ਄㒢૏⟎⒖േ 㐽ߓࠆ
Safe to remove the USB flash drive.
Current version New version
஗ᱛਛ SNALL 10.10.10
஗ᱛਛ
20. 0.01
SNALL 10.10.10 SNALL 20. 0.01
-SNPS 20.20.20 30. 0.01
-SNPS 20.20.20 -SNPS 30. 0.01
-SNEG 0.10. 1 0.20. 1
-SNEG 0.10. 1 -SNEG 0.20. 1
-SNPL 0.20. 1 0.30. 1
-SNPL 0.20. 1 -SNPL 0.30. 1
BSM 1.10. 1 1.20. 1
BSM 1.10. 1 BSM 1.20. 1
BAF 1. 1. 1 1. 2. 1
BAF 1. 1. 1 BAF 1. 2. 1
[START key] Downloads only the differential.

[STOP key] Downloads all by overwriting.
[RESET key] Cancels download.
Downloading the Firmware

5. Looking at the panel display (as shown by above LEFT photograph), check the Current version and New
version firmware information, select one of the three Keys to press.
•To cancel downloading, press the Reset key on the operation panel.
•To download only the different firmware between the new version and current version, press the Start key
on the operation panel.
•To replace all firmware with the new version, press the Stop key on the operation panel.
A message is displayed during the download, indicating that downloading is in progress.
6. The panel display (as shown by above RIGHT photograph) is displayed as the firmware download starts by
pressing either the Start or Stop key.
At the same time the downloading starts, the message “Safe to remove the USB flash drive.” is displayed
on the top of the screen. The USB memory stick should be pulled out from the USB port at this time.
7. If an error occurs when processing the download, the error (S94 or S95) is displayed.
Downloading Completed
When the firmware downloading completes, the machine automatically reboots.
[ 14-61 ] Rev.1.00
8. PCB Replacements
8-1. PCB Location and Names
X3-OPTION-PCB
Controller
Decouple
PCB PCB
X3-ENGINE-PCB
X3-IP-PCB
X3-I-PF
-PCB
Power suuply Unit
PS25-NWW
Rev.1.00 [ 14-62 ]
Controller BOX
Hard Disk (HDD)
Controller PCB (PMS)
Recording data
generating PCB
[ 14-63 ] Rev.1.00
NOTE before going to the HDD or Engine control PCB replacement :
Checking the machine firmware version
When the HDD or Engine Control PCB is replaced, same version firmware must be installed on the replaced
HDD or Engine Control PCB.
If it happens that the machine does not boot up and there is no reference as to which machine firmware was in
the machine, following procedure will show the machine firmware version right after the HDD or Engine Control
PCB is replaced.
1. Confirm that the machine power stays OFF when the HDD or Engine Control PCB is replaced.
2. With the machine power still OFF, insert USB memory stick into the USB port on the machine, which contains
the SNALL machine firmware version, which is guessed to be the one previously installed on the machine.
3. Turn ON the machine power.
4. The machine starts to communicate with the USB memory stick and then displays the following panel display.
UConfirm
01423 ⛎⚕บ਄㒢૏⟎⒖േ 㐽ߓࠆ
Current version New version

஗ᱛਛ
SNALL 10.10.10 SNALL 20. 0.01
-SNPS 20.20.20 -SNPS 30. 0.01
-SNEG 0.10. 1 -SNEG 0.20. 1
-SNPL 0.20. 1 -SNPL 0.30. 1
BSM 1.10. 1 BSM 1.20. 1
BAF 1. 1. 1 BAF 1. 2. 1
[START key] Downloads only the differential.

[STOP key] Downloads all by overwriting.
[RESET key] Cancels download.
5. The machine firmware version listed on the left-hand side <Current version> is the version now in the
machine, and those listed on the right-hand side <New version> is the version in the USB memory stick, as
per described on page 15-47 of this Chapter.
6.
> When the HDD is replaced :
Compare the firmware version of the Engine control PCB between the Current and New.
If the firmware program version for the Engine control PCB are the same between the two, the firmware to
install is the one in the USB memory stick.
If the two are different, the correct SNALL firmware program package version must be searched.
The chart given on the next page can be referred to find the SNALL machine firmware program package
version from the Engine control PCB firmware version.
> When the Engine control PCB is replaced :
The procedure will be the same as when the HDD is replaced, except that now the firmware version for the
HDD needs to be referred.
The same chart given on the next page can be used to find the SNALL machine firmware program package
version from the HDD firmware version.
Rev.1.00 [ 14-64 ]
7. If the USB memory stick contains the correct machine firmware version, proceed with the firmware
installation.
8. If the USB memory stick does not contain the correct machine firmware, press the RESET Key to cancel the
firmware downloading.
Press the Power button on the machine operation panel and turn OFF the machine.
Remove the USB memory stick from the machine.
Insert USB memory stick, with the correct SNALL machine program firmware package, on the machine and
install the machine firmware.
CAUTION:
At any time until the correct machine firmware installation is completed, do not perform any operation on the machine,
such as test mode mechanical operation, normal printing operation, etc.
[ 14-65 ] Rev.1.00
8-2. Hard Disk (HDD) Replacement

Do not replace the Hard Disk and Engine Control PCB at the same time.
Either one must be left on the machine while the other is replaced.
This is to allow existing Test Mode setting backup data to transfer from the existing Hard Disk or Engine Control PCB
to the new Hard Disk or Engine Control PCB.
If replacing the HDD due to it being unstable, but still operational, Test Mode No. 460 [HDD Value Store] and No.
461 [HDD Value Restore] are two test modes to consider using to save and restore the Admin. user settings on
the machine <refer to the test mode chapter of this technical manual.>
Brand new Hard Disk (spare part HDD) should be used for the replacement.
1. Turn OFF the machine power.
2. Open the Controller box top cover.
3. Remove the Hard Disk with the brackets attached, from the Controller box. (Shouldered screws x 4 pcs)
4. Remove the Hard Disk from the brackets. (Shouldered screws x 4 pcs)
5. Mount the new Hard Disk on the machine
6. install machine firmware for the Controller (PMS).
Caution:
Install the same version firmware as the previous Hard Disk.
The firmware package version must match with that of the Engine Control PCB or the machine may face problem with
its performance.
< Refer also to page 15-47 for the RESTRICTION information in upgrading the machine firmware.>
7. The machine reboots automatically and the Setup Wizard starts. Go through the Setup Wizard.
If the Setup Wizard starts up in Japanese Language, follow the instruction given on pages from 15-55 to 15-60
[Hard Disk (HDD) Replacement - Supplementary Information]
- This procedure should be done before going into next step to ensure that if any error message displays from
the next step on, the error message is in understandable language.
< Disregard pages from 15-53 to 15-58 if the Setup Wizard starts up in English Language.>
8. After the machine starts up, upgrade the machine firmware package version to 5.12 or above in order to
activate Test Mode No. 0510 (next step).
< Disregard this step-8 if the machine firmware program package version is already SNALL 5.12.2 or above.>
9. After confirming that the machine firmware is SNALL 5.12.2 or above, activate Test Mode No. 0510.
< Make sure to activate Test Mode No. 0510 in this step-9 regardless of whether the Setup Wizard came out in English or in
Japanese Language in above step-6. Test Mode No. 0510 checks whether the machine is International Mode or Japanese Model
and sends the information to the HDD. >
10. Reboot the machine.

< The Setup Wizard will start again, this time in English Language. Go through the Setup Wizard gain.>
Hard Disk (HDD) Shouldered screws x 4 pcs. Mounting screws x 4 pcs.
Rev.1.00 [ 14-66 ]
CONCEPT < Hard Disk (HDD) Replacement >

1 : Damgaged Hard Disk (HDD) removed.
Damaged HDD removed.

HARD DISK (HDD) ENGINE CONTROL PCB
Engine Control PCB Data Backup Area Adjustment Parameter Area

Test Mode setting on Engine Control PCB Test Mode setting on Engine Control PCB
(Image adjustment Test Modes included) (Image adjustment Test Modes included)
Counters Counters
User Information Area
Admin. settings & User settings Adjustment Parameter Backup Area

Test Mode setting on Engine Control PCB
Image Adjustment Parameter Backup Area by (Image adjustment Test Modes included)
Test Mode No. 440.
Counters
Image Adjustment Parameter
Firmware Install Area Firmware Install Area
PMS (Controller) Firmware Engine Firmware
2-1 : Hard Disk (HDD) replaced and if machine powered back ON without firmware
< Brand new Spare Part >
downloading.

Counters Automatically Counters

restored to the
limit of the existing
firmware in HDD.
Default Admin. settings & User settings Adjustment Parameter Backup Area
< Factory Default of the very early Firmware> Test Mode setting on Engine Control PCB
Test Mode No. 440.
Counters
PMS (Controller) default (low) Firmware Engine Firmware

< Factory Default very early firmware version>
[ 14-67 ] Rev.1.00
2-2 : Hard Disk (HDD) replaced and if correct machine firmware downloaded <before
auto-reboot>.

Counters Counters
< Factory Default of the very early Firmware> Test Mode setting on Engine Control PCB
Test Mode No. 440.
Counters
PMS (Controller) Firmware just installed. Engine Firmware
3 : After auto-rebooting with the correct machine firmware downloaded.


Counters Fully restored Counters
< Factory Default of the Firmware just installed.> Test Mode setting on Engine Control PCB
Test Mode No. 440.
Counters
PMS (Controller) Firmware just installed Engine Firmware
The data lost in replacing the Hard Disk. <There are no backup data for these items>
• Test Modes dedicated to the Controller (Test Mode Numbers 07xx).
• Admin. settings and other User settings.
• <Test Mode No. 460 before and No. 461 after the HDD replacement, if the former HDD is still
operational before the replacement, can restore the Admin. and User settings.>
• User data (Users, Print jobs, Folder data, Scaner files).
Rev.1.00 [ 14-68 ]
Hard Disk (HDD) Replacement - Supplementary Information
When turning the machine power ON for the first time, after the new spare part Hard Disk replacement, the
machine touch panel shows the display in Japanese Language (Setup Wizard display).
The panel display is converted into English Language only after the English Language is selected on the Setup
Wizard.
Make sure that the English Language or your selection of language is selected during the Setup Wizard input
procedure through the Japanese Language Setup Wizard screen.
If done correctly, the machine will display the selected Language thereafter.
The first display to show up on the operation panel of the ComColor, after the replacement of the Hard Disk, is a
Setup Wizard display in Japanese Language.
In order that the Japanese Language Display is understood, Japanese & English display comparison follows on
the next page.
[ 14-69 ] Rev.1.00
The Japanese Language display, shown on the left hand side of the page, will display when the ComColor
machine is powered ON for the first time after the Hard Disk replacement.
The English Language display, shown on the right hand side of the page, is the English reference of the
Japanese Language display on the left.
1. Push the Next button on the following display.
2. Select English or the Language of your choice, and then push the Next button on the following display.Since the
spare part Hard Disk contains low version machine firmware, you may not get your selection of language. In that
case, select your choice from those available, and re-select your language from the Admin setting after updating
the firmware on the machine.
CAUTION ! : If you do not select English or selection of your language, or if you press the Cancel button on this
display, you will be stuck with the Japanese Language again. Select the choice of your language and press the Next
button.
3. Select inch and then push the Next button on the following display.
NOTE: It is of no problem if the Next button is pushed with a wrong selection. Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZ-
ARD INITIALIZE] later and choose the correct selection or go into the Admin to make the selection.
CAUTION ! : Do not press the Cancel button.

The Setup Wizard display closes and you will be stuck with the Japanese Language again.
Rev.1.00 [ 14-70 ]
4. Select the correct Time Zone and then push the Next button on the following display.
NOTE: It is of no problem if the Next button is pushed with a wrong selection.
Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE] later and choose the correct selection.

5. Input the correct Clock/Date and then push the Next button on the following display.
NOTE: It is of no problem if the Next button is pushed with wrong input.
Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE] later and input the correct Clock/Date or go into the Admin to
set the Clock/Date.

The Setup Wizard display closes and you will be stuck with theJapanese Language again.
6. Input the Network Setting and then push the Next button on the following display.
NOTE: It is of no problem if the Next button is pushed without the network information.
The network information can be input in the machine later. Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE]
later and input the network setting or go into the Admin to input the network setting.

[ 14-71 ] Rev.1.00
7. Input the Function Key Entry and then push the Next button on the following display.
NOTE: It is of no problem if the Next button is pushed without entering the Function Key Entry selection.
Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE] later and input the Function Key entry or go into the Admin to
input the Function key setting.
8. Input the Color Mode and then push the Next button on the following display.
NOTE: It is of no problem if the Next button is pushed without making the Color Mode selection.
Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE] later and make the Color Mode selection if needed.
The selection can also be made on the user mode display.

9. Select the Output Tray and then push the Next button on the following display.
NOTE: It is of no problem if the Next button is pushed without making the Output Tray selection.
Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE] later and make the selection or go into the Admin to input the
selection.
Rev.1.00 [ 14-72 ]
10. Make the Feed Tray auto/manual selection and then push the Next button on the following display.
NOTE: It is of no problem if the Next button is pushed without making the selection.
Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE] later and make the selection.
The setting can also be made on the user mode display.
11. Select the Login Setting and then push the Next button on the following display.
Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE] later and make the selection or go into the Admin to make the
setting selection.

12. Select the Security Level and then push the Next button on the following display.
Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE] later and make the selection.

[ 14-73 ] Rev.1.00
13. Select the User Category and then push the OK button on the following display.
NOTE: It is of no problem if the OK button is pushed without making the selection.

Use test mode No. 505 [SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE] later and make the selection if needed.

14. The Setup Wizard ends and the user operation display is shown.
NOTE: The operation panel language is changed to the Language you have selected. (Below is a sample of English
Language.)
After the above [Select Operation mode] panel display appears, turn OFF the machine power, and then proceed
with the machine Firmware upgrading procedure.
- END -
Rev.1.00 [ 14-74 ]
8-3. Controller PCB (PMS PCB) Replacement

3. Disconnect wire harnesses and metal beam over the Controller PCB.
4. Remove the Controller PCB from the Controller box. (Screws x 4 pcs)
5. Make sure to mount the Battery and Main Memory from the existing PCB onto the new PCB.
6. Install the new Controller PCB in the Controller box.
7. Reconnect all the wire harness, metal beam, and then close the Controller box top cover.
8. Turn ON the machine power.
9. Go into Admin. and set the date and time.
screw screw
Inside of the controller box

RGB
Memory
CPU
LAN
LAN
USB USB USB USB
ICH
Controller PCB
LineOut
Connect to Recording Data Generating PCB
Controller PCB
screw screw
[ 14-75 ] Rev.1.00
8-4. X3-IP-PCB (Recording data generating PCB) Replacement

3. Disconnect wire harnesses from the Recording data generating PCB.
4. Remove the Recording data generating PCB. (Screws x 2 pcs)
5. Mount the new Recording data generating PCB.
6. Connect the wire harnesses and mount the Controller box top cover.
7. Install the machine firmware in the Recording data generating PCB.
Caution:
Install the same version firmware as the previous PCB.
The firmware package version must match with that of the Engine Control PCB and Hard Disk, or the machine may
face problem with its performance.
X3-IP-PCB (Recording data generating PCB)
Screw Screw
8-5. Head Drive PCB Replacement

Refer to the instructions given on Chapter 11-A.
<No special instructions, but make sure that the power is OFF.>
Make sure not to damage the electrical flat cables.
Rev.1.00 [ 14-76 ]
8-6. Engine Control PCB Replacement

Do not replace the Hard Disk and Engine Control PCB at the same time.
Either one must be left on the machine while the other is replaced.
This is to allow existing Test Mode setting backup data to transfer from the existing Hard Disk or Engine Control PCB
to the new Hard Disk or Engine Control PCB.
Brand new Engine control PCB (spare part PCB) should be used for replacement.

2. Disconnect wire harnesses from the Engine Control PCB.
NOTE:If Option PCB is mounted on the Engine Control PCB, remove the Option PCB from the Engine Control PCB.
3. Remove the existing Engine Control PCB and mount the new PCB. (Screws x 10 pcs)
4. Connect the wire harnesses and mount the Option PCB if it existed.
5. Install the machine firmware in the Engine Control PCB.
Caution:
Install the same version firmware as the previous PCB.
The firmware package version must match with that of the Image Processing PCB and Hard Disk, or the machine
may face problem with its performance.
6. When the machine reboots automatically after the firmware downloading, the Total Counter information and all
the engine control related Test Mode settings, which are automatically saved in the Hard Disk in normal daily use
of the machine, will automatically transfer into the FLASH Memory of the Engine Control PCB.
NOTE: When replacing the Engine Control PCB on a brand new out-of-box machine, with machine power never turned ON. -
Out-of-Factory Default Test Mode Settings are stored in the HDD from those machines shipped with machine firm-
ware SNALL 7.16.3 installed.
<Refer to Test Mode No. 451 [Engine Factory Value Restore]. on the Test Mode chapter.>
Since the machine, on which the machine power is never turned ON, the HDD has not communicated with the Engine
Control PCB, and therefore has no backup test mode settings saved from the Engine Control PCB.
For this reason, the factory default test mode setting data is installed in the HDD when the machine is shipped.
IMPORTANT:
Test Mode No. 451 should not be applied on a machine on which the machine power had turned ON once and ma-
chine had booted correctly.
HDD then already has communicated with the Engine Control PCB and has the test modes settings copied from the
Engine Control PCB.
screw screw
screw
Option PCB
screw (if mounted) screw
screw
screw
Engine Control PCB
screw screw
screw
[ 14-77 ] Rev.1.00
CONCEPT < Engine Control PCB Replacement >

Step 1 : Engine control PCB removal
Damaged Engine Control PCB removed.

Counters Counters

Test Mode No. 440.
Counters
Step 2 : Engine control PCB replaced, but machine power still OFF.

Counters Counters

Test Mode No. 440.
Counters
< Engine Control PCB is empty of any information.>
Rev.1.00 [ 14-78 ]
Step 3 : Firmware equivalent to the removed PCB is installed (before auto-reboot).

Counters Counters

Test Mode No. 440.
Counters
PMS (Controller) Firmware Engine Firmware just installed.
Step 4 : After auto-rebooting with the correct machine firmware downloaded.

Test Mode setting on Engine Control PCB Automatically Test Mode setting on Engine Control PCB
(Image adjustment Test Modes included) restored (Image adjustment Test Modes included)
Au re
Counters Counters
are restored
to st
Same data
from HDD.
m or
at ed
ic
al
ly

Test Mode No. 440.
Counters
PMS (Controller) Firmware Engine Firmware just installed.
[ 14-79 ] Rev.1.00
8-7. Power Supply Unit Replacement

2. Wait until all the electrical power is discharged out from the condensers on the Power Supply Unit.
< Refer to page No.1-3 of the Chapter 1 of this technical manual for the cautions.>
3. Disconnect all the wire harness from the Power Supply Unit.
4. Replace the existing Power Supply Unit with the new one. (Screws x 11 pcs)
Caution:
Do not touch the components on the existing Power Supply PCB, as they may still be electrically charged.
screw Power Supply Unit

screw
screw
screw
screw
screw
screw
screw
screw screw screw
Rev.1.00 [ 14-80 ]
Panel Messages
Chapter 15. Panel Messages

Contents
1. Error Code Display ....................................................................................................... 15-2
1-1. Error Type ............................................................................................................................... 15-3
1-2. Error Point ............................................................................................................................... 15-5
1-3. Variation Code ........................................................................................................................ 15-5
2. ComColor Paper Jams ................................................................................................. 15-6
2-1. Reason for Jams ..................................................................................................................... 15-6
2-2. Position of Paper Still in Printer .............................................................................................. 15-6
2-3. Requirements to Clear Jams, with Respect to Positions of Paper Still in Printer ................... 15-7
3. List of Error Types ........................................................................................................ 15-8

3-1. Service Call Errors (S) ............................................................................................................ 15-8
3-2. Unit Errors (U) ......................................................................................................................... 15-8
3-3. Warnings (W) .......................................................................................................................... 15-9
3-4. Jam Errors (X)....................................................................................................................... 15-10
3-5. Supply Errors (Y) ...................................................................................................................15-11
3-6. Loading/Interlock Detection Errors (Z) ...................................................................................15-11
3-7. Information Messages (I) .......................................................................................................15-11
4. Error Code Display and Details ................................................................................. 15-12
4-1. Service Call Errors (S) .......................................................................................................... 15-12
4-2. Unit Errors (U) ....................................................................................................................... 15-39
4-3. Warnings (W) ........................................................................................................................ 15-52
4-4. Jam Errors (X)....................................................................................................................... 15-82
4-5. Supply Errors (Y) .................................................................................................................. 15-91
4-6. Loading/Interlock Detection Errors (Z) .................................................................................. 15-93
4-7. Information Messages (I) ...................................................................................................... 15-98
5. Error Code Point / Page Search .............................................................................. 15-100
6. OPTION Paper Jams ................................................................................................. 15-107
6-1. Requirements to Clear Jams in Finisher .............................................................................. 15107
6-2. Requirements to Clear Jams in various options ................................................................. 15-108
6-2-1. Requirements to Clear Jams in Offset Stapler ............................................................ 15-108
6-2-2. Requirements to Clear Jams in High Capacity Feeder ............................................... 15-108
6-2-3. Requirements to Clear Jams in High Capacity Stacker .............................................. 15-109
6-2-4. Requirements to Clear Jams in Perfect Binder ............................................................15-110
6-2-5. Requirements to Clear Jams in Mail Maker .................................................................15-111
[ 15-1 ]
Panel Messages
1. Error Code Display

Error display consists of these three elements.
1) Error type: Classification based on how to clear errors (from the panel display) and similar criteria
2) Error point: Errors are numbered according to where they occur
3) Variation code: An attribute of the error point, this element indicates distinguishing details of errors,
based on where the detecting program is implemented or other criteria
To understand the nature of errors, you can find the error point and variation code in the section "Error Code
Display Details," organized by error type.
Example: Display for S04-2130 (no variation code)
Error Type Error Point
S04 2130
Example of display on the panel
S04-2130
!!System Error!!
Reboot by press the Sub Power Key
If recovery has failed,
call service.
Example: Display for S98-18111-1 (with variation code)
Error Type Error Point
S98 1811 1
Variation Code
[ 15-2 ]
Panel Messages
1-1. Error Type

Error types are a combination of a class code and subdivision code.
1. Class codes are a single letter indicating the type of error: S, U, Z, X, Y, W, or I.
2. Severity of errors ranges from "S" (most critical) to "I" (least critical), with some exceptions.
3. Subdivision codes are two-digit numbers in the range 01–99 that further classify errors.
S Service Call Errors

A problem affecting the system as a whole has been detected, for which the
fundamental solution cannot be implemented by users alone.
Details
(Problems in independent units, which do not affect the system as a whole, for which
fundamental solutions are not possible are classified as service call errors.)
Turn the printer OFF or follow instructions on the operation panel to clear the problem.
Solution
However, a permanent solution will require repair by a service technician.
Notification Users are notified immediately, in all operating modes.
No operating modes can be accessed until the error is cleared except test modes,
Operation
which are accessible even during service call errors.
Resuming Jobs It is not possible to resume jobs interrupted by the error.
Mechanical operations are promptly stopped when these errors occur, to avoid
Other
causing other damage.
U Unit Errors
A problem affecting the system as a whole has been detected, for which the
fundamental solution cannot be implemented by users alone.
Details
(Problems in independent units, which do not affect the system as a whole, for which
fundamental solutions are not possible are classified as unit errors.)
Turn the printer OFF or follow instructions on the operation panel to clear the problem.
Solution
However, a permanent solution will require repair by a service technician.
Notification Users are notified immediately, in all operating modes.
No operating modes can be accessed until the error is cleared except test modes,
Operation
which are accessible even during unit errors.
Resuming Jobs It is not possible to resume jobs interrupted by the error.
Other
Z Loading/Interlock Detection Error
A problem has been detected by the interlock system, or a cover has been opened
Details
that does not interfere with operation.
Users resolve these errors by restoring the interlock system to normal status or by
Solution
closing the cover that does not interfere with operation.
Users are only notified in modes where there is a possibility that the relevant unit
may be used. If users switch to a mode in which the unit is not used, notification is
Notification
canceled. Note that even in modes where the unit is not used, error status can be
checked by referring to error LEDs.
Only operating modes that do not use the unit can be accessed until the error is
Operation
cleared.
Resuming Jobs It is possible to resume jobs interrupted by the error.
Other
[ 15-3 ]
Panel Messages
X Jam Errors
Details A problem has occurred that prevents normal paper transfer.
Solution Users resolve these errors.
Notification
canceled. Note that even in modes where the unit is not used, error status can be
Only operating modes that do not use the unit can be accessed until the error is
Operation
cleared.
Other
Y Supply Errors
Details Consumables must be replaced or waste material must be removed.
After the condition of the error occurs, normal operation is continued to the extent
Other
possible until a convenient time to stop processing.
I Information
A situation has occurred that users must be informed about, such as the time for
Details
regular part replacement.
Users respond to the tip, which can be cleared by users through panel operations.
Solution
However, a permanent solution will require service by a service technician.
Notification
canceled. Note that even in modes where the unit is not used, information status can
be checked by referring to error LEDs.
Operation Conditions for information messages do not affect current processing.
W Warnings
Details A problem has occurred that users must be warned about.
Solution Users respond to warnings, which can be cleared by users through panel operations.
Notification
canceled. Note that even in modes where the unit is not used, warning status can be
After the condition of the warning occurs, normal operation is continued to the extent
Operation
possible until a convenient time to stop processing.
It is possible to resume jobs interrupted by the warning. (However, some warnings
Resuming Jobs
prevent jobs from being resumed.)
[ 15-4 ]
Panel Messages
1-2. Error Point

Subdivisions of error points are as follows.
Error Point Associated System

Main unit (PMS or other system (power supply, hardware, software, or operation
0001 - 0999
panel))
1000 - 1999 Engine system (standard paper transfer system)
2000 - 2499 Print head system (print head, ink)
2500 - 2999 Reserved
Optional paper ejection system (SFX multi-finisher, auto stacking tray, and wide
3000 - 3999
stacking tray)
4000 - 4499 Scanner system (AF and FB)
4500 - 4999 Reserved
5000 - 5499 External controller system
5500 - 5999 Other optional equipments
6000 - 6999 Security system
7000 - 7499 Computer system (printer driver, console, or utility applications)
7500 - 9999 Unspecified
1-3. Variation Code

A lower-level attribute of the error point, this single-digit number (1–9) indicates distinguishing details such as the
detecting program. No variation code is shown in the case of errors without variations.
[ 15-5 ]
Panel Messages
2. ComColor Paper Jams

Information about paper jams identifies the reason for the jam and the position of paper still in the printer.
2-1. Reason for Jams

The following three reasons for paper jams are reported in the error point as factors for detection.
1. "Not Arrived" error: Occurs when sensors in the paper path are not activated within the specified period
2. "Still Present" error: Occurs when sensors in the paper path are not deactivated within the specified
period
3. "Paper Remaining" error: Occurs when sensors in the paper path are activated when paper transfer
begins
If these errors are detected, the condition is interpreted as a paper jam.
Errors can be cleared when no detectable paper is left in the path.
2-2. Position of Paper Still in Printer

When paper jams, paper other than the jammed paper may still be left in the printer, in the paper path.
For this reason, after paper jams, the printer indicates information about the position of paper still in the printer.
H13
H15
H8
H9 H6
H11 H7
H5 H14
H1
H10
H2 Front door group

Tray group
H12 Paper feeding and ejection group
H3
Switchback door group
Vertical paper feed group
H4
[ 15-6 ]
Panel Messages
2-3. Requirements to Clear Jams, with Respect to Positions of Paper Still in Printer
Button in
Group Point Requirement to Clear Jam
Display
Open/close front door and deactivate registration sensor, top edge sensor, and FU
H5 B
paper ejection sensor
H6 Unused
H7 C Open/close front door and deactivate paper elevation IN sensor
H8 D Open/close front door and deactivate flipper sensor and FD paper ejection sensor
H9 E Open/close front door and deactivate upper transfer OUT sensor
Open/close front door and deactivate vertical paper feed sensors 4 and 5
Front door H10 A
(When the paper feed was made from tray 1)
H16 C Open/close front door and deactivate FD paper ejection sensor
Open/close front door and deactivate paper elevation IN sensor and FU paper
H17 C ejection sensor
(H17 appears only when [H7] and [H16] occur simultaneously)
Open/close front door and deactivate vertical paper feed sensors 4 and 5
H18 A
(When the paper feed was made from tray 2 or tray 3)
H2 J Open/close tray 1
Tray H3 K Open/close tray 2
H4 L Open/close tray 3
H1 N Deactivate the registration sensor and press Refresh on the panel
H13 M Deactivate the FD paper ejection sensor and press Refresh or Close on the panel
Paper supply Deactivate the FD paper ejection sensor and press Refresh or Close on the panel
and ejection H14 P Note: When a finisher is installed, this error corresponds to Group 1. (Refer to the
information on clearing jams from the finisher.)
H15 F Deactivate the switchback sensor and press Refresh or Close on the panel
Switchback H11 G Open/close jam release door 5 and deactivate the re-feed sensor
Vertical paper
H12 H Open/close jam release door 6 and deactivate vertical paper feed sensors 1–3.
feed
Example of display on the panel
X??-???? Refresh
Paper has jammed. To display the removal method,
touch the button shown in the figure below.
[ 15-7 ]
Panel Messages
3. List of Error Types
3-1. Service Call 3-2. Unit Errors

Service Call Errors Unit Errors
Page Page
Type Name Type Name
S01 Belt platen transfer error 12 U01 Scanner connection error 39
S02 Elevator motor locked 12 U02 Scanner communication error 39
S03 Belt platen raising/lowering error 12 U03 FB error 40
S04 Ink temperature adjustment error 13 U04 AF error 40
S05 Head thermistor error 13 U05 AF communication error 40
S06 Ink high-temperature error 13 U06 Scanner lock settings error 41
S07 Ink low-temperature error 14 U07 Scanner EEPROM error 41
S08-09 Unused U08 Scanner profiling data error 41
S10 Internal paper feed error 14 U09 Mail maker motor lock error 41
S11 Paper feed motor locked 14 U10 Scanner EEPROM error 42
S12 Paper ejection motor locked 14 U11 Puncher unit error 42
S13 Transfer belt fan locked 15 U12 Staple unit error 42
S14 Waste ink tank error 15 U13 Unused
S15-18 Unused U14 3-fold tray error 43
S19 Interface module error 15 U15 Unused
S20 Puncher unit error 15 U16 Stacking tray error 43
S28 Paper elevation motor locked 15 U17 Booklet tray error 43
S29 Upper transfer motor locked 15 U18 Scanner custom color profile data error 43
S30 Switchback motor locked 16 U19 Booklet tray power reboot request 44
S31 Re-feed motor locked 16 U51 High capacity feed motor lock 44
S32 Ink pan error 16 U52 Offset Stapler Communication error 44
S33 Wiper action error 16 U53 Offset Stapler CPU error 44
S34 Ink cartridge unit error 16 U54 Offset Stapler Motor Lock 45
S35 Ink supply unit error 17 U55 High cap feeder hardware error 45
S36 Ink circulation pump error 19 U56 High cap feeder software error 46
S37 Belt profile input error 19 U57 Offset Stapler EEPROM error 46
S38 Security package installation error 1 19 U58 Offset Stapler staple error 46
Head thermistor temperature-reading U88 PB motor lock error 47
S39 19 U89 PB temperature error 47
error
S40 Belt encoder error 20 U90 Error history clear error 47
S41 CIS baseline voltage error 20 U91 HCS Motor Lock 48
S42 Check Tray 1 20 U92 PB memory error 48
S43 Check Tray 2 20 U93 External controller error 48
S44 Check Tray 3 21 U94-97 Unused
S53 Option PCB communication error 21 U98 Scanner hardware error 49
S60 Vendor connection error 21 U99 Scanner software error 49
S65 Security package installation error 2 21 U105 PB glue over flow error 49
S87 High capacity stacker unit error 22 U106 PB glue empty error 50
S88 Memory Error （Near Full） 22 U110 EF ejection guide error 50
S89 Mismatched firmware error 22 U111 High Cap Stacker is Locked 50
S90 Machine information error 22 U115 Option power supply error 50
S91 Software error 2 22 U116 Unsupported option error 50
S92 Firmware error 22 U120 HCS stacker safety SW error 50
S93 Test mode execution error 23 U125 HCS unit hardware error 51
S94 Downloading error (engine) 23 U126 HCS unit software error 51
Downloading error (PMS, panel, or U127 Mail Maker hardware error 51
S95 24 U128 MM EEPROM error 51
scanner)
S96 PCB or hardware disconnected 24
S97 Power supply error 25
S98 Hardware error 26
S99 Software error 31
S100 PB Communication Error 38
S107 PB Transfer speed error 38
S110 MM Transfer speed error 38
[ 15-8 ]
Panel Messages
3-3. Warnings
Warnings Warnings
Page Page
Type Name Type Name
W01 AF communication warning 52 W56 Check paper size setting 63
W02 Specified paper not loaded 52 W57 Adjustment values not saved 64
W03 No paper loaded (all trays) 52 W58 CIS auto adjustment failed 64
W04 No paper loaded (paper feed tray) 53 W59 CIS operation check failed 64
W05 No paper loaded (tray 1) 53 Failed to connect to scanning destination
W60 64
W06 No paper loaded (tray 2) 53 server
W07 No paper loaded (tray 3) 54 W61 Cannot save scan file on server 64
W08 No slip sheet paper loaded 54 W62 Press Start key 65
W09 No cover paper loaded 54 W63 Supply main power again 65
W10 Top tray full 54 W64 HDD initialization error 65
W11 Stacking tray full 55 W65 Unused 65
W12 Booklet tray full 55 W66 External CI connection error 65
W13 3-fold tray full 55 W67 Remote Agent communication error 65
W14 Envelope setting error 55 W68 BP belt stain detection 65
W15 No factory setting restore data 55 W69 Paper feed tray not ready 65
W16 Cannot move for auto stacking 56 W70 Test mode non-completion 66
W17 Controller hard disk full 56 W71 Incompletely printed paper ejected 66
W18 Specified paper size not supported 56 W72 PB Error 66
W19 Restart finisher 56 W73 Paper width confirmation 66
W20 Scratch sheets in top tray 56 W74 Memory shortage error 66
W21 Scratch sheets in stacking tray 57 W75 No paper(Tray) 66
W22 Scratch sheets in booklet tray 57 W76 Paper size error(Booklet) 67
W23 Scratch sheets in 3-fold tray 57 W77 Incorrect download firmware 67
W24 FD paper receiving tray full 57 W78 No paper(High capacity feeder) 67
W25 Stapler unit not connected 57 W79 Offset Stapler overloaded 67
W26 Puncher unit not connected 57 W80 Not enough coin put in the Vendor 67
W27 Top tray not connected 58 W81 Reboot the machine power 67
W28 Stacking tray not connected 58 W82 Print Control Device Error 68
W29 Booklet tray not connected 58 W83 Unused 68
W30 3-fold tray not connected 58 W84 Paper size error(Offset Eject) 68
W31 Cannot lower stacking tray 58 W85 Security package mismatch 68
W32 Stapler unit not available 58 W86 Security package installation failed 68
W33 Puncher unit not available 59 W87 Security package key-code error 68
W34 Top tray not available 59 W88 Kerberos Server error 69
W35 Stacking tray not available 59 W89 LDAP Server error 69
W36 Booklet tray not available 59 W90 External Server error 69
W37 3-fold tray not available 59 W91 Paper Size error(Staple/Punch) 69
W38 Offset Stapler staple over limit 60 W92 USB memory error 69
W39 No destination for continuous output 60 W93 Email address error 69
W40 Paused job deleted 60 W94 Mail server setting error 69
W41 AS paper full detected 60 W95 Email data size over the limit 70
W42 Offset Stapler paper remain 60 W96 Email transmission error(Server) 70
Specified size not loaded in slip sheet W97 Email transmission error(User) 70
W43 61
tray W98 USB File Read error 70
W44 Specified size not loaded in cover tray 61 W99 Generic consumable warning 70
W45 Unsupported combination of paper sizes 61 W100 PB Cover Size Error 71
W46 No tray for auto ejection 61 W101 PB Cover Set Error 71
W47 Image adjustment failed 62 W102 PB Body Paper Size Error 71
Duplicate file names on USB memory W103 PB Body/Cover Unmatched Error 71
W48 62 W104 PB Body Thickness Error 71
device
W105 PB Body Set Error 71
W49 USB memory save error 62
W106 Cannot Execute Mail Creation 72
W50 Insufficient USB memory capacity 62
W107 Unused 72
W51 Request to start recovery operations 63
W108 HCS Tray Full Detection 72
W52 Check load capacity on tray 63
W109 MM Letter Number Limit Error 72
W53 USB memory mounting error 63
W110 Original Not Suitable, No Size 72
W54 Paper size error(Fold) 63
W55 MM Stacker Full Error 63
[ 15-9 ]
Panel Messages
Warnings
Page
3-4. Jam Errors
Type Name
W115 Option Power Off Error 72 Jam Errors
Page
W116 Original Not Suitable, No Data 72 Type Name
W117 EF Envelope Size Error 72 X01 No paper transfer from tray 82
W118 Original Not Suitable Mix Form 73 X02 Paper jam in main transfer section 82
W120 PB Cover　Length Error 73 X03 Paper jam in FU paper ejection section 82
W121 PB Cover Inserter Error 73 X04 Paper jam in vertical paper feed section 82
Ｗ 122 PB Body Stacker Error 73 Paper jam in horizontal paper feed
X05 82
W123 PB Missing Page of Body 73 section
W124 PB Body Size Incorrect 73 Paper jam in duplex switchback entry
X06 83
W125 PB Cover Width Error 73 section
W126 Offset Staple Tray not Attach 74 X07 Paper jam in switchback section 83
W127 HCS not Attach 74 X08 Paper jam in re-feed section 83
W128 Offset Staple Tray P Remain 74 X09 Paper jam in tray 1 83
W130 HCS Stack Tray Jam Error 74 X10 Paper jam in tray 2 83
W131 HCS Stack Tray Safety SW Error 74 X11 Paper jam in vertical path, upper section 83
W132 HCS Stack Tray Check Error 75 X12 Paper jam in vertical path, lower section 84
W134 HCS Error 75 X13 Unused
W135 HCS Eject Paper Size Error 75 X14 Main unit multiple feed 84
W136 Auto Stacking Tray disconnect 75 Z15-16 Unused
W137 Wide Stacking Tray disconnect 75 X17 Paper jam in interface module 84
W150 No Paper Size for Main Body 75 X18 Paper jam affecting puncher unit 84
W157 Envelope Form Set Error 1 76 X19 Paper jam affecting staple unit 84
W158 Envelope Form Set Error 2 76 X20 Unused
W159 MM Paper Guide Error 76 X21 Paper jam affecting 3-fold tray 85
W160 MM Paper Guide POS Error 76 X22 Paper jam affecting top tray 85
W161 Envelope Form Set Error 3 77 X23 Unused
W162 Envelope Form Set Error 4 77 X24 Paper jam affecting booklet tray 85
W170 Env Form Set Error (STD/SPX) 77 X25 Paper jam affecting AF 85
W171 Env Form Set Error (STD/DBL) 77 X26 Paper jam in tray 3 86
W172 Env Form Set Error (TRY1/SPX) 78 X27 Paper jam in FD flipper section 86
W173 Env Form Set Error (TRY1/DBL) 78 X28 Paper jam in FD paper ejection section 86
W174 Env Form Set Error (TRY2/SPX) 78 Awaiting removal of remaining paper
W175 Env Form Set Error (TRY2/DBL) 78 X29 86
(emergency stop)
W176 Env Form Set Error (TRY3/SMP) 79
Awaiting removal of remaining paper
W177 Env Form Set Error (TRY3/DBL) 79 X30 86
W179 EF Body Paper Size Error 79 (power ON)
W182 No Paper on All Trays (Form 1) 79 X31 Unused
W183 No Paper on All Trays (Form 2) 79 X32 Paper jam in paper gate 87
W184 MM Ejection Tray Error 80 X51 Paper jam in High capacity feeder 87
W186 EVL Form Set Error (HCF/SPX) 80 X52 Paper jam in Offset Stapler 87
W187 EVL Form Set Error (HCF/DBL) 80 X54 MM Paper Jam 88
W188 No Paper on All Trays (Form 3) 80 X70 HCF Paper Jam 89
W189 No Paper on All Trays (Form 4) 80 Paper jam release procedure &
X72 89
W190 HCF P-.F-.T Limit Sensor Error 81 instruction display
W191 HCF P-.F-.T Mainte POS Error 81 X73 PB Paper Jam 89
W195 Double Feed Error 81 X74 HCS Paper Jam 90
X120 MM Double Feed Jam 90
[ 15-10 ]
Panel Messages
3-5. Supply Errors 3-7. Information Messages

Supply Errors Informative Messages
Page Page
Type Name Type Name
Y01 Replace ink cartridge (Name: No ink) 91 I01 Maintenance call 98
Y02 Unused 91 I02 Waste ink tank nearly full 98
Y03 Punch waste box full 91 Operating in temporary registration
Y04 Staples empty 91 I03 98
status
Y05 Booklet staples empty 91 I04 Unused 98
Y07 Offset Stapler staple empty 91 I05 Using ink for another model 98
Y08 MM Water Tank Refill Error 92 I06 Outgoing queue nearly full 99
Y09 PB Glue Sheet Set Error 92 I07 Unused 99
Y10 PB Cut Paper Box Full 92 I08 Belt maintenance request 99
I09 Machine ID conflict 99
I10 Offset stapler maintenance 99
3-6. Loading/Interlock Detection Errors I11 PMS Battery Empty 99
I15 PB GlueSheet Near Full 99
Loading/Interlock Detection Error
Page
Type Name
Z01 AF loading error 93
Z02 Ink cartridge not loaded 93
Z03 Incorrect ink color 93
Z04 Incompatible ink cartridge 93
Z05 Front cover open 93
Z06 Switchback cover open 94
Z07 Unused
Z08 Check paper feed tray 94
Z09 Tray 1 not loaded 94
Z12-15 Unused
Z16 Left finisher cover open 94
Z17 Booklet unit not connected 94
Z18 Right finisher cover open 94
Z19 Unused 94
Z20 3-fold tray not loaded 94
Z21 Internal paper feed jam door open 95
Z22 Front cover open (BP lower limit) 95
Z23 Switchback cover open (BP lower limit) 95
Z24 Check paper feed tray (BP lower limit) 95
Z25 Tray 1 not loaded (BP lower limit) 95
Internal paper feed jam door open (BP
Z28 95
lower limit)
Z51 Check High capacity feeder 95
Z52 Offset Stapler jam cover open 96
Z53 Offset Stapler staple cover open 96
Z54 High capacity feeder error 96
Z55 MM Cover Open Error 96
Z56 PB Front Cover Open 96
Z57 HCS Left Cover Open 96
Z58 HCS Carriage Set Error 96
Z59 HCS Ejection Tray Set Error 96
Z60 Incorrect Ink Cartridge 97
Z61 HCS Right Cover Open 97
Z62 HCS Left Cover Open (P-Jam) 97
Z63 HCS Right Cover Open (P-Jam) 97
Z64 PB Right Side Cover Open 97
Z65 PB Inserter Open 97
[ 15-11 ]
Panel Messages
4. Error Code Display and Details

4-1. Service Call Errors (S)
Type S01: Belt platen transfer error
!!System Error!!
Display Reboot by press the Sub Power Key.
If recovery has failed, call service.
Clear Turn OFF the printer. (Turn OFF the printer through sub power key.)
Point Description
1038 Transfer belt motor locked error
1130 After the transfer belt motor starts up and the speed stabilizes, the belt HP sensor is not activated in time.
1131 The belt HP sensor remains activated.
The BP Belt HP Sensor does not go ON from the time the machine is powered ON and until the printing
1132
starts.
Type S02: Elevator motor locked

The Standard tray has an error.
Press RESET key.
Display
(The job has been cancelled.)
Clear Press the Reset key, or turn OFF the printer. (Turn OFF the printer through sub power key.)
Point Description
1030 Elevator motor locked error
Paper tray upper limit sensors and lower limit sensor are all being detected when the elevator motor starts
1096
up.
Type S03: Belt platen raising/lowering error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
2000 The BP elevation motor was driven, but there were not enough motor encoder pulses.
2001 The BP elevation motor was driven, but the printer detected that it did not move.
2002 The belt platen was raised to the upper limit position, but the upper limit sensor did not go ON.
2003 The belt platen was raised to the upper limit position, but the lower limit sensor did not go OFF.
2004 The belt platen was raised only to the cleaning position, but the upper limit sensor became ON.
2005 The belt platen was raised to the cleaning position, but the lower limit sensor did not go OFF.
2006 The belt platen was lowered to the lower limit position, but the upper limit sensor did not go OFF.
2007 1 The belt platen was lowered to the lower limit position, but the lower limit sensor did not go ON.
The belt platen was lowered to the lower limit position and the lower limit sensor went ON to stop the belt
2007 2 platen unit, but the sensor detection went OFF after the belt platen stopped.
<Possible sensor chattering or sensor came off position.>
2008 The belt platen was lowered to the gap adjustment position, but the upper limit sensor did not go OFF.
2009 The belt platen was lowered only to the gap adjustment position, but the lower limit sensor went ON.
2010 The BP upper and lower limit sensors for BP elevation both went ON at the same time.
2011 BP elevation wires are loose (the BP wire loose detection switch is activated).
When the BP unit is elevated to the upper limit position for regular paper,
2012 1-4 the (1-rear_left, 2-rear_right, 3-front_left, 4-front_right)
of the BP unit is not detected by the Contact detection mechanism.
When the BP unit is elevated to the upper limit position for card paper,
of the BP unit is not detected by the Contact detection mechanism.
2013 The BP elevation motor was driven, but it did not stop in time.
[ 15-12 ]
Panel Messages
Type S03: Belt platen raising/lowering error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
The ink pan and belt platen are stopped in positions not possible during normal operation, and the
2014 1
maintenance unit cannot be initialized.
2014 2 The wiper is not at the origin, and the ink pan cannot function.
2014 3 Ink pan, PB unit, or Wiper did not stop in the same position as in previous position.
2014 4 Actual stop position of the belt platen is different with the position recognized by correspond sensors.
2014 5 Actual stop position of the ink pan is different with the position recognized by correspond sensors.
When the BP unit is elevated to the upper limit position for envelope1,
of the BP unit is detected by the Contact detection mechanism.
When the BP unit is elevated to the upper limit position for envelope2,
of the BP unit is detected by the Contact detection mechanism.
Type S04: Ink temperature adjustment error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
2130 Black ink temperature does not increase.
2131 Cyan ink temperature does not increase.
2132 Magenta ink temperature does not increase.
2133 Yellow ink temperature does not increase.
2134 Black ink temperature does not decrease.
2135 Cyan ink temperature does not decrease.
2136 Magenta ink temperature does not decrease.
2137 Yellow ink temperature does not decrease.
Type S05: Head thermistor error

!!System Error!!
Error point 1: Thermistors at the ink inflow side may be disconnected, or there may be a poor connection.
Details in Common
Error point 2: Thermistors at the ink outflow side may be disconnected, or there may be a poor connection.
Point Description
2140-2145 1-2 Black #1-6 head
2146-2151 1-2 Cyan #1-6 head
2152-2157 1-2 Magenta #1-6 head
2158-2163 1-2 Yellow #1-6 head
Type S06: Ink high-temperature error

!!System Error!!
Details in Common Head thermistors have detected that the ink exceeds the specified temperature.
Point Description
2200-2205 Black #1-6 head
2206-2211 Cyan #1-6 head
2212-2217 Magenta #1-6 head
2218-2223 Yellow #1-6 head
[ 15-13 ]
Panel Messages
Type S07: Ink low-temperature error

!!System Error!!
Details in Common Head thermistors have detected that the ink is lower than the specified temperature.
Point Description
2170-2175 Black #1-6 head
2176-2181 Cyan #1-6 head
2182-2187 Magenta #1-6 head
2188-2193 Yellow #1-6 head
Type S10: Internal paper feed error

The Paper feed tray has an error.
Display Press RESET key or Reboot by press the Sub Power Key
Point Description
1035 Internal paper feed motor locked error
1036 Vertical paper feed motor locked error
Type S11: Paper feed motor locked

The Standard tray has an error.
Point Description
1034 External paper feed motor locked error
1037 Registration motor locked error
Type S12: Paper ejection motor locked

!!System Error!!
Point Description
1043 FD paper ejection motor locked error
1044 FU paper ejection motor locked error
When the paper ejection fence is moving to home position and the HP sensor is activated, the fence pulse
1215
motor is not stopped in time.
When the paper ejection fence is moving to home position and the HP sensor is deactivated, the fence
1216
pulse motor is not stopped in time.
When the paper ejection fence is moving to home position and the HP sensor is activated at the auto start
1217
position, the fence pulse motor is not stopped in time.
When the paper ejection fence is moving to the specified position, the fence pulse motor is not stopped in
1218
time.
When the paper ejection wing is moving to home position and the HP sensor is activated, the wing pulse
1220
When the paper ejection wing is moving to home position and the HP sensor is deactivated, the wing pulse
1221
When the paper ejection wing is moving to home position and the HP sensor is activated at the auto start
1222
position, the wing pulse motor is not stopped in time.
When the paper ejection wing is moving to the specified position, the wing pulse motor is not stopped in
1223
time.
[ 15-14 ]
Panel Messages
Type S13: Transfer belt fan locked

!!System Error!!
Point Description
1206 The transfer belt fan is not connected.
Type S14: Waste ink tank error

The drain tank is full.
Display
Call service to replace it.
Turn OFF the printer. (Turn OFF the printer through sub power key.) Note: For a permanent solution,
Clear
remove the waste ink tank.
Point Description
Waste ink tank full detected
2061
Waste ink tank sensor 1 (top): OFF / Waste ink tank sensor 2 (bottom): ON
Type S19: Interface module error

The finisher has an error.
Point Description
3000 After operation is started, the decurler home sensor is not deactivated in time.
3001 After operation is started, the decurler home sensor is not activated in time.
Type S20: Puncher unit error

The finisher punching unit has an error.
Point Description
3002 After operation is started, the puncher home sensor is not activated in time.
3003 After operation is started, the puncher home sensor is not deactivated in time.
3004 After operation is started, the puncher move home sensor is not deactivated in time.
3005 After operation is started, the puncher move home sensor is not activated in time.
3006 After operation is started, the side registration home sensor is not deactivated in time.
3007 After operation is started, the side registration home sensor is not activated in time.
Type S28: Paper elevation motor locked

!!System Error!!
Point Description
1039 Paper elevation motor locked error.
Type S29: Upper transfer motor locked

!!System Error!!
Point Description
1040 Upper transfer motor locked error.
[ 15-15 ]
Panel Messages
Type S30: Switchback motor locked

!!System Error!!
Point Description
1041 Switchback motor locked error.
Type S31: Re-feed motor locked

!!System Error!!
Point Description
1042 Re-feed motor locked error.
Type S32: Ink pan error

!!System Error!!
Display Reboot by press the Sub Power Key
Point Description
2020 The ink pan was retracted, but the ink pan storage sensor was not activated.
2021 The ink pan was retracted, but the ink pan operating position sensor was not deactivated.
2022 The ink pan was moved to the operating position, but the ink pan storage sensor was not deactivated.
The ink pan was moved to the operating position, but the ink pan operating position sensor was not
2023
activated.
2024 Ink pan operations were done, but they were not completed in time.
2025 The ink pan storage sensor and ink pan operating position sensor were both activated at once.
Type S33: Wiper action error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
2030 The wiper moved towards the back, but the wiper motor HP sensor did not go ON.
2031 The wiper moved towards the front, but the wiper motor HP sensor did not go OFF.
2032 The wiper moved forward, but did not move for the given distance.
2033 Wiper drive was not finished in time.
Type S34: Ink cartridge unit error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
The authorization cam was moved to the home position, but the authorization cam HP sensor was not
2040
activated.
The authorization cam was moved, but the printer did not detect activation of the authorization cam HP
2041
sensor in time.
[ 15-16 ]
Panel Messages
Type S35: Ink supply unit error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
The bellows arm was raised to the upper limit position, but the bellows arm upper position sensor was not
2050
activated.
2051 The bellows arm was moved to the home position, but the bellows arm HP sensor was not activated.
The bellows arm was lowered to the lower limit position, but the bellows arm lower position sensor was not
2052
activated.
2053 The bellows arm drive did not stop in time.
Two or more of the following sensors were activated at the same time: bellows arm upper position sensor,
2054
bellows arm HP sensor, and bellows arm lower position sensor.
2055 The bellows sensor was activated during ink circulation.
2056 The bellows arm motor was driven, but the printer detected that it did not move.
2057 The bellows arm is detected not in the fix position when the machine power was turned ON.
Bellows arm was moved to the fix position, but either the bellows arm HP sensor or lower position sensor
2058 1
was detected ON.
2058 2 Bellows arm was moved to the fix position, but the pulse count detected was too small.
2060 The overflow tank ink sensor is activated.
2064 The pressurized ink tank ink sensors are not activated.
2065 Abnormal ink temperature values were acquired during cleaning.
2066 Ink circulation was not finished in time.
2067 Activate signal was given to the Ink circulation motor, but is detected not activated.
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor K was not activated even once as the printer detected no black ink three
2069 1
times.
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor K remained ON for more than a particular number of cycles despite
2069 2
circulation (printing pressure).
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor C was not activated even once as the printer detected no cyan ink three
2070 1
times.
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor C remained ON for more than a particular number of cycles, despite
2070 2
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor M was not activated even once as the printer detected no magenta ink
2071 1
three times.
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor M remained ON for more than a particular number of cycles, despite
2071 2
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y was not activated even once as the printer detected no yellow ink three
2072 1
times.
Pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y remained ON for more than a particular number of cycles, despite
2072 2
2073 1 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor K remained OFF, despite ink circulation.
2073 2 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor K remained ON, despite ink circulation.
2074 1 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor C remained OFF, despite ink circulation.
2074 2 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor C remained ON, despite ink circulation.
2075 1 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor M remained OFF, despite ink circulation.
2075 2 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor M remained ON, despite ink circulation.
2076 1 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor Y remained OFF, despite ink circulation.
2076 2 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor Y remained ON, despite ink circulation.
The negative pressure ink tank air valve was not open when circulation stopped (under atmospheric
2077
pressure).
[ 15-17 ]
Panel Messages
Type S35: Ink supply unit error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
The K ink detection sensor ON/OFF detection cycle on the K ink negative pressure ink tank was detected
2079 1 too long when the machine detected no K ink.
<Refer to Test Mode No. 1534 for temporary error clear.>
The C ink detection sensor ON/OFF detection cycle on the C ink negative pressure ink tank was detected
2079 2 too long when the machine detected no C ink.
The M ink detection sensor ON/OFF detection cycle on the M ink negative pressure ink tank was detected
2079 3 too long when the machine detected no M ink.
The Y ink detection sensor ON/OFF detection cycle on the Y ink negative pressure ink tank was detected
2079 4 too long when the machine detected no Y ink.
The ink detection sensor on the K pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period during the
2081 1 ink circulation action when the machine detected no K ink after the Strong head cleaning.
The ink detection sensor on the K pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period during the
2081 2 ink circulation action when the machine detected no K ink (excludes after the Strong head cleaning action).
The ink detection sensor on the C pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period during the
2082 1 ink circulation action when the machine detected no C ink after the Strong head cleaning.
The ink detection sensor on the C pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period during the
2082 2 ink circulation action when the machine detected no C ink (excludes after the Strong head cleaning action).
The ink detection sensor on the M pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period during
2083 1 the ink circulation action when the machine detected no M ink after the Strong head cleaning.
The ink detection sensor on the M pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period during the
2083 2 ink circulation action when the machine detected no M ink (excludes after the Strong head cleaning action).
The ink detection sensor on the Y pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period during the
2084 1 ink circulation action when the machine detected no Y ink after the Strong head cleaning.
The ink detection sensor on the Y pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period during the
2084 2 ink circulation action when the machine detected no Y ink (excludes after the Strong head cleaning action).
The ink detection sensor on the K negative pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period
2085 1
during the ink circulation action when the machine detected no K ink.
The ink detection sensor on the C negative pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period
2085 2
during the ink circulation action when the machine detected no C ink.
The ink detection sensor on the M negative pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period
2085 3
during the ink circulation action when the machine detected no M ink.
The ink detection sensor on the Y negative pressurized ink tank was detected OFF for too long of a period
2085 4
during the ink circulation action when the machine detected no Y ink.
[ 15-18 ]
Panel Messages
Type S36: Ink circulation pump error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
2068 1 The black ink circulation pump is not connected or there is a problem with it.
2068 2 The cyan ink circulation pump is not connected or there is a problem with it.
2068 3 The magenta ink circulation pump is not connected or there is a problem with it.
2068 4 The yellow ink circulation pump is not connected or there is a problem with it.
2078 1 There is a control problem with the black ink circulation pump.
2078 2 There is a control problem with the cyan ink circulation pump.
2078 3 There is a control problem with the magenta ink circulation pump.
2078 4 There is a control problem with the yellow ink circulation pump.
K ink circulation pump drive cycle was detected too long when the machine detected no K ink.
2080 1
C ink circulation pump drive cycle was detected too long when the machine detected no C ink.
2080 2
M ink circulation pump drive cycle was detected too long when the machine detected no M ink.
2080 3
Y ink circulation pump drive cycle was detected too long when the machine detected no Y ink.
2080 4
Type S37: Belt profile input error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
1140 Incorrect numbers were entered for numbers 1–3 during belt profile data input in test mode.
Type S38: Security package installation error 1

!!System Error!!
Point Description
Unsuccessful RISO Security Package software installation.
Depending on the situation, re-installation of the security package is necessary.
6010 1-7
Depending on the situation, replacement of HDD is necessary.
<RISO Security Package is an optional software.>
Type S39: Head thermistor temperature-reading error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
The head temperature thermistor on the KC head control PCB may be disconnected, or there may be a
2164 1
poor connection.
The head temperature thermistor on the MY head control PCB may be disconnected, or there may be a
2164 2
poor connection.
[ 15-19 ]
Panel Messages
Type S40: Belt encoder error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
1153 The BP belt encoder count was not correctly received.
Type S41: CIS baseline voltage error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
0198 1 Left (rear) CIS baseline voltage <Vblank> was not detected correctly at the start of the printing.
0198 2 Right (front) CIS baseline voltage <Vblank> was not detected correctly at the start of the printing.
Both the left & right (rear & front) CIS baseline voltage <Vblank> was not detected correctly at the start of
0198 3
the printing.
Type S42: Check Tray 1

The Tray 1 has an error.
Press RESET key. (The job has been cancelled.)
Display
Other trays are available.
Point Description
Tray 1 elevator motor lock
When still error remains after turn OFF/ON the printer, try reseat tray 1.
If the tray 1 upper limit sensor remains ON, shows S10-1045 error.
1031 <Possible cause of error>
1. A system timeout occurred.
2. Failure or stains on the tray 1 upper limit sensor
3. Jammed paper exist around the tray 1 upper limit sensor
Tray 1 upper limit sensor is ON when the tray 1 inserted.
<Possible cause of error>
1045

Display
Point Description
1046
[ 15-20 ]
Panel Messages

Display
Point Description
1047
Type S53: Option PCB communication error

The option has an error.
Point Description
A communication error occurred in the option PCB.
1941
(between optRMGA and 78k0)
UART receive parity error occured in the option PCB.
1942 1-5
Variation Code: 1-OST, 2-HCS, 3-MM, 4-PB, 5-HCF
UART receive framing error occured in the option PCB.
1943 1-5
UART receive overrun error occured in the option PCB.
1944 1-5
UART receive framing error occured in the option PCB.
1945 1-5
UART receive cue full error occured in the option PCB.
1946 1-5
Type S60: Vendor connection error

Communication with the external device is disconnected.
Check the external device for power supply or connection.
Display
Turn the printer power on again.
Point Description
Check the vendor (coin vender or card vendor) power switch.
5500
< This error message does not apply on your machine.>
Type S65: Security package installation error 2

!!System Error!!
Display Reinstall the security option.
Point Description
An error occurred during re-installation of the Security package software.
6014 If the problem remains, the HDD may have to be initialized.
<RISO Security Package is an optional software.>
[ 15-21 ]
Panel Messages
Type S87: High capacity stacker unit error

The High capacity stacker has an error.
Point Description
3625 1-9 Detected the software error on High Capacity Stacker unit control (sequence error, etc.).
3855 1-9 Detected the software error on High Capacity Stacker unit.
Type S88: Memory Error （Near Full）

Printer memory capacity is short.
Display
Press the power key on the operation panel to turn off the power and then on again.
Point Description
Detects memory capacity shortage (Second step notice)
0282 When press the [close] button, machine will restart.
This error code relates with W74-0291
Type S89: Mismatched firmware error

An incompatible firmware program has been downloaded.
Display
Download a proper program.
Point Description
0283 Detected the firmware mismatching between PMS and engine at the initial communication.
Type S90: Machine information error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
0281 Mismatching of the model code
The combination of values that the user is attempting to enter (specification information, model class, and
1813
printing information) are not valid as machine information.
Type S91: Software error 2

!!System Error!!
Point Description
During communication for initialization immediately after the printer was turned ON, device control
0035
information (including machine code) was not sent from the engine to the PMS in time.
Type S92: Firmware error

!!System Error!!
Turn OFF the printer. (Turn OFF the printer through sub power key.)
Clear
Note: For a permanent solution, download proper firmware.
Point Description
0045 Incompletely downloaded firmware on the panel, because downloading failed
1920 Downloading of some engine firmware is not finished.
[ 15-22 ]
Panel Messages
Type S93: Test mode execution error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
0167 1 Completion notification status error for machine sequence manager system.
0167 2 Completion notification status error for print sequence manager system.
0167 3 Completion notification status error for transfer control SS.
0167 4 Completion notification status error for finisher SS.
0167 5 Completion notification status error for count SS.
0167 6 Completion notification status error for RFID tag SS.
Type S94: Downloading error (engine)

Firmware download error!
Display
To continue processing, press the START key.
Clear Press the Start key.
Point Description
Older version machine firmware before SNALL version 6.00 is detected by the loader program during the
0260
firmware installation. Replace the machine firmware in the USB memory stick with the newest version.
Older version machine firmware before SNALL version 6.00 is detected by the sequencer during the
0261
firmware installation. Replace the machine firmware in the USB memory stick with the newest version.
1900 Invalid download data for the RFID tag micro-controller.
1901 No response from the loader program for the RFID tag microcontroller.
1902 Startup error from the main program for the RFID tag microcontroller.
1903 Communication problem with the download program for the RFID tag microcontroller.
1904 There is a I2C bus access problem involving the RFID tag microcontroller.
1905 Access problem involving the flash memory of the RFID tag microcontroller.
1906 Checksum error involving the flash memory of the RFID tag microcontroller.
1910 Invalid download data for the DSP.
1911 The DSP download program was not included.
1912 The DSP main program was not downloaded.
1913 Communication problem with the DSP download program.
1914 Access problem involving the DSP flash memory.
1915 Checksum error involving the DSP flash memory.
1921 Invalid download data for the CPU (SH2A) loader.
1922 Invalid download data for the CPU (SH2A) sequencer.
1923 Access problem involving the CPU (SH2A) flash memory.
1924 Checksum error involving the loader flash memory.
1925 Checksum error involving the sequencer flash memory.
1926 A problem occurred when accessing the data to download for the engine.
A problem was detected during verification of download data when downloading FPGA configuration data
1930
for the image processing PCB.
1931 Erasure timeout occurred during erasure of the flash memory of the image processing PCB.
Write timeout occurred when writing FPGA configuration data for the image processing PCB to the unit's
1932
flash memory.
Errors were detected during verification after writing FPGA configuration data for the image processing
1933
PCB.
1934 Failed to prepare the DSP main program.
3015 There was a problem with the finisher download data.
5507 1-5 Download data on the option was abnormal. Variation Code: 1-OST, 2-HCS, 3-MM, 4-PB, 5-HCF
5508 1-5 No reply from the option loader program. Variation Code: 1-OST, 2-HCS, 3-MM, 4-PB, 5-HCF
5509 1-5 Main program start error on the option. Variation Code: 1-OST, 2-HCS, 3-MM, 4-PB, 5-HCF
5510 1-5 Communication error with the option loader program. Variation Code: 1-OST, 2-HCS, 3-MM, 4-PB, 5-HCF
5511 1-5 Access error on the option flash memory. Variation Code: 1-OST, 2-HCS, 3-MM, 4-PB, 5-HCF
5512 1-5 Checksum error on the option flash memory. Variation Code: 1-OST, 2-HCS, 3-MM, 4-PB, 5-HCF
[ 15-23 ]
Panel Messages
Type S95: Downloading error (PMS, panel, or scanner)

Firmware download error!
Display
To continue processing, press the START key.
Clear Press the Start key.
Point Description
After firmware downloading was started, the processor failed to expand the SNALL package tar file.The
0046
firmware is not overwritten in the case of this error, and processing stops.
The format of the header file extracted from the SNALL package was determined to be invalid.The firmware
0047
is not overwritten in the case of this error, and processing stops.
0048 1 An error occurred during boot-swapping after the panel firmware was downloaded.
0048 2 Timeout occurred when the panel was receiving firmware from the controller.
0048 3 A flash writing error occurred when writing the panel firmware data to flash memory.
0048 4 A flash erasure error occurred when writing the panel firmware data to flash memory.
0055 The USB memory device could not be mounted at the time of downloading.
0056 No scanner program or other programs on the USB memory device.
0057 The scanner program or other programs on the USB memory device could not be opened.
0200 Program data could not be transferred to the scanner when the FB or AF program was downloaded.
0206 Program data could not be opened when the FB or AF program was downloaded.
0241 1 PMS firmware is not specified.
0241 2 PMS firmware is incomplete.
0241 3 Update script does not exist.
0241 4 PMS firmware store is failed.
0241 5 PMS firmware does not exist.
0241 6 Downloading of PMS firmware has failed.
4100 Downloading the FB program failed (problem with program file or checksum error).
Downloading the AF program failed due to a program access error involving AF EEPROM (issued from AF
4101
side).
4102 Downloading the AF program failed due to a transmission error (NACK received).
4103 Downloading the AF program failed due to a transmission error (communication sequence error).
4104 Downloading the AF program failed due to a checksum error (issued from AF side).
4105 Downloading the FB program failed (the program was not written to flash memory).
4106 Downloading the AF program failed due to program file error (AF program download file not exist, etc.).
Type S96: PCB or hardware disconnected

!!System Error!!
Clear
Note: For a permanent solution, connect the PCB.
Point Description
0080 1 Head control PCB 1 (KC) is not connected.
0080 2 Head control PCB 1 (KC) that is not compatible with the printer model is connected (A4/Letter & A3/Ledger).
0080 3 The IC chips on (KC) IP PCB and Head drive PCB do not match. <This should not apply on your machine.>
0081 1 Head control PCB 2 (MY) is not connected.
Head control PCB 2 (MY) that is not compatible with the printer model is connected (A4/Letter & A3/
0081 2
Ledger).
0081 3 The IC chips on (MY) IP PCB and Head drive PCB do not match. <This should not apply on your machine.>
0082 Recording data generating PCB (X3-IP-PCB) is not connected.
0083 Head control PCB 1 (KC) has been detected in the model that should not detected.
0084 The controller PCB is not connected.
0085 The CIS control module is not connected.
0120 1 Ink cooling fan is not connected.
0120 2 Ink cooling fan (2) is not connected. (Unavailable)
0122 1 The ink heater (24V) is not connected.
0122 2 The ink heater (30V) is not connected.
0123 1 Head drive IC cooling fan 1 is not connected.
0123 2 Head drive IC cooling fan 2 is not connected.
0124 The overflow tank ink sensor is not connected.
[ 15-24 ]
Panel Messages
Type S96: PCB or hardware disconnected

!!System Error!!
Clear
Note: For a permanent solution, connect the PCB.
Point Description
0125 1 Pressurized ink tank ink sensor K is not connected.
0125 2 Pressurized ink tank ink sensor C is not connected.
0125 3 Pressurized ink tank ink sensor M is not connected.
0125 4 Pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y is not connected.
0126 1 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor K is not connected.
0126 2 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor C is not connected.
0126 3 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor M is not connected.
0126 4 Negative pressure ink tank ink sensor Y is not connected.
0129 The pressurized ink tank air valve is not connected.
0130 The negative pressure ink tank air valve is not connected.
0133 1 Ink supply valve K is not connected.
0133 2 Ink supply valve C is not connected.
0133 3 Ink supply valve M is not connected.
0133 4 Ink supply valve Y is not connected.
1207 The electromagnetic counter is not connected.
1208 The face down paper ejection flipper is not connected.
1209 BP Belt encoder is not connected.
1210 The switchback clutch is not connected. (Not available if switchback clutch not exist)
The waste ink tank is not connected.
2063 • Waste ink tank sensor 1 (top): OFF
• Waste ink tank sensor 2 (bottom): OFF
Type S97: Power supply error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
0190 24VA power supply is deactivated.
0191 24VB power supply is deactivated.
0192 24VB-IL power supply is deactivated.
0193 24VC power supply is deactivated.
0194 30V power supply is deactivated.
0196 1 Voltage error was detected by head control PCB 1(K,C).
0196 2 Voltage error was detected by head control PCB 2 (M,Y).
0197 1 The left or right front covers or switchback section cover was open, but 24V interlock voltage was detected.
The left or right front covers or switchback section cover was open or a tray was out, but 30V interlock
0197 2
voltage was detected.
[ 15-25 ]
Panel Messages
Type S98: Hardware error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
0001 The CPU detected a checksum error during CPU-DSP communication.
0002 The CPU detected a timeout error during CPU-DSP communication.
0003 The SS controlling paper transfer control on the CPU side detected a sequence error.
0004 The SS controlling paper transfer control on the DSP side detected a sequence error.
0005 The CPU detected hardware errors in CPU-DSP communication (parity, overrun, or other errors).
0011 The engine PCB version and firmware do not match.
0018 1 Watchdog timer actuation caused by system error is detected by the Engine PCB.
0018 2 Watchdog timer actuation other than the cause by system error is detected by the Engine PCB.
0019 1 PCI bus is in parity error when the X3-IP-PCB image processing went in error.
0019 2 PCI bus is in system error when the X3-IP-PCB image processing went in error.
0019 3 PCI bus is in target error when the X3-IP-PCB image processing went in error.
0019 4 PCI bus is in target abort when the X3-IP-PCB image processing went in error.
0019 5 PCI bus is in undefined error when the X3-IP-PCB image processing went in error.
0019 6 PCI bus is in undefined state when the X3-IP-PCB image processing went in error.
0019 7 PCI bus is in busy state when the X3-IP-PCB image processing went in error.
0019 8 PCI bus is in suspension when the X3-IP-PCB image processing went in error.
PMS-engine communication error 01: Three consecutive code errors were detected in CDB (third checksum
0020
error).
PMS-engine communication error 02: Three consecutive code errors were detected in SDB (third checksum
0021
error).
PMS-engine communication error 03-1: PCI is working fine, but no SDB reply, and a timeout error occurred.
0022 1
< Possible X3-IP-PCB connection error.>
PMS-engine communication error 03-2: PCI is not recognized and no SDB reply, and a timeout error
0022 2 occurred.
< Possible faulty the X3-IP-PCB >
PMS-engine communication error 03-3: PCI recognition number is not recognized and no SDB reply, and a
0022 3 timeout error occurred.
< Possible flat-cable error or software error >
0023 PMS-engine communication error 04: Error involving an undefined CDB command code (command error).
PMS-engine communication error 05: Three consecutive code errors in communication involving CDB or
0024
SDB in alternation.
0025 PMS-engine communication error 06: SDB command different from CDB command.
PMS-engine communication error 07: Three consecutive code errors detected in CFH, and DATAREJECT
0026
returned.
0027 PMS-engine communication error 08: Other SDB parameter error, and DATA ERROR returned.
0028 PMS-engine communication error 09: Other CFH parameter error, and DATA ERROR returned.
0029 PMS-engine communication error 10: Nonconsecutive serial numbers detected at CDB reception.
0030 PMS-engine communication error 11: Nonconsecutive serial numbers detected at SDB reception.
PMS-engine communication error 12: Invalid command due to invalid CDB reception sequence (CDB_
0031
INVALIDITY).
PMS-engine communication error 13: SDB EPB size detected to be smaller than the minimum command
0032 EPB size.
To resolve the underlying problem, download FPGA and PMS firmware.
Recording data generating PCB (X3-IP-PCB) is not connected to PCI slot.
0036
To resolve the underlying problem, turn the printer off and connect the X3-IP-PCB.
0044 Communication failed between the controller PCB and panel control PCB.
0052 1-9 This error occurs when the hard disk partition is corrupted.
0059 Error detected when checking the size of controller PCB memory (DRAM)
Detected that cooling fan stopped (Controller unit)
0066
Troubleshooting: Check the connection or change the cooling fan.
0067 After touch panel calibration, writing to the flash calibration area failed.
0068 After or during touch panel updates, an erasure error occurred in the flash update data area.
[ 15-26 ]
Panel Messages

!!System Error!!
Point Description
After or during touch panel updates, a checksum error occurred (sent and received data values did not
0069
match).
0090 RFID tag antenna signal for black ink (RUN signal OFF)
0091 RFID tag antenna signal for cyan ink (RUN signal OFF)
0092 RFID tag antenna signal for magenta ink (RUN signal OFF)
0093 RFID tag antenna signal for yellow ink (RUN signal OFF)
0094 RFID tag antenna for machine code (RUN signal OFF)
0097 Machine serial number is not registered (Report to the manufacturer).
Head Ctl PCB 1 (KC) error (1): Timeout during communication between the X3-IP-PCB and head control
0100 1
PCB 1 (KC)
Head Ctl PCB 1 (KC) error (3): Invalid loop-back value in communication between the image processing
0100 3
unit and Head Ctl PCB 1 (KC)
0100 5 Head Ctl PCB 1 (KC) error (5): Failed to write drive waveform to Head Ctl PCB 1 (KC)
0100 6 Head Ctl PCB 1 (KC) error (6): Failed to initialize HDR sub-CPU to Head Ctl PCB 1 (KC)
0100 7 Head Ctl PCB 1 (KC) error (7): Error in FPGA configuration transfer for Head Ctl PCB 1 (KC)
Head Ctl PCB 2 (MY) error (1): Time-out during communication between the X3-IP-PCB and Head Ctl PCB
0101 1
2 (MY)
Head Ctl PCB 2 (MY) error (3): Invalid loop-back value in communication between the X3-IP-PCB and Head
0101 3
Ctl PCB 2 (MY)
0101 5 Head Ctl PCB 2 (MY) error (5): Failed to write drive waveform to Head Ctl PCB 2 (MY)
0101 6 Head Ctl PCB 2 (MY) error (6): Failed to initialize HDR sub-CPU to Head Ctl PCB 2 (MY)
0101 7 Head Ctl PCB 2 (MY) error (7): Error in FPGA configuration transfer for Head Ctl PCB 2 (MY)
0102 1 X3-IP-PCB program error (1): FPGA not initialized.
0102 2 X3-IP-PCB program error (2): FPGA READY signal not activated.
0102 3 X3-IP-PCB program error (3): FPGA READY signal not deactivated.
0102 4 X3-IP-PCB program error (4): FPGA DONE signal not activated.
0102 5 X3-IP-PCB program error (5): No configuration data in flash; configuration not possible.
0103 1 Delay in sending black ink data from the X3-IP-PCB to Head Ctl PCB
0103 2 Delay in sending cyan ink data from the X3-IP-PCB to Head Ctl PCB
0103 3 Delay in sending magenta ink data from the X3-IP-PCB to Head Ctl PCB
0103 4 Delay in sending yellow ink data from the X3-IP-PCB to Head Ctl PCB
0104 1 X3-IP-PCB detected an error in black image control.
0104 2 The firmware detected an error in black image control.
0105 1 X3-IP-PCB detected an error in cyan image control.
0105 2 The firmware detected an error in cyan image control.
0106 1 X3-IP-PCB detected an error in magenta image control.
0106 2 The firmware detected an error in magenta image control.
0107 1 X3-IP-PCB detected an error in yellow image control.
0107 2 The firmware detected an error in yellow image control.
X3-IP-PCB communication error 1: Error detected during transfer of commands from the controller PCB unit
0108 1
to the X3-IP-PCB.
X3-IP-PCB communication error 2: Error detected during transmission of status from the X3-IP-PCB to the
0108 2
controller PCB unit.
0108 3 X3-IP-PCB communication error 3: X3-IP-PCB INTA signal (invalid interrupt) notification timeout.
X3-IP-PCB communication error 4: Error detected during transmission of data from the controller PCB unit
0108 4
to the X3-IP-PCB.
X3-IP-PCB communication error 5: Error detected during transmission of data from the X3-IP-PCB to the
0108 5
X3-IP-PCB communication error 6: Error detected during SRQ transmission from the X3-IP-PCB to the
0108 6
X3-IP-PCB communication error 7: Error detected during ITI transmission from the X3-IP-PCB to the
0108 7
0109 1 X3-IP-PCB detected PLL lock release.
0109 2 X3-IP-PCB detected PLL time-out.
[ 15-27 ]
Panel Messages

!!System Error!!
Point Description
0110 1-6 Variation code: Number of Black head. (1 = head No.1, 2 = head No.2, 3 = head No.3, etc.)
0111 1-6 Variation code: Number of Cyan head. (1 = head No.1, 2 = head No.2, 3 = head No.3, etc.)
0112 1-6 Variation code: Number of Magenta head. (1 = head No.1, 2 = head No.2, 3 = head No.3, etc.)
0113 1-6 Variation code: Number of Yellow head. (1 = head No.1, 2 = head No.2, 3 = head No.3, etc.)
0114 1 Excessive printing speed during printing was detected by the X3-IP-PCB.
0114 2 Reduced printing speed during printing was detected by the X3-IP-PCB.
0115 A problem was detected in supplying image data to the X3-IP-PCB PCI buffer.
0117 CIS devices were not driven.
0248 Initial engine count value was obtained right after machine was power was turned ON.
0250 Abnormal database access was detected in HDD.
0251 In making access to HDD, abnormal detection was made in the main data base.
0253 HDD connection error was detected on previous power ON to OFF.
1202 Sending or receiving components of the registration sensor are damaged.
1203 Sending or receiving components of top edge sensor 1 are damaged.
1204 Sending or receiving components of top edge sensor 2 are damaged.
1310 Failed to adjust the registration sensor light intensity in TM01494. (automatic adjustment 1)
1311 Failed to adjust top edge sensor 1 light intensity in TM01494. (automatic adjustment 1)
1312 Failed to adjust top edge sensor 2 light intensity in TM01495. (automatic adjustment 2)
1313 Failed to acquire the maximum adjustment value in TM01495. (automatic adjustment 2)
1400 Writing to FRAM failed.
1401 Reading from FRAM failed.
1405 A flash checksum error occurred.
1406 1 A checksum error occurred for data saved in FRAM.
1406 2 A checksum error occurred for data saved in FRAM.
1406 3 The format of data saved in FRAM is invalid.
1406 4 After default values were restored, the counter value in FRAM was invalid (not 0).
When the Ctl card was initially mounted after printer installation, there was an invalid counter value saved in
1406 5
FRAM (not 0).
1407 Invalid restore data saved in flash memory.
1408 Invalid restore data saved in FRAM.
1409 Version of restore data saved in flash memory does not match.
1410 Version of restore data saved in FRAM does not match.
1411 The engine PCB and PMS may have been replaced at the same time.
1412 There is no restore data for the PMS when restoring from test mode.
1413 The main 5V power supply remains OFF for more than a second.
1414 Invalid counter value after the printer was turned ON.
1800 1-9 A communication error was detected between the CPU (SH2A) and RFID tag microcontroller.
1801 1 A communication error was detected in the machine code RFID tag module.
1801 2 A communication error was detected in the black RFID tag module.
1801 3 A communication error was detected in the cyan RFID tag module.
1801 4 A communication error was detected in the magenta RFID tag module.
1801 5 A communication error was detected in the yellow RFID tag module.
1801 6 A communication error was detected in the engine control PCB.
1801 7-9 Communication error other than 1801 (1–6) (reserved)
1810 Incompatible engine information.
The machine ID as calculated from the Engine control PCB does not match with the machine code in the
1811 1-3
Control card mounted on the machine.
The machine ID in an RFID tag for which the status code is "officially registered" does not match printer
1812 1-3
engine information (in terms of regional specifications or classification).
PLL (phase-locked loop) re-configuration data compatible to the X3-IP-PCB on the machine does not exist.
1940 1
Install the newest version machine Firmware when this error occurs.
PLL (phase-locked loop) re-configuration process in the X3-IP-PCB ended in error.
1940 2 Install the newest version machine Firmware when this error occurs, and if this does not solve the problem,
replace the X3-IP-PCB.
[ 15-28 ]
Panel Messages

!!System Error!!
There is a discrepancy exceeding 5V between the drive voltage acquired from rows of head nozzles (A)
and the drive voltage of rows of head nozzles as configured in the register (B).
When the variation code is 1, (A) and (B) are the 1 side, and when it is 2, (A) and (B) are the 2 side.
Details in Common
The HDR sub-CPU detected a divergence of the drive voltage acquired from rows of head nozzles (C) from
the drive voltage as configured.
When the variation code is 3, (C) is the 1 side, and when it is 4, (C) is the 2 side.
Point Description
2230-2235 1-4 Black #1-6 head
2236-2241 1-4 Cyan #1-6 head
2242-2247 1-4 Magenta #1-6 head
2248-2253 1-4 Yellow #1-6 head

!!System Error!!
Drive waveform configuration could not be completed correctly for head nozzles (A).
Details in Common
When the variation code is 1, (A) is the 1 side, and when it is 2, (A) is the 2 side.
Point Description
2260-2265 1-2 Black #1-6 head
2266-2271 1-2 Cyan #1-6 head
2272-2277 1-2 Magenta #1-6 head
2278-2283 1-2 Yellow #1-6 head

!!System Error!!
Head nozzles (A) were not in a state enabling drive waveform configuration.
Details in Common
Point Description
2290-2295 1-2 Black #1-6 head
2296-2301 1-2 Cyan #1-6 head
2302-2307 1-2 Magenta #1-6 head
2308-2313 1-2 Yellow #1-6 head

!!System Error!!
Head nozzles (A) were not in a state enabling drive waveform configuration.
Details in Common
Point Description
2320-2325 1-2 Black #1-6 head
2326-2331 1-2 Cyan #1-6 head
2332-2337 1-2 Magenta #1-6 head
2338-2343 1-2 Yellow #1-6 head
[ 15-29 ]
Panel Messages

!!System Error!!
Point Description
2350 1 Black head precursor control not possible before the next page.
2350 2 Cyan head precursor control not possible before the next page.
2350 3 Magenta head precursor control not possible before the next page.
2350 4 Yellow head precursor control not possible before the next page.
3020 The finisher could not switch modes correctly.
3021 There is a problem with communication devices between the finisher SS and finisher.
3022 An attempt was made to set the finisher adjustment value, but it could not be set correctly.
3023 The SFX finisher does not work, except when firmware is downloaded.
5502 1-5 Communication error with the Coin vendor/Card vendor. < This error not applicable on your machine. >
5513 Detected that wrong Finisher model connected.
The option connected to wrong connector.
5514 1-5
5518 Turned the option (Mail Maker or Perfect Binder) power OFF while printer power is ON.
Option startup error (No reply from the option)
5520 1-5
Option startup error (Option power OFF)
5521 1-5
Option startup error (Option main program startup error)
5522 1-5
Option (Perfect Binder/Mail Maker) power supply error 1
5530
When perform test mode No.1895, connected the different option with one set on the test mode.
5531
The option is connected when the option power is ON, or during sleep mode.
5532 When perform test mode No.1895, connected the different option with one set on the test mode during
sleep mode.
5533
The option was disconnected during sleep mode.
5534
The option sub-switch turned OFF during sleep mode.
[ 15-30 ]
Panel Messages
Type S99: Software Error

!!System Error!!
Point Description
0006 <Software bug caused by invalid logic or other problems><CPU for SS controlling paper transfer>
<Software bug caused by invalid logic><DSP for SS controlling paper transfer><When emergency stop
0007 1
error occurs>
<Software bug caused by invalid logic><DSP for SS controlling paper transfer><When emergency stop
0007 2
error being solved>
<Software bug caused by invalid logic><DSP for SS controlling paper transfer><When recovery error
0007 3
occurs>
<Software bug caused by invalid logic><DSP for SS controlling paper transfer><When recovery error being
0007 4
solved>
<Software bug caused by invalid logic><DSP for SS controlling paper transfer><When paper floating error
0007 5
occurs>
<Software bug caused by invalid logic><DSP for SS controlling paper transfer><During the calculation
0007 6
process>
<Software bug caused by invalid logic><DSP for SS controlling paper transfer><During reception of internal
0007 7
processing>
<Software bug caused by invalid logic><DSP for SS controlling paper transfer><When finish reception of
0007 8
internal processing>
0007 9 <Software bug caused by invalid logic><DSP for SS controlling paper transfer><At invalid data detection>
0008 1 <Software bug caused by invalid logic><CPU for SS controlling paper transfer><Cause 1>
0010 The SS controlling paper transfer have detected a tray elevator sequence error.
0012 The FU paper receiving tray unit is not connected, but face up ejection is specified.
0013 During a printing job, the next page data nor stop signal does not come within one minute.
0034 Restoring from mirrored data is not completed in time.
In job output processing in the engine interface SS, the page information file could not be acquired in the
0037
default directory.
In job output processing in the engine interface SS, the format of the page information file did not match the
0038
prescribed format.
In image expansion processing in the engine interface SS, the PRN file could not be acquired from the
0039
default directory.
In image expansion processing in the engine interface SS, there was an invalid job type in the page
0040
information file.
In image expansion processing in the engine interface SS, an invalid value was detected in the supported
0041
printing size.
0042 An error was returned for a system call in the PMS.
0043 Errors such as [fopen] or [fclos]e occurred after file access function calls.
Mirroring was performed for counter data and test mode setting values, but the mirroring file could not be
0070
created correctly on the control PCB unit hard disk, preventing backup.
Mirroring was performed for counter data and test mode setting values, but the mirroring file on the control
0071
PCB unit hard disk was invalid, preventing the restore.
No response between subsystems in the control PCB unit when instructed to start communication for
initialization
0073 1-6
Variation code: 1: Engine interface SS, 2: External interface SS, 3: Operation panel SS, 4: Network SS, 5:
Image adjustment SS, 6: Security SS
No response between subsystems in the control PCB unit when instructed to start communication in
0074 1-6 preparation for power OFF
Variation code: Same as above
Invalid logic or other problems involving system control have caused a software bug (detected by the
0075 1-2
controller).
[ 15-31 ]
Panel Messages

!!System Error!!
Point Description
0076 Communication could not be established in PCI communication between the engine and controller sections.
0095 No machine code RFID tag
0096 1-7 Invalid machine code RFID tag
0116 Image control buffer problems were detected in the engine firmware.
0118 1 Detected the color definition information error during initialization in the X3-IP-PCB.
0118 2 Detected the color definition information error during operation in the X3-IP-PCB.
0119 1 K color image address error detected within the X3-IP-PCB.
0119 2 C color image address error detected within the X3-IP-PCB.
0119 3 M color image address error detected within the X3-IP-PCB.
0119 4 Y color image address error detected within the X3-IP-PCB.
0140 System error with CPU operating system
0141 1 Invalid logic or other problems involving maintenance unit control have caused a software bug.
0141 2 Time-out error related to maintenance unit control.
0142 Invalid logic or other problems involving ink circulation unit control have caused a software bug.
0143 Invalid logic or other problems involving ink supply unit control have caused a software bug.
0144 1 Invalid logic or other problems involving temperature unit control have caused a software bug.
0144 2 Invalid temperature set in test mode
0145 1 A software error in the engine system control module was detected.
A software error was detected in the engine system control module (image adjustment, data transfer
0145 2
processing).
0145 3 A software error was detected in the engine system control module (processing for downloading).
0145 4 A software error was detected in the engine system control module (controller SRQ processing).
0145 5 A software error was detected in the engine system control module (controller CDB and SDB processing).
0145 6 A software error was detected in the engine system control module (controller boot processing).
0145 7 An information overflow was detected in the engine system control module. (STS_03)
0145 8 An information overflow was detected in the engine system control module. (STS_07)
An information nonresponse was detected in the engine system control module from test mode control
0145 9
module.
0146 1 Invalid logic or other problems involving error control have caused a software bug.
0146 2 Invalid logic or other problems involving error recovery control have caused a software bug.
0146 3 Paper jam re-detection process exclusive condition error in the error recovery control module.
Wrong classification recovery item was detected at the beginning of recovery action in the error recovery
0146 4
control module.
Wrong classification recovery item was detected at the beginning of recovery phase changeover in the error
0146 5
recovery control module.
Wrong classification recovery item was detected at the beginning of recovery information setup in the error
0146 6
recovery control module.
Wrong classification recovery item was detected at the beginning of recovery information acquisition in the
0146 7
error recovery control module.
0146 8 Retry time-over for the ink pan position recovery action was detected in the error recovery control module.
0146 9 Retry time-over for the head cleaning recovery action was detected in the error recovery control module.
0147 Receipt of an unsupported test mode number or other problems have caused a software bug.
0148 3 Invalid parameters were detected in the HDR control module.
0148 4 Malfunctioning was detected in the HDR control module.
0148 5 Malfunctioning was detected in the HDR sub-CPU for head control PCU 1 (KC).
0148 6 Malfunctioning was detected in the HDR sub-CPU for head control PCU 2 (MY).
0148 7 Invalid parameters were detected in the CIS control module (paper width detection sensor).
0148 8 Malfunctioning was detected in the CIS control module (paper width detection sensor).
0149 1 Invalid parameters were detected in the controller PCB unit communication driver.
0149 2 Malfunctioning was detected in the controller PCB unit communication driver.
0149 3 Data overflow was detected in the controller PCB unit communication driver.
0150 1-5 Invalid parameters were detected in the image-generation module.
0150 9 Invalid parameters were detected in the image-generation module.
[ 15-32 ]
Panel Messages

!!System Error!!
Point Description
0151 1 Error from software bugs related to the sheet queue
0152 1 Abnormal action was detected within the set manager of the engine firmware.
During the job deletion, the set manager of the engine firmware detected time-out (40 seconds) on any of
0152 2 the following module.
<Print manager>, <Mechanical control>, <Paper transfer control>, <Finisher>
At the stopping of the printing job, the set manager of the engine firmware detected time-out (50 seconds)
0152 3 on any of the following module.
At the start of the printing job, the set manager of the engine firmware detected time-out (3 minutes) on any
0152 4 of the following module.
At the temporary halt of the auto-cleaning, the set manager of the engine firmware detected time-out (50
0152 5 seconds) on any of the following module.
At the start of the printing job, the set manager of the engine firmware detected stall on the command from
0152 6 the controller [time-out = 3 minutes] on any of the following module.
<Controller>, <System control module (engine firmware)>
When the engine firmware received the job deleting command from the controller [time-out = 180 seconds]
0152 7 on any of the following module.
<Print Manager>
0154 1 Parameter error is detected in the X3-IP-PCB.
0154 2 Performance error is detected in the X3-IP-PCB.
0154 3 Parameter error is detected in the X3-IP-PCB at the time of print start.
0154 4 Parameter error is detected in the X3-IP-PCB at the time of sheet reservation.
0154 5 Parameter error is detected in the X3-IP-PCB at the time of image processing start.
0154 6 Transfer ID is detected as [0] at the time the image is processed by the X3-IP-PCB.
0154 7 Image process request was detected by the X3-IP-PCB.
0155 1 Lack of memory area is detected in the system control module in the Engine control PCB.
0155 2 Error related to pre-idle condition is detected in the system control module in the Engine control PCB.
Reply error on the paper transfer during the roller profile test mode process was detected in the system
0155 3
control module in the Engine control PCB.
0155 4 Transition error was detected in the system control module in the Engine control PCB.
Time-out error on the test mode store/restore was detected in the system control module in the Engine
0155 5
control PCB.
0155 6 Manual store/restore parameter was detected in the system control module in the Engine control PCB.
Transition error on the test mode store/restore was detected in the system control module in the Engine
0155 7
control PCB.
Error on the set cancel process completion was detected in the system control module in the Engine control
0155 8
PCB.
Receive timing error on the STS13 command was detected in the system control module in the Engine
0155 9
control PCB.
0156 1 Set cancel movement time-out was detected in the system control module in the Engine control PCB.
Error in the acknowledgment parameter was detected in the system control module in the Engine control
0156 2
PCB.
0156 3 Error in the initialization movement was detected in the system control module in the Engine control PCB.
0156 4 Error in the wake-up action was detected in the system control module in the Engine control PCB.
Error in the BP de-elevation movement during the paper jam was detected in the system control module in
0156 5
the Engine control PCB.
Unexpected value on the control variable was detected in the system control module in the Engine control
0156 6
PCB.
[ 15-33 ]
Panel Messages

!!System Error!!
Point Description
<Error recovery module><Retry time out error detection><Mechanical initialization request not accepted in
0157 1
the recovery operations during cleaning>
<Error recovery module><Retry time out error detection><Non-receipt request initial ink filling recovery
0157 2
operations>
<Error recovery module><Detects invalid recovery phase><During recovery operations in the recovery
0157 3
operations during initial ink filling>
<Error recovery module><Detects invalid recovery phase><During an emergency shutdown of the recovery
0157 4
operations during initial ink filling>
<Error recovery module><Retry time out error detection><Ink change operation request could not received
0157 5
at the recovery operations during initial ink filling>
<Error recovery module><Retry time out error detection><Ink change operation request could not received
0157 6
at the recovery operations when ink not remains>
<Error recovery module><Retry time out error detection><Mechanical initialization request could not
0157 7
received at the recovery operations when ink not remains>
<Error recovery module><Retry time out error detection><Paper jam recovery request could not received
0157 8
before recovery operations>
<Error recovery module><Retry time out error detection><Paper jam recovery request could not received
0157 9
after recovery operations>
0158 1 Retry time out error detection in the error recovery module. <Front cover lock action>
0158 2 Retry time out error detection in the error recovery module. <Front cover unlock action 1>
0158 3 Retry time out error detection in the error recovery module. <Front cover unlock action 2>
0160 1 Software bug preventing receipt of ink temperature adjustment requests in time and similar problems.
0160 2 The ink heater was activated when the printer was turned ON, but ink circulation did not begin in time.
0161 During ink temperature adjustment required for ink circulation, ink circulation stopped.
Mechanical control software errors 1- 9
0162 1
Software bugs prevented mechanical operation from being completed in time.
Mechanical control software errors 2
0162 2
Head gap (Belt Platen) adjustment could not completed in time.(At print preparation)
0162 3
Auxiliary operation sequence could not completed in time.(At print preparation)
0162 4
Paper tray switching operation or ink circulation operation could not completed in time.(At print preparation)
0162 5 Paper tray switching operation or ink circulation operation could not completed in time.(At normal head
cleaning)
0162 6
Mechanical operation could not completed in time.(At strong head cleaning)
0162 7
Transfer belt fan operation could not completed in time.
0162 8
Ink maintenance operations could not completed in time.(At mechanic operation)
0162 9
Ink circulation operations could not completed in time.(At mechanic operation)
[ 15-34 ]
Panel Messages

!!System Error!!
Point Description
0163 1
Maintenance unit and Ink circulation operations could not completed in time.(At mechanic operation)
0163 2
Auxiliary operation sequence could not completed in time.(At mechanic initialization)
0163 3
Could not received job end report from the paper transfer section in time.(Paper transfer testmode)
0163 4
Requested operation can not be executed since the mechanism initialization has not completed.
0163 5
Head drive process could not completed in time.(At MD recovery operation)
0163 6
Authorization cam motor action by test mode could not completed in time.
0163 7
BP unit could not move to the home position with in time.(At mechanic initialization)
0164 1 Software bugs caused a persistent busy state in time after mechanical operations were requested.
0164 2 Authorization cam motor action could not completed in time after mechanical operations were requested.
0165 1 Malfunction detected by RFID tag manager
0165 2 Buffer overflow affecting RFID tag manager communication
The RFID tag control SS was notified by the RFID tag manager that ink has run out, but the RFID tag
0165 3
control SS did not issue notification of a "no ink" error.
0166 1 A software error involving paper transfer control was detected in the engine power supply control module.
0166 2 A software error involving RFID tag control was detected in the engine power supply control module.
0166 3 A software error involving mechanical control was detected in the engine power supply control module.
0166 4 A software error involving counter control was detected in the engine power supply control module.
0166 5 A software error involving finisher control was detected in the engine power supply control module.
A software error involving image generation control was detected in the engine power supply control
0166 6
module.
0168 1 Page information buffer FULL error
0168 2 Paper leading edge was detected without page control command.
0168 3 Paper tail edge was detected without page control command.
0168 4 Paper tail edge was detected before the leading edge was detected.
0168 5 Paper leading edge was detected before the tail edge was detected.
0170 1 Flash memory error 1: Could not acquire access rights for flash memory
0170 2 Flash memory error 2: Could not access the area for writing the adjustment value to flash memory
0170 3 Flash memory error 3: Unspecified access ID for flash memory
0170 4 Flash memory error 4: An odd-numbered address was specified for flash memory access.
0170 5 Flash memory error 5: An odd-numbered size was specified for flash memory access.
0170 6 Flash memory error 6: An excessive size was specified for flash memory access.
0170 7 Flash memory error 7: No free space in flash memory
0170 8 Flash memory error 8: Flash memory access could not be completed in time.
0170 9 Flash memory error 9: Flash memory write error
0171 1 Flash memory error 10: Could not read from flash memory shadow area
0171 2 Flash memory error 11: Could not write to flash memory shadow area
0171 3 Flash memory error 12: Write requested outside of flash memory
Error detecting that the resident processes of PMS is down
0173 1-8 Variation code:
1: NET-SS, 2: EXT-SS, 3: OPL-SS, 4: SYS-SS, 5: ENG-SS, 6: GCH-SS, 7: SEC-SS, 8: OS
0180 1-9 Exclusive access control error was detected in the Image Control module.
0223 The printer detected that the color parameters do not match the color mode for the printing image.
0246 The machine firmware version in the Controller does not match with that in the Engine Control PCB
[ 15-35 ]
Panel Messages

!!System Error!!
Point Description
One of sub-system failed during the transition to power-saving.
0284 1-4
Variation code indicates the sub-system in the PMS that reported an error.
One of sub-system failed during the transition to sleep-mode.
0285 1-4
One of sub-system failed during the transition to backlight-off-mode.
0286 1-4
One of sub-system failed during the transition to recovery from power saving mode.
0287 1-4
1155 1 Invalid logic detected in the paper feed tray class
1155 2 Undefined parameters detected in the paper feed tray class
1160 1 Wrong logic detection on the paper ejection tray class.
1160 2 Undefined parameter detection on the paper ejection tray class.
1302 Invalid parameters passed to SS controlling paper transfer (software bug)
1402 Failed to restore mirrored data
1404 1 Invalid parameters for restoring mirrored data were acquired by count control software.
1404 2 Invalid parameters for restoring paper size setting were acquired by count control software.
1404 3 Invalid parameters for acquiring the detailed count were acquired by count control software.
1404 4 Invalid parameters for acquiring the cleaning count were acquired by count control software.
1404 5 Invalid test mode parameters were acquired by count control software.
1415 Mechanical wake-up has failed.
Finisher System software interface error 1
3030 1 Communication is impaired between the printing control system software and finisher system software
interface (sequence problem).
Finisher system software interface error 2
interface (invalid parameters).
Communication is impaired between the finisher system software and finisher unit.
3031 1
(Communication sequence problem)
3031 2
(Invalid communication command)
3031 3
(Invalid communication parameters)
3031 4
(ACK reception error)
3031 5
(Invalid ACK sequence bit)
3031 6
(Invalid command sequence bit)
3031 7
(Command checksum error)
3031 8
(Invalid command length)
3031 9
(Invalid sync sequence command packet)
[ 15-36 ]
Panel Messages

!!System Error!!
Point Description
3032 1
(ACK reception error 2)
3032 2
(Invalid ACK sequence bit 2)
3032 3
(No send buffer)
3032 4
(No receive buffer)
3032 5
(No reply from the Finisher)
Printing control system software interface error (1)
interface (sequence problem).
interface (invalid parameters).
interface (communication time-out).
3034 The finisher system software program is corrupted.
3035 Paper size setting was not possible.
3036 1 Possibility of software bug.
3036 2 Possibility of I/O register rewrote by the software.
3036 3 Possibility of Multi-Finisher power went OFF, or possibility of software bug.
3036 4 Possibility of Option PCB resetting due to loose cable.
3037 2 Possibility of I/O register rewrote by the software
3037 4 Possibility of Option PCB resetting due to loose cable.
Finisher System Software I/F error 1
3675
Software Process was made in wrong sequence.
Finisher System Software I/F error 2
3676
Error occured between Finisher System Software and Print Control System Software.
Finisher System Software received undefined error.
3677 1-5
Cannot perform program sheet reservation
3678 1-5
Communication error between the printer and Coin/Card vendor. < This error not applicable on your
5503
machine.>
Communication error between the printer and Coin/Card vendor. < This error not applicable on your
5504
machine.>
[ 15-37 ]
Panel Messages
Type S100: PB Communication Error

The Perfect binder has an error.
Point Description
Unable to communicate between Motor control PCB and PB Main PCB in Perfect Binder (1-9)
3591 1-9
(Negative ACKnowledgement data received by PB Main PCB)
Unable to communicate between Motor control PCB and PB Main PCB in Perfect Binder (10-17)
3592 1-8
(Negative ACKnowledgement data received by PB Main PCB)
3649 Communication error occured
Type S107: PB Transfer speed error

The Perfect binder has an error.
Point Description
Varietion code 1: Main text sheet transfer speed error
3762 1-2 Varietion code 2: Cover sheet transfer speed error
Transfer speed (Under 290mm per second or over 700mm per second)
Type S110: MM Transfer speed error

The Mail maker has an error.
Display Press the power key on the operation panel to turn off the power and then on again.
Point Description
3655 Transfer speed information received from the printer is undefined value.
[ 15-38 ]
Panel Messages
4-2. Unit Errors (U)
Type U01: Scanner connection error

Communication with the scanner is disconnected.
Display Check the scanner for power supply or connection and press RESET key.
Press the Reset key, or turn OFF the printer. (Turn OFF the printer through sub power key.)
It may also be possible to clear the error as follows:
Clear " Reconnect the scanner.
" Restart the scanner.
" In the case of U01-0220 only, you may need to download scanner firmware.
Point Description
0063 The USB connection is Full-Speed (12 Mbps), not Hi-Speed (480 Mbps).
0202 During communication with the scanner, the scanner did not respond.
0219 The scanner is disconnected or OFF.
0220 No scanner firmware
0256 Old firmware scanner connected with new version unit. (Need firmware upgrade on the scanner)
0257 Connected scanner is not supported. (Connect correct scanner model)
4120 The USB connection is Full-Speed (12 Mbps), not Hi-Speed (480 Mbps).
4121 The USB cable was disconnected during image data transfer.
Type U02: Scanner communication error

Communication with the scanner failed.
It may also be possible to clear the error as follows:
Clear
• Reconnect the scanner.
• Restart the scanner.
Point Description
0201 During communication with the scanner, an unspecified command was received from scanner.
0203 The scanning parameters are incorrect.
0205 The scanner communication program failed to allocate memory.
0207 Data for testing scanner data monitoring could not be written.
0210 Scanner information file could not be opened.
0211 Image file from the scanner could not be opened.
0213 Image data from the scanner could not be saved.
0215 Image data could not be received from the scanner.
0216 Data for printing could not be received from the scanner.
0217 Error on the Scanner.
0218 The next original could not be detected within 30 seconds during AF scanning.
0221 Incorrect version of command for scanner communication.
Data transfer failed between the controller and scanner, due to a bad USB connection, timeout, or other
4200
reasons.
Scanning could not be started from the controller when the next original was determined to be ready in
4201
communication between the controller and scanner.
[ 15-39 ]
Panel Messages
Type U03: FB error

The scanner has an error.
Point Description
4300 Scanner operation was not finished in time.
4301 In carriage operation expected to deactivate the HP sensor on completion, it was not deactivated in time.
4302 In carriage operation expected to activate the HP sensor on completion, it was not activated in time.
4303 The carriage setting value for the amount of movement or the frequency was out of range.
Error in interrupt processing of the pulse motor.
4304
Need to upgrade SH firmware & FPGA (Rear stage) firmware.
4310 Time-out waiting for black shading.
4311 Time-out waiting for white shading.
Timeout error during shading process.
4312
Need to upgrade SH firmware & FPGA (Front stage) firmware or replace the hardware parts.
After the scanner lamp was activated, the maximum time to keep the lamp ON per scanning job was exceeded
4316
and the lamp remains ON.
4322 Data after gain adjustment is smaller than the minimum value or greater than the maximum value.
4323 Time-out waiting for gain adjustment.
Failed to adjusting LED light volume.
4324
Need to replace spare parts. (CCD lamp, CCD PCB, Scanner PCB, etc.)
Timeout error in adjusting LED light volume.
4325
Need to replace spare parts. (CCD lamp, CCD PCB, Scanner PCB, etc.)
When the test mode for checking data in DDR memory was accessed, an error occurred in the first stage of
4500
the DDR memory.
When RGB data was checked in the test mode for checking data in DDR memory, an error occurred in the
4501
second stage of the DDR memory.
When gray data was checked in the test mode for checking data in DDR memory, an error occurred in the
4502
second stage of the DDR memory.
Type U04: AF error

Point Description
4420 The AF is not connected. ("AF version 0" is sent in initial communication to the controller.)
4430 There is no AF program (issued from AF side).
4440 Failed to adjust the sensitivity of the AF original IN sensor (issued from AF side)
4441 The AF fan motor is not working (issued from AF side).
4442 Detected the AF After Separation Sensor error. Need to replace the parts.
4449 Detected that wrong AF model connected. Replace to AF model that supported.
4470 AF operation was not restored from power save mode in time (not detected when the AF is not connected).
Type U05: AF communication error

Point Description
Scanner–AF communication: An operation request was sent by the scanner when 24V was not supplied to the
4450
AF.
Scanner–AF communication: AF initialization failed following communication failure after three attempts by the
4461
scanner.
4462 In scanner–AF communication, transmission by the scanner was not finished.
4463 In scanner–AF communication, a sequence error occurred (control signal error).
Timeout error that the reply command did not send from the AF.
4464
To solve this error, upgrade scanner software or AF software, etc.
[ 15-40 ]
Panel Messages
Type U06: Scanner lock settings error

The scanner setting has not been completed.
Display
Call service. (The lock not yet released.)
Clear Note: To resolve the underlying problem, access test mode 05715 and set the scanner locked setting to 0
(operation allowed).
Point Description
4330 Scanner locked settings prevent operation.
Type U07: Scanner EEPROM error

The scanner settings are not realized properly.
Display
Call service.
Point Description
4130 The serial number stored in EEPROM has not been set.
4131 The test mode setting values stored in EEPROM are out of range.
4132 The default image processing setting values stored in EEPROM are out of range.
Some of setting values on Test mode No.5900, 5901, 5902, 5903, 5904 & 5905 are out of range.　
4134
To solve this error, set them into the value in the range.
Type U08: Scanner profiling data error

Display
Call service.
Clear Note: To resolve the underlying problem, access test mode 5406 (scanner profiling mode) to store scanner
profiling data in flash memory. If the error persists, cool off the unit and access test mode 5406 again.
Point Description
4360 Scanner profiling data is not stored in flash memory after the scanner starts up.
4361 Valid profiling data was not generated when profiling mode was accessed in test mode.
Type U09: Mail maker motor lock error

Point Description
3490 MM Tamper Feed Motor lock
3491 MM Ejection Elevation Motor lock
3492 MM Ejection Motor lock
3493 Detected motor malfunction when operate unit check of Test mode.
3494 Failed to initialize the mechanism. (Incorrect motor home position, Motor lock)
Received wrong paper information from the printer unit.
3495
Could not confirm the paper.(Body or Form)
3496 Failed to stop paper transportation.
Failed to detect the home position of the MM Top Tamp Motor.
3497
Misalignment of the tip plate (Motor synchronization loss, Malfunction of the MM Top Tamper HP Sensor, etc.)
Failed to detect the home position of the MM Tamper Nip Motor.
3498
(MM Tamper Nip Motor malfunction, Malfunction of the MM Tamper Nip HP Sensor, etc.)
Failed to detect the home position of the MM Body Fold Set Motor.
3499 Misalignment of the switching flipper (Motor synchronization loss, Malfunction of the MM Body Fold Set HP
Sensor, etc.)
Failed to detect the home position of the MM Form Entrance Nip Motor.
3500
(MM Form Entrance Nip Motor malfunction, Malfunction of the MM Form Nip HP Sensor, etc.)
Failed to detect the home position of the MM Gluing Motor.
3501
(MM Gluing Motor malfunction, Malfunction of the MM Gluing HP Sensor, etc.)
3518 MM Flap Fold Motor lock
3629 Mail Maker not equipped ejection place specified by the printer unit.
[ 15-41 ]
Panel Messages
Type U09: Mail maker motor lock error

Point Description
Could not detect the MM End Tamper HP Sensor while running the motor. (Motor synchronization loss,
3665
Malfunction of the sensor, etc.)
3666 Could not detect the MM Side Tamper HP Sensor while running the motor. (Same as 3665)
3667 Could not detect the MM Body Hit HP Sensor 1 while running the motor. (Same as 3665)
3668 Could not detect the MM Body Hit HP Sensor 2 while running the motor. (Same as 3665)
3669 Could not detect the MM Form Horizontal HP Sensor while running the motor. (Same as 3665)
3670 Could not detect the MM Form Hit HP Sensor 2 while running the motor. (Same as 3665)
3671 Could not detect the MM Form Hit HP Sensor 3 while running the motor. (Same as 3665)
Type U10: Scanner EEPROM error

Display
Call service.
Clear Note: To resolve the underlying problem, access test mode 5406 (scanner profiling mode) to store scanner
profiling data in flash memory. If the error persists, cool off the unit and access test mode 5406 again.
Point Description
4133 Setting values on Test mode No.5631, 5632 & 5633 are out of range.　
Type U11: Puncher unit error

The finisher punching unit has an error.
Point Description
3060 After operation was started, the side registration sensor was not deactivated in time.
Type U12: Stapler unit error

The finisher stapler unit has an error.
Point Description
3061 After operation was started, the stacker front position sensor was not activated in time.
3062 After operation was started, the tamper home sensor was not deactivated in time.
3063 After operation was started, the tamper home sensor was not activated in time.
3064 After operation was started, the end wall home sensor was not deactivated in time.
3065 After operation was started, the end wall open sensor was not activated in time.
3066 After operation was started, the end wall home sensor was not activated in time.
3067 After operation was started, the end wall open sensor was not deactivated in time.
3068 After operation was started, the eject clamp up sensor was not deactivated in time.
3069 After operation was started, the eject clamp up sensor was not activated in time.
3070 After operation was started, the shelf home sensor was not deactivated in time.
3071 After operation was started, the shelf home sensor was not activated in time.
3072 After operation was started, the staple home sensor was not activated in time.
3073 After operation was started, the staple move home sensor was not deactivated in time.
3074 After operation was started, the staple move home sensor was not activated in time.
3075 After operation was started, the staple center position sensor was not activated in time.
3076 After operation was started, the staple center position sensor was not deactivated in time.
3077 After operation was started, the sub paddle home sensor was not activated in time.
3078 After operation was started, the sub paddle home sensor was not deactivated in time.
[ 15-42 ]
Panel Messages
Type U14: 3-fold tray error

The finisher 3-fold tray has an error.
Point Description
3079 After operation was started, end guide home sensor 1 was not deactivated in time.
3080 After operation was started, end guide home sensor 2 was not deactivated in time.
3081 After operation was started, end guide home sensor 1 was not activated in time.
3082 After operation was started, end guide home sensor 2 was not activated in time.
After the tray latch solenoid was activated, the envelope folder tray interlock switch was not deactivated in
3083
time.
The 3-folder tray was operational at machine power ON, but became non-operational while in operation due to
3325 mechanical error.
Possible cause: Damaged sensor, motor, loose connector, etc.
Type U16 : Stacking tray error

The finisher stacking tray has an error.
Point Description
3084 After stack tray lowering or raising began, the stack height sensor was not deactivated in time.
3085 Stacking tray beyond upper limit position.
3086 Stacking tray beyond lower limit position.
Stacking tray was operational at machine power ON, but became non-operational while in operation due to
Type U17: Booklet tray error

The finisher booklet tray has an error.
Point Description
3087 After operation was started, the front booklet tamper home sensor was not activated in time.
3088 After operation was started, the front booklet tamper home sensor was not deactivated in time.
3089 After operation was started, the booklet end guide home sensor was not deactivated in time.
3090 After operation was started, the booklet end guide home sensor was not activated in time.
3091 After operation was started, the rear booklet tamper home sensor was not activated in time.
3092 After operation was started, the rear booklet tamper home sensor was not deactivated in time.
3093 After operation was started, the knife folding sensor was not activated in time.
3094 When the front cover was closed, the booklet drawer set sensor was deactivated.
3095 After operation was started, the booklet knife home sensor was not activated in time.
3096 After operation was started, the booklet knife home sensor was not deactivated in time.
3097 The stapler did not work after the booklet stapler start signal was sent.
Type U18: Scanner custom color profile data error

Display
Call service.
Clear Note: To resolve the underlying problem, access test mode 05803 and set the color profile selection to 0
(standard).
Point Description
4230 Color profile data has not been downloaded to the custom area.
4250 Failed to download the custom color profile.
[ 15-43 ]
Panel Messages
Type U19: Booklet tray power reboot request

Set Booklet unit properly and Reboot by press the Sub Power Key.
Display
Point Description
Booklet tray was operational at machine power ON, but became non-operational while in operation due to
Type U51: High capacity feed motor lock

The High capacity feeder has an error.
Clear Press the Reset key
Point Description
1 ： Detected elevator motor lock during the ascent of High Capacity Feeder P-F tray.
2520 1-3 2 ： Detected elevator motor lock during the descent of High Capacity Feeder P-F tray.
3 ： Detected elevator motor lock during servo operation of High Capacity Feeder P-F tray.
2521 Detected the motor lock during High Capacity Feeder PU drive motor starting.
2522 Detected the motor lock during High Capacity Feeder Intermediate transport motor starting.
2529 The HCF Nip release motor of High Capacity Feeder did not operate as of specification.
2530 Detected over current at the HCF elevator motor of High Capacity Feeder.
Type U52: Offset Stapler Communication error

The Offset stapler has an error.
Point Description
3358 Undetermined
3359 Undetermined
Type U53: Offset Stapler CPU error

Point Description
3360 Undetermined
3361 Undetermined
[ 15-44 ]
Panel Messages
Type U54: Offset Stapler Motor Lock

Point Description
3362 1-2 1:[Discharge roller] error (during elevation) 2:[Discharge roller] error (during lowering)
3363 1-2 1:[Scrape roller] error (during elevation) 2:[Scrape roller] error (during lowering)
3364 1-2 1:[Front alignment plate] return error 2:[Front alignment plate] move error
3365 1-2 1:[Rear alignment plate] error (return) 2:[Rear alignment plate] error (while moving)
3366 1-2 1:[Staple slide] error (return) 2:[Staple slide] error (while moving)
3367 1-3 1:[Clinch Stapler] error (return) 2:[Clinch Stapler] error 3:[Clinch Stapler] error (cueing)
3368 1-2 1:[Return roller] error (during elevation) 2:[Return roller] error (during lowering)
1:[Stack Tray] error (Upper limit position), 2:[Stack Tray] error (during elevation), 3:[Stack Tray] error (during
3369 1-4
lowering), 4:[Stack Tray] error (clock timing)
1:Stack Tray front shift error 1, 2:Stack Tray front shift error 2, 3:Stack Tray rear shift error ,1 4:Stack Tray rear
3370 1-5
shift error 2, 5:Stack Tray shift error (clock timing)
3373 1-2 Anti needle scratch lever error (1:Lever does not come out, 2:Lever does not return)
3374 1-2 1:Power fan motor lock, 2:Relay section fan motor lock
Type U55: High cap feeder hardware error

Point Description
2523 1-9 Communication error between SH and DSP in the High Capacity Feeder. Error occured at SH side.
2524 1-9 Communication error between SH and DSP in the High Capacity Feeder. Error occured at DSP side.
Possible failure on the HCF Middle Entrance Sensor (send or receive).
2525
The volume of received light does not change in response to changes in the volume of light emitted.
Failed to adjust the light intensity of the the HCF Middle Entrance Sensor during HCF sensor automatic
2526 adjustment test mode <3419>.
The light intensity could not reach to target volume.
2531 Received a notice [unknown device] from the HCF unit, due to fail to get unit information from EEPROM.
2602 Data error on CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) during HCF data backup.
2603 Failed to recover HCF backup data.
2604 Model information of HCF backup data was incorrect.
2605 Detected abnormal status on HCF EEPROM.
2607 Timed out due to too long waiting time for sending data to HCF EEPROM in serial transmission.
2608 Timed out due to too long waiting time for completing sending data to HCF EEPROM in serial transmission.
2609 Detected a received data error during data communication to HCF EEPROM in serial transmission.
2610 Timed out due to too long waiting time for completing receiving data to HCF EEPROM in serial transmission.
2611 Error occured when writing data to HCF flash.
[ 15-45 ]
Panel Messages
Type U56: High cap feeder software error

Point Description
Detected error at SH side.
2527 1-9
Variation code: 1-9
Detected error at DSP side.
2528 1-9
Variation code: 1-9
2601 Detected undefined data during HCF data backup.
2606 Detected fraudulent address on HCF EEPROM.
2612 Detected abnormal data size when writing data to HCF flash.
2613 Detected abnormal data address when writing data to HCF flash.
2614 1-9 Detected abnormal case on the HCF software control module. (Need upgrading HCF firmware version)
Type U57: Offset Stapler EEPROM error

Point Description
3371 Undetermined
3372 Undetermined
Type U58: Offset Stapler staple error

The Staple unit in Offset stapler has an error.
Point Description
3380 1-2 1:Stapler needle jam 2:Stapler needle cueing jam
[ 15-46 ]
Panel Messages
Type U88: PB motor lock error

An error has occurred in the perfect binder.
Display Press the reset key or Reboot by press the Sub Power Key
If recovery fails, contact a service provider.
Point Description
[Possible cause:
• Motor does not rotate after specified time when motor starts up.
3539 1-2 • Motor not stop rotating when motor received stop request.
• Motor not stop rotating after specified time when sensor detection.]
Variation Code: 1:PB Paper Feed Motor 1, 2:PB Paper Feed Motor 2
PB Cover Cutter Motor malfunction.
3540
Could not detect the PB Cover Cut HP Sensor while running the motor.
3541 PB Vertical Guide Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3542 PB Fore Edge Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3543 1-3
Variation Code: 1:PB Clamp Upper/Lower Motor, 2:PB Clamp Open/Close Motor, 3:PB Clamp Horizontal Motor
3544 PB Glue Roller Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3545 PB Glue Sheet Feed Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3546 PB Glue Sheet Unit Drive Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3547 PB Cover Guide Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3548 PB Forming Plate Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3549 1-2
Variation Code: 1:PB Booklet Exit 1 Motor, 2:PB Booklet Exit 2 Motor
3550 PB Fore Edge Plate Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3551 PB Blind Plate Open/Close Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3552 PB Cover Feed Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3553 PB Cover Tray Lift Up Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
3564 Motor malfunction. [Possible cause: Same as 3539]
Type U89: PB temperature error

Point Description
1: Exceeds [high limit temperature 1] by the temperature measurement thermistor on the glue roller during
temperature control.
3554 1-3 2: Exceeds [high limit temperature 2] by the temperature measurement thermistor on the glue roller during
3: Glue roller temperature drops 15 degrees from set temperature at normal temperature control.
1: Exceeds [high limit temperature 1] by the temperature measurement thermistor on the glue tank during
3555 1-3 2: Exceeds [high limit temperature 2] by the temperature measurement thermistor on the glue tank during
3: Glue tank temperature drops 15 degrees from set temperature at normal temperature control.
Type U90: Error history clear error

Display No message
Clear The error message automatically clears away.
Point Description
At the time of machine power ON, HDD data (error table) is checked. If the data is judged to be broken, the
0262
error history for this error will be kept.
[ 15-47 ]
Panel Messages
Type U91: HCS Motor Lock

The high capacity stacker has an error.
Point Description
3614 HCS Entering Motor lock
3615 HCS Reverse Motor lock
3616 HCS Middle Transfer Motor lock
3617 HCS Ejection Motor lock
3618 HCS Elevator Motor lock
3619 HCS Offset Guide Motor lock
3620 HCS Side Fence Motor lock
3621 HCS End Fence Moor lock
3622 HCS Ejection Wing Motor lock
Could not detect the HCS Tray Paper Jam Sensor in certain period during the HCS Elevator Motor rotating.
Variation Code
3630 1-2
1: HCS Offset Unit Guide Sensor is ON.
2: HCS End Guide Plate Sensor is ON.
3880 Detected overcurrent of the HCS Elevator Motor.
3881 Occurs when could not detect drive waveform after the HCS Elevator Motor starts.
Type U92: PB memory error

Point Description
3650 EEPROM エラー
Type U93: External controller error

An error has occurred in the external CI.
Display
Check the external CI.
Point Description
The external controller hard disk is full.
5001
There is less than 1 GB of free space, and subsequent jobs cannot be processed.
The external controller hard disk is corrupted.
5002 The file system check (fsck) conducted when the external controller starts up has detected an unrecoverable
error.
5003 The external controller hard disk drive can no longer operate correctly.
There is no dongle in the external controller, or the inserted dongle conforms to regional specifications other
5004 than those for the hard disk drive (for example, a Japanese-specification hard disk drive is used with a dongle
for overseas use).
5005 Cannot communicate with the external controller (detected by the controller PCB unit)
Communication (transmission) is possible with the external controller, but it does not follow the correct
5006
sequence (detected by the external controller).
Communication (reception) is possible with the external controller, but it does not follow the correct sequence
5007
(detected by the controller PCB unit).
A power OFF command is sent from the ComColor to the external controller, but the external controller is not
5008 deactivated (detected by the controller PCB unit).
Wait time is one minute.
When scanned data cannot be received correctly by the external controller (detected by the controller PCB
5009
unit)
Could not perform some settings correctly on the external controller.
5010
(When setting were made from the unit to the external controller.)
[ 15-48 ]
Panel Messages
Type U98: Scanner hardware error

Point Description
Invalid content in EEPROM (data when the EEPROM is initially used is not the initialized pattern or the used
4140
pattern.)
4141 Cannot access EEPROM (data cannot be read or written.)
4142 EEPROM CRC error (checksum verification failed due to invalid data in EEPROM)
4143 PCB and EEPROM machine code were compared and a mismatch was determined.
The scanner software version in EEPROM is too new that the current firmware cannot support.
4144
Need to download appropriate scanner software.
4150 Failed to write to flash memory.
4180 FPGA configuration failed in the first or second stage.
4190 Time-out occurred after image data could not be produced by the image processing chip.
4210 Downloading the image processing DSP firmware failed.
4211 The startup response from the image processing DSP was not completed in time.
4212 The shutdown response from the image processing DSP was not completed in time.
4213 The exchange of commands between the image processing DSP and host was not completed in time.
4214 The transmission purpose code for commands sent from the host to the image processing DSP was undefined.
4215 The parameter code for commands sent from the host to the image processing DSP was undefined.
4216 There were too many data elements in the table sent from the host to the image processing DSP.
4217 There were too few data elements in the table sent from the host to the image processing DSP.
4218 The host received an undefined command from the image processing DSP.
4340 CCD PCB setup processing failed.
Time-out waiting for SSI transmission interrupt request
SSI transmission timing
4341 Data sent to the A/D converter (written)
Data sent to the CCD PCB (written)
Data received from the CCD PCB (read)
4350 Scanner fan does not revolve.
Cannot access to Rear stage DDR memory.
4510
Need to upgrade SH firmware & FPGA (Rear stage) firmware or replace the hardware parts.
Type U99: Scanner software error

Point Description
4160 Undefined error occurs. Need to download appropriate scanner software.
Time-out waiting to allocate resources for CCD transmission
CCD transmission timing
4342 During offset or gain adjustment
When acquiring the FB original size
When recording the white level adjustment value
Type U105: PB glue over flow error

Point Description
Detected full glue in the PB glue tank.
3559
Detects by the glue temperature by the thermistor placed at certain position.
[ 15-49 ]
Panel Messages
Type U106: PB glue empty error

Point Description
Detected empty glue in the PB glue tank.
3560
Detects by the glue temperature by the thermistor placed at certain position.
Type U110: ＭＭ ejection guide error

The Paper guide has an error.
Point Description
Detect by the sensor in detecting the state of the mail ejection fence-mail.
3672
Even if reset the ejection fence and restart, if error remains, possible hardware problem.
Type U111: High Cap Stacker is Locked

The High capacity stacker setting has not been completed.
Display
Call service. (The lock not yet released.)
Clear
Note: For a permanent solution, select [0:Permitted] in TM3968.
Point Description
3765 HCS unit is locked.
Type U115: Option power supply error

No output device is connected.
Clear
Note: For a permanent solution, select correct option setting in the Test Mode 1895.
Point Description
5535
When perform test mode No.1895, there is option setting exist but option is not connected.
Type U116: Unsupported option error

An unsupported output device has been connected.
Point Description
5551 Perfect Binder option is connected with A4/Letter model.
5552 Mail Maker option is connected with the model that has no inner paper feed tray unit.
5553 Mail Maker is connected with A4/Letter model.
Type U120: HCS stacker safety SW error

Point Description
3852 Detected the HCS Stocker Upper Safety Switch malfunction.
[ 15-50 ]
Panel Messages
Type U125: HCS unit hardware error

Point Description
3628 Failed to collect equipment information from EEPROM, and informed as unknown equipment.
3866 Abnormal CRC in the HCS back-up data.
3867 Failed to recover HCS back-up data.
3868 Detected incorrect model information in the HCS back-up data.
3869 Detected abnormal status in HCS EEPROM.
3871 Timeout occurred during the serial transmission to HCS EEPROM as waiting to send.
3872 Timeout occurred during the serial transmission to HCS EEPROM as waiting for transmission completion.
3873 Detected a received error during the serial transmission to HCS EEPROM.
3874 Timeout occurred during the serial transmission to HCS EEPROM as waiting for received data completion.
3875 Failed to write data in HCS flash data.
Type U126: HCS unit software error

Point Description
3865 Detected the undefined data during HCS data backing up.
3870 Detected incorrect address in the HCS EEPROM.
3876 Detected abnormal data size during writing data in the HCS flash data.
3877 Detected incorrect address during writing data into the HCS flash data.
Type U127: Mail Maker hardware error

Point Description
5554 At power ON (Mail Maker), 24V power failure has occurred for Mail Maker drive PCB 1.
Type U128: MM EEPROM error

Point Description
3661 Could not refer the data in EEPROM.
3662 Could not write the data to EEPROM correctly.
[ 15-51 ]
Panel Messages
4-3. Warnings (W)
Type W01: AF communication warning

Display An error has occurred in the scanner.
Clear Press the Confirm button on the touch panel.
Point Description
Scanner–AF communication: Successful AF initialization following communication failure after three attempts
by the scanner
Conditions for the three attempts
4460
• Time-out (no response)
• No matching bytes in received commands
• Undefined command received
Type W02: Specified paper not loaded

Load paper in the paper feed tray.
(1)(2)
Display
Note: The paper size is indicated in position (1) and the type of paper in parentheses in position (2).
Example: A4 (Standard)
Do one of the following.
• Load paper in the empty tray used for auto ejection. (Paper of any size may be loaded.)
• Press the Change tray button and switch to a tray other than an auto ejection tray.
• Press the Change tray button and switch the auto ejection tray to a tray loaded with paper of the specified
Clear
size and type.
• Press the Continue button.
• Press the Cancel button.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
Any of the following conditions apply during paper transfer when jobs with auto feed tray selection are started
or resumed.
• All paper feed trays are empty.
• Paper of the specified type and size is not loaded in the trays for auto ejection for jobs with specified types of
1005 1-2
paper.
• Paper of the specified size is not loaded in the trays for auto ejection for jobs without specified types of paper.
Variation code: 1: Error detected by controller or related components; 2: Error detected by engine or related
components
Type W03: No paper loaded (all trays)

Display Load paper in the paper feed tray.
• Load paper of any size in a paper feed tray.
When this message is displayed during a current job (error point variation code 2), you may also do one of the
Clear following.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
1011 1 No paper loaded in any paper feed tray (error detected by controller)
[ 15-52 ]
Panel Messages
Type W04: No paper loaded (paper feed tray)

Load paper in the Standard tray.
(1)(2)
Display
Note: The paper size is indicated in position (1) and the type of paper in parentheses in position (2). Example:
A4 (Standard)
• Load paper of any size in a paper feed tray.
Clear • Press the Change tray button and switch the paper feed tray to the other tray.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
The feed tray for the job has been manually selected and any of the following conditions applies when paper
transfer from the paper feed tray begins.
• The paper feed tray is empty.
1000 1-2
• Paper of a size compatible with specified finisher functions is not loaded in the paper feed tray.
components
Type W05: No paper loaded (tray 1)

Load paper in Feed Tray 1.
(1)(2)
Display
A4 (Standard)
• Load paper of any size in tray 1.
Clear • Switch the paper feed tray to a tray other than tray 1.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
transfer from tray 1 begins.
• Tray 1 is empty.
1001 1-2
• Paper of a size compatible with specified finisher functions is not loaded in tray 1.
components

(1)(2)
Display
A4 (Standard)
• Delete the job.
Point Description
1002 1-2
components
[ 15-53 ]
Panel Messages

(1)(2)
Display
A4 (Standard)
• Delete the job.
Point Description
1003 1-2
components
Type W08: No slip sheet paper loaded

Load slip sheets in the following tray.
Display Selected tray: (1)
Note: As (1) in the message displayed, the paper feed tray or a tray from 1 to 3 is indicated.
• Load paper of any size in the slip sheet tray.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
1012 1 No paper loaded in the slip sheet tray when attempting to feed slip sheets (error detected by controller)
1012 2 Sam as above (error detected by engine control)
Type W09: No cover paper loaded

Load cover sheets in the following tray.
(1)(2)(3)
Display
Note: As (1) in the message displayed, front cover or back cover is indicated, as (2), the paper feed tray or a
tray from 1 to 3 is indicated, and as (3), the paper size is indicated.
• Load paper of any size in the cover tray.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
No paper loaded in the front cover sheet tray when attempting to feed paper for the front cover (error detected
1013 1
by controller).
1013 2 Sam as above (error detected by engine control).
No paper loaded in the back cover sheet tray when attempting to feed paper for the back cover (error detected
1014 1
by controller).
1014 2 Sam as above (error detected by engine control).
Type W10: Top tray full

Display The finisher top tray is full. Remove the paper.
Clear • Press the Cancel button.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3220 1 The top tray has almost reached the stacking limit (detected by finisher).
3220 2 Sam as above (detected by printer).
[ 15-54 ]
Panel Messages
Type W11: Stacking tray full

Display The finisher stacking tray is full. Remove the paper.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3221 1 The stacking tray has almost reached the stacking limit for standard paper (detected by finisher).
3222 1 The stacking tray has almost reached the stacking limit for stapled paper (detected by finisher).
Type W12: Booklet tray full

Display The finisher booklet tray is full. Remove the paper.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3223 1 The booklet tray has almost reached the stacking limit (detected by finisher).
Type W13: 3-fold tray full

Display The finisher 3-fold tray is full. Remove the paper.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3224 1 The 3-fold tray has almost reached the stacking limit (detected by finisher).
Type W14: Envelope setting error

Printing on envelopes is selected.
Display
Check if another incompatible setting such as duplex printing or finisher setting has been specified.
• Press the Select tray button and switch to a tray other than the tray specified for envelope feeding.
• Press the Select tray button and change the paper feed settings of the tray in use to settings other than for
Clear
envelopes.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
0240 Duplex printing or straight ejection by face-down printing is specified for Envelope printing.
0301 1-2 3-fold printing is specified for Envelope printing.
0302 1-2 2-fold printing is specified for Envelope printing.
0303 1-2 Z-fold printing is specified for Envelope printing.
0304 1-2 Stapling is specified for Envelope printing.
0305 1-2 Punching is specified for Envelope printing.
0306 Booklet printing is specified for Envelope printing.
0307 1-2 Use stacker tray is specified for Envelope printing.
0325 1-2 FD paper ejection job is selected on High Capacity Stacker envelope printing.
Type W15 : No factory setting restore data

Display No message
Clear Press Close button.
Point Description
0270 Test Mode No.0451 [Engine Factory Value Restore] was activated, but there is no restore data in the HDD.
[ 15-55 ]
Panel Messages
Type W16 : Cannot move for auto stacking

Display Check the auto control stacking tray.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3301 HP sensor detection does not change from OFF to ON during the HP positioning of AS side fence.
3302 HP sensor detection does not change from ON to OFF during the HP positioning of AS side fence.
3304 HP sensor detection does not change from OFF to ON during the HP positioning of AS end fence.
3305 HP sensor detection does not change from ON to OFF during the HP positioning of AS end fence.
Type W17: Controller hard disk full

HDD is full.
Display
Delete unnecessary jobs to prepare required HDD capacity.
Do any of the following to increase free user space on the hard disk to 1 GB or more.
• Delete jobs stored in boxes.
Clear • Complete the current job to delete data.
Note: This error may be automatically cleared because the job currently being processed will be deleted at the
time of the error.
Point Description
0050 The printer detected that the hard disk is nearly full. (Free user space dropped below 1 GB.)
0051 The printer detected that the hard disk is nearly full. (Free user space dropped below 100 MB.)
Type W18: Specified paper size not supported

Job name: ( )
Display The selected paper tray cannot eject paper of this size.
Select another tray or change the paper size. (The job has been cancelled.)
Clear • Press the Close button.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
During paper transfer when jobs are started or resumed, the specified output paper size is not supported under
specifications of the specified destination for ejection.
1006 1-2
Variation code: 1 : Error detected by controller or related components; 2: Error detected by engine or related
components
On outputting from finisher, following paper setting has been set.
3243 Paper width: Under 100mm, or over 330mm
Paper length: Under 148mm, or over 488mm
Type W19: Restart finisher

The finisher status cannot be identified.
Display
Press the Close button.
Clear Note: Pressing the Close button will clear the error itself, but the finisher must be restarted before revised
settings take effect.
Point Description
3235 Finisher must be restarted
Type W20: Scratch sheets in top tray

Display Unfinished printed paper is ejected to the finisher top tray. Check and remove the paper.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3231 Paper was ejected to the top tray before printing was finished.
[ 15-56 ]
Panel Messages
Type W21: Scratch sheets in stacking tray

Display Unfinished printed paper is ejected to the finisher stacking tray. Check and remove the paper.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3232 Paper was ejected to the stacking tray before printing was finished.
Type W22: Scratch sheets in booklet tray

Display Unfinished printed paper is ejected to the finisher booklet tray. Check and remove the paper.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3233 Paper was ejected to the booklet tray before printing was finished.
Type W23: Scratch sheets in 3-fold tray

Display Unfinished printed paper is ejected to the finisher 3-fold tray. Check and remove the paper.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3234 Paper was ejected to the 3-fold tray before printing was finished.
Type W24: FD paper receiving tray full

Display The face down paper receiving tray is full. Remove the paper.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
1150 The printer has detected that the face down paper receiving tray is full.
Type W25: Stapler unit not connected

The finisher stapler unit is not connected.
Display
Check the connection. (The job has been deleted).
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3225 A job was sent specifying stapling, but the stapler unit is not connected to the finisher.
Type W26: Puncher unit not connected

The finisher punching unit is not connected.
Display
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3226 A job was sent specifying punching, but the puncher unit is not connected to the finisher.
[ 15-57 ]
Panel Messages
Type W27: Top tray not connected

The finisher top tray unit is not connected.
Display
Check the connection. (The job has been deleted)
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3227 A job was sent specifying ejection to the top tray, but the top tray is not connected to the finisher.
Type W28: Stacking tray not connected

The finisher stacking tray unit is not connected.
Display
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3228 A job was sent specifying ejection to the stacking tray, but the stacking tray is not connected to the finisher.
Type W29: Booklet tray not connected

The finisher booklet tray unit is not connected.
Display
• Delete the job.
Point Description
A job was sent specifying the booklet tray as the destination, but the booklet tray is not connected to the
3229
finisher.
Type W30: 3-fold tray not connected

The finisher 3-fold tray unit is not connected.
Display
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3230 A job was sent specifying the 3-fold tray as the destination, but the 3-fold tray is not connected to the finisher.
Type W31: Cannot lower stacking tray

The safety switch on the finisher stacking tray is activated.
Display
Check the tray.
• Release the tray-lowering safety mechanism for the stacking tray.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3125 1-2 Failed to lower stacking tray.
3236 1 The tray-lowering safety mechanism for the stacking tray was activated (detected by finisher).
3236 2 The tray-lowering safety mechanism for the stacking tray was activated (detected by printer).
Type W32: Stapler unit not available

Job name: ( )
Display This printing job is not acceptable because the finisher stapling unit is faulty.
Printing without using the stapling unit is possible. (The job has been cancelled.)
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3237 A job was sent specifying stapling, but the stapler unit cannot be used on the finisher.
[ 15-58 ]
Panel Messages
Type W33: Puncher unit not available

Job name: ( )
Display This printing job is not acceptable because the finisher punching unit is faulty.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3238 A job was sent specifying punching, but the puncher unit cannot be used on the finisher.
Type W34: Top tray not available

Job name: ( )
Display This printing job is not acceptable because the finisher top tray is faulty.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3239 A job was sent specifying use of the top tray, but the top tray cannot be used on the finisher.
Type W35: Stacking tray not available

Job name: ( )
Display This printing job is not acceptable because the finisher stacking tray is faulty.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3240 A job was sent specifying use of the stacking tray, but the stacking tray cannot be used on the finisher.
Type W36: Booklet tray not available

Job name: ( )
Display This printing job is not acceptable because the finisher booklet unit is faulty.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3241 A job was sent specifying use of the booklet tray, but the booklet tray cannot be used on the finisher.
Type W37: 3-fold tray not available

Job name: ( )
Display This printing job is not acceptable because the finisher 3-fold tray is faulty.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3242 A job was sent specifying use of the 3-fold tray, but the 3-fold tray on the finisher is not available.
[ 15-59 ]
Panel Messages
Type W38: Offset Stapler staple over limit

Job name: ( )
Display The stack of paper cannot be stapled as it exceeds the maximum stapling capacity.
Remove the paper from the output tray. Printing can be continued without stapling.
Point Description
3455 Print quantity exceeded limitation for staple job. Default limitation sheets: 50
Type W39: No destination for continuous output

Display Acceptable output tray does not exist. Remove the paper.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
During continuous output, all paper receiving trays specified to switch to are full, so there is no available paper
1154
receiving tray.
Type W40: Paused job deleted

Job name: ( )
Display
This job has already been deleted.
Clear Press the Close button.
Point Description
A paused job was deleted through the console when the settings window for the job was displayed by pressing
0222
the Confirm or Setting chg. button.
Type W41: AS paper full detected

Display Auto-Ctrl Stacking Tray is full. Remove the paper.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
1151 The printer has detected that the auto stacking tray is full.
Type W42: Offset Stapler paper remain

Display Remove the remaining paper from the output tray.
Do one of the following. (Varies with variation code)
Clear
• Delete the Close button.
Point Description
When start the next print, paper waiting for stapling job remains on the tray.
3456 1
[Cancel] button to cancel the job, [Continue] button after removing paper from the tray
Error appear when execute job delete (stop) during OST stapler function.
3456 2
Available button is [Close] button only.
[ 15-60 ]
Panel Messages
Type W43: Specified size not loaded in slip sheet tray

Load slip sheets in the following tray.
Display Selected tray: (1)
Note: As (1) in the message displayed, the paper feed tray or a tray from 1 to 3 is indicated.
• Load paper of the correct size in the slip sheet tray.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
1015 1 No paper of supported size loaded in the slip sheet tray (error detected by controller)
1015 2 Same as above (error detected by engine control)
Type W44: Specified size not loaded in cover tray

Load cover sheets same size as the body sheets in the following tray.
(1)(2)(3)
Display
Note: As (1) in the message displayed, front cover or back cover is indicated, as (2), the paper feed tray or a
tray from 1 to 3 is indicated, and as (3), the paper size is indicated.
• Load paper of the correct size in the cover tray.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
No cover paper of the same type and size as this set* is loaded.
1016 1
*When Z folding is activated, paper of the correct size after Z folding (error detected by controller)
No cover paper of the same type and size as this set* is loaded.
1016 2
*When Z folding is activated, paper of the correct size after Z folding (error detected by engine control)
No back cover paper of the same type and size as this set* is loaded.
1017 1
*When Z folding is activated, paper of the correct size after Z folding (error detected by controller)
No back cover paper of the same type and size as this set* is loaded.
1017 2
*When Z folding is activated, paper of the correct size after Z folding (error detected by engine control)
Type W45: Unsupported combination of paper sizes

Job name: ( )
Display Part of the data is prepared on a page of a paper size that cannot be output with the Z fold setting.
Check the data. (The job has been cancelled.)
• Delete the job.
Point Description
During paper transfer, jobs are started or resumed with a combination of sizes other than A4 Landscape and
A3, B5 Landscape and B4, or Letter Landscape and Ledger with all of the following settings.
• Mixed size ON
1004 1-2 • Z folding activated
• Input tray: Auto
components
Type W46: No tray for auto ejection

Display Auto feed tray selection is not available. Select the tray and press the START key.
• Press the Select tray button and manually specify the tray.
Clear • Add a tray candidate for auto tray selection.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
When the input tray selection is Auto, the setting Auto selection is deactivated for all trays (error detected by
1018 1
controller).
1018 2 Same as above (error detected by engine control).
[ 15-61 ]
Panel Messages
Type W47: Image adjustment failed

Display No message
Point Description
0224 Invalid calibration pattern scanned by the scanner when executing image adjustment in test mode.
No image adjustment file in the USB memory device.
0255 < When test mode No.455 [Image Adjustment File Transmit] was executed, the image adjustment file did not
exist in the USB memory device.>
Type W48: Duplicate file names on USB memory device

Display The file of this name exists preservation ahead. Are you sure to overwrite it?
Clear • Press the Continue button.
Point Description
When users attempt to save files on the USB memory device, the printer found files with the same name on
the device.
0060 1-5
Variation code: 1: Account record list (log), 2: Job charge count, 3: Details count, 4: Limit qty. summary list, 5:
Data for which online transmission failed
Type W49: USB memory save error

The data cannot be saved in the USB flash drive. Check the USB flash drive.
Display
-Number of files, Capacity & Write protected
Point Description
Unable to save the files on a USB memory device.
0054 1-3
1-Scan files, 2-Rev files, 3-Other files
When users attempt to save files on a USB memory device, all available file names have been used on the
0061 1-3 device (all files already exist on the device).
Unable to save the files on a USB memory device because the memory device does not have enough space.
0062 1-3
Unable to save the files on a USB memory device because the memory device already have more than 100
0064 1-3 files.
1-Scan files, 2-Rev files, 3-Other files (Codes 1 & 3 not used at this moment)
Abnormality was detected in the data Store or Restore process between the USB memory device and HDD
and the process ended in error.
1-<The reason for the error is related to the machine model.>
2-<Not enough memory space in the USB memory device.>
3-<Actual machine serial number did not match with the machine serial number on the data name in the USB
0280 1-9 memory device.>
4-<The version information did not match.>
5-<HDD access error.>
6-<USB memory device access error.>
7-<Data error.>
8, 9-<Reserve>
Type W50: Paper size error(Paper Eject)

Paper of this size cannot be output with the current output tray.
Display
Check the paper setting orientation or the printer settings.
Point Description
0309 1-2 Cannot be output with the top tray.
0310 1-2 Cannot be output with the stacker tray.
0311 1-2 Cannot be output with the face down offset tray.
[ 15-62 ]
Panel Messages
Type W51: Request to start recovery operations

Display Ready to resume. Press the [Confirm] button.
Clear Press the Confirm button.
Point Description
When the belt platen must be lowered to recover from a paper jam, this message is issued when user
1301
confirmation is required.
Type W52: Check load capacity on tray

The number of sheets set in the tray might have exceeded the limit.
Display
Please check the tray. If recovery has failed, call service.
Clear
Point Description
1955 Tray 1 upper limit sensor is ON when the tray 1 inserted. (Paper overload on the tray 1)
Type W53: USB memory mounting error

USB flash drive is not found.
Display
Set the USB flash drive again and press "Retry" button.
• Disconnect the USB memory device.
• Press the Save to Internal HDD button.
• Press the Retry button.
Point Description
0053 1 The USB memory device could not be mounted when scanning began (for scan files).
0053 2 The USB memory device could not be mounted when scanning began (for files other than scan files).
Type W54: Paper size error(Fold)

Paper of this size cannot be output with the current fold setting.
Display
Point Description
0314 1-2 3-fold printing was instructed in the paper size that cannot handle.
0315 1-2 2-fold printing was instructed in the paper size that cannot handle.
0316 1-2 Z-fold printing was instructed in the paper size that cannot handle.
Type W55: MM Stacker Full Error

Display The mail stacker is full. Remove mails.
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3534 Detected full tank by the MM Eject Tray Full Detection Sensor.
Type W56: Check paper size setting

The paper size may be incorrect.
Display
Check the paper guides, paper trays or paper size settings. (The job has been cancelled.)
Point Description
1300 The paper size detected by the system does not match the detected size of paper being transferred.
[ 15-63 ]
Panel Messages
Type W57: Adjustment values not saved

Display No message
Point Description
With test mode 1497 (save adjustment values) not executed, the test mode area could not be cleared or
0172
defaults could not be restored.
Type W58: CIS auto adjustment failed

Display Auto control CIS failed.
Point Description
During CIS shading compensation or when checking CIS operation, the reference voltage (Vblank) of the left
0225 1
CIS in back was not read correctly.
During CIS shading compensation or when checking CIS operation, the reference voltage (Vblank) of the right
0225 2
CIS in front was not read correctly.
During CIS shading compensation or when checking CIS operation, the reference voltage (Vblank) of the right
0225 3
and left CIS devices was not read correctly.
During left CIS shading compensation, standard paper (lightweight Riso paper) was not loaded in the specified
0226 1
position.
During right CIS shading compensation, standard paper (lightweight Riso paper) was not loaded in the
0226 2
specified position.
During left and right CIS shading compensation, standard paper (lightweight Riso paper) was not loaded in the
0226 3
specified position.
0226 4 During CIS shading compensation, standard paper (lightweight Riso paper) was not detected.
0227 1 After left CIS shading compensation, the CIS output level could not be adjusted in a range of ±5%.
0227 2 After right CIS shading compensation, the CIS output level could not be adjusted in a range of ±5%.
0227 3 After left and right CIS shading compensation, the CIS output level could not be adjusted in a range of ±5%.
Type W59: CIS operation check failed

Display Found paper edge failed.
Point Description
0228 1 The edge could not be detected during confirmation of left CIS operation.
0228 2 The edge could not be detected during confirmation of right CIS operation.
0228 3 The edge could not be detected during confirmation of left and right CIS operation.
Type W60: Failed to connect to scanning destination server

Scan file cannot be saved.
Display
Check the setting of storage destination.
Point Description
The connection with the scanning destination server was lost because there is no account on the server or the
0235
server address is invalid.
Transmission to the scanning destination server failed because of a communication error with the scanning
0236
destination or because timeout occurred.
Invalid scanning destination settings
0237
Note: Unsupported characters may have been used in the scanning destination address, for example.
Type W61: Cannot save scan file on server

The scan file cannot be saved.
Display
The file size exceeds the system limit or the file name already exists. Check the scanner settings.
Point Description
When users attempt to save scan files at the scanning destination, all available file names have been used
0238
(the files are already saved on the server), so the scan files cannot be saved on the server.
Could not saved the file because the file size is too large.
0239
(ZIP (TIFF / JPG) or PDF file those have 2GB file size limitation)
[ 15-64 ]
Panel Messages
Type W62: Press Start key

Display Turn off the power of this printer and then on again.
Press the Start button.
Clear Note: When the printer is automatically deactivated after completion of downloading, it cannot be restarted
automatically, so press the Power button to start it.
Point Description
Because writing the Auto Power On flag failed when downloading firmware other than firmware for the panel,
0078 the printer could not start up automatically.
Note: The firmware was downloaded successfully.
Type W63: Supply main power again

Display Turn the power SW OFF then ON
Clear
Then re-boot the machine.
Point Description
After downloading the Panel firmware, when main switch of the machine is switched ON later, the machine
0079 boots up without pressing the power switch on the operation panel.
Note: The firmware was downloaded successfully.
Type W64: HDD initialization error

Display No message
Point Description
0242 During the system rebooting, HDD cannot initialize.
Type W66 : External CI connection error

Display Save to archive in Ex.CI cannot be performed.
Point Description
When archive store is selected without external CI connected, the archive, even though not stored, error
0243
message is not displayed.
Type W67: Remote Agent communication error

Display Transmission error to the Control server. Call Service
Point Description
Communication error with the Remote Agent server.
1-<Network not connected (no ping).>
0244 1-4 2-<Able to communicate with the Remote Agent server, but time-out error occurs.>
3-<Unable to connect with the Proxy server.>
4-<Unable to log-on to the Proxy server.>
Type W68: BP Belt stain detected

Display The image may not be printed in properly caused by the soiled transfer path. Call serivice.
Press <Continue> or <Cancel> button.
Clear
Delete the print job.
Point Description
0245 Belt stain is detected by CIS when printing started.
Type W69: Paper Feed Tray not ready

Display Ready to resume. Press the [Confirm] button.
Clear Press <Confirm> button.
Point Description
1935 Paper feed tray not ready to use
[ 15-65 ]
Panel Messages
Type W70: Test mode non-completion

Display No message
Point Description
0247 1 Unable to execute test modes due to exclusive condition.
0247 2 Error finish due to wrong Control card installed on the machine.
Executed test mode ended in error.
0247 3 <In many cases, if test modes are executed while the ink temperature is controlled (ink in circulation), this
error is displayed.>
0247 4 Test mode not executed due to selection of wrong ink color.
Speed auto-adjustment failed.
0252
The error is displayed when parameter over or under the specified range is input.
Type W71: Incompletely printed paper ejected

Printing restarts. Printed paper can be double ejected.
Display
Please check the printed sheets after printing is completed.
Clear Remove jammed papers. Check printed papers. Resume printing.
Point Description
1937 In paper jam, the last sheet ejected out may be incompletely printed.
Type W72: PB Error

Job name: ( )
Display This printing job is not acceptable because perfect binder is unavailable.
Printing without using the perfect binder is possible. (The job has been deleted).
Clear Press the Close button or Delete the job
Point Description
0290 The job for creating binder was sent when the Perfect Binder option is not ready.
Type W73: Paper width confirmation

Display Fit Standarad tray paper guides to the paper width.
Press Cancel or Continue button. Also check that the paper guide fence are correctly set against the paper on
Clear
the feed tray.
Point Description
The paper side edge distance from the center of the paper differed more than 10 mm between the detection by
1303 the side registration unit and that calculated by the engine (from the paper width detected by the paper feeding
tray.)
Type W74: Memory shortage error

Printer memory capacity is short.
Display
Point Description
Detects memory capacity shortage (First step notice)
0291
This error code relates with S88-0282
Type W75: No paper(Tray)

No appropriate paper has been set.
Display
Load the following paper in the paper feed tray.
Clear • Press the Continue button, or press the Start button. (Starts reading the original or starts printing)
• Press the Cancel button or press the Stop button. (Return to Stand-by screen)
Point Description
1019 1-2 Detected mismatching of output image size and paper size on the model without front tray unit.
[ 15-66 ]
Panel Messages
Type W76: Paper size error(Booklet)

Paper of this size cannot be output with the current booklet setting.
Display
Point Description
0317 Booklet printing was instructed in the paper size that cannot handle.
Type W77: Incorrect download firmware

Display Incompatible download data. Check the download data.
Point Description
0049 Download incompatible data.
Type W78: No paper(High capacity feeder)

Display Load paper in High capacity feeder.
• Set the paper on the P-F tray. (No specific kind of paper)
Clear • Press the Change the tray button. (Change the tray to other tray than HCF)
• Delete the print job.
Point Description
Feed tray selection is other than [AUTO], and when paper is fed from HCF, became one of the following states.
2580 1-2 >No paper left on the HCF paper feed tray.
>Paper size that corresponding to the specified for finisher function not available on the HCF paper feed tray.
Type W79: Offset Stapler overloaded

Display The Offset stapler tray is full. Remove the paper.
Press the Cancel button.
Clear
Delete the print job.
Point Description
3453 Undetermined
Type W80: Not enough coin put in the Vendor

The amount of money doesn't suffice.
Display Put money or the card, and press the Continue key.
Press the Cancel key to cancel this job.
Clear Insert correct amount of coin or card. <Press Continue or Cancel button.>
Point Description
The amount of coin or card inserted in the Coin/Card Vendor is not enough.
5501
< This error message should not display on your machine.>
Type W81: Reboot the machine power.

Display Press the power key on the operation panel to turn off the power and then on again.
Clear Press the Close button, and then reboot the machine.
Point Description
This error shows only when Test Mode No.1890 [Vendor Connection] setting was changed from
[0: Not connected] to [1: Connected] and the machine did not detect the Vendor unit when the printer was
5505
turned ON after changing the test mode setting.
< This error message should not display on your machine.>
[ 15-67 ]
Panel Messages
Type W82: Print Control Device Error

[When the job is proceeding]
OPERATION INTERRUPTED
Login to device then press CONTINUE to resume.
Display job name ： (1)
[When the job not existing]
AUTHENTICATION REQUIRED
Login to External Device Before Operation Is Available
Operate the External print limit device to be unlocked.
Clear Then, press the Continue button.
If print cannot continue, press the Cancel button.
Point Description
5506 Printer is locked by "External print limit device"
Type W84: Paper size error(Offset Eject)

Paper of this size cannot be output with the offset output.
Display
Point Description
0318 1-2 Offset paper ejection was selected in the paper size that cannot handle.
W85: Security package mismatch.

Type
<This error displays only when the optional RISO Security Package is installed.>
Display Unmutched software information. Call service.
Press Close button.
Clear
Install correct security package software or machine firmware which supports the security package.
Point Description
The machine firmware does not support the optional RISO Security Package.
6011 1-2 1-<The error displays when machine firmware is upgraded or downgraded.>
2-<The error displays when the optional RISO Security Package is installed.>
W86: Security package installation failed.

Type
<This error displays only when installing the optional RISO Security Package.>
Display Reinstall the security option. If recovery has failed, call service.
Press Close button.
Reinstall the security package.
Clear If reinstallation cannot be executed, purchase new security package and install.
Note: The machine will operate in the normal conventional condition when the Close button is pressed to
abort the security package installation.
Point Description
6012 1 USB memory device with the security package was not detected.
6012 2 USB memory device containing the security package was not 1 GB in size.
USB memory device containing the security package was switched to write-protect when trying to install the
6012 3
security software. Switch the USB memory device to write-enable.
6013 1 Abnormality was detected on the USB memory device during the installation of the security package software.
6013 2 Abnormality was detected during the installation of the security package software.
W87: Security package key-code error.

Type
<This error displays only when installing the optional RISO Security Package.>
Display Check the security package key code.
Point Description
The security package software installation failed due to the wrong key-code input.
6015 < Input the correct key-code again using the Test Modes No. 760, 761 and 762 after pressing the Close
button.>
[ 15-68 ]
Panel Messages
Type W88: Kerberos Server error

Display Transmission error to the Kerberos server. Contact the administrator.
Point Description
0263 1 Failed to communicate with Kerberos server.
0263 2 Unauthorized search login name was used when communicating with the Kerberos server.
0263 3 Unauthorized password was used when communicating with the Kerberos server.
Type W89: LDAP Server error

Display Transmission error to the LDAP server. Contact the administrator.
Point Description
0264 Failed to communicate with LDAP server.
Type W90: External Server error

Display The printer clock may not synchronize with Kerberos time.
Point Description
Because time of PMS and the external server is not synchronized failed to communicate with the external
0265
server.
Type W91: Paper Size error(Staple/Punch)

Paper of this size cannot be output with the current staple/punch setting.
Display
Point Description
0312 1-2 Stapling function was selected in the paper size that cannot handle.
0313 1-2 Punching function was selected in the paper size that cannot handle.
Type W92: USB memory error

Display USB flash drive is not found.
Clear Press <Cancel> button.
Point Description
0288 USB memory mount error occurred when the USB memory printing.
Type W93: Email address error

Display Email transmission error. Check the destination address.
Point Description
Failed to send a Email. (Wrong destination setting)
Variation code (Indicates SMTP response code)
0230 1-3 1-550 (No destination mail box),
2-551 (No user available),
3-553 (Destination mail box invalid)
Type W94: Mail server setting error

Display Email transmission error. Check the mail server settings.
Point Description
Failed to send a Email. (Wrong Email server setting)
0231 1-3 1-432 (Need password change),
2-534 (Authentication mechanism is too weak),
3-535 (Authentication Error)
[ 15-69 ]
Panel Messages
Type W95: Email data size over the limit

Email transmission error. The email size exceeds the capacity.
Display
Change the scan function settings.
Point Description
Failed to send a Email. (Email size exceeds the capacity)
0232
SMTP response code is 552.
Type W96: Email transmission error(Server)

Display Email transmission error. An error has possibly occurred in the server.
Point Description
Failed to send a Email. (Defective Email server)
1-421 (Temporary unavailable services),
2-450 (Temporary unavailable mail box service),
3-451 (Server local Error),
0233 1-8
4-452 (Memory shortage in the file system),
5-454 (Temporary authentication failure),
6-521 (Mail rejection),
7-530 (Access rejection),
8-554 (Other process failure)
Type W97: Email transmission error(User)

Display Email transmission error. The sent data may be damaged.
Point Description
Failed to send a Email. (Defective Email data)
1-500 (Syntax error),
2-501 (Parameter error),
0234 1-6
3-502 (Can not use the command),
4-503 (Incorrect command sequence),
5-504 (Command parameter not implemented)
6-538 (Encrypted authentication mechanism must be requested)
Type W98: USB File Read error

Display This operation is not acceptable. Check the settings.
Point Description
0077 There is a software bug in an external interface subsystem.
File related errors occurred when the system reads the configuration file from the USB, such as "CSV file for
0267
charge count".
Type W99: Generic consumables warning

This is non-Riso ink cartridge.
Using non-Riso ink may result in serious damage to the printer.
Display Check your service provider's warranty/service agreement if any, as damage caused by non-Riso supplies
could be excluded from coverage.
Do you wish to continue using this cartridge?
Clear Users press the Yes or No button on the warning screen.
Point Description
2124 Generic consumable were loaded when use of generic consumable was enabled in administrative settings.
[ 15-70 ]
Panel Messages
Type W100: PB Cover Size Error

Display Set paper with a size suitable for the cover of the perfect binding in the tray below.
• If the cover size is auto detectable: Place the correct cover size.
Clear • If the cover size is undetectable: Place the correct cover size after set the correct size on the cover size tray.
Point Description
1947 2 No specified size paper by the job on the tray specified as cover paper in Perfect Binder.
Type W101: PB Cover Set Error

Display Set paper for the cover of the perfect binding in the tray below.
• Set the paper on the cover tray. (No specific size of paper)
Clear
Point Description
1948 2 No paper on the tray specified as cover paper in Perfect Binder.
Type W102: PB Body Paper Size Error

Set paper for the body of the perfect binding in the tray below.
Display
<paper size>, <tray>
• If the body size is auto detectable: Place the correct body size.
Clear • If the body size is undetectable: Place the correct body size after set the correct size on the body size tray.
Point Description
1949 1-2 No specified size paper by the job on the tray specified as body text in Perfect Binder.
Type W103: PB Body/Cover Unmatched Error

Binding is not possible because the length of the body and cover of perfect binding is not consistent.
Display
Check the settings. (The job has been deleted.)
Point Description
1: Incompatible cover size 1 (The cover width is wider than the body width)
3557 1-2
2: Incompatible cover size 2 (The body width is wider than the cover width)
Type W104: PB Body Thickness Error

Binding is not possible because the perfect binder has detected an error in the thickness of the body.
Display
Point Description
1: Abnormal body thickness 1: Body thickness is more than 1mm, and less than 1.5mm.
2: Abnormal body thickness 2: Body thickness is more than 32mm, and less than 35mm.
3558 1-4
3: Abnormal body thickness 3: Body thickness is less than 1mm.
4: Abnormal body thickness 4: Body thickness is more than 35mm.
Type W105: PB Body Set Error

Display Set the body in the body sheet stacker of the perfect binder.
• Place the paper on the body stacker tray.
Clear
Point Description
3760 At the manual bind job start, the body part was not placed on the stacker tray.
[ 15-71 ]
Panel Messages
Type W106: Cannot Execute Mail Creation

Job name: ( )
Display This printing job is not acceptable because mail maker is unavailable.
Printing without using the mail maker is possible. (The job has been deleted).
Point Description
0289 The job for creating mail was sent when the Mail Maker option is not ready.
Type W108: HCS Tray Full Detection

Display The High capacity stacker is full. Remove the paper.
Clear
• Delete the Continue button.
Point Description
3624 At the paper ejection, HCS elevator height reach to specified height, and detected the full on the tray.
Type W109: MM Letter Number Limit Error

Insert No. (permutation)
Display This job cannot be done due to the maximum number of inserts exceeded.
Check the data. (The job has been deleted.)
Point Description
3645 There is exceeded limitation of number of inserts for the envelope.
Type W110: Original Not Suitable, No Size

Insert No. (permutation)
Display Insert data with a size different from the specified size has been found.
Point Description
3646 There is different size of inserts for the envelope.
Type W115: Option Power Off Error

The output device has not been powered on.
Display
To use the optional device, power on the optional device and then the main unit.
Clear • Press the Close button. (The option is disable but the printer can be used.)
• Power OFF the printer sub power, Power ON the option, Power ON the printer sub power (in order)
Point Description
5516 Switch ON the printer main power switch (Sub-power is OFF), when the MM or the PB option is connected.
Type W116: Original Not Suitable, No Data

Display Insert data is missing. Check the data. (The job has been deleted.)
Point Description
3656 The number of the envelope exceed with the number of the inserts of the envelope.
Type W117: EF Envelope Size Error

Envelope form data with a size different from the specified size was found.
Display
Point Description
3657 Unrecognized envelope form size detected.
[ 15-72 ]
Panel Messages
Type W118: Original Not Suitable Mix Form

Display Some data have different envelope sizes. Check the settings. (The job has been deleted.)
Point Description
3658 Mixed envelope form size detected.
Type W120: PB Cover　Length Error

Display This cover paper is not allowed for perfect binding. Load the appropriate size of paper in the following tray.
Clear • Delete the Continue button.
Point Description
1: Cover paper could not cut because the cover paper length too short.
3562 1-2
2: Cover paper could not aligned because the cover paper length too short.
3563 Cover paper could not transport or cut, because the cover paper length too long.
Type W121: PB Cover Inserter Error

Display Load paper in the cover sheet inserter.
• Place paper on the cover sheet inserter.
Clear
Point Description
3565 There is no paper on the cover sheet inserter.
Type W122: PB Body Stacker Error

The maximum body size allowed for perfect binder stacking has exceeded.
Display
Check the settings (The job has been deleted).
Point Description
3566 There is exceeded limitation of body size can be stacked on the Perfect Binder.
Type W123: PB Missing Page of Body

Pages might overlap.
Display
To proceed, check the pages after the binding is completed.
Clear
Point Description
3567 The body paper dropped into the unit, because jam occurred just before the stacker.
Type W124: PB Body Size Incorrect

Paper width that cannot be handled by the perfect binder has been detected.
Display
Check the settings. (The job has been deleted).
Point Description
3763 Abnormal body paper width. (More than plus or minus 2 mm of standard sizes-A4, B5, A5, Letter)
Type W125: PB Cover Width Error

Cover width that cannot be handled by the perfect binder has been detected.
Display
Check the settings. (The job has been deleted).
Point Description
3764 Abnormal cover paper width. (More than plus or minus 2 mm of standard sizes-A4, B5, A5, Letter)
[ 15-73 ]
Panel Messages
Type W126: Offset Staple Tray not Attach

The offset stapler is not connected.
Display
Clear • Delete the Close button.
Point Description
3244 1-2 Despite offset staple tray is not connected, the job that set to use offset staple tray has been sent.
Type W127: HCS not Attach

The high capacity stacker is not connected.
Display
Clear • Delete the Close button.
Point Description
3245 1-2 Despite High Capacity Stacker is not connected, the job that set to use High Capacity Stacker has been sent.
Performed Test Mode No. 3406 under following conditions.
1. Test Mode No. 3968 set to 0 (Action Allowed)
3246
2. HCS Tray Set Sensor OFF
3. HCS Hand Truck Set Sensor OFF
Type W128: Offset Staple Tray P Remain

Display Remove the remaining paper from the output tray.
Clear Remove paper from the staple tray
Point Description
If paper remains on the staple tray when U58: Offset Stapler staple error occurs, the error cannot clear by
3457 press the [Reset] key.
Purpose of this error is give instruction to the user to remove paper.
Type W130: HCS Stack Tray Jam Error

Paper is not appropriately loaded in the high capacity stacker stacking tray.
Display
Check the stacking tray.
Clear
Point Description
3623 Paper eject top position sensor did not detect in time, during HCS elevator motor drives.
Warnings that the paper leaned to bottom direction.
3850
(All paper in the middle of transport will be ejected without stopping by the error.)
Warnings that the card paper leaned to bottom direction.
3853
(All paper in the middle of transport will be ejected without stopping by the error.)
Type W131: HCS Stack Tray Safety SW Error

The safety switch on the high capacity stacker stacking tray is activated.
Display
Remove paper from the stacking tray.
Point Description
3851 1-2 Detected a foreign object at ejection side fence.
[ 15-74 ]
Panel Messages
Type W132: HCS Stack Tray Check Error

Paper stays in the high capacity stacker ejector.
Display
Print cannot be run. Remove paper from the ejector.
Clear • Open the HCS door, then pull the paper out, then close the door.
• Press the Close button.
Point r
Job was started when the paper already exist on the tray, under the following setting.
3859 1-2 • Lowered to a predetermined position.
• Lowered to the hand truck position.
<Power ON from OFF>, <Woke up from the sleep mode-Level 1 or 2> when the paper already exist on the
3860 tray.
Because the fence position is unknown on the above timing, so that paper size can not be detected.
Type W134: HCS Error

Job name: ( )
Display This job cannot eject to the high capacity stacker.
Check the settings (The job has been deleted).
Point Description
3862 1-2 Paper will not eject to HCS. (In case that the job has certain paper size setting)
Type W135: HCS Eject Paper Size Error

Paper with different sizes is loaded in the high capacity stacker.
Display
Remove paper from the stacking tray.
Clear Open the HCS door, Pull the paper, Close thye HCS door
Point Description
3864 1-2 Mixed paper is exist in the job.
Type W136: Auto Stacking Tray disconnect

The auto-ctrl stacking tray is not connected.
Display
Clear
Point Description
3247 Despite auto-ctrl stacking tray is not connected, the job that set to use auto-ctrl stacking tray has been sent.
Type W137: Wide Stacking Tray disconnect

The wide stacking tray is not connected.
Display
Clear
Point Description
3248 Despite wide stacking tray is not connected, the job that set to use wide stacking tray has been sent.
Type W150: No Paper Size for Main Body

Display Load insert paper in the following tray. Selected tray:
Clear Open the HCS door, Pull the paper, Close thye HCS door
Point Description
3660 1-2 There is no specified envelope insert size on the paper feed tray.
[ 15-75 ]
Panel Messages
Type W157: Envelope Form Set Error 1

Set envelope form ( ) in the direction below.
Display Standard tray: Star to right front
Feed tray1–3: Circle to left front
• Place the paper on the tray. (Empty tray that targetted to Auto tray)
• Press the Tray change button. (Select the tray other than Auto tray)
Clear • Press the Tray change button. (Select the target tray to Auto tray)
Point Description
There were no appropriate paper on the mail form tray that was specified as automatic.
3702 1-2
(Mail form paper: Simplex paper transfer)

Display Standard tray: Circle to left front
Feed tray1-3: Star to right front
Point Description
There were no appropriate paper on the mail form tray that was specified as automatic.
3703 1-2
(Mail form paper: Duplex paper transfer)
Type W159: MM Paper Guide Error

Display Set the paper guide (end)
Clear
Point Description
3734 1-2 Envelope eject end fence could not find when job started.
Type W160: MM Paper Guide POS Error

Display Check of the position of the paper guide (end)
Clear
Point Description
3735 1-2 Mismatching of envelope (at completion) size and envelope eject end fence position.
[ 15-76 ]
Panel Messages

Display High capacity feeder: Star to right front
Feed tray1–3: Circle to left front.
Point Description
There were no appropriate paper on the mail form tray that was specified as automatic. (Connected to HCF
3704 1-2 unit)

Display High capacity feeder: Circle to left front
Feed tray1–3: Star to right front.
Point Description
There were no appropriate paper on the mail form tray that was specified as automatic. (Connected to HCF
3705 1-2 unit)
Type W170: Env Form Set Error (STD/SPX)

Display Set envelope form in the standard tray so that the star mark comes to the right front side.
• Place the paper on the tray.
Clear • Press the Tray change button. (Select the tray other than Paper Feed Tray)
Point Description
After specify [Paper feed tray] as [Mail form tray] in manually, it became the state of one of the following:
• There is no paper on the paper feed tray
3710 1-2
• There is no appropriate paper on the paper feed tray
Type W171: Env Form Set Error (STD/DBL)

Display Set envelope form in the standard tray so that the circle mark comes to the left front side.
• Place the paper on the tray.
Point Description
After specify [Paper feed tray] as [Mail form tray] in manually, it became the state of one of the following:
• There is no paper on the paper feed tray
3711 1-2
[ 15-77 ]
Panel Messages
Type W172: Env Form Set Error (TRY1/SPX)

Display Set envelope form in Feed tray1 so that the circle mark comes to the left front side.
• Place the paper on the paper tray 1.
Clear • Press the Tray change button. (Select the tray other than the paper tray 1)
Point Description
After specify [Paper Tray 1] as [Mail form tray] in manually, it became the state of one of the following:
• There is no paper on the paper tray 1
3712 1-2
Type W173: Env Form Set Error (TRY1/DBL)

Display Set envelope form in Feed tray1 so that the star mark comes to the right front side.
Point Description
3713 1-2
Type W174: Env Form Set Error (TRY2/SPX)

Point Description
3714 1-2

Point Description
3715 1-2
[ 15-78 ]
Panel Messages
Type W176: Env Form Set Error (TRY3/SMP)

Point Description
3716 1-2

Point Description
3717 1-2
Type W179: MM Body Paper Size Error

The mail maker does not support long-edge feed.
Display
Point Description
3720 Detected that [Main scan size is larger than Sub scan size] in prior communication of the MM job.
Type W182: No Paper on All Trays (Form 1)

Set envelope form (%s) in the direction below.
Display Standard tray: Star to right front
• Place the paper on the any of paper tray.
Clear
Point Description
3732 There were no paper on all the tray. (Mail form paper: Simplex paper transfer)

Set envelope form (%s) in the direction below.
Display Standard tray: Circle to left front
Feed tray1-3: Star to right front
Clear
Point Description
3733 There were no paper on all the tray. (Mail form paper: Duplex paper transfer)
[ 15-79 ]
Panel Messages
Type W184: MM Ejection Tray Error

Display Paper stays in the mail maker ejector. Print cannot be run. Remove paper from the ejector.
Clear
• Remove the object from the sensor, then press the Continue button.
Point Description
3538 MM Eject Tray Full Detection Sensor is ON. (User to confirm the object and remove from the ejection tray.)
Type W186: EVL Form Set Error (HCF/SPX)

Display Set envelope form in the high capacity feeder so that the star mark comes to the right front side.
• Place the paper on the paper feed tray.
Point Description
After specify [HCF] as [Mail form tray] in manually, it became the state of one of the following:
• There is no paper on the HCF
3718 1-2
• There is no appropriate paper on the HCF
Type W187: EVL Form Set Error (HCF/DBL)

Display Set envelope form in the high capacity feeder so that the circle mark comes to the left front side.
• Place the paper on the paper feed tray.
Point Description
After specify [HCF] as [Mail form tray] in manually, it became the state of one of the following:
• There is no paper on the HCF
3719 1-2
• There is no appropriate paper on the HCF

Display High capacity feeder: Star to right front
Clear
Point Description
3736 There were no paper on all the tray. (Connected with the HCF) (Mail form paper: Simplex paper transfer)

Set envelope form ( ) in the direction below. High capacity
Display feeder: Circle to left front
Feed tray1–3: Star to right front
Clear
Point Description
3737 There were no paper on all the tray. (Connected with the HCF) (Mail form paper: Duplex paper transfer)
[ 15-80 ]
Panel Messages
Type W190: HCF P-.F-.T Limit Sensor Error

Display The high capacity feeder is overloaded with paper. Check the standard tray.
Point Description
2600 Too many papers are stacked on the tray.
Type W191: HCF P-.F-.T Mainte POS Error

The high capacity feeder standard tray cannot be moved to the maintenance position.
Display
Check the standard tray.
Point Description
HCF standard tray cannot be moved to the maintenance position by the test mode 3454, since many papers
2581
are stacked on the tray.
Type W195: Double Feed Error

Display Paper has been possibly double fed. Check the printed sheets.
Point Description
1127 Miss-detected of the tailing edge of paper by Top edge sensor 2.
[ 15-81 ]
Panel Messages
4-4. Jam Errors (X)

Type X01: No paper transfer from tray
Display Paper has been possibly misfed. Check the paper-feed tray.
Clear See pages 15-7, paper jam errors.
Point Description
1050 Externally fed paper did not reach the registration sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1070 Externally fed paper did not pass the registration sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
Type X02: Paper jam in main transfer section

Display Paper has jammed. A button appears in the jam. Touch the button to view the removal method.
Point Description
Paper being transferred did not reach top edge sensor 1 in time, based on the transfer speed.
1-<Paper feed from External paper feed tray.>
2-<Paper feed from Tray No.1>
1058 1-6 3-<Paper feed from Tray No.2>
5-<Paper feed from Re-Feed section>
6-<Paper feed from High Capacity Feeder>
1059 Paper being transferred did not reach the paper elevation IN sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
Paper being transferred did not pass through top edge sensor 1 in time, based on the transfer speed.
1-<Paper feed from External paper feed tray.>
1078 1-6 3-<Paper feed from Tray No.2>
5-<Paper feed from Re-Feed section>
1079 Paper being transferred did not pass the paper elevation IN sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1110 Paper was still at the registration sensor when paper transfer began.
1116 Paper was still at top edge sensor 1 when paper transfer began.
1117 Paper was still at the paper elevation IN sensor when paper transfer began.
Type X03: Paper jam in FU paper ejection section

Point Description
1065 Paper being transferred did not reach the FU paper ejection sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1085 Paper being transferred did not pass the FU paper ejection sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1123 Paper was still at the FU paper ejection sensor when paper transfer began.
Type X04: Paper jam in vertical paper feed section

Point Description
1060 Paper being transferred did not reach the flipper sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
Type X05: Paper jam in horizontal paper feed section

Point Description
1080 Paper being transferred did not pass the flipper sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1118 Paper was still at the flipper sensor when paper transfer began.
[ 15-82 ]
Panel Messages
Type X06: Paper jam in duplex switchback entry section

Point Description
1061 Paper being transferred did not reach the upper transfer OUT sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1062 Paper being transferred did not reach the switchback sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1081 Paper being transferred did not pass the upper transfer OUT sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1119 Paper was still at the upper transfer OUT sensor when paper transfer began.
Type X07: Paper jam in switchback section

Point Description
1082 Paper being transferred did not pass the switchback sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1120 Paper was still at the switchback sensor when paper transfer began.
Type X08: Paper jam in re-feed unit

Point Description
1052 Re-fed paper did not reach the registration sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1063 Paper being transferred did not reach the re-feed sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1066 Paper fed from High Capacity Feeder did not pass the registration sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1072 Re-fed paper did not pass the registration sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1083 Paper being transferred did not pass the re-feed sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1121 Paper was still at the re-feed sensor when paper transfer began.
Type X09: Paper jam in tray 1

Point Description
1056 Paper being transferred did not reach vertical paper feed sensor 4 in time, based on the transfer speed.
1114 Paper was still at vertical paper feed sensor 4 when paper transfer began.

Point Description
Type X11: Paper jam in vertical path, upper section

Point Description
Internally fed paper did not reach the registration sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1051 1-3
1-<Paper feed from Tray No.1>, 2-<Paper feed from Tray No.2>, 3-<Paper feed from Tray No.3>
Internally fed paper did not pass through the registration sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1071 1-3
1076 Paper being transferred did not pass through vertical paper feed sensor 4 in time, based on the transfer speed.
Paper being transferred did not pass through vertical paper feed sensor 5 in time, based on the transfer speed.
1077 1-3
[ 15-83 ]
Panel Messages
Type X12: Paper jam in vertical path, lower section

Point Description
Paper being transferred did not reach vertical paper feed sensor 3 in time, based on the transfer speed.
1055 1-2
1-<Paper feed from Tray No.2>, 2-<Paper feed from Tray No.3>
Paper being transferred did not reach vertical paper feed sensor 5 in time, based on the transfer speed.
1057 1-3
Paper being transferred did not pass through vertical paper feed sensor 3 in time, based on the transfer speed.
1075 1-2
1-<Paper feed from Tray No.2>, 2-<Paper feed from Tray No.3>
Type X14: Main unit multiple feed

Display Paper has been possibly double fed. Check the printed sheets.
Point Description
During printing operations, the printer detected that multiple sheets have apparently been transferred at the
same time.
1102 1-5
1-<Paper feed from External paper feed tray.>, 2-<Paper feed from Tray No.1>
3-<Paper feed from Tray No.2>, 4-<Paper feed from Tray No.3>, 5-<Paper feed from High Capacity Feeder>
Type X17 Paper jam in interface module

Point Description
3140 Jam before paper reached decurler IN sensor
3141 Jam before paper reached decurler OUT sensor
3164 Paper remaining at decurler IN sensor
3165 Paper remaining at decurler OUT sensor
Type X18: Paper jam affecting puncher unit

Point Description
3142 Jam before paper reached punch OUT sensor
3143 Paper jammed at punch OUT sensor
3144 Jam before paper reached buffer path sensor
3145 Paper jammed at buffer path sensor
3166 Paper remaining at punch OUT sensor
3167 Paper remaining at buffer path sensor
Type X19: Paper jam affecting staple unit

Point Description
3146 Jam before paper reached compile exit sensor
3147 Paper jammed at compile exit sensor
3148 Paper jammed at compile paper sensor
3149 Jam before paper reached ejection sensor
3150 Paper jammed at ejection sensor
3168 Paper remaining at compile exit sensor
3169 Paper remaining at compile tray NO paper sensor
3170 Jam detected by ejection sensor
[ 15-84 ]
Panel Messages
Type X21: Paper jam affecting 3-fold tray

Point Description
3151 Jam before paper reached folder entrance sensor
3152 Paper jammed at folder entrance sensor
3153 Jam before paper reached folder exit sensor
3154 Jam before paper reached folder path sensor 2
3156 Paper jammed at folder path sensor 3
3171 Paper remaining at folder entrance sensor
3172 Paper remaining at folder exit sensor
3173 Paper remaining at folder path sensor 1
Type X22: Paper jam affecting top tray

Point Description
3158 Jam before paper reached top tray eject sensor
3159 Paper jammed at top tray eject sensor
3177 Paper remaining at top tray eject sensor
Type X24: Paper jam affecting booklet tray

Point Description
3160 Jam before paper reached booklet IN sensor
3161 Paper jammed at booklet IN sensor
3162 Jam before paper reached booklet folder roller exit sensor
3163 Paper jammed at booklet folder roller exit sensor
3178 Paper remaining at booklet compile NO paper sensor
3179 Paper remaining at booklet folder roller exit sensor
Type X25: Paper jam affecting AF

An original has jammed in the scanner.
Display
Open the ADF cover and remove the jammed original.
Remove paper in the AF original paper path and open and close the AF feed cover.
Clear Press the Cancel or Stop button to delete the job.
Press the Continue or Start button to resume reading the original.
Point Description
Original removed, causing jam (the AF registration sensor was deactivated after the sheet was ejected and
4410
before scanning began; issued by the AF side)
Original jammed at AF registration sensor (length error), issued by AF side
4411 Simplex scanning: After activation of the AF original IN sensor, original did not pass the AF registration sensor.
Duplex scanning: After original transfer began, it did not pass the AF registration sensor.
Original jammed at AF registration sensor (length error), issued by AF side
4412
After deactivation of the AF registration sensor, original did not pass the AF original IN sensor.
Original jammed at AF original OUT sensor (length error), issued by AF side
Simplex scanning: After deactivation of the AF registration sensor, original did not pass the AF original OUT
4413 sensor.
Duplex scanning: After deactivation of the AF registration sensor, original did not pass the AF original OUT
sensor.
[ 15-85 ]
Panel Messages
Type X25: Paper jam affecting AF

An original has jammed in the scanner.
Display
Open the ADF cover and remove the jammed original.
Remove paper in the AF original paper path and open and close the AF feed cover.
Clear Press the Cancel or Stop button to delete the job.
Press the Continue or Start button to resume reading the original.
Point Description
Jam before original reached AF registration sensor, issued by AF side
4414
After original was pulled in, it did not reach the AF registration sensor.
Jam before original reached AF original IN sensor, issued by AF side
4415
After scanning was begun, original did not reach the AF original IN sensor.
Jam before original reached AF original OUT sensor, issued by AF side
Simplex scanning: After activation of the AF original IN sensor, original did not reach the AF original OUT
4416
sensor.
Duplex scanning: After original transfer began, it did not reach the AF original OUT sensor.

Point Description
Type X27: Paper jam in FD flipper section

Point Description
1064 Paper being transferred did not reach the FD paper ejection sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
Type X28: Paper jam in FD paper ejection section

Point Description
1084 Paper being transferred did not pass the FD paper ejection sensor in time, based on the transfer speed.
1122 Paper was still at the FD paper ejection sensor when paper transfer began.
Type X29: Awaiting removal of remaining paper (emergency stop)

Point Description
1124 Paper may still remain in the printer after an emergency stop.
Type X30: Awaiting removal of remaining paper (power ON)

Point Description
1125 Paper may still remain in the printer after the printer was turned ON.
[ 15-86 ]
Panel Messages
Type X32: Paper jam in paper gate

Paper is not possibly suitable for print. Do not use the following paper.
-Wrinkled, curled, folded, or torn
Display
-Extremely thick or heavy
-Paper having holes
Clear See pages 15-7 & 15-9, paper jam errors.
Point Description
Paper floating error been detected at the top of paper (5mm from paper top).
1-<Paper feed from External paper feed tray.>, 2-<Paper feed from Tray No.1>
1100 1-6
3-<Paper feed from Tray No.2>, 4-<Paper feed from Tray No.3>, 5-<Paper feed from Re-Feed section>
Paper floating error been detected at other place than the top of paper.
1-<Paper feed from External paper feed tray.>,2-<Paper feed from Tray No.1>
1101 1-6
3-<Paper feed from Tray No.2>, 4-<Paper feed from Tray No.3>, 5-<Paper feed from Re-Feed section>
Type X51: Paper jam in High capacity feeder

Point Description
Paper fed from HCF being transferred did not reach the HCF Middle Entrance Sensor in time, based on the
2540
transfer speed.
Paper fed from HCF being transferred did not pass the HCF Middle Entrance Sensor in time, based on the
2541
transfer speed.
2542 At the start of printing, detected a paper remaining on the the HCF Middle Entrance Sensor.
Paper fed from HCF being transferred did not reach the HCF Middle Exit Sensor in time, based on the transfer
2543
speed.
Paper fed from HCF being transferred did not pass the HCF Middle Exit Sensor in time, based on the transfer
2544
speed.
2545 At the start of printing, detected a paper remaining on the HCF Middle Exit Sensor.
Paper fed from HCF being transferred did not reach the HCF prior registration sensor R in time, based on the
2546
transfer speed.
Paper fed from HCF being transferred did not pass the HCF prior registration sensor R in time, based on the
2547
transfer speed.
2548 At the start of printing, detected a paper remaining on the HCF prior registration sensor R .
Type X52: Paper jam in Offset Stapler

Point Description
3388 Undetermined
3389 Undetermined
3390 Undetermined
3391 Undetermined
3392 Undetermined
3393 Undetermined
3394 Undetermined
3395 Undetermined
3396 Undetermined
3397 Undetermined
3398 Undetermined
3399 Undetermined
3400 Undetermined
3401 Undetermined
3402 Undetermined
[ 15-87 ]
Panel Messages
Type X54: MM Paper Jam

Point Description
The paper (Body) in transporting could not reach to the MM Tamper Eject Sensor from the MM Tamper Feed
3502
Sensor within the specified time.
The paper (Body) in transporting could not reach to the MM Body Fold Entrance Sensor from the MM Tamper
3503
Eject Sensor within the specified time.
The paper (Body) in transporting could not reach to the MM Wrapping Entrance Sensor from the MM Body
3504
Fold Entrance Sensor within the specified time.
The paper (Body) in transporting could not reach to the MM Wrapping Stand-by Sensor from the MM Wrapping
3505
Entrance Sensor within the specified time.
The paper in transporting could not reach to the MM Guide Sensor from the Paper ejection signal from the
3506
printer within the specified time.
The paper (Form) in transporting could not reach to the MM Form Receive Sensor from the MM Guide Sensor
3507
within the specified time.
The paper (Form) in transporting could not reach to the MM Form Registration Sensor from the MM Form
3508
Receive Sensor within the specified time.
The paper (Form) in transporting could not reach to the MM Wrapping Sensor from [MM Form Registration
3509
Motor ON] within the specified time.
The paper (Form) in transporting could not reach to the MM Gluing Sensor from the MM Wrapping Sensor
3510
within the specified time.
The paper (Form) in transporting could not reach to the MM Flap Gluing Eject Sensor from the MM Gluing
3511
Sensor within the specified time.
The paper (Form) in transporting could not reach to the MM Compile Eject Sensor from the MM Flap Gluing
3512
The paper (Form) in transporting could not reach to the MM Eject Elevation Exit Sensor from the MM Compile
3513
3514 The paper (Body) could not pass the MM Guide Sensor within the specified time.
3515 The paper (Form) could not pass the MM Guide Sensor within the specified time.
3516 The paper (Form) could not pass the MM Wrapping Sensor within the specified time.
3517 The paper (Form) could not pass the MM Compile Eject Sensor within the specified time.
3519 A paper remains ON the MM Guide Sensor.
3520 A paper remains ON the MM Body Fold Entrance Sensor.
3521 A paper remains ON the MM Top Tamper Sensor.
3522 A paper remains ON the MM Tamper Eject Sensor.
3523 A paper remains ON the MM Wrapping Entrance Sensor.
3524 A paper remains ON the MM Wrapping Stand-by Sensor.
3525 A paper remains ON the MM Form Receive Sensor.
3526 A paper remains ON the MM Form Registration Sensor.
3527 A paper remains ON the MM Wrapping Sensor.
3528 A paper remains ON the MM Gluing Sensor.
3529 A paper remains ON the MM Flap Gluing Eject Sensor.
3530 A paper remains ON the MM Compile Eject Sensor.
3531 A paper remains ON the MM Eject Sensor.
3532 The paper (Body) was transported to wrong path (Form paper).
3533 The paper (Form) could not move left and right at the switching point, because of paper skewed.
3537 A paper remains ON the MM Flap Entrance Sensor.
3653 A paper remains ON the MM Eject Elevation Edge Sensor when starts feeding.
3654 Failed to detect edge of the form within the specific time.
[ 15-88 ]
Panel Messages
Type X70: HCF Paper Jam

Point Description
Fed paper from HCF being transferred did not reach the Registration Sensor in time, based on the transfer
2550
speed.
Type X72: Paper jam release procedure & instruction display

Paper has jammed.
Display <Pop-up>Jammed paper can be ejected automatically.
Please remove the remaining paper after this operation
Clear Press Cancel or Continue button.
Point Description
This error message displays when paper jams during a printing job with the Test Mode 1832 [Recovery control
setting] selected to [2].
When <Continue> button is pressed:
Jammed papers on the BP belt and after will be ejected onto the FaceDown paper receiving tray.
1938
Jammed papers before the BP belt need to be removed manually from the machine by hand.
When <Cancel> button is pressed:
All the jammed papers stay in the machine. The jammed papers need to be manually removed from the
machine by hand.
Type X73: PB Paper Jam

Clear At mechanical initialization (Remove the jam paper and close the door)
Point Description
S1 position Paper Jam (Body)
3570 The sensor is ON at mechanical initialization of the unit.
The sensor remains ON more than specified time when paper feeding (Body or Cover).
The sensor remains ON more than specified time when paper feeding (Cover).
3574
The sensor is ON at mechanical initialization of the unit.
3575
3576
3577
The sensor remains ON more than specified time when paper stacking (Body).
3578
Body paper was clamped at mechanical initialization of the unit.
3579
The sensor remains ON more than specified time at book ejection.
3581 The sensor remains ON more than specified time at mechanical initialization of the unit.
[ 15-89 ]
Panel Messages
Type X73: PB Paper Jam

Clear At mechanical initialization (Remove the jam paper and close the door)
Point Description
3582
The sensor remains ON more than specified time at mechanical initialization of the unit.
3583
The sensor remains ON more than specified time when paper feeding (Cover).
S54 position Paper Jam (Cover)
3585
3586 The sensor remains ON more than specified time at mechanical initialization of the unit.
Type X74: HCS Paper Jam

Clear Open the HCS jam release door, Remove jammed paper, Close the HCS jam release door
Point Description
3593 The HCS Entrance Sensor did not ON in specified time.
3594 The HCS Entrance Sensor did not OFF in specified time.
3595 The HCS Entrance Sensor is ON when started feeding the paper.
3596 The HCS Switchback Sensor did not ON in specified time.
3597 The HCS Switchback Sensor did not OFF in specified time.
3598 The HCS Switchback Sensor is ON when started feeding the paper.
3599 The HCS SB Sensor did not ON in specified time.
3600 The HCS SB Sensor did not OFF in specified time.
3601 The HCS SB Sensor is ON when started feeding the paper.
3602 The HCS Middle Sensor did not ON in specified time.
3603 The HCS Middle Sensor did not OFF in specified time.
3604 The HCS Middle Sensor is ON when started feeding the paper.
3605 The HCS Vertical Feed Sensor did not ON in specified time.
3606 The HCS Vertical Feed Sensor did not OFF in specified time.
3607 The HCS Vertical Feed Sensor is ON when started feeding the paper.
3608 The HCS Ejection Sensor did not ON in specified time.
3609 The HCS Ejection Sensor did not OFF in specified time.
3610 The HCS Ejection Sensor is ON when started feeding the paper.
3611 The HCS FU Sensor did not ON in specified time.
3612 The HCS FU Sensor did not OFF in specified time.
3613 The HCS FU Sensor is ON when started feeding the paper.
Type X120: MM Double Feed Jam

Display Paper has been possibly double fed in the Mail maker. Check the printed sheets.
Clear Press UI button after remove jammed paper
Point Description
<How to detect double feed jam>
Measure the light volume by the first sheet (Become the reference value)
3800 Measure the light volume on second and subsequent sheets, and compare with the reference value.
If there are certain value gap between them, it will show the error.
Resume from the prior sheet. (One sheet before that detected double feed jam.)
<How to detect double feed jam> Same as TM3800.
3801
Resume from the sheet that detected double feed jam.
[ 15-90 ]
Panel Messages
4-5. Supply Errors (Y)
Type Y01: Replace ink cartridge

Replace the ink cartridge.
Display Do not install the removed ink cartridge back again.
Doing so may cause a failure.
Clear Remove relevant ink cartridges.
Point Description
The black ink cartridge is empty.
2100
Ink supply valve K was opened, but pressurized ink tank ink sensor K was not activated in time.
The cyan ink cartridge is empty.
2101
Ink supply valve C was opened, but pressurized ink tank ink sensor C was not activated in time.
The magenta ink cartridge is empty.
2102
Ink supply valve M was opened, but pressurized ink tank ink sensor M was not activated in time.
The yellow ink cartridge is empty.
2103
Ink supply valve Y was opened, but pressurized ink tank ink sensor Y was not activated in time.
2116 Black ink cartridge empty (RFID tag)
2117 Cyan ink cartridge empty (RFID tag)
2118 Magenta ink cartridge empty (RFID tag)
2119 Yellow ink cartridge empty (RFID tag)
Type Y03: Punch waste box full

The finisher is full of punching trash.
Display
Open the finisher front door and dispose of punching trash.
Clear Dispose of the waste from punching, or press the Close button, or delete the job.
Point Description
3200 1 Punch box almost full (detected by finisher)
3200 2 Punch box almost full (detected by printer)
Type Y04: Staples empty

Display Open the finisher front door and add staples.
Clear Add staples, press the Close button, or delete the job.
Point Description
3201 1 Stapler refilling is required (detected by finisher).
3201 2 Stapler refilling is required (detected by printer).
Type Y05: Booklet staples empty

Display Open the finisher front door and add staples for booklet stapling.
Clear Add booklet staples, press the Close button, or delete the job.
Point Description
3202 1 Booklet stapler refilling is required (front side; detected by finisher).
3202 2 Booklet stapler refilling is required (front side; detected by printer).
3203 1 Booklet stapler refilling is required (rear side; detected by finisher).
3203 2 Booklet stapler refilling is required (rear side; detected by printer).
Type Y07: Offset Stapler staple empty

Display Add staples in Offset stapler.
• Add staple needles.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3418 Undetermined
[ 15-91 ]
Panel Messages
Type Y08: MM Water Tank Refill Error

Display Water is in short supply. Refill the Water Supply Tank with water.
• Add water.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3535 Detected [no water] by the MM Water Level Detection Sensor.
Type Y09: PB Glue Sheet Set Error

Display There is no glue sheet in the perfect binder. Add a glue sheet.
• Add the glue sheet.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3590 Detected [no glue sheet].
Type Y10: PB Cut Paper Box Full

The perfect binder is full of cutting trash.
Display
Open the perfect binder front cover and dispose the cutting trash.
• When the PB Cover Dust Tray Detection Sensor became OFF.
Clear
• Delete the job.
Point Description
3561 Cover dust became full or cover dust tray is not placed.
[ 15-92 ]
Panel Messages
4-6. Loading/Interlock Detection Errors (Z)
Type Z01: AF loading error

Display Close the AF cover.
Clear Close the AF feed cover.
Point Description
4400 The AF feed cover is open (issued from AF side).
Type Z02: Ink cartridge not loaded

Display Install the ink cartridge.
Clear Load a compatible ink cartridge with an RF tag.
Point Description
2125 No ink cartridge is loaded in the black ink position.
2126 No ink cartridge is loaded in the cyan ink position.
2127 No ink cartridge is loaded in the magenta ink position.
2128 No ink cartridge is loaded in the yellow ink position.
Type Z03: Incorrect ink color

Wrong-color ink cartridge is installed.
Display
Replace the ink cartridge.
Remove the ink cartridge.
Clear
After this, load an ink cartridge of the correct color.
Point Description
2104 An ink cartridge of another color is loaded in the black ink position.
2105 An ink cartridge of another color is loaded in the cyan ink position.
2106 An ink cartridge of another color is loaded in the magenta ink position.
2107 An ink cartridge of another color is loaded in the yellow ink position.
Type Z04: Incompatible ink cartridge

Wrong-type ink cartridge installed or cannot read ink info.
Display
Replace the ink cartridge or contact RISO Dealer/Branch.
Remove the ink cartridge.
Clear
After this, load an ink cartridge of the correct type.
Point Description
2108 1-9 Wrong color of ink cartridge is loaded in the black ink position.
2109 1-9 Wrong color of ink cartridge is loaded in the cyan ink position.
2110 1-9 Wrong color of ink cartridge is loaded in the magenta ink position.
2111 1-9 Wrong color of ink cartridge is loaded in the yellow ink position.
2112 1-2 K ink tag cannot detected on the K ink cartridge.
2113 1-2 C ink tag cannot detected on the C ink cartridge.
2114 1-2 M ink tag cannot detected on the M ink cartridge.
2115 1-2 Y ink tag cannot detected on the K ink cartridge.
2120 1-6 Wrong ink cartridge is loaded in the black ink position.
2121 1-6 Wrong ink cartridge is loaded in the cyan ink position.
2122 1-6 Wrong ink cartridge is loaded in the magenta ink position.
2123 1-6 Wrong ink cartridge is loaded in the yellow ink position.
Type Z05: Front cover open

Close the front door.\n
Display Press "Front door release button"before opening.
The door might be damaged if opened forcibly.
Clear Close the front cover (left or right).
Point Description
1211 The front left cover is open.
1212 The front right cover is open.
[ 15-93 ]
Panel Messages
Type Z06: Switchback cover open

Display Close the jam release cover (G).
Clear Close the switchback cover.
Point Description
1213 The switchback cover is open.
Type Z08: Check paper feed tray

Safety SW on Standard Tray is activated.
Display
Reset paper on Standard Tray.
Clear Release interlock.
Point Description
1090 The upper or lower paper feed tray interlock switch is deactivated.
Type Z09: Tray 1 not loaded

Display Set Feed Tray 1 in place.
Clear Close internal paper feed tray 1.
Point Description
1007 Internal paper feed tray 1 is open.

Point Description

Point Description
Type Z16: Left finisher cover open

Display Close the finisher door.
Clear Deactivate the interface module front door switch.
Point Description
3121 The printer has detected that the interface unit cover is open.
Type Z17: Booklet unit not connected

Display Close the finisher booklet tray.
Clear Set the booklet drawer in place.
Point Description
3122 Booklet drawer open
Type Z18: Right finisher cover open

Display Close the finisher door.
Clear Deactivate the finisher front door switch.
Point Description
3123 Finisher front cover open
Type Z20: 3-fold tray not loaded

Display Close the finisher 3-fold tray.
Clear Load the 3-fold tray.
Point Description
3124 The 3-fold tray is not loaded (it is pulled out).
[ 15-94 ]
Panel Messages
Type Z21: Internal paper feed jam door open

Display Close the jam release cover (H).
Clear Close the jam release door on the base.
Point Description
1095 Internal feed paper jam release door open
Type Z22: Front cover open (BP lower limit)

Display Close the front doors.
Clear Close the front cover (left or right).
Point Description
1255 The front left cover is open when the belt platen is at the lower limit position.
1256 The front right cover is open when the belt platen is at the lower limit position.
Type Z23: Switchback cover open (BP lower limit)

Display Close the jam release cover (G).
Clear Close the switchback cover.
Point Description
1257 The switchback cover is open when the belt platen is at the lower limit position.
Type Z24: Check paper feed tray (BP lower limit)

Safety SW on Standard Tray is activated.
Display
Reset paper on Standard Tray.
Point Description
The upper or lower paper feed tray interlock switch is deactivated when the belt platen is in the lower limit
1253
position.
Type Z25: Tray 1 not loaded (BP lower limit)

Point Description
1250 Internal paper feed tray 1 is open when the belt platen is in the lower limit position.

Point Description

Point Description
Type Z28: Internal paper feed jam door open (BP lower limit)
Display Close the jam release cover (H).
Clear Close the jam release door on the base.
Point Description
1254 The internal paper feed jam release door is open when the belt platen is in the lower limit position.
Type Z51: Check High capacity feeder

Safety SW on High capacity feeder is activated.
Display
Reset paper on High capacity feeder.
Point Description
Either the HCF Paper Feed Tray Upper Safety Switch or the HCF Paper Feed Tray Lower Safety Switch is
2560
deactivated.
[ 15-95 ]
Panel Messages
Type Z52: Offset Stapler jam cover open

Display Close the Transfer Cover of Offset stapler.
Clear Close OST jam cover
Point Description
3423 Undetermined
Type Z53: Offset Stapler staple cover open

Display Close the Staple Cover of the Offset stapler.
Clear Close OST staple needle cover
Point Description
3424 Undetermined
Type Z54: High capacity feeder error

Display Close the cover of High capacity feeder.
Point Description
HCF Jam Release Door Lock Detection Sensor 1 or HCF Jam Release Door Lock Detection Sensor 2 on HCF
2561
is deactivated.
Type Z55: MM Cover Open Error

Display Close the mail maker cover.
Clear Close the cover
Point Description
3536 Mail Maker cover is open
Type Z56: PB Front Cover Open

Display Close the front cover of the perfect binder.
Clear Close the front cover
Point Description
3556 PB front cover is open
Type Z57: HCS Left Cover Open

Display Close the left cover of "High capacity stacker".
Clear Close HCS left cover
Point Description
3626 HCS Front Door 1 Safety Switch is OFF
Type Z58: HCS Carriage Set Error

Display Set the high capacity stacker carriage.
Clear Install the Hand Truck, then close the HCS door
Point Description
3863 The Hand Truck was not installed correctly when HCS unit connected.
Type Z59: HCS Ejection Tray Set Error

Display The high capacity stacker stacking tray is not set. Set the stacking tray.
Clear Install the paper receiving tray, then close the HCS door
Point Description
3861 Detected no HCS tray when raise the tray. (HCS Tray Set Sensor is OFF)
[ 15-96 ]
Panel Messages
Type Z60: Incorrect Ink Cartridge

Display Replace the ink cartridge or contact your administrator.
Clear Set appropriate ink cartridge
Point Description
Despite administrator of the unit owner approved to use the ink cartridge other than RISO, actual user selected
2375
not to use the ink cartridge other than RISO. (Black ink)
2376 Same as 2375. (Cyan ink)
2377 Same as 2375. (Magenta ink)
2378 Same as 2375. (Yellow ink)
Type Z61: HCS Right Cover Open

Display Close the right cover of "High capacity stacker".
Clear Close the HCS right cover
Point Description
3627 HCS Front Door 2 Safety Switch is OFF.
Type Z62: HCS Left Cover Open (P-Jam)

Clear Close the HCS left cover
Point Description
3632 The HCS left cover is open during jam release operation.
Type Z63: HCS Right Cover Open (P-Jam)

Clear Close the HCS right cover
Point Description
3633 The HCS right cover is open during jam release operation.
Type Z64: PB Right Side Cover Open

Display Close the right side cover of the perfect binder.
Clear Close the right side cover
Point Description
3587 PB right side cover is open
Type Z65: PB Inserter Open

Display Close the cover sheet inserter of the perfect binder.
Clear Close the Cover Inserter
Point Description
3588 PB Cover Inserter is open
[ 15-97 ]
Panel Messages
4-7. Loading/Interlock Detection Errors (I)
Type I01: Maintenance call

!!Maintenance!!
Display
Call Service.
Clear
• In test mode 01900, set the maintenance guideline value to 0.
Note: To resolve the underlying problem, change the setting in test mode 01900.
Point Description
1403 The maintenance call guideline value for printing quantity has been reached.
Type I02: Waste ink tank nearly full

Display The drain tank must be replaced soon. Call service to prepare a new drain tank.
Clear • Remove the waste ink tank.
• Allow the waste ink tank to become full (the message will be cleared automatically).
Note: To resolve the underlying problem, remove and replace the waste ink tank.
Point Description
It is almost time to replace the waste ink tank.
2062 Waste ink tank sensor 1 (top): ON
Waste ink tank sensor 2 (bottom): ON
Type I03: Operating in temporary registration status

!!Temporary Operating Mode!!
Display
This massage will be hidden after the temporary operating period.
Clear • Access test mode 08400 to force official registration of the printer.
• Allow the period of temporary registration to expire (the message will be cleared automatically).
Note: To resolve the underlying problem, change the setting in test mode 08400.
Point Description
1814 Printer operating in temporary registration mode.
Type I05: Using ink for another model

Wrong-type ink cartridge is installed or cannot be read ink info.
Display The ink cartridge will be unusable if this goes on.
Replace the ink cartridge or contact RISO Dealer/Branch.
Clear
• Remove the relevant ink cartridge and replace with a correct ink cartridge.
Note: To resolve the underlying problem, replace the ink with ink compatible with the machine.
Point Description
Unsupported Black ink cartridge is installed.
2099 1
< The ink cartridge cannot be used after the temporary machine registration period ends.>
Unsupported Cyan ink cartridge is installed after the period of temporary registration.
2099 2
Unsupported Magenta ink cartridge is installed after the period of temporary registration.
2099 3
Unsupported Yellow ink cartridge is installed after the period of temporary registration.
2099 4
[ 15-98 ]
Panel Messages
Type I06: Outgoing queue nearly full

Display Transmission error to the Control server. Call Service.
• Access test mode 00414 to save data for which transmission failed on a USB memory device.
Clear
Note: To resolve the underlying problem, access test mode 00746, check settings such as settings for
communication with the admin server, and establish communication between the online remote server and
printer.
Point Description
0065 The outgoing queue for online remote functions is nearly full (at 80% capacity).
Type I08: Belt maintenance request

Display The image may not be printed in properly caused by the soiled transfer path. Call serivice.
Note: To solve the problem, the BP belt should be cleaned of the ink or replaced with a new BP belt..
Point Description
The CIS is reading the BP belt density to be over 30%.
0229 1
Check the BP belt for ink stains.
The paper width or center of the paper detected by CIS is off position over the allowed distance.
0229 2
Check the BP belt for ink stains.
Type I09: Machine ID conflict

Wrong-type Control Card is installed or cannot be read Control Card info.
Display The machine will be unusable if this goes on.
Replace the Control Card or contact RISO Dealer/Branch.
Clear Check the Control card.
Point Description
Wrong Control card maybe inserted. Insert correct Control card.
1936 This error message displays only during the temporary registration between the Engine control PCB and
Control card during the machine installation.
Type I10: Offset stapler maintenance

Display Required to renew the parts in Offset stapler. Call Service.
Clear Press the Close button
Point Description
Need to replace the spare parts.
3483 1-3
1:Ceramic roller 2:Scrape roller 3:Return roller
3484 Undetermined
1: Need to replace the OST Tray Elevation Motor
3485 1-2
2: Need to replace the OST Tray Shift Motor
3486 1 Need to replace stapler harness
Type I11: PMS Battery Empty

Time setting might be incorrect or the battery might be weak.
Display
Contact the administrator. If recovery has failed, call service.
Clear
Note: To solve the problem, sets to the correct time or change the PMS battery.
Point Description
0320 The current system time (Older than Jan. 1, 2010) is not recommended to use for timer operation.
Type I15: PB GlueSheet Near Full

The perfect binder glue sheet must be replaced soon.
Display
Call service to prepare a new glue sheet.
• Add the glue sheet.
Point Description
Remaining glue sheets become under 30%.
3569
Error shows again if PB door closed within 30 seconds after open.
[ 15-99 ]
Panel Messages
5. Error Code Point / Page Search

Code Type Page Code Type Page Code Type Page Code Type Page
0001 S98 26 0056 S95 24 0109 1-2 S98 27 0171 1-3 S99 35
0002 S98 26 0057 S95 24 0110 1-6 S98 28 0172 W57 64
0003 S98 26 0059 S98 26 0111 1-6 S98 28 0173 1-8 S99 35
0004 S98 26 0060 1-5 W48 62 0112 1-6 S98 28 0180 1-9 S99 35
0005 S98 26 0061 1-3 W49 62 0113 1-6 S98 28 0190 S97 25
0006 S99 31 0062 1-3 W49 62 0114 1-2 S98 28 0191 S97 25
0007 1-9 S99 31 0063 U01 39 0115 S98 28 0192 S97 25
0008 1-4 S99 31 0064 1-3 W49 62 0116 S99 32 0193 S97 25
0010 S99 31 0065 I06 99 0117 S98 28 0194 S97 25
0011 S98 26 0066 S98 26 0118 1-2 S99 32 0196 1-2 S97 25
0012 S99 31 0067 S98 26 0119 1-4 S99 32 0197 1-2 S97 25
0013 S99 31 0068 S98 26 0120 1-2 S96 24 0198 1-3 S41 20
0018 1-2 S98 26 0069 S98 27 0122 1-2 S96 24 0200 S95 24
0019 1-8 S98 26 0070 S99 31 0123 1-2 S96 24 0201 U02 39
0020 S98 26 0071 S99 31 0124 S96 24 0202 U01 39
0021 S98 26 0073 1-6 S99 31 0125 1-4 S96 25 0203 U02 39
0022 1-3 S98 26 0074 1-6 S99 31 0126 1-4 S96 25 0205 U02 39
0023 S98 26 0075 1-2 S99 31 0129 S96 25 0206 S95 24
0024 S98 26 0076 S99 32 0130 S96 25 0207 U02 39
0025 S98 26 0077 W98 70 0133 1-4 S96 25 0210 U02 39
0026 S98 26 0078 W62 65 0140 S99 32 0211 U02 39
0027 S98 26 0079 W63 65 0141 1-2 S99 32 0213 U02 39
0028 S98 26 0080 1-3 S96 24 0142 S99 32 0215 U02 39
0029 S98 26 0081 1-3 S96 24 0143 S99 32 0216 U02 39
0030 S98 26 0082 S96 24 0144 1-2 S99 32 0217 U02 39
0031 S98 26 0083 S96 24 0145 1-9 S99 32 0218 U02 39
0032 S98 26 0084 S96 24 0146 1-9 S99 32 0219 U01 39
0034 S99 31 0085 S96 24 0147 S99 32 0220 U01 39
0035 S91 22 0090 S98 27 0148 3-8 S99 32 0221 U02 39
0036 S98 26 0091 S98 27 0149 1-3 S99 32 0222 W40 60
0037 S99 31 0092 S98 27 0150 1-5 S99 32 0223 S99 35
0038 S99 31 0093 S98 27 0150 9 S99 32 0224 W47 62
0039 S99 31 0094 S98 27 0151 1 S99 33 0225 1-3 W58 64
0040 S99 31 0095 S99 32 0152 1-7 S99 33 0226 1-4 W58 64
0041 S99 31 0096 1-7 S99 32 0154 1-7 S99 33 0227 1-3 W58 64
0042 S99 31 0097 S98 27 0155 1-9 S99 33 0228 1-3 W59 64
0043 S99 31 0100 1 S98 27 0156 1-6 S99 33 0229 1-2 I08 99
0044 S98 26 0100 3 S98 27 0157 1-9 S99 34 0230 1-3 W93 69
0045 S92 22 0100 5-7 S98 27 0158 1-3 S99 34 0231 1-3 W94 69
0046 S95 24 0101 1 S98 27 0160 1-2 S99 34 0232 W95 70
0047 S95 24 0101 3 S98 27 0161 S99 34 0233 1-8 W96 70
0048 1-4 S95 24 0101 5-7 S98 27 0162 1-9 S99 34 0234 1-6 W97 70
0049 W77 67 0102 1-5 S98 27 0163 1-7 S99 35 0235 W60 64
0050 W17 56 0103 1-4 S98 27 0164 1-2 S99 35 0236 W60 64
0051 W17 56 0104 1-2 S98 27 0165 1-3 S99 35 0237 W60 64
0052 1-9 S98 26 0105 1-2 S98 27 0166 1-6 S99 35 0238 W61 64
0053 1-2 W53 63 0106 1-2 S98 27 0167 1-6 S93 23 0239 W61 64
0054 1-3 W49 62 0107 1-2 S98 27 0168 1-5 S99 35 0240 W14 55
0055 S95 24 0108 1-7 S98 27 0170 1-9 S99 35 0241 1-6 S95 24
[ 15-100 ]
Panel Messages
0242 W64 65 0317 W76 67 1058 1-6 X02 82 1131 S01 12
0243 W66 65 0318 1-2 W84 68 1059 X02 82 1132 S01 12
0244 1-4 W67 65 0320 I11 99 1060 X04 82 1140 S37 19
0245 W68 65 0325 1-2 W14 55 1061 X06 83 1141 S37 19
0246 S99 35 1000 1-2 W04 53 1062 X06 83 1142 S37 19
0247 1-4 W70 66 1001 1-2 W05 53 1063 X08 83 1143 S37 19
0248 S98 28 1002 1-2 W06 53 1064 X27 86 1150 W24 57
0250 S98 28 1003 1-2 W07 54 1065 X03 82 1151 W41 60
0251 S98 28 1004 1-2 W45 61 1066 X08 83 1153 S40 20
0252 W70 66 1005 1-2 W02 52 1070 X01 82 1154 W39 60
0253 S98 28 1006 1-2 W18 56 1071 1-3 X11 83 1155 1-2 S99 36
0255 W47 62 1007 Z09 94 1072 X08 83 1160 1-2 S99 36
0256 U01 39 1008 Z10 94 1073 X12 84 1202 S98 28
0257 U01 39 1009 Z11 94 1074 X12 84 1203 S98 28
0260 S94 23 1011 1 W03 52 1075 1-2 X12 84 1204 S98 28
0261 S94 23 1012 1-2 W08 54 1076 X11 83 1206 S13 15
0262 U90 47 1013 1-2 W09 54 1077 1-3 X11 83 1207 S96 25
0263 1-3 W88 69 1014 1-2 W09 54 1078 1-6 X02 82 1208 S96 25
0264 W89 69 1015 1-2 W43 61 1079 X02 82 1209 S96 25
0265 W90 69 1016 1-2 W44 61 1080 X05 82 1210 S96 25
0267 W98 70 1017 1-2 W44 61 1081 X06 83 1211 Z05 93
0270 W15 55 1018 1-2 W46 61 1082 X07 83 1212 Z05 93
0280 1-9 W49 62 1019 1-2 W75 66 1083 X08 83 1213 Z06 94
0281 S90 22 1030 S02 12 1084 X28 86 1215 S12 14
0282 S88 22 1031 S42 20 1085 X03 82 1216 S12 14
0283 S89 22 1032 S43 20 1090 Z08 94 1217 S12 14
0284 1-4 S99 36 1033 S44 21 1095 Z21 95 1218 S12 14
0285 1-4 S99 36 1034 S11 14 1096 S02 12 1220 S12 14
0286 1-4 S99 36 1035 S10 14 1100 1-6 X32 87 1221 S12 14
0287 1-4 S99 36 1036 S10 14 1101 1-6 X32 87 1222 S12 14
0288 W92 69 1037 S11 14 1102 1-5 X14 84 1223 S12 14
0289 W106 72 1038 S01 12 1110 X02 82 1250 Z25 95
0290 W72 66 1039 S28 15 1111 X12 84 1251 Z26 95
0291 W74 66 1040 S29 15 1112 X12 84 1252 Z27 95
0301 1-2 W14 55 1041 S30 16 1113 X12 84 1253 Z24 95
0302 1-2 W14 55 1042 S31 16 1114 X09 83 1254 Z28 95
0303 1-2 W14 55 1043 S12 14 1115 X11 83 1255 Z22 95
0304 1-2 W14 55 1044 S12 14 1116 X02 82 1256 Z22 95
0305 1-2 W14 55 1045 S42 20 1117 X02 82 1257 Z23 95
0306 W14 55 1046 S43 20 1118 X05 82 1300 W56 63
0307 1-2 W14 55 1047 S44 21 1119 X06 83 1301 W51 63
0309 1-2 W50 62 1050 X01 82 1120 X07 83 1302 S99 36
0310 1-2 W50 62 1051 1-3 X11 83 1121 X08 83 1303 W73 66
0311 1-2 W50 62 1052 X08 83 1122 X28 86 1310 S98 28
0312 1-2 W91 69 1053 X26 86 1123 X03 82 1311 S98 28
0313 1-2 W91 69 1054 X10 83 1124 X29 86 1312 S98 28
0314 1-2 W54 63 1055 1-2 X12 84 1125 X30 86 1313 S98 28
0315 1-2 W54 63 1056 X09 83 1127 W195 81 1400 S98 28
0316 1-2 W54 63 1057 1-3 X12 84 1130 S01 12 1401 S98 28
[ 15-101 ]
Panel Messages
1402 S99 36 1937 W71 66 2054 S35 17 2117 Y01 91
1403 I01 98 1938 X72 89 2055 S35 17 2118 Y01 91
1404 1-5 S99 36 1940 1-2 S98 28 2056 S35 17 2119 Y01 91
1405 S98 28 1941 S53 21 2057 S35 17 2120 1-6 Z04 93
1406 1-5 S98 28 1942 1-5 S53 21 2058 1-2 S35 17 2121 1-6 Z04 93
1407 S98 28 1943 1-5 S53 21 2060 S35 17 2122 1-6 Z04 93
1408 S98 28 1944 1-5 S53 21 2061 S14 15 2123 1-6 Z04 93
1409 S98 28 1945 1-5 S53 21 2062 I02 98 2124 W99 70
1410 S98 28 1946 1-5 S53 21 2063 S96 25 2125 Z02 93
1411 S98 28 1947 2 W100 71 2064 S35 17 2126 Z02 93
1412 S98 28 1948 2 W101 71 2065 S35 17 2127 Z02 93
1413 S98 28 1949 1-2 W102 71 2066 S35 17 2128 Z02 93
1414 S98 28 1955 W52 63 2067 S35 17 2130 S04 13
1415 S99 36 1956 W52 63 2068 1-4 S36 19 2131 S04 13
1800 1-9 S98 28 1957 W52 63 2069 1-2 S35 17 2132 S04 13
1801 1-6 S98 28 2000 S03 12 2070 1-2 S35 17 2133 S04 13
1801 7-9 S98 28 2001 S03 12 2071 1-2 S35 17 2134 S04 13
1810 S98 28 2002 S03 12 2072 1-2 S35 17 2135 S04 13
1811 1-3 S98 28 2003 S03 12 2073 1-2 S35 17 2136 S04 13
1812 1-3 S98 28 2004 S03 12 2074 1-2 S35 17 2137 S04 13
1813 S90 22 2005 S03 12 2075 1-2 S35 17 2140 1-2 S05 13
1814 I03 98 2006 S03 12 2076 1-2 S35 17 2141 1-2 S05 13
1900 S94 23 2007 1-2 S03 12 2077 S35 17 2142 1-2 S05 13
1901 S94 23 2008 S03 12 2078 1-4 S36 19 2143 1-2 S05 13
1902 S94 23 2009 S03 12 2079 1-4 S35 18 2144 1-2 S05 13
1903 S94 23 2010 S03 12 2080 1-4 S36 19 2145 1-2 S05 13
1904 S94 23 2011 S03 12 2081 1-2 S35 18 2146 1-2 S05 13
1905 S94 23 2012 1-4 S03 12 2082 1-2 S35 18 2147 1-2 S05 13
1906 S94 23 2012 5-8 S03 12 2083 1-2 S35 18 2148 1-2 S05 13
1910 S94 23 2013 S03 12 2084 1-2 S35 18 2149 1-2 S05 13
1911 S94 23 2014 1-5 S03 13 2085 1-4 S35 18 2150 1-2 S05 13
1912 S94 23 2015 1-4 S03 13 2099 1-4 I05 98 2151 1-2 S05 13
1913 S94 23 2015 5-8 S03 13 2100 Y01 91 2152 1-2 S05 13
1914 S94 23 2020 S32 16 2101 Y01 91 2153 1-2 S05 13
1915 S94 23 2021 S32 16 2102 Y01 91 2154 1-2 S05 13
1920 S92 22 2022 S32 16 2103 Y01 91 2155 1-2 S05 13
1921 S94 23 2023 S32 16 2104 Z03 93 2156 1-2 S05 13
1922 S94 23 2024 S32 16 2105 Z03 93 2157 1-2 S05 13
1923 S94 23 2025 S32 16 2106 Z03 93 2158 1-2 S05 13
1924 S94 23 2030 S33 16 2107 Z03 93 2159 1-2 S05 13
1925 S94 23 2031 S33 16 2108 1-9 Z04 93 2160 1-2 S05 13
1926 S94 23 2032 S33 16 2109 1-9 Z04 93 2161 1-2 S05 13
1930 S94 23 2033 S33 16 2110 1-9 Z04 93 2162 1-2 S05 13
1931 S94 23 2040 S34 16 2111 1-9 Z04 93 2163 1-2 S05 13
1932 S94 23 2041 S34 16 2112 1-2 Z04 93 2164 1-2 S39 19
1933 S94 23 2050 S35 17 2113 1-2 Z04 93 2170 S07 14
1934 S94 23 2051 S35 17 2114 1-2 Z04 93 2171 S07 14
1935 W69 65 2052 S35 17 2115 1-2 Z04 93 2172 S07 14
1936 I09 99 2053 S35 17 2116 Y01 91 2173 S07 14
[ 15-102 ]
Panel Messages
2174 S07 14 2235 1-4 S98 29 2296 1-2 S98 29 2522 U51 44
2175 S07 14 2236 1-4 S98 29 2297 1-2 S98 29 2523 1-9 U55 45
2176 S07 14 2237 1-4 S98 29 2298 1-2 S98 29 2524 1-9 U55 45
2177 S07 14 2238 1-4 S98 29 2299 1-2 S98 29 2525 U55 45
2178 S07 14 2239 1-4 S98 29 2300 1-2 S98 29 2526 U55 45
2179 S07 14 2240 1-4 S98 29 2301 1-2 S98 29 2527 1-9 U56 46
2180 S07 14 2241 1-4 S98 29 2302 1-2 S98 29 2528 1-9 U56 46
2181 S07 14 2242 1-4 S98 29 2303 1-2 S98 29 2529 U51 44
2182 S07 14 2243 1-4 S98 29 2304 1-2 S98 29 2530 U51 44
2183 S07 14 2244 1-4 S98 29 2305 1-2 S98 29 2531 U55 45
2184 S07 14 2245 1-4 S98 29 2306 1-2 S98 29 2540 X51 87
2185 S07 14 2246 1-4 S98 29 2307 1-2 S98 29 2541 X51 87
2186 S07 14 2247 1-4 S98 29 2308 1-2 S98 29 2542 X51 87
2187 S07 14 2248 1-4 S98 29 2309 1-2 S98 29 2543 X51 87
2188 S07 14 2249 1-4 S98 29 2310 1-2 S98 29 2544 X51 87
2189 S07 14 2250 1-4 S98 29 2311 1-2 S98 29 2545 X51 87
2190 S07 14 2251 1-4 S98 29 2312 1-2 S98 29 2546 X51 87
2191 S07 14 2252 1-4 S98 29 2313 1-2 S98 29 2547 X51 87
2192 S07 14 2253 1-4 S98 29 2320 1-2 S98 29 2548 X51 87
2193 S07 14 2260 1-2 S98 29 2321 1-2 S98 29 2550 X70 89
2200 S06 13 2261 1-2 S98 29 2322 1-2 S98 29 2560 Z51 95
2201 S06 13 2262 1-2 S98 29 2323 1-2 S98 29 2561 Z54 96
2202 S06 13 2263 1-2 S98 29 2324 1-2 S98 29 2580 1-2 W78 67
2203 S06 13 2264 1-2 S98 29 2325 1-2 S98 29 2581 W191 81
2204 S06 13 2265 1-2 S98 29 2326 1-2 S98 29 2600 W190 81
2205 S06 13 2266 1-2 S98 29 2327 1-2 S98 29 2601 U56 46
2206 S06 13 2267 1-2 S98 29 2328 1-2 S98 29 2602 U55 45
2207 S06 13 2268 1-2 S98 29 2329 1-2 S98 29 2603 U55 45
2208 S06 13 2269 1-2 S98 29 2330 1-2 S98 29 2604 U55 45
2209 S06 13 2270 1-2 S98 29 2331 1-2 S98 29 2605 U55 45
2210 S06 13 2271 1-2 S98 29 2332 1-2 S98 29 2606 U56 46
2211 S06 13 2272 1-2 S98 29 2333 1-2 S98 29 2607 U55 45
2212 S06 13 2273 1-2 S98 29 2334 1-2 S98 29 2608 U55 45
2213 S06 13 2274 1-2 S98 29 2335 1-2 S98 29 2609 U55 45
2214 S06 13 2275 1-2 S98 29 2336 1-2 S98 29 2610 U55 45
2215 S06 13 2276 1-2 S98 29 2337 1-2 S98 29 2611 U55 45
2216 S06 13 2277 1-2 S98 29 2338 1-2 S98 29 2612 U56 46
2217 S06 13 2278 1-2 S98 29 2339 1-2 S98 29 2613 U56 46
2218 S06 13 2279 1-2 S98 29 2340 1-2 S98 29 2614 1-9 U56 46
2219 S06 13 2280 1-2 S98 29 2341 1-2 S98 29 2615 1-9 U56 46
2220 S06 13 2281 1-2 S98 29 2342 1-2 S98 29 2616 1-9 U56 46
2221 S06 13 2282 1-2 S98 29 2343 1-2 S98 29 2617 1-9 U56 46
2222 S06 13 2283 1-2 S98 29 2350 1-4 S98 30 2618 1-9 U56 46
2223 S06 13 2290 1-2 S98 29 2375 Z60 97 2619 1-9 U56 46
2230 1-4 S98 29 2291 1-2 S98 29 2376 Z60 97 3000 S19 15
2231 1-4 S98 29 2292 1-2 S98 29 2377 Z60 97 3001 S19 15
2232 1-4 S98 29 2293 1-2 S98 29 2378 Z60 97 3002 S20 15
2233 1-4 S98 29 2294 1-2 S98 29 2520 1-3 U51 44 3003 S20 15
2234 1-4 S98 29 2295 1-2 S98 29 2521 U51 44 3004 S20 15
[ 15-103 ]
Panel Messages
3005 S20 15 3093 U17 43 3179 X24 85 3366 1-2 U54 45
3006 S20 15 3094 U17 43 3200 1-2 Y03 91 3367 1-3 U54 45
3007 S20 15 3095 U17 43 3201 1-2 Y04 91 3368 1-2 U54 45
3015 S94 23 3096 U17 43 3202 1-2 Y05 91 3369 1-4 U54 45
3020 S98 30 3097 U17 43 3203 1-2 Y05 91 3370 1-5 U54 45
3021 S98 30 3121 Z16 94 3220 1-2 W10 54 3371 U57 46
3022 S98 30 3122 Z17 94 3221 1-2 W11 55 3372 U57 46
3023 S98 30 3123 Z18 94 3222 1-2 W11 55 3373 1-2 U54 45
3030 1-2 S99 36 3124 Z20 94 3223 1-2 W12 55 3374 1-2 U54 45
3031 1-9 S99 36 3125 1-2 W31 58 3224 1-2 W13 55 3380 1-2 U58 46
3032 1-5 S99 37 3140 X17 84 3225 W25 57 3388 X52 87
3033 1-3 S99 37 3141 X17 84 3226 W26 57 3389 X52 87
3034 S99 37 3142 X18 84 3227 W27 58 3390 X52 87
3035 S99 37 3143 X18 84 3228 W28 58 3391 X52 87
3036 1-6 S99 37 3144 X18 84 3229 W29 58 3392 X52 87
3037 1-6 S99 37 3145 X18 84 3230 W30 58 3393 X52 87
3060 U11 42 3146 X19 84 3231 W20 56 3394 X52 87
3061 U12 42 3147 X19 84 3232 W21 57 3395 X52 87
3062 U12 42 3148 X19 84 3233 W22 57 3396 X52 87
3063 U12 42 3149 X19 84 3234 W23 57 3397 X52 87
3064 U12 42 3150 X19 84 3235 W19 56 3398 X52 87
3065 U12 42 3151 X21 85 3236 1-2 W31 58 3399 X52 87
3066 U12 42 3152 X21 85 3237 W32 58 3400 X52 87
3067 U12 42 3153 X21 85 3238 W33 59 3401 X52 87
3068 U12 42 3154 X21 85 3239 W34 59 3402 X52 87
3069 U12 42 3155 X21 85 3240 W35 59 3418 Y07 91
3070 U12 42 3156 X21 85 3241 W36 59 3423 Z52 96
3071 U12 42 3157 X21 85 3242 W37 59 3424 Z53 96
3072 U12 42 3158 X22 85 3243 W18 56 3453 W79 67
3073 U12 42 3159 X22 85 3244 1-2 W126 74 3455 W38 60
3074 U12 42 3160 X24 85 3245 1-2 W127 74 3456 1-2 W42 60
3075 U12 42 3161 X24 85 3246 W127 74 3457 W128 74
3076 U12 42 3162 X24 85 3247 W136 75 3483 1-3 I10 99
3077 U12 42 3163 X24 85 3248 W137 75 3484 I10 99
3078 U12 42 3164 X17 84 3301 W16 56 3485 1-2 I10 99
3079 U14 43 3165 X17 84 3302 W16 56 3486 1 I10 99
3080 U14 43 3166 X18 84 3304 W16 56 3490 U09 41
3081 U14 43 3167 X18 84 3305 W16 56 3491 U09 41
3082 U14 43 3168 X19 84 3325 U14 43 3492 U09 41
3083 U14 43 3169 X19 84 3326 U16 43 3493 U09 41
3084 U16 43 3170 X19 84 3327 U19 44 3494 U09 41
3085 U16 43 3171 X21 85 3358 U52 44 3495 U09 41
3086 U16 43 3172 X21 85 3359 U52 44 3496 U09 41
3087 U17 43 3173 X21 85 3360 U53 44 3497 U09 41
3088 U17 43 3174 X21 85 3361 U53 44 3498 U09 41
3089 U17 43 3175 X21 85 3362 1-2 U54 45 3499 U09 41
3090 U17 43 3176 X21 85 3363 1-2 U54 45 3500 U09 41
3091 U17 43 3177 X22 85 3364 1-2 U54 45 3501 U09 41
3092 U17 43 3178 X24 85 3365 1-2 U54 45 3502 X54 88
[ 15-104 ]
Panel Messages
3503 X54 88 3552 U88 47 3603 X74 90 3671 U09 42
3504 X54 88 3553 U88 47 3604 X74 90 3672 U110 50
3505 X54 88 3554 1-3 U89 47 3605 X74 90 3675 S99 37
3506 X54 88 3555 1-3 U89 47 3606 X74 90 3676 S99 37
3507 X54 88 3556 Z56 96 3607 X74 90 3677 1-5 S99 37
3508 X54 88 3557 1-2 W103 71 3608 X74 90 3678 1-5 S99 37
3509 X54 88 3558 1-4 W104 71 3609 X74 90 3702 1-2 W157 76
3510 X54 88 3559 U105 49 3610 X74 90 3703 1-2 W158 76
3511 X54 88 3560 U106 50 3611 X74 90 3704 1-2 W161 77
3512 X54 88 3561 Y10 92 3612 X74 90 3705 1-2 W162 77
3513 X54 88 3562 1-2 W120 73 3613 X74 90 3710 1-2 W170 77
3514 X54 88 3563 W120 73 3614 U91 48 3711 1-2 W171 77
3515 X54 88 3564 U88 47 3615 U91 48 3712 1-2 W172 78
3516 X54 88 3565 W121 73 3616 U91 48 3713 1-2 W173 78
3517 X54 88 3566 W122 73 3617 U91 48 3714 1-2 W174 78
3518 U09 41 3567 W123 73 3618 U91 48 3715 1-2 W175 78
3519 X54 88 3569 I15 99 3619 U91 48 3716 1-2 W176 79
3520 X54 88 3570 X73 89 3620 U91 48 3717 1-2 W177 79
3521 X54 88 3571 X73 89 3621 U91 48 3718 1-2 W186 80
3522 X54 88 3572 X73 89 3622 U91 48 3719 1-2 W187 80
3523 X54 88 3573 X73 89 3623 W130 74 3720 W179 79
3524 X54 88 3574 X73 89 3624 W108 72 3732 W182 79
3525 X54 88 3575 X73 89 3625 1-9 S87 22 3733 W183 79
3526 X54 88 3576 X73 89 3626 Z57 96 3734 1-2 W159 76
3527 X54 88 3577 X73 89 3627 Z61 97 3735 1-2 W160 76
3528 X54 88 3578 X73 89 3628 U125 51 3736 W188 80
3529 X54 88 3579 X73 89 3629 U09 41 3737 W189 80
3530 X54 88 3580 X73 89 3630 1-2 U91 48 3760 W105 71
3531 X54 88 3581 X73 89 3632 Z62 97 3762 1-2 S107 38
3532 X54 88 3582 X73 90 3633 Z63 97 3763 W124 73
3533 X54 88 3583 X73 90 3645 W109 72 3764 W125 73
3534 W55 63 3584 X73 90 3646 W110 72 3765 U111 50
3535 Y08 92 3585 X73 90 3649 S100 38 3800 X120 90
3536 Z55 96 3586 X73 90 3650 U92 48 3801 X120 90
3537 X54 88 3587 Z64 97 3653 X54 88 3850 W130 74
3538 W184 80 3588 Z65 97 3654 X54 88 3851 1-2 W131 74
3539 1-2 U88 47 3590 Y09 92 3655 S110 38 3852 U120 50
3540 U88 47 3591 1-9 S100 38 3656 W116 72 3853 W130 74
3541 U88 47 3592 1-8 S100 38 3657 W117 72 3855 1-9 S87 22
3542 U88 47 3593 X74 90 3658 W118 73 3856 1-9 S87 22
3543 1-3 U88 47 3594 X74 90 3660 1-2 W150 75 3857 1-9 S87 22
3544 U88 47 3595 X74 90 3661 U128 51 3859 1-2 W132 75
3545 U88 47 3596 X74 90 3662 U128 51 3860 W132 75
3546 U88 47 3597 X74 90 3665 U09 42 3861 Z59 96
3547 U88 47 3598 X74 90 3666 U09 42 3862 1-2 W134 75
3548 U88 47 3599 X74 90 3667 U09 42 3863 Z58 96
3549 1-2 U88 47 3600 X74 90 3668 U09 42 3864 1-2 W135 75
3550 U88 47 3601 X74 90 3669 U09 42 3865 U126 51
3551 U88 47 3602 X74 90 3670 U09 42 3866 U125 51
[ 15-105 ]
Panel Messages
Code Type Page Code Type Page Code Type Page

3867 U125 51 4300 U03 40 5005 U93 48
3868 U125 51 4301 U03 40 5006 U93 48
3869 U125 51 4302 U03 40 5007 U93 48
3870 U126 51 4303 U03 40 5008 U93 48
3871 U125 51 4304 U03 40 5009 U93 48
3872 U125 51 4310 U03 40 5010 U93 48
3873 U125 51 4311 U03 40 5500 S60 21
3874 U125 51 4312 U03 40 5501 W80 67
3875 U125 51 4316 U03 40 5502 1-5 S98 30
3876 U126 51 4322 U03 40 5503 S99 37
3877 U126 51 4323 U03 40 5504 S99 37
3880 U91 48 4324 U03 40 5505 W81 67
3881 U91 48 4325 U03 40 5506 W82 68
4100 S95 24 4330 U06 41 5507 1-5 S94 23
4101 S95 24 4340 U98 49 5508 1-5 S94 23
4102 S95 24 4341 U98 49 5509 1-5 S94 23
4103 S95 24 4342 U99 49 5510 1-5 S94 23
4104 S95 24 4350 U98 49 5511 1-5 S94 23
4105 S95 24 4360 U08 41 5512 1-5 S94 23
4106 S95 24 4361 U08 41 5513 S98 30
4120 U01 39 4400 Z01 93 5514 1-5 S98 30
4121 U01 39 4410 X25 85 5516 W115 72
4130 U07 41 4411 X25 85 5518 S98 30
4131 U07 41 4412 X25 85 5520 1-5 S98 30
4132 U07 41 4413 X25 85 5521 1-5 S98 30
4133 U10 42 4414 X25 86 5522 1-5 S98 30
4134 U07 41 4415 X25 86 5530 S98 30
4140 U98 49 4416 X25 86 5531 S98 30
4141 U98 49 4420 U04 40 5532 S98 30
4142 U98 49 4430 U04 40 5533 S98 30
4143 U98 49 4440 U04 40 5534 S98 30
4144 U98 49 4441 U04 40 5535 U115 50
4150 U98 49 4442 U04 40 5551 U116 50
4160 U99 49 4449 U04 40 5552 U116 50
4180 U98 49 4450 U05 40 5553 U116 50
4190 U98 49 4460 W01 52 5554 U127 51
4200 U02 39 4461 U05 40 5555 U127 51
4201 U02 39 4462 U05 40 5556 U127 51
4210 U98 49 4463 U05 40 5557 U127 51
4211 U98 49 4464 U05 40 6010 1-7 S38 19
4212 U98 49 4470 U04 40 6011 1-2 W85 68
4213 U98 49 4500 U03 40 6012 1-3 W86 68
4214 U98 49 4501 U03 40 6013 1-2 W86 68
4215 U98 49 4502 U03 40 6014 S65 21
4216 U98 49 4510 U98 49 6015 W87 68
4217 U98 49 5001 U93 48
4218 U98 49 5002 U93 48
4230 U18 43 5003 U93 48
4250 U18 43 5004 U93 48
[ 15-106 ]
Panel Messages
6. OPTION Paper Jams

6-1. Requirements to Clear Jams in Finisher
If paper jams occur in the finisher or in some parts involved in ejection by the printer, an error such as the one
shown below is displayed on the panel. Promptly clear the jam by pressing one of the numbers of groups 1–4
and following the instructions. (The corresponding procedures are identified in the following table.)
X??-????
Group Procedure for Clearing Jam on the LCD Panel

1 F1, F2 and H14
2 F3, F4, F5 and F6
3 F7, F8, F9, F10, F11and F12
4 F13 and F14
㪝㪏
㪝㪎㪝㪈㪈
㪝㪐㪝㪈㪇
㪝㪊
㪝㪈㪝㪉
㪝㪈㪉
㪝㪋
㪝㪈㪋
㪝㪌
㪝㪈㪊
㪝㪍
[ 15-107 ]
Panel Messages
6-2. Requirements to Clear Jams in various options

If paper jams occur in the various option or in some parts involved in ejection by the printer, an error such as the
one shown below is displayed on the panel. Promptly clear the jam by pressing one of the numbers of groups
1–4 and following the instructions. (The corresponding procedures are identified in the following table.)
6-2-1. Requirements to Clear Jams in Offset Stapler
C1
C2
Button in
Display
[M] Paper jam has been cleared + (Close button has been pressed or all covers has
OST-1 C1 M
been closed)
[M], [Q] Paper jam has been cleared + (Close button has been pressed or all covers
OST-2 C2 M/Q
has been closed)
6-2-2. Requirements to Clear Jams in High Capacity Feeder
P3
P1
P2
Printer Unit
High Capacity Feeder
Button in
Display
[N] Paper jam has been cleared + (Close button has been pressed or all covers has
HCF-1 P1 N
been closed)
[R] Paper jam has been cleared + (Close button has been pressed or all covers has
HCF-2 P2 R
been closed)
[R] Paper jam has been cleared + (Close button has been pressed or all covers has
HCF-3 P3 R
been closed)
[ 15-108 ]
Panel Messages
6-2-3. Requirements to Clear Jams in High Capacity Stacker
A7 A8
A4
A6
A5 A3
A1
A2
Button in
Display
[A1] Paper jam has been cleared + (Close button has been pressed or all covers has
HCS-1 A1 A1
been closed)
HCS-2 A2 A2
been closed)
HCS-3 A3 A3
been closed)
HCS-4 A4 A4
been closed)
HCS-5 A5 A5
been closed)
HCS-6 A6 A6
been closed)
been closed)
HCS-7 A7 A7
If the distance to the lower limit position is less than 100mm, will be lowered to the
lower limit position.
been closed)
HCS-8 A8 A8
If the distance to the lower limit position is less than 100mm, will be lowered to the
lower limit position.
[ 15-109 ]
Panel Messages
6-2-4. Requirements to Clear Jams in Perfect Binder
B6 B7
B2
B8
B1
B3
B4
B5
Button in
Display
[B1] Paper jam has been cleared + (Close button has been pressed or all covers has
PB-1 B01 B1
been closed)
PB-2 B02 B2
been closed)
PB-3 B03 B2
been closed)
PB-4 B04 B2
been closed)
PB-5 B05 B3
been closed)
PB-6 B06 B4
been closed)
PB-7 B07 B5
been closed)
[ 15-110 ]
Panel Messages
6-2-5. Requirements to Clear Jams in Mail Maker
C10
C1
C9
C2 C8
C4 C7
C5
C3
C6
Button in
Display
[C1] Paper jam has been cleared + (Close button has been pressed or all covers has
MM-1 C1 C1
been closed)
MM-2 C2 C2
been closed)
MM-3 C4 C4
been closed)
MM-4 C6 C6
been closed)
MM-5 C7 C7
been closed)
MM-6 C8 C8
been closed)
MM-7 C9 C9
been closed)
MM-8 C10 C10
been closed)
[ 15-111 ]
Panel Messages
[ 15-112 ]
Test Modes
Chapter 16. Test Modes

Contents
1. Entering into Test Mode ............................................................................................... 16-2
1-1. Mode Screen........................................................................................................................... 16-2
1-2. Keypad Operation to Enter into Test Mode ............................................................................ 16-2
2. Exiting Out of Test Mode .............................................................................................. 16-3
3. Test Mode Numbering System..................................................................................... 16-4
3-1. Meaning of the Numbers for Each Test Mode Digit ................................................................ 16-4
3-2. Example Test Modes............................................................................................................... 16-5
4. Executing Test Modes ................................................................................................. 16-6
4-1. Entering Test Mode Numbers ................................................................................................. 16-6
4-2. Executing Test Modes ............................................................................................................. 16-6
5. Test Mode Details........................................................................................................ 16-10
5-1. ComColor Unit Test Modes ................................................................................................... 16-10
5-1-1. Sensor Monitoring (S) ................................................................................................... 16-10
5-1-2. Drive Checking (M) ....................................................................................................... 16-14
5-1-3. Unit Checking (U) .......................................................................................................... 16-15
5-1-4. Initalization (I) ................................................................................................................ 16-25
5-1-5. Data Monitoring (C) ....................................................................................................... 16-27
5-1-6. Data Editing (D)............................................................................................................. 16-33
5-2. OPTIONS / Finisher Test Modes........................................................................................... 16-60
5-2-2. Drive Checking (M) ....................................................................................................... 16-62
5-2-3. Unit Checking (U) .......................................................................................................... 16-64
5-2-4. Initalization (I) ................................................................................................................ 16-67
5-2-6. Data Editing (D)............................................................................................................. 16-68
5-3. OPTIONS / Scanner Test Modes .......................................................................................... 16-87
5-3-2. Drive Checking (M) ....................................................................................................... 16-87
5-3-3. Unit Checking (U) .......................................................................................................... 16-88
5-3-4. Initalization (I) ................................................................................................................ 16-89
5-3-6. Data Editing (D)............................................................................................................. 16-90
5-4. OPTIONS / HCF (High Capacity Feeder) Test Modes .......................................................... 16-97
5-5. OPTIONS / OST (Offset Staple Tray) Test Modes .............................................................. 16-103
5-6. OPTIONS / HCS (High Capacity Stacker) Test Modes ....................................................... 16-107
5-7. OPTIONS / MM (Mail Maker) Test Modes ...........................................................................16-111
5-8. OPTIONS / PB (Perfect Binder) Test Modes ...................................................................... 16-121
6. Test Mode Number / Page Search ........................................................................... 16-129
[ 16-1 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
1. Entering into Test Mode
1-1. Mode Screen

Test modes can be accessed only when the operation panel is in the Mode screen.
1-2. Keypad Operation to Enter into Test Mode

As shown,
8 button
* button # button
press these three buttons simultaneously to display the pass-code input screen shown at left below.
Confirm Confirm
Input the pass code Input the pass code
****
Cancel OK Cancel OK
As you enter the 4-digit pass code "3-2-1-4" using the numeric keypad, the screen changes to the one as shown
on above right. Press the OK or Start key. If the pass code is incorrect, the following screen is displayed. Enter
the correct pass code to access test mode. Once the pass code is entered correctly, the test mode standby
screen shown on the top of next page is displayed.
Confirm
The password is incorrrect.
Input again.
OK
Rev.1.00 [ 16-2 ]
Test Modes
Test mode
To finish, press the Mode key
Test mode No. 00001
Catergory
00406 LOG PRINTOUT
System
00407 REV INFO PRINTOUT
Engine
00408 MANUAL EVENT CODE SETTING
Print head 01/16
00409 PANEL CALIBRATION
Option 1
00412 ADMIN SERVER COMMUNICATION TEST
Option 2
00413 TRANSMIT LOG SAVE
Scanner
Sensor Drive Unit Initialize Data Mon Data Edit
All S M U I C D
Test Mode Standby Screen
2. Exiting out of Test Mode
To exit test mode, press the Mode key on the operation panel in standby mode or when operation is stopped.
The printer will then be idle in regular mode.
[ 16-3 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
3. Test Mode Numbering System
01234
5th Digit 4th Digit 3rd Digit 2nd Digit 1st Digit
3-1. Meaning of the Numbers for Each Test Mode Digit

5th digit: 0 indicates test modes used by service technicians.
4th digit: Indicates the test mode category. Note that there is some mixing of standard and optional components
(such as for face up paper ejection). Numbers are defined in the following table.
3rd digit: Indicates the type of processing. Classified into sensor monitoring, drive checking, unit checking,
initialization, data monitoring, and data editing. Numbers are defined in the following table.
2nd and 1st digit: Test mode detail number. No particular meaning in the numbering system itself.
4th digit Category Category Details

System Controller PCB software, etc.
0 Image Adjustment Items associated with image adjustment
Test Printing Execution of printing operations; settings that affect printing
Engine Paper supply and ejection, transfer, engine system, etc.
1 Image Adjustment Items associated with image adjustment
Test Printing Execution of printing operations; settings that affect printing
2 Print Heads Ink path, ink heads, maintenance, etc.
3 OPTION Unit Optional paper supply and ejection units
4 OPTION / Finisher Finisher unit & IF unit for finisher
5 OPTION / Scanner Items associated with the scanner
6 Engine and other Paper Feed Settings and other
8 Other Items associated with RFID tag control
Rev.1.00 [ 16-4 ]
Test Modes
3rd digit Processing Category Test Mode Execution Details

Checks the status of various sensors and switches.
0-1 Sensor Monitoring (S)
Status can be checked by letters or tones indicating the status.
Enables individual units such as motors to be activated or
deactivated
2-3 Drive Checking (M)
Actuators of clutches, fans, and other components can be driven for
a specific period.
4 Unit Checking (U) Enables execution of groups of components (in units)
Enables settings that were configured (in setting modes, for
5 Initialization (I)
example) to be cleared or initialized
Enables confirmation of numerical values managed as data in the
6 Data Monitoring (C)
system
Enables system status or operation timing to be changed
7-9 Data Editing (D) However, be very careful when changing values because incorrect
values may cause malfunction or other problems.
3-2. Example Test Modes
01025
Sensor monitoring of the registration sensor (checks sensors for paper feeding and transfer system of the print
engine system)
02305
Drive checking of ink cooling fans (confirms operation of actuators in the ink path of the print engine system)
03400
Unit checking of the auto-control stacking tray (AS) side paper guide (conducts coordinated operation of optional
paper supply and ejection units)
04952
Stapler data editing (selection or adjustment of data when a stapler is installed in the finisher system)
[ 16-5 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
4. Executing Test Modes
4-1. Entering Test Mode Numbers

Selection from Menus
With this method, test modes are narrowed down by choosing options in Category and Processing Category (S, M,
U, I, C, or D) and the desired test mode is selected.
Test mode
To finish, press the Mode key
Test mode No. 00001
Catergory
00406 LOG PRINTOUT
System
00407 REV INFO PRINTOUT
Engine
00408 MANUAL EVENT CODE SETTING
Print head 01/16
00409 PANEL CALIBRATION
Option 1
00412 ADMIN SERVER COMMUNICATION TEST
Option 2
00413 TRANSMIT LOG SAVE
Scanner
Sensor Drive Unit Initialize Data Mon Data Edit
All S M U I C D
Entering Numbers Directly

With this method, the numeric keypad on the operation panel is used to enter the number when the printer is
awaiting input of the test mode.
To clear input errors, press the C button and enter the correct number.
Note: Leading zeros need not be entered. To enter 00100, you can simply enter 100.
4-2. Executing Test Modes

4-2-1. Sensor Monitoring (S)
After you select or enter the test mode number in step 4-1, pressing the Start key on the operation panel will
display a screen indicating the operation is paused. To cancel execution of test mode at this point, press the
Stop key.
To continue with execution, press the Start key again. Next, the screen indicates that operation is either
activated or deactivated.
When operation is activated, tones are emitted at short intervals.
When operation is deactivated, tones are emitted at long intervals.
S 01000 PFT U=LIMIT SENSOR A Close

Tones at short intervals
In Action
ON
Check the details in
the Confirmation Items
column for sensor
S 01000 PFT U-LIMIT SENSOR A Close
monitoring test modes.

In Pause
S 01000 PFT U-LIMIT SENSOR A Close Tones at long intervals

In Action
OFF
Check the details in
the Confirmation Items
column for sensor
monitoring test modes.
To return to the test mode standby screen, press the Stop key on the operation panel.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-6 ]
Test Modes
4-2-2. Drive Checking (M)

Stop key.
To continue with execution, press the Start key again. Next, the screen indicates that operation is in progress,
and the particular unit is activated in isolation.
M 01226 REGISTRATION MOTOR Close M 01226 REGISTRATION MOTOR Close

Processing is executed
In Pause In Action following details in
the Confirmation
Items column for drive
checking test modes.
4-2-3. Unit Checking (U)

Stop key.
To continue with execution (operation of multiple components), press the Start key again. Details regarding how
operation is stopped are as follows.
• When the table indicates "Auto" for stopping operation, the screen displays "Finished" automatically
after operation is finished.
• When the table indicates "Auto + Button" for stopping operation, pressing the Stop key stops operation,
but processing will automatically end after the specified operation is finished.
When the table indicates "Button" for stopping operation, pressing the Stop key stops operation.
U 01423 PFT UPPER LIMIT POS Close U 01423 PFT UPPER LIMIT POS Close
Processing is executed
In Pause END following details in the
Confirmation Items
column for unit checking
test modes.
Also note information on
stopping operation.
[ 16-7 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
4-2-4. Initialization (I)

After you select or enter the test mode number in step 4-1, pressing the Start key on the operation panel
will display a screen indicating the operation is in progress. (The duration of display varies depending on the
test mode, and the message is only displayed for an instant in some cases.) After the required processing is
executed, "Finished" is displayed.
I 05501 SCANNER JAM CLEAR Close I 05501 SCANNER JAM CLEAR Close I 05501 SCANNER JAM CLEAR Close
In Pause In Action END
Processing is executed following details in the Confirmation Items column for initialization test modes.
4-2-5. Data Monitoring (C)

display a screen with information.
C 00609 ENGINE CTL PCB VERSION Close
EngControl 0.0.0.0
Details in the Confirmation Items
column for data monitoring test
modes are displayed.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-8 ]
Test Modes
4-2-6. Data Editing (D)

display a screen for numerical input, with the current setting value (selected value) in an orange row.
Changing Values
Enter values in the supported range directly, either by pressing the up or down arrow to increase or
decrease the value or by entering the value with the numeric keypad.
Confirming Settings
To confirm the settings, press the OK button on the screen. To cancel any revisions, press Cancel.
Information on Bottom
min: Indicates the minimum value in the supported range for changes
max: Indicates the maximum value in the supported range for changes.
def: Indicates the factory-set default value.
step: Indicates the increment for changes. (For example, 2 indicates that the value is increased or
decreased by 2.)
Notes
The units and meaning of values (and in particular, selection options) are not defined on the screen. Refer
to the technical manual for details.
Values can be changed

D 01743 REG SNR PNA JAM SET Cancel OK D 01862 DUPLEX PRINT SETTING Cancel OK
Numerical input (Numerical keys available) Numerical input (Numerical keys available)
0 0 according to data editing
test mode details (range
(min/max) and options).
min: -100 max: +100 def: 0 step: 1 min: 0 max: 1 def: 0 step: 1
Example of Numerical Input Example of Option Selection
[ 16-9 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
5. Test Modes Details

5-1. ComColor Unit Test Mode
Sensor Monitoring (S) ComColor Unit (Series 1000)

No. Process Name Confirmation Items
1000 P-Feed Tray Upper-Limit Sensor A
1001 P-Feed Tray Upper-Limit Sensor B
1002 P-Feed Tray Lower Limit Sensor
1003 Tray 1 Upper Limit Sensor
1006 P-Feed Tray Paper Detection Sensor
1007 Tray 1 Paper Detection Sensor
1010 P-Feed Tray Paper Length Sensor
1011 Tray 1 Paper Size Sensor 1
1012 Tray 1 Paper Size Sensor 2 ON: Detected (light blocked)
1013 Tray 1 Paper Size Sensor 3 OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
1023 First Paper Feed Motor Encoder
1024 Registration Motor Encoder
1025 Registration Sensor
1027 Vertical Paper Feed Sensor 1
ON: Detected (light blocked)
OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
1035 Paper Feed Tray Elevation Switch ON: ON (pressed) OFF: OFF (released)
1036 P-Feed Tray Paper VOL. Detection Sensor 1
1037 P-Feed Tray Paper VOL. Detection Sensor 2
1038 Tray 1 Paper Volume Sensor
1100 Transfer Belt Encoder Sensor
1102 Top Edge Sensor 1
ON: Normally (light blocked)
1104 Paper Lift Detection Sensor
OFF: Paper Lift Detected (light passes through)
1105 Paper Elevation IN Sensor
1106 Flipper Sensor
1107 Upper Transfer OUT Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked)
1108 SwitchBack Sensor OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
1109 Re-Feed Sensor
1110 Belt HP Sensor
Rev.1.00 [ 16-10 ]
Test Modes

1150 FD Ejection Motor Encoder
ON: Detected (light blocked) OFF: Not Detected (light passes
1151 FD Ejection Full Sensor
through)
1152 FD Ejection Paper Detection Sensor
ON: Detected (light blocked, home position)
1153 FD Ejection Fence HP Sensor
OFF: Not Detected (light passes through, not home position)
1154 FD Ejection Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked) OFF: Not Detected (light passes
1155 FU Ejection Sensor through)
ON: Detected (light blocked, home position)
1156 FU Ejection Wing HP Sensor
OFF: Not Detected (light passes through, not home position)
1159 FD Ejection Flipper Detection
ON: Detected (connected) OFF: Not Detected (not connected)
1161 SwitchBack Clutch Detection
ON: Detected (light blocked) OFF: Not Detected (light passes
1163 FU Ejection Jump Motor Encoder
through)
1180 Front Left Interlock Switch ON: Closed (switch pressed)
1181 Front Right Interlock Switch OFF: Open (switch released)
ON: Detected (switch pressed)
1182 BP Loose Wire Detection
OFF: Not Detected (switch released)
1185 Tray 1 Set Safety Switch
ON: Detected (switch pressed, tray closed)
OFF: Not Detected (switch released, tray open)
1189 Option PCB Detection Signal ON: Detected (connected) OFF: Not Detected (not connected)
ON: Detected (switch pressed, door closed)
1190 Switch Back Door Interlock Switch
OFF: Not Detected (switch released, door open)
ON: Detected (door closed)
1191 Internal Feed Jam Release Door Switch
OFF: Not Detected (door open)
ON: Detected (Coin vEndor / Card vEndor)
1192 Vendor Detection Signal
OFF: Not Detected
1194 Auto Fence Receive Tray Signal
1195 Multi-Finisher Connection Signal ON: Detected (connected) OFF: Not Detected (not connected)
1196 FU Ejection Unit Signal

2101 Bellows Sensor
2103 Bellows Arm HP Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked)
2104 Bellows Arm Upper Limit Position Sensor OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
2106 Bellows Arm Lower Limit Position Sensor
2107 Pressurized Ink Tank Ink Detection Sensor (K)
2108 Pressurized Ink Tank Ink Detection Sensor (C)
2109 Pressurized Ink Tank Ink Detection Sensor (M)
2110 Pressurized Ink Tank Ink Detection Sensor (Y)
Negative Pressure Ink Tank Ink Detection
2111
Sensor (K)
ON: Detected (Ink level Detected)
Negative Pressure Ink Tank Ink Detection OFF: Not Detected (Ink level not Detected)
2112
Sensor (C)
2113
Sensor (M)
2114
Sensor (Y)
2115 OverFLow Detection Sensor
2116 Waste Ink Tank NEAR-Full Detection Sensor
2117 Waste Ink Tank Full Detection Sensor
Ink Pan Motor Storage Position Detection ON: Detected (light blocked)
2118 OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
Sensor
Ink Pan Sensor Operating Position Detection
2119
Sensor
[ 16-11 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

2123 BP Lower Limit Position Sensor
2124 BP Upper Limit Position Sensor
2126 Wiper Motor HP Sensor
2127 24V A-Voltage Detection
2128 24V B-Voltage Detection ON: Detected (current conducted)
2129 24V C-Voltage Detection OFF: Not Detected (current not conducted)
2131 30-Volt Detection
2132 Counter Detection
2138 Ink Supply Valve Detection (K)
2139 Ink Supply Valve Detection (C)
2140 Ink Supply Valve Detection (M)
2141 Ink Supply Valve Detection (Y)
2142 Pressurized Ink Tank AIR Valve Detection
Negative Pressure Ink Tank AIR Valve
2143
Detection
2145 Pressurized Ink Tank AIR Valve Detection
ON: Detected (connected)
2146 Heat Exchanger Heater Detection OFF: Not Detected (not connected)
2151 OverFLow Tank Ink Detection
Negative Pressure Ink Tank Ink Sensor
2152
Detection (K)
2153
Detection (C)
2154
Detection (M)
2155
Detection (Y)
Recording Data Generating PCB (X3-IP-PCB)
2159
Detection
2160 Pressurized Ink Tank Ink Sensor Detection (K) ON: Detected (connected)
2161 Pressurized Ink Tank Ink Sensor Detection (C) OFF: Not Detected (not connected)
2162 Pressurized Ink Tank Ink Sensor Detection (M)
2163 Pressurized Ink Tank Ink Sensor Detection (Y)
2165 Ink Cartridge Detection (K)
2166 Ink Cartridge Detection (C) ON: Detected (light blocked)
2167 Ink Cartridge Detection (M) OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
2168 Ink Cartridge Detection (Y)
ON: Origin (home position, light blocked)
Ink FLow Authorization Cam HP Sensor
2169 OFF: Positions other than the origin or home position (light passes
Detection
through)
2170 BP Hit Detection (RL)
2171 BP Hit Detection (RR) ON: Contact Detected
2172 BP Hit Detection (FL) OFF: Contact not Detected
2173 BP Hit Detection (FR)
2174 Ink Pump Error Detection (K)
2175 Ink Pump Error Detection (C) ON: Detected (error or not connected)
2176 Ink Pump Error Detection (M) OFF: Not Detected (normal)
2177 Ink Pump Error Detection (Y)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-12 ]
Test Modes

3000 AS Side Fence HP Sensor ON: Light blocked (home position)
3001 AS End Fence HP Sensor OFF: Light passes through (other position)
3002 AS Paper Remove Switch
ON: Light blocked (paper present)
3003 AS Paper Detection Sensor
OFF: Light passes through (no paper)

8000 RFID-Run-C Signal
8001 RFID-Run-K Signal
8002 RFID-Run-M Signal ON: Connected, OFF: Not connected
8003 RFID-Run-Y Signal
8004 RFID-Run-Machine Code
[ 16-13 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
5-1-2. Drive checking (M)
Drive Checking (M) ComColor Unit (Series 1000)

No. Process Name Description
Starts and stops the External Paper Feed Motor (straight paper
1225 External Paper Feed Motor
feeding).
1226 Registration Motor Starts and stops the Registration Motor.
1227 Internal Paper Feed Motor Starts and stops the Internal Paper Feed Motor.
Starts and stops the External Paper Feed Motor (vertical paper
1228 External Paper Feed Motor (Vertical Transport)
feeding)
1229 Internal Paper Feed Clutch 1 Turn ON or OFF of the Internal Paper Feed Clutch 1.
1232 Vertical Paper Feed Clutch 1 Turn ON or OFF of the Vertical Paper Feed Clutch 1.
1233 Vertical Paper Feed Clutch 2 Turn ON or OFF of the Vertical Paper Feed Clutch 2.
1250 Transfer Belt Suction Fan 1 & 2 Turn ON or OFF of Transfer Belt Suction Fan 1 & 2.
1253 Transfer Belt Suction Fan <ALL> Turn ON or OFF of all Transfer Belt Suction Fans.
1256 Transfer Belt Motor Starts and stops the Transfer Belt Motor.
1257 Paper Elevation Motor Starts and stops the Paper Elevation Motor.
1258 Upper Transfer Motor Starts and stops the Upper Transfer Motor.
1259 FU Eject Flipper Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the FU Eject Flipper Solenoid.
1260 FD Eject Flipper Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the FD Eject Flipper Solenoid.
1261 Switchback Motor (Normal) Starts and stops the Switchback Motor (Normal rotation)
1262 Switchback Motor (Reverse) Starts and stops the Switchback Motor (Reversed rotation)
1263 Re-Feed Motor Starts and stops the Re-Feed Motor.
1264 Switchback Clutch (Unavailable) Switchback clutch is not exist.
1300 FD Ejection Motor Starts and stops the FD Ejection Motor.
1306 FU Ejection Motor Starts and stops the FU Ejection Motor.
1309 FU Ejection Jump Motor Starts and stops the FU Ejection Jump Motor.
1381 Power Supply Cooling Fan Turn ON or OFF of the Power Supply Cooling Fan Drive.
Drive Checking (M) ComColor Unit (Series 2000)

2305 Ink Cooling Fan Turn ON or OFF of the Ink Cooling Fan.
2327 Head Drive IC Cooling Fan 1 Turn ON or OFF of the Head Drive IC Cooling Fan 1.
2328 Head Drive IC Cooling Fan 2 Turn ON or OFF of the Head Drive IC Cooling Fan 2.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-14 ]
Test Modes
Unit Checking (U) ComColor Unit (0001-0999)

Upper: No./Process Name, Lower: Description
401 Count Information Print
Prints a list of information
detailed count (1–21), maintenance count (paper supply and ejection system), finisher count (1–8), cleaning count (extra,
strong, normal).
Printing conditions (cannot be changed): Output size: A4 (mm system), Letter (in. system), Feed tray: Paper feed tray
Receiving tray: Standard receiving tray (FD paper receiving tray), Duplex print settings: Simplex, Copies: 1
* Complete the parameters for number of pages to print, simplex or duplex, and so on in default test mode commands (01860–
01863, 01865, 01867).
402 Test Mode Configuration Print
Prints a list of menu numbers, item names (English only), setting values, and similar information.
Unless service technician menu items, editable setting values, items stored in nonvolatile memory on the printer (except for
data stored on multi-finishers), and items that have been changed from default values are included, lists are labeled "With no
change."
Printing conditions are the same as for 00401.
* Complete the parameters for number of pages to print, simplex or duplex, and so on in default test mode commands
(01860 01863, 01865, 01867).
404 Head Maintenance Print
Prints a chart for head maintenance (A3 size data).
Printing conditions (cannot be changed): Output size: equivalent to A3. For other conditions, see 00401.
01863, 01865, 01867).　
407 REV Information Save
Writes rev. information in the buffer to a USB memory device as a CSV file.
* Data is not cleared when test mode 00740 is enabled.
This test mode can only be executed when test mode 00721 is enabled. Display in the menu and input using the numeric
keypad are only possible when enabled.
408 Manual Event Code Setting
Issues the manual event code set in 00723 and 00724 as a rev. event.
409 Operation Panel Calibration
Performs adjustment in the following order:
1. Calculates the amount of adjustment for the position based on three points on a diagonal line you touched on the panel.
2. Displays a screen for confirmation, after which you touch three points and confirm that the adjustment is correct.
If adjustment fails, after the error is displayed, the process reverts to step 1 (adjustment is repeated).
410 Test Mode Configuration Print 2
Makes same printout as Test Mode No. 00402.
If error message W70-0247- 3 comes up, press the Close key to let the machine make the printout.
411 Nozzle Check Print
Prints a chart for checking the nozzles.
Prints an image applying the image adjustment parameters.
The date and time, machine number, and total count are printed at the top of the sheet.
Displays all equipment information in a block, and executes this for all six blocks.
Prints a chart for head maintenance (A3 size data).
Printing conditions (cannot be changed): Output size: equivalent to A3. For other conditions, see 00401.
01863, 01865, 01867).
412 Administration Server Communication Test
Checks communication between the printer (transmission module) and admin server.
* Check the recipient of admin server transmission with 00746 (admin server transmission settings).
413 Transmission Log Save
Saves transmission log files (records of transmission between the transmission module and admin server) to an external USB
memory device.
Ends with an error if the USB memory device is not inserted or if it has insufficient free space.
[ 16-15 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

414 Transmission Fail Data Save
Saves source CSV files of XML transmission files for which transmission failed (between the transmission module and remote
admin server, when the remote agent function is activated) to an external USB memory device.
Ends with an error if the USB memory device is not inserted or if it has insufficient free space.
415 Test Mode Value Store
Saves test mode setting values for the engine to the PMS (controller) hard disk. For use when boards are replaced.
* Restore data on the hard disk to the board using 00416 (restore test mode setting values).
416 Test Mode Value Restore
Restores engine test mode setting values saved to the PMS (controller) hard disk with 00415 (store test mode setting values)
to the board. For use when boards are replaced.
417 IC Card ID File Save
Makes IC card ID auto-renew file. The file is saved in machine HDD and USB memory stick.
From the second activation of the test mode, the data is saved in the USB memory stick only.
This test mode is not to be used on machines with firmware version SNALL 5.1 or above.
420 Print Head Angle Adjustment
Auto Image Adjustment
General adjustment of print timing
Corrects misalignment of the printing position in the direction of paper transfer for each row of head nozzles by adjusting the
print timing of each row of nozzles to make the printing position accurate in the direction of paper transfer.
Perform rough adjustment for significant misalignment of the printing position.
Scanning resolution is 400 dpi.
421 BP Unit Angle Adjustment
Aligns the belt platen with the head holder unit.
A calibration pattern is printed and scanned. The image data is used to calculate the amount of adjustment (number of
calibration marks) for the BP unit orientation adjustment mechanism, and this amount is displayed.
422 Registration Roller Angle Adjustment
Aligns the registration roller with the belt platen.
A calibration pattern is printed and scanned. The image data is used to calculate the amount of adjustment for the registration
roller orientation adjustment mechanism, and this amount is displayed.
423 Registration Roller Angle Adjustment
Aligns the head so that the row of nozzles is perpendicular to the direction of paper transfer.
A calibration pattern is printed and scanned. The image data is used to calculate the angle formed between the direction of
paper transfer and the direction of the row of nozzles. This is expressed as the number of turns of the head angle adjustment
screw, which is displayed.
424 Print Head Position Adjustment
Adjusts the position in the direction of head nozzle rows.
Relative positions in the primary scanning direction (the direction of head nozzle rows) for cyan, magenta, and yellow in a lane
are calculated based on black heads in the same lane.
The values are converted into the number of turns of the adjustment screw to align the cyan, magenta, and yellow head
positions with black in the same lane, and these amounts are displayed.
When the position of black heads is adjusted (as when black heads are replaced), adjustment is calculated from the
adjustment amount for cyan, magenta, and yellow (for one color or for an average value) in the same lane.
425 Print Timing Fine Adjustment
Adjusts print timing at a high level of precision.
Corrects misalignment of the printing position in the direction of paper transfer for each row of head nozzles by adjusting the
print timing of each row of nozzles to make the printing position accurate in the direction of paper transfer.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-16 ]
Test Modes

426 Overlap Print Width Adjustment
Adjusts the overlap width in the printing area of adjacent heads.
The overlap width in the printing area of adjacent heads is measured, and this value is the basis for determining the driven
nozzle area for each head and other values.
If a value larger than the actual overlap width is set in the parameter, there will be a gap between printing areas of adjacent
heads.
If a value smaller than the actual overlap width is set in the parameter, the overlapping area of adjacent heads will be printed
more densely.
If the actual overlap width is measured accurately, the boundary between printing areas will not be noticeable.
427 Print Head Density Adjustment
Adjusts head drive compensation voltage so that the print density of right and left adjacent lanes is even.
428 Position Adjustment
Manual Image Adjustment
Adjusts the position near the leading edge from which printing starts (the margin length) and the trailing edge margin length.
The position of the leading and trailing edges are determined by output from the top edge sensor.
There are two top edge sensors (1 and 2), and the position of the leading and trailing edges must be adjusted for each sensor.
429 Force Delete RA Transmission Data
Delete file (Transmit to RA server) but the file will be copied if there is USB memory stick attached.
Following folder name will be created in the USB memory stick.
root---------XXXXXXXX_yyyymmddhh24miss--|----RetryCSV/*
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　|----CSV/*
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　|----log/*
Example: 「33209996_20100118112233」
<Not shown in the Test Mode list on the panel display.
Test mode number is not listed on the test mode selection display.
The test mode number must be typed in.>
432 Side Mask Adjustment
Manual Image Adjustment
Adjusts the left and right margin widths. (Manual)
433 Image longation Adjustment
Adjusts image length in the direction of paper transfer.
Scanning resolution is 400 dpi. (Automatic)
435 X Direction Adjustment
Adjusts the relative position for each head in the X direction, based on black in each lane.
Scanning resolution is 400 dpi. (Manual)
436 Y Direction Adjustment
Adjusts the print timing of each row of nozzles per line. (Manual)
437 Overlap Amount Adjustment
Adjusts the amount of overlap between adjacent lanes. (Manual)
438 Density Compensation
Adjusts the density difference between the heads. (Manual)
440 Image Adjustment Parameter Save
Temporarily stores (backs up) current image adjustment data.
* Saving the current image adjustment values before image adjustment enables you to restore the original status in case
image adjustment fails.
441 Image Adjustment Parameter Retrieve
Restores the image adjustment data temporarily stored in 00440.
* Enables you to restore the original status if image adjustment fails.
442 Head Replacement Parameter
Input the Voltage and AL Number when the Print Head is replaced.
443 Head Edge Density Adjustment
Adjusts the left and right edges of the Print Heads, in the area 0.5mm from the edge of the ink dropping area The automatic
overlap adjustment (Test Mode No.426) must be completed before this adjustment.
[ 16-17 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

445 Print Timing Fine Adjustment/Overlap Width Adjustment
Calculates adjusted values on both <Print Timing Fine Adjustment (TM0425)> & <Overlap Print Width Adjustment (TM0426)>,
by single scan.
Then, adjusted values will be set to the Engine system. (Automatic)
451 Engine Factory Value Restore
Restores the Factory default test mode setting onto the Engine PCB from the HDD.
Error message W15-0270 (No factory backup data) will appear if this test mode is executed with no factory operated backup
data in the HDD. <Machines originally shipped with low version machine firmware may not have the backup data from the
factory in HDD.>
This test mode is to be used when replacing the Engine PCB at the time of machine installation when the Engine PCB is found
to be broken at the time of machine out-of-box procedure.
455 Image Adjustment File Transmission
Transmits the Image Adjustment Command File from USB Memory Stick to the Engine PCB.
Error message W47-0255 (No image adjustment file error) will appear if this test mode is executed with no image adjustment
command file in the USB memory stick.
This test mode is mainly for the Factory and R&D use.
< There is no test mode to copy the Image Adjustment Command File from the Engine PCB onto the USB Memory Stick.>
460 HDD Value Store
Stores (copies) the User Setting data, located within the HDD, in the USB Memory Stick.
<Excludes following data>
- Print job data
- Data in the Folder
- Test Mode number in 700’s, which are saved in HDD only.
- Test mode No. 404 saved image adjustment data backup.
Error message W49-0280 (Failure in Store or Restore procedure) will display when the copy to the USB Memory Stick
procedure fails.
PROCEDURE:
1. With the machine powered ON, insert the USB Memory Stick in the USB slot on the machine operation panel.
2. Execute test mode No. 460 and turn OFF the machine power using the Sub Power Key on the machine operation panel.
<The data is still not copied yet.>
3. Turn ON the machine power using the Sub Power Key on the machine operation panel, and wait until the machine boots up
completely.
<The user setting data is saved in the USB Memory Stick at this time.>
4. Remove the USB Memory Stick after the machine is completely booted up.
NOTE:
Error Message W48-0280 may display when this test mode is activated right after the USB Memory Stick is set on the
machine.
In that case, take either one of the two actions listed below.
1) Wait at least 5 seconds before activating the test mode from the time the USB Memory Stick is set on the machine.
2) Re-activate the test mode when error message W48-0280 displays.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-18 ]
Test Modes

461 HDD Value Restore
Restores (copies) the User Setting data, from the USB Memory Stick onto the initialized HDD or newly replaced HDD.
<The USB Memory Stick must contain the User Setting data copied from the HDD beforehand from the previous HDD by the
above test mode No.460.>
Error message W49-0280 (Failure in Store or Restore procedure) will display when the restore of the data on to the HDD fails.
PROCEDURE:
1. With the machine powered ON, insert the USB Memory Stick in the USB slot on the machine operation panel.
2. Execute test mode No. 461 and turn OFF the machine power using the Sub Power Key on the machine operation panel.
<The data is still not restored onto the HDD yet.>
3. Turn ON the machine power using the Sub Power Key on the machine operation panel, and wait until the machine boots up
completely.
<The user setting data is restored onto the HDD at this time.>
4. Remove the USB Memory Stick after the machine is completely booted up.
5. Reboot the machine again and confirm that the restore of the data onto the HDD is successfully done.
NOTE:
Error Message W48-0280 may display when this test mode is activated right after the USB Memory Stick is set on the
machine.
In that case, take either one of the two actions listed below.
1) Wait at least 5 seconds before activating the test mode from the time the USB Memory Stick is set on the machine.
2) Re-activate the test mode when error message W48-0280 displays.
Not shown in the Test Mode list on the panel display.
Test mode number is not listed on the test mode selection display.
The test mode number must be typed in.
473 Charge Count Print (Import)
Reads user & dealer information that stored in [Charge count print] from USB memory stick.
File name: ChargeCountTest.csv
Caution: 1. Run this test mode after 5 seconds of insert the USB memory stick. 2. Run this test mode again, if [W49-0280-6]
error codes occur.
474 Charge Count Print (Export)
Writes user & dealer information that stored in [Charge count print] to USB memory stick.
File name: ChargeCountTest.csv
Caution: 1. Run this test mode after 5 seconds of insert the USB memory stick. 2. Run this test mode again, if [W49-0280-6]
error codes occur.
490 Security Firmware Installation <Optional RISO Security Package>
This test mode is used only when optional RISO Security Package is purchased.
<The RISO Security Package Software is stored in the USB memory device which comes in the chargeable option package.>
In order to make this Test Mode No.490 active, follow the instruction given bellow.
1) Go into Test Mode No.780 [Tech Access Button Display] and change the setting from [0] to [1] .
2) Escape out of the test mode and go into the Admin setting.
3) Select [Maintenance Permission] and change the setting from
[Prohibited] to [Permitted].
4) Go into the test mode and Test Mode No.490 can then be found listed in the [System] category of all the test modes.
Or you can directly type in the number 490 on the operation panel.
This test mode installs the security option firmware and enables the optional security.
RISO Security Package Key Code must be keyed in by Test Modes No. 760, 761 and 762 prior to this test mode to enable the
installation of the security package.
Follow the instruction which comes with the RISO Security Package, and also the [Chapter 18 RISO Security Package] of this
Technical Manual.
The machine reboots automatically after the security option firmware is installed.
NOTE: <Caution in relation to the installation of this optional software.>
1) Activating this test mode will clear the users area and Admin. settings.
2) Print job will not be accepted while in this test mode
3) Print jobs that are received and those being received will be deleted.
4) Do not power OFF the machine while this test mode is in action.
[ 16-19 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Unit Checking (U) ComColor Unit (Series 1000)

1421 External Paper Feed Tray Paper Width Potentiometer Adjustment (Wide)
Specifies an A/D value of 297 mm as the width for paper size detection.
* Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (A4 landscape) in the paper feed tray.
1422 External Paper Feed Tray Paper Width Potentiometer Adjustment (Narrow)
Specifies an A/D value of 105 mm as the width for paper size detection.
* Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (A4 portrait, 2-fold) in the paper feed tray.
1423 External Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Position Stop Action
Starts the elevator motor, detects the upper limit, and stops it. Positioning is conducted at the upper limit.
The upper limit position is switched depending on the paper feed tray upper limit position in paper feed settings (from 077 00,
and 09700, for example).
1424 External Paper Feed Tray Lower Limit Position Stop Action
Starts the elevator motor, detects the lower limit, and stops it.
1425 Tray 1 Upper Limit Position Stop Action
Moves the tray 1 elevator motor, detects the upper limit, and stops it. Positioning is conducted at the upper limit.
1442 Belt Profile Data Save
An inverse Fourier transform is performed using value entered in 01910-01921 (belt profile data), and this is saved to the
engine flash memory. At this time, the value entered for 01922 (belt profile check digit input) is used in verification, and invalid
input values cause an error.
1443 Roller Profile Data Save
Adjustment data is generated from the values entered in 01923-01924 (roller profile vibration amplitude/phase input), and this
is saved to the engine flash memory.
1444 Jam Re-Check Action
Checks again for jams after remaining paper was cleared when recovering from jams and clearing associated errors.
1445 Jam Status Message Renew
Updates the jam status when recovering from jams and clearing associated errors.
1447 Belt Maintenance Count Reset
Resets the belt maintenance counter.
1450 BP Motor Speed Automatic Adjustment
Automatically adjusts the BP belt motor speed.
Adjustment is made by running 8 papers through the machine with the following setting.
- Paper Size = A4 wide edge feeding (Millimeter Machine).
Letter wide edge feeding (Inch Machine).
- Feed Tray = External
1451 Paper Elevation Motor Speed Adjustment
Automatically adjusts the Paper elevation motor speed.
Adjustment is made by running 8 papers through the machine with the following setting.
- Paper Size = A4 wide edge feeding (Millimeter Machine).
Letter wide edge feeding (Inch Machine).
- Feed Tray =
1460 FD Ejection Fence HP Position
Moves the paper ejection fence to the home position.
1461 FD Ejection Fence Custom
Moves the paper ejection fence to the specified position (01851).
1462 FU Ejection Wing HP Position
Moves the FU paper ejection wing to the home position.
1463 FU Ejection Wing Custom
Moves the FU paper ejection wing to the specified position (01852).
1464 FD Ejection Fence 1 Cycle Action
Operates the FD paper ejection fence for one cycle.
1. Move to home position. 2. Move to "min." position and stop for one second. 3. Move to "max." position and stop for one
second. 4. Move to home position.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-20 ]
Test Modes

1465 FU Ejection Fence 1 Cycle Action
Operates the FU paper ejection fence for one cycle.
1. Move to home position. 2. Move to "min." position and stop for one second. 3. Move to "max." position and stop for one
second. 4. Move to home position.
1478 Roller Profile Phase Adjustment
Makes 18 prints to adjust the roller profile (phase). Phase from 0 to 340 is printed in every 20 steps.
1479 Roller Profile Amplitude Adjustment
Makes 16 prints to adjust the roller profile (amplitude). Amplitude from 100 to 1600 is printed in every 100 steps.
1481 Head Test Pattern Print
Prints a head test pattern.
• Transfer speed corresponds to "300-5" (631.4 mm/s), and paper wider than 297 mm is used.
• If these printing conditions are not met, the following settings are applied.
01871: A pattern is selected, except if "27" is specifie
1482 Maintenance Mechanism Initialization
Initializes ink supply unit and maintenance head holder unit mechanisms.
1485 Run Test Mode
Entering the Test mode menu (Use this test mode when use the test mode via the terminal).
1486 Exit From Test Mode
Exit from the Test mode menu (Use this test mode when use the test mode via the terminal).
1494 Sensor Sensitivity Auto Adjustment 1
Auto adjustment of the intensity of light for the registration sensor and top edge sensor 1.
1495 Sensor Sensitivity Auto Adjustment 2
Auto adjustment of the intensity of light for top edge sensor 2.
1497 Adjusted Parameter Save
Backs up setting values that vary from machine to machine.
This test mode overwrites the Factory default test mode settings.
The test mode settings saved by this test mode applies on the machine when [Test Mode No. 0451 Engine Factory Value
Restore] is applied.
1498 Sensor Auto Adjust 1 Feed
Feeds paper from the paper feed tray to the position for executing 01494.

2400 Bellows Arm Motor UP
Moves the bellows arm drive motor to the upper limit position (sensor stop).
2401 Bellows Arm Motor Home Position
Moves the bellows arm drive motor to the home position (sensor stop).
2402 Bellows Arm Fix-Position
Moves the bellows arm to the bellows fix position.
2404 Bellows Arm Motor Down
Moves the bellows arm drive motor to the lower limit position (sensor stop).
2405 Bellows Arm Motor Up
Moves the BP elevation motor to the upper limit position (sensor stop).
2406 BP Elevator Motor Maintenance
Moves the BP elevation motor to the maintenance position (encoder stop).
2407 BP Elevator Motor Down
Moves the BP elevation motor to the lower limit position (sensor stop).
2409 BP Elevator Motor - Forced Elevation
BP motor operation for 1 second to compulsively elevate the BP Unit upward (1 second operation).
Machine will not accept any BP related test mode after operation of this test mode since the machine is unable to detect the
BP position after this test mode.
This Test Mode should not be used in normal servicing, as the machine normally hangs up (locks) after this test mode.
<Factory use Test Mode>
[ 16-21 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

2411 Wiper Motor To Front
Moves the wiper motor to the front.
Note: You must check the BP Unit and the ink pan mechanism positions before this operation.
2412 Wiper Motor To Rear
Moves the wiper motor to the rear.
Note: You must check the BP Unit and the ink pan mechanism positions before this operation.
2418 Normal Cleaning
Starts normal cleaning.
2419 Strong Cleaning
Starts strong cleaning.
2420 Extra Cleaning
Starts extra cleaning.
2427 Ink Initial Filling
Executes initial filling of the system with ink.
2428 Nozzle Pressure- Print
Pressurizes the print heads to the printing condition.
< Circulates the ink > (undo temp. detection by TM2710 first.) (To stop the ink circulation, activate Test Mode No. 2431)
2431 Nozzle Low Negative Pressure
Stops Test Mode No. 2428.
2436 Wiping Action
Executes wiping operations.
2437 Ink Pan Pause Position
Moves the ink pan to the ink draining position.
2438 Ink Pan Storage Position
Retracts the ink pan, away from the BP Belt.
2439 Ink Pan On-Belt Position
Moves the ink pan to on top of the BP Belt.
2440 Head Gap Normal Paper Position
Moves to the regular paper position in head gap adjustment.
2441 Head Gap Card Paper Position
Moves to the card (heavyweight) position in head gap adjustment.
2442 Head Gap Envelope Paper Position 1
Moves to the envelope position 1 in head gap adjustment.
2443 Head Gap Envelope Paper Position 2
Moves to the envelope position 2 in head gap adjustment.
2451 Authorization Cam Motor HP
Moves the authorization cam motor to the origin (home position).
2452 Ink Circulation Action
Circulates the ink for the time set by Test Mode No.2759.
This test mode is equivalent to the following set of three Test Modes [271 0 + 2428 + 2431] , which were used for the ink
circulation before this Test Mode became available.
<Commonly used Test Mode, especially at the time of machine installation or after filling empty Pressurized and/or Negative
Ink Tanks with ink to remove air bubbles from the Ink Flow System.>
2461 L & R CIS Shading Compensation
Executes automatic shading compensation for the left and right CIS.
2462 Left CIS Shading Compensation
Executes automatic shading compensation for the left CIS.
2463 Right CIS Shading Compensation
Executes automatic shading compensation for the right CIS.
2464 CIS Operation Check
Automatically acquires paper edge information and AD values.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-22 ]
Test Modes

2471 K-MD Recovery Action
Makes solid BLACK color prints and does Normal head cleaning for the number of times set by Test Mode No.2749, and then
makes the final result print in the quantity set by Test Mode No.2748. < 330 mm wide papers are needed.>
2472 C-MD Recovery Action
Same as Test Mode No.02471 , for CYAN Ink.
2473 M-MD Recovery Action
Same as Test Mode No.02471 , for MAGENTA Ink.
2474 Y-MD Recovery Action
Same as Test Mode No.02471 , for YELLOW Ink.
2476 K-MD Recovery
Purges all the print heads, and drives the BLACK print heads.
2477 C-MD Recovery
Purges all the print heads, and drives the CYAN print heads.
2478 M-MD Recovery
Purges all the print heads, and drives the MAGENTA print heads.
2479 Y-MD Recovery
Purges all the print heads, and drives the YELLOW print heads.
2480 Pressurized Ink Tank Air Valve Open
Opens the pressurized ink tank air valve and then closes the valve after 500 ms.
2481 Negative Pressurized Ink Tank Air Valve Open
Closes the negative ink tank air valve and then opens it after 500 ms.
2482 K-Ink Supply Valve Open
Opens the K-ink supply valve and then closes it after 500ms.
2483 C-Ink Supply Valve Open
Opens the C-ink supply valve and then closes it after 500ms.
2484 M-Ink Supply Valve Open
Opens the M-ink supply valve and then closes it after 500ms.
2485 Y-Ink Supply Valve Open
Opens the Y-ink supply valve and then closes it after 500ms.
2486 K-Pump Motor Action
Activates K ink pump and deactivates automatically in 100ms.
2487 C-Pump Motor Action
Activates C ink pump and deactivates automatically in 100ms.
2488 M-Pump Motor Action
Activates M ink pump and deactivates automatically in 100ms.
2489 Y-Pump Motor Action
Activates Y ink pump and deactivates automatically in 100ms.
2490 Ink Heater 24V Action
Activates 24V heater and deactivates automatically in 30 sec.
2491 Ink Heater 30V Action
Activates 30V heater and deactivates automatically in 30 sec.
[ 16-23 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

3400 AS Side Fence HP Position
Moves the AS side paper guide for paper ejection to the home position.
3401 AS Side Fence Custom Position
Moves the AS side paper guide for paper ejection to the specified position (test mode 03700).
3402 AS End Fence HP Position
Moves the AS end paper guide for paper ejection to the home position.
3403 AS End Fence Custom Position
Moves the AS end paper guide for paper ejection to the specified position (test mode 03701).
3404 AS Fence 1 Cycle Action
Moves the AS paper guide for one cycle.
1. Restores the side paper guide to the home position.
2. Restores the end paper guide to the home position.
3. Moves the side paper guide to the "minimum" position.
4. Moves the side paper guide to the "maximum" position.
5. Restores the side paper guide to the home position.
6. Moves the end paper guide to the "minimum" position.
7. Moves the end paper guide to the "maximum" position.
8. Restores the end paper guide to the home position.

8400 MC Final Registering
Switches the unit registration status from "temporarily registered" to "officially registered."
Functions only when there are machine code RFID tags and the machine is temporarily registered.
8401 Machine Card Data Input
Writes the machine serial number onto the new Machine Control Card.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-24 ]
Test Modes
Initialization (I) ComColor Unit (0001-0999)

502 Test Mode Clear (All)
Restores default values (Factory Default) for test modes that can be set by service technicians and are stored on the PMS
(controller hard disk) and engine control PCB.
Values stored on scanners or multi-finishers are not cleared.
Executes the same processing as 00505 (sets the "next startup flag" for the installation wizard).
This test mode is removed from the test mode menu list on the touch panel.
The test mode number must be input manually by the serviceman.
503 Factory Default
Delete or put back to default of set value and all data except the firmware.
This is equivalent of following initialization processes.
1. Factory default in Initialization function
2. Delete all user information in Initialization function
3. Run Test mode No. 0505 [Set Up Wizard Initialize]
504 HDD Initialize
Resets the PMS (controller) to the original state as shipped (initializes the hard disk to the Factory default). Only the machine
firmware stays upgraded to the version before activating this test mode.
The HDD initialization includes erasing of all the customer (Admin.) settings.
Keep this in mind when this test mode is to be activated.
Since this test mode initializes the HDD, use caution in applying this test mode.
It is recommended to retrieve the customer (Admin.) settings by Test Mode No. 460 before initializing the HDD, and reload the
retrieved settings by Test Mode No. 461 after the HDD is initialized.
Refer to the instruction on these two test modes on this chapter for the details before activating the test mode.
505 Set Up Wizard Initialize
After this test mode is executed, the first time the printer is started, the series of operations for initial settings after delivery is
displayed again.
507 Error Clear (All)
Forces all errors system-wide (PMS, engine, and scanner) to be cleared.
508 Error Clear (PMS)
Forces errors affecting the PMS (controller) to be cleared.
509 Error History Clear
Clears the error history, which are shown by Test Modes 00630 and 00631.
510 Exchange HDD Initialize
This test mode is to be activated after the HDD is replaced or when Test Mode No. 504 is applied
This test mode initialize the Hard Disk to the machine destination region and this test mode must be used after the Hard Disk
is replaced or after Test Mode No. 504 is applied on the HDD.
< Refer to the HDD replacement procedure in the Technical Manual.>
When applying this test mode on the existing HDD on the machine, Test Mode No. 504 must be activated prior to this test
mode.
When replacing the existing HDD with a brand new HDD from a spare part stock, test mode equivalent to Test Mode No. 504
is already applied on the spare part HDD, so this Test Mode No. 510 can be executed without Test Mode No. 504 on the spare
part HDD.
[ 16-25 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Initialization (I) ComColor Unit (Series 1000)

1502 Test Mode Clear (Engine)
Restores default values for test modes that can be set by service technicians and are stored on the engine control PCB.
Values stored on multi-finishers are not cleared.
See information under 01502 Executed in the Initialization column under Clearing Setting Values, in "Data Editing Test Mode
Setting Values" at the end of the test mode.
1530 Error Clear (Engine)
Forces errors occurring in the engine to be cleared.
1532 Recovery Information Clear
Clears the recovery movement control data. Power OFF and ON after applying this test mode.
1533 Bellows Arm Fix Position Error Clear
This Test Mode clears the S35-2057 (Bellows Arm Fix Position Error) display.
Check for any ink overflow when S35-2057 error displays.
Going further without checking and correcting the overflow, if existing, will indicate ink overflow error message and may also
cause the ink colors to mix on next machine power ON.
Machine power, after executing this test mode, must be turned OFF and then ON to clear this error message. Test Mode
[No.507 Error Clear (ALL)] will not clear S35-2057 error message.
1534 Ink Detection Error Clear
Temporary clears the following S35 Ink Supply Unit Error display.
S35-2079-1 to S35-2079-4, S36-2080-1 to S36-2080-4,
S35-2081-1 to S35-2081- 2, S35-2082-1 to S35-2082-2,
S35-2083-1 to S35-2083-2, S35-2084-1 to S35-2084-2.
In need to display the error message again after activating this Test Mode to clear the error message, simply switch OFF and
then switch the machine power back ON.
This test mode only clears the above error messages temporary and may allow continued machine operation, such as initial
ink filling, etc. and the errors listed above may be solved by the action taken by the machine after the execution of this test
mode.
If above listed error message repeats continuously even after execution of this test mode, troubleshooting on the machine is
required.
1540 Belt Stretch Compensation Data Initialize
Initializes the belt stretch compensation data A, B and C to 0.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-26 ]
Test Modes
Data Monitoring (C) ComColor Unit (0001-0999)

No. Process Name Confirmation Items/Description
Range: 000000000000–999999999999
600 Snall Package Data Version
Example: Ver. 123.456.789.123 is indicated as 123456789123.
601 Engine Package Data Version Same as 00600
602 PMS Firmware Version Same as 00600
603 Panel Firmware Version Same as 00600
604 SH2A Firmware Version (Engine) Same as 00600
605 DSP Firmware Version (Engine) Same as 00600
606 Scanner Firmware Version Same as 00600
Range: 000000000000–999999999999
607 AF Firmware Version
608 FPGA Version Range: 000–255, Displays the FPGA version.
609 Engine Control PCB Version Range: 000–255, Displays the Engine Control PCB version.
610 OR2IP PCB Version Range: 000–255, Displays the OR2IP PCB version.
611 Head Drive PCB (K/C) Version Range: 000–255, Displays the Head Drive PCB (K/C) version
612 Option PCB Version Range: 000–255, Displays the Option PCB version
Range: 000000000000–999999999999
613 DSP Loader Version (Engine)
614 SH2A Loader Version (Engine) Same as 00613
615 TAG Control Firmware Version (Engine) Same as 00613
616 TAG Control Loader Version (Engine) Same as 00613
617 Interface Specification Revision Same as 00613
618 SH2A Boot Program Version (Engine) Same as 00613
619 FPGA Data (Normal) Version (Engine) Same as 00613
620 FPGA Data (Recovery) Version (Engine) Same as 00613
621 Multi-Finisher Firmware Version (Engine)
Same as 00613
Range: 000000000000–999999999999
622 Remote Communication Module Version This test mode can only be executed when test mode 00740 is enabled.
Display in the menu and input using the numeric keypad are only possible
when enabled.
623 Head Drive PCB (M/Y) Version Range: 000–255, Displays the Head Drive PCB (M/Y) version
Range: 000000000000–999999999999
Displays the remote admin server URL http://risoremote.com/jp
628 RISO Remote Server
This test mode can only be executed when test mode 00740 is enabled.
when enabled.
Displays the version number of the Optional RISO Security Package
firmware version.
For an example, version number 123.456.789.123 will indicate as
629 Security Firmware Version
123456789123.
When the optional RISO Security package is not installed, the version
number will show as 0.0.0.0
Some image parameter may be missing when [1] is displayed.
Head Replacement Operation
640 Contact RISO group of companies when [1] is displayed. [0] should be
Confirmation
displayed in normal case.
This test mode will extract error log (S type, U type, X type, Z type, W type, I
type and Y type) that occured till now in normal mode, and can be display or
print.
641 Error History Display Maximum error log for the display/Print: 64 (Maximum 1000 from newest
error log can be stored)
Display items: Error occurred date, Error number, Error Type
Print items: Error occurred date, Error number, Error Type, Total count Value
Displays HDD access speed when perform [Hdparam -ft/dev/sda] command.
643 HDD Access Speed Check
May have a measurement error on the result.
[ 16-27 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Range: 00000000–99999999
Displays the Value of detailed count 1
650 * The master is the count Value stored on the engine. This is used for
recovery if there are problems with the engine.
The same applies to all test modes from 00650 to 00690.
651 Displays the Value of detailed count 2
658 Count Display (PMS) Displays the Value of detailed count 9
Maintenance Count / Paper Feed Tray
671 Displays the Value of the paper feed tray
(PMS)
Maintenance Count / HIGH CAPACITY
672 Displays the Value of the High Capacity Feeder
FEEDER (PMS)
673 Maintenance Count / Tray 1 (PMS) Displays the Value of tray 1
Maintenance Count / Switchback Unit
676 Displays the Value of the switchback unit
(PMS)
Maintenance Count / Face Down
677 Displays the Value of face down paper ejection
Ejection (PMS)
Maintenance Count / Face Up Ejection
678 Displays the Value of face up paper ejection
(PMS)
679 Range: 00000000–99999999, Displays the Value of finisher count 1
680 Displays the Value of finisher count 2
Finisher Count Display (PMS)
687 Extra Cleaning Count Display (PMS) Displays the Value of extra cleaning
688 Strong Cleaning Count Display (PMS) Displays the Value of strong cleaning
689 Normal Cleaning Count Display (PMS) Displays the Value of normal cleaning
690 Total Count Display (PMS) Displays the Value of the total count
History data monitoring
Displays the Year/Month/Date/Time of the automatic HDD recovery (restore).
691 HDD Automatic Recovery History NOTE: The date displayed here is when the machine automatically detects
the broken database during the machine booting and the automatic recovery
is completed.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-28 ]
Test Modes

0-9,999,999
692 Mail Maker Count Display (PMS)
Displays the Value of Mail Maker count (Number of creating mail)
Does not apply on your machine.
695 Coin Vendor Firmware Version
<Coin Vendor is an optional item available for Japanese market only.>
Does not apply on your machine.
696 Card Vendor Firmware Version
<Card Vendor is an optional item available for Japanese market only.>
Data Monitoring (C) ComColor Unit (Series 1000)

0–255
Produces the reference paper level for the left CIS, as acquired through
1604 Left CIS Standard Paper
shading compensation for the left and right CIS (02461) and shading
compensation for the left CIS (02462).
0–255
Produces the reference paper level for the left CIS, as acquired through
1605 Right CIS Standard Paper
shading compensation for the left and right CIS (02461) and shading
compensation for the right CIS (02463).
0–1728
1606 Left CIS Edge Detection Produces the left CIS paper edge position, as acquired through checking
CIS operation (02464).
0–1728
1607 Right CIS Edge Detection Produces the right CIS paper edge position, as acquired through checking
CIS operation (02464).
0–350mm
1608 CIS Paper Width Detection Produces the paper width, as acquired through checking CIS operation
(02464).
0–150%
1609 Left CIS Paper Level Produces the left CIS paper level, as acquired through checking CIS
operation (02464).
0–150%
1610 Right CIS Paper Level Produces the right CIS paper level, as acquired through checking CIS
operation (02464).
0–150%
1611 Left CIS Belt Level Produces the left CIS belt level, as acquired through checking CIS operation
(02464).
0–150%
1612 Right CIS Belt Level Produces the right CIS belt level, as acquired through checking CIS
operation (02464).
0–255
1613 Left CIS Minimum Required Energy
Displays the minimum required energy for the Left (rear) CIS.
0–255
1614 Right CIS Minimum Required Energy
Displays the minimum required energy for the Right (front) CIS.
0–255
1615 Left CIS Offset Voltage (Iitial) Displays the voltage Value of the Left (rear) CIS after the shading
compensation.
0–255
1616 Left CIS Offset Voltage (Adjusted)
Displays the voltage Value of the Left (rear) CIS after the printing.
0–255
1617 Right CIS Offset Voltage (Iitial) Displays the voltage Value of the Right (front) CIS after the shading
compensation.
0–255
1618 Right CIS Offset Voltage (Adjusted)
Displays the voltage Value of the Left (rear) CIS after the printing.
1620 Paper Feed Tray Width AD Value Numerical Value displayed, Displays the AD Value of the paper feed tray.
Paper Feed Tray Paper Volume 0: Undefined, 1: 0%, 2: 1-10%, 3: 10-30%, 4: 30-50%, 5: 50-100%
1621
(External Paper Feed Tray) Displays amount of paper left in the paper feed tray (%).
1622 Tray 1 Paper Volume
0: Undefined, 1: 0%, 2: 1-50%, 3: 50-100%
If the amount cannot be detected, 0 is displayed.
[ 16-29 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

0-24, 51, 52
1625 Paper Feed Tray Paper Size I.D. Displays the paper ID detected by the mechanism (the Value as detected by
the sensor).
1626 Tray 1 Paper Size I.D. 0, 2-7 , 17-19
1627 Tray 2 Paper Size I.D. Displays the paper ID detected by the mechanism (the Value as detected by
1628 Tray 3 Paper Size I.D. the sensor).
0: No size, 1: A3, 2: A4, 3: A4 Landscape, 4: A5, 5: A5 Landscape, 6: A6, 7: A6 Landscape, 8: B4, 9: B5, 10: B5
Landscape, 11: B6, 12: B6 Landscape
1625 13: Foolscap, 14: Ledger, 15: Legal, 16: Letter, 17 : Letter-R, 18: Statement, 19: Statement-R, 20: A3W,
-1628 21: Post Card, 22: Kaku 0, 23: Kaku 1, 24: Kaku 2, 25: Kaku 3, 26: Naga 3, 27: Naga 4, 28: C4, 29: C5, 30: C6, 31: DL-R,
32: Envelope 9x12 inch, 33: Envelope 10x13 inch, 34: No.10 Envelope 4.125x9.5 inch, 51: Irregular size S,
52: Irregular size L, 53: Unknown , 54: Auto , 100-104: User-defined paper sizes 1-5
Numerical Value displayed , Displays the intensity of light for the registration
1629 Registration Sensor Emit Value Display
sensor.
800-3400
Paper Feed Tray Width Detection Check
1630 Displays the measurement of the paper feed tray paper width potentiometer,
(External Paper Feed)
in 0.1 mm increments.
Numerical Value displayed , Displays the intensity of light for top edge
1640 TOP Edge Sensor 1 Emit Value Display
sensor 1.
Numerical Value displayed , Displays the intensity of light for top edge
1641 TOP Edge Sensor 2 Emit Value Display
sensor 2.
TOP Edge Sensor 2 Peak Emit Value Numerical Value displayed , Displays the final peak light intensity for top
1642
Display edge sensor 2, as acquired in 01495.
Turns the belt platen and displays the speed. (mm/s)
1643 Transfer Belt Speed
The speed conforms to the setting Value of 01865.
Range: 00000000–99999999
1650 Count Display 1 (Engine)
Displays the Value of detailed count 1 in the engine.
1651 Count Display 2 (Engine) Displays the Value of detailed count 2 in the engine.
Maintenance Count External Paper Range: 00000000–99999999
1671
Feed Tray (Engine) Displays the Value of the paper feed tray.
1672 Maintenance Count HCF (Engine) Displays the Value of High Capacity Feeder.
1673 Maintenance Count Tray-1 (Engine) Displays the Value of tray 1.
Maintenance Count Switcback Unit
1676 Displays the Value of the switchback section.
(Engine)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-30 ]
Test Modes

Maintenance Count FD Ejection
1677 Displays the Value of face down paper ejection.
(Engine)
Maintenance Count FU Ejection
1678 Displays the Value of face up paper ejection.
(Engine)
1679 Finisher Count Display 1 (Engine) Displays the Value of finisher count 1.
1687 Extra Cleaning Count Display (Engine) Displays the Value of the cleaning count (extra).
1688 Strong Cleaning Count Display (Engine) Displays the Value of the cleaning count (strong).
Normal Cleaning Count Display
1689 Displays the Value of the cleaning count (normal).
(Engine)
1690 Total Count Display (Engine) Displays the Value of the total count.
1691 Perfect Binder Count 1 (Engine) Displays the Value of Perfect Binder count 1 (Number of bookbinding)
1692 Perfect Binder Count 2 (Engine) Displays the Value of Perfect Binder count 2 (Number of cutting cover page)
Displays the Value of Perfect Binder count 3 (Number of glue supply
1693 Perfect Binder Count 3 (Engine)
operation)
1694 Mail Maker Count (Engine) Displays the Value of Mail Maker count (Number of creating mail)
Test mode parameters printed by Test Mode No. 00410.
Displays the test mode parameters printed by test mode No.00410. The
1695 Test Mode Configuration Print 2 Display
items to display are the Test Mode No. , Process Name, and the Parameter
Setting.
1696 Option PCB Firmware version Displays the Value of Option PCB micro processor (78KO) firmware version.

Displays the temperature around the head acquired from the thermistor
2604 Head Area Temperature K/C
connected to KC head control PCB 1. (ºC)
Displays the temperature around the head acquired from the thermistor
2605 Head Area Temperature M/Y
connected to MY head control PCB 2. (ºC)
Displays the head temperature for the 48 nozzle rows. Black, cyan,
magenta, and yellow nozzle rows are separated by a space. 2Cycle: 2
2606 Head Temperature
seconds. 999 is displayed if a thermistor is not connected, or if abnormal
temperature is detected. (ºC)
Displays the head voltage for the 48 nozzle rows. Black, cyan, magenta,
2607 Head Voltage and yellow nozzle rows are separated by a space. 2Cycle: 2 seconds. 999 is
displayed if abnormal voltage is detected. (V)
Belt 1- Rotation Encoder Count (Iitial Range: 00000000–99999999
2640
Value) Displays Iitial Value of the encoder count of BP Belt for one belt rotation.
Belt 1- Rotation Encoder Count Displays Acquisition Value of the encoder count of BP Belt for one belt
2641
(Acquisition Value) rotation.
Belt 1- Rotation Encoder Count Displays Acquisition Value A of the encoder count of BP Belt for one belt
2642
(Acquisition Value A) rotation.
Belt 1- Rotation Encoder Count Displays Acquisition Value B of the encoder count of BP Belt for one belt
2643
(Acquisition Value B) rotation.
Belt 1- Rotation Encoder Count Displays Acquisition Value C of the encoder count of BP Belt for one belt
2644
(Acquisition Value C) rotation.
2646 Belt Maintenance Count Display Displays the belt maintenance count.
Displays the number of times the MD recovery action was done on the
2673 MD Recovery Count Display
machine.
[ 16-31 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

8611 Ink Volume Display C Displays cyan ink remaining amount as detected by the Tag.
8612 Ink Volume Display M Displays magenta ink remaining amount as detected by the Tag.
8613 Ink Volume Display Y Displays yellow ink remaining amount as detected by the Tag.
8614 Ink Volume Display K Displays black ink remaining amount as detected by the Tag.
0: Temporary registration (when Iitially delivered)
8620 Machine Registration Condition
1: Officially registered
0: No such model, 1- 255: Model ID
8624 Machine Operation ID
Displays the machine operation ID.
0: Temporary registration, 1: Registered
8628 Machine Card Condution
Displays the registration status of the machine control card.
8629 Machine ID
Displays the machine ID
8630 Machine Action ID
Displays the machine action ID.
8631 Tag Serial 1 Left 4 digits (temporary) 0000 - 9999, Displays the serial number
8632 Tag Serial 1 Right 4 digits (temporary) 0000 - 9999, Displays the serial number
8641 Tag Serial 1 Left 4 digits (final) 0000 - 9999, Displays the serial number
8642 Tag Serial 1 Right 4 digits (final) 0000 - 9999, Displays the serial number
8655 Temporary Operation Time- MC 00000000 - 99999999, Displays the time.
8656 Temporary Operation Time - CD1 00000000 - 99999999, Displays the time.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-32 ]
Test Modes
Data Editing (D) ComColor Unit (0001-0999)

No. Process Name Default Unit/Range Description
0: Level 0
Sets the detail level of the log information kept in the
707 Log Output Level Setting 1 1: Level 1
Controller.
2: Level 2
1: GMT -1 2:00, 2: GMT -11 -11:00, 3: GMT -1 0:00, 4: GMT -09:00, 5: GMT
-08:00, 6: GMT -07:00, 7: GMT -06:00, 8: GMT -05:00, 9: GMT -04:00, 10:
GMT -03: 30, 1111: GMT -03:00, 12: GMT -02:00, 13: GMT -01:00, 14: GMT
14:
(Greenwich Mean Time: London), 15: GMT +01:00, 16: GMT +02:00, 17 :
(Overseas)
708 GMT Time Zone Selection GMT +03:00, 18: GMT +03: 30, 19: GMT +04:00, 20: GMT +04: 30, 21: GMT
27:
+05:00, 22: GMT +05: 30, 23: GMT +05: 45, 24: GMT +06:00, 25: GMT +06:
(China)
30, 26: GMT +07:00, 27: GMT +08:00, 28: GMT +09:00 (Tokyo, Seoul), 29:
GMT +09: 30, 30: GMT +10:00, 31: GMT +1111:00, 32: GMT +12:00, 33: GMT
+13:00
0: No display
Auto Shut Off Display
709 1 1: Display (Auto shut off setting)
Selection
2: Display (Transition tTime only)
0: OFF
Specifies whether to enable the standard MIB for SNMP
710 SNMP Com Set (Standard) 1 1: Read only
communication.
2: Read/Write
0: OFF
Specifies whether to enable the private MIB for SNMP
711 SNMP Com Set (Private) 1 1: Read only
communication.
2: Read/Write
Adjust time period for PMS recognize the USB memory after
insert the USB memory device (seconds).
USB Memory Detection
712 1 0-15seconds 0 means No waiting time
Waiting Time
Note: Setting shorter time may occur USB memory not
recognized.
Changing this setting switches the character encoding used
when downloading (including exporting) or importing in CSV
format.
0: Unicode (UTF-
Functions that use CSV format:
715 CSV File Encode Set 0 8)
• Accounting information
1: Windows-31J
• User setting information
• Job charge count
• Detailed counts, and other functions
Enter the key code to enable IC card options. When the
716 IC Card Key Code 1 Set 0000 0000–9999 12-digit key code is XXXX-YYYY-ZZZZ, enter the four digits
XXXX.
YYYY.
ZZZZ.
Set maximum enclosed number in the Mail Maker product.
This setting value will be reflected in the operation panel
Mail Maker Maximum
719 6 6-15 sheet (need to connect the Mail Maker product to the printer).
Enclosed Number Setting
Caution: There is risk to make mechanical damage by
setting value exceed the specification.
Cleaning Cycle Minimum 0: 500 - 3000 This test mode relates to the Cleaning Cycle setting by the
720 0
Quantity 1: 100 - 3000 user Admin. mode.
Specifies whether to enable rev. functions.
0: Disable This menu is not shown in the menu list, and the options
721 REV Function ON/OFF 0
1: Enable are only executed by entry with the numerical keypad. (The
menu name is hidden.)
[ 16-33 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

For rev. event selection.
0: Normal: Events are generated when the printer is turned
ON, when errors occur, and when manual events are
configured.
1: Extended: Events are generated when the printer is
0: Normal
722 REV Event Extension Set 0 turned ON, when errors occur, when manual events are
1: Extended
configured, and when printing starts.
This test mode can only be executed when test mode 00721
is enabled.
Display in the menu and input using the numeric keypad are
only possible when enabled.
When the four-digit event code is specified, a manual event
is issued.
723 Manual Event Code 1 Set 0000 0000–9999
is enabled.
is issued.
is enabled.
is issued.
This test mode can only executed when test mode 00721 is
enabled.
0: Prohibited
726 USB Port Enable 0 Specifies whether USB ports can be used.
1: Permitted
Specifies whether an external CI (PS controller) is
connected.
0: Not connected 0: Not connected: Functions involving a PS controller are
727 Exterior Controller Selection 0
1: Connected not available.
1: Connected: Functions involving a PS controller are
available.
Specifies whether a scanner is connected.
0: Not connected 0: Not connected: Copy and scanner mode are not
1: Connected available. (Even if a scanner is connected, functions
Scanner Connection
728 0 (Copy & Scan) involving the scanner are not shown, no communication
Selection
2: Connected occurs, and no errors involving the scanner are shown.)
(Copy) 1: Connected: Copy and scanner modes are available.
2: Connected: Copy mode is available.
Supply Stock Display 0: Not shown Specifies whether the "Supply Stock Control" item in the
729 0
Setting 1: Shown administrator settings is shown.
When choose 0:
Mono color (Cyan or Magenta) print will be count as a mono
color.
Mono color print can be performed, even though [Full color
Mono Color Print Limitation 0: Mono Color print prohibited] was chosen by the user.
730 1
Selection 1: Full Color When choose 1:
Mono color (Cyan or Magenta) print will be count as a full
color.
If [Full color print prohibited] was chosen by the user, can
not perform the mono color print.
0: UTF-8 Selection of the Encoding method.
encoding. Use [0] setting in normal condition.
731 Mail Header Encode 0
1: No UTF-8 Use [1] setting only when the sender name and receiver
encoding name do not show properly. Otherwise use [0] setting.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-34 ]
Test Modes

0:
Keep the setting to the default [0] setting.
UTF-8 encoding.
Problem may occur on the attached file to the e-mail when
732 Mail File Encode 0 1:
setting [1] is selected. Setting [1] applies only in very rare
No UTF-8
application.
encoding
Use the L (light) paper settings on the operational panel, or
not.
Light Weight Paper 0: Prohibited 0: Prohibited: Cannot select L-paper on the paper selection
733 0
Limitation Selection 1: Permitted menu.
1: Permitted: Can select L-paper on the paper selection
menu.
Display the box function menu on the operational panel, or
1: not.
(Overseas) 0: Prohibited 0: Prohibited: No Box Function display. All settings in the
734 Box Function Display
0: 1: Permitted Box Function will be invalid.
(China) 1: Permitted: Box Function displays.
(No Process name shows on the display)
0: Not charge money: The PC print job will not be charged
0: Not charge
in External print limitation equipment.
735 Count Control: CARTADIS 0 money
1: Charge money: The PC print job will be charged in
1: Charge money
External print limitation equipment.
Specifies whether to enable remote agent functions.
Remote Control Function 0: Disable This menu is not shown in the menu list, and the options
740 0
Setting 1: Enable are only executed by entry with the numerical keypad. (The
menu name is hidden.)
Remote Agent Functions
Specifies whether count information is transmitted.
* Activating 00740 restores the default printer values.
0: Disable
741 Count Information 0 This test mode can only be executed when test mode 00740
1: Enable
is enabled.
When 00741 is ON, this test mode specifies the time (what
hour) when count information is transmitted.
* The information is sent at the time indicated by the
Count Information
742 Midnight 0–23 combination of this setting and 00743, which indicates the
Transmission Time (HOUR)
minute portion of the time.
This test mode can only be executed when 00740 and
00741 are both enabled. Display in the menu and input
using the numeric keypad are only possible when enabled.
When 00741 is ON, this test mode specifies the time (what
minute) when count information is transmitted.
Count Information * The information is sent at the time indicated by the
743 Transmission Time 0 0–59 combination of this setting and 00742, which indicates the
(MINUTES) hour portion of the time.
This test mode can only be executed when 00740 and
00741 are both enabled. Display in the menu and input
using the numeric keypad are only possible when enabled.
Specifies whether ink level information is transmitted when
errors occur because ink ran out.
* Activating 00740 (enable/disable remote functions)
0: Disable
744 Ink Volume Information 0 restores the default printer values.
1: Enable
is enabled.
[ 16-35 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Specifies whether rev. information (error information and
log) is transmitted.
* Activating 00740 (enable/disable remote functions)
0: Disable
745 Error History Information 0 restores the default printer values.
1: Enable
is enabled.
Specifies the connection time (time until time-out) for the
communication line between the printer (online transmission
module) and the admin server, from the moment
Communication Timeout
747 1 1–9min. communication is established with the admin server.
(MINUTES)
is enabled.
Specifies notes to include when printer information is sent to the admin server.
Enter up to 60 single-byte letters or numbers. Can also be left blank.
748 Transmission Comment Blank
This test mode can only be executed when test mode 00740 is enabled.
when enabled.
Specifies whether U1 is shown as an option in "Paper feed"
Paper Feed Setting (U1) 0: Not shown
750 0 for feed trays.
Display 1: Shown
* The details of U1 paper feed are set in 09700–09745.
Display 1: Shown
Display 1: Shown
Display 1: Shown
Display 1: Shown
0: OFF
0: OFF
1: ON (Type A) Specifies whether job charge count information is shown in
(customer-
2: ON (Type B) the administrator settings.
owned
3: ON (Type C) OFF: Job charge count information is not displayed, and it
units)
756 Count Charge Setting 4: ON (Type D) cannot be printed or saved to a USB memory device.
2: ON
5: ON (Type E) ON: Job charge count information for the specified type is
(overseas
6: ON (Type F) displayed and can be printed or saved to a USB memory
leased
7: ON (Type G) device.
units)
8: ON (Type H)
Test Mode to input the Key Code to activate the optional
RISO Security Package.
0000 to 9999 This Test Mode is for the first set of 4-digit key numbers,
(Step = 1) shown as XXXX on the left column.
Security Package Key Code
760 0000 Correct key code must be input by Test Modes No.760, 761,
1
XXXX-YYYY- and 762 before activating Test Mode No.490 to install the
ZZZZ security package.
Error message W87-6015 will display if incorrect key code
is typed in on these three test modes.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-36 ]
Test Modes

0000 to 9999 Test Mode to input the Key Code to activate the optional
(Step = 1) RISO Security Package.
761 0000 This Test Mode is for the second set of 4-digit key numbers,
2
XXXX-YYYY- shown as YYYY on the left column.
ZZZZ Refer to the above Test Mode No. 760 for further details.
0000 to 9999 Test Mode to input the Key Code to activate the optional
(Step = 1) RISO Security Package.
762 0000 This Test Mode is for the third set of 4-digit key numbers,
3
XXXX-YYYY- shown as ZZZZ on the left column.
ZZZZ Refer to the above Test Mode No. 760 for further details.
1:
0: Disable: Archive storage function disabled.
Store Archive Selection (Overseas) 0: Disable
770 1: Enable: Archive storage function enabled.
0: 1: Enable
(China)
Selection to display or not display the TECH ACCESS
0: Not Display BUTTON on the Admin. menu.
780 Tech Access Button Display 0
1: Display This test mode is used only when installing the optional
RISO Security Package software in the machine.
Selection of the network connection.
0: AUTO, 1: 10Mbps Full Duplex, 2: 10Mbps Half Duplex 3: 100Mbps Full
782 Network Link Mode 0
Duplex,
4: 100Mbps Half Duplex, 5: 1Gbps Full Duplex
0: Permitted: Enable to use the FTP port..
1: Prohibited: Disable to use the FTP port. (PC print through
0: Permitted
783 Disable FTP Port 0 the FTP port, Color calibration through the FTP port,
1: Prohibited
Acquisition of account information through the FTP port,
except transmit scan file to the FTP server.)
0: Prohibited: Current IC Card authentication system
enabled. Use TM716-718 for settings.
Card Authentication (Felica 0: Prohibited
785 0 1: Permitted: Felica IC Card authentication only enabled.
Card) 1: Permitted
Current IC Card authentication system disabled.
Handling of non authentication job.
0: Prohibited: Adapt user authentication for the non
Unauthenticated Job 0: Prohibited authentication job.
786 0
Permission 1: Permitted 1: Permitted: Non authentication job can be printed without
user authentication.
0: Not display: [Envelope Feed Setting] menu does not
0: Not Display show on the Administration Setting menu.
790 Envelope Display Set 1
1: Display 1: Display: [Envelope Feed Setting] menu shows on the
Administration Setting menu.
0: Not display: Paper Feed Control in the [Envelope Feed
Setting] menu does not show on the Administration Setting
0: Not Display
791 Paper Feed Control Display 1 menu.
1: Display
1: Display: Paper Feed Control in the [Envelope Feed
Setting] menu shows on the Administration Setting menu.
0: Not display: Ink Drop Control in the [Envelope Feed
Setting] menu does not show on the Administration Setting
0: Not Display
792 Ink Drop Control Display 1 menu.
1: Display
1: Display: Ink Drop Control in the [Envelope Feed Setting]
menu shows on the Administration Setting menu.
Rev Transmission Size Set data file size of the REv transmission.
799 20 1-199
Setting (No Process name shows on the display)
[ 16-37 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Data Editing (D) ComColor Unit (Series 1000)

Registration Sensor Paper
Specifies the adjustment value for jams before the
1743 Non-Arrival Jam Detection 0 (-100 - 100)ms
registration sensor.
Timing
Registration Sensor Paper Specifies the adjustment value for jams at the registration
1744 0 (-100 - 100)ms
Jam Detection Timing sensor.
1745 Re-Feed Assist Start Timing (-6) (-20 - 0)mm/s Specifies the re-feed assist start timing.
Re-Feed Assist Speed
1746 30 (-300 - 300)mm/s Specifies the re-feed assist feed speed.
Adjustment
Re-Feed Assist Stop
1747 5 (-20 - 20)mm/s Specifies the timing when re-feed assist ends.
Distance
Re-Feed Low Speed Specifies the re-feed distance for the low speed re-feed
1748 12 0-20mm/s
Distance Setting zone.
Re-Feed Low Speed Speed
1749 0 (-300 - 300)% Specifies the re-feed low-speed zone speed.
Adjustment
Vertical Paper Feed Clutch
1753 0 (-100 - 100)ms Specifies the Vertical paper feed clutch 1 ON timing.
1 ON-Timing
Vertical Paper Feed Clutch
1754 0 (-100 - 100)ms Specifies the Vertical paper feed clutch 2 ON timing.
2 ON-Timing
Vertical Paper Feed Start
1755 0 (-100 - 100)ms Specifies the Vertical paper feed ON timing.
Timing
Vertical P-Feed Sensor
Specifies the adjustment value for jams before vertical
1757 1 Paper Non-Arrival Jam 0 (-100 - 100)ms
paper feed sensor 1.
Detection Timing
Detection Timing
Detection Timing
Detection Timing
Detection Timing
Vertical P-Feed Sensor 1 Specifies the adjustment value for jams at vertical paper
1762 0 (-100 - 100)ms
P-Jam Detection Timing feed sensor 1.
1763 0 (-100 - 100)ms
1764 0 (-100 - 100)ms
1765 0 (-100 - 100)ms
1766 0 (-100 - 100)ms
Tray 1 Long-Paper Assist Specifies the assist feed speed ratio when feeding long
1767 (-5) (-50 - 50)
Feed Speed paper from Tray-1. (1=0.1%)
Tray 1 Short-Paper Assist Specifies the assist feed speed ratio when feeding short
1769 (-5) (-50 - 50)
1771 (-5) (-50 - 50)
1773 (-5) (-50 - 50)
1774 (-5) (-50 - 50)
1775 (-5) (-50 - 50)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-38 ]
Test Modes

Specifies the light intensity for the registration sensor.
1776 Registration Sensor Setting 128 0–255 The higher the value, the brighter the light intensity.
This value is not subject to clearing by a test mode.
Sets the tray descend duration for internal paper feed trays
1,2 and 3.
1780 Tray Descend Duration 20 (2 sec) 0-40 (4 sec)
3 sec. is maximum, so input of over 30 = 30 (3 sec).
Input of 0 = no tray movement.
Selection of slow (default) speed or high speed in switching
0: Switches to to another paper feed tray.
another paper [Refer to the <Tray Selection Per Page function> of the
feed tray in slow IS900C Controller.]
speed. Internal trays 1, 2 or 3 must not be pulled out when the
1781 Tray Shift Time Set 0
1: Switches to machine is printing from the External tray with the test mode
another paper set to [1] . Mechanical trouble may occur.
feed tray in high Papers of the same size needs to be in the selected trays
speed. for this function to work properly, so the usage of this test
mode is limited.
Use when need to lower the P-F tray when occur vertical
P-Feed Tray Lowering
1785 10 0-30 paper feed jam (Vertical paper feed sensor 5 is ON).
operation time setting
(1=0.1s)
Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.
Transfer Belt Motor Speed
1786 0 (-196 - 665)mm/s The setting value of this test mode is added to or subtracted
Adjustment
from the prescribed speed.
Adjusts the paper elevation motor speed.
Paper Elevation Motor (-391 - 1500)mm/
1787 0 The setting value of this test mode is added to or subtracted
Speed Adjustment s
Adjusts the upper transfer motor speed.
Top Transfer Motor Speed (-391 - 1500)mm/
1788 0 The setting value of this test mode is added to or subtracted
Adjustment s
Switchback Waiting Time Specifies the wait time when paper is temporarily stopped in
1789 0 (-20 - 20)ms
Setting the switchback section before feeding is resumed.
Switchback Roller Paper
1800 30 0-100mm Specifies the amount of transfer of the switchback roller.
Transfer Amount
Registration Motor Speed
1802 0 (-20 - 20)mm/s Adjusts registration motor speed relative to the belt speed.
Adjustment
Registration Motor Stopping
1803 0 (-20 - 20)mm Specifies the motor stopping position.
Position
1804 Re-Feed Timing Adjustment 0 (-50 - 50)ms Specifies re-feed timing.
Top Edge Sensor 1 Intensity Specifies the light intensity for top edge sensor 1.
1807 128 0–255
Adjustment The higher the value, the brighter the light intensity.
Top Edge Sensor 2 Intensity Specifies the light intensity for top edge sensor 2.
1808 128 0–255
Adjustment The higher the value, the brighter the light intensity.
Transfer Belt Suction Fan Specifies the airflow volume of the transfer belt fan,
1809 100 1-100%
Duty Ratio expressed as a PWM duty ratio.
Top Edge Sensor 1 Paper
Specifies the adjustment value for jams before top edge
1810 Non-Arrival Jam Detect 0 (-100 - 100)ms
sensor 1.
Timing Adjustment
Paper Elevation IN Sensor
Specifies the adjustment value for jams before the paper
1811 Paper Non-Arrival Jam 0 (-100 - 100)ms
elevation IN sensor.
Detection Timing Adjustment
Flipper Sensor Paper Non-
Specifies the adjustment value for jams before the flipper
1812 Arrival Jam Detection 0 (-100 - 100)ms
sensor.
Timing Adjustment
Top Transfer OUT Sensor
Specifies the adjustment value for jams before the upper
1813 Paper Non-Arrival Jam 0 (-100 - 100)ms
transfer OUT sensor.
Switchback Sensor Paper
Specifies the adjustment value for jams before the
switchback sensor.
Timing Adjustment
[ 16-39 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Re-Feed Sensor Paper
Specifies the adjustment value for jams before the re-feed
sensor.
Timing Adjustment
Select [1: Active] in normal operation.
Select [0: Inactive] when the machine must run until the
0: Inactive (OFF)
1816 BP Belt HP Sensor ON/OFF 1 replacement [Belt HP Sensor] becomes available in the
1: Active (ON)
case the sensor becomes faulty. (Tentative machine
operation until the replacement sensor arrives.)
By selecting any number other than [0], 1mm to 550 mm
BP Fan Special Setting
1817 0 0-550mm in paper length, the BP suction fans change the suction
Selection
strength (duty) to the TM_1818 setting.
This BP fan duty (suction strength) is used when paper
1818 PB Fan Special Duty 100 0–100%
length 1- 550mm is selected on TM_1817 .
Selection to ON or OFF the center suction fans on the BP Unit.
BP Fan Center ON/OFF 0: BP Fans in the center portion of the BP unit are OFF.
1819 0
Selection 1: BP Fans in the center portion of the BP unit are ON <all the BP fans are
ON.>
Top Edge Sensor 1 Paper
Specifies the adjustment value for jams at top edge sensor
1820 Jam Detection Timing 0 (-100 - 100)ms
1.
Adjustment
Paper Elevation IN Sensor
Specifies the adjustment value for jams at the paper
1821 Paper Jam Detection Timing 0 (-100 - 100)ms
elevation IN sensor.
Adjustment
Flipper Sensor Paper Jam
1822 0 (-100 - 100)ms Specifies the adjustment value for jams at the flipper sensor.
Top Transfer OUT Sensor
Specifies the adjustment value for jams at the upper transfer
1823 Paper Jam Detection Timing 0 (-100 - 100)ms
OUT sensor.
Adjustment
Switchback Sensor Paper
Specifies the adjustment value for jams at the switchback
1824 Jam Detection Timing 0 (-100 - 100)ms
sensor.
Adjustment
Re-Feed Sensor Paper Jam Specifies the adjustment value for jams at the re-feed
1825 0 (-100 - 100)ms
Detection Timing Adjustment sensor.
Adjusts the ink drop timing for Top edge sensor 1 (the
Top Edge Sensor 1 Print
1828 0 (-1000–1000) distance adjustment between the top edge sensor 1 and the
Start Timing Adjustment
head). (1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the ink drop timing for Top edge sensor 2 (the
Top Edge Sensor 2 Print
1829 0 (-1000–1000) distance adjustment between the top edge sensor 2 and the
Start Timing Adjustment
head) (1=0.1mm)
Specifies the timing to start multiple paper feed detection.
Multiple Paper Feed
This setting is applied when multiple paper feed detection is enabled.
1831 Detection Start Timing 1
0: Detection starts from the first sheet
Selection
1: Detection starts from the second sheet
Selects how the jammed papers should be removed from the machine, for
those jammed papers after the Registration roller.
Recovery Control Setting
1832 0 0: Conventional way.
(Machine)
1: New way (auto-jam paper discharge.)
2: New way (manual selection jam paper discharge.)
Selects how the jammer papers should be removed from
0: Conventional
Recovery Control Setting the Internal Paper Feed Area.
1833 1 way
(Internal Paper Feed Area) Selection [1] is available from machine firmware Ver. SNALL
1: New way
5.5x.
Post Registration Sensor
Adjusts the ideal transfer rate of primary transfer after arrival
1834 Paper Transfer Speed 100 50–150
at the registration sensor.
Adjustment
Specifies the number of sheets detected as full by the FD
paper receiving tray.
1837 3 1–100sheet When there are this many sheets and the sensor is
Full Detection Count Setting
activated, the printer determines that the tray is full and
issues a warning.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-40 ]
Test Modes

Specifies the speed of the FU paper ejection jump motor
FU Paper Ejection Jump
1838 990 800–1200 relative to the printer when a multi-finisher is connected. (1=
Motor Speed Adjustment
0.1%; 2 at a time)
Specifies the mode of operation of the FU paper ejection motor and FU paper
ejection jump motor.
FU Paper Ejection Motor
1839 0 The setting value of 01859 is used.
Operation Selection
0: Conforms to operating specifications
1: Use test mode value
FD Paper Ejection Simplex Specifies the speed of the paper ejection motor during
1840 850 391–1500mm/s
Motor Speed Setting simplex printing. This setting is valid when 01850 is "1."
Specifies the speed after the speed of the paper ejection
FD Paper Ejection Duplex
1841 850 391–1500mm/s motor is switched during duplex printing.
Motor Speed Setting
This setting is valid when 01850 is "1."
FU Ejection Flipper Solenoid Specifies the timing when the face up paper ejection flipper
1842 0 (-100–100)ms
ON Timing is activated.
FU Ejection Flipper Solenoid Specifies the timing when the face up paper ejection flipper
1843 0 (-100–100)ms
OFF Timing is deactivated.
FD Ejection Flipper Solenoid Specifies the timing when the face down paper ejection
1844 (-21) (-100–100)ms
ON Timing flipper is activated.
FD Ejection Flipper Solenoid Specifies the timing when the face down paper ejection
1845 31 (-100–100)ms
OFF Timing flipper is deactivated.
FU Paper Ejection Sensor
Specifies the adjustment value for jams before the face up
1846 Paper Non-Arrival Jam 0 (-100–100)ms
paper ejection sensor.
Specifies the adjustment value for jams at the face up paper
1847 Paper Jam Detection Timing 0 (-100–100)ms
ejection sensor.
Adjustment
Specifies the adjustment value for jams before the face
1848 Paper Non-Arrival Jam 0 (-100–100)ms
down paper ejection sensor.
FD Paper Ejection Sensor
Specifies the adjustment value for jams at the face down
1849 Paper Jam Detection Timing 0 (-100–100)ms
paper ejection sensor.
Adjustment
Specifies the mode of operation of the FD paper ejection motor.
(Use setting value 01840 for transfer during simplex printing and setting value
FD Paper Ejection Motor
1850 0 01841 for transfer during duplex printing.)
Operation Selection
0: Conforms to operating specifications
1: Use test mode value
FD Paper Fence Custom
1851 1000 1000-3540 Specifies the position designated for 01461. (1=0.1mm)
Position Setting
FU Paper Ejection Wing
1852 2970 720-3500 Specifies the position designated for 01463. (1=0.1mm)
Specific Position Setting
0: Inactive Specifies the Active/Inactive of the FD paper receiving tray
1853 Full-Detection Active/ 1
1: Active full-detection ON/OFF selection.
Inactive
Specifies the correct paper ejection speed according to the parts attached on
1855 FD Ejection Speed Selection 2 the FD ejection tray.
0: Standard, 1: Not used for overseas, 2: Strike cover
FU Paper Ejection Wing Specifies the special position of the face up paper ejection
1856 2970 1000-3460
Custom Position Setting wing. (1=0.1mm)
FU Paper Ejection Motor Specifies the speed of the FU paper ejection motor relative
1858 990 800-1200
Speed Adjustment to the speed of the printer. (1= 0.1%; 2 at a time)
FU Paper Ejection Jump Specifies the speed of the FU paper ejection jump motor.
1859 850 177-1500mm/s
Motor Speed Adjustment This setting is valid when 01839 is "1."
1860 Print Quantity Selection 1 1-9999sheet Values to be used during printing operation of 01481.
0: Face up
1861 Output Destination 1 Values to be used during printing operation of 01481.
1: Face down
0: Simplex printing
1862 Duplex/Simplex Selection 0 Values to be used during printing operation of 01481.
1: Duplex printing
[ 16-41 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Specifies the speed of 01643 and 01644.
1865 Paper Feed Speed Setting 632 197-665mm/s
Values to be used during printing operation of 01481.
Specifies the paper feed tray.
1867 Paper Feed Tray Selection 0
0: Paper feed tray, 1: Tray 1, 2: Tray 2, 3: Tray 3, 4: Large Capacity Tray
If the printer is turned OFF when 1: ON is specified,
mechanism status (position) is maintained when the power
is turned OFF.
Maintenance Power OFF 0: OFF Applicable mechanisms: maintenance unit and belt platen.
1870 0
Selection 1: ON During maintenance by service technicians, test modes are
used to establish the desired mechanism status, and this
state is maintained until the printer is turned OFF. (The state
is cleared from memory when the power is off.)
Setting Values and Test Patterns
Specifies the test pattern for 01481.
Options: Select from 38 options
1. Blank
2. Black: 100% (7 drops ejected relative to a checkerboard pattern)
3. Cyan: 100%, 4. Magenta: 100%, 5. Yellow: 100%
6. Black: 4L (1 on, 3 off in horizontal lines), 7. Cyan: 4L, 8. Cyan and black: 4L,
9. Magenta: 4L, 10. Yellow: 4L,
11. Black: 8L (1 on, 7 off in horizontal lines), 12. Cyan: 8L, 13. Cyan and black:
Print Head Test Pattern 8L, 14. Magenta: 8L, 15. Yellow: 8L,
1871 1
Selection 16. Black: 1_6 (1 on, 6 off in vertical lines), 17 . Cyan: 1_6, 18. Cyan and
black: 1_6, 19. Magenta: 1_6, 20. Magenta and black: 1_6, 21. Yellow: 1_6,
22. Black: 2_2 (2 on, 2 off in vertical lines), 23. Cyan: 2_2, 24. Magenta: 2_2,
25. Magenta and cyan: 2_2, 26. Yellow: 2_2, 27. Square lines (for image
evaluation),
28. Black: 1_12 (1 on, 12 off in vertical lines), 29. Cyan: 1_12, 30. Cyan and
black: 1_12, 31. Magenta: 1_12, 32. Magenta and black: 1_12, 33. Yellow:
1_12,
34. K: grid (houndstooth check pattern), 35. Cyan: grid, 36. Magenta: grid, 37.
Yellow: grid, 38. Yellow and cyan: grid
Number of pages that can be printed in the temperature
range from the minimum supported printing temperature to
the temperature at which the printer enters normal operation
mode
Low Temperature Maximum
1878 0 0–9999page When set to [0], printing operation does not take place when
Print Quantity
the ink temperature is low.
The page count is done at paper ejection and the print job is
stopped after the temperature is checked, so the number of
prints may exceed the set number.
Paper Feed Slowing
1879 Timing Adjustment (Noise 7 0 ： 0ms, 1 ： 1ms,　→ ・・・ →　6 ： 6ms, 7 ： 7ms, 8 ： 8ms, 9 ： 9ms, 10 ： 10ms
reduction)
Paper Feed Stop Timing
1880 Adjustment (Noise 6 0 ： 0ms, 1 ： 1ms,　→ ・・・ →　6 ： 6ms, 7 ： 7ms, 8 ： 8ms, 9 ： 9ms, 10 ： 10ms
reduction)
Paper Feed Hit Speed
1881 Adjustment (Noise 0 (-100 - 300)mm/s
reduction)
P-F Tray Assist Timing Adjust time to start rotation "Pick-up Roller" from the start of
1884 7 0-20ms
Adjustment rotation "Registration Roller".
0: Disable
1888 Belt Profile ON/OFF 1 Activates or deactivates the belt profile.
1: Enable
80: 80%, 85: 85%, 90: 90%, 95: 95%,
1889 Belt Profile Gain Adjustment 100 100: 100%, 105: 105%, 110: 110%, 115: 115%,
120: 120%
<Coin vendor / Card vendor>
Does not apply on your machine. Applies only in Japanese market.
1890 Vendor Connection 0 0: Not connected
1: Connected (Vendor)
2: Connected (External Control Unit)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-42 ]
Test Modes

0: Disable
1893 Roller Profile ON/OFF 1 Activates or deactivates the roller profile.
1: Enable
80: 80%, 85: 85%, 90: 90%, 95: 95%,
Roller Profile Gain
1894 100 100: 100%, 105: 105%, 110: 110%, 115: 115%,
Adjustment
120: 120%
0 ： No Connection
Select correct paper ejection option connected to the printer
1 ： Perfect Binder
Paper Ejectin Option unit.
1895 0 2 ： High Capacity
Connection Setting Note: If this selection is not correct, it will not get
Stacker
communication to the option actually connected.
3 ： Mail Maker
0: Execute (as
1896 Ink Supply ON/OFF 0 needed) Specifies whether ink is supplied.
1: Do not execute
A comparison value that is compared to the total count for
issuance of maintenance call warnings.
Warnings are issued when the counter is equivalent to this
1900 Maintenance Call Setting 0 0–9999sheet
test setting value x 1000.
When this test setting value is 0, maintenance call warnings
are not issued.
Internal Paper Feed Tray 0: Irregular size L Specifies what size paper is interpreted as when paper of
1901 0
Custom Paper Size Setting 1: Irregular size S irregular size is loaded in internal trays 1–3.
1910 Belt Profile Data Input 1
1914 Belt Profile Data Input 5 A test for entering items 1–12 of belt profile data after a
Fourier transform is performed.
An inverse Fourier transform is performed on input values
1916 Belt Profile Data Input 7 using test mode 01442 (belt profile data expansion), after
1917 Belt Profile Data Input 8 which values are saved as adjustment data.
1920 Belt Profile Data Input 11 0 0-9999
A test for entering belt profile data check digits after a
Fourier transform is performed.
Belt Profile Check Digit
1922 An inverse Fourier transform is performed on input values
Input
using test mode 01442 (belt profile data expansion), after
which values are saved as adjustment data.
A test for entering the roller profile amplitude
Roller Profile Amplitude
1923 Input values are saved as adjustment data for test mode
Input
01443 (roller profile data expansion).
A test for entering the roller profile phase.
1924 Roller Profile Phase Input
The same note as for above test mode 01923 applies here.
1910-1924 <Refer to photograph on the below>
Selects the sample quantity of the prints for the CIS to use
as a data to calculate the paper edge position as detected
CIS Paper Edge Position
1932 9 2-10 by CIS.
Data Reference Number
This test mode is not to be used in normal operation. Keep
the setting at default value.
Selects the quantity of the sample data to be excluded from
CIS Paper Edge Position TM_1932 selected number of sample data.
1933 4 1-9
Data To Be Excluded This test mode is not to be used in normal operation. Keep
Changes the detection level of the belt stain by CIS. Setting
Belt Stain Detection at [0] will void the belt stain detection.
1934 5 0-100
Frequency This test mode is not to be used in normal operation. Keep
[ 16-43 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

FD Ejection Fence HP Adjusts the position of the FD paper ejection fence (home
1945 0 (-500–500)
Adjustment position adjustment). (1=0.1mm)
FD Ejection Fence HP Adjusts the position of the FD paper ejection fence when
1946 0 (-500–500)
Adjustment (CARD) postcards are used (home position adjustment). (1=0.1mm)
1947 Image Mask (RIGHT) 50 5-250 The selected parameter applies when the CIS side mask is
disabled by test modes No.77 34, 77 80, 7826, 7872, 9734,
9780, 9826, 9872 and 9918.
1948 Image Mask (LEFT) 50 5-250
Applies to External paper feed tray feeding only and no
envelope. (1=0.1mm)

Selecting to [1] will stop the BP unit in shipping position
when power is turned OFF.
0: Normal position
BP Power OFF Position When selected to [1] , it stays at [1] until manually selected
2701 0 1: Shipping
Selection back to [0].
position
[0] lowers the BP unit all the way down to the normal
position when powered OFF.
Deactivates ink temperature detection during activation of
Ink Temperature Detection 0: Enable other test modes by selecting the setting to [1: OFF].
2710 0
ON/OFF Adjustment 1: Disable Used commonly in conjunction with Test Modes No.2428
and 2431 to circulate the ink.
Activate this setting during replacement of heads or the ink
0: Disable circulation system.
2711 Head Replacement Mode 0
1: Enable Initial ink circulation processing is executed when power is
supplied and when the setting is activated.
A mode enabling printing when the upper transfer unit is
Head Adjustment Print 0: OFF
2712 0 removed.
Mode 1: ON
Used during head adjustment.
0: Does not
Ink Drop Timing / Belt Selected to [1] , the ink drop timing compensates with the
2713 1 compensate
Strech stretch of the BP belt.
1: Compensates
The period for executing recovery cleaning 1 (The time that
2730 Recovery Cleaning 1 Setting 8 8-240hours
elapses after the previous cleaning.)
2731 Recovery Cleaning 2 Setting 7 1-60day
2732 Recovery Cleaning 3 Setting 90 5-120days
Recovery Cleaning 1 ON/ 0: Disable Specifies whether recovery cleaning 1 (normal cleaning) is
2733 1
OFF 1: Enable executed (ON) or not (OFF).
Recovery Cleaning 2 ON/ 0: Disable Specifies whether recovery cleaning 2 (strong cleaning) is
2734 0
Recovery Cleaning 3 ON/ 0: Disable Specifies whether recovery cleaning 3 (extra cleaning) is
2735 0
Specifies the timing of recovery cleaning 1, 2, and 3.
Recovery Cleaning
2736 1 0: When printing starts
Activation Timing
1: When the printer is turned ON, or when recovering from sleep
Selecting to [1] will stop the BP unit in shipping position
when power is turned OFF.
0: Normal position
With the next machine power ON, the selection goes back
2737 BP Fix Position Power OFF 0 1: Shipping
to [0] automatically.
position
[0] lowers the BP unit all the way down to the normal
position when powered OFF.
Bellows Arm Fix Position 0: Normal position Selects the bellows arm position when the machine is
2738 0
Selection 1: Fixed position turned OFF or when goes to sleep.
Specifies the number of prints to make in MD recovery
2748 MD Recovery Print Quantity 1 1-10sheet
action.
Specifies the number of operation quantity of the MD
MD Recovery Action recovery action.
2749 3 1-20time
Operation Quantity 1 time = print + normal cleaning.
2 times = (print + normal cleaning) x 2 times, etc.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-44 ]
Test Modes

This test mode sets the ink circulation time for Test Mode
1-1440minutes
No.2452 INK CIRCULATION ACTION.
2759 Ink Circulation Duration 10 <1440 min. = 24
After TM_2452 is activated, the ink circulation ends
HR>
automatically after the time set by this test mode.
MD Recovery Operation
2839 2 1-5time Specifies the number of times the MD recovery is made.
Quantity
Recovery Cleaning MD Specifies the number of time the MD recovery is made
2840 1 1-5time
Quantity during each recovery cleaning.
When selected to [0], initial filling with ink is possible even
0: Heads or Head
if heads or HDR (image processing PCB) is not connected.
Drive PCB absent
(To confirm the ink filling status.)
2877 Initial Ink Supply Method 1 1: All heads and
When this setting is "0: Absent," the temperature used for
Head Drive PCB
initial filling is by the factory-set value.
present
< Test Mode for Factory use.>
0: Normal By selecting [1] , the ink purging out from the head can be
head cleaning viewed by eye. After the ink purge, the BP & Maintenance
sequence. Unit elevates up for the print head wiping.
P-Tank Check OP Mode 1: BP Unit & <DANGER>
2898 <Ink Purge Check Mode 0 Maintenance Do not put your hand over the Maintenance Unit, as the unit
Selection> Unit (ink pan) is will suddenly elevate after the ink purge to wipe the Print
lowered during the Heads.
ink purge from the It is recommended to return the setting to [0] after the
heads. observation is made to prevent possible injury.
Parameters to align the center of images with the center of
Image Centering When The the paper.
2906 0 (-100–100)
Side Mask Is OFF Using a larger value adjusts the image toward the right.
(1=0.1mm)
2907 Image Top Edge Adjustment 0 (-70–70) Adjusts the leading edge printing position. (1=0.1mm)
Top Edge Differential
2908 0 (-100–100) Value to compensate between top edge sensors. (1=0.1mm)
Adjustment
CIS Side Mask Adjustment Adjusts the left side of the CIS side mask. One setting is
2922 0 (-100–100)
(Left) used for all colors. (1=0.1mm)
CIS Side Mask Adjustment Adjusts the left side of the CIS side mask. One setting is
2923 0 (-100–100)
(Right) used for all colors. (1=0.1mm)
Parameters for extra assurance in case the image center
cannot otherwise be aligned.
2924 CIS Image Center Position 0 (-100–100)
Used on entry-level models (versions with one CIS)
(1=0.1mm)
Applies the specified image mask amount for paper in trays
designated for envelopes in the paper feed settings.
2925 Envelope Image Mask (Top) 90 5-100
Note: However, not applicable in the case of 01481 (head
test pattern printing). (1=0.1mm)
Same description as for 02925
Envelope Image Mask
2926 90 5-100 Note: However, not applicable in the case of 01482 (head
(Bottom)
Envelope Image Mask
2927 90 5-250 Note: However, not applicable in the case of 01483 (head
(Right)
2928 Envelope Image Mask (Left) 90 5-250 Note: However, not applicable in the case of 01484 (head
0: ON
2931 Connect Process Setting 0 Selection as to activate or deactivate the connect process.
1: OFF
Selection as to activate or deactivate the fixed print position.
0: OFF
2932 Fixed Print Position Setting 0 when selected to ON, the image data is aligned to the left of
1: ON
the print nozzles and the offset function is deactivated.
Head Edge Density ON/ 0: ON When selected to ON, the printing is done with the head
2934 0
OFF Selection 1: OFF edge density adjustment active.
Selects the minimum detection level of the BP belt stained
2938 CIS Detect Check Level 33 0-100
detection.
CIS Standard Paper Set
2939 80 0-100 Adjusts CIS standard paper set detection level.
Detection Level
[ 16-45 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

2940 Print Timing Parameter (K)
2941 Print Timing Parameter (C)
Head parameters for 02900 (Print Timing Adustment)
2942 Print Timing Parameter (M)
2943 Print Timing Parameter (Y)
2944 Print Position Parameter (K)
2945 Print Position Parameter (C) Head parameters for 02901 (Overlapped Color Adustment
2946 Print Position Parameter (M) for Vertical Lines)
2947 Print Position Parameter (Y)
2948 Print Width Parameter (K)
2949 Print Width Parameter (C)
Head parameters for 02902 (Overlap Width Adustment)
2950 Print Width Parameter (M)
2951 Print Width Parameter (Y)
2952 Head Voltage Parameter (K)
2953 Head Voltage Parameter (C) Head parameters for 02903 (Head Drive Recommended
2954 Head Voltage Parameter (M) Voltage Adustment)
2955 Head Voltage Parameter (Y)
2956 Head Correction Voltage Parameter (K)
2957 Head Correction Voltage Parameter (C) Head parameters for 02904 (Head Drive Correction Voltage
2958 Head Correction Voltage Parameter (M) Adustment)
2959 Head Correction Voltage Parameter (Y)
Head AL Number Parameter
2960
(K)
2961
(C)
Head parameters for 02905 (Head AL Value Adustment)
2962
(M)
2963
(Y)
2964 Overlap Correction Amount 0 0-255 Amount of overlap for boundary adjustment
2965 Overlap Correction Amount (K) 0 0-255
2966 Overlap Correction Amount (C) 0 0-255 Head parameters for 02964 (Overlap Amount for Boundary
2967 Overlap Correction Amount (M) 0 0-255 Adustment)
2968 Overlap Correction Amount (Y) 0 0-255
2969 Correction Dot Gain 0 0-255 Boundary correction dot gain
2970 Correction Dot Gain (K) 0 0-255
2971 Correction Dot Gain (C) 0 0-255
Parameter of 02969 (Boundary Correction Dot Gain)
2972 Correction Dot Gain (M) 0 0-255
2973 Correction Dot Gain (Y) 0 0-255
Nozzle range to use in boundary correction (Defaults are
2974 Correction Nozzle Range L:0/R:635 0-635
different for keft and right sides.)
2975 Correction Nozzle Range (K) L:0/R:635 0-635
2976 Correction Nozzle Range (C) L:0/R:636 0-635 Parameter of 02974 (Boundary Correction Nozzle Range).
2977 Correction Nozzle Range (M) L:0/R:637 0-635 (Defaults are different for keft and right sides.)
2978 Correction Nozzle Range (Y) L:0/R:638 0-635
2979 Horizontal Color Correction 0 0-255 Color interpolation in the promary scanning direction
Adjusts for image stretching or shrinkage in the secondary
2980 Image Expansion Correction 1000 960-1040
scanning direction (the transfer direction). (1=0.1%)
Adjusts the center position of images when paper is fed
Image Center Side Mask
2984 0 (-100-100) from tray 1 and side mask processing is deactivated. (1=
OFF (Tray-1)
0.1mm)
OFF (Tray-2)
0.1mm)
OFF (Tray-3)
0.1mm)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-46 ]
Test Modes

AS Side Fence Specific
3700 2970 1060–3380 Specifies the position designated for 03401. (1= 0.1mm)
Position
AS End Fence Specific
3701 4200 1080–4320 Specifies the position designated for 03403. (1= 0.1mm)
Position
AS Side Fence HP
3702 0 (-500–500) (1= 0.1mm)
Adjustment
AS Side Fence HP
3703 0 (-500–500) (1= 0.1mm)
(PostCard) Adjustment
AS End Fence HP
3704 0 (-500–500) (1= 0.1mm)
Adjustment
AS End Fence (PostCard)
3705 0 (-500–500) (1= 0.1mm)
Adjustment
[ 16-47 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

FD Paper Ejection <for Mylar Sheet Modified FD tray end wall.>
Common Adjusts the FD paper ejection speed
Following Test modes adopted when [1] is selected on Test Mode No.01855.
6700 FD Speed (A3-STD) RIB 860 391-1500mm/s Standard A3, A3W, Ledger, Kaku0 and Kaku1 papers
6701 FD Speed (B4-STD) RIB 900 391-1500mm/s Standard B4, Legal, Foolscap, C4 and Kaku2 papers
6702 FD Speed (A4-STD) RIB 810 391-1500mm/s Standard A4, Letter and Kaku3 papers
6703 FD Speed (B5-STD) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s Standard B5 and C5 papers
6704 FD Speed (A4R-STD) RIB 800 391-1500mm/s Standard A4R and Letter-R papers
6705 FD Speed (B5R-STD) RIB 800 391-1500mm/s Standard B5R papers
6706 FD Speed (A5-STD) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s Standard A5 and Statement papers
6707 FD Speed (B6-STD) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s Standard B6 and Chou3 papers
6708 FD Speed (A5R-STD) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s Standard A5R papers
6709 FD Speed (A6-STD) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s Standard A6, Post Card, C6, DL-R and Chou4 papers
FD Speed (CUSTOM-STD)
6710 780 391-1500mm/s Standard Custom size papers
RIB
6711 FD Speed (A3-IJ) RIB 860 391-1500mm/s IJ A3, A3W, Ledger, Kaku0 and Kaku1 papers
6712 FD Speed (B4-IJ) RIB 900 391-1500mm/s IJ B4, Legal, Foolscap, C4 and Kaku2 papers
6713 FD Speed (A4-IJ) RIB 810 391-1500mm/s IJ A4, Letter and Kaku3 papers
6714 FD Speed (B5-IJ) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s IJ B5 and C5 papers
6715 FD Speed (A4R-IJ) RIB 800 391-1500mm/s IJ A4R and Letter-R papers
6716 FD Speed (B5R-IJ) RIB 800 391-1500mm/s IJ B5R papers
6717 FD Speed (A5-IJ) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s IJ A5 and Statement papers
6718 FD Speed (B6-IJ) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s IJ B6 and Chou3 papers
6719 FD Speed (A5R-IJ) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s IJ A5R papers
6720 FD Speed (A6-IJ) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s IJ A6, Post Card, C6, DL-R and Chou4 papers
FD Speed (CUSTOM-IJ)
6721 780 391-1500mm/s IJ Custom size papers
RIB
Following Test modes adopted when [2] is selected on Test Mode No.01855.
6722 FD Speed (A3-STD) STOP 860 391-1500mm/s Standard A3, A3W, Ledger, Kaku0 and Kaku1 papers
6723 FD Speed (B4-STD) STOP 860 391-1500mm/s Standard B4, Legal, Foolscap, C4 and Kaku2 papers
6724 FD Speed (A4-STD) STOP 860 391-1500mm/s Standard A4, Letter and Kaku3 papers
6725 FD Speed (B5-STD) STOP 930 391-1500mm/s Standard B5 and C5 papers
FD Speed (A4R-STD)
6726 780 391-1500mm/s Standard A4R and Letter-R papers
STOP
FD Speed (B5R-STD)
6727 860 391-1500mm/s Standard B5R papers
STOP
6728 FD Speed (A5-STD) STOP 880 391-1500mm/s Standard A5 and Statement papers
6729 FD Speed (B6-STD) STOP 880 391-1500mm/s Standard B6 and Chou3 papers
FD Speed (A5R-STD)
6730 880 391-1500mm/s Standard A5R papers
STOP
6731 FD Speed (A6-STD) STOP 880 391-1500mm/s Standard A6, Post Card, C6, DL-R and Chou4 papers
FD Speed (CUSTOM-STD)
6732 880 391-1500mm/s Standard Custom size papers
STOP
6733 FD Speed (A3-IJ) RIB 810 391-1500mm/s IJ A3, A3W, Ledger, Kaku0 and Kaku1 papers
6734 FD Speed (B4-IJ) RIB 810 391-1500mm/s IJ B4, Legal, Foolscap, C4 and Kaku2 papers
6735 FD Speed (A4-IJ) RIB 810 391-1500mm/s IJ A4, Letter and Kaku3 papers
6736 FD Speed (B5-IJ) RIB 830 391-1500mm/s IJ B5 and C5 papers
6737 FD Speed (A4R-IJ) RIB 780 391-1500mm/s IJ A4R and Letter-R papers
6738 FD Speed (B5R-IJ) RIB 810 391-1500mm/s IJ B5R papers
6739 FD Speed (A5-IJ) RIB 880 391-1500mm/s IJ A5 and Statement papers
6740 FD Speed (B6-IJ) RIB 880 391-1500mm/s IJ B6 and Chou3 papers
6741 FD Speed (A5R-IJ) RIB 880 391-1500mm/s IJ A5R papers
6742 FD Speed (A6-IJ) RIB 880 391-1500mm/s IJ A6, Post Card, C6, DL-R and Chou4 papers
FD Speed (CUSTOM-IJ)
6743 880 391-1500mm/s IJ Custom size papers
RIB
Rev.1.00 [ 16-48 ]
Test Modes

Paper Feed-2
Common Compensates the paper pitch.
Standard Papers
Paper Pitch (Duplex - (1=0.1ms)
6750 0 Duplex/Standard Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or longer.
Standard Long Paper) 0-2000
Paper Pitch (Duplex - (1=0.1ms)
6751 0 Duplex/Standard Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or shorter.
Standard Short Paper) 0-2000
External Paper Feed Tray:
(1=0.1ms) Simplex/External paper Feed Tray/Standard Paper/ Long
6752 Paper Pitch (Simplex - 0
0-2000 Paper of 356 mm or longer
Standard Long Paper)
(1=0.1ms) Simplex/External Paper Feed Tray/Standard Paper/ Short
0-2000 Paper of 355 mm or shorter.
Standard Short Paper)
Tray 1: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-1 /Standard Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or
6754 0
- Standard Long Paper) 0-2000 longer.
Tray 1: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-1-1/Standard Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm
6755 0
- Standard Short Paper) 0-2000 or shorter.
Tray 2: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-2/Standard Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or
6756 0
Tray 2: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-2/Standard Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or
6757 0
- Standard Short Paper) 0-2000 shorter.
Tray 3: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-3/Standard Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or
6758 0
Tray 3: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-3/Standard Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or
6759 0
- Standard Short Paper) 0-2000 shorter.
Card
Paper Pitch (Duplex - Thick (1=0.1ms)
6770 0 Duplex/Thick Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or longer.
Long Paper) 0-2000
Paper Pitch (Duplex - Thick (1=0.1ms)
6771 0 Duplex/Thick Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or shorter.
Short Paper) 0-2000
(1=0.1ms) Simplex/External paper Feed Tray/Thick Paper/ Long Paper
6772 Paper Pitch (Simplex - Thick 0
0-2000 of 356 mm or longer.
Long Paper)
(1=0.1ms) Simplex/External Paper Feed Tray/Thick Paper/ Short
0-2000 Paper of 355 mm or shorter.
Standard Thick Paper)
Thin Papers
Paper Pitch (Duplex - Thin (1=0.1ms)
6790 0 Duplex/Thin Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or longer.
Long Paper) 0-2000
Paper Pitch (Duplex - Thin (1=0.1ms)
6791 0 Duplex/Thin Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or shorter.
Short Paper) 0-2000
Extenal Paper Feed Tray:
(1=0.1ms) Simplex/External paper Feed Tray/Thin Paper/ Long Paper
6792 Paper Pitch (Simplex - Thin 0
0-2000 of 356 mm or longer.
Long Paper)
(1=0.1ms) Simplex/External Paper Feed Tray/Thin Paper/ Short Paper
6793 Paper Pitch (Simplex - Thin 0
0-2000 of 355 mm or shorter.
Short Paper)
Tray 1: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-1 /Thin Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or
6794 0
- Thin Long Paper) 0-2000 longer.
Tray 1: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-1 /Thin Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or
6795 0
- Thin Short Paper) 0-2000 shorter.
Tray 2: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-2/Thin Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or
6796 0
Tray 2: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-2/Thin Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or
6797 0
Tray 3: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-3/Thin Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or
6798 0
Tray 3: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-3/Thin Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or
6799 0
[ 16-49 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Paper Feed-2
Post Card
Paper Pitch (Duplex - POST (1=0.1ms)
6810 0 Duplex/Post Card.
CARD) 0-2000
(1=0.1ms)
6811 Paper Pitch (Simplex - 0 Simplex/External Paper Feed Tray/Post Card.
0-2000
POST CARD)
Envelope
(1=0.1ms)
6830 Paper Pitch (Simplex - 0 Simplex/External paper Feed Tray/Envelope.
0-2000
ENVELOPE)
U1-User Paper 1
Paper Pitch (Duplex - U1 (1=0.1ms)
6850 0 Duplex/U1 Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or longer.
Long Paper) 0-2000
6851 0 Duplex/U1 Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or shorter.
Short Paper) 0-2000
(1=0.1ms) Simplex/External paper Feed Tray/U1 Paper/ Long Paper of
6852 Paper Pitch (Simplex - U1 0
0-2000 356 mm or longer.
Long Paper)
(1=0.1ms) Simplex/External Paper Feed Tray/U1 Paper/ Short Paper
Short Paper)
Tray 1: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-1-1/U1 Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or
6854 0
- U1 Long Paper) 0-2000 longer.
Tray 1: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-1 /U1 Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or
6855 0
- U1 Short Paper) 0-2000 shorter.
Tray 2: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms)
6856 0 Simplex/Tray-2/U1 Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or longer.
- U1 Long Paper) 0-2000
Tray 2: Paper Pitch (Simplex (1=0.1ms) Simplex/Tray-2/U1 Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or
6857 0
6859 0
U2-User Paper 2
Long Paper) 0-2000
Short Paper) 0-2000
Long Paper)
Short Paper)
6874 0
6875 0
6877 0
6879 0
Rev.1.00 [ 16-50 ]
Test Modes

Paper Feed-2
U3-User Paper 3
6890 Duplex/U3 Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or longer.
Long Paper) 0-2000
6891 Duplex/U3 Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or shorter.
Short Paper) 0-2000
6892 Paper Pitch (Simplex - U3
Long Paper)
6893 Paper Pitch (Simplex - U3
Short Paper)
6894
6895
6896 Simplex/Tray-2/U3 Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or longer.
6897
6898 Simplex/Tray-3/U3 Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or longer.
6899
U4-User Paper 4
Long Paper) 0-2000
Short Paper) 0-2000
Long Paper)
Short Paper)
6914 0
6915 0
6917 0
6919 0
[ 16-51 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Paper Feed-2
U5-User Paper 5
Long Paper) 0-2000
Short Paper) 0-2000
Long Paper)
Short Paper)
6934 0
6935 0
6937 0
6939 0
Light Paper
Paper Pitch (Duplex - Light
6950 0 Duplex/Light Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or longer.
Long Paper)
Paper Pitch (Duplex - Light
6951 0 Duplex/Light Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or shorter.
Short Paper)
Simplex/External paper Feed Tray/Light Paper/ Long Paper
6952 Paper Pitch (Simplex - Light 0
of 356 mm or longer.
Long Paper)
Simplex/External Paper Feed Tray/Light Paper/ Short Paper
6953 Paper Pitch (Simplex - Light 0
of 355 mm or shorter.
Short Paper)
Tray 1 Paper Pitch (Simplex Simplex/Tray 1/Light Paper/ Long Paper of 356 mm or
6954 0
- Light Long Paper) longer.
Tray 1 Paper Pitch (Simplex Simplex/Tray 1/Light Paper/ Short Paper of 355 mm or
6955 0
- Light Short Paper) shorter.
6956 0
6957 0
6958 0
6959 0
Common Adjusts the FD paper ejection speed
6960 FD Speed (A3-Light) RIB 1080 Light Paper: A3, A3W, Ledger, Kaku0 and Kaku1 papers
6961 FD Speed (B4-Light) RIB 1100 Light Paper: B4, Legal, Foolscap, C4 and Kaku2 papers
6962 FD Speed (A4-Light) RIB 1030 Light Paper: A4, Letter and Kaku3 papers
6963 FD Speed (B5-Light) RIB 1060 Light Paper: B5 and C5 papers
FD Speed (A4 wide-Light)
6964 1010 Light Paper: A4R and Letter-R papers
RIB
FD Speed (B5 wide-Light)
6965 1100 Light Paper: B5R papers
RIB
Rev.1.00 [ 16-52 ]
Test Modes

Specifies the upper limit position of the paper feed tray.
7700 PFT UP LMT POS (STD) 1
0: Top 1: Middle 2: Bottom
Specifies the amount of slackness in external paper feeding.
7701 PFT P-BUCKLE (STD) 3 (-10 - 20)mm
Adjusts the timing of external paper feed motor deactivation.
Adjusts the timing of external paper feed motor activation.
Changes the activation timing of the external paper feed
7702 PFT P-F TIMING (STD) 0 (-30 - 30)mm motor relative to the timing of registration motor startup.
The interval between external paper feed motor activation
and deactivation is not changed.
0: OFF Specifies whether assist control is executed when paper is
7703 PFT AST ON/OFF (STD) 1
1: ON transferred from external paper feeding.
Specifies the time when external paper feed assist is
7704 PFT AST START (STD) 0 (-100 - 100)ms
started.
7705 PFT AST END (STD) 0 (-100 - 100)ms
finished.
Specifies the amount of slackness when long paper is
7706 TR1 LONG-P BKL (STD) 3 (-10 - 20)mm
transferred from tray 1.
7707 TRAY1 P-F TMG (STD) 0 (-100 - 100)ms Specifies the timing when paper transfer starts from tray 1.
7708 TR1 AST ON/OFF (STD) 1
1: ON transferred from tray 1.
7709 TR1 AST START (STD) 1 (-100 - 100)ms Specifies the time when tray 1 assist is started.
7710 TR1 AST END (STD) 0 0-200ms Specifies the time when tray 1 assist is finished.
7721 RE-FEED P-BKL (STD) 6 0-20mm Specifies the amount of slackness in re-feeding.
FD EJECT SPEED
7728 0 (-300 - 300)mm/s Compensates the FD ejection speed.
COMPENSATION (STD)
RE-FEED ARRIVAL TIMING Compensates the re-feed paper arrival timing. (Normal long
7729 20 (-50 - 50)ms
(NORMAL LONG PAPER) paper = 356 mm or longer.)
Specifies the belt speed ratio.
7730 BELT SPD RATIO (STD) 1000 950-1020 This is the transfer belt speed ratio relative to a registration
roller speed of 1. (1=0.1%)
Specifies the head gap.
7731 HEAD GAP (STD) 0
0: Standard 1: Card 2: Envelopes 1 3: Envelopes 2
7732 VERTICAL POS 1 (STD) 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 1.
7733 VERTICAL POS 2 (STD) 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 2.
Activate or Inactivate the CIS on the side registration unit
CIS SIDE MASK MODE 0: Inactive to check the paper width for the Side Margin and Image
7734 1
(STD) 1: Active Centering.
<Paper Feed Control = Standard Paper >
7735 FD S-FNC OFFST (STD) 60 (-500 - 500) Adjusts the FD paper ejection fence offset. (1=0.1ms)
RE-FEED ARRIVAL TIMING Compensates the re-feed paper arrival timing. (Normal short
7736 4 (-50 - 50)ms
(NORMAL SHORT PAPER) paper = 355 mm or shorter.)
7737 WING OFFSET (STD) (-500) (-500 - 500) Adjusts the FU paper ejection wing offset. (1=0.1ms)
7738 FU EJ ROLL SPD (STD) 850 177-1500mm/s Adjusts the FD paper ejection roller speed.
Adjusts the side paper guide offset of the auto control
7739 AS S-FNC OFFST (STD) (-40) (-200 - 400)
stacking tray. (1=0.1ms)
Adjusts the end paper guide offset of the auto control
7740 AS E-FNC OFFST (STD) 0 (-300 - 300)
[ 16-53 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Specifies the length of the overlap width for envelopes.
7741 ENV FLAP MARGN (STD) 0 0-720
(1=0.1ms)
Specifies the amount of slackness when short paper is
7743 TR1 SHRT-P BKL (STD) 3 (-10 - 20)mm
7746 PFT UP LMT POS (CARD) 0
7747 PFT P-BUCKLE (CARD) 3 0-20mm
7748 PFT P-F TIMING (CARD) 0 (-30 - 30)ms motor relative to the timing of registration motor startup.
7749 PFT AST ON/OFF (CARD) 1
7750 PFT AST START (CARD) 0 (-100 - 100)ms
started.
7751 PFT AST END (CARD) 0 (-100 - 100)ms
finished.
RE-FEED ARRIVAL TIMING Compensates the re-feed paper arrival timing. (Card long
7752 20 (-50 - 50)ms
(CARD - LONG) paper = 356 mm or longer.)
RE-FEED ARRIVAL TIMING Compensates the re-feed paper arrival timing. (Card short
7753 4 (-50 - 50)ms
(CARD - SHORT) paper = 355 mm or shorter.)
7767 RE-FEED P-BKL (CARD) 6 0-20mm Specifies the amount of slackness in re-feeding.
FD EJECT SPEED
COMPENSATION (CARD)
7776 BELT SPD RATIO (CARD) 1000 950-1020 This is the transfer belt speed ratio relative to a registration
7777 HEAD GAP (CARD) 1
7778 VERTICAL POS 1 (CARD) 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 1.
7779 VERTICAL POS 2 (CARD) 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 2.
to check the paper width for the Side Margin and Image
CIS SIDE MASK MODE 0: Inactive
7780 1 Centering.
(CARD) 1: Active
<When Card (thick) paper is selected>
<Applies when Papers are fed from
7781 FD S-FNC OFFST (CARD) 160 (-500 - 500) Adjusts the FD paper ejection fence offset. (1=0.1ms)
7783 WING OFFSET (CARD) (-400) (-500 - 500) Adjusts the FU paper ejection wing offset. (1=0.1ms)
7784 FU EJ ROLL SPD (CARD) 850 177-1500mm/s Adjusts the FD paper ejection roller speed.
7785 AS S-FNC OFFST (CARD) (-40) (-200 - 400)
7786 AS E-FNC OFFST (CARD) 0 (-300 - 300)
7787 ENV FLAP MARGN (CARD) 0 0-720
(1=0.1ms)
7792 PFT UP LMT POS (THN) 1
7793 PFT P-BUCKLE (THN) 3 (-10 - 20)mm
7794 PFT P-F TIMING (THN) 0 (-30 - 30)ms motor relative to the timing of registration motor startup.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-54 ]
Test Modes

7795 PFT AST ON/OFF (THN) 1
7796 PFT AST START (THN) 0 (-100 - 100)ms
started.
7797 PFT AST END (THN) 0 (-100 - 100)ms
finished.
7798 TR1 LONG-P BKL (THN) 2 (-10 -20)mm
7799 TRAY1 P-F TMG (THN) 0 (-100 - 100)ms Specifies the timing when paper transfer starts from tray 1.
7800 TR1 AST ON/OFF (THN) 1
7801 TR1 AST START (THN) 1 (-100 - 100)ms Specifies the time when tray 1 assist is started.
7802 TR1 AST END (THN) 0 0-200ms Specifies the time when tray 1 assist is finished.
7813 RE-FEED P-BKL (THN) 6 0-20mm Specifies the amount of slackness in re-feeding.
FD EJECT SPEED
COMPENSATION (THIN)
RE-FEED ARRIVAL TIMING Compensates the re-feed paper arrival timing. (Thin long
7821 20 (-50 - 50)ms
(THIN LONG PAPER) paper = 356 mm or longer.)
7822 BELT SPD RATIO (THN) 1000 950-1020 This is the transfer belt speed ratio relative to a registration
7823 HEAD GAP (THN) 0
7824 VERTICAL POS 1 (THN) 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 1.
7825 VERTICAL POS 2 (THN) 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 2.
CIS SIDE MASK MODE 0: Inactive to check the paper width for the Side Margin and Image
7826 1
(THIN) 1: Active Centering.
<Paper Feed Control = Thin Paper >
7827 FD S-FNC OFFST (THN) 160 (-500 - 500) Adjusts the FD paper ejection fence offset. (1=0.1ms)
RE-FEED ARRIVAL TIMING Compensates the re-feed paper arrival timing. (Thin short
7828 4 (-50 - 50)ms
(THIN - SHORT) paper = 355 mm or shorter.)
7829 WING OFFSET (THN) (-500) (-500 - 500) Adjusts the FU paper ejection wing offset. (1=0.1ms)
7830 FU EJ ROLL SPD (THN) 850 177-1500mm/s Adjusts the FD paper ejection roller speed.
7831 AS S-FNC OFFST (THN) (-40) (-200 - 400)
7832 AS E-FNC OFFST (THN) 0 (-300 - 300)
7833 ENV FLAP MARGN (THN) 0 0-720
(1=0.1ms)
[ 16-55 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

7835 TR1 SHRT-P BKL (THN) 3 (-10 - 20)mm
7838 PFT UP LMT POS (PCD) 0
7839 PFT P-BUCKLE (PCD) 6 (-10 - 20)mm
7840 PFT P-F TIMING (PCD) 0 (-30 - 30)ms motor relative to the timing of registration motor startup.
7841 PFT AST ON/OFF (PCD) 0
7842 PFT AST START (PCD) 0 (-100 - 100)ms
started.
7843 PFT AST END (PCD) 0 (-100 - 100)ms
finished.
RE-FEED ARRIVAL TIMING
7844 4 (-50 - 50)ms Compensates the re-feed paper arrival timing.
(POST CARD)
7859 RE-FEED P-BKL (PCD) 6 0-20mm Specifies the amount of slackness in re-feeding.
FD EJECT SPEED
COMPENSATION (PCD)
7868 BELT SPD RATIO (PCD) 1000 950-1020 This is the transfer belt speed ratio relative to a registration
7869 HEAD GAP (PCD) 1
0: Standard 1: Card 2: Envelopes
7870 VERTICAL POS 1 (PCD) 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 1.
7871 VERTICAL POS 2 (PCD) 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 2.
to check the paper width for the Side Margin and Image
CIS SIDE MASK MODE 0: Inactive Centering.
7872 1
(PCD) 1: Active <When post card setting is used.>
<Applies when Papers are fed from External Paper Feed
Tray only.>
7873 FD S-FNC OFFST (PCD) 500 (-500 - 800) Adjusts the FD paper ejection fence offset. (1=0.1ms)
7875 WING OFFSET (PCD) 500 (-500 - 500) Adjusts the FU paper ejection wing offset. (1=0.1ms)
7876 FU EJ ROLL SPD (PCD) 850 177-1500mm/s Adjusts the FD paper ejection roller speed.
7877 AS S-FNC OFFST (PCD) (-40) (-200 - 400)
7878 AS E-FNC OFFST (PCD) 0 (-300 - 300)
7879 ENV FLAP MARGN (PCD) 0 0-720
(1=0.1ms)
7884 PFT UP LMT POS (ENV) 1
7885 PFT P-BUCKLE (ENV) 6 0-20mm
7886 PFT P-F TIMING (ENV) 0 (-30 - 30)ms motor relative to the timing of registration motor startup.
7887 PFT AST ON/OFF (ENV) 1
7888 PFT AST START (ENV) 0 (-100 - 100)ms
started.
7889 PFT AST END (ENV) 0 (-100 - 100)ms
finished.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-56 ]
Test Modes

7905 RE-FEED P-BKL (ENV) 6 0-20mm Specifies the amount of slackness in re-feeding.
FD EJECT SPEED
COMPENSATION (THIN)
7914 BELT SPD RATIO (ENV) 1000 950-1020 This is the transfer belt speed ratio relative to a registration
7915 HEAD GAP (ENV) 2
0: Standard 1: Card 2: Envelopes
7916 VERTICAL POS 1 (ENV) 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 1.
7917 VERTICAL POS 2 (ENV) 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 2.
7919 FD S-FNC OFFST (ENV) 160 (-500 - 500) Adjusts the FD paper ejection fence offset. (1=0.1ms)
7921 WING OFFSET (ENV) (-350) (-500 - 500) Adjusts the FU paper ejection wing offset. (1=0.1ms)
7922 FU EJ ROLL SPD (ENV) 850 177-1500mm/s Adjusts the FD paper ejection roller speed.
7923 AS S-FNC OFFST (ENV) (-40) (-200 - 400)
7924 AS E-FNC OFFST (ENV) 0 (-300 - 300)
7925 ENV FLAP MARGN (ENV) 420 0-720
(1=0.1ms)
TRNS BELT FAN SET (ENV Set the transfer belt fan air flow rate according to PWM duty
7926 100 1-100%
1) ratio.
TRNS BELT FAN SET (ENV Set the transfer belt fan air flow rate according to PWM duty
7927 60 1-100%
2) ratio.
[ 16-57 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Paper Feed Settings (U1-U5, Light Paper) ComColor Unit (Series 9000)
Test Mode Number
U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 LP Process Name Default Unit/Range Description
0: Top
Specifies the upper limit position of the
9700 9746 9792 9838 9884 9931 PFT UP LMT POS 1 1: Middle
paper feed tray.
2: Bottom
Specifies the amount of slackness in
external paper feeding.
9701 9747 9793 9839 9885 9932 PFT P-BUCKLE 3 (-10 - 20)mm
Adjusts the timing of external paper feed
motor deactivation.
Adjusts the timing of external paper feed
motor activation.
Changes the activation timing of the
external paper feed motor relative to the
9702 9748 9794 9840 9886 9933 PFT P-F TIMING 0 (-30 - 30)ms
timing of registration motor startup.
The interval between external paper
feed motor activation and deactivation is
not changed.
Specifies whether assist control is
0: OFF
9703 9749 9795 9841 9887 9934 PFT AST ON/OFF 1 executed when paper is transferred from
1: ON
external paper feeding.
Specifies the time when external paper
9704 9750 9796 9842 9888 9935 PFT AST START 0 (-100 - 100)ms
feed assist is started.
Specifies the time when external paper
9705 9751 9797 9843 9889 9936 PFT AST END 0 (-100 - 100)ms
feed assist is finished.
Specifies the amount of slackness when
9706 9752 9798 9844 9890 9937 TR1 LONG-P BKL 3 (-10 - 20)mm
long paper is transferred from tray 1.
Specifies the timing when paper transfer
9707 9753 9799 9845 9891 9938 TRAY1 P-F TMG 0 (-100 - 100)ms
starts from tray 1.
0: OFF
9708 9754 9800 9846 9892 9939 TR1 AST ON/OFF 1 executed when paper is transferred from
1: ON
tray 1.
Specifies the time when tray 1 assist is
9709 9755 9801 9847 9893 9940 TR1 AST START 1 (-100 - 100)ms
started.
9710 9756 9802 9848 9894 9941 TR1 AST END 0 0-200ms
finished.
9711 9757 9803 9849 9895 9942 TR2 LONG-P BKL 4 (-10 - 20)mm
9712 9758 9804 9850 9896 9943 TRAY2 P-F TMG 0 (-100 - 100)ms
starts from tray 2.
0: OFF
1: ON
tray 2.
9714 9760 9806 9852 9898 9945 TR2 AST START 1 (-100 - 100)ms
started.
9715 9761 9807 9853 9899 9946 TR2 AST END 0 0-200ms
finished.
9716 9762 9808 9854 9900 9947 TR3 LONG-P BKL 3 (-10 - 20)mm
9717 9763 9809 9855 9901 9948 TRAY3 P-F TMG 0 (-100 - 100)ms
starts from tray 3.
0: OFF
1: ON
tray 3.
9719 9765 9811 9857 9903 9950 TR3 AST START 1 (-100 - 100)ms
started.
9720 9766 9812 9858 9904 9951 TR3 AST END 0 0-200ms
finished.
Specifies the amount of slackness in re-
9721 9767 9813 9859 9905 9952 RE-FEED P-BKL 6 0-20mm
feeding.
FD EJECTION
9728 9774 9820 9866 9912 9959 SPEED 0 (-300 - 300)mm/s Compensates the FD ejection speed.
COMPENSATION
Rev.1.00 [ 16-58 ]
Test Modes
Paper Feed Settings (U1-U5, Light Paper) ComColor Unit (Series 9000)
Test Mode Number
RE-FEED ARRIVAL
Compensates the re-feed paper arrival
9729 9775 9821 9867 9913 9960 TIMING (U-LONG 20 (-50 - 50)ms
timing. (Long paper = 356 mm or longer.)
SHEET)
This is the transfer belt speed ratio
9730 9776 9822 9868 9914 9961 BELT SPD RATIO 1000 950-1020
relative to a registration roller speed of
1. (1=0.1%)
Specifies the head gap
9731 9777 9823 9869 9915 9962 HEAD GAP 0
9732 9778 9824 9870 9916 9963 VERTICAL POS 1 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 1.
9733 9779 9825 9871 9917 9964 VERTICAL POS 2 0 (-20 - 20)mm Adjusts secondary scanning position 2.
Activate or Inactivate the CIS on the
CIS SIDE MASK 0: Inactive side registration unit to check the paper
9734 9780 9826 9872 9918 9965 1
MODE 1: Active width for the Side Margin and Image
Centering.
Adjusts the FD paper ejection fence
9735 9781 9827 9873 9919 9966 FD S-FNC OFFST 60 (-500 - 500)
offset. (1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the FD paper ejection roller speed.
9736 9782 9828 9874 9920 9967 FD E-ROLL SPEED 0 0: Standard 1: Heavyweight 2: Lightweight 3: Postcard 4:
Envelopes
Adjusts the FU paper ejection wing
9737 9783 9829 9875 9921 9968 WING OFFSET 0 (-500 - 500)
offset. (1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the FD paper ejection roller
9738 9784 9830 9876 9922 9969 FU EJ ROLL SPD 850 177-1500mm/s
speed.
Adjusts the side paper guide offset of the
9739 9785 9831 9877 9923 9970 AS S-FNC OFFST (-40) (-200 - 400)
auto control stacking tray. (1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the end paper guide offset of the
9740 9786 9832 9878 9924 9971 AS E-FNC OFFST 0 (-300 - 300)
auto control stacking tray. (1=0.1mm)
Specifies the length of the overlap width
9741 9787 9833 9879 9925 9972 ENV FLAP MARGN 0 0-720
for envelopes. (1=0.1mm)
RE-FEED ARRIVAL Compensates the re-feed paper arrival
9742 9788 9834 9880 9926 9973 TIMING (U - 4 (-50 - 50)ms timing. (Short paper = 355 mm or
SHORT) shorter.)
9743 9789 9835 9881 9927 9974 TR1 SHRT-P BKL 3 (-10 - 20)mm
short paper is transferred from tray 1.
9744 9790 9836 9882 9928 9975 TR2 SHRT-P BKL 4 (-10 - 20)mm
9745 9791 9837 9883 9929 9976 TR3 SHRT-P BKL 3 (-10 - 20)mm
In case of the light weight paper been
selected by the user, and Transfer belt
fan 3 & 4 (middle side) are OFF, and all
TRNS BELT FAN
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 9977 40 1-100% other 4 Transfer belt fans are running by
SET (LWP)
set duty.
To reduce contamination by mist
problem on envelope printing.
[ 16-59 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
5-2. OPTIONS / Finisher Test Mode

Sensor Monitoring (S) OPTIONS / Finisher

Detectionects whether paper Ejected from the Unit is on the Decurler IN sensor of
4020 Decurler IN Sensor
the IF Unit.
Detectionects whether paper from the Decurler IN sensor of the IF Unit is on the
4021 Decurler OUT Sensor
Decurler OUT sensor.
4022 Decurler Home Sensor Detectionects the home position of the Decurler Roller in the IF Unit.
Detectionects if manual Decurler switch 1 is pressed.
4025 Manual Decurler SW 1 This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no manual
Decurler function on this Finisher.
Detectionects if manual Decurler switch 2 is pressed.
4027 Punch OUT Sensor Detectionects if punched paper is on the punch OUT sensor.
4028 Compile Exit Sensor Detectionects if paper Ejected to the Stacking tray is on the compile Exit sensor.
4029 Top Tray Eject Sensor Detectionects if paper Ejected to the top tray is on the top tray Eject sensor.
Detectionects if paper is on the buffer path sensor, moved out of the way
4030 Buffer Path Sensor
temporarily.
Detectionects if paper is on the Side Registration sensor to adjust the punching
4031 Side Registration Sensor
position.
4032 Puncher Motor Sensor Detectionects whether the Puncher motor is running.
4033 Puncher Move Home Sensor (A4) Detectionects the home (A4 size) position of the Puncher Unit.
4036 Puncher Home Sensor Detection of Puncher home position sensor.
4037 Puncher Front Sensor Detection of Puncher home Detection sensor.
4038 Punch Hole Select Sensor Checks the punch hole selection sensor.
4039 Side Registration Home Sensor Detectionects the Puncher Unit sensor home position.
4040 Punch Box Set Sensor Detectionects the loading status of the punch box.
4041 Top Tray Full Detection Sensor Detectionects when the top tray is Full of paper.
Detectionects whether there is paper on the compile tray NO paper sensor when
4042 Compile Tray NO Paper Sensor
paper is on the way to the compiling area, before Ejection in the Stacking tray.
Detectionects the sub paddle home position (raised position) in the compiling
4043 Sub-Puddle Home Sensor
area.
4044 Staple Stapler Sensor (50 Staples) Detectionects loading status of the 50-staple stapler.
Detectionects the home position of the Tamper motor for aligning paper in the
4045 Tamper Home Sensor
compiling area.
Detectionects the status when the End wall (for receiving the trailing edge of paper
4046 End Wall Home Sensor
before stapling) is closed, indicating that paper for stapling has accumulated.
Detectionects the status when the End wall (for receiving the trailing edge of paper
4047 End Wall Open Sensor
before stapling) is open, when the paper is stapled.
Detectionects the home position of the shelf motor for pushing the shelf toward the
4048 Shelf Home Sensor
tray Side, when paper has accumulated in the compiling tray before stapling.
Detectionects the status when the End wall is open before stapling (when the
4049 Stapler Home Position Sensor
stapler is centered).
Detectionects the home position (front-most) of the staple move motor, which
4050 Staple Move Home Position Sensor
moves the stapler.
Detectionects raising and Lowering of the Stacking tray. (This sensor is used when
4051 Stack Height Sensor 2
the flap of the Stacking tray is Lowered at the time of stapling.)
4052 Low Staple Sensor Detectionects when staples are running out in the staple Cartridge.
4053 Self Priming Sensor Home position Detection of stapler head.
4054 Staple Home Sensor Detectionects the home position of the staple-bEnding mechanism.
Detection of manual deculer switch (when pressed).
Detectionects when the Eject clamp is raised, enabling paper to be Ejected to the
4056 Eject UP Sensor
Stacking tray.
4057 Eject Sensor Detectionects the Transfer status of paper Ejected to the Stacking tray.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-60 ]
Test Modes

4058 Stacker NO Paper Sensor Detectionects paper in the Stacker tray.
Detectionects raised and Lowered positions of the Stacking tray. (This sensor is
4059 Stack Height Sensor
used during normal printing.)
4060 Tray Height Sensor Lower Detectionects when paper is Removed from the tray in middle of print job.
Detectionects the upper and Lower limit of the Stacking tray. (This is one of the
4061 MIX Stack Sensor
sensors used to Detectionect the Stacking limit.)
4062 Half-Stack Sensor
4063 Full Stack Sensor
4064 Stack Height Sensor 3 Detection of the paper.
4065 Stacker Rear Position Sensor Detectionects the Stacker position.
4067 Lower Limit Switch Detectionects the Lower limit of the Stacking tray.
When pushing by the bottom of the Stacking tray (caused by a foreign object) is
4068 Stacker Safety Switch
Detected, the elevator motor (contRolling the Stacker) is stopped.
4069 I/F Module F-Door SW Detectionects the Open/Close status of the I/F Module Front Door.
4072 Finisher Front Door Switch Detectionects whether the Finisher front door is open or closed.
Detectionects if the lock is released and the Folder tray is pushed out toward the
4073 Folder Envelope Tray Open SW
front.
4074 Folder Envelope Tray Switch Detectionects whether there is a Folder Envelope tray. (Interlock)
Detectionects the Connection of Manual Decurler.
4077 Manual Decurler Switch This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no manual
Decurler on this Finisher.
Detectionects the Open/Close status of the Interposer Tope Cover Switch.
4078 Interposer Top Cover SW 24v This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no Interposer on
this Finisher.
Detectionects the Storage position of the Knife, which folds paper in the Booklet
4079 Knife Home Sensor
section.
Detectionects paper Transferred to the Tamper area after passing the Booklet IN
4080 Booklet Compile NO Paper Sensor
sensor.
Detectionects paper Transferred to the Booklet tray after Folding with the Knife in
4081 Booklet Folder Roll Eject Sensor
the Booklet section.
4082 Booklet Set Sensor Detectionects the loading status of the Booklet section.
4083 Booklet Staple READY Detectionects when the stapler in the Booklet section is ready to staple.
4084 Booklet Stapler Error Detectionects stapler errors in the Booklet section.
Detectionects when staples are running out in the staple Cartridge in the Booklet
4085 Booklet Low Stapler SW (Front)
section (front Side).
Detectionects when staples are running out in the staple Cartridge in the Booklet
4086 Booklet Low Stapler SW (Rear)
section (rear Side).
Detectionects paper at feed-out sensor.
4087 Feed OUT Sensor This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no Interposer on
this Finisher.
Paper Detection by the Interposer paper sensor.
4088 Interposer Paper Sensor This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no Interposer on
this Finisher.
Upper position check of the Nudger Roller on the Interposer Unit.
4089 Level UP Sensor (Interposer) This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no Interposer on
this Finisher.
Detectionects when the switch used to Remove paper from the Booklet tray is
4090 Booklet Tray Belt Sensor
pressed.
Paper length Detection on the Interposer tray.
4091 Length Sensor (Interposer) This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no Interposer on
this Finisher.
4092 Folder Entrance Sensor Detectionects paper Transferred to the Folder Unit after Ejection from the IF Unit.
4096 Folder Path Sensor 2 Detectionects paper that has passed Folding Roller 1 in the Folder Unit.
4097 Folder Path Sensor 3 Detectionects paper that has passed Folding Roller 2 in the Folder Unit.
[ 16-61 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

4098 End Guide Home Sensor 1 Detectionects the home position of the End Guide in the Folder Unit.
4099 End Guide Home Sensor 2 Detectionects the home position of the End Guide in the Folder Unit.
4100 Envelope Tray Full Sensor Detectionects when the Folder tray in the Folder Unit is Full.
4102 Folder Path Sensor 1 Detectionects paper being Transferred to Folder export Roller 1 in the Folder Unit.
4103 Folder Path Sensor 4 Detectionects paper Transferred passed Folder export Roller 4 in the Folder Unit.
4106 Folder Eject Sensor Detectionects paper Ejected from the Folder Unit.
4107 3-Hole Puncher Unit Detection Detectionects when the 3-hole Puncher Unit is connected.
4108 Folder Unit Detection Detectionects the Connection status of the Folder Unit.
4109 Booklet Unit Detection Detectionects the Connection status of the Booklet Unit.
Detectionects the presence of the Interposer Unit.
4110 Interposer Detection This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no Interposer on
this Finisher.
Detectionects the home position of the front Tamper, which aligns paper entering
4111 Booklet Tamper Home Sensor
the Booklet section.
4112 Booklet IN Sensor Detectionects paper Transferred from the Puncher to the Booklet section.
Booklet Tamper Home Sensor Detectionects the home position of the rear Tamper, which aligns paper entering
4113
(Rear) the Booklet section.
Detectionects the home position of the Booklet End Guide motor, which raises and
4114 Booklet End Guide Home Sensor
Lowers End Guides in the Booklet section.
4116 Booklet Tray NO Paper Sensor Detectionects paper in the Booklet tray.
Detectionects the extEnded position of the Knife, which folds paper in the Booklet
4117 Knife Folding Sensor
section.
Detectionects whether paper is on the Folder Exit sensor after Transfer from the
4118 Folder Exit Sensor
Folder Unit to the Finisher Puncher section.
Finisher Mechanical Interface Cover
4119 Finisher mechanism Interface Cover interlock Detection.
Interlock Switch
4120 Decurler HP Sensor Detectionects Decurler HP sensor
Drive Checking (M) OPTIONS / Finisher

4230 Decurler Motor Drive Starts and stops the decurler motor.
Finisher Transport Motor Normal Direction Drives the punch reverse roller, T/A1 roller, and T/A2 roller at 1,000
4231
Drive (Fast Speed) mm/s in the normal direction.
Finisher Transport Motor Normal Direction Drives the punch reverse roller, T/A1 roller, and T/A2 roller at 800
4232
Drive (Middle Speed) mm/s in the normal direction.
Finisher Transport Motor Normal Direction Drives the punch reverse roller, T/A1 roller, and T/A2 roller at 385
4233
Drive (Low Speed) mm/s in reverse.
Compile Eject Motor Normal Direction Drive Drives the buffer roller, buffer reverse roller, and compile exit roller
4234
(Fast Speed) at 1,000 mm/s in the normal direction.
4235
(Middle Speed) at 800 mm/s in the normal direction.
4236
(Low Speed) at 285 mm/s in the normal direction.
Compile Eject Motor Reverse Direction Drive Drives the buffer roller, buffer reverse roller, and compile exit roller
4237
(Fast Speed) at 1,000 mm/s in reverse.
Compile Eject Motor Reverse Direction Drive Drives the buffer roller, buffer reverse roller, and compile exit roller
4238
(Low Speed) at 385 mm/s in reverse.
Switches between puncher unit movement and sensor section
4239 Puncher Move Clutch Drive
movement.
4240 Paddle Motor Drive Drives the compile paddle and compile sub paddle.
Compile Eject Motor Normal Direction Drive
4241 Drives the compile eject roller at 800 mm/s in the normal direction.
(Speed 1)
(Speed 2)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-62 ]
Test Modes
Drive Checking (M) OPTIONS / Finisher

(Speed 3)
(Speed 4)
(Speed 5)
Compile Eject Motor Reverse Direction Drive
4246 Drives the compile eject roller at 800 mm/s in reverse.
(Speed 1)
Turn ON or OFF of the Manual decurler switch 1 LED.
4247 Manual Decurler Switch 1 LED This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no
manual decurler function on this Finisher.
SCT Exit Motor Normal Direction Drive (Middle Drives the top exit roller and T/A2 roller at 800 mm/s in the normal
4250
Speed) direction.
SCT Exit Motor Normal Direction Drive (Low Drives the top exit roller and T/A2 roller at 285 mm/s in the normal
4251
Speed) direction.
SCT Exit Motor Reverse Direction Drive (Low
4252 Drives the top exit roller and T/A2 roller at 385 mm/s in reverse.
Speed)
Compile Eject Motor Normal Direction Drive Drives the compile eject roller at 1,000 mm/s in the normal
4253
(Speed 1) direction.
Compile Eject Motor Reverse Direction Drive
4254 Drives the compile eject roller at 1,000 mm/s in reverse.
(Fast Speed)
Drives the Interposer feed roller.
4255 Interposer Feed Motor This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no
Interposer on this Finisher.
4256 Booklet Paper Path Motor Drive (Fast Speed) Drives the booklet IN roller at 800 mm/s.
Booklet Paper Path Motor Drive (Middle
4257 Drives the booklet IN roller at 250 mm/s.
Speed)
4258 Booklet Paper Path Motor Drive (Low Speed) Drives the booklet IN roller at 50 mm/s.
Booklet Folder Roll Motor Drive Normal
4259 Drives the booklet folding roller in the normal direction.
Direction
Booklet Folder Roll Motor Drive Reverse
4260 Drives the booklet folding roller in reverse.
Direction
4261 Tray Belt Drive Motor Drive Drives the belt to transfer booklets.
4262 Booklet Paddle Motor Drive Drives the booklet paddle.
4265 Folder Drive Motor 2 Drive Drives folder export roller 2-7 , folding roller 1- 2, and the nip roller.
4266 Folder Drive Motor 1 Drive Drives folder export roller 1.
4267 Folder Entrance Motor Drive (Fast Speed) Drives folder entrance and exit rollers at high speed.
4268 Folder Entrance Motor Drive (Low Speed) Drives folder entrance and exit rollers at low speed.
4269 Folding Solenoid 1 ON/OFF Turn ON or OFF of the folding solenoid 1.
4270 Folding Solenoid 2 ON/OFF Turn ON or OFF of the folding solenoid 2.
Turn ON or OFF of the Interposer transport roller clutch.
4271 Interposer Transport Roller This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no
Interposer function on this Finisher.
Turn ON or OFF of the Envelope tray LED 1.
4272 Envelope Tray LED 1 This test mode should be ignored due to the reason that there is no
Envelope tray on this Finisher.
Turn ON or OFF of the Folder C Solenoid. (Pushes the finger
4273 Folder C Solenoid ON/OFF
assembly against folding roller 2.)
4274 Decurler Clutch ON/OFF Turn ON or OFF of the decurler clutch.
4275 Decurler Motor ON/OFF Starts and stops the decurler motor. (Runs at 200 mm/s.)
[ 16-63 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Unit Checking (U) OPTIONS / Finisher

4405 Finisher NVM Data Store
Reads finisher NVM information and stores it in nonvolatile memory on the engine.
4406 Finisher NVM Data Re-Store
Writes NVM information stored by 04405 (store finisher NVM information) back to the finisher.
4410 Decurler Cam Clutch ON/OFF
Activates and deactivates the decurler penetration cam clutch.
4412 Puncher Motor 2-Hole Position Movement
Moves the 2/4 hole puncher unit to the home position.
4413 Puncher Motor 3-Hole Position Movement
Moves the 3-hole puncher unit to the home position.
4414 Puncher Motor (2-Hole) ON/OFF
Moves the 2/4 hole puncher unit in both directions.
4415 Puncher Motor (3-Hole) ON/OFF
Moves the 3-hole puncher unit in both directions.
4416 Puncher Move Motor DriveTo Front (Fast Speed)
Moves the puncher unit toward the front at high speed.
4417 Puncher Move Motor DriveTo Rear (Fast Speed)
Moves the puncher unit toward the rear at high speed.
4418 Puncher Move Motor DriveTo Front (Slow Speed)
Moves the puncher unit toward the front at low speed.
4419 Puncher Move Motor DriveTo Rear (Slow Speed)
Moves the puncher unit toward the rear at low speed.
4420 Transport Gate Solenoid (Push)
Switches the paper path toward the stacking tray.
4421 Transport Gate Solenoid (Pull)
Switches the paper path toward the top tray.
4422 Tamper Motor Front Drive (Fast Speed)
Drives the compiling tamper toward the front at 3000 pps.
4423 Tamper Motor Front Drive (Slow Speed)
4424 Tamper Motor Rear Drive (Fast Speed)
Drives the compiling tamper toward the rear at 3000 pps.
4425 Tamper Motor Rear Drive (Slow Speed)
4426 End Wall Motor Drive (Open)
Opens the compiling end wall.
4427 End Wall Motor Drive (Close)
Closes the compiling end wall.
4428 Compile Eject Clamp Motor (Up)
Closes the gap between compile eject roller and field roller.
4429 Compile Eject Clamp Motor (Down)
Opens the gap between compile eject roller and field roller.
4430 Shelf Motor Drive (Eject)
Pushes the shelf out.
4431 Shelf Motor Drive (Storage)
Retracts the shelf.
4432 Stapler Motor Close ON/OFF
Executes stapling.
4433 Stapler Motor Reverse Direction
Reverses stapling operation. (Operates the staple motor in reverse for 11110 ms.)
4434 Stapler Move Motor High Speed Front ON/OFF
Moves the staple unit position toward the front at 1000 pps.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-64 ]
Test Modes

4435 Stapler Move Motor Low Speed Front ON/OFF
Moves the staple unit position toward the front at 530 pps.
4436 Stapler Move Motor High Speed Rear ON/OFF
Moves the staple unit position toward the rear at 1000 pps.
4437 Stapler Move Motor Low Speed Rear ON/OFF
Moves the staple unit position toward the rear at 530 pps.
4438 Compile Paddle Solenoid Up
Raises the compile paddle.
4439 Compile Paddle Solenoid Down
Lowers the compile paddle.
4440 Sub-Paddle Solenoid Up
Raises the compile sub paddle.
4441 Sub-Paddle Solenoid Down
Lowers the compile sub paddle.
4442 Stacker Flap Motor Up
Lowers the stacker flap.
4443 Stacker Flap Motor Down
Raises the stacker flap.
4444 Set Clamp Solenoid ON/OFF
Raises and lowers the stacker set clamp.
4446 Puddle Support Clutch ON/OFF
Raises and lowers the compile sub paddle.
4447 Elevator Motor Up (Stacker)
Raises the stacking tray.
4448 Elevator Motor Down (Stacker)
Lowers the stacking tray.
4449 Stacker Offset Motor (Front)
Moves the stacking tray offset position toward the front.
4450 Stacker Offset Motor (Rear)
Moves the stacking tray offset position toward the rear.
4451 Stacker Elevator Motor 2 (Up)
Raises the stacking tray (until the stack height sensor is activated).
4452 Stacker Elevator Motor 2 (Down)
Lowers the stacking tray (until the full stack sensor is activated).
4453 Tamper Motor Mid Front ON/OFF
4454 Tamper Motor Mid Rear ON/OFF
4455 Interposer Tray Up
Moves the interposer tray up.
4456 Interposer Tray Down
Moves the interposer tray down.
4457 Interposer Nudger Solenoid
Movers the nudger roller up and down.
4458 Booklet Knife Clutch
Extends and retracts the booklet knife.
4459 Booklet End Guide Motor Low Down
Drives the booklet end guide downward at 450 pps.
4461 Booklet End Guide Motor High Down
Drives the booklet end guide downward at 1002 pps.
4462 Booklet End Guide Motor Low Up
Drives the booklet end guide upward at 450 pps.
[ 16-65 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

4464 Booklet End Guide Motor High Up
Drives the booklet end guide upward at 1002 pps.
4465 Booklet Staple ON
Executes stapling by the booklet stapler (F/R).
4468 Booklet Gate Solenoid Push
The booklet gate solenoid is pressed, releasing the S1 gate and moving paper toward the booklet side.
4469 Booklet Gate Solenoid Pull
The booklet gate solenoid is pulled back, retracting the S1 gate and moving paper toward the top tray and stacking tray side.
4470 End Guide Motor 1 Up ON/OFF
Raises the booklet end guide to the first stopping position for folding.
4471 End Guide Motor 1 Down ON/OFF
Lowers the booklet end guide to the first stopping position for folding.
4472 End Guide Motor 2 Up ON/OFF
Raises the booklet end guide to the first stopping position for folding.
4473 End Guide Motor 2 Down ON/OFF
Lowers the booklet end guide to the first stopping position for folding.
4474 Folder Gate Solenoid 1 (Push)
Pushes folder gate solenoid 1, causing the solenoid to be retracted and paper to move to the puncher side.
4475 Folder Gate Solenoid 1 (Pull)
Pulls folder gate solenoid 1, causing the solenoid to be released and paper to move to the folder unit side.
4476 Folder Gate Solenoid 2 (Push)
Pushes folder gate solenoid 2, causing the solenoid to be retracted and paper to move to the folder envelope tray side.
4477 Folder Gate Solenoid 2 (Pull)
Pulls folder gate solenoid 2, causing the solenoid to be released and paper to move to the puncher side.
4478 Envelope Tray Lock Solenoid Open
Pushes the tray out when the folder envelope tray lock solenoid is released.
4479 Envelope Tray Lock Solenoid Close
Locks the tray with the folder envelope tray lock solenoid.
4480 Nip Release Solenoid ON/OFF
Opens and closes the nip release solenoid.
4481 Booklet Tamper Motor F Rear 1
Drives booklet tamper motor F in the tamping direction at 985 pps.
4485 Booklet Tamper Motor F Front 1
Drives booklet tamper motor F toward home at 985 pps.
4489 Booklet Tamper Motor R Front 1
Drives booklet tamper motor R in the tamping direction at 985 pps.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-66 ]
Test Modes

4493 Booklet Tamper Motor R Rear 1
Drives booklet tamper motor R toward home at 985 pps.
4497 Decurler Off Position Movement
Move the decurler to the OFF position (operation at 200 mm/s).
4498 Decurler Upcurl Position Movement
Move to the upcurl position (operation at 200 mm/s).
4499 Decurler Downcurl Position Movement
Move to the downcurl position (operation at 200 mm/s).
Initialization (I) OPTIONS / Finisher

4500 Finisher NVM Parameter Area Initialize
Restore default finisher NVM parameter area.
4501 Finisher NVM HFSI Area Initialize
Restore default finisher NVM HFSI area.
4512 Interposer Roller Count Clear
Clears the interposer roller count.
4514 Stacker Sub-Paddle Count Clear
Clears the stacker sub paddle count.
4515 Stacker Paddle Count Clear
Clears the stacker paddle count.
4516 Booklet Paddle Count Clear
Clears the booklet paddle count.
Data Monitoring (C) OPTIONS / Finisher

4600 Interposer Roller Count 00000000–99999999, Displays the interposer roller count.
4601 Stacker Sub-Paddle Count 00000000–99999999, Displays the stacker sub paddle count.
4602 Stacker Paddle Count 00000000–99999999, Displays the stacker paddle count.
4603 Booklet Paddle Count 00000000–99999999, Displays the booklet paddle count.
[ 16-67 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Data Editing (D) OPTIONS / Finisher

Paper length - Under 297.0mm
<ON / OFF timing per paper sheet qty>
0 to 4, 5 to 9, more than 16: conventional
timing
4650 Booklet Tray Belt Timing 1 210
10 to 15: ON timing change to specified timing.
OFF timing-Use specified timing before the
Booklet No Paper sensor detects, after that,
0-255
input the value (divide a target time by 2.5ms)
Paper length - Over 297.0mm to 364.0mm.
Same as TM4650
Same as TM4650
Paper length - Over 389.0mm.
Same as TM4650
[1]: Starts the decurler control on down curl
direction, only when meets following all five
conditions.
1. Decurler is [AUTO].
2. Select Top tray paper ejection.
4654 Top Tray Decurler Control Setting 1 1 or 0
3. Use following papers [Normal paper (A, B,
C, S1, S2), Thin paper, Recycled paper (A, B),
Backing paper, Holed paper]
4. Paper length: More than 310.0mm
5. Duplex or invert print
0 ： Offset
4655 Sheet Eject Offset Setting 1 Set offset action on ejecting papers
1 ： No offset
4656 Reserved
Set eject paper condition on un-stapling job
4657 Sheet Eject Condition Setting 0
0: Over 297mm paper 1: Over 310mm paper
For fine-tuning the amount of automatic
adjustment of the staple position for each
sheet during booklet stapling. - 10th and 11th
sheet
[• When the staple is higher than the fold
4658 Booklet Staple Calibration 5 100 0-200pulse position, the difference (mm)x10* is subtracted
from the current NVM value and entered.
• When the staple is lower than the fold
position, the difference (mm)x10* is added to
the]
(1=0.1mm)
For 12th, 13th and 14th sheet (Same as
4659 Booklet Staple Calibration 6 100 0-200pulse
TM4658)
4660 Booklet Staple Calibration 7 100 0-200pulse For 16th and 17th sheet (Same as TM4658)
4662 Booklet Staple Calibration 9 100 0-200pulse For 20th and 21st sheet (Same as TM4658)
4664 Booklet Staple Calibration 11 100 0-200pulse For 22nd and 23rd sheet (Same as TM4658)
For fine-tuning the amount of adjustment of the
folding position for each sheet during booklet
stapling.- Less than B4S - 10th and 11th sheet
[• When the bottom is long, the difference
(mm)x10*x0.5 is added to the current NVM
4665 Booklet Staple Fold Calibration 5-S 100 0-200pulse
value and entered.
• When the top is long, the difference (mm)
x10*x0.5 is subtracted from the current NVM
value and entered.]
(1=0.1mm)
4666 Booklet Staple Fold Calibration 6-S 100 0-200pulse
TM4665)
4667 Booklet Staple Fold Calibration 7-S 100 0-200pulse For 16th and 17th sheet (Same as TM4665)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-68 ]
Test Modes

4669 Booklet Staple Fold Calibration 9-S 100 0-200pulse For 20th and 21st sheet (Same as TM4665)
4670 Booklet Staple Fold Calibration 10-S 100 0-200pulse For 22nd and 23rd sheet (Same as TM4665)
stapling.- More than B4S - 10th and 11th sheet
4672 Booklet Staple Fold Calibration 5-L 100 0-200pulse
value and entered.
value and entered.]
(1=0.1mm)
4673 Booklet Staple Fold Calibration 6-L 100 0-200pulse
TM4672)
4674 Booklet Staple Fold Calibration 7-L 100 0-200pulse For 16th and 17th sheet (Same as TM4672)
4676 Booklet Staple Fold Calibration 9-L 100 0-200pulse For 20th and 21st sheet (Same as TM4672)
4677 Booklet Staple Fold Calibration 10-L 100 0-200pulse For 22nd and 23rd sheet (Same as TM4672)
Set number of booklet full detection (1 set
Booklet Full Detection Setting (Less
4679 15 10-100 :more than 16 sheets / Paper length: less than
than B4) (More than 16 Sheets)
B4S)
Set number of booklet full detection (1 set
Booklet Full Detection Setting (More
4680 15 10-100 :more than 16 sheets / Paper length: more
than B4) (More than 16 Sheets)
than B4S)
Adjust additional pitch time in between
Stacker Eject Pitch Add Time
4681 30 0-300 booklets ejection.
Adjustment
Paper size is more than A4S.
Conditions: Every sheet, set first paper, no
punching, paper 298 mm or shorter, paper 235
mm or wider, z-folding, slip sheet, and other
4682 Tamping Start Adjustment 2 30 0-50
than heavyweight paper
Adjusts the timing for the start of tamping
under these conditions.
Conditions: Every sheet, other than set first
paper, no punching, paper 298 mm or shorter,
paper 235 mm or wider, z-folding, slip sheet,
and other than heavyweight paper
Conditions: Every sheet, set first paper,
punching, paper 298 mm or shorter, paper
4684 Tamping Start Adjustment 4 0 0-50 narrower than 235 mm
Paper length - Under 297.0mm (Include thick
paper 1or 2)
<ON / OFF timing per paper sheet qty>
0 to 4, 5 to 9, more than 16: conventional
4685 Booklet Tray Belt Timing 5 180 0-255 timing
10 to 15: ON timing change to specified timing.
OFF timing-Use specified timing before the
Booklet No Paper sensor detects, after that,
input the value (divide a target time by 2.5ms)
4686 Booklet Tray Belt Timing 6 177 0-255 (Include thick paper 1or 2)
Same as TM4685
[ 16-69 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

4687 Booklet Tray Belt Timing 7 177 0-255 (Include thick paper 1or 2)
Same as TM4685
Paper length - Over 389.0mm. (Include thick
4688 Booklet Tray Belt Timing 8 24 0-255 paper 1or 2)
Same as TM4685
Paper length - Under 297.0mm (Include thick
paper 1or 2)
<Booklet ON timing on booklet job>
4689 Booklet Tray Belt ON Timing 1 531 300-1000
Timimg = Time between Booklet Folder Exit
Sensor detect and the Tray Belt activates.
(1=2.5msec)
4690 Booklet Tray Belt ON Timing 2 676 300-1000 (Include thick paper 1or 2)
Same as TM4689
4691 Booklet Tray Belt ON Timing 3 676 300-1000 (Include thick paper 1or 2)
Same as TM4689
Paper length - Over 389.0mm. (Include thick
4692 Booklet Tray Belt ON Timing 4 656 300-1000 paper 1or 2)
Same as TM4689
Booklet Full Detection Setting Number of booklet full detection will be
4693 5 0-20
-Subtraction (Include thick paper) subtracted by the number set in this test mode.
Paper length - Over 389.0mm (Include thick
paper 1or 2)
Finisher Transport Motor Step Out <Booklet tray ON timing on booklet job>
4694 656 300-1000
Countermeasure Timimg = Time between Booklet Folder Exit
Sensor detect and the Tray Belt activates.
(1=2.5msec)
Countermeasure avoiding gear damage due to
Puncher Motor Failure Countermeasure 0: Disable the Puncher Motor Sensor.
4695 0
Enable 1: Enable When this is enabled, the Puncher Motor stops
by the home sensor detects, jam appears.
Card 1 paper Paper length ≤ 216 mm Specifies
4721 Card Paper 1 Unstaple 1 Sheet 10 2-25sheet
the number of sheets for "unstaple set eject."
Card 1 paper Paper length > 216 mm
4722 Card Paper 1 Unstaple 2 Sheets 10 2-25sheet Specifies the number of sheets for "unstaple
set eject."
Select handling method of [mix size full
detection], of paper ejection under following
condition.
0: No detection 1. Flapper down (LEF staple under 30 sheets
4723 Mix Size Full 2 1
1: Detects exclude Z-fold)
2. Paper exist on the stacker tray
3. Paper (have condition to flapper ups)
ejected on the stacker tray
0: Automatic
1: Upcurl correction (decurler 1)
4724 Decurler Compulsive Control 0
2: Downcurl correction (decurler 2)
3: Release
When the Top Tray Full Sensor become OFF
after the sensor is ON, it will not detect as
4725 Top Tray Full Clear Time 4 1-10 [OFF] by filtering NVM set timer. (1=100ms)
If the sensor stay OFF longer than NVM set
timer, clear the full detection timer.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-70 ]
Test Modes

Enables High Stack on Z-fold paper when the
Z-fold High Stack spacer mounted.
However, permitted is selected, TM4958
[Z-FOLD 100SHT STACK] must select
0: Prohibited prohibited.
4729 Z-Fold 50 Sheets Stack 0
1: Permitted At the same time, need to change limitation
sheet number on following test modes.
TM4797 Z-fold Stacker Tray Limitation
(B4SEF)
TM4800 Z-fold Stacker Tray LImitation (A3)
0: Automatic
4730 Paper Size Detection Setting 0
1: Size input
Modifies the number of sheets for "unstaple
4731 Unstable Paper Quantity Limit 1 25 2-50sheet
set eject" for paper longer than 216 mm.
0: Auto detection
4732 Puncher Selection 0 Specifies puncher settings.
1: 4 holes
Adjusts the position in the direction of the
4733 Punch Side Registration Adjustment 1 97 10-170 punch hole side registration for paper 297 mm
wide. (1=0.125mm)
2/3 Puncher: 203mm ≤ paper width ≤ 285mm
2/4 Puncher: 216mm < paper width ≤ 285mm
4734 Punch Side Registration Adjustment 2 94 10-170 Adjusts the position in the direction of the
side registration of these punch holes.
(1=0.125mm)
2/4 Puncher: Adjusts the position in the
direction of the punch hole side registration
4735 Punch Side Registration Adjustment 3 82 10-170
when 203 mm < paper width ≤ 216 mm.
(1=0.125mm)
Adjusts the timing of sub paddle clutch
activation when a punch mode buffer sheet
4736 Punch Clutch ON Timing 28 0-40 is used and the compile exit sensor is
deactivated (including 15 ms for the filter).
(1=2.5mm)
Adjusts the timing of sub paddle clutch
activation when a non-punch mode buffer
4737 Non Punch Clutch Timing 24 0-40 sheet is used and the compile exit sensor is
deactivated (including 15 ms for the filter).
(1=2.5mm)
0: Permitted Specifies permission of tray down operation
4738 Stack-Tray Down Adjustment 0
1: Prohibited when cycling down.
In punch mode, adjusts the correction loop
amount for motor reverse skew when the
paper is 216 mm or shorter.
(2/3 Puncher: 203 mm ≤ paper width < 223
4739 Punch Reserve Adjustment 1 38 8-68
mm)
(2/4 Puncher: 216 mm < paper width ≤ 235
mm)
The paper above is excluded.
4740 Punch Dust Full Adjustment 10000 0-65535time Frequency of punch waste full detection
Sets a staple limit sheet quantity for 100-sheet
4741 Staple Limitation 100 100 50-150sheet
cartridges.
Sets a staple limit sheet quantity for 50-sheet
4742 Staple Limitation 50 50 25-75sheet
cartridges.
Adjusts the rear staple position (for other than
4743 Rear Staple Position 1 100 50-150sheet
A4LEF and A3SEF).
Specifies the number of sheets for "unstaple
4744 Unstaple Limitation Setting 2 25 2-50sheet
set eject" for paper longer than 216 mm.
4745 Tamping Home Adjustment 26 0-52pulse Adjusts the tamping home position.
Adjusts the compile exit roller slow-down
4746 Compile Slow Timing 3 1-41pulse
timing.
0: Set Eject
4747 Eject Mode Setting 0 Operation in unstaple eject mode.
1: Sheet Eject
[ 16-71 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Adjusts the eject roller reverse timing.
4748 Eject Rear Reverse Timing 92 92-152
1pulse=0.361mm
Adjusts the rear staple position (for A4LEF and
4749 Rear Staple Position 2 100 50-150
A3SEF).
Adjusts the period for detection of continuous
4750 No Paper Period 1 1-60 deactivation of the sensor detecting paper
being removed too soon. (1=100ms)
0: Permitted Specifies booklet auto feeding when cycling
4751 Booklet Belt Setting 0
1: Not permitted down.
Adjusts the amount of movement toward the
folding position on the leading edge of paper
at the fold position (when the mode is fasten:
4752 Booklet Compile Calibration 1 100 0-200
OFF). (Corresponds to adjustment of the
folding position. For B4 and larger paper.)
(1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the amount of movement toward the
folding position on the leading edge of paper
at the fold position (for paper smaller than B4,
4753 Booklet Compile Calibration 2 100 0-200 when the mode is fasten: OFF).
(Corresponds to adjustment of the folding
position. For paper smaller than B4.)
(1=0.1mm)
Specifies the number of sheets for raising the
4756 Compile UP Limit 50 10-90sheet
paddle during compiling.
Specifies the number of sheets for raising the
4757 Sub Paddle UP Limit 50 10-90sheet
sub paddle.
Specifies the stacking limit (in copies) for
4758 Single Staple Limit 200 1-255copy
single-staple sets.
0: Enable
4759 Mix Size Full 1 0
1: Disable
Specifies the stacking limit (in copies) for dual-
4760 Dual Staple Limit 200 1-255copy
staple sets.
0: Enable Function to adjust the tray height at the trailing
4761 Tail Edge Height Adjustment 0
1: Disable edge of the ejected paper.
In punch mode, adjusts the correction loop
amount for motor reverse skew when the
paper is longer than 216mm.
34 (2/3 Puncher: 203 mm ≤ paper width ≤ 223
4762 Punch Reverse Adjustmet 2 8-68
30 (3-hole) mm)
(2/4 Puncher: 216 mm < paper width ≤ 235
mm)
The paper above is excluded.
Adjusts the amount of overlap of buffer sheets;
4764 Buffer Sheet Reverse 42 0-80pulse
in each size, the reverse pulse + NVM value.
Maximum quantity of sheets stapled when
4765 Max Staple Limit 65 0-200sheet
using large paper.
Adjusts the fold position when paper is folded
twice in booklet staple mode. (Paper larger
than B4S.)
[• When the bottom is long
Booklet Fold Position Adjustment
4766 100 0-200 Difference (mm)x10*x0.5 is added from the
(Large)
current NVM value and entered.
• When the top is long
Difference (mm)x10*x0.5 is sub
(1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the fold position when paper is folded
twice in booklet staple mode. (Paper smaller
Booklet Fold Position Adjustment
4767 100 0-200 than B4S)
(Small)
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-72 ]
Test Modes

Adjusts the staple position when paper is
folded twice in booklet staple mode. (Paper
larger than B4S)
Booklet Staple Position Adjustment
4768 100 0-200 position
(Large)
Difference (mm)x10* is subtracted from the
• When the staple is lower
(1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the staple position when paper is
folded twice in booklet staple mode. (Paper
Booklet Staple Position Adjustment
4769 100 0-200 smaller than B4S)
(Small)
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the amount of tamping only at the rear
4770 Booklet Rear Tamping Adjustment 20 5-35 during regular tamping in booklet compiling.
(1=0.2618mm)
The maximum quantity of sheets bound when
4771 Max Booklet Stapling 15 2-25
stapling in booklet mode.
The maximum quantity of sheets bound when
4772 Max Booklet Non-stapling 5 1-15
not stapling in booklet mode.
[Adjustment value (based on number of
sheets) for the amount of movement toward
the folding position on the leading edge of
paper, from the compile position to the fold
position (when the mode is fasten: OFF).]
Adjusts the compensation value when two
shee
(1=0.1mm)
[Same as above]
Adjusts the compensation value when three
sheets are folded.
(1=0.1mm)
Specifies the quantity of sheets of the other
size ejected for subtraction of the quantity of
4775 Z-Fold Stacker Tray Setting 100 0-255sheet
z-fold sheets of A3SEF and 11x17 SEF ejected
in the stacker tray.
Specifies the number of times of forward-
4776 Folding Time 1 0-3time backward rotation of the booklet folder roller
during folding.
Adjusts the roller position when the first fold
is made during z-folding for 8K GCO, and
4777 Z-Fold 1 8K GCO 50 10-90
adjusts the position where the leading edge of
paper stops.
Adjusts the roller position when the second
fold is made during z-folding for 8K GCO, and
4778 Z-Fold 2 8K GCO 50 10-90
adjusts the position where the leading edge of
paper stops.
Adjusts the roller position when the first fold is
4779 Z-Fold 1 A3 50 10-90 made during z-folding, and adjusts the position
where the leading edge of paper stops.
4780 Z-Fold 1 11X17 50 10-90 made during z-folding, and adjusts the position
4781 Z-Fold 1 B4 50 15-90 made during z-folding, and adjusts the position
Specifies the time for sending delay regarding
4782 Buffer Sheet Timing 60 1-200 the second sheet transferred for output when
two buffer sheets are ejected.
[ 16-73 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

4783 Z-Fold 1 8K 50 10-90 made during z-folding, and adjusts the position
fold is made during z-folding, and adjusts
4784 Z-Fold 2 A3 50 10-90
the position where the leading edge of paper
stops.
4785 Z-Fold 2 11X17 50 10-90
stops.
4786 Z-Fold 2 B4 50 10-90
stops.(1=0.1mm)
The maximum quantity of sheets folded when
4787 Max Bi-Folding 1 1-15
bi-folding at the time of booklet ejection.
4788 Z-Fold 1 8K 50 10-90
stops.(1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the roller position when the fold is
made during envelope c-folding, and adjusts
4789 Envelope-Card Fold 1 A4SEF 50 10-90
stops.(1=0.1mm)
4790 Envelope-Card Fold 1 85X11SEF 50 10-90
stops.(1=0.1mm)
4791 Envelope-Card Fold 2 A4SEF 50 10-90
stops.(1=0.1mm)
4792 Envelope-Card Fold 2 85X11SEF 50 10-90
stops.(1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the amount of paper feeding (amount
4793 Paper Add Feed Adjustment 18 0-36 from when paper touches the end guide until
the motor stops).(1=0.5mm)
Time after nip release (100 ms activated) until
nip.
4794 Roll Nip Timing 21 2-48
Adjusts the timing of skew adjustment roller
nip release.(1=10ms)
Specifies the quantity of sheets of the other
size ejected for subtraction of the quantity of
4796 Z-Fild Stacker Tray Setting B4S 150 0-255sheet
z-fold sheets of B4SEF ejected in the stacker
tray.
Stacking limit quantity of z-fold B4SEF sheets
4797 Z-Fold Limit Stacking Tray B4S 20 0-255sheet
ejected in the stacking tray.
4798 Z-Fold Limit Top Tray 20 0-20sheet Z-fold ejected sheet limit, top tray
For lightweight paper, 182 mm or shorter in the
direction of transfer and 257 mm or narrower
4799 Sub Paddle Timing (Thin paper) 8 1-48 in width (B5LEF or smaller),
adjusts the timing of sub paddle support
operation. (1=2.5ms)
Stacking limit quantity of z-fold A3SEF and
4800 Z-Fold Limit Stacking Tray A3 30 2-255sheet
11x17 SEF sheets ejected in the stacking tray.
When using A3SEF, 1111x17 SEF, B4SEF, and
8K SEF: the time after nip release (100 ms
4801 Roll Nip Timing Z 21 2-48 activated) until nip.
Adjusts the timing of skew adjustment roller
nip release.(1=10ms)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-74 ]
Test Modes

With A4SEF and LET SEF paper and 2-hole
4802 Punch Registration Timing A4S 8 1-255 punching, adjusts the time until punch side
registration detection starts.
Set additional tamping times on normal booklet
4808 Booklet Add Tamping Setting 1 0 0-2
tamping. (Except IOT:Pinot)
Booklet Staple Hold Add Tamping Set additional tamping times on booklet staple
4809 0 0-10
Setting 1 hold. (Except IOT:Pinot)
Set specified number on additional tamping
times. (Except IOT:Pinot)
4810 Booklet Add Tamping Number Setting 1 6 0-25 At normal tamping, At final tamping, At staple
hold, At staple front fold position (Larger than
B4SEF)
Select the sensor for adjusting Stacker tray height.
4811 Enable Stacker Height Sensor 1 0 0: Not permitted (Use Stacker Height Sensor 2)
1: Permitted (Use Stacker Height Sensor 1)
Paper width threshold of implementing the
behavior support paddle.
4815 Paddle Support Set Width 2 235 204-254
No action make if the paper width is less than
235mm.
Converted sheet quantity for one z-fold sheet
4816 Z-Fold 11X17 Setting 10 1-20sheet
(A3 or 1111x17 ).
For standard paper, 182 mm or shorter in the
direction of transfer and 257 mm or narrower
4817 Sub Paddle Timing B5L 1 1-48 in width (smaller than B5LEF),
adjusts the timing of sub paddle support
operation. (1=2.5ms)
Record of the number of punches used to
4820 Punch Timing 0 0-65535time
detect when the punch container is full.
Quantity of stapled copies ejected in the
4821 Stacker Tray Timing 0 0-255copy
stacker tray.
Width of highest sheet in the stacking tray.
4822 Stacker Tray Top Width 0 0-65535
0x0000 to 0xFFFF (1=0.1mm)
Length of highest sheet in the stacking tray.
4823 Stacker Tray Top Length 0 0-65535
0x0000 to 0xFFFF (1=0.1mm)
Width of largest sheet in the stacking tray.
4824 Stacker Tray Max Width 0 0-65535
0x0000 to 0xFFFF (1=0.1mm)
Length of largest sheet in the stacking tray.
4825 Stacker Tray Min Length 0 0-65535
0x0000 to 0xFFFF (1=0.1mm)
Specifies the amount for raising and lowering
the end guide when ejecting small booklets
to prevent mis-registration by these additional
4826 Booklet End Guide Calibration Setting 60 30-255
raising and lowering actions.
Valid when 763-425=1
(1=0.1mm)
Indicates the ejection status of z-fold A3SEF
0: Not ejected
4827 Stacker Tray Eject A3 0 and 11x17 SEF sheets ejected in the stacking
1: Ejected
tray.
Specifies the timing to start raising and
lowering the compile paddle for each five
4830 Compile Paddle UP Timing (Short) 90 4-255 sheets beginning with the 60th sheet. (When
the paper is shorter than 330 mm.)
(1=5ms)
Specifies the timing to start raising and
lowering the compile paddle for each five
4831 Compile Paddle UP Timing (Long) 120 4-255 sheets beginning with the 60th sheet. (When
the paper is 330 mm or longer.)
(1=5ms)
0: 3-hole puncher
Notification to IOT when 2/3-hole puncher is
4832 Disable 2/3 Hole Puncher A-CHANG 1 1: 2/3 hole
installed
puncher
[ 16-75 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

0: Prohibited Controls puncher initialization during mixed
4833 Enable Mix Job Punch 1
1: Permitted jobs.
Limit of sheets for control of ejection speed
4834 Eject Speed Setting <216 60 1-255sheet from the stacker. (When the paper is 216 mm
or shorter.)
Limit of SEF sheets for control of ejection
4835 Eject Speed Setting >216 30 1-255sheet speed from the stacker. (When the paper is
longer than 216 mm.)
made during envelope z-folding, and adjusts
4836 Envelope-Z Fold 1 A4SEF 50 10-90
stops. (1=0.1mm)
4837 Envelope-Z Fold 1 LETTER 50 10-90
stops. (1=0.1mm)
4838 Envelope-Z Fold 2 A4SEF 50 10-90
stops. (1=0.1mm)
4839 Envelope-Z Fold 2 LETTER 50 10-90
stops. (1=0.1mm)
4840 Center Staple Adjustment 100 50-150 Adjusts the center staple position.
Cycles of operation of the set clamp (lower
value)
4841 Set Clamp Timing (LOW) 0 0-65535
Total set clamp operating cycles = higher value
x 65535 + lower value
Cycles of operation of the set clamp (higher
value)
4842 Set Clamp Timing (TOP) 0 0-65535
Total set clamp operating cycles = higher value
x 65535 + lower value
Total quantity of sheets fed (lower value)
4843 Paper Feed Timing (LOW) 0 0-65535 Total quantity of sheets = higher value x 65535
+ lower value
Total quantity of sheets fed (higher value)
4844 Paper Feed Timing (TOP) 0 0-65535 Total quantity of sheets = higher value x 65535
+ lower value
Conditions: Every sheet, no punching,
paper 298 mm or shorter, paper 235 mm or
wider, z-folding, slip sheet, and other than
heavyweight paper
Conditions: Lightweight paper, auto decurler,
paper longer than 364 mm (B4SEF) in
0: Conforms to
direction of transfer, and IOT ejection inverted
4847 Decurler Control Setting (THIN-PAPER) 0 IOT control
Under these conditions, only when the
1: OFF
decurler switch is in auto mode, regardless of
decurler activation or deactivation fro
Conditions: Lightweight paper, 182 mm or
shorter in the direction of transfer, and 257
mm or narrower (B5LEF or smaller), and other
4848 Puddle UP (THIN-PAPER) 30 10-50sheet than z-folding
Under these conditions, this test mode
specifies the number of sheets for paddle
solenoid on operation (movi
Rev.1.00 [ 16-76 ]
Test Modes

Specifies operation for activating and deactivating the paddle
solenoid for each five sheets beginning with the 50th sheet.
0: Operational under all conditions
4849 Puddle Down (THIN-PAPER) 0 1: Only operational for lightweight paper B5LEF or smaller with
z-folding
2: Only operational for lightweight or standard paper B5LEF or
smaller with z-folding
Changes tampering for B5LEF or smaller paper, except during
z-folding.
4850 Tamping Set (THIN-PAPER) 0 0: Current status
1: Suitable for lightweight paper
2: Suitable for lightweight or standard paper
0: Not ejected Indicates the status of ejection to the stacker
4851 Stacker Tray Eject Z-Fold 0
1: Ejected for B4 sheets with z-folding.
When heavyweight paper is received in the booklet compiler, this
test mode specifies different rates of deceleration of the booklet
paper path motor for each paper feed tray.
Other than interposer tray
4852 Thick Paper Path Motor Speed 0 0: 50 mm/s slower 1: 50 mm/s slower 2: 250 mm/s slower 3: 250
mm/s slower
Interposer tray
0: 50 mm/s slower 1: 250 mm/s slower 2: 50 mm/s slower 3: 250
mm/s slower
Quantity of z-fold sheets ejected to the
4853 Stacker Tray Eject Timing 0 0-255sheet
stacking tray.
1: Top Tray
2: Stacker Information about the ejection destination
4854 Destination ID 1
3: Booklet immediately before the printer is turned off.
4: Folder
0: Down Records the stacking tray flapper status
4855 Stacker Tray Flapper Condition 0
1: Up immediately before the printer is turned OFF.
Specifies the stacking limit (in copies) for
4856 Single Staple Stack Limitation 100 1-255copy single-staple sets when the stacking tray
flapper is up.
Specifies the stacking limit (in copies) for dual-
4857 Double Staple Stack Limitation 100 1-255copy staple sets when the stacking tray flapper is
up.
In punch mode, with paper 216 mm or shorter
and 2/3 punching: 203 mm ≤ paper width ≤
47 223 mm
4858 Puch Reverse Adjustment 3 8-68
43 (3-hole) 2/4 punching: Adjusts the correction loop
amount for motor reverse skew when 216 mm
< paper width ≤ 223 mm
In punch mode, with paper longer than 216
mm and 2/3 punching: 203 mm ≤ paper width
≤ 223 mm
4859 Puch Reverse Adjustment 4 39 8-68
2/4 punching: Adjusts the correction loop
amount for motor reverse skew when 216 mm
< paper width ≤ 235 mm
Specifies to prevent mis-registration in booklet stapling job with
small paper (shorter than 356.8 mm). After the tamper is moved
toward the front 20 mm following the last tamping, it is restored to
the original position to prevent paper from clinging to the compiler
surface.
When preventative operation is used, generally select 1, high-
4860 Booklet Miss-registration Setting 0
speed mode 2 and 3 are provided for selection in case mis-
registration worsens in high-speed mode.
0: No preventative operation
1: Executes preventative operation with profile 1 (high-speed)
2: Executes preventative operation with profile 2 (medium-speed)
3: Executes preventative operation with profile 3 (low-speed)
[ 16-77 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

0: Not ejected Indicates the state of ejection to the stacker for
4861 Stacker Tray Eject Single Staple 0
1: Ejected single-staple sets.
4862 Stacker Tray Eject Double Staple 0
1: Ejected for dual-staple sets.
4863 Stacker Tray Eject Z-fold Staple 0
1: Ejected for stapled sets without z-folding.
Corresponding sheet quantity calculated for
4864 Z-Fold Number COMV B4 20 1-20sheet
one z-fold sheet (B4 or 8K)
Puncher position status immediately before
4865 Puncher Position Status 0 0-3
the printer is turned OFF.
Specifies the time for auto ejection of buffer
sheets.
(Sheets are automatically ejected if, when a
4866 Buffer-Paper Eject Setting 3 1-10sec
sheet is in the finisher, the time specified in
this setting elapses and another sheet does
not arrive.)
When A4SEF folder c-folding is used, this
test mode specifies the starting time when
4867 Folder C Solenoid ON A4SEF 86 0-160
the folder c solenoid is activated by the folder
entrance sensor. (1=2.5ms)
When LET SEF folder c-folding is used, this
test mode specifies the starting time when
4868 Folder C Solenoid ON LETTER SEF 86 0-160
the folder c solenoid is activated by the folder
entrance sensor. (1=2.5ms)
Specifies the starting time when the folder c
4869 Folder C Solenoid ON 120 60-160
solenoid is activated. (1=2.5ms)
When paper shorter than B4S is used, this
test mode specifies the quantity of sets for
4870 Booklet Full Time Small 20 10-100set
detecting when the booklet tray is full.
(Based on a guideline of 15 sheets per set.)
When paper B4S or longer is used, this
test mode specifies the quantity of sets for
4871 Booklet Full Time Large 20 10-100set
detecting when the booklet tray is full.
(Based on a guideline of 15 sheets per set.)
Records the status when Mix Size Full Fail
4872 Mix Size Full Fail Status 0 0-1 occurs immediately before the printer is turned
off.
Specifies the maximum stapled sheets when
4873 Small Size Max Stapling 100 0-200sheet
small paper (A4/LET LEF or smaller) is used.
Specifies the amount of adjustment toward the
4875 Dual Staple Move Adjustmet Front 20 0-40
front during dual stapling. (1=0.157mm)
Specifies the amount of adjustment of the dual
4876 Dual Staple Move Adjustmet F/R 20 0-40
staple width during dual stapling. (1=0.157mm)
0: Disabled Specifies whether stack height sensor 3 is
4877 Stack Hight Sensor 3 Enable 0
1: Enabled enabled.
0: Disabled Specifies auto LED activation during decurler
4878 Decular Auto Mode LED Enable 0
1: Enabled operation when the decurler is in auto mode.
Adjusts the position of booklet staples in the
FS direction.Adjustment to a value larger than
4879 Booklet Staple Adjustment FS 30 0-50
30 moves the staple position toward the front.
(1=0.2618mm)
Sheet Exit Stack Height Sensor 2 0: Disabled Specifies adjustment of the height of stack
4880 0
Enable 1: Enabled height sensor 2 when sheets are ejected.
Adjusts the amount of overlap of buffer sheets
4881 Buffer Reverse Adjustment 29 0-80 in punch mode; in each size, the reverse pulse
+ NVM value. (1=0.52mm)
Specifies whether the envelope folder tray is detected to be full
based on the quantity of sheets ejected.
4882 Envelope Folder Tray Full Count Enable 0
0: Not detected for the quantity of sheets ejected (disabled)
1: Detected for the quantity of sheets ejected (enabled)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-78 ]
Test Modes

Specifies the quantity of ejected sheets to use
when detecting whether the envelope folder
Envelope Folder Tray Full Check tray is full based on the quantity of sheets
4883 30 10-40sheet
Number ejected.
Enabled when "NVM: Envelope Folder Tray
Full Count Enable" = 1
Changes tamping to counteract mis-
Stacker Miss-Registration Improvement 0: Enabled registration of stacker compiling, to remedy
4884 0
Enable 1: Disabled mis-registration.
This lowers productivity slightly.
4886 IPL Version 0 0-255 Indicates the IPL version.
Cycles of z-folding (lower value)
4887 Z-Fold Timing (LOW) 0 0-65535time Total folding cycles = higher value x 65535 +
lower value
Cycles of z-folding (higher value)
4888 Z-Fold Timing (TOP) 0 0-65535time Total folding cycles = higher value x 65535 +
lower value
stapling.
3-sheet adjustment value (paper smaller than
B4S)
[• When the bottom is long
4889 Booklet Fold Calibration 1 S 100 0-200
Difference (mm)x10*x0.5 is added to the
•When the top is long, the difference (mm)
value and entered.]
(1=0.1mm)
stapling.
4890 Booklet Fold Calibration 2 S 100 0-200 4-sheet adjustment value (paper smaller than
B4S)
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
stapling.
4891 Booklet Fold Calibration 3 S 100 0-200 5-7 sheet adjustment value (paper smaller
than B4S)
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
stapling.
4892 Booklet Fold Calibration 4 S 100 0-200 8-sheet (or more) adjustment value (paper
smaller than B4S)
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
Automatically adjusts the staple position for
each set of sheets based on input of the staple
offset in booklet stapling mode when sets of 15
sheets are folded. (When using B4S or larger
paper.)
4893 Booklet Staple 15 (LARGE) 100 0-200
position, the difference (mm)x10* is subtracted
• When the staple is higher than the fold
the current NVM value and entered.]
(1=0.1mm)
[ 16-79 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Automatically adjusts the staple position for
each set of sheets based on input of the staple
offset in booklet stapling mode when sets of 15
4894 Booklet Staple 15 (SMALL) 100 0-200
sheets are folded. (Paper smaller than B4S.)
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
sheet during booklet stapling.
3-sheet adjustment value
4895 Booklet Staple Calibration 1 100 0-200 position, the difference (mm)x10* is subtracted
• When the staple is lower than the fold
the]
(1=0.1mm)
4896 Booklet Staple Calibration 2 100 0-200
4-sheet adjustment value
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
5-7 sheet adjustment value
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
8-1 4 sheet adjustment value
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the rear stapling position when paper
4900 Rear Staple Adjustment 100 50-150 250 mm or narrower is used. (Other than
A4LEF and A3SEF.)
0: Disabled
4901 12-227 Disable Setting 0 Replaces 12-227 Fail with 12-110 Jam.
1: Enabled
Specifies the threshold paper width for
performing paddle support operation.
4903 Paddle Support Setting (WIDTH) 235 204-254mm Not performed for paper narrower than 235
mm.The tamper operation threshold value is
changed at the same time.
Specifies the Card 1 setting.
0: Operation as usual when Card 1 is used (no buffer, no collision
4904 Thick Paper 1 Setting 1 avoidance)
1: Operation as if Card 2 were used when Card 1 is used (no
buffer, but collision avoidance used)
Specifies the back sheet setting.
0: Operation as if standard paper were used when a back sheet
4905 Re-used Paper Setting 0 is used
1: Operation as if Card 2 were used when a back sheet is used
(no buffer, but collision avoidance used)
Specifies whether there is a back buffer.
When the thickness of recycled paper or the back sheet
is specified as 2 in the NVM, the thickness 2 setting takes
4906 Buffer Disable Setting 0
precedence.
0: Standard paper, back buffer
1: Standard paper, no back buffer
Rev.1.00 [ 16-80 ]
Test Modes

Changes the quantity of sheets for tamping
three times at step 6 of tamping.
4907 3 Tamping Paper Setting 30 1-100sheet
By default, sheets are tamped 3 times from the
31st sheet.
Specifies to enable stapling with a 50-pin
0: Disabled staple cartridge even when the calculated
4908 Z-Fold Staple 50 Pin 0
1: Enabled z-fold sheet quantity corresponds to 50 sheets
or more.
stapling.
3-sheet adjustment value (B4S or larger
paper)
4909 Booklet Fold Calibration 1 L 100 0-200
value and entered.
value and entered.]
(1=0.1mm)
stapling.
4910 Booklet Fold Calibration 2 L 100 0-200 4-sheet adjustment value (B4S or larger
paper)
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
stapling.
4911 Booklet Fold Calibration 3 L 100 0-200 5-7 sheet adjustment value (B4S or larger
paper)
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
stapling.
4912 Booklet Fold Calibration 4 L 100 0-200 8-sheet adjustment value (B4S or larger
paper)
[Same as above]
(1=0.1mm)
Adjusts the timing when paddle support
4913 Sub Puddle Move Setting 8 1-48
operation is started. (1=2.5mm)
Specifies whether paddle support operation
1 (paddle operation) is performed for paper
0: No
4915 Paddle Support I/P CARD 2 1 narrower than 235 mm (235 mm can be
1: Yes
changed in another NVM) and of a thickness
of 2.
0: No Specifies whether restraining with the paddle
4917 Card Thickness 2 Damper Retainer 1
1: Yes is performed for paper of thickness 2.
0: No Specifies whether restraining with the paddle
4918 Z-Fold Damper Retainer 1
1: Yes is performed for z-folding.
When LET SEF NNV Z is used with folder
c-folding, this test mode specifies the time
4919 C-Fold Solenoid ON LETTER SEF 0-160
when the folder c solenoid is activated after
activation of the folder entrance sensor.
When A4 SEF NNV Z is used with folder
100 c-folding, this test mode specifies the time
4920 C-Fold Solenoid ON A4S 0-160
80 (AP) when the folder c solenoid is activated after
When B4 SEF z-folding is used with folder
4921 C-Fold Solenoid ON B4S 0-160
[ 16-81 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

When 8KTFX z-folding is used with folder
4922 C-Fold Solenoid ON 8KTFX 0-160
When 8KGCO z-folding is used with folder
4923 C-Fold Solenoid ON 8KGSO 0-160
100 When A3SEF z-folding is used with folder
80 (AP) c-folding, this test mode specifies the time
4924 C-Fold Solenoid ON A3S 0-160
When 11x17 SEF z-fold is used with folder
4925 C-Fold Solenoid ON 11X17S 0-160
Specifies the time for activation of the folder c
4926 C-Fold Solenoid Timing Envelope 0-160
solenoid when envelope z/z fold is used.
Changes the timing of raising the eject clamp
in modes without punching. (Affects the eject
4927 Clamp UP Timing NO-P 47 42-50ms clamp motor.)
Changes the time (in ms) after deactivation of
the compiler exit sensor (set first).
Changes the timing of raising the eject clamp
in modes with punching. (Affects the eject
4928 Clamp UP Timing 49 45-53ms clamp motor.)
Changes the time (in ms) after deactivation of
the compiler exit sensor (set first).
For IOT paper
2/4 hole punching: 216 < width ≤ 230
2/3 hole punching: 203 ≤ width ≤ 223
4929 Punch Side Adjustment IOT1 0 0-24
Under these conditions, adjusts the position
of the punch side. (Adjusts the punch position
toward the front.) (1=0.125mm)
For IOT paper
4930 Punch Side Adjustment IOT2 0 0-24 2/3 hole punching: 223 < width ≤ 241
Subsequently the same as TM04929.
(1=0.125mm)
For IOT paper
(1=0.125mm)
For IOT paper
(1=0.125mm)
For IOT paper
2/4 hole punching: 285 < width < 297
4933 Punch Side Adjustment IOT5 0 0-24 2/3 hole punching: 285 < width < 297
(1=0.125mm)
For IOT paper
2/4 hole punching: width = 297
4934 Punch Side Adjustment IOT6 0 0-24 2/3 hole punching: width = 297
(1=0.125mm)
For IOT paper
2/4 hole punching: width ≤ 216 mm
4935 Punch Side Adjustment IOT7 0 0-24 Under these conditions, adjusts the position
of the punch side. (Adjusts the punch position
toward the rear.) (1=0.125mm)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-82 ]
Test Modes

Conditions: Lightweight paper, 182 mm or shorter in the direction
of transfer, and 257 mm or narrower (B5LEF or smaller), and
other than z-folding. Specifies the speed of ejection of single
sheets to the compiling tray.
4943 Compile Exit Speed B5 THIN 4
1: 544 pps (285 mm/sec)
2: 735 pps (384.8 mm/sec)
3: 830 pps (434.6 mm/sec)
4: 1010 pps (528.8 mm/sec)
Conditions: Standard paper, 182 mm or shorter in the direction of
transfer, and 257 mm or narrower (B5LEF or smaller), and other
than z-folding. Specifies the speed of ejection of single sheets to
the compiling tray.
4944 Compile Exit Speed B5L 3
1: 544 pps (285 mm/sec)
2: 735 pps (384.8 mm/sec)
3: 830 pps (434.6 mm/sec)
4: 1010 pps (528.8 mm/sec)
Specifies whether to counteract mis-
registration through excessive raising and
0: Disabled lowering of the end guide when repositioning
4945 Booklet Miss-Registration E-G SET 1
1: Enabled end guide stapling in stapled jobs for small
booklets and when repositioning end guide
folding in unstapled/bi-folded jobs.
Specifies the speed of the finisher IF unit
4946 Decurler Motor Speed 990 800-1200 decurler motor relative to the speed of the
printer. (1=0.1%; 2 at a time)
4950 Eject Tray Setting 0 0: Top tray 1: Stacking tray 2: Booklet tray 3: 3-fold tray
4951 Offset Eject Setting 0 0: OFF 1: ON
4952 Staple Setting 0 0: OFF 1: Front 1 position 2: Center 2 positions 3: Back 1 position
4953 Puncher Setting 0 0: OFF 1: 2 holes 2: 3 holes, 4 holes
4954 Booklet Setting 0 0: OFF 1: 2-fold 2: 2-fold and stapling
0: OFF 1: Z-fold (tri-fold "z") 2: Z-fold (tri-fold "c") 3: Z-fold 4:
4955 Folding Setting 0
Saddle fold
4956 Patch Level 0 Indicates Finisher Software Version Patch Level
Set [Un-staple Set Eject sheet number] on
following conditions.
Conditions: At Un-stapling, paper length is
longer than 216mm, Mixed paper in one set
4957 Un-staple Limitation Stacker Tray Mix 5 2-50
job, At changing IOT Tray
This is for avoiding sheet sticking by static
electricity that caused by changing the paper
kind.
Enable 100 sheets Z-fold paper stacking when
Z-fold 100 Stacking Flapper mounted.
0: Prohibited
4958 Z-FOLD 100 Sheets Stacking 0 However, permitted is selected, TM4729
1: Permitted
[Z-FOLD 50 Sheet Stacking] must select
prohibited.
Z-fold Paper Jam countermeasure (Enables
when TM4958 select as permitted)
0: Normal action
Countermeasures action:
1:
4959 Z-fold Paper Jam countermeasure 0 1. Will not make flapper-up action, if already
Countermeasures
staple job (includes Z-fold) is ejected.
action
2. At flapper-up condition, if starts staple job,
will recognize as [Mix full].
Selects the off-set position of the Stacker Tray
4960 Stacket Tray Off-set Position 0 0-4
when the power turned OFF.
Pre-discharged (Stacker Tray) Z-fold To record of pre-discharged stapled job
4961 0 0-255sheet
Stapled Job (include Z-fold) number.
4962 Stacker Tray Paper Loading 0 0-65535sheet Total loading number on the Stacker Tray
At flapper up, sets limit number of stapled job
(Z-fold not included).
4963 Flapper Up Staple Number 60 0-200
To enable this test mode, need to select
permitted on TM4958.
[ 16-83 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

0: By IOTcommand
4964 Z-fold Decurler Control Setting 1 1: When decurler control is set as [Automatic], adds correction on
up-curl direction on the Z-fold job only.
Sheet pitch adjustment (Former paper:A3SEF
4965 Z-fold Paper Pitch Setting (A3) 2206 0-65535ms
Z-fold, Current paper: Z-fold includes)
Sheet pitch adjustment (Former paper:11x7
4966 Z-fold Paper Pitch Setting (11x17) 2246 0-65535ms
Sheet pitch adjustment (Former paper:B4SEF
4967 Z-fold Paper Pitch Setting (B4) 2024 0-65535ms
Sheet pitch adjustment (Former paper:8K
4968 Z-fold Paper Pitch Setting 8K 2107 0-65535ms
Sheet pitch adjustment (Former paper:A3SEF
4969 Paper Pitch Setting (A3) 5513 0-65535ms
Z-fold, Current paper: No Z-fold includes)
Sheet pitch adjustment (Former paper:11x7
4970 Paper Pitch Setting (11x17) 5531 0-65535ms
Sheet pitch adjustment (Former paper:B4SEF
4971 Paper Pitch Setting (B4) 5422 0-65535ms
Sheet pitch adjustment (Former paper:8K
4972 Paper Pitch Setting 8K 5449 0-65535ms
0: Incompatible mechanism　　
4973 Z-fold Speed Up Mechanism 0
1: Compatible mechanism
1: 591.6mm/s (1570pps) 2: 650.3mm/s (1725pps) 3: 703.9mm/s
(1867pps)
Z-fold Eject Speed (Smaller than B4
4974 7 4: 550mm/s (1458pps) 5: 570mm/s (1515pps) 6: 610mm/s
size)
(1623pps)
7: 630mm/s (1675pps)
Set flapper type of the Stacker Tray
4975 Stacker Tray Type Setting 1 0: Z-fold 100 sheets Type (New Type)
1: Z-fold 30 sheets Type
Set sheet number to make up-curl
compensation from set first sheet against
former paper of Z-fold job.
4976 Z-fold Up Curl Adjustment 2 0-5 To avoid occurring the curl problem, when the
paper is ejected from the compiler.
0: No decurler force up compensation
4977 Envelope C-fold Decurler Force Up 1 1: Apply decurler force up compensation on Env-C simplex job.
(When Tazarn not connected)
Set the number of the sheet to make lowering
the flapper. (Except Z-fold job)
If paper ejected to the Stacker reaches the
4978 Flapper Down Stacker Sheet Number 5000 100-5000 number set in this test mode, and also Z-fold
number is less than 30, lower the flapper.
Set fall time at the Stacker Tray Sensor 2, after
flapper rise.
Stacker Fall Time Setting (After Rising
4979 1 1-800 To enable this test mode, need to select
Flapper)
(1=2.5ms)
Stacker limitation number setting. (A3, 11x17
80 Z-Fold 100 Stacking)
4980 Z-FOLD 100 Sheets Stacking (A3) 0-255sheet
79 (Tarzan) To enable this test mode, need to select
Stacker limitation number setting. (B4 Z-Fold
60 100 Stacking)
4981 Z-FOLD 100 Sheets Stacking (B4) 0-255sheet
58 (Tarzan) To enable this test mode, need to select
Rev.1.00 [ 16-84 ]
Test Modes

Flapper rise time setting.
4982 Flapper Up Move Time 12 5-20
(1=100ms)
Flapper fall time setting.
4983 Flapper Down Move Time 12 5-20
(1=100ms)
Add tamping action at fold position before stapling on Booklet
Staple Mode.
Larger than B4 SEF size, also Booklet paper number is equal
or more than the setting value of [TM4810 Booklet Add Tamping
4984 Booklet Staple Tamping Add Setting 1 2
Number Setting 1].
0: Prohibited
1: Permitted
2: Permit only for I/P cover job
Add tamping action number at fold position
before stapling on Booklet Staple Mode.
Larger than B4 SEF size, also Booklet paper
Booklet Staple Tamping Add Numbe number is equal or more than the setting value
4985 4 1-10
Setting 1 of [TM4810 Booklet Add Tamping Number
Setting 1].
Z-fold number to make initialization of Stacker
Tray for Flapper Up, if Z-fold paper that
Z-fold 100 Flapper Up Number Setting exceeded the number set in the test mode is
4986 10 1-30
(A3) stacked on the stacker tray.
(TM4958 Z Fold 100 Stack Enable, Paper size
is A3 or 11x17)
Same as TM4986
Z-fold 100 Flapper Up Number Setting
4987 5 1-30 (TM4958 Z Fold 100 Stack Enable, Paper size
(B4)
is A3 or 8K)
To enable this test mode, need to select [1] on
TM4989.
Stop Processing Time for Overlapped Make the first paper ejection clamp up timing
4988 0 0-35
Paper Buffer Checking as a base point, stop processing back before
the set time (in this test mode).
(1=2.5ms)
Stop processing, for checking overlapped paper buffer at
Stop Processing for Overlapped Paper shipping.
4989 0
Buffer Checking 0: No stop processing
1: Perform stop processing
Staple set eject number limitation (A3, 11x17,
include Z-fold)
4990 Z-fold 100 Staple Number Setting (A3) 60 0-200
Staple set eject number limitation (B4, 8K,
include Z-fold)
4991 Z-fold 100 Staple Number Setting (B4) 40 0-200
To allow the flapper set according to the state of the paper (Z-fold
0 prior paper).
4992 Z-fold Prior Paper Up Curl Setting
1 （Tarzan） 0: Apply when Flap Up
1: Apply anytime
Conversion rate for 1 Z-fold job (A3, 11x17).
4993 Z-fold Conversion Number (A3, 11x17) 4 1-20
Enable only when connected with Tarzan IOT.
Conversion rate for 1 Z-fold job (B4, 8K).
4994 Z-fold Conversion Number (B4, 8K) 8 1-20
Enable only when connected with Tarzan IOT.
[ 16-85 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Forward and reverse fold action times of
Booklet Forward/Reverse Action Time 1
4995 0-3 booklet folder roll.
(A4S or less) 3 （Tarzan）
Paper length is A4S (310mm) or less.
Forward and reverse fold action times of
Booklet Forward/Reverse Action Time
4996 1 0-3 booklet folder roll.
(Over A4S)
Paper length is over A4S (310mm).
Eject speed setting for un-staple job (1 set exceed 30 sheets,
0 paper length is over 216mm)
4997 Un-staple Eject Speed
1 （Tarzan） 0: Eject 5 action (54 steps - 1584 pps)
1: Eject 11 action (117 steps - 1725 pps)
Set shelf storage timing on Z-fold un-staple job.
4998 Z-fold Shelf Storage Timing 1 0: Size before Z-fold job
1: Size after Z-fold job
Rev.1.00 [ 16-86 ]
Test Modes
5-3. OPTIONS / Scanner Test Mode

Sensor Monitoring (S) OPTIONS / Scanner

5010 FB Original Detection Sensor
5011 FB Original Size Sensor 1
ON: Original loaded (light passes through)
OFF: No Original (light blocked)
5017 FB Original Cover Sensor ON: Cover closed (light blocked)
5018 FB Original Cover Angle Sensor OFF: Cover open (light passes through)
ON: Mirror at origin (home position, light blocked)
5019 Scanner HP Sensor
OFF: Mirror not at origin (home position, light passes through)
5030 AF Original Detection Sensor
5031 AF Registration Sensor ON: Original loaded (light passes through)
5032 AF Original IN Sensor OFF: No Original (light blocked)
5033 AF Original OUT Sensor
ON: Cover closed (light blocked)
5034 AF Feed Cover Set SW
OFF: Cover open (light passes through)
5035 AF Tray Sensor 1
5036 AF Tray Sensor 2 ON: Original loaded (light passes through)
5040 AF Unit Detection OFF: No Original (light blocked)
5041 AF Separation Sensor
Drive Checking (M) OPTIONS / Scanner

5210 Scanner Lamp Activates the scanner lamp. Drive time: indefinite
Activates the AF read pulse motor in the direction of transfer. Drive
5230 AF Read Pulse Motor CW
time: indefinite
5231 AF Fan Activates the AF fan. Drive time: indefinite
[ 16-87 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Unit Checking (U) OPTIONS / Scanner

5400 Scanner Test Print
Prints a test pattern generated by the scanner.
RGB gradation data generated by the CCD board is converted to a CMYK image and printed.
Uses the resolution set in 05700 (test operation resolution setting).
Uses the size set in 05701 (test operation size setting).
Paper for printing is transferred from the paper feed tray. Finishing is not performed.
5405 Scanner Front LED
Illuminates the scanner front LEDs.
LED (green) / LED (red) (OFF: 0 / ON: 1)
Repeats this sequence: 0/0 → 1/0 → 0/1 → 1/1 → 0/0
5406 Scanner Profile Mode
Executes scanner profiling mode.
Profiling is performed as follows (first time).
• Prepares to record the white level adjustment value
• Transitions to recording the white level adjustment value
• Records the white level adjustment value (first time)
• Performs white shading
Profiling is subsequently performed as follows (second time).
• Records the white level adjustment value (second time)
• Performs white shading
• Updates the profile
5409 Scanner PRMTR Print
Prints a list of test numbers and setting values for tests with values that have been changed from the defaults.
The number and setting values of scanner-related tests are printed with serial number, scanner firmware version, AF firmware
version, and setting values changed from the defaults.
The test number and setting values are transmitted as ASCII strings.
Test numbers are five digits, as are setting values. Numbers and setting values are separated by a comma, and tests are
separated by line breaks.
Line breaks when printing are determined by the controller.
5410 FB Scan 1 Cycle
Activates the FB scanner for one cycle. (Return to home position → shading → scanning → return to home position.)
Scans at the resolution set in 05700 (test operation resolution setting).
Scans at the size set in 05701 (test operation size setting).
Test speed set in 05702 (test operation speed setting).
Image data is not output.
5411 FB Scan RPT Cycle
Continuously performs the operations as specified in 05410 (FB scanning, 1 cycle).
When the test stops, FB scanning stops and the carriage returns to the home position.
5412 Carriage HP Return
Moves the scanner carriage to the home position.
5413 Lamp Change Position
After the carriage is moved to the home position, it is moved to the position for lamp replacement.
Lamp replacement position: 31.5 mm from the home position, toward the AF side.
5414 Carriage Lock Position
After the carriage is moved to the home position, it is moved to the locked position during auto startup.
Locked position: 8.5 mm from the home position, toward the AF side.
5415 Scanner Lock Release
Moves the carriage in the locked position to the home position.
5430 AF Scan Repeat Cycle
Performs continuous AF scanning for as many cycles as there are loaded originals. (Return to home position → shading →
move to AF scanning position → scanning.)
Uses setting values from 05700 (test operation resolution setting).
Uses setting values from 05701 (test operation size setting).
Uses setting values from 05702 (test operation speed setting).
Uses setting values from 05703 (test operation AF scanning settings).
Image data is not output.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-88 ]
Test Modes
Unit Checking (U) OPTIONS / Scanner

5431 AF Original Feed Action
Transfers AF originals continuously, for as many cycles as there are loaded originals.
Transfers originals at the speed set in 05702 (test operation speed setting).
Scans the surface set in 05703 (test operation AF scanning settings).
5432 AF VR ADJ (P-CARD)
Adjusts the AF original paper guide VR, based on postcard-sized paper (100 mm).
5433 AF VR ADJ (A4R)
Adjusts the AF original paper guide VR, based on A4 Landscape paper (297 mm).
Initialization (I) OPTIONS / Scanner

5501 Scanner Jam Clear
Forces paper jam errors to be cleared.
Because this test mode forces paper jam errors to be cleared, be sure to remove jammed originals in the scanner before
executing this test mode. (Remove paper in the AF original paper path.) If the paper is not removed, the scanner will remain
jammed with the jam error cleared, preventing subsequent scanner jams from being detected.
5508 Scanner Over-Parameter Clear
Restores default values of all out-of-range test setting values.
5509 Scanner Test Parameter Clear
Restores default values of all test setting values that have been changed from the default values.
* Data stored in EEPROM is also restored to the defaults.
* The following scanner tests are not restored to defaults.
05900–05902 (default FB scanning settings)
05903–05905 (default AF scanning settings)
* The printer must be restarted before setting values for 05740–05788 (default image detail settings) take effect.
Data Monitoring (C) OPTIONS / Scanner

Displays errors that occurred on the scanner on the operation panel (error codes
5600 Scanner Error Display
and error names).
5605 Scanner TTL Control DSP Shows the scanner total count Value on the operation panel.
5606 FB Scan Count Display Shows the scanner FB count Value on the operation panel.
5607 AF Scan Count Display Shows the scanner AF count Value on the operation panel.
Displays test numbers and setting Values on the operation panel for which scanner
5608 Scanner Over-Parameter Display
test setting Values are out-of-range.
Displays test numbers and setting Values on the operation panel for which scanner
5609 Scanner Test Parameter DSP
test setting Values have been changed from the defaults.
5610 FB Original Size 0-8, 13-19, 31, 255
00: No paper left, 01: A3, 02: B4, 03: A4, 04: A4 Landscape, 05: B5, 06: B5
Landscape,
07: A5, 08: A5 Landscape, 09: B6, 11: Postcard, 13: Ledger, 14: Legal, 15: Letter
5630 AF Original Size 16: Letter Landscape, 17 : Statement, 18: Statement Landscape, 19: Foolscap, 31:
Irregular
255: Unknown (loaded/not loaded)
0: OFF 1:ON
Confirming White level
5631 Displays white level compensation of the red color by the Value set by test mode
compensation on Red Color
No.5706.
0: OFF 1:ON
5632 Displays white level compensation of the green color by the Value set by test mode
compensation on Green Color
No.5707.
0: OFF 1:ON
5633 Displays white level compensation of the blue color by the Value set by test mode
compensation on Blue Color
No.5708.
The four-digit serial number of color profiles downloaded to the custom area of the
5650 Color Profile S/N scanner are shown on the operation panel.
If none have been downloaded, the serial number is indicated as 0000.
[ 16-89 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Data Editing (D) OPTIONS / Scanner

Specifies the test resolution applied in test pattern printing, or in tests in which
the scanner is operated for one cycle or continuously, the AF unit is operated
5700 Test Print Resolution 0 continuously, or transfer by the AF unit is performed.
0: 300 dpi x 300 dpi, 1: 300 dpi x 600 dpi, 2: 600 dpi x 300 dpi, 3: 600 dpi x
600 dpi
Specifies the scanning size applied in test pattern printing, or in tests in
which the scanner is operated for one cycle or continuously, or the AF unit is
operated continuously.
* When you select 4 (600 dpi x 1200 dpi) in 05700 (test operation resolution
setting), this setting is disregarded and A4 landscape is used.
5701 Test Scan Size Select 0
* 6 (A3W, 303 mm x 432 mm) represents the largest supported scanning area.
0: A3 1: B4, 2: A4, 3: A4 Landscape 4: B5, 5: B5 Landscape
6: A3W (303 mm x 432 mm) 7: Foolscap, 8: Ledger, 9: Legal
10: Letter, 11: Letter Landscape 12: Statement, 13: Statement Landscape
14: A5, 15: A5 Landscape, 16: B6 17 : B6 Landscape, 18: Postcard
0: Simplex, cover Specifies the surface scanned in test modes 05430 (AF
5703 Test Scan S/D Select 0 only scanning, continuous cycles) and 05431 (AF original
1: Duplex transfer operation).
Set threshold of white level correction.
White level correction will be OFF if the value (change
White Level Threshold
5706 16 0-256 amount of the white level reference value of Red) received
(Red)
from the profile mode is lower than the value set in this test
mode.
White Level Threshold Same explanation with TM5706 (Change from Red to
5707 16 0-256
(Green) Green)
White Level Threshold
5708 16 0-256 Same explanation with TM5706 (Change from Red to Blue)
(Blue)
Adjusts the lateral position for originals scanned on the FB.
Images are moved as follows. Minimum value (81): -2.0 mm
Setting relative to the reference position. Maximum value (17 5):
5710 FB Scan Horizontal Position value of 81-175 +2.0 mm relative to the reference position.
05900 Negative values move images left, positive values move
images right.
(1=0.04233mm)
Adjusts the starting position (the amount to skip before
scanning) for originals scanned on the FB.
Setting
relative to the reference position. Maximum value (163):
5711 FB Scan Start Position value of 98-158
+2.6 mm relative to the reference position.
05901
Negative values move images toward the trailing edge,
positive values move images toward the leading edge.
(1=0.0753mm)
Adjusts the speed (image stretching/shrinkage) for originals
scanned on the FB.
Adjusts the speed of the FB read pulse motor.
Setting The speed is adjusted as follows. Minimum value (123):
FB Scan Elongation
5712 value of 123-133 -0.5% relative to the reference speed. Maximum value
Adjustment
05902 (133): +0.5% relative to the reference speed.
Negative values stretch the image, and positive values
shrink it.
(1=0.1%)
Specifies whether scanner operation is locked. (Operation
permitted/operation prohibited)
When you specify 1 (operation prohibited), the scanner
0: Operation does not function except for downloads in normal mode (FB
permitted or AF), AF initialization, and test mode 0571 5 (scanner lock
5715 Scanner Lock/Unlock 0
1: Operation setting).When scanner operations other than downloads in
prohibited normal mode (FB or AF), AF initialization, and test mode
0571 5 (scanner lock setting) are requested, error U06-4330
occurs, indicating that the scanner is locked and operation
is prohibited.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-90 ]
Test Modes

Specifies whether scanner operation is locked. (Operation
permitted/operation prohibited)
When you specify 1 (operation prohibited), the scanner
0: Operation does not function except for downloads in normal mode (FB
permitted or AF), AF initialization, and test mode 0571 5 (scanner lock
5715 Scanner Lock/Unlock 0
1: Operation setting).When scanner operations other than downloads in
prohibited normal mode (FB or AF), AF initialization, and test mode
0571 5 (scanner lock setting) are requested, error U06-4330
occurs, indicating that the scanner is locked and operation
is prohibited.
Specifies the offset adjustment value for R0 data.
The setting value is stored in EEPROM.
During offset adjustment, this setting value is used.
5718 R0/Offset Adjustment 0 0-12
After offset adjustment, the setting value is updated with the
value representing the results of adjustment setting value
stored in EEPROM is also updated.
Specifies the offset adjustment value for G0 data.
5719 G0/Offset Adjustment 0 0-12
Specifies the offset adjustment value for B0 data.
5720 B0/Offset Adjustment 0 0-12
Specifies the offset adjustment value for R1 data.
5721 R1/Offset Adjustment 0 0-12
Specifies the offset adjustment value for G1 data.
5722 G1/Offset Adjustment 0 0-12
Specifies the offset adjustment value for B1 data.
5723 B1/Offset Adjustment 0 0-12
Specifies the gain adjustment value for R0 data.
During gain adjustment, this setting value is used.
5724 R0/Gain Adjustment 0 0-127
After gain adjustment, the setting value is updated with the
value representing the results of adjustment. The setting
value stored in EEPROM is also updated.
Specifies the gain adjustment value for G0 data.
5725 G0/Gain Adjustment 0 0-127
Specifies the gain adjustment value for B0 data.
5726 B0/Gain Adjustment 0 0-127
[ 16-91 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Specifies the gain adjustment value for R1 data.
5727 R1/Gain Adjustment 0 0-127
Specifies the gain adjustment value for G1 data.
5728 G1/Gain Adjustment 0 0-127
Specifies the gain adjustment value for B1 data, which is
stored in EEPROM.
5729 B1/Gain Adjustment 0 0-127
Adjusts the lateral position for originals scanned using the
AF.
5730 AF Scan Horizonta Position 128 81-175 relative to the reference position. Maximum value (17 5):
Negative values move images right, and positive values
move images left.
scanning) of the top surface for originals scanned using the
AF.
Images are moved as follows. Minimum value (-40): -4.0
5731 AF Scan Start Position (F) 0 (-40 - 40)
mm relative to the reference position. Maximum value (40):
scanning) of the bottom surface for originals scanned using
the AF.
Images are moved as follows. Minimum value (-40): -4.0
5732 AF Scan Start Position (B) 0 (-40 - 40)
mm relative to the reference position. Maximum value (40):
Negative values move images toward the leading edge, and
positive values move images toward the trailing edge.
Adjusts the speed (image stretching/shrinkage) for the top
surface for originals scanned using the AF.
Adjusts the speed of the AF read pulse motor.
Setting
The speed is adjusted as follows. Minimum value (-20):
5733 AF Scan Elongation (F) value of (-20 - 20)
-2.0% relative to the reference speed. Maximum value (20):
05903
+2.0% relative to the reference speed.
Negative values stretch images, and positive values shrink
them.
Adjusts the speed (image stretching/shrinkage) for the
bottom surface for originals scanned using the AF.
Adjusts the speed of the AF read pulse motor.
Setting
The speed is adjusted as follows. Minimum value (-20):
5734 AF Scan Elongation (B) value of (-20 - 20)
-2.0% relative to the reference speed. Maximum value (20):
05904
+2.0% relative to the reference speed.
Negative values stretch images, and positive values shrink
them.
Adjusts the carriage position for originals scanned using the
AF.
Setting Images are moved as follows. Minimum value (74): -4.1 mm
5735 AF Scan Carriage Position value of 98-158 relative to the reference position. Maximum value (182):
05905 +4.1 mm relative to the reference position.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-92 ]
Test Modes

Edge Enhancement C/LN/ Specifies the default edge enhancement value.
5740 5 1-7
CLR Copy, line, color
Edge Enhancement C/LN/ Specifies the default edge enhancement value.
5741 5 1-7
MC Copy, line, monochrome
Edge Enhancement C/DU/ Specifies the default edge enhancement value.
5742 4 1-7
CLR/ED Copy, line/photo, color, error diffusion
5743 4 1-7
CLR/DS Copy, line/photo, color, dot process
5744 4 1-7
MC/ED Copy, line/photo, monochrome, error diffusion
5745 4 1-7
MC/DS Copy, line/photo, monochrome, dot process
Edge Enhancement C/PH/ Specifies the default edge enhancement value.
5746 1 1-7
CLR/ED Copy, photo, color, error diffusion
5747 1 1-7
CLR/DS Copy, photo, color, dot process
5748 1 1-7
MC/ED Copy, photo, monochrome, error diffusion
5749 1 1-7
MC/DS Copy, photo, monochrome, dot process
Edge Enhancement S/LN/ Specifies the default edge enhancement value.
5750 7 1-7
MC Scanner, line, monochrome
Edge Enhancement S/DU/ Specifies the default edge enhancement value.
5751 4 1-7
MC Scanner, line/photo, monochrome
Edge Enhancement S/PH/ Specifies the default edge enhancement value.
5752 1 1-7
MC Scanner, photo, monochrome
5753 7 1-7
GRY Scanner, line, grayscale
5754 4 1-7
GRY Scanner, line/photo, grayscale
5755 1 1-7
GRY Scanner, photo, grayscale
5756 7 1-7
CLR Scanner, line, color
5757 4 1-7
CLR Scanner, line/photo, color
5758 1 1-7
CLR Scanner, photo, color
Specifies the default Moire elimination value.
5759 Moire C/LN/CLR 1 1-7
Copy, line, color
5760 Moire C/LN/MC 1 1-7
Copy, line, monochrome
5761 Moire C/DU/CLR/ED 4 1-7
Copy, line/photo, color, error diffusion
5762 Moire C/DU/CLR/DS 4 1-7
Copy, line/photo, color, dot process
5763 Moire C/DU/MC/ED 4 1-7
Copy, line/photo, monochrome, error diffusion
5764 Moire C/DU/MC/DS 4 1-7
Copy, line/photo, monochrome, dot process
5765 Moire C/PH/CLR/ED 4 1-7
Copy, photo, color, error diffusion
5766 Moire C/PH/CLR/DS 4 1-7
Copy, photo, color, dot process
5767 Moire C/PH/MC/ED 4 1-7
Copy, photo, monochrome, error diffusion
5768 Moire C/PH/MC/DS 4 1-7
Copy, photo, monochrome, dot process
5769 Moire S/LN/MC 1 1-7
Scanner, line, monochrome
[ 16-93 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

5770 Moire S/DU/MC 4 1-7
Scanner, line/photo, monochrome
5771 Moire S/PH/MC 4 1-7
Scanner, photo, monochrome
5772 Moire S/LN/GRY 1 1-7
Scanner, line, grayscale
5773 Moire S/DU/GRY 4 1-7
Scanner, line/photo, grayscale
5774 Moire S/PH/GRY 4 1-7
Scanner, photo, grayscale
5775 Moire S/LN/CLR 1 1-7
Scanner, line, color
5776 Moire S/DU/CLR 4 1-7
Scanner, line/photo, color
Specifies the default moire elimination value.
5777 Moire S/PH/CLR 4 1-7
Scanner, photo, color
Manual Base Cut Initial Set Specifies the default value for base color removal.
5778 0 0-7
(Copy / Color) Copy, color
5779 0 0-7
(Copy / Monochrome) Copy, monochrome
5780 0 0-7
(Scanner / Color) Scanner, color
5781 0 0-7
(Scanner / Grayscale) Scanner, grayscale
5782 0 0-7
(Scanner / Monochrome) Scanner, monochrome
Auto Base Cut Frequency Specifies the default setting values for ABC, monochrome,
5783 80 0-255
(Threshhold 1) and threshold frequency of base density 1.
Auto Base Cut Frequency Specifies the default setting values for ABC, monochrome,
5784 120 0-255
(Threshhold 2) and threshold frequency of base density 2.
Auto Base Cut Density Specifies the boundary values for ABC, monochrome, and
5785 20 0-31
Border base density.
Auto Base Cut Offset Specifies the offset values for ABC, monochrome, and base
5786 0 (-64 - 64)
(Monochrome) color removal.
Auto Base Cut Offset Specifies the offset values for ABC, color, and base color
5787 0 (-64 - 64)
(Color) removal.
Manual Base Cut Offset Specifies the offset values for monochrome, base color
5788 0 (-64 - 64)
(Monochrome) removal (manual), and base color removal level.
Manual Base Cut Offset Specifies the offset values for color, base color removal
5789 0 (-64 - 64)
(Color) (manual), and base color removal level.
Auto Base Cut Beta Offset Specifies the offset values for ABC, monochrome, and base
5790 0 (-128 - 127)
(Monochrome) color removal (beta).
Auto Base Cut Beta Offset Specifies the offset values for ABC, color, and base color
5791 0 0-127
(Color) removal (beta).
Manual Base Cut Beta Specifies the offset values for monochrome, base color
5792 0 (-128 - 127)
Offset (Monochrome) removal (manual), and base color removal (beta).
Manual Base Cut Beta Specifies the offset values for color, base color removal
5793 0 (-128 - 127)
Offset (Color) (manual), and base color removal (beta).
Specifies the simple binarization threshold for scanner, line,
5794 Plain Binary Threshold 0 (-128 - 127) or B&W (2 values). Also specifies the simple binarization
threshold for fax, line, or B&W (2 values).
Sets the offset value of the (first) the distance from the
Achromatic Color Offset
(Copy / ACS / Achromatic color axis).
5795 Value 1 (Copy / ACS-Auto 0 (-14 -100)
This offset value increase, likely to be determined as black
Color Sensing )
and white pixels.
Sets the offset value of the (first) the distance from the
Achromatic Color Offset
5796 0 (-14 -100) (Scanner / ACS / Achromatic color axis).
Value 1 (Scanner / ACS)
Same asTM5795
Sets the offset value of the (second) the distance from the
Achromatic Color Offset (Copy / ACS / Achromatic color axis).
5797 0 0-100
Value 2 (Copy / ACS) This offset value increase, blue-green system color likely to
be determined as black and white pixels.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-94 ]
Test Modes

Sets the offset value of the (second) the distance from the
Achromatic Color Offset (Scanner / ACS / Achromatic color axis).
5798 0 0-100
Value 2 (Scanner / ACS) This offset value increase, blue-green system color likely to
be determined as black and white pixels.
Sets the offset value of the luminance threshold. (Copy /
Luminance Threshold Offset ACS)
5799 0 (-30 - 21)
Value (Copy / ACS) This offset value increase, light blue-green system color
likely to be determined as color pixels.
Sets the offset value of the luminance threshold. (Scanner /
Luminance Threshold Offset ACS)
5800 0 (-30 - 21)
Value (Scanner / ACS) This offset value increase, light blue-green system color
likely to be determined as color pixels.
Color Pixel Threshold (Copy Sets the offset value of the threshold for the total pixel count
5801 0 (-11 - 85)
/ ACS) in copy, ACS, and color modes.
Color Pixel Threshold Sets the offset value of the threshold for the total pixel count
5802 0 (-11 - 85)
(Scanner / ACS) in scanning, ACS, and color modes.
0: Standard, top
Specifies whether to use color profiles downloaded to the
5803 Color Profile Select 0 surface only
custom area of the scanner.
1: Custom
Adjusts the amount of change in density (as adjusted in the
scanning density function).
5805 Scan Density Select 0 (-2 - 2)
Negative values make images lighter, and positive values
make them darker.
Specifies whether to add fine single pixel black lines in the
0: No fine black primary scanning direction for scanned image data.
5810 Horizontal Line ON/OFF 0 lines Adds fine single pixel black lines in the primary scanning
1: Fine black lines direction for scanned image data.
The position of the fine black lines is 148.5 mm
Specifies whether to add fine single pixel black lines in the
0: No fine black secondary scanning direction for scanned image data.
5811 Vertical Line ON/OFF 0 lines Adds fine single pixel black lines in the secondary scanning
1: Fine black lines direction for scanned image data.
The position of the fine black lines is 10 mm
Setting value 0: no mask
* Masking prevents visible shadows of positioning panels
and originals.
5815 Copy Mode Mask Amount 1 0-5
During FB scanning, two edges of originals touching the
positioning panels are masked.
During AF scanning, four edges of originals are masked.
5816 Scan Mode Mask Amount 1 0-5 Setting value 0: no mask
Sets the offset values for ABC, monocolor, and base color
Auto Base Cut Offset removal.
5818 0 (-64 - 64)
(Monocolor) Removal value increase if setting value increase. Removal
value decrease if setting value decrease.
Sets the offset values for monocolor, and base color
Manual Base Cut Offset removal.
5819 0 (-64 - 64)
(Monocolor) Removal value increase if setting value increase. Removal
value decrease if setting value decrease.
Auto Base Cut Beta Offset Sets the beta offset values for ABC, monocolor, and base
5820 0 0-127
(Monocolor) color removal.
Manual Base Cut Beta Sets the beta offset values for monocolor, and base color
5821 0 (-128 - 127)
Offset (Monocolor) removal.
Sets the offset value of the threshold for line and dot
Image Threshold Offset process judgement.
5850 0 (-325 - 325)
Value (Line / Dot process) Likely to judge as dot process if setting value increase.
Likely to judge as line process if setting value decrease.
Sets the offset value of the threshold for photo and dot
Image Threshold Offset process judgement.
5851 0 (-45 - 45)
Value (Photo / Dot process) Likely to judge as photo if setting value increase. Likely to
judge as dot process if setting value decrease.
[ 16-95 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

FB Scan Default Horizontal Specifies the default value of 0571 0 (FB scanning lateral
5900 128 81-175
Position position adjustment). (1=0.04233mm)
FB Scan Default Start Specifies the default value of 05711 711 (initial FB scanning
5901 128 98-158
Position position adjustment). (1=0.0847mm)
FB Scan Default Stretching/ Specifies the default value of 05712 (FB scanning image
5902 128 123-133
Shrinkage Setting stretching/shrinkage adjustment).(1=0.01)
AF Default Stretching/ Specifies the default value of 05733 (AF scanning image
5903 0 (-20 - 20)
Shrinkage Setting (Front) stretching/shrinkage adjustment (top)).
AF Default Stretching/ Specifies the default value of 05734 (AF scanning image
5904 0 (-20 - 20)
Shrinkage Setting (Back) stretching/shrinkage adjustment (bottom)).
Specifies the default value of 05735 (AF scanning job

5905 AF Carriage Default Position 128 98-158
carriage position adjustment). (1=0.0847mm)
Edge Enhancement Default
Sets the edge enhancement default value. (Copy / Map
5911 Value (Copy / Map / Error 6 1-7
pencil mode / Error diffusion)
diffusion)
Edge Enhancement Default
Sets the edge enhancement default value. (Copy / Map
5912 Value (Copy / Map / Dot 6 1-7
pencil mode / Dot process)
process)
Moire Removal Default
Sets the moire removal default value. (Copy / Map pencil
5913 Value (Copy / Map / Error 1 1-7
mode / Error diffusion)
diffusion)
Moire Removal Default
Sets the moire removal default value. (Copy / Map pencil
5914 Value (Copy / Map / Dot 1 1-7
mode / Dot process)
process)
Line/Photo Default
Sets the line / photo default judgment process. (Copy /
5915 Judgment Pprocess (Copy/ 4 1-7
Photo mode / Error diffusion)
Photo/Error diffusion)
Line/Photo Default
Sets the line / photo default judgment process. (Copy /
Photo mode / Dot process)
Photo/Dot process)
Line/Photo Default
Sets the line / photo default judgment process. (Copy / Map
pencil mode /Error diffusion)
Map /Error diffusion)
Line/Photo Default
Sets the line / photo default judgment process.(Copy / Map
pencil mode /Dot process)
Map/Dot process)
Line/Photo Default
Sets the line / photo default judgment process. (Copy / Line-
Photo mode /Error diffusion)
Line-Photo/Error diffusion)
Line/Photo Default
Sets the line / photo default judgment process. (Copy / Line-
Photo mode /Dot process)
Line-Photo/Dot process)
Line/Photo Default
Sets the line / photo default judgment process. (Copy / Line
5921 Judgment Pprocess (Copy / 4 1-7
mode)
Line)
Line/Photo Default
Sets the line / photo default judgment process. (Scaner /
5922 Judgment Pprocess 4 1-7
Photo mode)
(Scanner/Photo)
Line/Photo Default
Sets the line / photo default judgment process. (Scanner /
Line-Photo mode)
(Scanner/Line-Photo)
Line/Photo Default
Sets the line / photo default judgment process. (Scanner /
Line mode)
(Scanner/Line)
Adjust value of LED light intensity.
Scanner LED Light Volume
5992 50 1-100 If the power is turned off, the set value will return to default
Adjustment
value.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-96 ]
Test Modes
5-4. OPTIONS / HCF (High Capacity Feeder)

Sensor Monitoring (S) OPTIONS / High Capacity Feeder

ON:ON（switch pressed）
3017 HCF P-F Tray Elevation Switch
OFF:OFF（switch released）
3018 HCF P-F Tray Interlock Switch
3019 HCF P-F Tray Upper Limit Sensor (SD)
3020 HCF P-F Tray Upper Limit Sensor (Thick)
3021 HCF P-F Tray Lower Limit Sensor
ON: Card setting (right Side)
3022 HCF Paper Feed Pressure Lever Sensor
OFF: Thin paper setting (left Side)
HCF P-F Tray Paper Volume Detection Sensor
3023
1
HCF P-F Tray Paper Volume Detection Sensor
3024
2
3025 HCF Eevelope Feed Detection Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked)
3026 HCF P-F Tray Paper Detection Sensor
3027 HCF P-F Tray Paper Length Sensor
3028 HCF Middle Exit Sensor
3029 HCF Upper Cover Full Open Detection Sensor
3030 HCF Jam Release Door Signal
3031 HCF Front Cover Detection Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked)
3032 HCF Slide Cover Set Detection Sensor OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
3033 HCF Pickup Drive Motor FG Sensor ON: Light blocked
3034 HCF Middle Feed Motor FG Sensor OFF: Light passes through
3035 HCF Middle Entrance Sensor
ON: Light blocked
3036 HCF P-F Tray Motor FG Sensor
OFF: Light passes through
HCF P-F Tray Paper Volume Detection Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked)
3063
3 OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
3150 HCF Nip Release HP Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked)
3152 HCF Stripper Pad Safety Switch OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
Drive Checking (M) OPTIONS / High Capacity Feeder

Raise HCF Paper Feed Tray Unit.
3213 HCF Elevator Motor (Upward) Note: Do not leave driving the motor, because it may damage the
mechanism.
Lowering HCF Paper Feed Tray Unit.
3214 HCF Elevator Motor (Downward) Note: Do not leave driving the motor, because it may damage the
mechanism.
3215 HCF Pickup Drive Motor Starts and stops the HCF Pickup Drive Motor.
3216 HCF Middle Transfer Motor Starts and stops the HCF Middle Transfer Motor.
3309 HCF Nip Release Motor Rotates the HCF Nip Release Motor in clockwise direction.
[ 16-97 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Unit Checking (U) OPTIONS / High Capacity Feeder

3415 HCF P-F Tray Paper Length (Wide)
For paper size detection, set 297mm A/D value.
3416 HCF P-F Tray Paper Length (Narrow)
For paper size detection, set 105mm A/D value.
3417 HCF P-F Tray Move to Upper Limit Position
Rotate the elevator motor and stops the P- F Tray at upper limit position.
Then execute the follow up action in the upper limit position.
Upper limit position can be adjusted by the Test Mode [P-F Tray Upper Limit Position]
3418 HCF P-F Tray Move to Lower Limit Position
Rotate the elevator motor and stops the P- F Tray at lower limit position.
3419 HCF HCF Middle Entrance Sensor Automatic Light Intensity Adjustment
Auto adjustment of the intensity of light for the HCF Middle Entrance Sensor.
3450 HCF Nip Release Unit 1 Cycle Action
1. HCF nip release unit move to the nip position
2. HCF nip release unit move to the release position
If the unit is not in correct position, move to nip position again and do above cycle.
3452 HCF Nip Release Unit Release Position
Move the HCF nip release unit to the release position.
3453 HCF Nip Release Unit Nip Position
Move the HCF nip release unit to the nip position.
3454 HCF P-F Tray Maintenance Position
Move the HCF P-F Tray to upper limit position, then lower the P-F Tray to the 10% paper remaning position.
Initialization (I) OPTIONS / High Capacity Feeder

3525 HCF EEPROM Initialization
All data in HCF EEPROM are put back to default.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-98 ]
Test Modes
Data Monitoring (C) OPTIONS / High Capacity Feeder

3600 HCF P-F Tray Width Detection Check Displays the measurement of the paper feed tray paper width potentiometer
HCF Intermediate Exit Sensor Emit
3601 Displays the intensity of light for HCF intermediate exit sensor.
Value Display
HCF P-F Tray Guide Width A/D Value Displays the AD Value of the HCF paper guide width which set by calibration.
3602
(297mm) (297mm)
HCF P-F Tray Guide Width A/D Value Displays the AD Value of the HCF paper guide width which set by calibration.
3603
(105mm) (105mm)
3604 HCF P-F Tray Paper Volume Displays amount of paper left in the HCF unit (%).
Displays the paper ID detected by the mechanism (the Value as detected by
the sensor).
0: No size, 1: A3, 2: A4, 3: A4 Landscape, 4: A5, 5: A5 Landscape, 6: A6, 7:
3605 HCF P-F Tray Paper Size I.D. A6 Landscape, 8: B4, 9: B5, 10: B5 Landscape, 11: B6, 12: B6 Landscape
13: Foolscap, 14: Ledger, 15: Legal, 16: Letter, 17 : Letter-R, 18: Statement,
19: Statement-R, 20: A3W, 21: Post Card, 22: Kaku 0, 23: Kaku 1, 24: Kaku
2, 25: Kaku 3, 26: Naga 3
Displays the measurement of the paper feed tray paper width potentiometer
3606 HCF P-F Tray Width Detection Check
of the HCF unit, in 0.1 mm increments.
3608 HCF SH Firmware Version Displays the HCF SH firmware version.
3609 HCF SH Loader Version Displays the HCF SH loader version.
3610 HCF DSP Firmware Version Displays the HCF DSP firmware version.
3611 HCF DSP Loader Version Displays the HCF DSP loader version.
3612 HCS SH Firmware Version Displays the HCS SH firmware version.
3613 HCS SH Loader Version Displays the HCS SH loader version.
3614 HCS DSP Firmware Version Displays the HCS DSP firmware version.
Data Editing (D) OPTIONS / High Capacity Feeder

0 ： Disable To disable jam detection (No paper jam, multiple paper feed
3750 HCF Jam Detection Setting 1
1 ： Enable & paper tranport jam)
HCF Pickup Roller Speed Varying the HCF Pickup roller speed ratio against the HCF
3751 0 (-300 - 300)mm/s
Adjustment middle transport roller.
Varying the paper pitch <59.2millisecond + alpha>.
3752 HCF Paper Pitch adjustment 592 592-9999
(1=0.1ms)
HCF Multiple Paper Feed 0 ： Disable
3753 1 To disable multiple paper feed detection.
Detection Setting 1 ： Enable
1: Enable: Envelope paper feed or the elevator motor
HCF Envelope Limitation 0 ： Disable
3754 0 operation can be done during detection of the upper door
Setting 1 ： Enable
opening.
HCF Middle Feed Roller Varying the HCF middle feed roller speed ratio against the
3755 0 (-300 - 300)mm/s
Speed Adjustment HCF prior registration roller.
HCF Prior Registration Varying the HCF prior registration roller speed ratio against
3756 0 (-300 - 300)mm/s
Roller Speed Adjustment the HCF registration roller.
Pickup roller feeding rate relates with feed distance from the
pickup roller to the middle transport roller, and also relates
HCF Pickup Roller Feeding
3757 70 60-130 with the delivery timing to the roller located downstream.
Rate Setting
Less feeding rate = Longer registration roller startup time
(1=0.01)
Adjust response performance of the elevator motor starts.
HCF Elevator Motor
3758 77 38-3840 (Maintaining upper limit position by the elevator motor at
Respose Setting
paper feeding.)
By adjusting this setting, the paper arrival timing to the
HCF Registration Sensor
3762 0 (-1000 - 1000) registration sensor can be adjusted.
Arrival Timing Setting
Use when paper jam occurs. (1=0.1mm)
[ 16-99 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Sets the assist speed of the prior roller against the
HCF Prior Roller Assist registration roller transport speed.
3763 977 800-1200
Speed Setting If set the prior roller assist speed slower than the registration
roller, paper buckle will decrease.
Sets the assist speed of the middle feed roller against the
registration roller transport speed.
HCF Middle Feed Roller If set the prior roller assist speed slower than the registration
3765 977 800-1200
Assist Speed Setting roller, paper buckle will decrease.
This is effective if the paper size is larger than the distance
between the registratio roller and the 3rd middle feed roller.
3768 HCF Serial Number Setting 0 0-32500 Set HCF serial number.
If choose disable on this test mode, even though the HCF
HCF U/L Limit Sensor
0: Warning disable P-F tray upper limit sensor and the HCF P-F tray lower
3769 Simultaneous Detection 1
1: Warning enable limit sensor detect when starts printing, there is no warning
Warning
display.
HCF equipped with two type custom paper upper surface detection. These are
the bearing detection and the scraper detection.
HCF Custom Paper Size HCF system automatically switch detection method by kind of paper.
3771 0
Upper Limit Detection 0: Disable
1: Forcing with bearing detection
2: Forcing with scraper detection
HCF equipped with two type envelope upper surface detection. These are the
bearing detection and the scraper detection.
HCF system automatically switch detection method by kind of paper.
HCF Envelope Upper Limit
3772 0 Default setting of envelope is the scraper detection.
Detection
0: Disable
1: Forcing with bearing detection
2: Forcing with scraper detection
In order to improve the jam recovery of small size paper when the registration
sensor detected non-arrival jam.
3776 HCF P-F Tray Motor Setting 0 0: Display the error after the paper is transported
1: Stops the HCF Registration Motor and the HCF P-F Tray Motor together,
when error occur
HCF Nip Release Motor (-1000 - 1000)
3882 0 Corrects release position of the Nip Release Mechanism.
Release Position pulse
HCF Nip Release Motor Nip (-1000 - 1000)
3883 0 Corrects nip position of the Nip Release Mechanism.
Position pulse

HCF Paper Buckle Sets the amount of slackness of HCF unit. (Standard & long
7675 6 (-4 -15)mm
(Standard-Long) paper)
HCF Paper Buckle Sets the amount of slackness of HCF unit. (Standard &
7676 0 (-4 -15)mm
(Standard-Short) short paper)
HCF Paper Buckle (Thin- Sets the amount of slackness of HCF unit. (Thin & long
7677 6 (-4 -15)mm
Long) paper)
HCF Paper Buckle (Thin- Sets the amount of slackness of HCF unit. (Thin & short
7678 4 (-4 -15)mm
Short) paper)
HCF Upper Limit Position Sets the upper limit position of HCF unit. (Standard paper)
7722 1
(Standard) 0: Top 1: Middle 2: Bottom
HCF Paper Feed Timing
7724 0 (-100 - 100)ms Sets the paper feed timing of HCF unit. (Standard paper)
(Standard)
HCF P-F Assist Control 0: OFF
7725 1 Select paper feed assist control of the HCF unit. (Standard)
(Standard) 1: ON
HCF P-F Assist Start Timing Sets the paper feed assist start timing of HCF unit.
7726 0 (-100 - 100)ms
(Standard) (Standard paper)
HCF P-F Assist End Timing Sets the paper feed assist end timing of HCF unit. (Standard
7727 0 0-200ms
(Standard) paper)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-100 ]
Test Modes

HCF Paper Buckle (Card- Sets the amount of slackness of HCF unit. (Card & long
7754 6 (-4 - 15)mm
Long) paper)
HCF Paper Buckle (Card- Sets the amount of slackness of HCF unit. (Card & short
7755 0 (-4 - 15)mm
Short) paper)
HCF Upper Limit Position Sets the upper limit position of HCF unit. (Card)
7768 0
(Card) 0: Top 1: Middle 2: Bottom
7770 0 (-100 - 100)ms Sets the paper feed timing of HCF unit. (Card)
(Card)
7771 1 Select paper feed assist control of the HCF unit. (Card)
(Card) 1: ON
HCF P-F Assist Start Timing
7772 0 (-100 - 100)ms Sets the paper feed assist start timing of HCF unit. (Card)
(Card)
HCF P-F Assist End Timing
7773 0 0-200ms Sets the paper feed assist end timing of HCF unit. (Card)
(Card)
HCF Upper Limit Position Sets the upper limit position of HCF unit. (Thin paper)
7814 1
(Thin) 0: Top 1: Middle 2: Bottom
7816 0 (-100 - 100)ms Sets the paper feed timing of HCF unit. (Thin paper)
(Thin)
HCF P-F Assist Control 0: OFF Select paper feed assist control of the HCF unit. (Thin
7817 1
(Thin) 1: ON paper)
HCF P-F Assist Start Timing Sets the paper feed assist start timing of HCF unit. (Thin
7818 0 (-100 - 100)ms
(Thin) paper)
HCF P-F Assist End Timing Sets the paper feed assist end timing of HCF unit. (Thin
7819 0 0-200ms
(Thin) paper)
HCF Upper Limit Position Sets the upper limit position of HCF unit. (Post card)
7860 0
(PCD) 0: Top 1: Middle 2: Bottom
7861 HCF Paper Buckle (PCD) 6 (-4 - 15)mm Sets the amount of slackness of HCF unit. (Post card)
7862 0 (-100 - 100)ms Sets the paper feed timing of HCF unit. (Post card)
(PCD)
7863 1 Select paper feed assist control of the HCF unit. (Post card)
(PCD) 1: ON
HCF P-F Assist Start Timing Sets the paper feed assist start timing of HCF unit. (Post
7864 0 (-100 - 100)ms
(PCD) card)
HCF P-F Assist End Timing Sets the paper feed assist end timing of HCF unit. (Post
7865 0 0-200ms
(PCD) card)
HCF Paper Buckle
7900 6 (-4 - 15)mm Sets the amount of slackness of HCF unit. (Long envelope)
(Envelope-Long)
HCF Paper Buckle
7901 0 (-4 - 15)mm Sets the amount of slackness of HCF unit. (Short envelope)
(Envelope-Short)
HCF Upper Limit Position Sets the upper limit position of HCF unit. (Envelope)
7906 1
(Envelope) 0: Top 1: Middle 2: Bottom
7908 0 (-100 - 100)ms Sets the paper feed timing of HCF unit. (Envelope)
(Envelope)
7909 1 Select paper feed assist control of the HCF unit. (Envelope)
(Envelope) 1: ON
HCF P-F Assist Start Timing Sets the paper feed assist start timing of HCF unit.
7910 0 (-100 - 100)ms
(Envelope) (Envelope)
HCF P-F Assist End Timing Sets the paper feed assist end timing of HCF unit.
7911 0 0-200ms
(Envelope) (Envelope)
[ 16-101 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Paper Feed Settings (U1-U5, Light Paper) OPTIONS / High Capacity Feeder
Test Mode Number
HCF Paper Buckle Sets the amount of slackness of HCF
9600 9602 9604 9606 9608 9978 6 (-4 - 15)mm
(Long) unit. (Long paper)
HCF Paper Buckle Sets the amount of slackness of HCF
9601 9603 9605 9607 9609 9979 0 (-4 - 15)mm
(Short) unit. (Short paper)
Paper Feed Settings (U1-U5, Light Paper) OPTIONS / High Capacity Feeder
Test Mode Number
HCF Upper Limit 0: Top 1: Middle Sets the upper limit position of HCF
9722 9768 9814 9860 9906 9953 1
Position 2: Bottom unit.
HCF Paper Feed Sets the paper feed timing of HCF
9724 9770 9816 9862 9908 9955 0 (-100 - 100)ms
Timing unit.
HCF P-F Assist 0: OFF Select paper feed assist control of
9725 9771 9817 9863 9909 9956 1
Control 1: ON the HCF unit.
HCF P-F Assist Sets the paper feed assist start
9726 9772 9818 9864 9910 9957 0 (-100 - 100)ms
Start Timing timing of HCF unit.
HCF P-F Assist End Sets the paper feed assist end
9727 9773 9819 9865 9911 9958 0 0-200ms
Timing timing of HCF unit.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-102 ]
Test Modes
5-5. OPTIONS / OST (Offset Staple Tray)

Sensor Monitoring (S) OPTIONS / Offset Staple Tray

3008 OST Switchback Pass Sensor ON: Light blocked
3009 OST Staple Protect Lever HP Sensor OFF: Light passes through
3037 OST Middle Feed Sensor 1
3039 OST Entrance Sensor
3040 OST Eject Roller Elevation HP Sensor
3041 OST Tray Upper Limit Sensor
3042 OST Reverse Roller Elevation HP Sensor
3043 OST Tray Elevation Clock Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked)
3044 OST Tray Paper Detection Sensor 1 OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
3045 OST Tray Paper Detection Sensor 2
3046 OST Tray Paper Detection Sensor 3
3047 OST Tray Lower Limit Sensor
3048 OST Folder Tray Paper Sensor
3049 OST Rake Roller Elevation HP Sensor
3050 OST Rear Guide Plate HP Sensor
3051 OST Tray Shift Sensor 1
3052 OST Tray Paper Detection Sensor
3053 OST Tray Shift Clock Sensor
3054 OST Tray Shift Sensor 2
3055 OST Front Guide Plate HP Sensor
3056 OST Guide Plate Position Sensor
3057 OST Staple Slide HP Sensor
3058 OST Staple Clinch HP Sensor
3059 OST Staple Detection Sensor
3060 OST Staple Self Check Sensor
3061 OST Staple Change Cover Switch
3062 OST Jam Cover Switch
Drive Checking (M) OPTIONS / Offset Staple Tray

3217 OST Middle Feed Motor 1 Starts and stops the OST Middle Feed Motor 1.
3218 OST Middle Feed Motor 2 Starts and stops the OST Middle Feed Motor 2.
3220 OST Transport Motor Starts and stops the OST Transport Motor.
3222 OST Ejection Motor (CW) Rotates the OST Ejection Motor in clockwise direction.
3224 OST Reverse Motor Starts and stops the OST Reverse Motor.
3232 OST PSU Cooling Fan Turn ON or OFF of the OST PSU Cooling Fan.
3233 OST Middle Feed Cooling Fan Turn ON or OFF of the OST Middle Feed Cooling Fan.
[ 16-103 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Unit Checking (U) OPTIONS / Offset Staple Tray

3456 OST Eject Roller Motor （Upward）
Raise the OST Eject Roller.
Note: Do not leave driving the motor, because it may damage the mechanism.
3457 OST Eject Roller Motor （Downward）
Lowering the OST Eject Roller.
3458 OST Tray Elevation Motor （Upward）
Raise the OST Tray.
3459 OST Tray Elevation Motor （Downward）
Lowering the OST Tray.
3460 OST Reverse Roller Motor （Upward）
Raise the OST Reverse Roller.
3461 OST Reverse Roller Motor （Downward）
Lowering the OST Reverse Roller.
3462 OST Stapler Slide Motor (Rear)
Moves the Stapler Unit to rear position.
3463 OST Stapler Slide Motor (Front)
Moves the Stapler Unit to front position.
3464 OST Rear Tamper Motor (Rear)
Moves the OST Rear Tamper Motor to rear position.
3465 OST Rear Tamper Motor (Front)
Moves the OST Rear Tamper Motor to front position.
3466 OST Tray Shift Motor (Rear)
Move the OST Tray Shift Motor to rear position.
3467 OST Tray Shift Motor (Front)
Slide the OST Tray Shift Motor to front position.
3468 OST Front Tamper Motor (Rear)
Moves the OST Front Tamper Motor to rear position.
3469 OST Front Tamper Motor (Front)
Moves the OST Front Tamper Motor to front position.
3488 OST Rake Roller Elevating Action
Continuous elevating action of the OST Rake Roller by activating the OST Rake Roller Elevation Solenoid.
Up/down is 1 cycle. Complete 1 cycle then stops automatially.
3489 OST Ejection Motor
3490 OST Reverse Roller Motor
3491 OST Stapler Slide Motor
Move to Rear side then Front side is 1 cycle. Complete 1 cycle then stops automatially.
3492 OST Front Tamper Motor
3493 OST Rear Tamper Motor
Rev.1.00 [ 16-104 ]
Test Modes
Unit Checking (U) OPTIONS / Offset Staple Tray

3494 OST Tray Elevation Motor
3495 OST Tray Shift Motor
3496 OST Staple Unit Clinch Action
Continuous clinch action of the Stapler Unit.
3497 OST Rake Roller Elevation Solenoid
Continuous ON/OFF action of the OST Rake Roller Elevation Solenoid.
3498 OST Stapler Protect Lever IN/OUT Action
Continuous IN/OUT action of the OST Stapler Protect Lever.
3499 OST Elevator Continuous Action
Perform elevating operation of the OST elevator continuously.
One cycle operation (Lower the elevator first and then lift the elevator).
Perform 1 cycle operation and then stops automatically.
5-5-4. Initialization (I) - Not available
Data Monitoring (C) OPTIONS / Offset Staple Tray

3616 OST Firmware Version Displays the OST firmware version.
3617 OST Loader Version Displays the OST loader version.
Displays a number of the paper ejected on the offset staple tray.
3622 OST Paper Feed Number
(Accumulated number since the last counter clear.)
Displays a number of the staple job on the offset staple tray.
3623 OST Staple Job Number
(Accumulated number since the last counter clear.)
Displays a number of the paper ejected on the offset staple tray.
3624 OST Paper Feed Total Numbers
(Accumulated number since factory shipment)
Displays a number of the staple job on the offset staple tray.
3625 OST Staple Job Total Numbers
(Accumulated number since factory shipment)
Displays number of stapler movement of Offset Staple Tray.
3626 OST Staple Movement Number
(Stapler cable movement)
[ 16-105 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Data Editing (D) OPTIONS / Offset Staple Tray

OST Guide Adjustment Adjust distance between left and right OST guide plates.
3739 0 (-5 - 5)
Value (1=0.3665mm)
OST Ejection Speed Setting Adjust paper ejection speed under following conditions.
3740 0 (-100 - 100)mm/s
(Simplex-Large Paper) (Simplex, A4 size or bigger than A4 size)
3741 0 (-100 - 100)mm/s
(Simplex-Small Paper) (Simplex, Less than A4 size)
OST Ejection Speed Setting
Adjust paper ejection speed under following conditions.
3742 (Simplex-Thick Large 0 (-100 - 100)mm/s
(Simplex, Thick paper, A4 size or bigger than A4 size)
Paper)
3743 0 (-100 - 100)mm/s
(Simplex-Thick Small Paper) (Simplex, Thick paper, Less than A4 size)
3744 0 (-100 - 100)mm/s
(Duplex-Large Paper) (Duplex, A4 size or bigger than A4 size)
3745 0 (-100 - 100)mm/s
(Duplex-Small Paper) (Duplex, Less than A4 size)
3746 0 (-100 - 100)mm/s
(Duplex-Thick Large Paper) (Duplex, Thick paper, A4 size or bigger than A4 size)
3747 0 (-100 - 100)mm/s
(Duplex-Thick Small Paper) (Duplex, Thick paper, Less than A4 size)
OST Acceptance Paper
Adjust speed value of minus or plus to 50 mm per second
3748 Speed (Simplex-Large 0 (-50 - 50)mm/s
from the center.
paper)
OST Acceptance Paper
Adjust speed value of minus or plus to 50 mm per second
3749 Speed (Simplex-Small 0 (-50 - 50)mm/s
from the center.
paper)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-106 ]
Test Modes
5-6. OPTIONS / HCS (High Capacity Stacker)

Sensor Monitoring (S) OPTIONS / High Capacity Stacker

3065 HCS Entrance Sensor
3066 HCS Switchback Sensor
3067 HCS SB Sensor
3068 HCS Middle Sensor
3069 HCS FU Sensor
3070 HCS Vertical Feed Sensor
3071 HCS Ejection Sensor
3072 HCS Ejection Motor FG Sensor
3073 HCS Tray Paper Detection Sensor
3074 HCS Card Full Sensor
3075 HCS P-F Tray Detection Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked)
3076 HCS Full Detection Sensor OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
3077 HCS Offset Full Detection Sensor
3079 HCS Tray Paper Jam Sensor 1
3080 HCS Tray Lower Limit Sensor
3081 HCS Side Fence HP Sensor
3082 HCS End Fence HP Sensor
3083 HCS Eject Wing HP Sensor
3084 HCS Offset Guide HP Sensor
3085 HCS Tray Set Sensor
3086 HCS Hand Truck Set Sensor
3087 HCS Front Door 1 Safety Switch
3088 HCS Front Door 2 Safety Switch
ON:ON （switch pressed）
3089 HCS Tray Upper Limit Sensor
OFF:OFF （switch released）
3090 HCS Elevator Up and Down Switch
3170 HCS End Guide Plate Sensor
3171 HCS Offset Unit Guide Sensor
3174 HCS Tray Paper Jam Sensor 2
3175 HCS Offset Guide Position Sensor
3176 HCS Elevator Motor Check Sensor
3177 HCS Switchback Motor Check Sensor
Drive Checking (M) OPTIONS / High Capacity Stacker

3245 HCS Entering Motor Starts and stops the HCS Entering Motor.
3246 HCS Reverse Motor (CW) Starts and stops the HCS Reverse Motor in clockwise direction.
HCS Reverse Motor (CCW) Starts and stops the HCS Reverse Motor in counter clockwise
3247
direction.
3248 HCS Middle Transfer Motor Starts and stops the HCS Middle Transfer Motor.
3249 HCS Rising Motor Starts and stops the HCS Rising Motor.
3250 HCS Ejection Motor Starts and stops the HCS Ejection Motor.
3251 HCS Flipper Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the HCS Flipper Solenoid.
3258 HCS Ejection Wing Motor Starts and stops the HCS Ejection Wing Motor.
3260 HCS Offset Guide Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the HCS Offset Guide Solenoid.
[ 16-107 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Unit Checking (U) OPTIONS / High Capacity Stacker

3405 HCS Offset Unit Move to Offset Position
Moves the HCS offset unit to the offset position.
3406 HCS Unit Move to Lock Release HP
Moves the side fence to HP.
Moves the end fence to HP.
Moves the elevator to lower limit position.
3407 HCS Unit Move to Factory Default
Moves the side fence to the set position by Test mode No. 3969.
Moves the end fence to the set position by Test mode No. 3970.
Moves the elevator to the set position by Test mode No. 3971.
3408 HCS Fence Center Adjustment (Paper Transport)
1. Moves the end fence and side fence to Home Position.
2. Moves the elevator to upper surface position.
3. Stops paper transport at the position that the end roller nipped the paper after start printing from P-F Tray.
Target amount of protrusion of the paper is 50mm. (Margin: 10mm-130mm)
3446 HCS Fence A3 Width Position
Moves the HCS fence to A3 paper size position.
HCS Side fence: 297mm, HCS End fence: 420mm
Need mechanical adjustment if fences are out of position when finished this test mode.
3447 HCS Fence B5 Width Position
Moves the HCS fence to B5 paper size position.
HCS Side fence: 182mm, HCS End fence: 257mm
Need mechanical adjustment if fences are out of position when finished this test mode.
3473 HCS Paper Receiving Tray Upper Limit Position
Raise the HCS Paper Receiving Tray to upper limit position. (Stops when HCS Paper receiving tray upper limit sensor detects)
3474 HCS Paper Receiving Tray Lower Limit Position
Lowering the HCS Paper Receiving Tray to lower limit position. (Stops when HCS Paper receiving tray lower limit sensor
detects)
3477 HCS End Fence Home Position
Move the HCS End Fence to home position (Detects by HCS End Fence HP Sensor) by rotating the HCS End Fence Motor.
3478 HCS End Fence 1 Cycle Action
End Fence home position -> Activate HCS Movable Pin Solenoid (Pull the Movable Plate) -> Close End fence to minmum
width -> Activate HCS Movable Pin Solenoid (Lower the Movable Plate) ->Activate HCS Movable Pin Solenoid (Pull the
Movable Plate) -> Return End Fence to home position
3480 HCS Side Fence Home Position
Move the HCS Side Fence to home position (Detects by HCS Side Fence HP Sensor) by rotating the HCS Side Fence Motor.
3481 HCS Side Fence 1 Cycle Action
In case the HCS Side fence HP sensor detection, the side fence moves to narrowest position, then move back to home
position, then stops.
In case the HCS Side fence HP sensor is OFF, the side fence move to home position, then moves to narrowest position, then
stops.
3483 HCS Ejection Wing Home Position
Move the HCS Paper Ejection Wing to home position (Detects by HCS Eject Wing HP Sensor) by rotating the HCS Ejection
Wing Motor.
3484 HCS Ejection Wing 1 Cycle Action
In case the HCS Eject Wing HP Sensor is ON, rotates the HCS Ejection Wing Motor. (Sensor detection: ON -> OFF -> ON)
In case the HCS Eject Wing HP Sensor is OFF, rotates the HCS Ejection Wing Motor. (Sensor detection: OFF -> ON -> OFF
-> ON)
3485 HCS Offset Guide Home Position
Moves the HCS Offset Guide to home position (Detects by HCS Offset Guide HP Sensor) by rotating the HCS Offset Guide
Motor.
3486 HCS Offset Guide 1 Cycle Action
In case the HCS Offset Guide HP Sensor is ON, rotates the HCS Offset Guide Motor. (Sensor detection: ON -> OFF -> ON)
In case the HCS Offset Guide HP Sensor is OFF, rotates the HCS Offset Guide Motor. (Sensor detection: OFF -> ON -> OFF
-> ON)
3487 HCS Flipper Solenoid ON/OFF Action
HCS Flipper Solenoid turns ON for 1 second.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-108 ]
Test Modes
Initialization (I) OPTIONS / High Capacity Stacker

3535 HCS EEPROM Initialization
All data in HCS EEPROM are put back to default.
Data Monitoring (C) OPTIONS / High Capacity Stacker

3612 HCS SH Firmware Version Displays the HCS SH firmware version.
3613 HCS SH Loader Version Displays the HCS SH loader version.
3614 HCS DSP Firmware Version Displays the HCS DSP firmware version.
HCS FU Paper Path Maintenance Displays a counter number for guiding roller replacement in the FU of HCS
3657
Count unit.
HCS FD Paper Path Maintenance Displays a counter number for guiding roller replacement in the FD of HCS
3658
Count unit.
HCS All (FU+FD) Paper Path Displays a total Value of [3657 HCS FU Paper Path Maintenance Count] &
3659
Maintenance Count [3658 HCS FD Paper Path Maintenance Count].
[ 16-109 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Data Editing (D) OPTIONS / High Capacity Stacker

HCS End Fence Adjustment Set the moving value of the End Fence to downward
3817 300 250-450
(Offset) direction at offset operation.
3942 HCS Serial Number Setting 0 0-32500 Set the serial number of HCS unit.
HCS Paper Rear End Detection Adjust timing (number of sheet) to stop printing when the
3946 5 0-10000sheet
Sensor Jam Detection Setting HCS Paper Rear End Detection Sensor detect the jam.
Set the paper ejection speed at offset operation as following
conditions.
HCS Paper Ejection Speed When paper pitch is wide enough
3961 800 632-1600mm/s
Setting (Offset) When the Offset unit running
When the End Fence running
When the Elevator unit running
Set the lowering value of the PF-Tray (upward direction) at
HCS PF-Tray Lowering amount-
3962 2532 0-10000 offset operation.
Upward (Offset)
(1=10pulse)
Set the lowering value of the PF-Tray (downward direction)
HCS PF-Tray Lowering amount-
3963 1765 0-10000 at offset operation.
Downward (Offset)
(1=10pulse)
HCS Paper Pitch Adjustment-
3964 8600 0-30000mm Adjust the paper pitch (upward direction) at offset operation.
Upward (Offset)
HCS Paper Pitch Adjustment- Adjust the paper pitch (downward direction) at offset
3965 7200 0-30000mm
Downward (Offset) operation.
HCS Light Weight Paper Upper 0 ＝ 405mm Adjust the upper limit position of the height at the time of
3966 0
Limit Setting 1 ＝ 440mm loading of lightweight paper without the offset operation.
Select behavior of the HCS End Fence at jam occurring.
HCS End Fence Jam Home
3967 0 0: Moves the HCS End Fence to the home position
Position Setting
1: Does not move the HCS End Fence to the home position.
0: Operation Permitted
3968 HCS Locking Operation Setting 1 1: Operation Prohibited (Prohibits the downloading at normal mode, also
prohibits all test modes operation except this test mode.)
This is sub setting menu of the [TM3407:HCS Unit Move to
HCS Side Fence Shipping
3969 150 100-343mm Factory Default].
Position Setting
Set HCS Side Fence moving position.
HCS End Fence Shipping
Position Setting
Set HCS End Fence moving position.
HCS Elevator Shipping Position
Setting
Set HCS Elevator moving position.
Counts the ejection paper number after the HCS Tray Paper
HCS Elevator Lowering Timing Jam Sensor has been turns ON.
3972 3 1-100sheet
(Sheet number) Setting Lower the Elevator when reach to specified number if the
sensor stays ON.
Same as TM3972. This test mode is for setting lowering
3973 HCS Elevator Lowering Amount 20 1-100 amount.
(1=0.1mm)
Set reference value of peeling on the leading edge on the
HCS Paper Thickness Setting for
3974 25 0-100 back of the card.
Error Detection
(1=0.01mm)
Set the controlable value when moving the elevator at the
height of the HCS Hand Truck Set.
HCS Hand Truck Set Height Stops the HCS elevator to the position (A height value of
3979 0 0-200
Adjustment the lower limit sensor logic changes + the height value set
in this test mode).
(1=0.1mm)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-110 ]
Test Modes
5-7. OPTIONS / MM (Mail Maker)

Sensor Monitoring (S) OPTIONS / Mail Maker

3091 MM Guide Sensor
3092 MM End Tamper HP Sensor
ON: Home Position (light blocked)
3093 MM Side Tamper HP Sensor
OFF: Other Position (light passes through)
3094 MM Tamper Nip HP Sensor
3095 MM Body Fold Entrance Sensor
3096 MM Top Tamper HP Sensor
3097 MM Top Tamper Sensor
3098 MM Tamper Eject Sensor
3099 MM Body Hit HP Sensor 1
3100 MM Body Hit HP Sensor 2
3101 MM Wrapping Entrance Sensor
3102 MM Wrapping Stand-by Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked)
3103 MM Form Receive Sensor OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
3104 MM Form Registration Sensor
3105 MM Form Horizontal HP Sensor
3106 MM Form Edge Detection Sensor
3107 MM Form Hit HP Sensor 2
3108 MM Wrapping Sensor
3109 MM Form Hit HP Sensor 3
3110 MM Gluing Sensor
3111 MM Gluing HP Sensor
3112 MM Flap Gluing Eject Sensor
3113 MM Compression Exit Sensor ON: Detected (light blocked)
3114 MM Eject Sensor OFF: Not Detected (light passes through)
3115 MM Eject Tray Full Detection Sensor R
3118 MM Body Fold Set HP Sensor
3119 MM Water Level Detection Sensor
3123 MM Eject Elevation Edge Sensor
3124 MM Eject Fence Position Sensor R ON: Vertical position OFF: Lying position
3127 MM Ejection Tray Full Detection Sensor F
3139 MM Form Nip HP Sensor
3140 MM Flap Entrance Sensor
3141 MM Exit Fence Position Sensor F
[ 16-111 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Drive Checking (M) OPTIONS / Mail Maker

3263 MM Guide Motor Rotates the MM Guide Motor in transport direction.
3264 MM Body Fold Motor Rotates the MM Body Fold Motor in transport direction.
3265 MM Wrapping Fold Motor Rotates the MM Wrapping Fold Motor in transport direction.
3266 MM Nipping Motor Rotates the MM Nipping Motor in transport direction.
3267 MM Flap Fold Motor Rotates the MM Flap Fold Motor in transport direction.
3268 MM Wrapping Feed Motor Rotates the MM Wrapping Feed Motor in transport direction.
3269 MM Form Registration Motor Rotates the MM Form Registration Motor in transport direction.
3270 MM Tamper Feed Motor Rotates the MM Tamper Feed Motor in transport direction.
3271 MM Ejection Elevation Motor Rotates the MM Ejection Elevation Motor in transport direction.
3272 MM Ejection Motor Rotates the MM Ejection Motor in transport direction.
Turn ON of the MM Guide Set Solenoid (Form transport direction), or Turn
3273 MM Guide Set Solenoid
OFF (Inner paper transport direction)
Turn ON of the MM Top Tamper Solenoid (Alignment plate escape
3274 MM Top Tamper Solenoid
position), or Turn OFF (Alignment plate strike position).
3275 MM Tamper Cooling Fan Turn ON or OFF of the MM Tamper Cooling Fan.
3276 MM Wrapping Cooling Fan Turn ON or OFF of the MM Wrapping Cooling Fan.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-112 ]
Test Modes
Unit Checking (U) OPTIONS / Mail Maker

3420 MM End Tamp Motor Home Position
Moves the MM End Tamp Motor to the home position.
3421 MM Side Tamp Motor Home Position
Moves the MM Side Tamp Motor to the home position.
3422 MM Top Tamp Motor Home Position
Moves the MM Top Tamp Motor to the home position.
3423 MM Form Horizontal Position Motor Home Position
Moves the MM Form Horizontal Position Motor to the home position.
3424 MM Body Hit Motor 1 Home Position
Moves the MM Body Hit Motor 1 to the home position.
3425 MM Body Hit Motor 2 Home Position
Moves the MM Body Hit Motor 2 to the home position.
3426 MM Test Pattern Print
Prints test pattern i the MM system.
Use either Paper Feed Tray or High Capacity Feeder as for the mail form.
Use Tray 1 as for the envelope.
All other print setting will follow Test mode 6010 and 6011.
3427 MM Form Hit Motor 2 Home Position
Moves the MM Form Hit Motor 2 to the home position.
3428 MM Form Hit Motor 3 Home Position
3429 MM Body Fold Set Motor Home Position
Moves the MM Body Fold Set Motor to the home position.
3431 MM Tamper Nip Motor Home Position
Moves the MM Tamper Nip Motor to the home position.
3432 MM Gluing Motor Home Position
Moves the MM Gluing motor to the home position.
3433 MM Tamper Unit Initialization
Moves the following motors to the home position.
MM End Tamp Motor, MM Side Tamp Motor, MM Top Tamp Motor and MM Tamper Nip Motor.
3434 MM Tamper Unit Home Position
Moves the MM Tamper Unit to the home position.
Home position: A4 size position
3435 MM Body Fold Unit Initialization
Moves the following motors to the home position.
MM Body Hit Motor 1, MM Body Hit Motor 2 and MM Body Fold Set Motor.
3436 MM Body Fold Unit Home Position
Moves the MM Body Hit plate 1 and MM Body Hit plate 2 to the home position.
Home position: A4 size/ 3 folds position
3439 MM Wrapping Unit Initialization
3440 MM Wrapping Unit Home Position
Moves the MM Form Hit plate 2 to the home position.
Home position: 120 x 235mm/ 3 folds position
3441 MM Flap Gluing Unit Initialization
Moves the MM Form Hit Motor 3 and the MM Gluing Motor to the home position.
3442 MM Flap Gluing Unit Home Position
Moves the MM Form Hit plate 3 to the home position.
Home position: 120 x 235mm (1.72 x 9.25inch)/ 3 folds position
3443 MM Form Entrance Nip Motor Home Position
Moves the MM Form Entrance Nip Motor to the home position.
[ 16-113 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Data Monitoring (C) OPTIONS / Mail Maker

3619 MM Loader Version Displays the MM loader version.
3620 MM Firmware Version Displays the MM firmware version.
3621 MM Paper Feed Number Displays the MM papaer feed number.
3673 MM PCB Area Temperature Display Value taken from the temperature sensor.
Data Editing (D) OPTIONS / Mail Maker

Adjust Guide Motor speed by using the printer speed
MM Guide Motor Speed
6005 990 900-1000 ratio.
Adjustment
(1=0.1%)
MM Body to Form Switch Timing
6006 55 1-200ms
Adjustment (Speed 1)
6007 36 1-200ms Adjust switching timing from the body paper transport path
to the form paper transport path by the MM Guide Set
MM Body to Form Switch Timing Solenoid. (Correspond with the MM Guide Motor speed)
6008 30 1-200ms
6009 25 1-200ms
Select the speed for TM3426 (MM Test Pattern Print).
0: Form A (Duplex-Long edge) / No contents
1: Form A (Simplex) / Contents (A4-Inner 3 fold)
2: Form A (Duplex-Long edge) / Contents (A4-Inner 3 fold)
3: Form A (Simplex) / Contents (B5-Inner 3 fold)
4: Form A (Duplex-Long edge) / Contents (B5-Inner 3 fold)
5: Form B (Duplex-Long edge) / No contents
6010 MM Test Pattern Print Setting 1
6: Form B (Simplex) / Contents (A4-2 fold)
7: Form B (Duplex-Long edge) / Contents (A4-2 fold)
8: Form C (Duplex-Long edge) / No contents
9: Form C (Simplex) / Contents (Letter-Inner 3 fold)
10: Form C (Duplex-Long edge) / Contents (Letter-Inner 3 fold)
11: Form C (Simplex) / Contents (Legal-4 fold)
12: Form C (Duplex-Long edge) / Contents (Legal-4 fold)
Use this setting for TM3426 (MM Test Pattern Print).
6011 MM Test Pattern Print Qty Setting 1 1-15sheet Select contents paper qty for TM6010. (If selected to have
envelope contents)
MM Form to Body Switch Timing
6012 57 1-200ms
6013 23 1-200ms Adjust switching timing from the form paper transport path
to the body paper transport path by the MM Guide Set
MM Form to Body Switch Timing Solenoid. (Correspond with the MM Guide Motor speed)
6014 13 1-200ms
6015 4 1-200ms
Adjust timing to disable MM jam detection.
MM Jam Detection OFF Zone
6024 0 (-100 -100)mm (Adjust timing against distance between MM Guide Sensor
Adjustment
and MM Form Receive Sensor.)
Adjust timing to enable MM jam detection.
MM Jam Detection ON Zone
6025 0 (-100 -100)mm (Adjust timing against distance between MM Guide Sensor
Adjustment
and MM Form Receive Sensor.)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-114 ]
Test Modes

MM End Tamp Motor Start Timing
6030 348 100-600ms
(Speed 1)
Adjust the time in various speeds.
6031 247 100-600ms Rear end edge of the body paper (n-th paper) been
(Speed 2)
detected by the MM Guide Sensor ↔ MM End Tamp Motor
MM End Tamp Motor Start Timing starts
6032 219 100-600ms
(Speed 3) (Correspond with the MM Guide Motor speed)
6033 190 100-600ms
(Speed 4)
Adjust the time.
6036 150 20-500ms Nip position been detected by the MM Tamper Nip HP
(From nip position)
Sensor ↔ MM End Tamp Motor starts
Adjust the time.
6037 MM Side Tamp Motor Start Timing 10 10-200ms
MM End Tamp Motor starts ↔ MM Side Tamp Motor starts
Adjust the time.
MM Side Tamp Motor Start Timing
(From nip position)
Sensor ↔ MM Side Tamp Motor starts
1st paper alignment operation amount by the MM Side
6039 MM Side Tamping Pulse 1 115 24-126pulse
Tamp Motor.
Second and subsequent paper alignment operation
6040 MM Side Tamping Pulse 2 28 24-100pulse
amount by the MM Side Tamp Motor.
Number of times for paper alignment operation by the MM
6041 MM Side Tamping Number 2 1-5time
Side Tamp Motor.
MM Tamper Feed Motor Stop
6042 1004 10-1500ms
Timing (Speed 1)
MM Tamper Feed Motor Stop Adjust the time in various speeds.
6043 689 10-1200ms
Timing (Speed 2) Top edge of the body paper (1paper) been detected by the
MM Tamper Feed Motor Stop MM Guide Sensor ↔ MM Tamper Feed Motor stops
6044 599 10-1150ms
(Correspond with the MM Guide Motor speed)
Timing (Speed 3)
MM Tamper Feed Motor Stop
6045 510 10-1050ms
Timing (Speed 4)
Adjust the time.
MM Tamper Feed Motor Start
Timing (From nip position)
Sensor ↔ MM Tamper Feed Motor starts
MM Tamper Nip Motor Brake Time
6050 100 80-120ms Brake time of the MM Tamper Nip Motor.
Setting
MM Top Tamper Hit to Retreat Adjust switching timing from hit position to retreat position
6051 50 10-200ms
Position Switch Timing of the top tamper plate by the MM Top Tamper Solenoid.
MM Top Tamper Retreat to Hit Adjust switching timing from retreat position to hit position
6052 1 1-100ms
Position Switch Timing of the top tamper plate by the MM Top Tamper Solenoid.
Adjust the time.
6053 MM Tamper Nip Motor Start Timing 200 10-300ms Top edge of the body paper been detected by the MM
Tamper Eject Sensor ↔ MM Tamper Feed Motor starts
MM Side Tamper Home Position
6054 0 (-25 - 94)pulse
Adjustment (A4)
MM Side Tamper Home Position (-105 - 14) Adjust home position of the MM Side Tamper Plate at
6055 0
Adjustment (B5) pulse mechanical initialization.
MM Side Tamper Home Position (Adjust home position movement stop timing of the MM
6056 0 (-20 - 111)pulse
Side Tamper Motor.)
Adjustment (Letter)
MM Side Tamper Home Position
6057 0 (-20 - 111)pulse
Adjustment (Legal)
MM Top Tamper Home Position (-500 - 500)
6058 0
Adjustment (A4) pulse
MM Top Tamper Home Position (-41 - 500) Adjust home position of the MM Top Tamper Plate at home
6059 0
Adjustment (B5) pulse position return operation.
MM Top Tamper Home Position (-385 - 500) (Adjust home position movement stop timing of the MM
6060 0
Top Tamper Motor.)
Adjustment (Letter) pulse
MM Top Tamper Home Position (-500 - 43)
6061 0
Adjustment (Legal) pulse
[ 16-115 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

MM Body Hit 1 Home Position (-479 - 10000)
6065 0
Adjustment (A4-Inner 3 fold) pulse
6066 0
Adjustment (A4-Two fold) pulse Adjust home position of the MM Body Hit Plate 1 at home
MM Body Hit 1 Home Position (-3570 - 10000) position return operation.
6067 0
Adjustment (B5-Inner 3 fold) pulse (Adjust home position movement stop timing of the MM
MM Body Hit 1 Home Position (-2092 - 10000) Body Hit Motor 1.)
6069 0
Adjustment (Letter-Inner 3 fold) pulse
6071 0
Adjustment (Legal-4 fold) pulse
MM Body Hit 1 Backlash
6072 0 0-269pulse Select a number of pulse for backlash compensation.
Correction Pulse
6073 0
Adjustment (A4-Inner 3 fold) pulse
MM Body Hit 2 Home Position (-1850 - 10000) Adjust home position of the MM Body Hit Plate 2 at home
6074 0
Adjustment (B5-Inner 3 fold) pulse position return operation.
MM Body Hit 2 Home Position (-909 - 10000) (Adjust home position movement stop timing of the MM
6075 0
Body Hit Motor 2.)
Adjustment (Letter-Inner 3 fold) pulse
6076 0
Adjustment (Legal-4 fold) pulse
MM Body Hit 2 Backlash
Correction Pulse
Adjust home position of the MM Body Fold Set Flipper at
MM Body Fold Set Home Position home position return operation.
6078 0 (-32 - 32)pulse
Adjustment (Adjust home position movement stop timing of the MM
Body Fold Set Motor.)
Select a number of pulse.
MM Wrapping Feed Motor Top edge of the body paper been detected by the MM
6081 321 250-345pulse
Temporary Stop Timing Wrapping Stand-by Sensor ↔ MM Wrapping Feed Motor
temporaly stops
Select a number of pulse.
MM Wrapping Feed Motor Stop Rear edge of the body paper been detected by the MM
6082 250 150-350pulse
Timing Wrapping Stand-by Sensor ↔ MM Wrapping Feed Motor
stops
MM Form Hit 2 Home Position (-6836 - 1747)
6083 0
Adjustment (235x120mm-3 fold) pulse Adjust home position of the MM Form Hit Plate 2 at home
MM Form Hit 2 Home Position (-385 - 8198) position return operation.
6085 0
Adjustment (162x229mm-3 fold) pulse (Adjust home position movement stop timing of the MM
MM Form Hit 2 Home Position (-6836 - 1747) Form Hit Motor 2.)
6086 0
Adjustment (US-3 fold) pulse
MM Fold Hit 2 Backlash Correction
Pulse
MM Wrapping Feed Motor Resume Adjust the time.
6088 20 1-80ms
Timing (A4&Letter) Top edge of the form paper been detected by the MM
MM Wrapping Feed Motor Resume Wrapping Sensor after MM Wrapping Feed Motor
6089 30 1-80ms
temporaly stops ↔ MM Wrapping Feed Motor resumes
Timing (B5&Legal)
MM Form Horizontal Position Set excitation time of after the MM Form Horizontal
6095 20 20-100ms
Motor Excitation Time Setting Position Motor stops
MM Form Slack Amount
6096 285 189-380ms
Adjust the time in various speeds.
6097 192 126-257ms Top edge of the form paper been detected by the MM
Form Registration Sensor ↔ MM Form Registration Motor
MM Form Slack Amount starts
6098 166 109-222ms
Adjustment (Speed 3) (Correspond with the MM Guide Motor speed)
6099 140 92-188ms
Rev.1.00 [ 16-116 ]
Test Modes

MM Form Home Position Pulse number for form fine adjustment on form home
6102 502 443-564pulse
Adjustment Pulse position movement.
Adjust a pulse number.
MM Form Registration Motor Stop Rear edge of the form paper been detected by the MM
6103 483 458-534pulse
Timing Form Registration Sensor ↔ MM Form Registration Motor
stops after the form moved to horizontal position.
MM Form Horizontal Position Edge of the form paper been detected by the MM Form
6104 23 12-116pulse
Pulse Edge Detection Sensor ↔ MM Form Horizontal Position
Motor stops.
MM Form Horizontal Home Edge of the form paper been detected by the MM Form
6105 47 12-116pulse
Position Pulse Horizontal HP Sensor ↔ MM Form Horizontal Position
Motor stops.
MM Form Horizontal Position
6106 2 1-6speed Adjust MM Form Horizontal Position Motor speed.
Motor Speed Adjustment
MM Envelope Edge Detection Adjust the envelope edge detection accuracy.
6131 2048 0-4096
Sensor Adjustment To adjust the compile position of the envelope.
Select the MM Form Registration Motor speed after form
MM Form Registration Motor
6133 5 5-6speed horizontal movement.
Speed Adjustment 2
5: 5 speed, 6: 6 speed
MM Form Horizontal Position
6134 70 20-100ms Adjust the start timing for horizontal movement.
Motor Waiting Time
MM Form Entrance Nip Motor
6135 100 80-120ms Adjust nip position and release position by this adjustment.
Brake Time Adjustment
MM Flap Fold Motor Stop Time Adjust the MM Flap Fold Motor stop time on gluing
6136 220 100-10000ms
Adjustment operation.
MM Gluing Motor Start Timing Adjust time (stated below) on gluing operation.
6137 32 1-100ms
Adjustment MM Wrapping Fold Motor stop ↔ MM Gluing Motor start
Adjust time (stated below) on gluing operation.
MM Gluing Plate Home Position
6138 21 1-100ms Shielding plate been detected by the MM Gluing HP
Adjustment
Sensor ↔ MM Gluing Motor start braking.
MM Gluing Motor Brake Time
6139 100 100-300ms Adjust the MM Gluing Motor brake time.
Adjustment
MM Form Hit 3 Home Position (-8879 - 10000)
6143 0
Adjustment (235x120mm-3 fold) pulse Adjust home position of the MM Form Hit Plate 3 at home
MM Form Hit 3 Home Position (-2428 - 10000) position return operation.
6145 0
Adjustment (162x229mm-3 fold) pulse (Adjust home position movement stop timing of the MM
MM Form Hit 3 Home Position (-8879 - 10000) Form Hit Motor 3.)
6146 0
Adjustment (US-3 fold) pulse
MM Fold Hit 3 Backlash Correction
6147 0 0-269pulse Adjust a number of pulse for backlash compensation.
Pulse
MM No Water Detection Timing Adjust continuous detection numbers of no water by the
6148 10 1-16time
Adjustment MM Water Level Detection Sensor.
MM Flap Fold Motor Brake Time
6150 100 100-300ms Adjust the MM Flap Fold Motor brake time.
Adjustment
MM Flap Fold Motor Stop Timing
6151 95 50-150ms Adjust the time.
(235x120mm&US)
Edge of the paper been detected by the MM Gluing
MM Flap Fold Motor Stop Timing Sensor ↔ MM Flap Fold Motor stops
6152 171 125-225ms
(162x229mm)
Adjust allowed paper ejection number after detection of
6153 MM No Water Detect Timing 4000 0-5000time
[no water] by the MM Water Level Detection Sensor.
MM Transport Motors Stop Timing
6155 1000 0-2000ms Adjust an add time of last sheet ejection completion time.
Adjustment
Select the MM Ejection Elevation Motor speed ([mm/s])
MM Ejection Elevation Motor
6156 7 1: speed 1 (80), 2: speed 2 (100), 3: speed 3 (120), 4: speed 4 (140), 5:
Speed Adjustment
speed 5 (160), 6: speed 6 (180), 7: speed 7 (200)
MM Ejection Elevation Motor Flap
6157 700 0-2000ms Adjust the time to start pinning down the flap.
Timing Adjustment
[ 16-117 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

0: Disable Tray full detection by the MM Eject Tray Full Detection
6158 MM Ejection Tray Full Detection 1
1: Enable Sensor
MM Eject Tray Full Detection Adjust number of tray full detection by the MM Eject Tray
6159 6 2-16time
Timing Adjustment Full Detection Sensor for final judgement of tray full.
MM Ejection Motor Speed Setting Select the MM Ejection Motor speed ([mm/s])
6161 1
1: speed 1 (300), 2: speed 2 (600), 3: speed 3 (650), 4: speed 4 (700),
(Fallen Fence)
MM Ejection Motor Speed Setting 5: speed 5 (750), 6: speed 6 (800), 7: speed 7 (850), 8: speed 8 (900),
6162 6 9: speed 9 (950), 10: speed 10 (1000), 11: speed 11 (1050),
(No Body Paper)
12: speed 12 (1100), 13: speed 13 (1150), 14: speed 14 (1200),
M Ejection Motor Speed Setting (1
Body Paper)
M Ejection Motor Speed Setting (2 21: speed 21 (1700), 22: speed 22 (1780), 23: speed 23 (1860),
6164 7
Body Paper) 24: speed 24 (1940), 25: speed 25 (2020)
MM Tamper Eject Non Arrival Jam
6165 65 0-1000ms
Timing (A4)
6166 97 0-1000ms
Timing (B5) Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
MM Tamper Eject Non Arrival Jam Tamper Eject Sensor.
6167 79 0-1000ms
Timing (Letter)
6168 19 0-1000ms
Timing (Legal)
MM Body Fold Entrance Non Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6169 114 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing Body Fold Entrance Sensor.
MM Wrapping Entrance Non
6170 261 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing (A4-3 fold)
6171 233 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing (B5-3 fold)
6172 247 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing (Letter-3 fold) Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
MM Wrapping Entrance Non Wrapping Entrance Sensor.
6173 145 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing (A4-2 fold)
6174 137 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing (B5-2 fold)
6176 233 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing (Legal-4 fold)
MM Wrapping Stand-by Non Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6177 115 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing Wrapping Stand-by Sensor.
MM Wrapping Non Arrival Jam
6214 64 0-1000ms
Timing (235x120mm)
MM Wrapping Non Arrival Jam Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6216 102 0-1000ms
Timing (162x229mm) Wrapping Sensor.
MM Wrapping Non Arrival Jam
6217 64 0-1000ms
Timing (US)
MM Compile Eject Non Arrival Jam Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6223 130 0-1000ms
Timing Compile Eject Sensor.
MM Wrapping Stand-by Remaining
6275 30 0-1000ms
Jam Timing (A4-3 fold)
6276 30 0-1000ms
Jam Timing (B5-3 fold)
MM Wrapping Stand-by Remaining Adjust a jam determination time on remaining jam
6277 30 0-1000ms
Jam Timing (Letter-3 fold) detection by the MM Wrapping Stand-by Sensor.
6278 30 0-1000ms
Jam Timing (A4-2 fold)
6281 30 0-1000ms
Jam Timing (Legal-4 fold)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-118 ]
Test Modes

Adjust a jam determination time on remaining jam
6333 MM Eject Remaining Jam Timing 10 1-60s
detection by the MM Eject Sensor.
MM DA1 Barcode Sensor Light
6335 60 0-255 Adjust the Barcode Sensor Light Emission amount.
Emission Amount Adjustment
MM DA2 Envelope Edge Sensor
6336 72 0-255 Adjust the Envelope Edge Sensor Light Emission amount.
Light Emission Amount Adjustment
Adjust the time.
MM Tamper Feed Motor Brake
Start Timing (From Nip Position)
Sensor ↔ MM Tamper Feed Motor brake start
Adjust the time.
MM Tamper Feed Motor Brake
6509 90 0-120ms Home position been detected by the MM Tamper Nip HP
Start Timing (From HP Position)
Sensor ↔ MM Tamper Feed Motor brake start
MM Tamper Feed Motor Drive Adjust the operating time to be used when start the MM
6510 100 10-500ms
Start Timing Tamper Feed Motor.
MM Tamper Feed Motor Drive Adjust the operating speed to be used when start the MM
6511 9 1-21speed
Start Speed Tamper Feed Motor.
MM End Tamper Home Position Adjust the home position of the rear end body paper by
6512 22 17-27pulse
Adjustment the rear end tamper plate.
MM End Tamper Hit Position Adjust the hit position of the rear end body paper by the
6513 12 10-17pulse
Adjustment rear end tamper plate.
MM Wrapping Fold Motor Speed
6541 100 90-100% Adjust speed of the MM Wrapping Feed Motor.
Adjustment
Select the MM Wrapping Feed Motor speed.
MM Wrapping Feed Motor Speed
6542 1 1: speed 1
Adjustment
2: Set speed from the terminal
MM Ejection Motor Speed Setting Select the MM Ejection Motor speed ([mm/s])
6609 7
1: speed 1 (300), 2: speed 2 (600), 3: speed 3 (650), 4: speed 4 (700),
(3 Body Paper)
MM Ejection Motor Speed Setting 5: speed 5 (750), 6: speed 6 (800), 7: speed 7 (850), 8: speed 8 (900),
(4 Body Paper)
MM Ejection Motor Speed Setting
(5 Body Paper)
MM Ejection Motor Speed Setting 21: speed 21 (1700), 22: speed 22 (1780), 23: speed 23 (1860),
6612 7
(6 Body Paper) 24: speed 24 (1940), 25: speed 25 (2020)
Adjust number of tray full detection by the MM Eject Tray
6616 MM Ejection Tray Non-Full Timing 6 2-16time
Full Detection Sensor for judgement of not tray full.
Adjust number of sheet to eject after detect tray full by the
MM Eject Tray Full Detection Sensor.
6617 MM Ejection Tray Full Timing 0 0-50time
(Send E1 signal to the printer after set number of sheets
has ejected.)
MM Eject Fence position will be determined after the MM
MM Eject Fence Position Detection
6619 10 2-100time Eject Fence Position Sensor detect same value for this
Timing Adjustment
number of times.
MM Eject Tray Full Detection Adjust the threshold of the MM Eject Tray Full Detection
6620 2048 0-4096
Sensor F Adjustment Sensor F for tray full detection.
MM Eject Tray Full Detection Adjust the threshold of the MM Eject Tray Full Detection
6621 2048 0-4096
Sensor R Adjustment Sensor R for tray full detection.
Adjust the threshold temperature to select the MM
Eject Elevation Belt stop control for gluing performance
MM Low Temperature Mode Value
6622 11 0-30℃ improvement.
1 Adjustment
If environment temperature lowering from this temperature,
becomes low temperature mode.
Adjust the threshold temperature to select the MM
Eject Elevation Belt stop control for gluing performance
MM Low Temperature Mode Value
6623 5 0-30℃ improvement.
2 Adjustment
If environment temperature lowering from this temperature,
becomes ultra low temperature mode.
[ 16-119 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

Select MM Low Temperature Stop Mode.
MM Low Temperature Stop Mode
6624 0 0: Automatic (Stop time determined by ambient temperature)
Selection
1: Manual (Stop time will not determined by ambient temperature)
MM Eject Elevation Belt Temporary Adjust stop time of the MM Eject Elevation Belt for gluing
6625 55 0-600ms
Stop Timing (Manual) performance improvement. (When TM6624 set as 1)
MM Flap Gluing Eject Non Arrival
6626 260 0-1000ms
Jam Timing (162x229mm-3 fold) Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
MM Flap Gluing Eject Non Arrival Flap Gluing Eject Sensor.
6627 222 0-1000ms
Jam Timing (US-4 fold)
MM Eject Elevation Edge Non
6628 74 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing (235x120mm)
MM Eject Elevation Edge Non Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6629 58 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing (162x229mm) Eject Elevation Edge Sensor.
MM Eject Elevation Edge Non
6630 74 0-1000ms
Arrival Jam Timing (US)
MM Guide (Body) Remaining Jam
6633 99 0-1000mm
Timing (A4)
6634 86 0-1000mm
Timing (B5) Adjust an add time on remaining jam detection by the MM
MM Guide (Body) Remaining Jam Guide Sensor.
6635 94 0-1000mm
Timing (Letter)
6636 119 0-1000mm
Timing (Legal)
MM Guide (Form) Remaining Jam
6637 100 0-1000mm
Timing (235x120mm)
MM Guide (Form) Remaining Jam Adjust an add time on remaining jam detection by the MM
6638 130 0-1000mm
Timing (162x229mm) Guide Sensor.
MM Guide (Form) Remaining Jam
6639 100 0-1000mm
Timing (US)
Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6641 MM Guide Non Arrival Jam Timing 47 0-1000mm
Guide Sensor.
MM Form Receive Non Arrival Jam Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6642 52 0-1000mm
Timing Form Receive Sensor.
MM Form Registration Non Arrival Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6686 185 0-1000mm
Jam Timing Form Registration Sensor.
Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6690 MM Gluing Non Arrival Jam Timing 192 0-1000ms
Gluing Sensor.
MM Compile Eject Remaining Jam
6691 55 0-1000mm
Timing (235x120mm)
MM Compile Eject Remaining Jam Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6692 79 0-1000mm
Timing (162x229mm) Compile Eject Sensor.
MM Compile Eject Remaining Jam
6693 55 0-1000mm
Timing (US)
MM Flap Gluing Eject Non Arrival Adjust an add time on non arrival jam detection by the MM
6694 222 0-1000mm
Jam Timing (235x120mm) Flap Gluing Eject Sensor.
MM Form Horizontal Position Non Adjust number of pulse on non arrival jam detection by the
6695 688 1-30000pulse
Arrival Jam Timing MM Form Horizontal HP Sensor.
MM Eject Elevation Belt Temporary Adjust MM Eject Elevation Belt temporary stop time to
6698 75 0-600ms
Stop Time (Low Temperature 1) gluing performance improvement at low temperature.
MM Eject Elevation Belt Temporary Adjust MM Eject Elevation Belt temporary stop time to
6699 75 0-600ms
Stop Time (Low Temperature 2) gluing performance improvement at ultra low temperature.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-120 ]
Test Modes
5-8. OPTIONS / PB (Perfect Binder)

Sensor Monitoring (S) OPTIONS / Perfect Binder

7001 PB Paper Feed Cover Length Sensor
7002 PB Paper Feed Check Sensor
7003 PB Body Text Exit Sensor
7004 PB Cover Registration Sensor
7005 PB Cover Cut Sensor
7006 PB Cover Position Sensor
7007 PB Cover Dust Tray Detection Sensor
7008 PB Book Block Detection Sensor
7009 PB Vertical Guide HP Sensor
7010 PB Fore Edge HP Sensor
7011 PB Body Text Jam Sensor
7012 PB Clamp Upper/Lower HP Sensor
7013 PB Clamp Upper/Lower Insert Sensor
7014 PB Clamp Book Block Detection Sensor
7015 PB Clamp Open Sensor
7016 PB Clamp Close Sensor
7017 PB Clamp Horizontal HP Sensor
7018 PB Clamp Horizontal Paper Feed Sensor
7019 PB Glue Roller Backlash Sensor
7020 PB Glue Sheet Feed Sensor
7021 PB Glue Sheet Cut Sensor
7022 PB Forming Cover Detection Sensor
7023 PB Cover Guide HP Sensor
7024 PB Forming Plate Open Sensor
7026 PB Booklet Exit Sensor
7027 PB Booklet Guide Sensor
7028 PB Booklet Exit Position 1 Sensor
7029 PB Booklet Exit Position 2 Sensor
7030 PB Fore Edge HP Position Check Sensor
7031 PB Fore Edge Release Position Check Sensor
7032 PB Blind Plate Open Sensor
7033 PB Blind Plate Close Sensor
7034 PB Cover Cut HP Sensor
7035 PB Cover Cut Limit Sensor
7036 PB Front Door Switch
7037 PB Right Door Switch
7038 PB Upper Cover Switch
7039 PB Cover Detection Sensor
7040 PB Cover Top Face Sensor
7042 PB Cover Feed Sensor
7043 PB Cover Pass Sensor
7044 PB Cover Size 1 Sensor
7045 PB Cover Size 2 Sensor
7047 PB Lift Up Lower Limit Sensor
7050 PB Booklet Jam Detection Sensor
7052 PB Guide Select Open Sensor
7053 PB Guide Select Close Sensor
[ 16-121 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Drive Checking (M) OPTIONS / Perfect Binder

7200 PB Paper Feed Motor 1 (CW) Starts and stops the PB Paper Feed Motor 1 (CW)
7201 PB Paper Feed Motor 1 (CCW) Starts and stops the PB Paper Feed Motor 1 (CCW)
7202 PB Paper Feed Motor 2 (CW) Starts and stops the PB Paper Feed Motor 2 (CW)
7203 PB Paper Feed Motor 2 (CCW) Starts and stops the PB Paper Feed Motor 2 (CCW)
7205 PB Glue Amount Check Fan Turn ON or OFF of the PB Glue Amount Check Fan
7206 PB Booklet Exit 1 Motor (CW) Starts and stops the PB Booklet Exit 1 Motor (CW)
7207 PB Booklet Exit 1 Motor (CCW) Starts and stops the PB Booklet Exit 1 Motor (CCW)
7208 PB Booklet Exit 2 Motor (CW) Starts and stops the PB Booklet Exit 2 Motor (CW)
7209 PB Booklet Exit 2 Motor (CCW) Starts and stops the PB Booklet Exit 2 Motor (CCW)
7210 PB Exhaust Fan Turn ON or OFF of the PB Exhaust Fan
7211 PB Cover Feed Motor (CW) Starts and stops the PB Cover Feed Motor (CW)
7212 PB Cover Feed Motor (CCW) Starts and stops the PB Cover Feed Motor (CCW)
7213 PB Cover Suction Fan Turn ON or OFF of the PB Cover Suction Fan
7214 PB Cover Separator Fan Turn ON or OFF of the PB Cover Separator Fan
7215 PB Paper Separation Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the PB Paper Separation Solenoid
7216 PB Cover Separation Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the PB Cover Separation Solenoid
7217 PB Cover Registration Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the PB Cover Registration Solenoid
7218 PB Pressure Roller Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the PB Pressure Roller Solenoid
7220 PB Suction Control Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the PB Suction Control Solenoid
7221 PB Paper Feed Drive Clutch Turn ON or OFF of the PB Paper Feed Drive Clutch
7227 PB Booklet Ejection Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the PB Booklet Ejection Solenoid
7228 PB Front Cover Release Solenoid Turn ON or OFF of the PB Front Cover Release Solenoid
Unit Checking (U) OPTIONS / Perfect Binder

7400 PB Glue Sheet (Normal)
Send out the glue sheet to 20mm
7401 PB Glue Sheet (Reverse)
Return the glue sheet to 20mm
7404 PB Body Text Thickness Check
Check the PB Body Text thikness.
7405 PB Vertical Guide Plate Set Position
Move PB Vertical Guide Plate to set position.
7406 PB Vertical Guide Plate Tamper Position
Move PB Vertical Guide Plate to tamper position.
7407 PB Vertical Guide Plate Home Position
Move PB Vertical Guide Plate to home position.
7408 PB Fore Edge Guide Plate Set Position
Move PB Fore Edge Guide Plate to home position.
7409 PB Fore Edge Guide Plate Tamper Position
Move PB Fore Edge Guide Plate to tamper position.
7410 PB Fore Edge Guide Plate Home Position
Move PB Fore Edge Guide Plate to home position.
7411 PB Fore Edge Plate Release Position
Move PB Fore Edge Plate to release position.
7412 PB Fore Edge Plate Home Position
Move PB Fore Edge Plate to home position.
7413 PB Clamp Movement
Open/Close the PB clamp.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-122 ]
Test Modes

7414 PB Clamp Insert Position
Move the PB clamp to insert position.
7415 PB Clamp Home Position
Move the PB clamp to home position.
7416 PB Clamp Glue Position
Move the PB clamp to glue position.
7417 PB Clamp Nipping Position
Move the PB clamp to nipping position.
7418 PB Clamp Insert Horizontal Position
Move the PB clamp to insert horizontal position.
7419 PB Clamp Horizontal Home Position
Move the PB clamp to horizontal home position.
7420 PB Clamp Horizontal Glue Position
Move the PB clamp to horizontal glue position.
7421 PB Clamp Horizontal Nipping Position
Move the PB clamp to horizontal nipping position.
7422 PB Glue Sheet Release Position
Move PB Glue Sheet to release position.
7423 PB Glue Sheet Press Position
Move PB Glue Sheet to press position.
7425 PB Nipping Plate (Open)
Open the PB Nipping Plate.
7426 PB Nipping Plate (Close)
Close the PB Nipping Plate.
7427 PB Cover Guide Plate Tamper Position
Move PB Cover Guide Plate to tamper position.
7428 PB Cover Guide Plate Home Position
Move PB Cover Guide Plate to home position.
7430 PB Glue Position Tilt Adjustment
Move the body block from stack position to glue position, and stops.
7431 PB Glue Position Tilt Check & Eject
Eject the body block after perform TM No. 7430.
7432 PB Nipping Position Tilt Adjustment
Move the body block from stack position to nipping position, and stops.
7433 PB Nipping Position Tilt Check & Eject
Eject the body text after perform TM No. 7432.
7435 PB Cover Cut Drive
Move the cutter to cut position, then move to home position.
7436 PB Cover Cut Adjustment (Interposer)
Cut the cover, then transfer the cover to nipping position.
7438 PB Glue Roller Motor
Starts and stops the PB Glue Roller Motor.
7439 PB Halogen Heater
Starts and stops the PB Halogen Heater.
7440 PB Sheath Heater
Starts and stops the PB Sheath Heater.
7441 PB Glue Cut Heater
Starts the PB Glue Cut Heater.
7442 PB Clamp Horizontal Exit Position
Move the PB Clamp to horizontal exit position.
7443 PB Clamp Horizontal Blade Position
Move the PB Clamp to horizontal blade position.
7444 PB Cover Tray Lift Up
Starts and stops the PB Cover Tray lift-up.
[ 16-123 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

7445 PB Cover Tray Lift Down
Starts and stops the PB Cover Tray lift-down.
7446 PB Glue Blade Height Check 1
At first, clamp the body text, then glue it, finally stops after used the glue cut blade.
Need to place body text on the stacker before use this test mode.
Perform 7446 then 7447 in combination.
7447 PB Glue Blade Height Check 2
Move the mechanic to the position where before TM 7446 performed, then release clamp on body text, and stops.
Perform TM7446 first, then TM 7447 as combination.
7448 PB Body Text Stack Position Check
Stop after stack the body text without clamping.
Perform this test mode together with one of following test modes. [TM7450], [TM7451], [TM7452]
Also, this test mode details can be set by TM7669 & TM7670.
7449 PB Cover Nipping Position Transport
Transport the cover to nipping position, then stops.
7450 PB Body Text Clamp Range Check
Clamp the body text, then move to home position, then stops.
7451 PB Gluing Position Check
Clamp the body text, then move to gluing position, then stops.
7452 PB Nipping Position Check
Clamp the body text, then move to nipping position (also height), then stops.
7453 PB Guide Plate Open Position
Move the PB Guide plate to the open position.
7454 PB Guide Plate Close Position
Move the PB Guide plate to the close position.
7455 PB Test Print
Prints a PB test pattern.
Printing conditions (fixed): Bind side is left.
Printing conditions (To be selected):
>Tray setting (TM1867)-Select Body text tray (Tray 1-3 cannot be used when used A5 wide size paper).
>Body text size (TM7671), Body text sheet quantity (TM7672), Cover length (TM7673), Cover tray selection (TM7674)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-124 ]
Test Modes
Data Monitoring (C) OPTIONS / Perfect Binder

7602 PB Total Number of Book Binding Displays accumulated number of book binding.
PB Total Number of Paper Displays accumulated number of paper transportation.
7603
Transportation (Accumulated number that paper thorough the PB Body Text Exit Sensor)
PB Upper limit detection of glue amount Detects and dislay current temperature.
7604
(Thermistor) (Number shows actual tempeatue times 10)
PB Lower limit detection of glue amount Detects and dislay current temperature.
7605
PB Glue Roller Temperature detection Detects and dislay current temperature.
7606
PB Glue Tank Temperature detection Detects and dislay current temperature.
7607
Measuring result of PB Text Part Display thickness value gotten from Test Mode No. 3004 operation.
7608
Thickness (0.1mm) Thickness value: Unit: 0.1mm
Measuring result of PB Text Part Display thickness value gotten from Test Mode No. 3004 operation.
7609
Thickness (Pulse) Thickness value: Unit: pulse
Measuring result of PB Cover Sheet Display length value gotten from Test Mode No. 3034 operation.
7610
Length (0.1mm) Thickness value: Unit: 0.1mm
Measuring result of PB Cover Sheet Display length value gotten from Test Mode No. 3034 operation.
7611
Length (Pulse) Thickness value: Unit: pulse
7612 PB Firmware Version Displays the firmware version that was notified by PB.
7613 PB Loader Version Displays the loader software version that was notified by PB.
[ 16-125 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
Data Editing (D) OPTIONS / Perfect Binder

PB Cool Down Start Time
7616 10 10-60minute Set time period for the system goes into cool down process.
Setting
PB Clamp Body Insert Adjust value for the clamp move horizontally to reach to
7618 0 (-150 - 150)
Horizontal Position Adjustment body insert position. (1=0.1mm)
PB Clamp Gluing Horizontal Adjust value for the clamp move horizontally to reach to
7619 0 (-150 - 150)
Position Adjustment gluing position. (1=0.1mm)
PB Clamp Blade Horizontal Adjust value for the clamp move horizontally to reach to
7620 0 (-150 - 150)
Position Adjustment blade position. (1=0.1mm)
PB Clamp Forming Horizontal Adjust value for the clamp move horizontally to reach to
7621 0 (-150 - 150)
Position Adjustment forming position. (1=0.1mm)
PB Clamp Exit Horizontal Adjust value for the clamp move horizontally to reach to exit
7622 0 (-150 - 150)
Position Adjustment position. (1=0.1mm)
PB Clamp Body Insert Height Adjust value for the clamp move up/down direction to reach
7623 0 (-25 - 25)
Adjustment to body insert height. (1=0.1mm)
PB Clamp Gluing Height Adjust value for the clamp move up/down direction to reach
7624 0 (-40 - 40)
Adjustment to gluing height. (1=0.1mm)
PB Clamp Blade Height Adjust value for the clamp move up/down direction to reach
7625 0 (-30 - 30)
Adjustment to blade height. (1=0.1mm)
PB Clamp Forming Height Adjust value for the clamp move up/down direction to reach
7626 0 (-40 - 40)
Adjustment to forming height. (1=0.1mm)
PB Cover Length Measurement Measurement resolution for calculating PB cover length.
7627 4050 4000-4100pulse
Resolution (1pulse = 0.01um)
PB Cover Forming Position Adjust value of moving the cover to forming position. [A4
7628 0 (-150 - 150)
Adjustment 1 size-Thickness: between 0.1mm and 4.9mm] (1=0.1mm)
7629 0 (-150 - 150)
7630 0 (-150 - 150)
Adjustment 3 size-Thickness: Over 15.0mm] (1=0.1mm)
PB Cover Forming Position Adjust value of moving the cover to forming position. [B5
7631 0 (-150 - 150)
7632 0 (-150 - 150)
7633 0 (-150 - 150)
7634 0 (-150 - 150)
7635 0 (-150 - 150)
7636 0 (-150 - 150)
PB Cover Forming Position Adjust value of moving the cover to forming position. [Letter
7637 0 (-150 - 150)
7638 0 (-150 - 150)
7639 0 (-150 - 150)
Adjustment 12 size-Thickness: Over 15.0mm]
Factor to calculate the accumulated amount of the back
7640 PB Back Glue Stock Value 90 50-300
glue.
Rev.1.00 [ 16-126 ]
Test Modes

PB Left Side Glue Amount Adjust left side glue amount. [Body thickness: between
7641 15 5-99
Adjustment 1 0.1mm and 4.9mm] (1=0.1mm)
7642 15 5-99
7643 15 5-99
7644 25 5-99
7645 25 5-99
PB Right Side Glue Amount Adjust right side glue amount. [Body thickness: between
7646 15 5-99
7647 15 5-99
7648 15 5-99
7649 20 5-99
7650 20 5-99
PB Fore Edge Home Position Adjust pulse number for move the PB Fore Edge Plate to
7651 0 (-150 - 150)pulse
Pulse Adjustment home position.
PB Cover Cut Position Adjust value of moving the cover to cut position. [A4 size-
7652 0 (-150 - 150)
Adjustment 1 Thickness: between 1.0mm and 4.9mm] (1=0.1mm)
7653 0 (-150 - 150)
7654 0 (-150 - 150)
Adjustment 3 Thickness: over 15.0mm] (1=0.1mm)
PB Cover Cut Position Adjust value of moving the cover to cut position. [B5 size-
7655 0 (-150 - 150)
7656 0 (-150 - 150)
7657 0 (-150 - 150)
7658 0 (-150 - 150)
7659 0 (-150 - 150)
7660 0 (-150 - 150)
PB Cover Cut Position Adjust value of moving the cover to cut position. [Letter size-
7661 0 (-150 - 150)
7662 0 (-150 - 150)
7663 0 (-150 - 150)
PB Paper Transport Speed PB paper transport speed adjustment at printer speed
7664 626 576-676mm/s
Setting (632) 632mm/s.
7665 530 488-572mm/s
7666 460 423-497mm/s
7667 313 288-338mm/s
[ 16-127 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

PB Cover Length Measurement Measurement resolution for calculating PB cover length.
7668 4050 4000-4100pulse
Resolution (Interposer) (1pulse = 0.01um)
Select the body size when performing TM7448. (Non-volatile storage of data
PB Body Stack Size Setting
7669 0 is not performed.)
(Body size)
Selection - 0: A4, 1: B5, 2: Letter, 3: A5
PB Body Stack Size Setting Select number of the body sheet when performing TM7448.
7670 50 15-300sheet
(Number of body sheet) (Non-volatile storage of data is not performed.)
PB Test Pattern Print Setting Select the body size when performing TM7455.
7671 0
(Body size) Selection - 0: A4 wide, 1: B5 wide, 2: A5 wide, 3: Letter wide
Select number of the body sheet when performing TM7455.
PB Test Pattern Print Setting
7672 50 15-600sheet IJ paper - Maximum 300 sheets
(Number of body)
Light weight paper - Maximum 600 sheets
PB Test Pattern Print Setting Set length of the cover sheet when performing TM7455.
7673 4215 2985-4768
(Body length) (1=0.1mm)
Select the tray of the cover sheet when performing TM7455.
PB Test Pattern Print Setting
7674 5 0: P-F Tray, 1: Tray 1, 2: Tray 2, 3: Tray 3, 4: High Capacity Feeder, 5: The
(Body tray)
cover inserter
PB Fore Edge Plate Position
7950 0 (-50 - 50) Adjust value of the PB Fore Edge Plate position. (1=0.1mm)
Adjustment
PB Vertical Guide Plate Position Adjust value of the PB Vertical Guide Plate position.
7954 0 (-50 - 50)
Adjustment (1=0.1mm)
PB Cover Guide Plate Position Adjust value of the PB Cover Guide Plate position.
7958 0 (-50 - 50)
Adjustment (1=0.1mm)
PB Clamp Pulse Value Adjust the pulse encoder value when the clamp was closed.
7962 1048 900-1200pulse
Adjustment (No body) (No body sheet)
PB Clamp Pulse Value
Adjust the pulse encoder value when the clamp was closed.
7963 Adjustment (Body thickness- 561 450-700pulse
(Body thickness is 20mm)
20mm)
Rev.1.00 [ 16-128 ]
Test Modes
6. Test Modes Number - Page Search

TM P Unit Cat TM P Unit Cat TM P Unit Cat TM P Unit Cat
401 15 ComColor U 508 25 ComColor I 665 28 ComColor C 726 34 ComColor D
407 15 ComColor U 600 27 ComColor C 668 28 ComColor C 729 34 ComColor D
440 17 ComColor U 641 27 ComColor C 707 33 ComColor D 783 37 ComColor D
460 18 ComColor U 655 28 ComColor C 716 33 ComColor D 1000 10 ComColor S
502 25 ComColor I 660 28 ComColor C 721 33 ComColor D 1005 10 ComColor S
[ 16-129 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

1010 10 ComColor S 1181 11 ComColor S 1444 20 ComColor U 1625 30 ComColor C
1022 10 ComColor S 1225 14 ComColor M 1479 21 ComColor U 1652 30 ComColor C
1035 10 ComColor S 1250 14 ComColor M 1502 26 ComColor I 1661 30 ComColor C
1100 10 ComColor S 1258 14 ComColor M 1604 29 ComColor C 1667 30 ComColor C
1152 11 ComColor S 1421 20 ComColor U 1615 29 ComColor C 1678 31 ComColor C
Rev.1.00 [ 16-130 ]
Test Modes

1687 31 ComColor C 1804 39 ComColor D 1860 41 ComColor D 2107 11 ComColor S
1743 38 ComColor D 1816 40 ComColor D 1881 42 ComColor D 2117 11 ComColor S
1789 39 ComColor D 1855 41 ComColor D 2101 11 ComColor S 2169 12 ComColor S
[ 16-131 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

2173 12 ComColor S 2481 23 ComColor U 2923 45 ComColor D 2976 46 ComColor D
2305 14 ComColor M 2486 23 ComColor U 2928 45 ComColor D 2984 46 ComColor D
2400 21 ComColor U 2489 23 ComColor U 2934 45 ComColor D 3000 13 ComColor S
2405 21 ComColor U 2605 31 ComColor C 2941 46 ComColor D 3008 103 OST S
2406 21 ComColor U 2606 31 ComColor C 2942 46 ComColor D 3009 103 OST S
2407 21 ComColor U 2607 31 ComColor C 2943 46 ComColor D 3017 97 HCF S
2428 22 ComColor U 2701 44 ComColor D 2951 46 ComColor D 3025 97 HCF S
2461 22 ComColor U 2737 44 ComColor D 2963 46 ComColor D 3037 103 OST S
Rev.1.00 [ 16-132 ]
Test Modes

3051 103 OST S 3100 111 MM S 3249 107 HCS M 3434 113 MM U
3052 103 OST S 3101 111 MM S 3250 107 HCS M 3435 113 MM U
3053 103 OST S 3102 111 MM S 3251 107 HCS M 3436 113 MM U
3054 103 OST S 3103 111 MM S 3258 107 HCS M 3439 113 MM U
3055 103 OST S 3104 111 MM S 3260 107 HCS M 3440 113 MM U
3056 103 OST S 3105 111 MM S 3263 112 MM M 3441 113 MM U
3057 103 OST S 3106 111 MM S 3264 112 MM M 3442 113 MM U
3058 103 OST S 3107 111 MM S 3265 112 MM M 3443 113 MM U
3059 103 OST S 3108 111 MM S 3266 112 MM M 3446 108 HCS U
3060 103 OST S 3109 111 MM S 3267 112 MM M 3447 108 HCS U
3061 103 OST S 3110 111 MM S 3268 112 MM M 3450 98 HCF U
3062 103 OST S 3111 111 MM S 3269 112 MM M 3452 98 HCF U
3063 97 HCF S 3112 111 MM S 3270 112 MM M 3453 98 HCF U
3065 107 HCS S 3113 111 MM S 3271 112 MM M 3454 98 HCF U
3066 107 HCS S 3114 111 MM S 3272 112 MM M 3456 104 OST U
3067 107 HCS S 3115 111 MM S 3273 112 MM M 3457 104 OST U
3068 107 HCS S 3118 111 MM S 3274 112 MM M 3458 104 OST U
3069 107 HCS S 3119 111 MM S 3275 112 MM M 3459 104 OST U
3070 107 HCS S 3123 111 MM S 3276 112 MM M 3460 104 OST U
3071 107 HCS S 3124 111 MM S 3309 97 HCF M 3461 104 OST U
3072 107 HCS S 3127 111 MM S 3400 24 ComColor U 3462 104 OST U
3076 107 HCS S 3150 97 HCF S 3404 24 ComColor U 3466 104 OST U
3077 107 HCS S 3152 97 HCF S 3405 108 HCS U 3467 104 OST U
3079 107 HCS S 3170 107 HCS S 3406 108 HCS U 3468 104 OST U
3080 107 HCS S 3171 107 HCS S 3407 108 HCS U 3469 104 OST U
3081 107 HCS S 3174 107 HCS S 3408 108 HCS U 3473 108 HCS U
3082 107 HCS S 3175 107 HCS S 3415 98 HCF U 3474 108 HCS U
3085 107 HCS S 3213 97 HCF M 3418 98 HCF U 3480 108 HCS U
3086 107 HCS S 3214 97 HCF M 3419 98 HCF U 3481 108 HCS U
3087 107 HCS S 3215 97 HCF M 3420 113 MM U 3483 108 HCS U
3088 107 HCS S 3216 97 HCF M 3421 113 MM U 3484 108 HCS U
3089 107 HCS S 3217 103 OST M 3422 113 MM U 3485 108 HCS U
3090 107 HCS S 3218 103 OST M 3423 113 MM U 3486 108 HCS U
3091 111 MM S 3220 103 OST M 3424 113 MM U 3487 108 HCS U
3092 111 MM S 3222 103 OST M 3425 113 MM U 3488 104 OST U
3093 111 MM S 3224 103 OST M 3426 113 MM U 3489 104 OST U
3094 111 MM S 3232 103 OST M 3427 113 MM U 3490 104 OST U
3095 111 MM S 3233 103 OST M 3428 113 MM U 3491 104 OST U
3096 111 MM S 3245 107 HCS M 3429 113 MM U 3492 104 OST U
3097 111 MM S 3246 107 HCS M 3431 113 MM U 3493 104 OST U
3098 111 MM S 3247 107 HCS M 3432 113 MM U 3494 105 OST U
3099 111 MM S 3248 107 HCS M 3433 113 MM U 3495 105 OST U
[ 16-133 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

3496 105 OST U 3743 106 OST D 4025 60 Finisher S 4079 61 Finisher S
3525 98 HCF I 3747 106 OST D 4029 60 Finisher S 4083 61 Finisher S
3535 109 HCS I 3748 106 OST D 4030 60 Finisher S 4084 61 Finisher S
3600 99 HCF C 3749 106 OST D 4031 60 Finisher S 4085 61 Finisher S
3601 99 HCF C 3750 99 HCF D 4032 60 Finisher S 4086 61 Finisher S
3612 109 HCS C 3765 100 HCF D 4045 60 Finisher S 4100 62 Finisher S
3616 105 OST C 3776 100 HCF D 4050 60 Finisher S 4108 62 Finisher S
3617 105 OST C 3817 110 HCS D 4051 60 Finisher S 4109 62 Finisher S
3619 114 MM C 3882 100 HCF D 4052 60 Finisher S 4110 62 Finisher S
3620 114 MM C 3883 100 HCF D 4053 60 Finisher S 4111 62 Finisher S
3621 114 MM C 3942 110 HCS D 4054 60 Finisher S 4112 62 Finisher S
3657 109 HCS C 3965 110 HCS D 4060 61 Finisher S 4119 62 Finisher S
3658 109 HCS C 3966 110 HCS D 4061 61 Finisher S 4120 62 Finisher S
3659 109 HCS C 3967 110 HCS D 4062 61 Finisher S 4230 62 Finisher M
3673 114 MM C 3968 110 HCS D 4063 61 Finisher S 4231 62 Finisher M
3700 47 ComColor D 3969 110 HCS D 4064 61 Finisher S 4232 62 Finisher M
3739 106 OST D 3979 110 HCS D 4073 61 Finisher S 4238 62 Finisher M
3740 106 OST D 4020 60 Finisher S 4074 61 Finisher S 4239 62 Finisher M
Rev.1.00 [ 16-134 ]
Test Modes

4242 62 Finisher M 4424 64 Finisher U 4476 66 Finisher U 4663 68 Finisher D
4268 63 Finisher M 4449 65 Finisher U 4500 67 Finisher I 4687 70 Finisher D
4274 63 Finisher M 4455 65 Finisher U 4600 67 Finisher C 4693 70 Finisher D
4275 63 Finisher M 4456 65 Finisher U 4601 67 Finisher C 4694 70 Finisher D
4405 64 Finisher U 4457 65 Finisher U 4602 67 Finisher C 4695 70 Finisher D
4406 64 Finisher U 4458 65 Finisher U 4603 67 Finisher C 4721 70 Finisher D
4410 64 Finisher U 4459 65 Finisher U 4650 68 Finisher D 4722 70 Finisher D
[ 16-135 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

4738 71 Finisher D 4788 74 Finisher D 4849 77 Finisher D 4898 80 Finisher D
Rev.1.00 [ 16-136 ]
Test Modes

4959 83 Finisher D 5017 87 Scanner S 5706 90 Scanner D 5762 93 Scanner D
4971 84 Finisher D 5210 87 Scanner M 5723 91 Scanner D 5774 94 Scanner D
4974 84 Finisher D 5400 88 Scanner U 5726 91 Scanner D 5777 94 Scanner D
4988 85 Finisher D 5501 89 Scanner I 5744 93 Scanner D 5791 94 Scanner D
4991 85 Finisher D 5600 89 Scanner C 5747 93 Scanner D 5794 94 Scanner D
5010 87 Scanner S 5631 89 Scanner C 5755 93 Scanner D 5802 95 Scanner D
5014 87 Scanner S 5700 90 Scanner D 5759 93 Scanner D 5811 95 Scanner D
[ 16-137 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

5818 95 Scanner D 6039 115 MM D 6104 117 MM D 6277 118 MM D
6005 114 MM D 6074 116 MM D 6163 118 MM D 6626 120 MM D
6006 114 MM D 6075 116 MM D 6164 118 MM D 6627 120 MM D
6007 114 MM D 6076 116 MM D 6165 118 MM D 6628 120 MM D
6008 114 MM D 6077 116 MM D 6166 118 MM D 6629 120 MM D
6009 114 MM D 6078 116 MM D 6167 118 MM D 6630 120 MM D
6010 114 MM D 6081 116 MM D 6168 118 MM D 6633 120 MM D
6011 114 MM D 6082 116 MM D 6169 118 MM D 6634 120 MM D
6012 114 MM D 6083 116 MM D 6170 118 MM D 6635 120 MM D
6013 114 MM D 6085 116 MM D 6171 118 MM D 6636 120 MM D
6014 114 MM D 6086 116 MM D 6172 118 MM D 6637 120 MM D
6015 114 MM D 6087 116 MM D 6173 118 MM D 6638 120 MM D
6024 114 MM D 6088 116 MM D 6174 118 MM D 6639 120 MM D
6025 114 MM D 6089 116 MM D 6176 118 MM D 6641 120 MM D
6030 115 MM D 6095 116 MM D 6177 118 MM D 6642 120 MM D
6031 115 MM D 6096 116 MM D 6214 118 MM D 6686 120 MM D
6032 115 MM D 6097 116 MM D 6216 118 MM D 6690 120 MM D
6033 115 MM D 6098 116 MM D 6217 118 MM D 6691 120 MM D
6036 115 MM D 6099 116 MM D 6223 118 MM D 6692 120 MM D
6037 115 MM D 6102 117 MM D 6275 118 MM D 6693 120 MM D
6038 115 MM D 6103 117 MM D 6276 118 MM D 6694 120 MM D
Rev.1.00 [ 16-138 ]
Test Modes

6695 120 MM D 6750 49 ComColor D 6890 51 ComColor D 7002 121 PB S
6700 48 ComColor D 6753 49 ComColor D 6893 51 ComColor D 7005 121 PB S
6743 48 ComColor D 6879 50 ComColor D 7001 121 PB S 7200 122 PB M
[ 16-139 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

7201 122 PB M 7430 123 PB U 7628 126 PB D 7675 100 HCF D
7202 122 PB M 7431 123 PB U 7629 126 PB D 7676 100 HCF D
7203 122 PB M 7432 123 PB U 7630 126 PB D 7677 100 HCF D
7205 122 PB M 7433 123 PB U 7631 126 PB D 7678 100 HCF D
7206 122 PB M 7435 123 PB U 7632 126 PB D 7700 53 ComColor D
7400 122 PB U 7453 124 PB U 7649 127 PB D 7717 53 ComColor D
7405 122 PB U 7602 125 PB C 7652 127 PB D 7720 53 ComColor D
7407 122 PB U 7604 125 PB C 7654 127 PB D 7722 100 HCF D
7408 122 PB U 7605 125 PB C 7655 127 PB D 7724 100 HCF D
7409 122 PB U 7606 125 PB C 7656 127 PB D 7725 100 HCF D
7410 122 PB U 7607 125 PB C 7657 127 PB D 7726 100 HCF D
7411 122 PB U 7608 125 PB C 7658 127 PB D 7727 100 HCF D
7417 123 PB U 7616 126 PB D 7664 127 PB D 7733 53 ComColor D
Rev.1.00 [ 16-140 ]
Test Modes

7745 54 ComColor D 7810 55 ComColor D 7875 56 ComColor D 8614 32 ComColor C
7749 54 ComColor D 7814 101 HCF D 7879 56 ComColor D 8629 32 ComColor C
7754 101 HCF D 7820 55 ComColor D 7888 56 ComColor D 8634 32 ComColor C
7767 54 ComColor D 7822 55 ComColor D 7900 101 HCF D 8636 32 ComColor C
7768 101 HCF D 7823 55 ComColor D 7901 101 HCF D 8637 32 ComColor C
7795 55 ComColor D 7844 56 ComColor D 7950 128 PB D 9600 102 HCF D
7796 55 ComColor D 7859 56 ComColor D 7954 128 PB D 9601 102 HCF D
7797 55 ComColor D 7860 101 HCF D 7958 128 PB D 9602 102 HCF D
7800 55 ComColor D 7863 101 HCF D 8000 13 ComColor S 9605 102 HCF D
7803 55 ComColor D 7866 56 ComColor D 8003 13 ComColor S 9608 102 HCF D
7804 55 ComColor D 7868 56 ComColor D 8004 13 ComColor S 9609 102 HCF D
7805 55 ComColor D 7869 56 ComColor D 8400 24 ComColor U 9700 58 ComColor D
7806 55 ComColor D 7870 56 ComColor D 8401 24 ComColor U 9701 58 ComColor D
7807 55 ComColor D 7871 56 ComColor D 8611 32 ComColor C 9702 58 ComColor D
[ 16-141 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes

9705 58 ComColor D 9753 58 ComColor D 9801 58 ComColor D 9849 58 ComColor D
9716 58 ComColor D 9764 58 ComColor D 9812 58 ComColor D 9860 102 HCF D
9717 58 ComColor D 9765 58 ComColor D 9813 58 ComColor D 9862 102 HCF D
9718 58 ComColor D 9766 58 ComColor D 9814 102 HCF D 9863 102 HCF D
9719 58 ComColor D 9767 58 ComColor D 9816 102 HCF D 9864 102 HCF D
9720 58 ComColor D 9768 102 HCF D 9817 102 HCF D 9865 102 HCF D
9721 58 ComColor D 9770 102 HCF D 9818 102 HCF D 9866 58 ComColor D
9722 102 HCF D 9771 102 HCF D 9819 102 HCF D 9867 59 ComColor D
9724 102 HCF D 9772 102 HCF D 9820 58 ComColor D 9868 59 ComColor D
9725 102 HCF D 9773 102 HCF D 9821 59 ComColor D 9869 59 ComColor D
9726 102 HCF D 9774 58 ComColor D 9822 59 ComColor D 9870 59 ComColor D
9727 102 HCF D 9775 59 ComColor D 9823 59 ComColor D 9871 59 ComColor D
Rev.1.00 [ 16-142 ]
Test Modes
TM P Unit Cat TM P Unit Cat

9897 58 ComColor D 9946 58 ComColor D
9904 58 ComColor D 9953 102 HCF D
9905 58 ComColor D 9955 102 HCF D
9906 102 HCF D 9956 102 HCF D
9908 102 HCF D 9957 102 HCF D
9909 102 HCF D 9958 102 HCF D
9910 102 HCF D 9959 58 ComColor D
9911 102 HCF D 9960 59 ComColor D
9929 59 ComColor D 9978 102 HCF D
9931 58 ComColor D 9979 102 HCF D
9932 58 ComColor D
9933 58 ComColor D
9934 58 ComColor D
9935 58 ComColor D
9936 58 ComColor D
9937 58 ComColor D
9938 58 ComColor D
9939 58 ComColor D
9940 58 ComColor D
9941 58 ComColor D
9942 58 ComColor D
9943 58 ComColor D
9944 58 ComColor D
9945 58 ComColor D
[ 16-143 ] Rev.1.00
Test Modes
MEMO
Rev.1.00 [ 16-144 ]
Option ［ 19-1 ］ Face Down Offset Stapler
Chapter 19. Face Down Offset Stapler　
Contents
1. Brief Summary.................................................................................. 19-5
1-1. Summary.................................................................................. 19-5

1-2. Major Functions........................................................................ 19-5
1-3. Specification............................................................................. 19-6
1-4. Major Components................................................................... 19-7
1-5. Periodic Replacement Parts..................................................... 19-8
2. Mechanism........................................................................................ 19-9
2-1. Paper Transfer......................................................................... 19-9

2-2. Summary of Each Paper Path.................................................. 19-9
2-2-1. Non-Offset Paper Ejection................................................ 19-9
2-2-2. Offset Paper Ejection...................................................... 19-10
2-2-3. Stapled Paper Ejection................................................... 19-11
2-3. Initialization Movement........................................................... 19-13
2-4. Action before job starts.......................................................... 19-13
2-5. Paper receive ready position movement:............................... 19-14
2-5-1. Paper Stacking Tray paper top surface position:............ 19-14
2-5-2. Paper top surface detecting mechanism........................ 19-14
2-5-3. Paper Stacking Tray paper surface position detecting action... 19-16
4. Disassembly................................................................................... 19-39
4-1. Detaching of the Face Down Offset Stapler from the Printer..19-39
4-2. Front Cover removal.............................................................. 19-39
4-3. Rear Cover removal............................................................... 19-40
4-4. Jam Release Cover Assembly removal................................. 19-42
4-5. Switchback Guide removal..................................................... 19-43
4-6. Jam Release Cover Switch removal...................................... 19-43
4-7. Staple Change Cover Switch removal................................... 19-44
4-8. Offset Guide Assembly removal............................................. 19-44
4-9. Staple Scratch Protection Arm Assembly removal................. 19-46
4-10. Staple Tray Assembly removal............................................ 19-47
4-11. Paper Receive Guide Plate Assembly Removal.................. 19-47
4-12. Stapler Assembly removal.................................................. 19-48
4-13. Control Board (PCB) tilting................................................... 19-49
4-14. Control Board (PCB)............................................................ 19-50
4-15. Power Supply Unit removal.................................................. 19-51
4-16. Transfer Roller 1 & Transfer Roller 2 removal (these two rollers are
interchangeable).......... 19-52
4-17. Entrance Roller removal....................................................... 19-53
4-18. Rake Roller Assembly removal............................................ 19-55
［ 19-1 ］
Face Down Offset Stapler ［ 19-2 ］ Option
4-19. Eject Roller (drive side) removal　　　　　　　................. 19-61

4-20. Eject Roller (driven side) removal........................................ 19-62
4-21. Reverse Roller removal........................................................ 19-63
4-22. Transfer Sensor 1 removal................................................... 19-64
4-23. Entrance Sensor removal..................................................... 19-65
4-24. Staple Tray Paper Detection Sensor.................................... 19-66
4-25. Switchback Pass Sensor removal........................................ 19-67
4-26. Eject Roller Elevation HP Sensor removal........................... 19-68
4-27. Rake Roller Elevation HP Sensor removal.......................... 19-68
4-28. Paper Stacking Tray Upper Limit Sensor removal............... 19-69
4-29. Paper Stacking Tray Elevation Clock Sensor removal......... 19-69
4-30. Paper Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor removal............... 19-70
4-31. Tray Shift Clock Sensor removal.......................................... 19-70
4-32. Tray Shift Sensor 1 & Tray Shift Sensor 2 removal............. 19-71
4-33. Stapler Slide HP Sensor removal......................................... 19-72
4-34. Reverse Roller Elevation HP Sensor removal..................... 19-73
4-35. Stacking Tray Paper Detection Sensor removal.................. 19-74
4-36. Front Tamper HP Sensor & Rear Tamper HP Sensor removal...... 19-75
4-37. Tray Paper Top Detection Sensors 1, 2 and 3 removal....... 19-76
Tray Paper Top Detection Sensor 2 removal............................ 19-76
Tray Paper Top Detection Sensor 1 & 3 removal..................... 19-77
Staple Scratch Protection Arm HP Sensor removal.................. 19-77
4-38. Stapler Base Position Sensor removal................................. 19-77
4-39. Stapler Slide Motor removal................................................. 19-78
4-40. Eject Roller Elevation Motor removal................................... 19-79
4-41. Rake Roller Elevation Solenoid............................................ 19-79
4-42. Transfer Roller Motor 1 removal.......................................... 19-80
4-43. Transfer Roller Motor 2 removal.......................................... 19-81
4-44. Transport Motor removal...................................................... 19-82
4-45. Ejection Motor removal........................................................ 19-83
4-46. Tray Elevation Motor removal.............................................. 19-85
4-47. Cooling Fan removal............................................................ 19-86
4-48. Tray Shift Motor removal...................................................... 19-87
4-49. Staple Scratch Protection Arm Motor................................... 19-88
4-50. Reverse Roller Motor........................................................... 19-89
4-51. Reverse Roller Elevation Motor removal.............................. 19-89
4-52. Front Tamper Motor & Rear Tamper Motor removal............ 19-90
4-53. Stapler Cable removal.......................................................... 19-91
5.Other Removals............................................................................... 19-94
1. Control Board (PCB) replacement............................................. 19-94
［ 19-2 ］
1. Brief Summary
1-1. Summary
1) Does not slow down the printing speed in Simplex printing nor in Duplex printing.
150 ppm (pages per minute) in non-sort mode.
120 ppm in sort mode.
2) Offset function and Staple function become selectable compared to the standard Face Down Paper Receiving
Tray.
1. Offset paper ejection can be selected for multiple copy print jobs.
2. Staple function enables two center stapling or one corner stapling.
The paper ejection speed with the stapling function is 42 ppm with the papers fed in wide-edge direction,
10-sheet 1-stapling in corner, either in simples or duplex printing.
3) The maximum paper receiving capacity of the Face Down Offset Stapler Paper Stacking Tray is 1,000 sheets of
paper on the tray. (Conditions apply)
1-2. Major Functions

1) Non-Sort Paper Ejection
Ejects papers on the Paper Stacking Tray in one single stack with no offset.
2) Offset Paper Ejection
Ejects the papers per group in offset alignment on the Paper Stacking Tray.
3) Staple Paper Ejection
Staples and ejects the stapled papers on the Paper Stacking Tray in one single stack with no offset.　　　　　
Non-Sort Paper Ejection Offset Paper Ejection Staple Paper Ejection
Upper, Left, 1 Upper, Right, 1

Upper, 2 pos.
Left, 1 pos. Right, 1 pos.
Left, 2 pos. Right, 2 pos.
Binding side
［ 19-3 ］
1-3. Specification
［ 19-4 ］
1-4. Major Components

˂ Paper Stacking Tray ˃ ˂ Paper Ejection Roller ˃ ˂ Reverse Rotation Roller ˃
• Receives the printed papers • Ejects the papers onto the paper • Pulls the papers back into the
regardless of whether stapled or not. stacking tray. Stapler unit when the stapling
• The paper receiving tray shifts to • Pulls each paper back into the function is selected.
the Front and Back when the offset staple area when the staple function
function is selected. is selected.
• The offset amount is 30mm • The roller nip is released while the
between each set of papers. papers are aligned for stapling.
˂ Return Roller ˃ ˂ Process Tray ˃ ˂ Stapler Assembly ˃

• Checks the height of the ejected • When the staple function is • With the drive of the Stapler slide
papers on the paper stacking tray. selected, each set of papers is motor, the Stapler assembly is
to detect the maximum paper pile pooled on this tray until stapled. transferred to the staple position in
height, which changes with the paper accordance to the size of the paper
ejection mode and paper type. and selected stapling position.
• Returns the ejected papers back all
the way back towards the wall of the
unit to align the ejected papers.
• The roller stays up away from the
ejected papers when Card papers or
Envelopes are printed.
［ 19-5 ］
1-5. Periodic Replacement Parts

No. Parts Name Estimated Durability Estimated Durability
1 Transfer Roller 1 1,000,000. pages Test Mode No. 401:
Count Information Print.
2 Transfer Roller 2 1,000,000. pages Test Mode No. 401:
3 Entrance Roller 1,000,000. pages Test Mode No. 401:
4 Transfer Roller 1,000,000. pages Test Mode No. 401:
5 Eject Roller 500,000. pages Test Mode No. 401:
6 Reverse Roller 1,000,000. pages Test Mode No. 401:
7 Rake Roller 1,000,000. pages Test Mode No. 401:
8 De-Electricity 1,000,000. pages Test Mode No. 401:
Brush Count Information Print.
9 Staple 500,000. stapling Test Mode No. 3625:
OST Staple Job Total Numbers.
10 Stapler Cable 130,000. stapler slide movements. Test Mode No. 3626:
OST Staple Staple Movement Number.
［ 19-6 ］
2. Mechanism
2-1. Paper Transfer

The unit has two paper ejection selection.
1) Non-Staple paper ejection, with or without offset function.
2) Stapled paper ejection.
The paper paths differs between stapling and non-stapling.
• When not stapling, regardless of offset or non-offset, the papers ejects out onto the paper stacking tray non-
stop from the printer.
• When stapling, each paper stops once just before completely ejecting onto the tray. The paper is then switched
back to the Stapler assembly, sheet by sheet until stapled. Then the stapled prints are ejected onto the paper
stacking tray.
Non-Stapled paper ejection, both offset and non-offset. Stapled paper ejection
2-2. Summary of Each Paper Path
2-2-1. Non-Offset Paper Ejection

Continuous paper ejection onto the Paper stacking tray, sheet by sheet, on top of the previous sheet, in one pile.
6. Paper stacking tray, Reverse roller
3. Paper de-acceleration
4. Ejection roller
5. Rake roller
Ejection Roller
Transfer Roller 2
2. Paper acceleration
Paper Stacking Tray
1. Paper feeding
Reverse Roller
Transfer Roller 1
［ 19-7 ］
●Explanation
1. Paper Feeding
Feeds the paper from the printer into the Face Down Offset Stapler via the Transfer Roller 1.
The paper speed is equivalent to the printer ejection speed.
2. Paper Acceleration
Transfer roller 2 accelerates the paper speed to 700mm/second.
3. Paper De-acceleration
The paper is de-accelerated to the ejection speed of 632mm/second.
4. Ejection Roller
The Ejection roller with the drive elevates up-and-down mechanically against the driven roller positioned
nderneath. During the non-offset paper ejection, the Ejection roller is positioned down, nipped against the driven
roller for continuous paper ejection.
5. Rake Roller
This roller also has up and down position. For stapling job, the roller is positioned down to stock the papers in
the staple area. For non-staple jobs the Rake roller is raised in the up position.
6. Paper Stacking Tray and Reverse Roller
The ejected paper onto the Paper stacking tray slides down along the declined angle of the tray back towards the
eject side.The Reverse roller assists the paper to come back all the way down against to wall to align the papers.
2-2-2. Offset Paper Ejection

The prints are offset ejected out onto the Paper Stacking Tray between sets or between jobs, according to the
selection by the printer driver.
The offset amount is 30mm fixed.　　　　　
●Explanation
The offset movement of the Paper stacking tray.
Paper Stacking Tray
Offset printed papers
1. The movement of the equipment is exactly the same as when ejecting the papers onto the Paper stacking tray
with non-offset function.
2. After each set of prints are ejected out on the Paper stacking tray, the tray is offset 30mm to the other side to
receive the next set of the prints. This is repeated through the print job.
［ 19-8 ］
2-2-3. Stapled Paper Ejection

The printed papers from the printer are pooled on the Staple Tray until stapled and ejected onto the Paper stacking
tray. The staple positions are selectable one in front, one in rear or two on the side.
●Explanation
Eject Roller
1. Reverse rotation of the Eject Roller:

The Eject Roller rotates in the reverse direction
during the paper ejection process to send the
paper to the Staple Tray.
Staple Tray area
2. Setting the papers on the Staple Tray:

The paper is set on the Staple Tray by the
Ejection Roller and Rake Roller.
Rake Roller
3. Machine movement from

the second paper(1):
From the second paper, the Eject Roller is kept
up so it does not touch the papers.
［ 19-9 ］
Rake Roller
4. Machine movement from the second

paper (2):
Before the paper ejects out, the Eject Roller
comes down and with its reverse rotation sends
the paper to the Staple Tray, together with the
Rake Roller.
Rear Tamper Plate
5. Paper Alignment:
The paper sent to the Staple Tray is aligned by
the Front and Rear Tamper Plates.
Paper Stacking tray Papers Front Tamper Plate Note:

The Tamper plates on the photograph is colored RED to help
identification. The actual Tampers are not colored.
Ejection Roller
6. Stapling:
The Stapler Unit slides to the stapling position
　 and staples the aligned papers.
Stapler Unit
7. Stapled paper ejection:

After the stapling action, the Eject Roller rotates
in the eject direction and ejects the stapled
papers onto the Paper Stacking Tray.
Reverse Roller
［ 19-10 ］
2-3. Initialization Movement

●Explanation
When the unit is powered ON or opened cover is closed with the machine powered ON, the equipment performs
initialization movement to ready for the paper receiving.
●Detailed Explanation
˂The condition for the initialization movement.˃
When the printer power is turned ON.
When the paper release cover or the stapler cover status is changed from OPEN to CLOSE.
●Process
1) Checks for any paper left in the unit.
The Entrance Sensor and Transfer Sensor 1 checks for any paper left in the unit. Even if no paper is detected
at the time of power ON or the cover closed, the Transfer Motor 1, Transfer Motor2 and Transport Motor are
activated during the initialization movement and the presence of the paper is rechecked. Error message is
displayed when any paper is detected.
2) Initialization of key parts.

Key Parts Initialization Movement
Tamper Plate The Tamper Plates moves to the home position.
If the Tamper Plates are already at the home position, the plates escape out of the
home position once and then moves back to the home position.
Eject Roller Moves the Eject Roller to the waiting position. If the Eject Roller is already at the
waiting position, it stays at that position.
Paper Stacking The Paper Stacking Tray is moved to the home position and the Return Roller goes
Tray through the initialization movement.
Rake Roller The Paper Stacking Tray is moved to the home position and the Return Roller goes
through the initialization movement.
Stapler After the Clincher makes the initialization movement and the Tamper Plates do the
initialization movement, the Stapler Unit slides to the home position.
3) Stapler Unit staple prime action.

Staple needle priming action is made when the unit sees no staple needle in stapling position. If the staple
needle does not prime in position within 20 tries, the printer indicates a jam error message. This initial movement
stops if the unit detects door opened.
2-4. Action before job starts

●Explanation
The unit makes preparation movement to receive the papers at the start of the print job.
●Detailed Explanation
・Paper Stacking Height Adjustment
The machine lowers the Paper stacking tray until the Upper limit sensor of the stacking tray no longer detects the
tray. The Reverse roller is pushed down over the stacking tray, and the stacking tray is raised until the upper limit
sensor of the tray changes to the detected status. The stacking tray is lowered once again to the paper receiving
height. During this movement, the Reverse roller is rotated in the paper pull direction if the print job sent is for
non-sort or offset-sort ejection.The Reverse roller does not rotate for the staple finish jobs.
［ 19-11 ］
・Tamper Plate ready position movement:

The Tamper Plates slide to the paper width position to guide and align the oncoming papers.
・Eject Roller ready position movement:
The Eject roller lowers down and starts its rotation.
・Stapler unit ready position movement:
If the print job sent is a staple finish job, the Stapler slides to the stapling position of the oncoming paper size and
the selected staple mode.
2-5. Paper receive ready position movement:

Receiving the oncoming print job signal from the printer, the unit readies itself for the selected paper receiving
mode.
2-5-1. Paper Stacking Tray paper top surface position:

Paper top surface position of the Paper stacking tray is the height of the top most paper stacked on the Paper
stacking tray. Tray Paper Top Detection Sensors 1, 2 and 3 with the combination of these three sensor detection
status determine the paper receiving height of the Paper Stacking Tray.
Paper surface position
Start of the paper receiving. Paper is being stacked on the tray.
The Paper
Stacking Tray
elevates down.
Paper surface position
2-5-2. Paper top surface detecting mechanism.

Paper top surface position detection is detected by the Reverse Roller and the Tray Paper Top Detection Sensors 1,
2 and 3. The Reverse Roller has following two functions.
1. Align the ejected papers on the Paper Stacking Tray in the eject direction by pulling the papers towards the
printer.
2. Detects the paper surface position of the top paper on the Paper Stacking Tray.
The Reverse Roller on its pivot floats on the ejected papers on the Paper Stacking Tray. It lifts as the papers
accumulate on the stacking tray. The amount the Reverse Roller floats up, the Paper Stacking Tray is lowered
down by activating the Elevator motor. This function keeps the paper ejection height constant. Depending on the
paper ejection mode and the type of the papers printed, the position of the Reverse Roller changes between the
HIGH position (60 degrees), LOW position (45 degrees) and RETREIVED position.
［ 19-12 ］
Relationship between the Paper ejection mode, Paper Type,

and Reverse Roller position (paper surface position).
Stapled or not Paper ejection mode Paper Type Reverse Roller position
Stapled Non-sorted Standard Low Position (45 degrees)

Thick (small)
Thick (large) / Envelope Retrieved Position
Non-stapled Either Non-sorted or Standard High Position (60 degrees)
Offset sorted. Thick (small)
Thick (large) / Envelope Retrieved Position
　
The 60 and 45 degrees position of the Reverse Roller is set by the pulse count of the Reverse Roller Elevation
Motor. The Paper surface position is detected by the Tray Paper Top Detection Sensors 1, 2, 3 and Reverse Roller
Elevation HP Sensor. When running the Thick (large) or Envelope, the Reverse Roller is lifted all the way up in the
retrieved position by the Reverse Roller Elevation HP Sensor and the Reverse Roller does not function (does not
rotate to pull the prints back against the printer wall).
Eject Roller (driven)

Reverse Roller
Tray Paper Top

Detection Sensor 1
Tray Paper Top

Detection Sensor 2
Stacking Tray Paper Tray Paper Top Reverse Roller

Detection Sensor Detection Sensor 3 Elevation HP Sensor
［ 19-13 ］
Reverse Roller
LOW position (45 degrees) RETRIEVED position (Thick - large / Envelope)
HIGH position (60 degrees)

Paper surface position (Reverse Roller position)
2-5-3. Paper Stacking Tray paper surface position detecting action.

1) Set the Paper Stacking Tray to the paper receiving position.
1. Activates the Tray Elevator Motor to loser the Paper Stacking Tray.
- When paper is on the tray: The tray is lowered until the Stacking Tray Paper Detection Sensor changes from
ON to the OFF status.
- When no paper is on the tray: The tray is lowered 25mm down.
2. The Reverse Roller Elevation Motor is activated to lower the Reverse Roller all the way down to the Paper
Stacking Tray.
3. Tray Elevator Motor is activated to raise the Paper Stacking Tray.
4. The Paper Stacking Tray elevation stops once the Tray Paper Top Detection Sensor goes ON. (Paper receiving
position)
Paper Stacking Tray

descends down.
Paper Stacking
Tray elevates up.
Stacking Tray Upper Limit Sensor
Stacking Tray Paper Detection Sensor
［ 19-14 ］
［ 19-15 ］
［ 19-16 ］
排出ローラ
オフセットガイドＡｓｓｙ
積載トレイ
［ 19-17 ］
ＯＳＴ積載トレイシフトセンサ２溝カム
円板ＯＳＴ積載トレイシフトモータＡｓｓｙ
ＯＳＴ積載トレイシフトセンサ１
30mm
［ 19-18 ］
［ 19-19 ］
［ 19-20 ］
［ 19-21 ］
［ 19-22 ］
［ 19-23 ］
［ 19-24 ］
［ 19-25 ］
［ 19-26 ］
［ 19-27 ］
［ 19-28 ］
［ 19-29 ］
［ 19-30 ］
［ 19-31 ］
掻き込みローラ
ステープルユニット
駆動ギア間欠ギア掻き込みローラ昇降ＨＰセンサ
バネ
ＯＳＴ掻き込みローラ昇降ソレノイドロック板
［ 19-32 ］
溝カムギア溝カム部掻き込みローラ　レバー
針傷防止レバー
積載トレイ
［ 19-33 ］
Illustration Details
MOTOR
SOLENOID
Transport Motor
Guide Plate (Front & Rear)
Eject Roller Elevation HP Sensor CLUTCH
Face Down Offset Stapler
Eject Roller Elevation motor Transfer Roller

Ejection Roller Rake Roller Elevation HP Sensor FAN MOTOR
Staple Tray paper Detection Sensor Rake Roller
Jam Cover Switch TRANSMISSION
Reverse Roller TYPE SENOR
Entrance Roller
Paper Stacking Tray Entrance Sensor
REFLECTIVE
TYPE SENOR
Rake Roller Elevation Solenoid
Front Guide Plate HP Sensor INTERRUPT
Ejection Motor TYPE SENOR
Rear Guide Plate HP Sensor
Stacking Tray Paper Detection Sensor Transfer Roller Motor 2 ACTUATOR
Stacking Tray Upper Limit Sensor Transfer Roller 2 TYPE SENOR
STAPLER Transfer Sensor 1
Staple Scratch Protection Arm HP Sensor
Staple Change Cover Switch SWITCH
Tray Paper Top Detection Sensor 3
Transfer Roller Motor 1
［ 19-34 ］
［ 19-34 ］
ACTUATOR
Transfer Roller 1
TYPE SWITCH
Reverse Roller Elevation HP Sensor
Front Tamper Motor ENCODER
Rear Tamper Motor
Reverse Roller Elevation Motor

Reverse Roller Motor
Illustration Details
Staple Scratch Protection Arm Motor
Cooling Fan HP SENSOR
Tray Lower Limit Sensor CONTROLLED
Tray Shift Sensor 1 Stapler Base Position Sensor
Stapler Slide HP Sensor ENCODER
Tray Shift Sensor 2 Stapler Slide Motor SENSOR
CPU Cooling Fan Switchback Pass Sensor CONTROLLED
Following 3 sensors are mounted within the Stapler Unit. MOTOR
Tray Elevation Clock Sensor
• Staple Self-Prime Sensor
Tray Elevation Motor SHOWING
• No Staple Detection Sensor DRIVE
Tray Shift Clock Sensor
• Staple Clinch HP Sensor TRANSFER
Tray Shift Motor
Option
３．ユニットの説明
３－１．主要部品レイアウト図
３－２．主要部品リスト
［ 19-35 ］
［ 19-36 ］
4. Disassembly
4-1. Detaching of the Face Down Offset Stapler from the Printer.
1. Turn OFF the printer power. (The Face Down Offset Stapler power goes off together with the printer power.)
2. Unplug the power cable from the Face Down Offset Stapler unit.
3. Detach the Paper Stacking Tray from the Face Down Offset Stapler unit. (Bind screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
4. Detach the Switchback Guide.
5. Remove the Front Cover from the Face Down Offset Stapler unit. (Bind screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
6. Remove the Rear Sub-Cover from the Face Down Offset Stapler unit. (Bind screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
7. Remove the Rear Cover from the Face Down Offset Stapler unit. (Bind screw 4x8 (4 pcs)
8. Remove the Rear cover of the printer with the side covers attached. (Bind screw 4x8 (12 pcs))
9. Remove the Right top cover of the printer. (Bind screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
10. Remove the Left top cover of the printer. (Bind screw 4x8 (2 pcs)), thumb screw (1 pc)
11. Disconnect two connectors of the wires running between the printer and the Face Down Offset Stapler.
12. Remove the mounting screw of the Face Down Offset Stapler. (W sems screw 4x10 (2 pcs))
13. Detach the Face Down Offset Stapler from the printer.
4-2. Front Cover removal

1. Remove the Cover-frame Right. (Bind screw 4x8 (1 pc))　　　　
Cover-frame Right
Front cover
［ 19-37 ］
2. Remove the Front cover. (Bind screw 4x8 (4 pcs)).　　　　

Front Cover
4-3. Rear Cover removal

1. Remove Cover-frame Right. (Bind screw 4x8 (1 pcs))　　　　　　　　
Cover-frame Right Rear Cover
［ 19-38 ］
2. Remove Rear Sub-cover. (Bind screw 4x8 (1 pc))
Rear Sub-cover
　　　　　　　　
Rear Sub-cover
Cover-frame Right
　　　　　　　
3. Remove Rear Cover. (Bind screw 4x8 (3 pcs))
Rear Cover
［ 19-39 ］
4-4. Jam Release Cover Assembly removal

1. Open the Jam Release Cover Assembly.
2. Detach the Stopper Arm from the Jam Release Cover Assembly. (Shoulder screw 4x8 (1 pc))
< Make sure to hold on to the cover assembly while removing the screw.>
Jam Release Cover Assembly
Stopper Arm
3. Lift off the Jam Release Cover Assembly.

(The pivot shaft is flattened on two sides and opening the cover assembly to approx. 45 degrees and lifting
allows it to disengage from the main unit.)
［ 19-40 ］
4-5. Switchback Guide removal

1. Detach the Switchback Guide.
˂ Pushing the Switchback Guide in the dissection of the arrow mark enables the guide to detach.˃
Switchback Guide
4-6. Jam Release Cover Switch removal

1. Remove the Front Cover.
2. Remove the Jam Release Cover Switch. (IT screw 3x6 (1pc))　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Jam Release Cover Switch
3. Unplug the connector from the switch. (1 pc))
［ 19-41 ］
4-7. Staple Change Cover Switch removal

2. Remove the Staple Change Cover Switch. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs)).　
Staple Change Cover Switch
3. Remove wire saddles. (2 pcs))

4. Unplug the connector. (1 pc))
4-8. Offset Guide Assembly removal

1. Remove the Switchback Guide.
2. Remove the Paper Stacking Tray. (Bind screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
Paper Stacking Tray
Switchback Guide
［ 19-42 ］
3. Remove the Paper Tray Bracket Cover Front. (Bind screw 4x8 (1 pc))
4. Remove the Paper Tray Bracket Cover Rear. (Bind screw 4x8 (1 pc))
Paper Tray Bracket Assembly Cover Front
Paper Tray Bracket Assembly Cover Rear
5. Remove the Paper Tray Bracket Assembly. (Bind screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
Paper Tray Bracket Assembly
6. Remove the Offset Guide Assembly. (Flat-head screw 3x5 (4pcs))

Offset Guide Assembly
CAUTION:
Make sure to use the Flat-head screws.
Normal round-headed screw will jam the
Paper Stacking Tray.
［ 19-43 ］
4-9. Staple Scratch Protection Arm Assembly removal

1. Remove the Offset Guide Assembly.
2. Remove the Cover Plate Front. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
3. Remove the Cover Plate Rear. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))　　
Cover Plate Rear Cover Plate Front
4. Remove the Staple Scratch Protection Arm Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (6 pcs))
　　
Staple Scratch Protection Arm Assembly
［ 19-44 ］
4-10. Staple Tray Assembly removal

2. Remove the Staple Scratch Protection Arm Assembly.
3. Remove the Staple Tray Assembly. (IT 3x6 (2 pcs))
Staple Tray Assembly
　　　　　　　　　　　　
4-11. Paper Receive Guide Plate Assembly Removal

1. Remove the Jam Release Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Sub-cover.
3. Remove the Front cover.
4. Remove the Right Top Cover of the printer.
5. Remove the Left Top Cover of the printer.
(Bind screw 4x8 1 pc, W-sems screw 4x8 1 pc, Thumb screw 1 pc)　　　　　　　
［ 19-45 ］
6. Remove the Paper Receive Guide Plate Assembly. (Bind screw 4x8 (4 pcs), and unhook the wire harness.)
Wire Harness
Paper Receive Guide Plate Assembly
4-12. Stapler Assembly removal

2. Remove the Stapler Cover. (W-sems screw 3x6 (1 pcs))
Stapler Cover
　　　　　　　　　　　
3. Remove the Stapler Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
4. Gently unplug wire connectors. (2 pcs) 　　　　　　　　　
［ 19-46 ］
4-13. Control Board (PCB) tilting

1. Remove the Rear Cover.
2. Unplug wire connectors. (6 pcs)
< One over the top left corner, three on the left bottom corner, two from the pulse motors on the left hand side.>
Control Board (PCB)
　
3. Detach the Control Board (PCB) from the unit and gently tilt and hang it down, paying caution not to scratch the
PCB surface. (W-sems screw 3x6 (4 pcs), W-sems screw 4x8 (1 pc))
Control Board (PCB)
［ 19-47 ］
4-14. Control Board (PCB)

2. Disconnect all the wire connectors from the Control Board (PCB).
3. Remove the PCB mounting screw from the bottom right-hand corner of the PCB. (W-sems screw 4x8 (1 pc))
4. Release the Control Board (PCB) by unhooking the plastic hooks on the remaining three corners of the PCB.
［ 19-48 ］
4-15. Power Supply Unit removal.

2. Remove the Power Supply Unit. (IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
3. Release one wire from the wire saddle on the right-hand bottom.
4. Unplug connectors from the right-hand side. (2 pcs)
5. Unplug a connector from the left-hand side. (1 pc)
Power Supply Unit
［ 19-49 ］
4-16. Transfer Roller 1 & Transfer Roller 2 removal (these two rollers are interchangeable)
2. Remove the Paper Receive Guide Plate Assembly.
3. Remove the Transfer Guide Plate Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Transfer Guide Plate
Transfer Roller 2
Transfer Roller 1
4. Remove the plastic snap ring from

the left of the Transfer Rollers 1 and 2, 5. Remove the Transfer Rollers 1 and 2.
Plastic snap ring Shaft Joint (on the right-hand side of the roller shaft).
［ 19-50 ］
4-17. Entrance Roller removal

2. Open the Jam Release Cover Assembly.
3. Remove the Transfer Guide Plate. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))　　　　　
Transfer Guide Plate
4. Remove the Top Transfer Guide Plate. (IT screw 3x6 (4 pcs))　　　　
Top Transfer Guide Plate
Entrance Roller
［ 19-51 ］
5. Remove the Thin snap ring from the front end f the roller shaft.
Thin snap ring
　　　　　　　　
6. Remove dark gay colored snap ring from the Entrance Roller shaft from the location as shown on the photograph
below.
7. Remove the Entrance Roller.
Entrance Roller Dark gray colored snap ring.
［ 19-52 ］
4-18. Rake Roller Assembly removal

3. Remove the Paper Stacking Tray. (Bind screw 4x8 (2 pcs))　　　
Paper Stacking Tray
4. Unscrew and free the Ground Wire. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))
5. Remove the Top Cover. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))　　　　　
Top Cover
Ground Wire
［ 19-53 ］
6. Remove the Eject Roller Elevation Motor Assembly.

7. Remove the black colored plastic sector gear. (1 claw hook)
Sector Gear (black plastic)
　　　　　　　　　
8. Remove black plastic snap rings from both end of the Swing Shaft Assembly. (2 pcs)
　　　　
Black plastic snap rings
Black plastic snap ring (rear) Black plastic snap ring (front)
［ 19-54 ］
9. Remove the two Ejection Guide Assist Spring from the shaft.
Ejection Guide Assist Springs
10. Remove the Swing Shaft Assembly by sliding the shaft to the rear and clearing the Spring Pin out through the
front frame of the unit.
(Match the shape of the hole and the spring pin.)
Spring Pin
Caution in Assembly:
Insert the side pins on the white plastic pieces on the shaft into the vertical slit on the Ejection Roller Assembly.
Swing Shaft Assembly
［ 19-55 ］
11. Remove the Transfer Driven Roller Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))　　　　　
Transfer Driven Roller Assembly
Transfer Driven Roller Assembly
12. Lift up the Eject Roller Assembly

Eject Roller Assembly
［ 19-56 ］
13. Slide the Stapler Unit to the center of the unit.

14. Gently slide the front and rear Tamper Plates to the maximum outer position, making sure that the Stapler Unit
is centered not to interfere with the Taper Plate movement.
Tamper Plate (rear) Tamper Plate (front)
15. Remove the white plastic snap ring from the shaft of the Rake Roller, only from the REAR of the shaft.
White plastic snap ring (rear) Rake Roller Assembly
16. Release the Metal Bushing from the bracket plate on the REAR side of the shaft first, and then do the same on
the FRONT side of the shaft. 　　　　
Metal Bushing
［ 19-57 ］
17. Unhook the Link Hook (white plastic) of the Rake Roller Assembly from the hanger hook (black plastic hook) for
both the front and rear.
< Disengages easily if the white Link Hook is vertically positioned.>　　
The white Link Hook of the Rake Roller Assembly.
18. Remove the Rake Roller Assembly from the unit.

Rake Roller Assembly
Rake Roller Assembly
［ 19-58 ］
4-19. Eject Roller (drive side) removal　　　　　　　

1. Remove the Paper Stacking Tray. (Bind screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
2. Remove the Top Cover. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
3. Remove the Paper Drop Guide Assembly.
4. Remove the white plastic snap ring from the both ends of the Eject Roller shaft.
White plastic snap rings
Eject Roller
5. Remove the dark gray colored plastic Bushing from both ends of the Eject Roller Shaft.
6. Remove the Eject Roller Assembly out through the Timing Belt.
Timing Belt
Eject Roller Assembly

　　　　　　　
7. Remove the thin white snap rings from both ends of the Eject Roller Shaft.
8. Separate the Eject Roller from the shaft, watching out not to drop the parallel pin.　　　　　　　　
Eject Roller
Thin white plastic snap rings.
［ 19-59 ］
4-20. Eject Roller (driven side) removal

1. Remove the paper Stacking Tray. (Bind screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
2. Remove the Top Cover (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
Top Cover
Paper Stacking Tray
3. Remove the Paper Drop Guide Assembly.

Paper Drop Guide Assembly
4. Remove thin white plastic snap ring from the outer most tip of the driven Eject Roller (driven).
< Remove only one specified snap ring.>　　　　　　
Eject Roller (driven) Thin white plastic snap rings.
［ 19-60 ］
5. Push down the Reverse Roller to make the room and pull out the shaft of the Eject Roller (driven) inward to free
the Eject Roller (driven)　　　　　　
6. Remove the Eject Roller (driven).
　　　Pay caution to the direction of the Ejection Roller (driven) in assembly.
4-21. Reverse Roller removal

1. Release the claw hook and remove the Reverse Roller from the shaft.
claw hook Reverse Roller
［ 19-61 ］
4-22. Transfer Sensor 1 removal.

2. Remove the Paper Receive Guide Plate Assembly.
3. Remove the Transfer Guide Plate Assembly.
Transfer Guide Plate Assembly
4. Remove the Transfer Sensor 1. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))

5. Detach wire saddle. (1 pc)
6. Unplug wire connector from the sensor. (1 connector)
Transfer Sensor 1
［ 19-62 ］
4-23. Entrance Sensor removal

1. Remove Jam Release Cover Assembly.
2. Paper Receive Guide Plate Assembly.
3. Transfer Guide Plate Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
4. Remove the Top Transfer Guide Plate. (IT screw 3x6 (4 pcs))
Top Transfer Guide Plate
5. Remove the Entrance Sensor Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (1pc))

6. Detach wire saddle. (1 pc)
7. Unplug wire connector from the sensor. (1 pc)
8. Separate the Entrance Sensor from the metal bracket. (IT 3x6 screw (1 pc))
Entrance Sensor
［ 19-63 ］
4-24. Staple Tray Paper Detection Sensor

2. Staple Scratch Protection Arm Assembly.
3. Remove the Staple Tray Assembly.
4. Disconnect wire connectors. (2 pcs)
5. Remove the Staple Tray Paper Detection Sensor Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))
6. Unplug wire connector from the sensor and detach the sensor from the metal bracket. (1 connector)
Staple Tray Paper Detection Sensor
［ 19-64 ］
4-25. Switchback Pass Sensor removal

2. Remove the Paper Receive Guide Plate assembly.
3. Remove the Transfer Guide Plate. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
4. Using a stubby screwdriver, remove the Stay with the sensor attached. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Stay
5. Remove the Switchback Pass Sensor Assembly from the Stay. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))
6. Detach the wire saddle. (1 pc)
7. Unplug the wire connector from the sensor and detach the sensor from the metal bracket.　　　　　　
Switchback Pass Sensor
［ 19-65 ］
4-26. Eject Roller Elevation HP Sensor removal

1. Remove the Front cover.
2. Unplug the wire connector from the Eject Roller Elevation Motor.
3. Remove the Eject Roller Elevation Motor Assembly.
4. Unplug the wire connector from the Eject Roller Elevation HP Sensor and detach the sensor from the Motor
bracket.
5. Remove the Eject Roller Elevation Sensor　　　
Eject Roller Elevation HP Sensor
4-27. Rake Roller Elevation HP Sensor removal

2. Tilt the Control Board (PCB).
3. Remove the Top Cover. (IT3C 4x8 (2 pcs))
4. Detach the wire saddle. (1 pc)
5. Remove the Metal Plate mounted above the Control Board.
6. Remove the wire harness guide.
7. Unplug the wire connector from the sensor.
8. Remove the sensor from the wire harness guide.
Wire Harness Guide Rake Roller Elevation HP Sensor
［ 19-66 ］
4-28. Paper Stacking Tray Upper Limit Sensor removal

2. Tilt the Control Board (PCB).
Paper Stacker Tray Upper Limit Sensor
4. Remove the Paper Stacker Tray Upper limit Sensor from the metal bracket.
4-29. Paper Stacking Tray Elevation Clock Sensor removal

2. Remove the Control Board (PCB).
3. Remove the Tray Elevation Motor..
4. Unplug total of 3 wire harness connectors.
5. Paper Stacking Tray Elevation Clock Sensor Assembly. (IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc)).
6. Remove the Paper Stacking Tray Elevation Clock Sensor.
Paper Stacking Tray Elevation Clock Sensor.
Tray Elevation Motor Assembly
［ 19-67 ］
4-30. Paper Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor removal

3. Remove the Tray Elevation Motor Assembly.
4. Unplug total of 3 wire harness connectors.
5. Remove the Paper Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor.
Paper Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor.
4-31. Tray Shift Clock Sensor removal

1. Remove the Tray Shift Motor Assembly.
2. Remove the Tray Shift Clock Sensor. (IT3C screw 4x8 (1 pc))
3. Unplug the wire connector from the sensor and remove the sensor from the metal bracket.
Tray Shift Motor Assembly
Tray Shift Clock Sensor

　　　　　　　　
［ 19-68 ］
4-32. Tray Shift Sensor 1 & Tray Shift Sensor 2 removal

1. Remove the Tray Shift Motor Assembly.
2. Remove the Disc. (1 thin white plastic snap ring.)
Tray Shift Sensor 2 Tray Shift Motor Assembly
Tray Shift Sensor 1 Thin white plastic snap ring Disc
　　　　　　　　　　　　
3. Remove the Parallel Pin, Snap Ring and Metal Bushing.
4. Remove the Tray Shift Sensor Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (4 pcs))
Tray Shift Sensor Assembly
5. Unplug wire connectors from the two sensors.

6. Remove the Tray Shift Sensors 1 and 2.　　　　　
Tray Shift Sensors 1 and 2 (rear view)
［ 19-69 ］
PRECAUTION in Assembly:
Make sure to match the positions between the white Cam and black Disc.
4-33. Stapler Slide HP Sensor removal

3. Remove the Cover Plate (front). (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
4. Rotate the gear and slide the Stapler Assembly 10 millimeter or so to the rear from the HP position.
Stapler Assembly
Gear
　　　　　　　　
5. Remove the Stapler Slide HP Sensor. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))
6. Unplug wire connector from the sensor.
Stapler Slide HP Sensor
［ 19-70 ］
PRECAUTION in assembly:
Make sure to engage the hook on the sensor bracket firmly through the slit on the machine beam in assembly.
Hook
Stapler Slide HP Sensor
4-34. Reverse Roller Elevation HP Sensor removal

2. Remove the black plastic cover. (Flat-head screw 3x5 (2 pcs))　　　　　　　
Black plastic cover
［ 19-71 ］
3. Elevation Motor by hand to move the sensor actuator away from the HP position (out of the sensor).
4. Unplug the sensor connector.
5. Unhook and detach the Reverse Roller Elevation HP Sensor from the metal bracket.
Reverse Roller Elevation Motor Reverse Roller Elevation HP Sensor
4-35. Stacking Tray Paper Detection Sensor removal

2. Remove the Black plastic cover. (Flat-head screw 3x5 (2 pcs))
4. Detach the Stacking Tray Paper Detection Sensor.
［ 19-72 ］
4-36. Front Tamper HP Sensor & Rear Tamper HP Sensor removal

3. Remove the Staple Tray Assembly.
4. Detach the Front Tamper HP Sensor. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))
5. Detach the Rear Tamper HP Sensor. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))
Front Tamper HP Sensor Assembly Rear Tamper HP Sensor Assembly
Stapling Tray Assembly

　　　　
6. Unplug the wire connectors from the two sensors and detach the sensors from the metal brackets.
Front Tamper HP Sensor Rear Tamper HP Sensor
［ 19-73 ］
4-37. Tray Paper Top Detection Sensors 1, 2 and 3 removal
　　　　　　ＯＳＴ針傷防止レバーＨＰセンサ
The detailed procedure for removal of each sensor is described below.
Tray Paper Top Detection Sensor 2 removal.

3. Remove the Tray Paper Top Detection Sensor 2. (W-sems screw 3x6 (1 pc))
5. Detach the sensor from the metal bracket.　　　　
［ 19-74 ］
Tray Paper Top Detection Sensor 1 & 3 removal

3. Remove wire saddle. (1 pc)
4. Remove wire protection edge saddles. (3 pcs)
5. Remove Tray Paper Top Detection Sensor Assembly 1 & 3. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))
6. Unplug the wire connectors from the sensors.

7. Detach the Tray Paper Top Detection Sensor 1 & 3 from the metal bracket.
Staple Scratch Protection Arm HP Sensor removal

3. Remove the Staple Scratch Protection Arm HP Sensor Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 )1 pc))
4. Remove the wire saddle. (1 pc))
6. Detach the Staple Scratch Protection Arm HP Sensor from the metal bracket.
　　
4-38. Stapler Base Position Sensor removal

1. Remove the Stapler Assembly.
2. Unplug the wire connector from the Stapler Base Position Sensor.
3. Unhook and detach the sensor.
Stapler Base Position Sensor
［ 19-75 ］
4-39. Stapler Slide Motor removal

2. Remove the Stapler Slide Motor Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Stapler Slide Motor
3. Unplug the wire connector from the motor assembly.
［ 19-76 ］
4-40. Eject Roller Elevation Motor removal

2. Remove the Eject Roller Elevation Motor assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
3. Unplug the wire connector from the motor and the sensor, as shown on the photograph below.
4. Remove the wire saddles. (2 pcs))
Eject Roller Elevation Motor
4-41. Rake Roller Elevation Solenoid

2. Tilt down the Control Board (PCB).
3. Unhook the Spring.
4. Remove the Rake Roller Elevation Solenoid. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))
5. Remove wire saddle. (1 pc)
6. Unplug the wire connector from the solenoid.
バネ
ＯＳＴ掻き込みローラ昇降ソレノイド
［ 19-77 ］
4-42. Transfer Roller Motor 1 removal

2. Unplug the wire connector from the Transfer Roller Motor 1.
3. Remove the Spring.
4. Remove the Transfer Roller Motor 1 Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Spring
Transfer Roller Motor 1
<< Procedure in mounting the Motor.>>

Hold the Timing Belt with a finger and insert the motor pulley to hook onto the Timing Belt.
●Timing Belt tension adjustment.

Apply automatic tension on the motor by hooking the Spring while the mounting screws of the motor assembly is
loosened. Tighten the mounting screws after the Spring is hooked. This automatically gives correct tension on the
Timing Belt.
Timing Belt
［ 19-78 ］
4-43. Transfer Roller Motor 2 removal

2. Unplug the wire Connector from the Transfer Roller Motor 2.
4. Remove the Transfer Roller Motor 2 Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Transfer Roller Motor 2 Spring

●Timing Belt tension adjustment.

Timing Belt.
Timing Belt
［ 19-79 ］
4-44. Transport Motor removal

3. Remove the Cop Cover. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))
4. Remove the wire saddle (1 pc).
5. Remove the Metal Plate mounted above the Control Board. (IT screw 3x6 (5 pcs))
6. Remove the Plastic Wire Harness Guide. (3 plastic hooks)
7. Unplug the wire connector from the motor.
Plastic Wire Harness Guide Transport Motor
8. Remove the Spring. (1 pc)

9. Remove the Transport Motor. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))　　　　　　　
Spring

●Timing Belt tension adjustment:

Timing Belt.
Timing Belt
［ 19-80 ］
4-45. Ejection Motor removal

2. Tilt down the Control Board (PCB)
3. Remove the Top Cover. (IT3C screw 4x8 (2 pcs))　　　　　　
Top Cover
4. Remove the wire saddle. (1 pc)

5. Remove the Metal Plate mounted above the Control Board. (IT screw 3x6 (5 pcs))
Metal Plate mounted above the Control Board.
˂ 4 screws access from rear of the unit. ˃
［ 19-81 ］
˂ 1 screw accessed from the paper receiving side. ˃
6. Remove the Plastic Wire Harness Guide. (3 hooks)

Plastic Wire Harness Guide
　　　　　　　
7. Unplug wire connector from the Ejection Motor.
8. Remove the Spring. (1 pc)
9. Remove the Ejection Motor.
Ejection Motor
Spring
Connector
［ 19-82 ］

Timing Belt tension adjustment:
Timing Belt.
Timing Belt
4-46. Tray Elevation Motor removal

2. Remove the Power Supply Unit.
3. Remove the Tray Elevation Motor. (IT3C screw 4x8 (4 pcs))
4. Unplug wire connectors from the Tray Elevation Motor Assembly. (3 pcs)
［ 19-83 ］
4-47. Cooling Fan removal.

3. Remove the Cooling fan Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (4 pcs))
4. Detach the ground wire. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc)
5. Release wires from wire saddles. (10 places)
6. Unplug wire connector. (1 pc)
Ground wire
Cooling Fan Assembly
Cooling Fan Assembly
［ 19-84 ］
4-48. Tray Shift Motor removal

2. Remove the Cover Plate (rear). (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs)
Cover Plate (rear)
　　　　　　　
3. Unplug wire connectors. (2 pcs)
4. Remove the Tray Shift Motor Assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (3 pcs)

　　　　　　　　　
5. Separate the Tray Shift Motor from the assembly.
［ 19-85 ］
4-49. Staple Scratch Protection Arm Motor

2. Remove Cover Plate (front). (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Cover Plate (front)

4. Remove the Staple Scratch Protection Arm Motor Assembly. (W-sems screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
5. Unplug wire connector. (1 pc)
Staple Scratch Protection Arm Motor Assembly
Spring
［ 19-86 ］
4-50. Reverse Roller Motor

3. Remove the Reverse Roller Motor Assembly. (W-sems 3x6 (2 pcs))
4. Unplug wire connector from the motor.. (1 pc)
Reverse Roller Motor
Spring
4-51. Reverse Roller Elevation Motor removal

2. Remove Snap Ring. (1 pc)
3. Slide the tip end of the Link Lever out of the shaft.
4. Remove the Reverse Roller Elevation Motor Assembly. (W-sems screw 3x6 (2 pcs)
5. Unplug the wire connector from the motor.　　
Snap Ring Link Lever
Reverse Roller Elevation Motor
［ 19-87 ］
4-52. Front Tamper Motor & Rear Tamper Motor removal

3. Remove the Stapling Tray Assembly.
4. Unplug the wire connectors. (2 pcs)
5. Remove the Front Tamper HP Sensor and Rear Tamper HP Sensor.
6. Remove the Grounding Plate. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Grounding Plate
　
8. Remove the Front (or the Rear) Tamper Motor. (W-sems screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
Front Tamper HP Sensor Assembly
9. Cut the wire harness band.

10. Unplug the wire connector. (1 pc)
［ 19-88 ］
4-53. Stapler Cable removal

4. Remove Paper Receive Guide Plate Assembly.
5. Remove the Transfer Guide Plate. (IT3C screw 3x6 (2 pcs)
6. Unplug the Stapler Cable connector from the Control Board (PCB) and release the cable from the wire saddle. (2
wire connectors))
Two connectors for the Stapler Cable.

8. Remove the Stapler Assembly.
Stapler Cable Assembly
［ 19-89 ］
9. Remove the stapler Slide Motor Assembly, loosen the Timing Belt and unhook the belt from the Pulley on the
rear.
Timing Belt
Timing Belt FRONT REAR
10. Unscrew the Stapler Rail (the plate on which the Stapler is mounted) and pull out the rail halfway out from the
front opening of the unit. (FRONT: IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs)), REAR: IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
FRONT
Stapler Rail
REAR
Stapler Rail
The location of the two screws to remove.

There is actually a plate blocking the view.
［ 19-90 ］
11. Remove two mounting shoulder-screws of the Stapler Cable Guide (plastic).
Stapler Cable Guide
Stapler Rail, unscrewed and moved out of the way.
12. Removing the Stapler Rail completely out of the unit enables the Stapler Cable to come out.
PRECAUTION IN ASSEMBLY:
The Base on which the Stapler Assembly is to be mounted should be positioned just at the entrance of the Front
Frame of the unit. Slide in only the Stapler Rail.
The Base on which the Stapler is mounted.
Stapler Rail
［ 19-91 ］
5.Other Removals
1. Control Board (PCB) replacement

2. Remove the EEP-ROM from the detached Control Board (PCB) to re-use on the new replacement PCB.
Control Board
EEP-ROM memory
3. Attach the EEP-ROM, previously removed, on the new Control Board (PCB).
4. Mount the new Control Board (PCB) on the unit.
［ 19-92 ］
HS5000 Scanner option
Chapter 20. HS5000 Scanner (option)
Contents
1. Specification..................................................................................... 20-3
2. FB Unit............................................................................................... 20-4
2-1. Original Set Section................................................................. 20-4
2-2. Original Scanning..................................................................... 20-5
2-3. Functional Positions of the Scanner........................................ 20-6
3. AF Unit............................................................................................... 20-8
3-1. Original Set Section................................................................. 20-8
3-2. Original Path............................................................................ 20-9
3-3. Roller Rotation....................................................................... 20-10
4. Periodic Replacement Parts...................................................... 20-12
Disassembly....................................................................................... 20-13
1. FB unit....................................................................................... 20-13
2. Disassembly............................................................................. 20-27
3. AF & FB Firmware Downloading............................................... 20-35
4. CS5-MAIN-PCB Replacement.................................................. 20-35
Adjustment.......................................................................................... 20-35
1. AF Tray VR Sensor................................................................... 20-35
Adjustment................................................................................ 20-35
2. Other Adjustments..................................................................... 20-35
Electrical Parts and related Test Modes................................... 20-36
[ 20-1 ] x1 Series ComColor (Revision 0.9)

HS5000 Scanner (option)
[ 20-2 ] x1 series ComColor (Revision 0.9)

1. Specification

2. FB Unit
2-1. Original Set Section

Setting the original
• Place the original on the stage glass and close the stage cover.
• Unlike the AF unit in which the original is placed on the center of the unit, the original is placed flat against the top
corner of the stage glass.
• If the original is set on both the AF unit and stage glass, the original on the AF unit is scanned first.
• The detection of the original on the FB stage glass is done by the original detection sensor.
• The stage cover open status is detected by two separate sensors.
• The stage cover sensor detects whether the stage cover is fully closed or not.
• The stage cover angle sensor detects the stage cover at a half opened (closed) position, and the original size is
checked when this sensor is triggered.
Original size detection

• The six original size detection sensors looks at the original on the stage glass and check the original size when
the stage cover angle sensor is triggered.
• The combination of the detection status of these six sensors determine the original size, as shown on the table
given below.
Original detection
sensor
Original size detection sensors
Original size / Sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6

A5 ○
A5R ○
A4R ○ ○ ○ ○
A4 ○ ○ ○
A3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
B5R ○ ○
B5 ○ ○
B4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
LETTER-R ○ ○ ○ ○
LETTER ○ ○ ○
LEGAL ○ ○ ○ ○
LEDGER ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2-2. Original Scanning

Mechanism
Main parts layout drawing (Scanner top view)
Original detection sensor
Original detection sensor 2
Original detection senor 4 Original detection sensor 3

Scanning direction
Original detection sensor 6 Scanning section
Guide shaft Scanner Module Scanner Motor
1. Scanner Module
The input is paper image. The output is image signal.
It is a box type unit with the function to scan paper originals by moving in parallel to the original.
The box-shape Scanner module consists of LED light, Lens, Mirrors and CCD PCB.
2 pieces of high-intensity white-colored LED are used. The LEDs are located on the rear and stick type
light-guide-panel is used to illuminate the whole length of the Scanner module, known as edge-light
method. In the past fluorescent lamps were used for the same purpose. The two LED lights illuminates
on the paper original at approximately 45 degrees from the two sides to eliminate the shades.
• Lens are used for the purpose of reduced-projection-exposure, in which the reflected image of the original is
gathered and exposed onto the CCD Image sensor. The lens consists of several pieces placed one after the
other. The reduced-projection-exposure system is required for the reason that the CCD is only about 1/10 of the
size of the paper original. For the reduced-projection-exposure to work effectively, the lens location is far from the
original but close to the CCD. The distance from the original to the CCD is approximately 400 to 500 millimeters.
The distance from the lens to the CCD is approximately 50 millimeters.
• The function of the mirrors is to transfer the illuminated image of the original to the lens. Several sets of mirrors
are used to reflect the image back and forth to direct the image to the Scanner module, producing the distance
needed.
• CCD Image Sensor (Charge Coupled Device Image Sensor) is one of the image sensors which is an image
capturing semiconductor device commonly used in both video cameras and digital cameras. The CCD contains
7,000 pieces of microscopic optical sensors in one straight line, each the size of 5 micrometer rectangular shape.
In the case of a color CCD, these microscopic sensors exist in 3 to 4 rows, each row with different color filter. Any
dust adhering to the CCD or mirrors results in poor image

One example of enlarged view of a color CCD showing

color filters on each row of the image sensors.
The Scanner module movement :
A pulse motor and a timing belt is used for the movement of the Scanner module along the Guide shaft.
2-3. Functional Positions of the Scanner

• The carriage HP (home position) is detected by the scanner HP sensor, and all the scanner movement is
calculated from this HP position.
(1) HP position
• This is the carriage standby position. As shown on the sketch on the next page, this is the position 20mm to the
left from the edge of the carriage HP sensor.
(2) Offset/Gain adjustment position
• The Offset/Gain adjustment is equivalent to the sensitivity adjustment of the CCD.
The Offset adjustment adjusts the sensitivity of the CCD in reading the black color image.
The Gain adjustment adjusts the sensitivity of the CCD in reading the images between the black and white in color.
• The Offset/Gain adjustment is made only once on each power ON of the scanner unit.
• The Offset/Gain adjustment is made in the following sequence.
1) The carriage is moved to the shading plate.
2) The lamp is turned OFF and the Offset adjustment is made.
3) The lamp is turned ON and the Gain adjustment is made. (The Offset adjustment result shifts a little bit after the
Gain adjustment is made.)
4) The lamp is turned OFF to make the Offset adjustment for the second time.
5) The Scanner module is returned back to the HP position.
(3) ABC (Auto Base Control)
• The scanner is equipped with original background color erasing function. Therefore ABC adjustment is not
performed
(4) Shading compensation position
• The shading compensation is to adjust and level out the sensitivity differences between the CCD elements
aligned side by side. As with the Offset/Gain adjustment, the shading compensation is adjusted with black color
and then white.
• The shading compensation is performed for each original scanning. The adjustment is made in following
sequence.
1) With the Scanner module at its HP position, the lamp is turned OFF and black color calibration is made.
2) The lamp is turned ON and the Scanner module is moved to the shading plate. Depending on whether the AF
or the FB is used, the white-color shading compensation is performed while moving the Scanner module towards
the AF or the FB scanning start position.
3) When the Scanner module arrives to either the AF or FB scanning start position, the actual original image
scanning action starts.
(5) Scanner module fixing position
• This is the position in which the Scanner module is fixed for the transportation purpose.
• To prevent the Scanner module from a mechanical jam caused by turning ON the power and operating the
scanner unit before mechanically unlocking the Scanner module from the fixed position, software lock prevents
the read pulse motor from activating. During the installation of the scanner unit, after unlocking the Scanner
module mechanically from the fixed position, test mode No.5715 [Scanner Lock Selection] must be performed
[selecting 0 on the test mode] to unlock the software lock, and second test mode No.5415 [Scanner Lock
Release] to slide the Mirror Carriage from the locking position to the HP position.

Scanner module maximum movement
Scanner module Maximum

Scanner module fix position HP position Original guide plate replacement position scanning length
HP sensor
Shading plate
AF scanning position FB scanning start position

Offset/Gain adjustment
Shading compensation (Black) Shading compensation (White)

3. AF Unit
3-1. Original Set Section

Setting the original
• Place the original on the original feed tray and slide the original fence against the original.
• Compared to the FB unit in which the original is placed on the top edge of the stage glass, the original is placed
on the center for the AF unit.
• If original is set on both the FB and AF, the original from the AF is scanned first.
• The original detection on the AF unit is made by AF original detection sensor.
• Two sensors, the stage cover sensor and stage cover angle sensor, look at the stage cover status of the FB unit.
Of the two sensors, the sensor which detects whether the stage cover (AF unit) is closed or opened is the stage
cover sensor. If the stage cover sensor does not detect the stage cover (AF unit) closed, the AF operation is
disabled.
Original size detection

• The size of the original on the AF unit original feed tray is determined by the combination of two AF tray sensors
(sensor 1 and sensor 2) and AF tray VR sensor.
Original feed cover and other mechanism

• Whether the original feed cover is set in position or not is checked by AF original feed cover set switch.
• A cooling fan is equipped on the AF unit to prevent heat build-up within the AF unit.
• The cooling fan activates with the start of the AF scanning job.
• The cooling fan deactivates 180 seconds after the scanning job is finished.
AF Tray sensor 2
AF tray sensor 1 AF tray VR sensor
AF cover set switch

Actuator of the AF original
detection sensor

3-2. Original Path

Simplex scanning
(1) The original is transferred to the registration roller by the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller.
• The drive for these rollers is taken from the feed motor.
• The registration sensor detects the original arriving at the registration roller.
• The registration roller is still stationary. The leading edge of the original hits against the registration roller and
makes a buckle to compensate any skew, and waits.
(2) The registration roller then starts its rotation and feeds the original to the transfer roller 1. The transfer roller 1,
white roller, transfer roller 2 and ejection roller then starts the rotation and ejects the original onto the original
receiving tray.
• The registration motor drives the registration roller.
• The read motor drives the transfer roller 1, transfer roller 2 and ejection roller.
• The original IN sensor and original OUT sensor checks the original transfer status.
• The original is scanned at the white roller by the CCD located within the FB unit.
Registration roller Feed roller Separation roller Pickup roller Ejection roller
Ejection roller
Original receiving tray

Original IN sensor
Original OUT sensor

Transfer roller 1
White roller
Transfer roller 2 Feed motor

Registration motor Read motor
Duplex scanning
(1) Of the duplex scanning, the scanning of the first side is done the same way as the simplex scanning. Before
starting the scanning of the second side of the original, the original is stopped, just before the original escapes
out from the ejection roller.
(2) The read motor then rotates in the reverse direction to feed the original back to the registration roller with the
original flipped the other way.
• With the function of the switchback flap, the original, instead of going back towards the transfer rollers 2 and 1, it
is guided directly towards the registration roller.
• The registration sensor detects the original arriving to the registration roller.
• The registration roller is still stationary. The leading edge of the original hits against the registration roller and
makes a buckle to compensate any skew, and waits.
(3) From that point, the original takes the same path from the step (2) of the simplex scanning until just before the
original escapes out from the ejection roller.
(4) After the second side of the original is scanned and just before the trailing edge of the original escapes out from
the ejection roller, the ejection roller stops.
(5) The original then takes the same path back into the AF unit via the switchback flap through the registration
roller, white roller, etc., but without scanning this time and land on the original receiving tray with the original
surface flipped the other way.
• This last movement is necessary to eject the original onto the original receiving tray to pile the ejected originals in
the same page order as they were stacked on the original feed tray.

Registration roller Switchback flap

Ejection roller
Registration
sensor
Original receiving tray
Registration motor Read motor
3-3. Roller Rotation

Rotation of each roller
• The feed roller is driven by the feed motor.
• The pickup roller is driven by the feed motor via the feed roller.
• The separation roller rotates by the friction against the feed roller.
Pickup roller
Feed motor
Feed roller Separation roller
Up-and-Down movement of the pickup roller
• The pickup roller makes up-and-down movement with the feed roller shaft as a pivot.
• The pickup roller needs to be raised up when setting the originals on the original feed tray. For this reason, the
pickup roller is raised up when the power is turned ON or when the original feed cover is opened and closed.
• The downward movement of the pickup roller takes place when the original starts to feed. When the last original
feeds into the AF unit, the pickup roller raises up once again.
• The pickup roller moves down in following manner.
• A torque limiter is equipped on the feed roller shaft mounted on the arm of the pickup roller.
• When the feed motor rotates, the rotation of the feed roller shaft swings the pickup roller down on top of the
original stacked on the original feed tray. After that the pickup roller starts to rotate.
• The pickup roller is raised up by rotating the feed motor in the reverse direction.

Original stopper
• When the originals are stacked on the original feed tray, the leading edge of the originals rests hitting against the
original stopper.
• The original stopper is locked in down position when the pickup roller is in the raised position.
• In the contrary at the same time the pickup roller swings down to start the original feeding action, the original
stopper is designed to lift up to allow the originals to feed into the AF unit.
Original stopper
In the condition as shown on the photograph, with

the original feed cover opened, the original stopper is
in the lifted position.
Separation roller
• An original is pinched between the separation roller and feed roller and pushed towards the registration roller.
• The separation roller is equipped with a torque limiter to allow the roller to rotate together with the feed roller in
the normal condition when only one sheet of original is pinched between the separation roller and feed roller.
• If more than one sheet of originals happens to feed in between the separation roller and feed roller, the
separation roller is prevented from rotating by the function of the torque limiter. In this case the separation roller
stays still and acts as a stripper pad to hold the rest of the originals to allow only the top original to feed into the
AF unit.
Feed roller
Separation roller
Rotation of the other rollers

• The registration roller is driven by the registration motor
• The transfer roller 1, white roller, transfer roller 2 and ejection roller are all driven by the read motor.
• All these four rollers rotate when the read motor rotates in the forward direction.
• When the read motor rotates in the reverse direction for the duplex scanning, one-way clutches equipped on the
rollers other than the ejection roller allows only the ejection roller to rotate in the reverse direction. Other three
rollers stay stationary.

Registration roller Ejection roller
Transfer roller 1
White roller
Nip solenoid
Transfer roller 2
Registration motor Feed motor Read motor
Nip solenoid of the ejection roller

• In order to allow easy removal of a jammed original, the nip solenoid of the ejection roller is switched OFF to
release the nip of the ejection roller when the AF unit is in standby mode.
• During the second side scanning in duplex scanning, the nip solenoid is switched OFF to release the nip of the
ejection roller once the original feeds back into the AF unit. This is because depending on the length of the
original, the ejection roller may grab the leading edge and the tail edge of one same original. Releasing the nip
prevents this from happening.
4. Periodic Replacement Parts
Suggested original scanning

Parts Name Reference counter
before the replacement
Feed roller 50,000 originals Maintenance count ; AF scan count display (Test Mode No. 5607).
Pickup roller 100,000 originals Maintenance count ; AF scan count display (Test Mode No. 5607).
Scraper roller 100,000 originals Maintenance count ; AF scan count display (Test Mode No. 5607).

Disassembly
1. FB unit
1-1. Covers
Turn OFF the scanner power, disconnect the power cable from the power source and remove the covers listed
below.
(1) Left cover
• Remove 4 screws (Binding screw 3x6 (2 pcs), Binding screw 4x6 (2 pcs)), and slide the Left cover to the left to
remove.
(2) Right cover
• Remove 2 shoulder-screws to detach the stage glass support on the right.
• Remove 2 screws (Binding screw 4x6 (2 pcs)), lifting the top edge of the Right cover a little bit, and slide the
cover off to the right.
(3) Front cover
• Remove the Left and Right covers first.
• Remove 4 screws to detach the Front cover (Shoulder-screw (2 pcs), Binding screw 3x6 (2 pcs)).
(4) Rear cover
• Remove the AF unit (Binding screw 4x8 (2 pcs)) and the 2 large shoulder-screws used in mounting the AF unit.
• Remove the Left and Right covers first.
• Remove 6 screws (Shoulder screw (2 pcs), Binding screw 4x8 (2 pcs), Binding screw 3x6 (2 pcs)), push the
stage cover sensor actuator down, and then slide the Rear cover off.
Actuator of the stage cover sensor
Shoulder-screw for AF unit mounting
Rear cover
Right cover
Left cover
Stage glass support
Front cover

1-2. Stage Glass

(1) Turn OFF the scanner power, disconnect the power cable from the power source and remove following two
covers.
• Stage glass support on the right.
• Left cover
(2) Remove 2 screws and lift the stage glass off the unit together with the plastic original stopper attached.
* Caution should be paid not to break off the plastic original stopper from the stage glass
Stage glass
Original stopper

1-3. Original Detection Sensor

(1) Turn OFF the scanner power, disconnect the power cable from the power source and remove the stage glass.
(2) Remove the Sensor cover. (IT screw 3x6 (11 pcs)).
(3) Disconnect 2 wire connectors while removing the Sensor cover.
Connectors
Sensor cover
(4) Remove the Original detection sensor. (IT 3x8 screw (1 pc)).
(5) Unplug wire connector from the sensor.
Original detection
sensor

1-4. Original Size Detection Sensors

Disconnect two wire connectors while removing the Sensor cover.
(3) Unhook the Original size detection sensor from its slot on the Sensor cover.
(4) Unplug the wire connector from the sensor.
Original size detection sensor
1-5. Link PCB

Disconnect two wire connectors while removing the Sensor cover.
(3) Unplug two wire connectors from the far left end of the Link PCB.
(4) Disconnect two FFC (Flexible Flat Cables) from the Link PCB.
FFC
PCB Link
(5) Remove the mounting screws of the Link PCB. (IT 3x6 screw (3 pcs)).
(6) Remove the Link PCB.

1-6. Scanner Module Transfer Motor

(1) Turn OFF the scanner power, disconnect the power cable from the power source and remove the covers listed
below.
(2) Right cover
• Remove 2 shoulder-screws to detach the stage glass support on the right.
• Remove 2 screws (Binding screw 4x6 (2 pcs)), lifting the top edge of the Right cover a little bit, and slide the
cover off to the right.
(3) Slide the Scanner module to the right to access to the Tension bracket.
(4) Loosen the two mounting screws of the Tension bracket to release the belt tension. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs)).
Just loosen the screws enough to release the tension. Do not remove the screws.
(5) Tighten the two mounting screws of the Tension plate just enough to keep the Tension bracket all the way to the
right to keep the belt tension loose. Unhook the Timing belt from the pulley on the Tension bracket.
Right cover Tension bracket
(6) Detach the Scanner module transfer motor assembly. (W sems screw 3x8 (4 pcs))
Scanner module transfer motor assembly
(7) Unhook the wire saddle, unplug the wire connector and remove the motor assembly from the scanner.　　　　

1-7. Cooling Fan

(1) Turn OFF the scanner power, disconnect the power cable from the power source and remove the Rear cover.
(2) Remove two mounting screws of the Cooling fan assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs))
(3) Disconnect the wire connector of the Cooling fan and detach the Cooling fan assembly from the Scanner.
Cooling fan assembly
1-8. Stage Cover Sensor and Stage Cover Angle Sensor

(1) Turn OFF the scanner power, disconnect the power cable from the power source and remove the Rear cover.
(2) Detach the Sensor assembly. (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc))
Sensor assembly
(3) Remove each Sensor by unplugging the wire connectors.
Stage cover angle sensor
Stage cover sensor

1-9. Scanner Module

(1) Turn OFF the scanner power, disconnect the power cable from the power source and remove the Stage glass.
(2) Remove the Left cover. (Binding screw 4x6 (2 pcs)).
(3) Remove the Right cover. (Binding screw 4x6 (2 pcs)).
Left cover Right cover
(4) Slide the Scanner module to the right to access to the Tension bracket.
Loosen the two mounting screws of the Tension bracket to release the belt tension. (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs)).
Just loosen the screws enough to release the tension. Do not remove the screws.
(5) Slide the Tension plate to the right and tighten the two mounting screws of the Tension plate just enough to
keep the Tension bracket all the way to the right to keep the belt tension loose. Unhook the Timing belt from the
pulley on the Tension bracket.
The Timing belt should not get grease on. Make sure to keep it away from the Scanner module or the Guide
shaft on which grease is applied. Roll the Timing belt into small piece will keep grease from getting onto it
accidentally.
Tension bracket Timing Belt

<rolled into small piece>.
(6) Remove the mounting screw of the FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) located on the top surface of the Scanner module.
(IT screw 3x6 (1 pc)).
FFC Holder
FFC (Flexible Flat Cable)
Scanner Module

(7)Remove the Guide shaft support plate on the right-hand surface of the scanner. (W sems screw 3x8 (2 pcs)).
Guide shaft support plate
(8) Rotate the removed Guide shaft support plate, up-side-down, so the wide projected surface is on the bottom.
Using only one mounting screw (right side only) and fix the Guide shaft support plate, up-side-down, in place. (W
sems screw 3x8 (1 pc))
(9) Remove the mounting screw of the Guide shaft from the left-hand-side frame of the Scanner unit. (IT screw 4x8
(1 pc)).
Since this one screw holds the Guide shaft on the sensor of the shaft, the shaft rotates when the screw is
rotated. Hold the Guide shaft tight when loosening or tightening the mounting screw.
(10) Pull out the Guide shaft carefully out of the Scanner unit from the right-hand-side, the side on which the white
plastic Guide shaft support plate was temporarily attached up-side-down.
Guide shaft

(11) Lay the Scanner module up-side-down on top of right-hand-side Scanner frame.
(12) Detach the Scanner module locking plate. (P-tight-washer-head-screw 3x10 (1 pc)).
Scanner module Scanner module locking plate
(13) Detach the FFC Holder.

FFC Holder
　
(14) Disconnect the FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) from the CCD PCB.
The narrower of the two FFC needs to be unlocked by lifting the lock before being able to disconnect. The
wider FFC has no lock mechanism.
No lock mechanism on the wider FFC.
CCD PCB The narrow FFC has a lock mechanism.

(15) Detach the FFC Holder. (The FFC Holder and FFC are in one assembly.)
● Mounting back the Scanner module.

(1) Connect the two FFC onto the CCD PCB. The Ferrite cores should be positioned as shown on the photograph
below.
(2) Align the large ferrite core along the guide underneath.
(3) Set the small ferrite core in the center of the hole on the FFC Holder. Apply 200mg of grease on the Slider on
the FFC Holder.
Large ferrite core Small ferrite core
(4) Apply 200mg of grease on the Slider on the FFC Holder.

Slider
FFC Holder
Scanner module

(5) Rotate the Scanner module in its original direction.

Mount the FFC Holder and fix in position using the mounting screw (IT screw 3x6 (1 pc)).
FFC Holder
(6) Insert the Guide shaft from the right-hand-side.

(7) Confirm that the Guide shaft is firmly inserted. Confirm that there is no space when looked from the above.
Guide shaft
(8) Tighten the mounting screw of the Guide shaft on the left-hand-side of the Scanner unit (IT screw 4x8 (1 pc)).

(9) Rotate the Guide shaft support plate back to its original condition and mount it back on the Scanner unit.
Press the Guide shaft support plate down when tightening the mounting screws (W sems screw 3x8 (2 pcs)).
(10) Hook the Timing belt on the Pulley.
Pulley
Timing belt
(11) Hook the Timing belt on the Tension bracket. Then loosen the two screws on the Tension bracket to allow the
spring to apply appropriate tension on the belt, automatically. Jog the Scanner module to the Left and Right
several times to make sure that the spring is giving the correct tension on the Timing belt. Finally tighten the
mounting screws (IT screw 3x6 (2 pcs)).　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Tension bracket

(12) Apply the grease.

Follow the instruction given along with the photographs, in applying the grease.
The step-4, given earlier on this series of instruction, also uses this same grease.
Step-1: Step-2:
Showing how the grease is supplied in Remove the inner smaller plastic bag,
doubled plastic bags. which contains the grease, out of the outer
larger plastic bag.
Step-3: Step-4:
Only the inner plastic bag, containing the Gather the grease in one place within the
grease, will be used. plastic bag.
Step-5: Step-6:
Gather the grease in one bottom corner Pinch the bottom corner of the plastic bag
within the plastic bag. to push back the grease.
Step-7: Step-8:
Cut off the bottom corner to the plastic bag Confirm that the grease can be squeezed
for the width of approximately 3 mm. out from the cut-out corner.
m
3m

Step-9: Step-10:
Slide the carriage to the right. Confirm the grease injection nozzle on the
carriage.
Step-11:
Insert the tip of the grease bag into the injection
nozzle on the carriage and squeeze the grease
into the carriage.
The amount of grease to
apply is approximately
700 mg. 700 mg can be
checked roughly by
looking from the top of the
carriage at the amount
of the grease injected.
700 mg of grease equals
to approximately 10 mm
width of grease applied in
7 reciprocations.
10mm
7 reciprocations
Step-12:
Slide the carriage to the left-and-right gently
by hand for approximately 5 times each way to
transfer the grease on the guide shaft.
Slide the carriage to the left-and-right gently

by hand for approximately 5 times each way
Firmly hold the carriage on the area above the

guide shaft when sliding the carriage sideways.
(13) Mount back the scanner glass. (Binding screw 3x6 (4 pcs), Shoulder screw (2 pcs)).
(14) Mount the right cover. (Binding screw 4x6 (2 pcs)).
(15) Mount the left cover (Binding screw 4x6 (2 pcs)).

2. Disassembly
2-1. Stripper Area
Stripper unit
(1) Open the original feed cover.
(2) the stripper unit by rotating it up.
Stripper unit
Separation roller
(1) Remove the stripper unit.
(2) Remove the separation roller, as a unit, by rotating it for approximately 90 degrees.
In mounting the separation roller, make sure to attach the spring on the pins at the top and bottom.
Separation roller
Spring
2-2. Parts around the Feed Roller

Feed roller unit
(2) Remove the paper guide. (P-tight bind head screw 3x10 (4 pcs)).
The bottom portion has 2 hooks.
Paper Guide

3. Remove the feed roller unit.

(1) Remove the black clip on the front and remove black colored metal from the shaft.
(2) Remove the black clip on the rear and push gold colored metal out from the frame and remove the metal
from the shaft.
The two metals removed are not compatible. The gold colored one is an oilless metal used on the rear.
The black colored one is made of resin and is used on the front.
CLIP
FRONT REAR
Feed rollers
In removing the feed rollers, check and remember the mounting position of each parts before the disassembly.
It is recommended to disassemble the feed roller unit from the front of the unit and keep the rear side of the unit
intact. Use the rear side parts assembly as sample reference in assembling the front parts.
(1) Take off the feed roller unit from the AF main unit.
(2) Remove two white clips from the front of the feed roller unit. Remove the arm and a pin.
(3) Remove stopper lever from the front of the unit.
(4) Remove the guide.
Detach the guide first from the pickup roller side, and then detach the guide from the feed roller side.
(5) Remove the 2 white clips holding the 2 rollers. Slide the rollers and pulleys just a little bit to remove pin.
Slide the pulleys and rollers out from the shafts.
Black colored pulley goes back on feed roller shaft. White colored pulley goes back on the pickup roller shaft.
Do not mount these two pulleys on the wrong shaft.
Arm Stopper lever Guide
In mounting the feed roller unit back on the AF unit, pay caution not to damage the plastic actuator plate of the
original detection sensor, and of other fragile parts.

Actuator of the Original

detection sensor.
Stopper Lever
The Stopper lever is positioned
above the projection from the
Original feed cover.
Projection from the

Original feed cover.
Stopper
Arm
Arm is positioned
above the Stopper.
Tip of the Stopper

is on top of the Arm.
AF Original detection sensor

(1) Remove the original detection sensor after disconnecting the connector.
AF Original detection sensor
FRONT REAR

AF Post separation sensor

(1) Detach the AF Post separation sensor assembly from the AF unit. (P-tight bind head screw 3x10 (1 pc).
(2) Detach the grounding spring.
AF Post separation
sensor assembly
Grounding spring
(3) Remove the AF Post separation sensor from the assembly.

(4) Unplug the connector. (1 pc)
Caution in replacing the AF Post separation sensor:

Push the sensor firmly against the the mounting bracket and fix in position by a screw (W-sems screw 3x8 (1
pc)).

2-3. Parts on the Original Feed Tray

(2) Flip open the original feed tray after removing 1 screw from the original feed tray stopper. (P-tight pan-head-
washer-screw 3x10 (1 pc)).
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the bottom cover of the original feed tray.
In mounting the bottom ocver of the original feed tray, pay caution not to pinch the electrical wires.
Original feed tray stopper.
AF Tray sensor 2 AF Tray VR sensor
AF Tray sensor 1
Original feed tray bottom cover
AF Tray sensor 1 & 2

Disconnect the connectors from the sensors and detach the sensors.
AF Tray VR sensor
(1) Remove 2 mounting screws and detach the VR sensor assembly. (P-tight bind head screw 3x10 (2 pcs)).
(2) Remove the mounting nut, disconnect the connector and remove the VR sensor.
In mounting the VR sensor, match the triangle marks on the round gear and the flat gear.
After the AF tray VR sensor is assembled back, perform the volume adjustment of the sensor by test mode.
2-4. Parts on the AF Drive Area
(1) Open the Original feed cover.
(2) Remove the front cover of the AF unit. (P-tight bind head screw 3x10 (2 pcs)
(3) Remove the rear cover of the AF unit. (P-tight pan head washer screw 3x10 (2 pcs), P-tight bind head screw
3x10 (1 pc)).
(4) From the PCB, disconnect 7 connectors of the wires leading to the drive area, detach the ground wire, and
free the wires from the wire saddle.

(5) From the front of the unit, remove the solenoid spring, solenoid and lever.
Watch out with the pin falling.
Solenoid
Lever
Solenoid spring
(6) Remove the stopper mounting screw from the original feed cover. (P-tight pan head washer screw 3x10 (1 pc)).
(7) Detach the AF driver unit. (P-tight bind head screw 4x12 (6 pcs), Bind screw 4x6 (1 pc).
When taking off the AF drive unit, the base portion tends to spring upward.
To prevent this, it is best to tape down the front portion of the AF unit onto the FB unit using strong adhesive
tape.

Motors and Cooling fan assembly (detaching from the AF unit)

(1) Disconnect 1 ground wire, 1 sensor connector and 1 reusable wire harness band.
(2) Remove two mounting screws.
(3) Disconnect one connector and free the wires.
Remove the ground wire and
connector located in this area. Remove these 2
mounting screws.
Disconnect the reusable wire harness

and connector from this area.
Ejection roller
(1) Loosen the tension on the tensioner located on the rear of the AF unit.
Tensioner
Remove the two pulleys

and timing belt.
(2) Remove one E-ring and detach 1 pulley on the bottom. (refer to the above photograph).
(3) Free the hook on the top pulley and remove the pulley. (refer to the above photograph).
(4) Remove clip and metal.
(5) Detach the ejection roller by removing 1 white clip and metal in the front of the unit.
Ejection roller

White roller and nearby parts

(1) Loosen the tension on the 2 tensioners on the rear of the AF unit.
Tensioners Remove the parts on these two shafts.
(2) Remove 2 E-rings and detach the pulleys. (refer to the above photograph)
(3) Remove 3 E-rings and 2 bearings.
(4) From the front of the AF unit, remove 3 metal clips, 2 gears and 2 bearings from the two shafts shown on the
photograph below. (Small gear will also come off when taking the bearing out.)
(5) Remove 3 E-rings and 2 bearings.
Remove parts attached
onto these two shafts.
Small gear
(6) Remove the three rollers attached as an assembly.

Watch out not to loose the springs from the both ends of the roller assembly.

3. AF & FB Firmware Downloading

The scanner firmware can be downloaded at the same time the printer firmware is downloaded using a USB
memory stick. Refer to the Firmware Downloading method for the printer, explained on the separate chapter of
this technical manual for the procedure detail.
4. CS5-MAIN-PCB Replacement
To enable high-speed scanning, the shading compensation process on the HS5000 is simplified.
The compensation information used on the simplified shading compensation is called the Shading Profile. The
Shading Profile is saved in the flash memory on the CS5-MAIN-PCB. When the scanner unit is shipped out from
the factory, the Shading Profile is pre-installed on the PCB. The CS5-MAIN-PCB as a spare part does not include
the Shading Profile. Therefore, the Shading Profile needs to be installed onto the PCB after the PCB is replaced
with a new one. The scanning from the AF Unit cannot be made without the Shading Profile in the PCB.
The CS5-MAIN-PCB replacement is made in the following procedure.
(1) Remove the existing CS5-MAIN-PCB from the Scanner.

(2) Remove the EEPROM from the removed CS5-MAIN-PCB.
(3) Attach the EEPROM removed in the above step on the new CS5-MAIN-PCB to mount on the scanner.
(4) Mount the new CS5-MAIN-PCB on the scanner.
(5) Install the newest version Scanner firmware, for both the Flat bed and AF unit, from the Ink Jet printer.
(6) From the Ink Jet printer, execute Test Mode No. 5406 [SCANNER PROFILE MODE].
The scanner lamp lights for approximately 30 seconds while the scanner profile is updated. The LCD touch panel
on the Ink Jet printer will indicate "IN ACTION" while the scanner profile data is being updated.
(7) The test mode ends when the LCD touch panel on the Ink Jet printer indicates "END".
(8) Turn OFF the scanner power switch once and then turn the power back ON to complete the CS5-MAIN-PCB
replacement.
Adjustment
1. AF Tray VR Sensor
• Make this adjustment after replacing the VR sensor or when the sensor is not correctly detecting the original size.
• To check whether correct original size detection is being made or not can be checked by accessing into test mode
No. 5630 [AF ORIGINAL SIZE] from the LCD touch panel on the Ink Jet printer.
Adjustment
(1) Open the original guides to 100 mm width and activate Test Mode No. 5432 [AF VR ADJ (P-CARD)] from the
touch panel of the Ink Jet printer.
(2) Then open the original guides to 297 mm width and activate Test Mode No. 5433 [AF VR ADJ (A4R)] from the
touch panel of the Ink Jet printer.
(3) To check whether correct adjustment is made or not, place a standard size original on the original feed tray and
activate Test Mode No. 5630 [AF ORIGINAL SIZE] from the touch panel of the Ink Jet printer. Confirm that the
correct original size is displayed on the touch panel of the Ink Jet printer. If not, repeat the adjustments (1) and (2)
and confirm that the adjustment ended correctly.
2. Other Adjustments
Refer to the HS5000 Scanner Installation Guide for the following adjustments.
• AF Unit position adjustment
• Distorted image correction
• Horizontal (left & right) image position adjustment
• Vertical (top & bottom) image position adjustment

Electrical Parts and related Test Modes

Parts Name Description Test Modes Comments
1 FB Original Detection Sensor Sensor 5010
2 FB Original Size Sensor 1 Sensor 5011
8 FB Original Cover Sensor Sensor 5017
9 FB Original Cover Angle Sensor Sensor 5018
10 FB Original Cover Angle Sensor Sensor 5019
11 AF Original Detection Sensor Sensor 5030
12 AF Registration Sensor Sensor 5031
13 AF Original IN Sensor Sensor 5032
14 AF Original OUT Sensor Sensor 5033
15 AF Tray Sensor 1 Sensor 5035
16 AF Tray Sensor 2 Sensor 5036
17 AF Original Feed Cover Set Switch Switch 5034
18 AF Post Separation Sensor Sensor 5041
19 AF Fan Fan 5231

Multifunction Finisher II (option)
Chapter 24. Multifunction Finisher II (option)
Contents
Overview................................................................................................................ 24-2
1. Structure of Multifunction Finisher.......................................................... 24-2
2. Overview of functions............................................................................. 24-3
3. Overall structure..................................................................................... 24-9
4. Printed wiring boards and set switches................................................ 24-13
5. Procedure for replacing Finisher PWB................................................. 24-15
6. Cautions regarding disassembly and reassembly................................ 24-17
7. Removal of covers................................................................................ 24-19
8. Removal of units................................................................................... 24-21
I/F Module............................................................................................................ 24-27
1. Basic mechanism................................................................................. 24-27
2. Disassembly......................................................................................... 24-33
Puncher section and Stapler section................................................................ 24-39
1. Basic mechanism of Puncher section.................................................. 24-39
2. Basic mechanism of Top Tray.............................................................. 24-42
3. Basic mechanism of Compile section................................................... 24-44
4. Disassembly......................................................................................... 24-51
Stacker Tray section........................................................................................... 24-63
1. Basic mechanism................................................................................. 24-63
2. Disassembly......................................................................................... 24-66
Booklet section................................................................................................... 24-69
1. Basic mechanism................................................................................. 24-69
2. Disassembly......................................................................................... 24-73
Adjustment.......................................................................................................... 24-83
1. Staple and Fold position adjustments in the Booklet section............... 24-83
2. Punch position adjustment................................................................... 24-90
4. Staple position adjustment................................................................... 24-91

Overview
1. Structure of Multifunction Finisher
I/F Module (Transfer section)

• The Interface Module (I/F module) connects the Multipurpose Finisher to the ComColor printer and transports
the paper.
Multipurpose Finisher
• The Multipurpose Finisher can be separated into two sections. The left-hand section consists of above
mentioned I/F Module.
• The right-hand section consists of the following.
Puncher, Stapler, Top-Tray, Stacker-Tray and Saddle stitching finisher (Booklet section).
Saddle Stitching Finisher

• The Saddle Stitching Finisher is a Booklet section of the Multipurpose Finisher for folding paper sheets in half
(2-fold) and stapling at the center, if the stapling function is selected, to produce booklets.
• Paper discharged from this Booklet section is discharged onto the Booklet Tray.
Stacker Tray
Top Tray
Stapler
Puncher
I/F Module
Booklet Tray

< Booklet Section >

2. Overview of functions
2-1. Main functions (folding, booklet production)

1) Punch Holes
You can select number of holes (2 or 4 holes on millimeter machine / 2 or 3 holes on inch machine) and
location of the punch holes (top, right or left).
2) Stapling
You can select two-position stapling on (left, top or right) or one-position stapling on (left-top or right-top).
3) Offset Ejection onto Stacker Tray
The prints can be offset ejected onto the Stacker Tray, either between sets or between jobs.
4) Cover Sheet Adding
Two trays on ComColor printer can be selected exclusively for Front Cover and Rear Cover feeding.
Stapling Punching holes
l
nua
hnica
l Ma Front Cover
Tec
Offset output Add cover

In addition to the preceding functions, the Saddle Stitching Finisher performs the following
functions:
1) Folds paper sheets in half and produces booklets.
You can enable or disable center stapling (saddle stitching).
2) 2-fold
* This function differs from the above-mentioned booklet production without center stapling.
Select outside-face printing or inside-face printing.
Booklet 2-fold
Center Margin

2-2. Main functions (detailed explanation)
Booklet production
1) Printed paper sheets are folded in half and stapled at the center to form booklets.
2) You can select "2-fold + staple" or "2-fold (without staple).
3) Select from A3 SEF, B4 SEF, and A4 SEF. LEF fed paper cannot be used.
4) Pagination is performed automatically for correct booklet production. Printing is performed based on the mode
selected (two-page layout, duplex, or sort mode).
5) In the case of left-hand booklets, the first page is the one facing down, at the bottom.
6) Stapling is automatically disabled if the number of pages is less than four.
7) Paper is discharged onto the Booklet Tray.
8) The function can process up to 15 sheets, including covers in the case of "2-fold + stapling" or up to 5 sheets
including covers in the case of "2-fold (without staple)."
Separate binding
1) This function produces separate booklets when the number of pages is too large for a booklet.
2) This function affects pagination and layout.
3) If the "2-fold + stapling" setting is selected, the function can process up to 15 sheets in auto mode or 1 to 15
sheets when the number of sheets is specified.
4) If the "2-fold" setting is selected, the function can process up to 5 sheets in auto mode or 1 to 5 sheets when
the number of sheets is specified.
5) You cannot use the "add cover" function with this function.
6) Even if the separate binding setting is set to OFF, the separate binding operation is performed if the print job
contains 61 or more original pages (21 pages or more when no stapling is performed). In such cases, the
stapler setting is ignored and paper sheets are discharged without being stapled.
Center binding margin

1) This function provides a binding margin at the center for booklet production.
2) The binding margin can be set to a value of between 0 and 50 mm.
3) If the "auto size reduction" function is set, the image printed will be scaled to fit the print area.
If the "auto size reduction" function is not set and the image to be printed extends beyond the print area, the
image sections outside the print area will not be printed.
Offset output
1) This function performs paper discharge operation by shifting the position of each sheet or set of printed pages
discharged onto the Stacker Tray according to settings.
2) The offset output function is automatically activated when the stapling function is used.
Stapling
1) This function staples 2 to 100 sheets and discharges sets of copied sheets.
2) Stapled sheets are discharged onto the Stacker Tray in offset positions.
3) The stapling and punching functions can be enabled simultaneously.
4) Select type of copy paper from A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, or B5 LEF.
5) Since staples are driven into paper from the bottom side, paper is discharged with this face side down. For
single-sided printing, paper is flipped over inside the printer.
6) Since staples are inserted at the trailing edge from the button side, the stapling positions cannot be adjusted
on the Finisher side. This means the print image is rotated inside the PS7R based on the setting before being
output.
7) If only one corner is stapled, a staple is inserted into the paper square if angled staple insertion is not possible.

Punching
1) This function creates holes in each sheet before discharge.
2) If only the punching function is set, punched sheets can be discharged onto the Top Tray or Stacker Tray.
Binding margin
1) This function provides a margin for punching or stapling.
2) The margin can be set to a value of between 0 and 50 mm.
3) When the "auto size reduction" function is set, the image printed will be scaled to fit the print area excluding
the binding margin. If the "auto size reduction" function is not set and the image to be printed extends beyond
the print area, the sections outside the print area will not be printed.
2-fold
1) This function folds each sheet in half before discharge.
2) Folded paper is discharged onto the Booklet Tray.
3) Printing on the outside or inside surface of paper is possible.
2-3. Combinations of functions
Paper sizes and compatible functions
Paper Size
Post B5 B5 A4 A4 B4 A3 LETTER LETTER LEGAL LEDGER
Card SEF LEF SEF LEF SEF SEF SEF LEF SEF SEF
Stapling (one location
in front.)
in back, angled.)
in back, parallel.)
Stapling (two locations
in center.)
No stapling + offset
output
2-hole punching
4-hole punching
2-fold
Combinations of functions
Function Paper Ejection Tray
2-fold Punching Stapling Booklet Top tray Stacking Booklet

Tray Tray
2-fold
Punching
Function
Stapling
Booklet

2-4. Multifunction Finisher II Specification
- continues on next page -

NOTE:
Check with your Marketing or Sals Department for the precise specification of the "Multifunction Finisher II" to your country.

MEMO

3. Overall structure
3-1. Paper transport paths

(1) Paper printed by ComColor is sent to the IF Unit via the optional FU Paper ejection attachment.
(2) Paper transported from the IF Unit is sent to the Puncher section.
(3) When the punching function is set, paper is processed at the Puncher section.
After passing the Puncher section, paper is sent from the S1 Gate toward either the Booklet section or Top
Tray/Stacker Tray.
(4) Paper moving toward the Top Tray/Stacker Tray is sent from the S2 Gate to either the Top Tray or the Stacker
Tray for output.
(5) When paper is to be stapled, it is sent toward the Stacker Tray, then it is retracted toward the Stapler.
When sheets for one stapling set are collected, they are stapled and discharged onto the Stacker Tray.
(6) Sheets sent to the Booklet section are stapled when all pages for one booklet are collected, and then folded in
half and discharged onto the Booklet Tray.
Top Tray Stack Tray
Interface Unit S2 Gate
Stapler
S1 Gate
Booklet Tray
Puncher

3-2. Rollers in paper transport paths
(18) (19)
(17)
(21)
(20)
(22)
(16)
(24)
(3)
(15) (23)
(2)
(25)
(27)
(26) (28)
No. Roller Name No. Roller Name
- - - - - - - 21 Compile exist roller
2 IF Transfer roller 22 Compile ejection roller
3 Assist roller 23 Booklet IN roller
15 Entrance roller 24 Buffer roller
16 Punch reverse roller 25 Booklet ejection roller
17 T/A1 roller 26 Pre-folding roller
18 T/A2 roller 27 Folding roller
19 Top ejection roller 28 Booklet ejection roller
20 Buffer reverse roller

3-3. Sensors in paper transport paths
(10)
(11)
(13)
(12)
(9)
(2) (15)
(1)
(14)
(17)
(16)
(18)
No. Sensor Name No. Sensor Name
1 Decurler IN sensor 13 Stacker NO paper sensor
2 Decurler OUT sensor 14 Booklet IN sensor
9 Punch OUT sensor 15 Booklet IN roller
10 Top tray ejection sensor 16 Buffer path sensor
11 Compile ejection sensor Booklet folder roller ejection

17
sensor
12 Compile tray NO paper sensor
18 Booklet NO paper sensor

MEMO

4. Printed wiring boards and set switches
4-1. Main printed wiring boards (PWBs) and switches (SWs)
(1) Finisher Main PWB
(2) I/F PWB
(5) Relay PWB
(3) Booklet PWB
(6) Finisher Front

Door SW
(7) I/F Module Front (9) Booklet Tray Belt

Door SW SW
(4) LVPS
(8) I/F Module Interlock

SW
Two Interlock switches are located on the I/F Module.

• The one is to shut off the Finisher system.
• The other is to shut off the Printer system.

PWBs (PCBs)
< Refer to the sketch on the previous page >
(1) Finisher Main PWB
This PWB controls the Puncher section, Stapler section, Stacker Tray section, Top Tray section and Finisher.
It also produces +5 VDC from the +24 VDC supplied from the LVPS (Low Voltage Power Supply).
(2) I/F PWB
This PWB controls the Connection section between ComColor and I/F Module of the Finisher as well as the
Decurler section.
(3) Booklet PWB
This PWB controls the Booklet section.
(4) LVPS (Low Voltage Power Supply)
This PWB produces +24 VDC from the main power supply and provides it to the Finisher.
If short-circuiting occurs in the AC supply line, a fuse melts and cuts off the power supply.
(5) Relay PWB
This PWB consists of two relays. These two relays are energized when interlock switches turn ON and supply
24-VDC power to the Finisher Main PWB.
Interlock switches
(6) Finisher Front Door SW
This switch turns OFF when the Finisher Front Door is opened, and cuts off the +24-VDC power supply to the
parts.
(7) I/F Module Front Door SW
This switch turns OFF when the Front Door of the I/F section is opened, and cuts off the +24-VDC power
supply to the parts.
(8) I/F Module Interlock SW
This switch turns OFF when the Front Door of the I/F section is opened, and stops the machine operation.
Other switches
(9) Booklet Tray Belt SW
When this SW (button) is pressed, the Booklet tray belt rotates for a given set time.

5. Procedure for replacing Finisher PWB
5-1. Replacement procedure
• Since the Finisher NVM data (parameters set in the Test Mode data setting) is stored in the Finisher PWB,
it is necessary to save and restore the setting data for the replacement of the Finisher PWB.
If it is not possible to save the NVM data, after the PWB is replaced, enter the data manually in the Test Mode by
referring to the NVM setting list provided with the product.
• To initialize the NVM data in the Finisher PWB, select Test Mode No. 4500 "FINISHER NVM PARAMETER
AREA INITIALIZE" → and then enter "79747".
(1) Before replacing the Finisher PWB, select Test Mode No. 4405 "FINISHER NVM DATA STORE" → and then
enter "43534" to read and save the NV data from the Finisher onto the FRAM on the ComColor Engine Control
PCB.
(2) Replace the Finisher PWB with a new part.
(3) Install the latest version of the firmware software in the Finisher.
The Multi-purpose Finisher machine firmware is included in the ComColor machine firmware.
Therefore, the Finisher machine firmware is installed in the Finisher the same way as it is for the ComColor
main unit.
(4) Activate Test Mode No. 4406 "FINISHER NVM DATA RE-STORE" → and then enter 50315 to write the NV
data back into the Finisher PWB.

5-2. Power supply system
• The 100-240 VAC power supplied from the Power Inlet is fed to the LVPS (Low Voltage Power Supply) for
conversion to 24 VDC.
• The 24-VDC power supply output from the LVPS is turned ON/OFF by the control signal from the ComColor.
• The 24-VDC power is supplied to the Finisher Main PWB through two channels.
1) One channel supplies power to the Finisher Main PWB via a Relay PWB, and feeds the 24-VDC power to
other PWBs and parts.
2) The other channel supplies 24-VDC power directly to the Finisher Main PWB where it is converted to 5
VDC power and supplied to other PWBs and parts.
• The 24-VDC power supplied through the above channel 2) is fed to the Relay PWB via interlock switches for the
ON/OFF control of the relay.
• Therefore, if any of the interlock switches turns OFF, the relay also turns OFF and stops the operation of the 24-
VDC parts.
• These interlock switches are two switches shown below.
Finisher Front Door Switch
I/F Module Front Door Switch
Interlock SW
Relay PCB
LVPS(Power Supply Unit) Finisher Main PCB
AC100-240V DC24V
To each PCB & parts
DC24V
DC24V
ComColor DC5V
ON/OFF Signal To each PCB & parts

6. Cautions regarding disassembly and reassembly
• Turn OFF the machine power and unplug the power cord from the Finisher before disassembly and reassembly.
• When moving or transporting the equipment, use the stays, which offer sufficient strength.
Supporting the equipment by other parts can cause distortion in the unit body.
• Be careful not to damage cables or wires by pinching. Be sure to secure cables and wires with wire clamps or
harnesses.
Be sure to give sufficient slack to wires connected to moving parts in order to ensure unrestricted movement of
the parts within their operating ranges.
• Do not install incorrect screws.
Use the original screws as a general rule.
• Self-tapping screws are most commonly used.
These screws have a cross recess on the screw head with four dots around it.
• Round-tip screws are used to prevent injury to hands and other parts of the body if the ends of screws protrude
into areas that are accessible by the user.
• Ordinary screws, instead of self-tapping screws, are used when threaded screw holes are provided on parts
such as shafts.
These screws can be easily distinguished from self-tapping screws since they do not have four dots around the
cross recess on the screw head.
• Wood screws are used on resin and parts.
Periodic replacement of parts

• The following parts must be replaced at regular intervals.
- Main Paddle and Sub Paddle in the Stacker Compile section
- Paddle in the Booklet section
• The replacement timing of above parts can be referred by the machine software count.
- Main Paddle of the Stacker Compile section
→ Test Mode No. 4602 "STACKER PADDLE COUNT DISPLAY".
→ Test Mode No. 4515 "STACKER PADDLE COUNT CLEAR".
- Sub Paddle of the Stacker Compile section
→ Test Mode No. 4601 "STACKER SUB-PADDLE COUNT DISPLAY".
→ Test Mode No. 4514 "STACKER SUB-PADDLE COUNT CLEAR".
- Paddle in the Booklet section
→ Test Mode No. 4603 "BOOKLET PADDLE COUNT DISPLAY".
→ Test Mode No. 4516 "BOOKLET PADDLE COUNT CLEAR".

MEMO

7. Removal of covers
• Refer to the following diagram for the removal of external covers.

• Some covers cannot be removed unless other covers are detached first. For details, refer to the removal
directions for individual covers.
(3) Finisher Rear Upper Cover
(4) Eject Cover (5) Top Tray
(6) Stacker Lower Cover
(2) I/F Module Rear Cover
(1) Finisher Rear Cover
(1) Finisher Rear Cover: 4 screws

(2) I/F Module Rear Cover: 3 screws
(3) Finisher Rear Upper Cover: 2 screws
(4) Eject Cover: 4 screws
(5) Top Tray: 1 screw
Remove in the order of (4) → (5).
(6) Stacker Lower Cover: 6 screws
Remove (1) and then (4) → (5) → (9) → (10) prior to removing (6). - go to next page -

(12) Finisher Top Cover

(11) Finisher Top Left Cover
(9) Stacker Front Top Cover
(13) I/F Module Top Cover
(14) Front Blind Cover (8) Front Door

(10) Stacker Front Cover
(7) I/F Module Front Door
(7) I/F Module Front Door:

Remove the KL-Clip from the hinge located at the upper side.
(8) Front Door:
Remove the KL-Clip from the hinge located at the upper side.
(9) Stacker Front Cover: 2 screws
Remove in the order of (4) → (5) → (9).
(10) Stacker Front Cover: 2 screws
Remove in the order of (4) → (5) → (9) → (10).
(11) Finisher Top Left Cover (Folder): 1 screw
(12) Finisher Top Cover: 1 screws
Remove in the order of (4) → (5) → (9) → (10) → (11) → (12).
(13) I/F Module Top Cover: 1 screws
(14) Front Blind Cover: 3 screws

8. Removal of units
8-1. Removal of I/F Module from the Finisher main unit.
(1) Remove following covers.

• Top cover
• I/F Module front door
• Rear cover
• Front blind cover
Top Cover
Front blind cover
I/F Module front door.

Remove a Clip from the Top Hinge, and unhook the
door from the two hinges.
(2) Unplug the Connectors of the wires from the Finisher main body, and free the wires from the Wire clamps.
The wires to unplug are the two (2) wire to the Finisher Main PWB
and one (1) from the Relay connector.
Release wires from the Wire Clamps.

(3) Remove the I/F Module by removing 4 mounting screws.

< The I/F Module is hooked onto the Finisher main body at the top, so the I/F Module needs to be lifted up a
little to unhook from the Finisher main body after the 4 mounting screws are removed.>
4 Mounting screws

8-2. Removal of Booklet Unit from the Finisher main unit.
(1) Open the Front Door of the Finisher and gently pull the Booklet Unit forward.
Remove the Lock Plate. (1 screw).
(1) Lock Plate

<Prevents dropping of the Booklet Unit when pulled all
the way out.>
(2) Rail Stopper
(2) Press the Rail Stoppers on both sides and pull the Booklet Unit forward to dismount.
● When the Booklet Unit is removed, the Stopper on the back of the rail will drop, preventing rail stowage. If
you need to stow the rail, raise the Stopper to the center position.
When the booklet Unit is removed, the Stopper comes down to prevent the Railing to go back
in. (This is to make the reassembly work easier.)

8-3. Removal of the Stacker Tray from the Finisher main unit
Opening the Stacker Tray assembly to the service position.
(1) Remove the following covers:

• Finisher Front Door
• Finisher Rear Cover
• Eject Cover
• Top Tray
• Stacker Front Top Cover
• Finisher Top Left Cover
• Finisher Top Cover
• Finisher Rear Upper Cover
• Stacker Front Cover
(2) Remove the cover metal plates. (4 screws each)
Remove the metal plate
(3) Remove the six mounting screws and open the Stacker Tray assembly.
• If the screws at the upper section of the rear panel are inaccessible due to the Elevator Motor, manually turn
the motor gear and lower the Motor Unit until the screws are accessible.
< The 6 screw positions marked by red arrow marks. >
Tilt the Stacker tray unit

Removing the Stacker Tray

• Although the tray can be removed without performing steps (1) through (3) below, skipping these steps may
make removal more difficult and render the removed Stacker Tray unstable when placed on the floor.
(1) Remove the Metal plate located above the Booklet tray.
(2) Unplug the Booklet Tray cable connector, loosen the knob screw, and dismount the Booklet Tray.
(3) Remove the Stacker Lower Cover. (6 screws)
Knob screw Connector
Remove the metal plate Booklet Tray

Stacker Lower Cover
(4) Unplug the three cable connectors and release the cables from the Wire Saddles.
Remove E-ring from this hinge
Unplug the connector of this wire from the PWB
In attaching, insert the shaft

into the opening of the plate
(5) Remove the E-rings from the hinges on both sides and detach the hinges from the shaft.
(6) Lift and dismount the Stacker Tray unit.
• During reinstallation, insert the shaft shown in the photo into the opening of the plate by lowering the unit
manually by hand if necessary.

MEMO

I/F Module
1. Basic mechanism
Explanation
• The papers ejected out from the optional FU Ejection Unit are transferred to the I/F Module and then transferred
further into the Multifunction Finisher.
• The circumferential speed of the I/F Transfer Roller is 99% to that of BP Belt running at circumferential speed of
632mm/second.
• The paper ejecting out from the I/F Transfer Roller is pulled by the Assist Roller at circumferential speed of
1000mm/second.
• The speed difference between the I/F Transfer Roller and Assist Roller is absorbed by the one-way clutch
mounted on the I/F Transfer Roller drive unit.
• The paper being transferred through the I/F Module is monitored by the Decurler IN Sensor and Decurler OUT
Sensor.
• The I/F Module Front Door Switch checks whether the Front Door of the I/F Module is closed or open.
If the door is detected open (switch = OFF), the +24 volt electrical supply to the Multipurpose Finisher is
stopped.

Connection of the Multipurpose finisher to the ComColor.
I/F Module
Decurler IN Sensor Decurler OUT Sensor
FU Ejection Unit (option)
Assist Roller
I/F Transfer Roller

BP Unit
FU Ejection Roller IF Module Front Door Switch

Structure of the I/F Module
I/F Module
Front View with the doors closed
I/F Module
Booklet Unit
Front View with the doors open

I/F Transfer Roller (driven side)
Decurler IN Sensor
Assist Roller (driven side) Decurler OUT Sensor
I/F Module Front Door Interlock Switch
Assist Roller (drive side)
Photograph showing the gates 1b and 1d opened.

Assist Roller Drive Motor
Decurler Transport Motor

MEMO

2. Disassembly
1. Assist Roller Drive Motor
1. Remove the Rear Cover. (3x6 screw; 4 pcs)
Rear Cover
2. Remove the Assist Roller Drive Motor assembly. (3x6 screw; 4 pcs)
3. Unplug two wire connectors from the motor assembly to detach the motor assembly from the Finisher.
Two Connectors






Puncher section and Stapler section

1. Basic mechanism of Puncher section
1-1. Paper transport in Puncher section

• Paper transported from the ComColor passes through the I/F Module, and then to the Entrance Roll to the
Puncher section.
• The Entrance Roll receives drive power as described below.
• The Entrance Roll is driven by the Assist Roller Drive Motor in the I/F Module.
• The paper entering into the Puncher section is detected by the Decurler OUT Sensor in the I/F Module.
• Paper is then transported to the direction of the Top Tray or Stacker Tray via the Punch Reverse Roll. (The
paper is not transported toward the Booklet tray when punched or stapled.) During this process, the paper
transport status is detected by the Punch OUT Sensor, located after the Puncher.
• After a certain period elapses from the time the trailing edge of the paper leaves the Decurler OUT Sensor
(before the trailing edge of paper passes the Puncher Pins), the Finisher Transport Motor, SCT Exit Motor, and
Compile Exit Motor activates in the reverse direction, rotating the rollers after the Puncher Unit, including the
Punch Rev. Roll in the reverse direction, to bring the paper back towards the Puncher Unit until the trailing edge
of the paper contacts the Puncher Guide. This corrects paper skew and sets the paper into the correct punching
position. (For the Motor locations, refer to the diagram on the Top Tray section -- Page No. 24-37 & 24-38.)
• The Staple Guide give away to the paper and folds flat to make the path for the paper when the paper from
the printer comes into the Puncher, allowing the paper to pass. But when the paper is pulled back against the
Puncher Guide for the punching, Puncher Guide does not fold, but acts as a stopper to align the papers.
* The amount of punch reverse travel (amount of reverse operation) can be adjusted by using Test Mode No.
4739 "PUNCH RESERVE ADJ 1" and No. 4762 "PUNCH RESERVE ADJ 2". Note that if the adjustment is
made too much to the (+), the paper tends to get stained. If adjusted too much to the (-), the punching
position on the papers may vary.
• The paper is transported toward the Top Tray or Stacker Tray after the punch holes are made on the trailing
edge of the paper.
Punch OUT Sensor

PIN of the Puncher
Puncher Guide
Decurler OUT Sensor
Punch Reverse Roll
Entrance Roll

1-2. Overview of Puncher Unit position adjustment mechanism
This mechanism adjusts the position of the Puncher Unit based on paper size to ensure consistent punching
position.
The Puncher Unit is available with 2/4 holes (millimeter paper machine) or 2/3 holes (inch paper machine).
• When paper is set in the Puncher section, the position of each Sensor assembly
PUNCHER UNIT
sheet may deviate slightly from side to side.
To prevent this, the punching position is adjusted for each sheet.
• The Puncher Unit is provided with a Side Registration Sensor. REAR
The Puncher Unit slides sideways until the sensor on the Puncher
Unit aligns with the paper edge on the front side of the paper to
adjust the punching position.
• However, the distance between the punching position and the
paper edge may vary with paper size. This means the relative
PAPER
position of the Puncher assembly and Sensor assembly must be
adjusted. For this reason, both sections are designed to move
independently.
Puncher assembly FRONT
Side Registration Sensor
• The adjustment of the Puncher Unit position is performed by the Puncher Move Motor and Puncher Move
Clutch.
• Only the Puncher assembly moves when the motor rotates with the clutch OFF.
• When the motor rotates with the clutch ON, both the Puncher assembly and the sensor assembly move.
• The Puncher Unit home position is detected by the Puncher Move Home Sensor (for A4 LEF),
Puncher Move Home Sensor B5, or Puncher Move Home Sensor 3 Letter (3 holes, letter size), based on paper
size.
• The sensor assembly home position is detected by the Side Registration Home Sensor.
Puncher Move Motor

Puncher Move Clutch
Punch Hole Select Sensor

Side Regi. Home Sensor
Puncher Move Home Sensor (B5)
Puncher Move Home Sensor
Punch OUT Sensor
Punch Front Sensor
Punch Home Sensor
Puncher Move Home Sensor

Punch Motor (3 Letter)
Punch Motor Sensor
Punch Box Set Sensor

Cam Plate
Side Registration Sensor

1-3. Puncher Unit positioning operation
The three Puncher Unit positions are adjusted by the following three operations: Initialization operation,
Position adjustment based on paper size, and Movement during punching operation.
(1) Initialization
The Puncher Unit moves to the position for A4 LEF and A3 SEF paper sizes.
This is done each time after the power is turned on and after a job is completed.
1) With the clutch turned OFF, the Puncher move motor rotates and moves only the Puncher assembly to the
position of the Punch Move Home Sensor.
2) The motor then operates to move just the Puncher assembly to the position of the Side Registration Home
Sensor.
3) With the clutch turned ON, the motor rotates and moves both the Puncher assembly and the Sensor
assembly to the position of the Punch Move Home Sensor.
(2) Position adjustment based on paper size
The Puncher Unit position is adjusted based on paper size.
In the case of A4 LEF and A3 SEF, this operation is not performed, since this position adjustment is completed
during the initialization movement.
(3) Movement during punching operation (performed for each sheet)
1) With the clutch turned ON, the Puncher move motor rotates and moves the entire Puncher Unit toward the
front side.
2) As soon as the Side Registration Sensor detects the edge of the paper, the motor switches OFF.
< punching operation >
• The Puncher Pins move up and down based on the movement of the slit on the Cam Plate.
This operation is achieved by lateral sliding of the Cam Plate driven by the Punch Motor.
• The indented sections of the slit on the Cam Plate cause the pins to lower. While there is only one indented
section for the end pins on both sides, there are two indented sections for the two center pins. The Puncher
Unit creates two or four holes, based on the position of the Cam Plate.
In general, for 2-hole punching, the two center pins are used to make holes. However, the two pins on the
front side are used for A4 SEF.
• Punching operations are performed by moving the Cam Plate between the notched sections on the Cam Plate
detected by the Punch Home Sensor.
The Punch Hole Select Sensor determines whether the Cam Plate is positioned for 2-hole or 4-hole punching.
• Since holes can be punched whether or not the Cam Plate is moved to the front or rear side, the Punch motor
rotation switches between forward and reverse for each sheet to change the direction of Cam Plate
movement.
The direction of the Cam Plate movement is determined by the Punch Front Sensor
1-4. Punch Box

• Chads are collected in the Punch Box. The presence of the Punch Box is detected by the Punch Box Set
Sensor.
• An internal counter determines when the box is full.

> The default setting for the full box count value for the Punch Box is 10,000. This setting can be changed by
using Test Mode No. 4740 "PUNCH DUST FULL ADJ".
CAUTION: Changing the setting to a large full count value may result in an overflow of chads.
> The current counter reading can be viewed by selecting Test Mode No. 4820 "PUNCH TIME".

2. Basic mechanism of Top Tray

Paper going through the Puncher section is sent to the Top Tray, Stacker Tray, or Booklet tray, according to the
position of the S1 Gate and S2 Gate.
Top Tray Exit Sensor Top Exit Roll
Top Tray
T/A 2 Roll
Buffer Rev. Roll
T/A 1 Roll
Compile Exit Sensor
S2 Gate
Stacker Tray
Punch Rev. Roll

Compile Feed Roll
Compile Exit Roll
Buffer Roll
Buffer Path Sensor

Entrance Roll
Booklet IN Roll
Booklet
S1 Gate Unit
Paper transport to the Booklet Unit

• After the Puncher section, the paper path is switched by the S1 Gate to send paper toward the Top Tray/Stacker
Tray or to the Booklet unit.
• The S1 Gate sends paper toward the Booklet section when the Booklet Gate Solenoid is released (solenoid
piston pushed out) or toward the Top Tray/Stacker Tray when the solenoid is contracted (solenoid piston pulled).
• Paper is sent toward the Booklet section by the Booklet IN Roll, driven by the Finisher Transport Motor.
Paper transport to the Top Tray/Stacker Tray

• Paper is transported from the S1 Gate toward the Top Tray/Stacker Tray by the Punch Reverse Roll driven by
the Finisher Transport Motor. The S2 Gate then switches the paper path toward the Top Tray or Stacker Tray.
• The S2 Gate sends paper toward the Stacker Tray when the Transport Gate Solenoid is released (solenoid
piston pushed out) or toward the Top Tray when the solenoid is contracted (solenoid piston pulled).
Paper discharge to the Top Tray

• Paper is transported and ejected onto the Top Tray from the S1 Gate by the T/A 1 Roll, which is driven by the
Finisher Transport Motor, and then by the T/A 2 Roll and Top Exit Roll, which are driven by the SCT Exit Motor.

Paper transport to the Stacker Tray

• When the S2 Gate switches the paper path toward the Stacker Tray, the paper is sent toward the Stacker Tray
by the Buffer Roll, Buffer Rev. Roll, and Compile Exit Roll, which are all driven by the Compile Exit Motor.
Detection by the Sensors

• The paper transport status is detected by the Top Tray Exit Sensor, Buffer Path Sensor, and Compile Exit
Sensor, which are all located along the paper path.
• The Top Tray Full Sensor monitors the Top Tray, signaling when it is full.
SCT Exit Motor Compile Exit Motor Top Exit Roll Top Tray Exit Sensor Top Tray Full Sensor
Finisher Transport T/A 2 Roll Compile Exit Roll

Motor
Transport Gate
Solenoid
Compile Exit Sensor
Booklet Gate
Solenoid
Buffer Path Sensor Buffer Reverse Roll
S2 Gate S1 Gate Punch Reverse Roll Buffer Roll T/A 1 Roll

3. Basic mechanism of Compile section
3-1. Basic flow of Stapler operations

When a print job is made with Staple mode selected, the printed papers are pooled in the Compile Tray in each set
and stapled.
(1) The Shelf under the Compile Tray is extended out.
(2) Papers are transported to the Compile Tray.
(3) Tamping (paper alignment) is performed.
(4) Stapling is executed.
(5) The Shelf returns back to the original position.
(6) Paper is discharged to the Stacker Tray.
3-2. Paper flow

• Downstream of the Puncher section, paper is transported to the Compile section via the S1 Gate, Puncher
Reverse Roll, S2 Gate, Buffer Reverse Roll, and Compile Exit Roll.
• The status of paper transport to the Compile section is detected by the Compile Exit Sensor, while the presence
or absence of paper in the Compile Tray is detected by the Compile Tray NO Paper Sensor.
Buffer Reverse Roll Compile Exit Sensor Top Tray
Compile Exit Roll
S2 Gate
Stacker Tray
Punch Reverse Roll
Compile Feed Roll
Compile Exit Roll
Compile Tray NO Paper Sensor

S1 Gate
Buffer Roll
Booklet
Unit

3-3. Buffer path
When several sets of paper are discharged, paper cannot be transported to the Compile Tray while the stapling/
ejection operation for the preceding set is underway.
The buffer path is provided for this purpose.
When stapling/ejection for the preceding set is underway, the first sheet of the next set is set aside into the buffer
path. When the second sheet of the next set is transported, the first sheet and second sheet are sent together
to the Compile Tray. The preceding set is already stapled and ejected out by then.
The operation setting aside paper into the buffer path is performed for paper measuring 216 mm or less in length,
with the exception of heavy-gauge paper stock.
Shown below is paper flow when the above-mentioned function is performed.

1) With the S2 Gate set to the Stacker Tray side, the first sheet of paper of the next set of print is transported.
2) As soon as the Punch OUT Sensor detects the trailing edge of paper, the S2 Gate opens the path toward the
Top Tray and the Compile Exit Motor rotates in reverse to pull the paper into the buffer path.
3) After a preset time, the Compile Exit Motor halts to retain the first sheet in the buffer path until the second
sheet of paper is transported.
4) When the second sheet of paper is transported, the S2 Gate switches to the Stacker Tray side.
The Compile Exit Motor rotates in the forward direction to drive the Punch Reverse Roll and Buffer Roll,
placing one sheet on top of the other and discharging them to the Compile Tray.
(1) (2)
to Top Tray
to Stacker Tray
S2 Gate
1st sheet of the second set. Punch OUT Sensor
to Booklet Unit
(3) (4)
2nd sheet of
the second set.
1st sheet of the second set. 1st sheet of the second set.
2nd sheet of
the second set.

3-4. Eject clamp

• Paper is transported toward the Stacker Tray by the Compile Eject Roll and Compile Feed Roll, which are both
driven by the Compile Eject Motor.
• Paper transport status is detected by the Compile Exit Sensor.
• The Clamp section attached to the Compile Feed Roll is designed to move vertically. When it is raised, nipping
by the Compile Eject Roll and Compile Feed Roll is released.
• Vertical movement of the Clamp section is driven by the Eject Clamp Motor. The Clamp section raised position is
detected by the Eject UP Sensor.
• When the Eject Opening section opens, the Eject Safety SW turns OFF and cuts off the +24-VDC power supply
to the Staple Motor located inside the Stapler Head.
Feeding the first paper sheet

• For the first sheet of paper, the clamp will descend. The Eject Roll and Feed Roll will then send the paper toward
the Stacker Tray.
• When the trailing edge of paper passes the Compile Eject Sensor, the Eject Roll and Feed Roll rotate in reverse,
sending the paper toward the Compile Tray in the reverse direction.
Feeding the second and subsequent paper sheets

• For the second and subsequent paper sheets, the clamp lifts to block paper transport.
• Paper passing the Compile Eject Roll falls onto the Compile Tray.
Discharge of set paper

• The clamp descends and the Eject Roll and Feed Roll discharge paper toward the Stacker Tray.
Eject Motor
Eject Clamp Motor
Eject UP Sensor
Compile Eject Roll
Compile Eject Sensor
Compile Feed Roll

3-5. Shelf
• When a set of sheets is collected on the Compile Tray, the leading edge of each sheet extends toward the
Stacker Tray.
• The Shelf extends in the direction of the Stacker Tray to support the leading edge of the papers hanging out
from the Compile Tray. After a stapling operation is completed and just before a booklet is discharged to the
Stacker Tray, the Shelf retracts.
• The Shelf is driven by the Shelf Motor. The Shelf home position (stowed position) is detected by the Shelf Home
Sensor.
Shelf
Shelf Motor
Shelf Home Sensor
3-6. End Wall

• When a stapling operation is conducted, one set of sheets is collected on the Compile Tray.
The End Wall receives the trailing edges (side to be stapled) of the collected paper sheets.
• The End Wall opens and closes. This operation is driven by the End Wall Motor.
• The End Wall remains closed as paper sheets collect on the Compile Tray.
The closed status of the End Wall is detected by the End Wall Home Sensor.
• Before stapling is performed, the End Wall opens to prevent interference with the Stapler.
The open status of the End Wall is detected by the End Wall Open Sensor.

3-7. Paddles
Paper-pulling operation
• Paper sheets accumulated in the Compile Tray are pushed toward the End Wall by the rotating Compile Main
Paddle and Compile Sub Paddle.
These Paddles are rotated by the Paddle Motor.
• While the Compile Main Paddle always contacts the paper, the Sub Paddle is generally positioned not to contact
paper. The Paddle Support Clutch activates only when paper is transported to the Compile Tray.
The Paddle Motor rotates the shaft a single turn for the up/down motion to make the Sub Paddle contact the
paper. The Sub Paddle contacts the paper for this one rotation of the shaft.
The Sub Paddle home position (raised position) is detected by the Sub Paddle Home Sensor.
Paddle vertical operations

• The heights of the Compile Main Paddle and Compile Sub Paddle are adjusted based on the thickness of
the paper collected in the Compile Tray. Height adjustments are performed by the Compile Paddle Up/Down
Solenoid and Sub Paddle Up/Down Solenoid.
> The Paddles generally rise when there are 51 or more sheets, but this setting can be changed using Test Mode
No. 4756 "COMPILE UP LIMIT" for the Compile Main Paddle and Test Mode No. 4757 "SUB PADDLE UP
LIMIT" for the Compile Sub Paddle.
• If too many sheets collect in the Compile Tray, the leading edges of the paper may curl against the End Wall,
resulting in compilation failure.
To prevent this, after the 60th sheet, the Compile Main Paddle lifts and descends after every five sheets to press
against the leading edges of paper.
Paddle Motor Sub Paddle UP/DOWN Solenoid Sub Paddle Home Sensor
Compile Sub Paddle
Compile Main Paddle
Compile Paddle UP/DOWN Solenoid Paddle Support Clutch

3-8. Tamper
• When paper is received by the Compile Tray, the Tamper on the rear moves to the front to align the paper width-
wise. (The Tamper on the front is stationary.)
• The Tamper is driven by the Tamper Motor. The Tamper home position (the rearmost position) is detected by
the Tamper Home Sensor.
Tamper
< REAR >
< FRONT >
Tamper Home Sensor Tamper Motor

3-9. Stapler
• When paper sheets for a full booklet accumulate in the Compile Tray, the Stapler moves to the specified position
to staple the paper.
• During this operation, the End Wall remains open to prevent interference with the Stapler.
To keep paper from sliding down, the Eject Clamp section descends to keep the paper in place.
• The End Wall can open only when the Stapler is centered. The Stapler center position is detected by the Staple
Center Position Sensor.
• The Stapler is moved by the Staple Move Motor. The Stapler home position (forefront position) is detected by
the Staple Move Home Sensor.
• The rail on which the Stapler travels is curved on the front and rear to permit angled stapling at paper corners.
However, since the Tamper moves the paper to the front for stapling, angled stapling on the rear is possible only
on A3 or A4-wide-edge-fed paper. (The front-to-rear distance of the rail is equivalent to the length of the longer
side of an A4 sheet.)
• The stapling operation is driven by the Stapler Motor.
• The Low Staple Sensor detects whether the Stapler cartridge is set in the Stapler and also detects the low
amount of staplers left in the cartridge.
• The Staple Ready Sensor detects whether the tips of the staples reach the staple head.
• The Staple Home Sensor detects the home position of the staple clincher.
Staple Motor
Staple Home Sensor
Staple Ready Sensor
Low Staple Sensor

4. Disassembly
4-1. Removing the Main Paddle and Sub Paddle

> The Main Paddle and Sub Paddle must be replaced periodically as a pair (at the same time).
> To determine when to replace the Main Paddle and Sub Paddle, check the counters using Test Mode No. 4601
"STACKER SUB-PADDLE COUNT" and Test Mode No. 4602 "STACKER PADDLE COUNT".
(1) Remove the following covers.

• Finisher Rear Upper Cover
• Eject Cover
• Top Tray
Finisher Rear Upper Cover
Top Tray
Eject Cover
(2) Remove the Staple Inner Cover (black inner cover on the front Stapler section).
Staple Inner Cover

Main Paddle
(1) Unplug the connector attached to the Lower Exit Chute from the rear and release the wires from the wire
saddle and clamp.
Connector
Wire saddle & Clamp
(2) Fold the End Wall at the staple center position and move the Stapler Head to the rear.
(3) Remove the two mounting screws from the front and dismount the Lower Exit Chute.
> To prevent deformation of the Pinch Roll plate spring on the Lower Exit Chute assembly, avoid inverting the
Lower Exit Chute when putting it down.
Mounting screws
Pinch Roll
Main Paddle
Lower Exit Chute
(4) Remove the Paddles from the shaft.

> During reinstallation, insert the projection on the Paddle into the opening in the shaft.
> The front Paddle must be correctly oriented when reinstalled. Pay close attention to mounting orientation
when installing the front Paddle.
Center and rear Paddles are provided with black washers to prevent incorrect installation of the Paddles.

Sub Paddle
(1) Remove the KL-Clips (medium) from both ends of the Sub Paddle assembly and dismount the belt and pulley
on the assembly shaft on the rear side of the machine.
Remove belt and pulley
KL-Clip (medium)
(2) Remove the KL-Clips (small) from both sides of the links, detach the links from the shaft, and dismount the
Sub Paddle together with the shaft by sliding them toward the front.
Remove these Links
KL-Clip (small)

4-2. Removing the Punch Unit

(1) Remove the Punch Inner Cover located on the front. (2 screws)
Punch Inner Cover
Punch Box
(2) Remove the Punch Box.

(3) Remove the Entrance Roll unit. (2 screws)
Mounting screws of Entrance Roll

(4) Separate the wires connected to the Punch Unit located on the rear.
1 motor connector,
2 wire connectors &
1 wire harness
1 connector & 1 reusable band
2 connectors & 1 reusable band
(5) Separate the wires from the metal plate at the middle section of the Punch Unit. (2 clamps, 1 reusable band.)
(6) Remove the four mounting screws and dismount the Punch Unit.
2 screws on front, 2 screws on rear.
After installing the Punch Unit back on the Finisher, gently shake the Punch motor lightly, and confirm that the
bottom half of the Punch Unit swings freely, lightly. <The bottom half of the Punch Unit is in hanging state.>
If the Punch Unit does not swing at all, the Punch Unit is very likely to be installed incorrectly.
Check the clear plastic plate located at the entrance of the Punch Unit. If the Punch Unit is mounted on the
Finisher with this clear plastic plate riding over the Punch Unit, the Punch Unit will not operate correctly.

4-3. Removing the S1 Gate
(1) Remove the Punch Unit.

(2) Remove Folder Gate Solenoid 1 together with the bracket. (2 screws)
> If the screws are removed from the solenoid bracket by mistake, install the solenoid at the center of the scale.
Assembly positioning scale
Do not remove these screws
Remove these two screws
(3) Pull out the link from the rear and remove the S1 Gate.
Link Link S1 Gate

4-4. Removing the Eject Unit
(1) Separate the wires connected to the Eject Unit.

> Since some parts are designed to move vertically, do not allow wires to become too taut during reassembly.
Unplug the Clutch connector Release the wires from the clamps
Unplug the Motor connector Unplug the sensor connector and Unplug the Motor connector
undo wire harness from a clip
Unplug the Solenoid connector
Remove the sensor with the bracket Unplug the switch connectors
All the disconnected wires should be freed from all the Wire Harness Saddles.
< Refer to all the Light-Blue colored circles.>

(2) Loosen the Tensioner retaining screw and remove the belts.
Tensioner
Remove these two belts
(3) Detach the Bracket (1 screw) from the front and remove the two Eject Unit mounting screws.
Remove the Bracket
< FRONT >

Mounting screws
(4) Remove the two mounting screws from the rear.
< REAR >
Mounting screws
(5) The upper section of the Eject Unit hooks with the main unit at two locations. Lift the unit to unhook and
remove.

4-5. Removing the Compile Unit
(1) Separate the wires connected to the Compile Unit.

(2) Remove the clip from the pulley, detach the pulley, and take off the belt.
Unplug these
two intermediate
Undo wires from connectors
these clamps
Undo wires from

this wire clamp
(3) Loosen the Tensioner retaining screw and remove the belt.
Tensioner retaining screw
Tensioner
Remove this belt

(4) Bring the Stapler to the center position and fold the End Wall Assembly.
(5) Remove the four mounting screws and dismount the Compile Unit.
Mounting screws in the front
Mounting screws in the rear

4-6. Removing the Stapler Unit
> Described below is the procedure to remove the Stapler Unit including the Staple Move Motor and Railing.
To remove just the Stapler Head, remove the two screws shown in the below photograph and disconnect the
wires.
Remove these two screws
(1) Remove the Staple Inner Cover located on the front. (3 screws)
Staple Inner Cover
(2) Remove the Compile Unit. (Refer to page No. 24-54 of this Chapter.)
(3) Move the Stapler Head all the way to the front.
(4) Open the Wire Harness Cover.
This clear sheet is the

Wire Harness Cover

(5) Disconnect the ground wire located on the rear. Unplug the three connectors from the PWB (printed-wire
board), detach the reusable band, and disconnect one intermediate connector.
Ground wire
Reusable band
Intermediate connector
Unplug connectors of these 3 wires from PWB
(6) Remove the mounting screws (2 screws each) from front and rear, and remove the Stapler Unit.
> Note that there are two openings (round opening and elongated opening) for one of the two screws on front
and rear. The screws are generally installed in the round openings.
> Before removing the screws, inspect and note down whether they are installed in the round openings or
elongated openings.
If the screws are installed in the elongated openings, you must adjust the Stapler angle after reassembly.
< Front View >
< Rear View >
Stapler Stapler
Remove these two screws Remove these two screws
If the screw is set on this elongated hole, the Stapler

mounting position is assumed to be adjusted.
Therefore, re-adjustment is necessary after the assembly.

Stacker Tray section

1. Basic mechanism
Parts location
Stacker NO Paper Sensor Stacker Safety Switch Stacker Flap Motor
Mix Stack Sensor Half Stack Sensor
Elevator Motor Set Clamp Solenoid

Set Clamp
Stack Height Sensor 1
Tray Height Sensor Lower
Stack Height Sensor 2
Stacker Offset Motor

Lower Limit Stack Sensor
Full Stack Sensor Stacker Front Position Sensor

1-1. Offset output

• When paper is output to the Stacker Tray, the output offset function shifts the Stacker Tray position slightly for
each set of paper output.
• Without staple: 2 output positions at front and rear <Left & Right offset>
• With staple: 3 output positions at front, rear, and center <Left, Center, Right offset>
• Stacker Tray motions are achieved by the rotation of the cam driven by the Stacker Offset Motor.
This motor rotates in only one direction.
• The Stacker Tray stopping position is detected by the Stacker Front Position Sensor.
• This function keeps stacked paper from rising unevenly due to the thickness of the staples.
The offset sequence differs between rear stapling and other stapling locations.
REAR stapling Other than the REAR stapling
< FRONT > < REAR > < FRONT > < REAR >
Set Clamp Solenoid
1-2. Set Clamp Set Clamp

< UP >
The Set Clamp does up-and-down movement twice for each paper (non-stapled)
or each set of papers (stapled) ejected onto the Stacker Tray. The Set Clamp
movement is done by the Set Clamp Solenoid.
● The first time is immediately before the paper is ejected onto the Stacker Tray:
• This prevents paper on the tray from being pushed by the oncoming paper.
• The Set Clamp returns back to the retracted position before the trailing edge of
the transported paper passes.
Set Clamp
● The second time is immediately after the oncoming paper passes: < UP >
• This prevents the trailing end of the paper clear of the Paper Guide section by
pushing the trailing edge of the paper by the Set Clamp.
Set Clamp
< DOWN >
1-3. Stacker Tray Stacker NO Paper Sensor <actuator>
• The Stacker NO Paper Sensor detects the presence/absence of paper on the

Stacker Tray.
• To ensure safety, if any object presses once against the Stacker Tray Bottom
Cover, the Stacker Safety Switch activates and shuts down the 24 VDC power
supply to the Elevator Motor to stop the up-or-down movement of the Stacker
Tray.
• The base section of the Stacker Tray is provided with a Stacker Flap that is
moved up/down by the rotation of the Stacker Flap Motor.
Stacker Tray Bottom Cover
Overlapping staples caused by stapling small sheets may reduce the amount of
paper that can be stacked on the Stacker Tray. To maintain the holding capacity
of the Stacker Tray, the flap descends only when small paper sizes are output
with the stapling selected.
UP DOWN

1-4. Stacker Tray elevation operation

The Stacker Tray moves up or down based on the height of the paper on the tray. The Stacker Tray elevation
movement is driven by the Elevator Motor.
1-5. Sensors
To enable control of the Stacker Tray elevation operations, the following sensors detect the vertical position of the
Stacker Tray. < Refer to page No. 24-58 for the sketch on the location of the sensors.>
(1) Stack Height Sensors

When paper is discharged and stacked on the Stacker Tray during a print job, the Stacker Tray must elevate down
based on the amount of paper stacked on the tray.
For this purpose, a sensor detects the top surface of the paper stacked on the Stacker Tray.
This detection function is performed by one of the following two sensors:
• Stack Height Sensor 1
This sensor is used for normal operations.
• Stack Height Sensor 2
This sensor is used when the Stacker Flap (described on the previous page) is lowered.
(2) Tray Height Sensor Lower

The tray descends based on the amount of paper on the Stacker Tray during a print job. If discharged paper is
manually removed from the tray during a print job, the tray must be raised to adjust for the loss of height resulting
from removal of paper from the tray. The Tray Height Sensor Lower will detect the manual removal of paper from
the tray.
< The Elevator operation is activated based on the amount of paper in the tray.>
(1) At the start of a print job, the tray rises until the Stack Height Sensor light path is blocked, then descends until
the sensor detects light once again. (In other words, the sensor light path is not blocked during a print job.)
(2) If stacked paper blocks the Stack Height Sensor light path, the tray descends until the sensor detects light
once again (adjustment operation based on paper height).
(3) The light path of the Tray Height Sensor Lower is usually blocked, but manually removing stacked paper will
expose the sensor to light, prompting the operation described in (1).
(3) Stack Sensors

To detect the tray upper-limit/lower-limit positions and to restrict the amount of paper on the tray, the machine must
detect the position of the Stacker Tray itself. The position of the tray is detected by a combination of the following
four sensors:
• Mix Stack Sensor
• Half Stack Sensor Mix Stack Sensor
• Full Stack Sensor Half Stack Sensor
Full Stack Sensor
• Lower Limit Stack Sensor Lower Limit Stack Sensor
Mechanical upper limit. Upper Limit

Height Sens-or
Lower limit when different paper sizes are on Mix

the Tray.
Normal movement range of the Tray.
Lower limit when SEF papers are on the Tray. Half
Lower limit when LEF papers are on the Tray. Full
Mechanical lower limit. Lower Limit

Solid black indicates the sensor light
path status in blocked condition.

2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Set Clamp

(1) Remove the Spring, and detach the Spring Bracket. (1 screw)
Set Clamp
Remove the E-ring and the Gear Remove the Spring and Spring Bracket
(2) Remove the two E-ring and dismount the gear.

(3) Remove the Set Clamp together with the shaft by sliding toward the rear.
> When reinstalling the gear, align the Gear teeth on the Cam with the opening in the flange, as shown in the
photograph.
In this step, make sure the flange section of the Gear and Cam are positioned on the outside.
Match the Gear and Cam to the

opening of the flange

2-2. Removing the Stacker Tray Assembly

(1) Remove the Stacker Tray Bottom Cover by removing the E-rings and Spacers from the two locations.
> After these parts are reassembled, make sure that the Stacker Tray Bottom Cover moves up-and-down to
actuate the Stacker Safety Switch.
Remove these two E-rings and Spacers
Stacker Tray Cover
(2) Unplug the two connectors for wires connected to the Stacker Tray from the rear, and release the wires from
the wire harness saddles.
Connectors
Wire harness saddles

(3) Remove screw (1 pc) from the bottom of the Stacker Tray, dismount the Wire harness guide, and place the
wires inside the side plate. Then, remove the two reusable wire bands from the assembly.
Screw
Wire harness guide
(4) Remove the six mounting screws from the tray, loosen the two screws installed in the keyhole-shaped
openings, and dismount the tray.
> During reassembly, make sure the projection at the base tip of the tray enters the notched sections on the
Guide Plate on the Finisher.
> Note that the positions of the mounting screws for the brackets are not the same on the Front and Rear.
< Refer to the photographs below.>
> Reassemble the Stacker Tray by following the procedures described below.
> Install the Rear bracket first. This is because the mounting screws for the Rear bracket fit in fixed position
only, while the Front bracket uses the elongated holes.
> To install the Front bracket, push it to inside all the way, and then slide it back to outside for approximately
1 mm to bring it to the proper installation position.
Projections and notches.
FRONT REAR

Booklet section
1. Basic mechanism
Parts location
Tamper Home Sensor (Rear) Booklet Tamper Motor Booklet IN Roll
Booklet IN Sensor
Booklet Paper
Path Motor
Tamper
Booklet Fold Motor

Tamper Home
Sensor (Front)
Knife Folding Sensor

Booklet Eject Roll
Knife Solenoid
Folding Roll
Knife Home Sensor
Booklet Set Sensor
Booklet Compile NO Paper Sensor Knife Booklet Pre-Folding Roll

Booklet End Guide Motor
Paddle
Booklet End Guide Home Sensor
Booklet Paddle Motor
Booklet End Guide
1-1. Paper feed

• In booklet production or 2-fold operations, paper passing the Puncher section reaches the S1 Gate where the
paper is routed toward the Booklet section via the Booklet IN Roll.
• Paper transported to the Booklet section is transported by the Booklet Exit Roll until the leading edge of the
paper contacts the End Guide.
• The vertical operation of the End Guide is performed by the Booklet End Guide Motor, and the End Guide home
position is detected by the Booklet End Guide Home Sensor.
1-2. Tamper operation

• Each time a paper is sent to the Tamper section, the front and rear Tampers slide inward to align the paper.
During the printing operation, the Paddle rotates continually to align the paper edges against the End Guide.
• The Paddle is driven by the Booklet Paddle Motor.
• The front and rear Tampers are driven by the Booklet Tamper Motors Front/Rear, and the home positions of the
Tampers are detected by the Booklet Tamper Home Sensors Front/Rear.
• After the last sheet of paper is aligned, the paper alignment operation is performed once again by the Tampers.
A set of papers is then laterally centered.
• For booklet production, the subsequent folding operation is performed after the set number of sheets are
collected in the Tamper section whether or not stapling is performed. For single-sheet 2-folds, however, paper
is folded one at a time.

1-3. Stapling and folding operations
• The End Guide lifts to the staple position to perform stapling.

Stapling is performed at a position below the fold position.
• The End Guide lifts the paper to the fold position.
• The Knife moves, and the Booklet Pre-Folding Roll and Booklet Folding Roll fold papers in sequence while the
set of paper is transported.
The Knife extension and retraction movement is performed by one full rotation of the gear, which is engaged
when the Knife Solenoid activates.
To confirm proper operation of the Knife, the extended position of the Knife is detected by the Knife Folding
Sensor, and the retracted position is detected by the Knife Home Sensor.
• Then, the set of paper is discharged toward the Booklet Tray by the Booklet Eject Roll.
• The paper transport status is detected by the Booklet IN Sensor, Booklet Compile NO Paper Sensor, Booklet
Folder Roll Exit Sensor, and Booklet Tray NO Paper Sensor, all of which are located along the paper path.
> Although a single folding operation is performed in the default setting, you can adjust the number of folding
operations using Test Mode No. 4776 "FOLDING TIME".
Note that increasing the number of folding operations can improve folding results, but slows down the
processing speed.
> The maximum number of paper sheets processed by the Booklet section is 15 sheets if the paper is stapled
and 5 sheets if the paper is not stapled. You can change these limit settings using Test Mode No. 4771
"Max Booklet Stapling" and Test Mode No. 4772 "Max Booklet Non-stapling".
Note that increasing the maximum number of sheets can result in lower quality folding precision, reduced
staple strength, or stapling failures.

1-4. Booklet Tray operation
• The Booklet Tray is positioned below the paper outlet. Each time a set of paper is discharged, the Paper
Transfer Belts rotate for a preset duration to offset each set of paper slightly.
• The Paper Transfer Belts are driven by the Tray Belt Drive Motor.
• If the end tip of the tray is tilted down, the output booklets automatically falls down from the tray for continuous
booklet ejection.
• To remove the booklets, press the Booklet Tray Belt SW on the Finisher to rotate the Paper Transfer Belts to the
paper removal position.
(After a print job is completed, the Paper Transfer Belts automatically rotate to move the last booklet to the
removal position.)
For this to be active, the Test Mode No.4751 "BOOKLET BELT SETTING" needs to be set to [1].
If set to [0], this function is disabled.
End tip of the Tray, when folded down,

enables the booklets to drop down from
Booklet Eject Roll Booklet Folder Roll Exit Sensor the tray and feed out continuously.
Tray Belt Motor Booklet NO Paper Sensor Paper Transfer Belt

2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Paddle Shaft Assembly

> The Paddles must be replaced at regular intervals. Check the counter using Test Mode No. 4603 "BOOKLET
PADDLE COUNT" to determine when to replace the Paddles.
(1) Pull out the Booklet Drawer Unit.
(2) Remove the KL-Clip from the shaft of the Paddle Shaft Assembly.
Remove this KL-Clip and slide this Metal Bushing Paddle Shaft Assembly
(3) Slide the bearing metal and dismount the Paddle Shaft Assembly.
(4) After replacing the Paddle Shaft Assembly, check to make sure that each Paddle is installed at the correct
position.
34.8 ± 0.3 mm
88.8 ± 0.3 mm
9.2 ± 0.3 mm

2-2. Removing the Stapler Assembly

(1) Pull out the Stapler Unit.
Press the stopper on the right-hand-side rail and pull the Stapler Unit further out.
(1) Stopper
(2) Remove the two mounting screws on the left-hand-side railing and dismount the Stapler Unit.
Mounting screws on the left-hand-side railing

2-3. Removing the Knife

(1) Remove the Booklet Unit from the Finisher main unit. (Refer to page No. 24-21 of this Chapter.)
(2) Remove the Left Cover. (Remove 1 upper screw and loosen 2 lower screws.)
Left Cover
1 screw to remove
Booklet Unit
2 screws to loosen
(3) Remove the four mounting screws (wood screws) of the white resin guide on the Knife, then turn over the
Knife.
> The ridges on the resin parts are shallow. Take care to avoid compressing the ridges during reinstallation.
> Be sure to reinstall using the original screws.
Mounting screws of the Knife to the white resin guides
(4) Remove the two mounting screws (ordinary screws) from the shaft of the Knife and dismount the Knife.
> The Knife has front and back surface. The ribbed side of the Knife should face up when completely installed.
> Be sure to reinstall using the original screws.
> The Knife requires high dimensional precision. When removing and reinstalling the Knife, work carefully to
avoid deforming the Knife.
Once the Knife shape is distorted, it is almost impossible to correct any deformation on the Knife.
Turn over the Knife to remove these two screws

2-4. Removing the Tamper Unit

(1) Remove the Booklet Unit from the Finisher main unit. (Refer to page No. 24-21 of this Chapter.)
(2) Fully open the Tampers at both ends before initiating the removal procedure.
> If the Knife is extended out while the Tampers are positioned toward the inside, the Knife contacts the Tampers
and may cause the Tampers to break and Knife to deform.
(3) Remove 1 screw (wood screw) from the shaft of the 4a Knob and remove the 4a Knob.
4a Knob
(4) Remove one E-ring and bearing from the shaft in which the 4a Knob was removed. Then by removing the
four mounting screws (ordinary screws), detach the Front Cover of the Booklet Unit.
Front Cover
Mounting screws
(5) Remove the two mounting screws of the Motor cover plate (on the rear of the unit) and remove the Motor
cover plate.
Motor cover plate

(6) Detach the spring and remove the spring bracket by unscrewing the single screw (ordinary screw).
Remove the Spring and Spring Bracket.
(7) Unplug the connectors of the Booklet Fold Motor and Knife Solenoid and release the wires from the clip.
Unplug the connector and

undo wire harness from a clip.
(8) Remove the two KL-Clips and four screws (ordinary screws) and dismount the bracket.
> Take care to avoid dropping the bearing. The flanged section of the bearing should face toward the outside.
> Note that the movable metal plate of the solenoid, mounted on the back side of the bracket, may fall off if it
contacts the gear. If it falls off, equipment malfunctions may occur.
KL-Clip
Mounting screws
KL-Clip CAUTION:
This portion may come loose
if touched while working.
Mounting screws

(9) Remove the E-ring and dismount the black gear for the Knife and also the white gear shown in the photo.
> make care to avoid dropping the pin when removing the black gear for the Knife.
> During reassembly, pay attention to the installation position of the black gear. (Make sure the gear is not
inverted [turned 180 degrees].)
Remove these two gears
The opening on the black gear should meet with

the white gear when the Knife is in the returned
position (the Knife is out of the Pre-folding roll).
(10) Unplug the connector for the Booklet Paper Path Motor, remove the four screws, and dismount the motor and
gear unit.
Remove the Booklet paper path motor
Mounting screws of the unit

(11) Release the wires, referring to the following photo.
Remove two wire clips from the plate Unplug 2 motor connectors and undo the wires from the clip
Unplug 3 sensor connectors and undo the wires from the clip, etc.
(12) Slide the front Tamper all the way inside. Slide the rear Tamper inside until it contacts the front Tamper.
Position the Tampers to the opening in the plate so that the Tamper tips do not contact the plate of the Booklet
Exit Roll.
Opening on the plate
Bring the two Tampers to the position

shown on the photograph.
Follow the instructions on the next page
to tilt and remove the Tamper unit out
from the opening.
Tip of the two Tampers

(13) Remove the four mounting screws located on both ends and remove the Tamper Unit by tilting it slightly.
> Caution !
The Knife must be positioned accurately relative to the Pre-Folding Roll. Note that the stay for the Knife Unit
is Factory adjusted.
Do not remove the screws on the front or rear (indicated in the photo).
Remove 2 screws each from the Front and Rear of the unit.
Remove the Tamper

Unit by tilting it toward
this way.
Do not touch these Screws !
CAUTION:
Never remove these two screws, on the Front and Rear of the unit, holding the Knife Unit Stay.

2-5. Removing the Folding Roll and Pre-Folding Roll

(1) Perform Tamper Unit removal procedure steps (1) through (10). <Refer to pages 24-71 to 24-73 of this Chapter.>
(2) From the REAR of the unit, remove the E-rings and dismount 1 White gear and 4 Black gears.
Remove
1 White gear
4 Black gears
(3) Remove the E-ring and dismount 1 Black gear.
Remove this black gear
(4) Remove the Springs of the Folding Roll and Pre-Folding Roll.
> The pressure of the Pre-Folding Roll Spring can be adjusted to one of three settings by changing the spring
anchor position. By default, the spring is set for the weakest pressure.
> Increasing pressure results in firmer paper folding but increases the potential for wrinkled paper.
Remove these two Springs
Default position to hook the Spring

< the weakest position >

(5) Remove 1 E-ring from the Folding Roll and 3 E-rings from the Pre-Folding Roll.
Dismount the four bearings.
Remove 4 E-rings and 4 bearings
(6) Repeat the same removal procedure on the FRONT of the unit.
(7) Remove the E-ring on the FRONT of the unit and dismount the gear, Pre-Folding Roll Lever, Spacer, and
Folding Roll Lever.
Pre-Folding Roll Lever Remove E-ring and remove the gear Folding Roll Lever
(8) Remove the Folding Roll and Pre-Folding Roll.

> For both pairs of rollers, the roller with the flanged metal shaft should be positioned on the top.
Pre-Folding Roll
Folding Roll

Adjustment
1. Staple and Fold position adjustments in the Booklet section
Perform fold adjustments in the Booklet section in the following sequence:

1) Fold skew adjustment.
2) Staple position adjustment against the fold position, and the Fold position adjustment.
3) Lateral staple position adjustment.
Use following guide for the Fold position and Stapling position adjustments :
< REAR >
Fold back
120 mm ±1.0 mm
X ±1.0 mm
A < FRONT >
± 1.0 mm
A = [ With Staple ] The value of X on above sketch

A4/Letter: 1.5 mm or less is given on the table below.
Other sizes: 2.0 mm or less
Paper size Dimension (mm) X (mm)
[Without Staple]
Letter SEF 215.9 42.5
All sizes: 2.5 mm or less
Letter-Cover SEF 228.6 48.8
A4 SEF 210 39.5
A4R-Cover SEF 223 46
Custom A4 SEF 226 47.5
Spanish SEF 215 42
8.5 x 13 SEF 215.9 42.5
8.5 x 14 SEF 215.9 42.5
11 x 15 SEF 279.4 74.2
B4 SEF 257 63.0
8-kai (TFX) SEF 267 68.0
8-kai (GCO) SEF 270 69.5
A3 SEF 297 83.0
11 x 17 SEF 279.4 74.2

1-1. Fold skew adjustment
> This adjustment is a mechanical adjustment and is not affected by the paper size, number of sheets per
booklet, with or without staples.
(1) Perform printing or print test pattern to check for fold inclination. (Dimension A and dimension B in the
diagram must be equal.)
> This adjustment is a mechanical adjustment. Dimension A does not need to be equal to dimension C at this
stage of the adjustment.
C A
BOTTOM
Fold back
TOP
B
Eject direction
(2) If the fold line is skewed, pull out the Booklet Unit, loosen the screw indicated in the photo, then slide the
adjustment lever to the right or left to adjust the skew of the End Guide.
> If dimension A exceeds dimension B, move the lever toward the FRONT.
> Moving the lever one line on the guide scale varies the fold position by approximately 1 mm (in the case of A3
SEF).
Loosen this screw
End Guide Slide the Lever side-ways to make the fold skew adjustment.

1-2. Staple position adjustment against the fold position, and the Fold position adjustment.
> Make this adjustment after completing the Fold Skew Adjustment described on the previous page.
> This adjustment is done by the Test Mode setting. Adjustments are made separately for the various
parameters (with/without staples, paper size, and number of sheets per booklet).
< Without staples >

(1) Perform printing or print test pattern to check fold position deviations. (Dimension A and dimension B in the
diagram must be equal.)
REAR
TOP
Eject direction
A
BOTTOM
FRONT
B
(2) If the dimension A does not equal to B, Fold Position Adjustment must be made.
• The adjustment is made by changing the parameters by the Test Modes.
>There are 4 different Test Mode adjustments, depending on the paper size and quantity of sheets per fold, as
given below in the chart of the Test Modes.
• In the case of A > B, reduce the Test Mode parameter setting. In the case of A < B, increase the Test Mode
parameter setting.
Value of <1> changes the folding position 0.1 mm → the difference between A and B would then be 0.2 mm.
ComColor
Multipurpose HC Finisher Description
Item Type
Finisher < as Reference> ( program default setting is in < > )
Test Mode No. Test Mode No.
Setting range:
Fold Position Adjustment in
4752 763-232 D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
2-fold (B4 paper or Larger).
< 100 >
Setting range:
Fold Position Adjustment in
2-fold (Smaller than B4 paper).
< 100 >
Fold Position Adjustment for Setting range:

4773 763-253 Two-sheet Folding for Booklet D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
Production (without staples). < 100 >
Fold Position Adjustment for

Setting range:
Three or More-sheet Folding
for Booklet Production (without
< 100 >
staples).

< With staple >

(1) Perform printing or print test pattern to check for fold position deviation and staple position deviations.
• Dimension A and dimension B in the diagram must be equal.
• The staple position must align with the fold position.
> Check the staple position deviation by determining whether the staples are on the fold of the papers.
REAR
STAPLE:
The staples are shifted too far up on the
paper on this drawing.
TOP
A
Eject direction
BOTTOM
FRONT
B
(2) If fold position or staple position deviations are noticed, adjust the Test Mode parameter settings.
< For the actual adjustment procedure, refer to the next page.>
> The Test Mode Numbers differ for number of sheets per booklet, paper size, fold position adjustment and
staple position adjustment.
• In the case of A > B, reduce the Test Mode parameter setting. In the case of A < B, increase the Test Mode
parameter setting.
Value of <1> changes the folding position 0.1 mm → the difference between A and B would then be 0.2 mm.
• If the staple positions are shifted too far up on the paper as shown in the diagram, reduce the Test Mode
parameter setting.
Value of <1> changes the stapling position 0.1 mm.
(3) Perform the adjustments in the following sequence:

> Be sure to complete the staple position adjustment before performing the fold position adjustment.
The staple position should be adjusted to the fold, in regardless to the fold position on the paper.
< The staple position will automatically follow the fold position when the fold position is adjusted the next.>
Step 1: Adjust the Staple positions for 2 sheets. <Separate adjustment for paper size above B4 or smaller.>
Step 2: Adjust the Fold position for 2 sheets. <Separate adjustment for paper size above B4 or smaller.>
Step 3: Adjust the Staple positions for 15 sheets. <Separate adjustment for paper size above B4 or smaller.>
• The Staple and Fold positions for 3 to 14 sheets will automatically be adjusted when above 3 adjustments
are made.
(4) Though the adjustments by above (3) automatically adjusts the Staple and Fold positions for 3 or more sheets,
make separate fine adjustments (staple positions and/or fold positions) as needed for 3 sheets and above.
< Refer to the Next Page for the list of the Test Modes.>

< Paper Size Smaller than B4 >
ComColor
Item Type
Staple position adjustment for Setting range:
4769 763-249 2 sheets. D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
(smaller than B4 paper) < 100 >
Fold position adjustment for 2 Setting range:
4767 763-247 sheets. D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
< Paper Size B4 or Larger >
ComColor
Item Type
(B4 or larger paper) < 100 >
4766 763-246 sheets. D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)

< Paper Size B4 or Larger >
ComColor
Item Type
Setting range:
Staple position adjustment for
3 sheets.
< 100 >
Setting range:
4 sheets.
< 100 >
Setting range:
5 to 7 sheets.
< 100 >
Setting range:
8 to 14 sheets.
< 100 >
Fold position fine adjustment Setting range:
4889 763-369 for 3 sheets (smaller than B4 D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
paper). < 100 >
4909 763-389 for 3 sheets (B4 or larger D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
paper). < 100 >
4890 763-370 for 4 sheets (smaller than B4 D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
paper). < 100 >
4910 763-390 for 4 sheets (B4 or larger D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
paper). < 100 >
4891 763-371 to 7 sheets (smaller than B4 D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
paper). < 100 >
Fold position adjustment for Setting range:
4911 763-391 5 to 7 sheets (B4 or larger D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
paper). < 100 >
4892 763-372 to 14 sheets (smaller than B4 D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
paper). < 100 >
Fold position adjustment for Setting range:
4912 763-392 8 to 14 sheets (B4 or larger D 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm)
paper). < 100 >

1-3. Staple position adjustment in lateral direction.
> Make this adjustment after completing the Fold Skew Adjustment.
> The two Stapler mechanisms in the Booklet section are mechanically in fixed in position, and perform stapling
operations after paper sheets for one booklet are aligned and centered. This adjustment is performed by
changing the parameters by Test Mode, and the adjustment itself is to adjust the lateral centering of the papers.
< One adjustment applies to all paper sizes. Therefore, individual adjustments for different paper sizes is not
required.>
(1) Perform printing or print test pattern to check for staple position deviations in the lateral direction.
< Measure dimension X indicated in the following diagram.>
REAR
Value X depends on the paper size use in adjustment.
< Refer to the chart below.>
Paper size Dimension (mm) X (mm)

Letter SEF 215.9 42.5
Letter-Cover SEF 228.6 48.8
A4 SEF 210 39.5
A4R-Cover SEF 223 46
Custom A4 SEF 226 47.5
X Spanish SEF 215 42
8.5 x 13 SEF 215.9 42.5

FRONT 8.5 x 14 SEF 215.9 42.5
11 x 15 SEF 279.4 74.2
B4 SEF 257 63.0
8-kai (TFX) SEF 267 68.0
8-kai (GCO) SEF 270 69.5
A3 SEF 297 83.0
11 x 17 SEF 279.4 74.2
(2) If there is a staple position deviation, adjust the parameters using Test Mode.
• Enter the parameter shown in the table below using Test Mode No. 4879 [Booklet Tamper Shift Adjustment].
• To reduce dimension X, reduce the parameter number.
ComColor
Item Type
Increasing the Test Mode parameter number

will slide the staple position to the FRONT.
< Reduces the X value on the above sketch.>
Booklet Tamper Shift
4879 763-359 D
Adjustment
Setting range:
0 to 50 pulses (1 pulse = 0.2618 mm)
< 30 >

2. Punch position adjustment

> The adjustment is made by changing the parameter settings on Test Modes.
> Separate adjustments must be made for each paper size.
(1) Perform printing or print test pattern to check for punch position deviations.
(2) If punch position deviation is detected, adjust the Test Mode parameters.
• Increasing the Test Mode parameter value moves the punch position toward the REAR.
NOTE:
The puncher pin pitches are mechanically fixed for 2/4 and 3/4 punch holes. Therefore the punch hole pitches
cannot be adjusted.
REAR REAR
A ± 3 mm
B ± 3 mm
FRONT FRONT
Specifications
Paper size Dimension A (mm) Dimension B (mm)

A4 SEF 65.0
Letter SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF 67.95
A3 SEF, A4 LEF 108.5 28.5
11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF 99.7 19.7
B4 SEF, B5 LEF 88.5
List of Test modes
ComColor HC Finisher Range

Multipurpose < as Reference> Program
Finisher Item Default
Unit/Step (min./ Description
Test Mode No. max.)
Test Mode No.
Punch registration adjustment.
PUNCH SIDE
4733 763-213 REGI ADJ1
97 1 = 0.125 mm 10–170 Punch registration adjustment for paper
width of 297 mm.
2/3 Puncher:
PUNCH SIDE
4734 763-214 REGI ADJ2
85 1 = 0.125 mm 10–170 203 mm ≤ paper width ≤ 285 mm
2/4 Puncher:
216 mm < paper width ≤ 285 mm
2/4 Puncher:
PUNCH SIDE
4735 763-215 REGI ADJ3
86 1 = 0.125 mm 10–170 Adjusts the position in the direction of
the punch hole side registration when
203 mm < paper width ≤ 216 mm.

4. Staple position adjustment
4-1. Staple angle position adjustment

> This is a mechanical adjustment.
(1) Perform printing or print test pattern to check for staple position deviations.
Specification for the staple position is shown on the sketch, below:
A = B = 6.0 ± 2.0 mm
(2) Make the necessary mechanical adjustments if deviation is observed in the staple position, referring to the
photographs and explanations given on this page and next page.
• If the stapling is slanted in an angle: < The Stapler Rail is slanted.>
A > B or A < B if the Stapler Rail

is slanted the other way.
B
If the stapled positions are slanted (measurement

A differs from that of B), move this screw (either
the one in the FRONT or one on the REAR) into
the elongated hole to allow the Stapler Rail to
straighten.
Elongated hole used for the adjustment.

Available 1 in FRONT and 1 in REAR.
Use either one of the elongated hole to straighten
the Rail alignment -- do not use both.

• If the staple position is not at 6.0 ± 2.0 mm < The Stapler is not mounted
square on its base.>
A A
A = B < 6.0 mm
OR A = B > 6.0 mm
B B
This mounting screw is already in an elongated

screw hole.
When moving the other mounting screw to the
elongated screw hole on the LEFT, this screw on
the RIGHT must be loosened and then tightened at
the correct position.
If both the staples A and B are stapled straight,

but if A and B measurements both need to be
adjusted together, the mounting position of the
Stapler Unit to the Base needs to be adjusted.
Remove this screw out and re-screw it into the

elongated hole, and adjust the mounting position
of the Stapler Unit until the desired
The Elongated Hole used for the Stapler Unit alignment adjustment.
The default Stapler fixed position screw holes. Stapler position adjustment screw holes.

4-2. Staple position adjustment

> The adjustment is made by changing the parameter settings of the Test Modes.
> Separate adjustments must be made for each paper size and stapling layout.
(1) Perform printing or print test pattern to check for staple position deviations.
(2) If staple position deviations are observed, adjust the Test Mode parameters.
• Increasing the setting value moves the staple positions toward the rear.
REAR
291.7 ± 3.0 mm
142.0 ± 3.0 mm
B ± 2.0 mm
FRONT
A ± 2.0 mm
Specifications
Paper size Dimension A (mm) Dimension B (mm)

8 x 10 SEF 23.85 197.2
A4 SEF 27.25 204
8.5 x 11 SEF 30.2 209.9
A4 Cover SEF 33.75 204
Custom A4 SEF 35.25 220
9 x 11 SEF 36.55 222.6
8 x 10 LEF 49.25 248
B5 LEF, B4 SEF 50.75 251
Executive LEF 55.75 261
8.5/9 x 11 LEF, 11 x 15/17 SEF 61.95 273.4
A4/A4 Cover LEF, A3 SEF 70.75 291
List of Test Modes
ComColor HC Finisher
Multipurpose < as Program Range
Finisher Reference> Item Default
Unit/Step
(min./max.)
Description

Adjusts the rear staple
REAR STAPLE One pulse is position for paper width
4743 763-223 POSITION 1
100
0.157 mm
50–150 pulses
over 250 mm. (for other
than A4LEF and A3SEF).
Adjusts the rear staple
REAR STAPLE One pulse is
4749 763-229 POSITION 2
100
0.157 mm
50–150 position (for A4LEF and
A3SEF).
DUAL STAPLE Specifies the amount of
One pulse is
4875 763-355 FRONT MOVE 20
0.157 mm
0–40 adjustment toward the
ADJUSTMENT front during dual stapling.
Specifies the amount
DUAL STAPLE
One pulse is of adjustment of the
4876 763-356 PITCH 20
0.157 mm
0–40
staple pitch during dual
ADJUSTMENT
stapling.
Adjusts the rear stapling
position when paper 250
REAR STAPLE One pulse is
4900 763-380 ADJUSTMENT
100
0.157 mm
50–150 mm or narrower is used.
(Other than A4LEF and
A3SEF.)

MEMO

Comcolor x1 Tech Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Comcolor x1 Tech Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Comcolor x1 Tech Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Maintenance

Chapter 1. Maintenance Notes

[ Handling of Lithium Battery ].............................................................. 1-2

[ 1-1 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

1. Never let the battery short-circuited.

2. Never heat up the battery.

3. Never disassemble the battery or press it into deformation.

4. Never fail to keep the battery out of reach of children.

[ Replacement of the Lithium Battery ]

Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply,

[ 1-2 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

The Main Power Lamp is still lit after

Press the Sub Power Key, after

Power Supply Unit

Electric Shock Hazard Symbol

[ 1-3 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

(4) Always connect electrical connectors firmly.

2) Protection of the electrical components:

(5) Warning on the disposal of LCD Touch Panel.

[ 1-4 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

1-2.Special precautions for color inkjet printers

[ 1-5 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

[ 1-6 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

1-3.Other precautions for inspection and maintenance

Precautions for reinstallation and reassembly

Precautions for electrical work

[ 1-7 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

Magnetic sensor types

[ 1-8 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

2-1.List of general tools

Type Tip size Shaft length, etc.

High frequency driver 2.5 mm

Steel scale 150 mm

Radial cutting pliers

Soldering iron 20 W–30 W

File Flat type, round type

[ 1-9 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

2-2.List of special tools for servicing ComColor

ComColor lifting JIG.

Lint-free paper towel

Powder-free plastic gloves

[ 1-10 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

IJ Matte Paper (A3 or Ledger size)

Safety switch connector jig

5.5mm box wrench

5.5mm wrench 5.5mm and 7.0mm can be in one

[ 1-11 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

Long screw driver or Rachet wrench

Normal millimeter size screw driver with one-

Metal ruler (with the width less than 15mm).

Feeler gauge in millimeter thickness.

4mm diameter shafts (2 pieces).

[ 1-12 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

Print head positioning jig

Plastic tube clamp

Wrist band (static electricity remover)

[ 1-13 ] ComColor Series (Revision 2.4)

Canon LiDE Scanner

Strong large magnet